diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77820-0.txt | 13146 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77820-h/77820-h.htm | 15991 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77820-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 0 -> 946889 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77820-h/images/frontispiece.jpg | bin | 0 -> 97566 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77820-h/images/map1.jpg | bin | 0 -> 99324 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77820-h/images/map2.jpg | bin | 0 -> 81204 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77820-h/images/map3.jpg | bin | 0 -> 79409 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77820-h/images/victoria.jpg | bin | 0 -> 33496 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
11 files changed, 29153 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/77820-0.txt b/77820-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..085d27e --- /dev/null +++ b/77820-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,13146 @@ +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 77820 *** +Transcriber’s Note: In keeping with the author’s note that “Such +misspellings as a Spanish scholar will readily recognize as the blunders +of the Spanish printer I have not thought it necessary to notice”, errors +in the Spanish parts of the text have been left as printed. Some evident +blunders of the English printer have, however, been corrected. + + + + + WORKS ISSUED BY + The Hakluyt Society. + + SELECT + LETTERS OF + CHRISTOPHER COLUMBUS, + ETC. + + M.DCCC.LXX. + + + + +INSTRUCTIONS TO BINDER. + + +Portrait of S. Christopher to face Title. + +Herrera’s map and Bahama Islands, modern, opposite each other, between +pp. lx and lxi; the first at top, the second at bottom, both reading the +same way. + +Juan de la Cosa’s map to face page lxiii. + + + + +[Illustration] + + + + + SELECT + LETTERS + OF + CHRISTOPHER COLUMBUS, + WITH OTHER ORIGINAL DOCUMENTS, + RELATING TO HIS + FOUR VOYAGES + TO + THE NEW WORLD. + + TRANSLATED AND EDITED BY + R. H. MAJOR, F.S.A., ETC., + KEEPER OF THE DEPARTMENT OF MAPS AND CHARTS IN THE BRITISH MUSEUM, + AND HON. SEC. OF THE ROYAL GEOGRAPHICAL SOCIETY. + + Second Edition. + + “Tu spiegherai, Colombo, a un novo polo + Lontane sì le fortunate antenne, + Ch’ a pena seguirà con gli occhi il volo + La Fama ch’ ha mille occhi e mille penne. + Canti ella Alcide e Bacco, e di te solo + Basti a’ posteri tuoi ch’alquanto accenne; + Chè quel poco darà lunga memoria + Di poema dignissima e d’ istoria.” + + _Tasso.—Gerusalemme Liberata._ Canto xv, 32. + + LONDON: + PRINTED FOR THE HAKLUYT SOCIETY. + M.DCCC.LXX. + + T. RICHARDS, 37, GREAT QUEEN STREET. + + + + +COUNCIL OF THE HAKLUYT SOCIETY. + + +SIR RODERICK IMPEY MURCHISON, BART., K.C.B., G.C.St.S., F.R.S., F.R.G.S., +D.C.L., Mem. Imp. Acad. Sc. St. Petersburgh, Corr. Mem. Inst. Fr. etc., +etc., PRESIDENT. + + REAR-ADMIRAL C. R. DRINKWATER BETHUNE, C.B., } VICE-PRESIDENTS. + THE RIGHT HON. SIR DAVID DUNDAS, } + REV. G. P. BADGER, F.R.G.S. + J. BARROW, ESQ., F.R.S. + E. H. BUNBURY, ESQ. + LORD ALFRED CHURCHILL. + REAR-ADMIRAL R. COLLINSON, C.B. + SIR WALTER ELLIOTT, K.S.I. + GENERAL C. FOX. + W. E. FRERE, ESQ. + CAPTAIN J. G. GOODENOUGH, R.N. + CHARLES GREY, ESQ. + EGERTON VERNON HARCOURT, ESQ. + JOHN WINTER JONES, ESQ., F.S.A. + R. H. MAJOR, ESQ., F.S.A. + SIR CHARLES NICHOLSON, BART. + SIR WILLIAM STIRLING MAXWELL, BART. + MAJOR-GENERAL SIR HENRY C. RAWLINSON, K.C.B. + THE LORD STANLEY OF ALDERLEY. + + CLEMENTS R. MARKHAM, ESQ., HONORARY SECRETARY. + + + + + TO + THE HONOURED AND BELOVED + MEMORY + OF HIS EXCELLENCY + THE COUNT DE LAVRADIO, + LATE + ENVOY EXTRAORDINARY AND MINISTER PLENIPOTENTIARY OF + HIS MOST FAITHFUL MAJESTY + AT THE COURT OF ST. JAMES’S, + ETC., ETC., ETC., + A WARM APPRECIATOR OF + THE EXALTED MERITS OF + COLUMBUS, + THE FOLLOWING PAGES + ARE REVERENTLY INSCRIBED BY + THE EDITOR. + + + + +PREFACE. + + +It has been thought desirable by some of the leading members of our +Council that I should avail myself of the opportunity offered by this +second Edition of the _Select Letters of Columbus_, to lay before the +Society a correspondence in which I have endeavoured to vindicate the +character of the Society’s early productions, and especially the first +edition of this work, from a most unjustifiable attack made upon them by +Mr. Froude in the _Westminster Review_ in 1852, and _repeated_ in the +second volume of that gentleman’s _Short Studies on Great Subjects_, +printed in 1867, and _reprinted_ in a popular edition in the same year. +The letters themselves will convey to the reader the whole of the facts, +minus only the bitterness and ferocity of Mr. Froude’s attack. + +_The Athenæum, July 13th, 1867._ + + “British Museum, July 3rd, 1867. + + “Will you allow me to appeal against a wrong done to the + Hakluyt Society in general, and to myself in particular, in a + work now very extensively read? + + “In the second volume of Mr. Froude’s _Short Studies on + Great Subjects_, at page 102, is an article on ‘England’s + Forgotten Worthies,’ in which the author makes an attack on + the Hakluyt Society, the bitter expressions of which need not + be repeated here. It is headed by the titles of three of the + Society’s early publications, and the first he states to be + _The Observations of Sir Richard Hawkins, Knt., in his Voyage + in the South Sea in 1593_. Reprinted from the edition of 1622, + and _edited by R. H. Major, Esq., of the British Museum_; + whereas I had nothing to do with the editing of that work. + This done, at page 108, Mr. Froude says: ‘_The Editor of the + Letters of Columbus_ (which I did edit in 1847) _apologizes + for the rudeness of the old seaman’s phraseology. Columbus, he + tells us, was not so great a master of the pen as of the art of + navigation. We are to make excuses for him. We are put on our + guard, and, warned not to be offended, before we are introduced + to the sublime record of sufferings under which a man of the + highest order was staggering towards the end of his earthly + calamities; although the inarticulate fragments in which his + thought breaks out from him, are strokes of natural art, by + the side of which literary pathos is poor and meaningless._’ + I warmly deny that I apologized for Columbus’s language. So + far from it, I repeatedly expressed my sympathy with and + admiration of his manly and touching record of his sufferings. + What I did apologize for was any mischievous result which might + possibly have accrued, though I do not think it did accrue, to + my own diction from that occasional want of connectedness in + the original which I had to contend with in translating. The + two things are manifestly different, and it is not pleasant + to find the reader’s highest sympathies appealed to in order + to bring down greater condemnation on me for a fault that I + had never committed. But I should not trouble you with such + a personal matter, were it not that, having fabricated this + handle for censure on me, Mr. Froude makes it a hook for the + following criticism on the Hakluyt Society: ‘_And even in + the subjects which they select, they are pursued by the same + curious fatality_,’ the selection blamed being that of _Drake’s + Last Voyage in 1595_, edited from the original MSS. Then, after + magisterially condemning this elsewhere unblamed selection as a + ‘_fatal_’ sin, Mr. Froude proceeds to say, at the foot of page + 109, ‘_But every bad has a worse below it, and more offensive + than all these is the Editor of “Hawkins’s Voyage to the South + Sea,”_’—and if the reader refers to the head of the article for + the name of _this most offensive editor_, he will, as I have + already said, find my name, who never had anything to do with + it. It is true that on page 110 the name of the real editor, + Admiral Bethune, occurs; but as Mr. Froude’s article is a + reprint from the _Westminster Review_ of 1852 (not 1853, as Mr. + Froude again blunders in saying), there has been time enough + for that gentleman to correct the injurious errors into which + he had fallen. Although naturally annoyed at this treatment of + my name, I left the offence unnoticed at the time; but now + that, after a lapse of fifteen years, it is reprinted, with all + faults in a widely-circulated publication, I call on Mr. Froude + to correct his mis-statements. + + “I am, happily, able to state, from the experience of twenty + years, that the estimate of the Hakluyt Society’s publications + by the literary world is far from supporting Mr. Froude in + his supercilious treatment of that Society. Whatever opinion, + however, those publications may deserve, it is the duty of a + critic to be correct, and the greater the severity, the greater + the need of correctness; but when a critic lashes not only + one’s self, but one’s friends, by means of misrepresentations + and blunders of his own making, what does that critic deserve? + + R. H. MAJOR.” + +_The Athenæum, July 20th, 1867._ + + “5, Onslow Gardens, July 15, 1867. + + “I am sorry to have given Mr. Major cause to complain of me. + Should my _Essays_ be reprinted, the mistake which he points + out shall be corrected; and I can only regret the injustice + which meanwhile is done to his name. At the same time the only + error which I can acknowledge is confined to the title of a + work which stands at the head of the article. In the article + itself the volumes criticised are assigned to their proper + editors. + + J. A. FROUDE.” + +_The Athenæum, July 27th, 1867._ + + “British Museum, July 23, 1867. + + “I beg to thank Mr. Froude for his courteous expression of + regret for what, I am quite sure, was done inadvertently, and + I would thankfully accept his promise of reparation if it + were extended to all the mischief that is being done to me. + Unfortunately for me, _two editions_ of Mr. Froude’s _Essays_ + have been issued this year, _the second this very month_, in + a _cheap and popular form_; thus diffusing and prolonging, in + the most effectual manner, an injustice to my name which has + existed for fifteen years, and postponing indefinitely the + chance of reparation in a future edition. + + “Under such circumstances, I read with regret that, while + acknowledging one error, Mr. Froude does not also acknowledge + what everyone else sees clearly and condemns, the injustice + of his censure on me with respect to Columbus, and which he + makes a ground for censure on the Hakluyt Society. That Society + stands too high to need any defence from its former Honorary + Secretary, but I may be excused for specially asking that this + censure may be expunged; for I have a letter from Mr. Bancroft, + who was Ambassador here at the time, in which he eulogizes, + in terms so warm that I may not repeat them, the spirit in + which I had written both of the sufferings of Columbus, and + of the touching language in which he had recorded them. This + is exactly the contrary of what Mr. Froude’s two editions are + telling everybody that I have done. + + R. H. MAJOR.” + +Now that, in revising my translation for this second edition, I have +again gone through the texts of Columbus’s letters, I uncompromisingly +repeat the expression which in 1847 I used _solely_ in exculpation of any +mischievous result to my own diction from the disconnectedness of the +original, viz., that “Columbus was not so great a master of the pen as +of the art of navigation.” Whether my judgment on this point be of more +or less weight than Mr. Froude’s is of no moment whatever; but it is of +moment that the mischievous effect of a savage criticism, built up on +the critic’s own blunders, should be neutralized as far as possible. The +reader has the realities of the whole case before him, and may judge for +himself. + + R. H. M. + + + + +INTRODUCTION. + + +Nearly three thousand years have passed since the wisest of men declared +that there was nothing new under the sun. The saying has held good to +the present day, for men are perpetually finding out that their recent +discoveries had been already made, but under circumstances which did +not reveal the full value of that which had been discovered. No greater +examples of this truth can be adduced than in the history of the +Atlantic, of America, and of Australia. Until the days of Prince Henry +the Navigator, the Atlantic was so unknown that it justly bore the name +of the “Sea of Darkness;” and yet, during the previous two thousand years +occasional glimpses of light had in fact been thrown upon the face of +that mysterious ocean. “Nil novi sub sole” was still an indisputable +proverb. In the researches into the Atlantic originated by Prince Henry, +Columbus took part, and hence, as we shall presently more fully see, +derived the idea of the great importance of explorations to the West. +Within one hundred years of the triumphant rounding by Prince Henry’s +navigators (in 1434) of Cape Bojador, which till then had been the limit +of Atlantic exploration, the Portuguese had discovered both the eastern +and western shores of the continental island of Australia. And yet till +recently men knew not that they owed the knowledge either of America or +of Australia[1] to the initiatory efforts of a Prince with whose name, in +fact, they were almost entirely unacquainted. + +Such facts show the great injustice done to the originators of great +explorations who, working with the smallest means, really deserve the +highest meed of honour. + +Yet in the estimate of merit it must be conceded that priority, immense +as are its claims, is not all-absorbent. Columbus, as we shall presently +see, was anticipated in the discovery of America, and yet such were +the special virtues brought to bear upon the execution of his great +achievement, that, as Humboldt has eloquently said, “the majesty of grand +recollections seems concentred” on his illustrious name. The peculiar +value of the following letters, descriptive of the four important voyages +of Columbus, is that the events described are from the pens of those to +whom the events occurred. In them we have laid before us, as it were from +Columbus’s own mouth, a clear statement of his opinions and conjectures +on what were to him great cosmical riddles—riddles which have since been +solved mainly through the light which his illustrious deeds have shed +upon the field of our observation. In these letters also we trace the +magnanimity with which Columbus could support an accumulated burthen +of undeserved affliction. It is impossible to read without the deepest +sympathy the occasional murmurings and half suppressed complaints which +are uttered in the course of his letter to Ferdinand and Isabella, +describing his fourth voyage. These murmurings and complaints were +wrung from his manly spirit by sickness and sorrow, and though reduced +almost to the brink of despair by the injustice of the king, yet do we +find nothing harsh or disrespectful in his language to the sovereign. A +curious contrast is presented to us. The gift of a world could not move +the monarch to gratitude; the infliction of chains, as a recompense for +that gift, could not provoke the subject to disloyalty. The same great +heart which through more than twenty wearisome years of disappointment +and chagrin gave him strength to beg and to buffet his way to glory, +still taught him to bear with majestic meekness the conversion of that +glory into unmerited shame. + +The translated documents are seven in number. Five of them are letters +from the hand of Columbus himself, describing respectively his first, +third, and fourth voyages. Another, describing the second voyage, is +by Dr. Chanca, the physician to the fleet during that expedition, and +the seventh document is an extract from the will of Diego Mendez, one +of Columbus’s officers during the fourth voyage, who gives a detailed +account of many most interesting adventures undertaken by himself, but +left undescribed by Columbus. + +I shall not pause here to enter into the important bibliography of +these documents, which has no charm for many readers, and is therefore +placed at the end of this introduction. A series of original documents +of such importance might appear to need but few words of introduction or +recommendation, since the entire history of civilisation presents us with +no event, with the exception perhaps of the art of printing, so momentous +as the discovery of the western world; and, independently of the lustre +which the grandeur of that event confers upon the discoverer, there is no +individual who has rendered himself, on the score of personal character +and conduct, more illustrious than Christopher Columbus. There have, +nevertheless, not been wanting those, who, from various motives, and on +grounds of various trustworthiness, have endeavoured to lessen his glory, +by impeaching his claim to the priority of discovery, or by arguing that +the discovery itself has proved a misfortune rather than advantage to +the world at large. By way, therefore, of vindicating the value of the +original documents here translated, a brief account of such pretensions +to prior discovery as have been at different times put forth, may not be +thought superfluous. + +The oldest story which seems possibly to bear reference to what we call +the “new world” is related by Theopompus. + +Theopompus lived in the fourth century before the Christian era; in +a fragment of his works preserved by Ælian is a conversation between +Silenus and Midas, King of Phrygia, in which the former says that +Europe, Asia, and Africa were surrounded by the sea, but that beyond this +known world was an island of immense extent, containing huge animals +and men of twice our stature, and long-lived in proportion. There were +in it many great cities whose inhabitants had laws and customs entirely +different from ours. Fabulous as the story is as a whole, we cannot +escape from the thought that it suggests, though vaguely, a notion of the +real existence of a great western country. This idea is strengthened by +the remarkable story related to Solon by a priest of Sais from the sacred +inscriptions in the temples, and presented to us by Plato in his Timæus +and Critias, wherein he speaks of an island called Atlantis, opposite the +Pillars of Hercules, larger than Africa and Asia united, but which in one +day and night was swallowed up by an earthquake and disappeared beneath +the waters. The result was that no one had since been able to navigate +or explore that sea on account of the slime which the submerged island +had produced. Many as have been the doubts and conjectures to which this +narrative has been subjected by the learned in ancient and modern times, +it is a remarkable fact that Crantor, in a commentary on Plato quoted by +Proclus, declares that he found this same account retained by the priests +of Sais three hundred years after the period of Solon, and that he was +shown the inscriptions in which it was embodied. It is also deserving of +notice that precisely in that part of the ocean described in the legend +we find the island groups of the Azores, Madeira, the Canaries, and a +host of other rocks and sand-banks, while the great bank of varec, or +floating seaweed, occupying the middle portion of the basin of the North +Atlantic, and covering, according to Humboldt, an area about six times +as large as Germany, has been reasonably regarded as explanatory of the +obstacle to navigation to which the tradition refers. + +Various have been the speculations respecting the original colonisation +of the western hemisphere. Athanasius Kircher, in his _Prodromus Coptus +and Œdipus Ægyptiacus_, gives the Egyptians the credit of colonising +America, as well as India, China, and Japan, grounding his argument +upon the religious worship of the sun, moon, stars, and animals. Edward +Brerewood, at pages 96 and 97 of his _Enquiries touching the Diversity +of Languages_, contends, and he is far from being alone in his opinion, +that the Americans are the progeny of the Tartars. Marc Lescarbot, in his +_Histoire de la Nouvelle France_, maintains that the Canaanites, when +routed by Joshua, were driven into America by storms, and that Noah was +born in America, and after the flood showed his descendants the way into +their paternal country, and assigned to some of them their places of +abode there; while Hornius, in his treatise _De originibus Americanis_, +after touching upon the various conjectures here quoted, animadverts on +the presumption and folly of Paracelsus, when he states that a second +Adam and Eve were created for the peopling of the western world. + +The first specific statement, however, of a supposed migration from the +shores of the old world to those of the new, is that which the elder De +Guignes presumes to be demonstrable from the relation given by a Chinese +historian, Li-Yen, who lived at the commencement of the seventh century. +(See _Mémoires de l’Académie des Inscriptions et Belles Lettres_, vol. +28, p. 504.) The said historian speaks of a country, named Fou-sang, +more than forty thousand _li_[2] to the East of China. He says that they +who went thither started from the province of Leaton, situated to the +north of Peking; that after having made twelve thousand li, they came +to Japan; that travelling seven thousand li northward from that place, +they arrived at the country of Venchin, and at five thousand li eastward +of the latter, they found the country of Tahan, whence they journeyed +to Fou-sang, which was twenty thousand li distant from Tahan. From this +account De Guignes endeavours, by a long chain of argument, to prove that +the Chinese had pushed their investigations into Jeso, Kamtschatka, and +into that part of America which is situated opposite the most eastern +coast of Asia. + +This surmise of De Guignes has been answered by Klaproth, in a paper +which appeared in the _Nouvelles Annales des Voyages_ (tom. 51, 2ᵉ serie, +p. 53). His arguments go to show that the country named Fou-sang is +Japan; and that the country of Tahan, situated to the west of Asiatic +Vinland, can only be the island of Saghalian. Humboldt observes upon +this subject, that the number of horses, the practice of writing, and the +manufacture of paper from the Fou-sang tree, mentioned in the account +given by the Chinese historian, ought to have shown De Guignes that the +country of which he spoke was not America. + +The presumed discovery of America which comes next in chronological +rotation, is that by the Scandinavians, the earliest _printed allusion_ +to which occurs in Adam of Bremen’s _Historia Ecclesiastica Ecclesiarum +Hamburgensis et Bremensis_, published at Copenhagen, 1579, 4to. The +Baron Von Humboldt has asserted that the merit of first recognising the +discovery of America by the Northmen, _belongs indisputably_ to Ortelius, +who, in his _Theatrum Orbis Terrarum_, with unjust severity says, that +Christopher Columbus had done nothing more than to place the new world +in a permanently useful and commercial relationship with Europe. The +ground upon which the priority is claimed for Ortelius, is that the +first edition of his work came out in 1570, although the reference which +Humboldt himself gives is to an edition of 1601 which was after the +death of Ortelius, and the earlier editions do not contain the chapter +on the Pacific Ocean in which the passage occurs. It is true that in +the _Bibliotheca Hulthemiana_ the edition of 1601 is said to have been +revised and augmented by Ortelius before his death in 1598, but, even if +the assertion was made by Ortelius, and not by the editor of his work +after his death, it still leaves perfectly unimpeached the claim to +priority of the Copenhagen edition of Adam of Bremen in 1579. Adam of +Bremen’s work was written soon after the middle of the eleventh century, +and was followed in the next half century by the _Historia Ecclesiastica_ +of Ordericus Vitalis, who also speaks of the country visited by the +Scandinavians. Abraham Mylius, in his _Treatise de Antiquitate Linguæ +Belgicæ_, Leyden, 1611, makes all Americans to be sprung from Celts; +stating that many Celtic words were to be found in use there; and with +more reasonable showing affirms that the coast of Labrador was visited +by wanderers from Iceland. Hugo Grotius, in his _Dissertatio de Origine +Gentium Americanarum_, (Paris, 1642, 8vo.), follows Mylius, and states +that America was colonised by a Norwegian race, who came thither from +Iceland, through Greenland, and passed through North America down to the +Isthmus. + +The earliest _printed detail_ of these discoveries is given by the +Norwegian historian, Thormodus Torfæus, in a work entitled _Historia +Vinlandiæ Antiquæ, ex Antiquitatibus Islandicis in lucem producta_, +(Hauniæ, 1705, 12mo.) But in the invaluable work by Professor Rafn, +published in 1837 by the Danish Royal Society of Antiquaries, under the +title of _Antiquitates Americanæ_, the manuscripts which record these +discoveries are given at length in the original, accompanied by a Latin +translation, and careful and learned geographical illustrations. The +following is a summary of the principal events recorded in this highly +interesting volume, and the geographical inferences are those supplied +by the professor himself. + +Irish Christians were the first Europeans, which we know from well +established history, to have migrated into and inhabited Iceland. Close +upon the end of the eighth century this island was visited by Irish +hermits; but the first discovery of it by the Northmen was made by a +Dane named Gardar, of Swedish origin, in the year 863. The regular +colonisation of the country was commenced in 874 by Ingolf, a Norwegian, +and was carried on continuously for the space of sixty years by some +of the most influential and civilised families of Scandinavia. In 877 +the mountainous coast of Greenland was for the first time seen by a man +named Gunnbiorn, but it was in 983 that this country was first visited +by Eric Rauda, or Eric the Red, son of Thorwald, a Norwegian noble, who +had been condemned to a banishment of three years for killing Eyolf +his neighbour. After three years absence, he returned to Iceland, and +in order to hold out an inducement to colonisation, named the newly +discovered country Greenland, intending by that name to express the +richness of the woods and meadows with which it abounded. Amongst those +who had accompanied Eric was a man named Heriulf Bardson, who established +himself at Heriulfsnes. Biarne, the son of the latter, finding, on his +return home from a trading voyage to Norway, that his father had quitted +Iceland, resolved upon following him, though he, as well as those who +had accompanied him, were quite unacquainted with the Greenland sea. +Soon after leaving Iceland they met with northerly winds and fogs, and +were carried they knew not whither: the weather clearing, they found +themselves near a flat woody country, which, not corresponding with +the descriptions of Greenland, they left to larboard. After five days’ +sailing with a south-west wind, they came to a mountainous country, +covered with glaciers, which they found to be an island; but as its +appearance was not inviting, they bore away from the island, and standing +out to sea with the same wind, after four days’ sailing with fresh gales, +they reached Heriulfsnes in Greenland. + +Some time after this, in the year 1000, Lief, son of Eric the Red, +equipped a ship with thirty-five men to make a voyage of discovery, +with the view of examining the new found lands more narrowly. They came +to a land were no grass was to be seen, but everywhere there were vast +glaciers, while the space intervening between these ice mountains and the +shore appeared as one uninterrupted plain of slate. This country they +named Helluland, _i. e._ Slate-land (Newfoundland). Thence they stood out +to sea again, and reached a level wooded country, with cliffs of white +sand. They called this country Markland, _i. e._ Woodland (Nova Scotia). +Again they put to sea, and after two days’ sail reached an island, to +the eastward of the mainland, and passed through the strait between this +island and the mainland. They sailed westward, and landed at a place +where a river, issuing from a lake, fell into the sea. Here they wintered +and built houses, which were afterwards called Leifsbuder (Leifsbooths.) +During their stay, one of their number, named Tyrker, a German, happened +to wander some distance from the settlement, and on his return reported +that he had found vines and grapes. These proving to be plentiful, +Lief named the country Vinland or Vineland (New England), and in the +ensuing spring returned to Greenland. In the year 1002, Thorwald, Lief’s +brother, being of opinion that the country had been too little explored, +borrowed his brother’s ship, and with the assistance of his advice and +instructions, set out on a new voyage. They arrived at Liefsbooths, in +Vinland, remained there for the winter, and, in the spring of 1003, +Thorwald sent a party in the ship’s long boat on a voyage of discovery +southwards. They found a beautiful and well-wooded country, with +extensive ranges of white sand, but no traces of men, except a wooden +shed which they found on an island lying to the westward. They returned +to Liefsbooths in the autumn. In the summer of 1004, Thorwald sailed +eastward and then northward, past a remarkable headland enclosing a bay, +and which was opposite to another headland. They called it Kialarnes +(Keel-Cape). Continuing along the east coast, they reached a beautiful +promontory, where they landed. Thorwald was so pleased with the place +that he exclaimed, “Here is a beautiful spot, and here I should like well +to fix my dwelling.” He had scarcely spoken before they encountered some +Skrellings (Esquimaux) with whom they fell to blows, and a sharp conflict +ensuing, Thorwald received a mortal wound in his arm from an arrow. +He died, and was buried by his own instructions on the spot which had +excited his admiring remark, the language of which appeared prophetic of +a longer stay there than he had at first contemplated. + +The most distinguished, however, of all the first American discoverers is +Thorfinn Karlsefne, an Icelander, whose genealogy is carried back in the +old northern annals to Danish, Swedish, Norwegian, Scottish, and Irish +ancestors, some of them of royal blood. In 1006 this chieftain visited +Greenland, and there married Gudrida, the widow of Thurstein (son of Eric +the Red), who had died the year before in an unsuccessful expedition to +Vinland. Accompanied by Snorre Thorbrandson, also a man of illustrious +lineage, Biarne Grimolfson of Breidefiord, and Thorhall Gamlason of +Austfiord, he set sail in the spring of 1007 with three ships for Vinland. + +They had in all one hundred and sixty men, and as they went with the +intention of colonising, they took with them a great variety and quantity +of live stock. They sailed, first, to the Tresterbyd, and afterwards +to Biarney (Disco); then to Helluland, where they found an abundance +of foxes; and thence to Markland, which was overgrown with wood, and +plentifully stocked with a variety of animals. Proceeding still in a +south-westerly direction, with the land on the right, they came to a +place where a frith penetrated far into the country; off the mouth of it +was an island, on which they found an immense number of eyder ducks, so +that it was scarcely possible to walk without treading on their eggs. +They called the island Straumey (Stream Isle) from the strong current +which ran past it, and the frith they called Straumfiordr (Stream Frith). +Here Thorhall and eight others left the party in quest of Vinland, but +were driven by westerly gales to the coast of Iceland, where some say +that they were beaten, and put into servitude. Karlsefne, however, with +the remaining one hundred and fifty men, sailed southwards, and reached +a place were a river falls into the sea from a lake; large islands were +situated opposite the mouth of the river; passing these, they steered +into the lake, and called the place Hop. The low grounds were covered +with wheat growing wild; and the rising grounds with vines. Here they +stayed till the beginning of the year 1008, when finding their lives in +constant jeopardy from the hostile attacks of the natives, they quitted +the place, and returned to Eric’s fiorde. In 1011 a ship arrived in +Greenland, from Norway, commanded by two Icelandic brothers named Helge +and Finnboge: to these men, Freydisa, a natural daughter of Eric the Red, +proposed a voyage to Vinland, stipulating that they should share equally +with her the profits of the voyage. To this they assented, and it was +agreed that each party should have thirty able-bodied men on board the +ship, besides women; but Freydisa secretly took with her five men in +addition to that number. They reached Liefsbooths in 1012, and wintered +there; when a discussion arising, Freydisa had the subtlety to prevail +on her husband to massacre the brothers and their followers; after the +perpetration of which base deed they returned to Greenland in the spring +of 1013. + +In his expedition to Vinland in 1007, Thorfinn Karlsefne had been +accompanied by his wife, Gudrida, who bore him a son, Snorre, who became +the founder of an illustrious family in Iceland, which gave that island +several of its first bishops. Among these may be mentioned the learned +Bishop Thorlak Runolfson, to whom we are principally indebted for the +oldest ecclesiastical code of Iceland, written in the year 1123. It is +also probable that the accounts of the voyages were originally compiled +by him. + +The notices given in these old Icelandic accounts, of the climate, +soil, and productions of the new country are very characteristic. It is +curious that Adam of Bremen, in the eleventh century, though himself not +a northman, states, on the authority of Svein Estridson, the King of +Denmark, a nephew of Canute the Great, that the country of Vinland got +its name from the vine growing wild there, and for the same reason the +English re-discoverers gave the name of Martha’s Vineyard to the large +island close off the coast. + +It is fortunate that in these ancient accounts they have preserved the +statement of the course steered and the distance sailed in a day. From +various ancient Icelandic geographical works it may be gathered that the +distance of a day’s sailing was estimated at from twenty-seven to thirty +geographical miles—German or Danish—of which fifteen are equal to a +degree, and are consequently equivalent to four English miles. From the +island of Helluland, afterwards called little Helluland, Biarne sailed to +Herjulfsnes (Ikigeit), in Greenland, with strong south-westerly winds, in +four days. The distance between that cape and Newfoundland is about one +hundred and fifty miles, which, if we allow for the strong south-westerly +gales, will correspond with Biarne’s voyage; while the well-known +barrenness of the flats of Newfoundland corresponds with the Hellue, or +slates, which suggested the name the Northmen gave to the island. + +Markland being described as three days’ sail south-west of Helluland, +appears to be Nova Scotia; and the low and level character of the +country, covered with woods, tallies precisely with the descriptions of +later writers. + +Vinland was stated to be two days’ sail to the south-west of Markland, +which would be from fifty-four to sixty miles. The distance from Cape +Sable to Cape Cod is reckoned at about two hundred and ten English miles, +which answers to about fifty-two Danish miles; and in the account given +by Biarne of their finding many shallows off the island to the eastward, +we recognize an accurate description of Nantucket, and Kialarnes must +consequently be Cape Cod. The Straumfiordr of the Northmen is supposed to +be Buzzard’s Bay, and Straumey, Martha’s Vineyard, though the account of +the many eggs found there, would seem to correspond more correctly with +Egg Island, which lies off the entrance of Vineyard Sound. + +Krossanes is probably Gurnet Point. The Hóp answers to Mount Hope’s +Bay, through which the Taunton river flows, and it was here that the +Leifsbooths were situated. + +The ancient documents likewise make mention of a country called +Huitramannaland (Whiteman’s Land), otherwise Irland it Mikla (Great +Ireland) supposed to be that part of the coast of North America, +including North and South Carolina, Georgia and Florida. There is a +tradition among the Shawanese Indians, who emigrated some years ago +from Florida and settled in Ohio, that Florida was once inhabited by +white people, who possessed iron instruments. The powerful chieftain, +Are Marson of Reykianes, in Iceland,—according to the account given +by his contemporary Rafn, surnamed the Limerick trader,—was driven to +Huitramannaland by storms in 983, and was baptised there. Are Frode +likewise (the first compiler of the Landnama, and a descendant in the +fourth degree from Are Marson) states that his uncle, Thorkell Gellerson, +had been informed by Icelanders that Are Marson had been recognised in +Huitramannaland, and was held in high respect there. This statement +therefore shows that there was an occasional intercourse in those days +between the Orkneys and Iceland, and this part of America. + +It is further recorded in the ancient MSS. that the Greenland bishop Eric +went over to Vinland in the year 1121; but nothing more than the fact +is stated, and it simply corroborates the supposition of intercourse +between the countries. Again, in the year 1266, a voyage of discovery +to the Arctic regions of America is said to have been performed, under +the auspices of some clergymen of the bishopric of Gardar in Greenland; +and from the recorded observations made by the explorers, would seem to +have been carried to regions whose geographical position has been more +accurately determined by our own navigators, Parry and the two Rosses. +The next recorded discovery was made by Adalbrand and Thorwald Helgason, +two Icelandic clergymen, in the year 1285. Contemporaneous accounts state +that they discovered a new land to the westward of Iceland, supposed +to have been Newfoundland. The last record preserved in the ancient +Icelandic MSS. relates a voyage from Greenland to Markland, performed +by a crew of seventeen men, in the year 1347. The account written by +a contemporary nine years after the event, induces the belief that +intercourse between Greenland and America had been maintained as late as +the period here mentioned, for he speaks of Markland as a country still +known and visited in those days. + +The obscurity of many portions of these narratives leaves much to +be cleared up with reference to this interesting subject; but their +general truthfulness being corroborated by the traces of the residence +and settlement of the ancient northmen exhibited in the inscriptions +discovered in Kinkigtorsoak, Greenland, and Massachusetts, no room is +left for disputing the main fact of the discovery. + +Between this period and the date of the first voyage of Columbus, the +coast of America is reported to have been visited by the Arabians of the +Spanish Peninsula, the Welsh, the Venetians, the Portuguese, and also by +a Pole in the service of Denmark. + +The Arabian expedition is described both by Edrisi and by Ibn-al-Wardi. +It appears to have been undertaken by eight persons of the same family, +called the Almagrurins or the Wandering Brothers, who having provided +themselves with everything requisite for a long voyage, swore they would +not return till they had penetrated to the extreme limits of the Sea of +Darkness. They sailed from the port of Aschbona or Lisbon, and steered +towards the south-west, and at the end of thirty-five days arrived at +the island of Gana or Sheep Island. The flesh of the sheep of this +island being too bitter for them to eat, they put to sea again, and +after sailing twelve days in a southerly direction, reached an island +inhabited by people of a red skin, lofty stature, and with hair of thin +growth but long and flowing over their shoulders. The inhabitants of this +island told them that persons had sailed twenty days to the west without +discovering land, and the Arabian brothers, diverted from the pursuit +of their hardy enterprise by this discouraging account, retraced their +course, and returned safely to Lisbon. From this description the elder de +Guignes inferred that the Arabs had either reached the eastern coast of +America, or at least one of the American islands; an opinion, however, +which appears to have as little to sanction it, as his above mentioned +conjecture that the Chinese had discovered the west coast of America +in the fifth century. The Baron von Humboldt concurs with the opinion +expressed by the learned orientalist Tychsen in his _Neue oriental und +exegetische Bibliothek_, and repeated by Malte Brun, that the island +reached by the Arab wanderers was one of the African islands. This +conclusion is drawn from the circumstance that the Guanches, the original +people of the Canary group, were a pastoral race, and also possessed the +same external characteristics as the islanders here described. Moreover, +the fact that the king of the island had an interpreter who spoke Arabic, +together with the circumstance that the red men had sailed westward for +a month without seeing land, strongly corroborates the opinion advanced. +The precise date of this voyage is unknown, but Humboldt presumes that it +must have been considerably anterior to the expulsion of the Arabs from +Lisbon in 1147; because Edrisi, whose work was finished in 1153, speaks +of the occurrence as if it were by no means recent. + +It is but upon a slight foundation, that the Welsh have pretended to +raise a claim to the discovery; but slight as it is, there is certainly +enough to render a decidedly negative assertion on the subject to the +full as presumptuous as one decidedly affirmative would be. But as we +have no concern with mere conjectures, we must in candour narrate, as +succinctly as possible, the grounds upon which these pretensions have +been founded. + +The first account of this discovery is found in Humphrey Llwyd’s +translation of the _History of Wales_, by Caradoc of Llancarvan, +published by Dr. Powell in 1584. According to him the occurrence took +place as follows:—On the death of Owen Gwynedd, prince of North Wales, +in 1169, a contention arose amongst his numerous sons respecting the +succession to the crown, when Madawe, or Madoc, one of their number, +seeing his native country was likely to be embroiled in a civil war, +deemed it more prudent to try his fortune abroad. In pursuance of this +object he sailed with a small fleet of ships to the westward, and +leaving Iceland on the north, came at length to an unknown country, +where everything appeared new and uncommon and the manner of the natives +different from all that he had ever seen. The country appearing to him, +from its fertility and beauty, to be very desirable for a settlement, he +left most of his own men behind him, (amounting, according to Sir Thomas +Herbert, to a hundred and twenty), and returning to Wales, persuaded +a considerable number of the Welsh to go out with him to the newly +discovered country, and so with ten ships he again departed, and bade a +final adieu to his native soil. This account of the historian Caradoc +of Llancarvan is the only affirmative written document the story has +upon which to ground its claim to authenticity, with the exception of +an ode, written by a Welsh bard, Meredyth ab Rhys, who died in 1477, +fifteen years before Columbus’s first expedition, in which an allusion +is made to the event.[3] A circumstance which would appear to confirm +the truth of Madoc’s voyages, is a peculiar resemblance that has been +found between some of the American dialects and the Welsh language; but, +as Dr. Robertson reasonably remarks, the affinity has been observed in +so few instances, and in some of these is so obscure or so fanciful, +that no conclusion can be drawn from the casual resemblance of a small +number of words. Dr. Williams adduces in confirmation of his favourite +idea the authorities of Lopez de Gomara, Hornius, and Peter Martyr, +pretending that they assert that traces of Christianity were found among +the Americans by the Spaniards, as well as that there was a tradition +among the Mexicans, that many years before a strange nation came amongst +them, and taught them a knowledge of God. His references however appear +entirely incorrect. + +Another pretension to an early discovery of America has been founded upon +an account given in a work published in Venice by Francesco Marcolini +in 1558, entitled “_Dello scoprimento dell’ Isole Frislanda, Eslanda, +Engrovelanda, Estotilanda, ed Icaria, fatto sotto il Polo Artico da +due fratelli Zeni, M. Nicolò il K. e M. Antonio_.” The substance of +the account is, that in 1380, Nicolò Zeno, a Venetian noble, fitted +out a vessel at his own cost, and made a voyage to the north, with the +intention of visiting England and Flanders, but was driven by a storm to +Friseland, now proved to be the Færoe Archipelago. Being rescued from the +attacks of the natives by Zichmni, a neighbouring prince, Zeno entered +into the service of the latter, and assisted him in conquering Friseland +and other northern islands. He shortly after dispatched a letter to his +brother Antonio, requesting him to find means to join him; whereupon the +latter purchased a vessel, and succeeded in reaching Friseland, where +he remained fourteen years. During his residence there he wrote to his +brother Carlo in Venice, and gave an account of a report brought by a +certain fisherman, about a land to the westward. This account stated +that about twenty-six years before, the fisherman, when out at sea with +four fishing boats, was overtaken by a tempest, which drove them about +for many days, and at length cast them on an island called Estotiland, +about a thousand miles from Friseland. The inhabitants conveyed them +to a fair and populous city, where the king sent for many interpreters +to converse with them, but none that they could understand, until a +man was found, who had likewise been cast away upon the coast, and who +spoke Latin. They remained several days upon the island, which was rich +and fruitful, abounding with all kinds of metals, and especially gold. +Though much given to navigation, they were ignorant of the use of the +compass, and finding the Friselanders acquainted with it, the king of +the place sent them with twelve barques to visit a country to the south, +called Drogeo. They had nearly perished in a storm, but were cast away +upon the coast of Drogeo. The fisherman described this Drogeo as a +country of vast extent, and that the inhabitants were naked and eaters +of human flesh. He remained many years in the country, and became rich +with trafficking between Estotiland and the main land, and subsequently +fitted out a vessel of his own, and made his way back to Friseland. His +narrative induced Zichmni to undertake a voyage thither, in which he was +accompanied by Antonio Zeno. It was unsuccessful: landing on an island +called Icaria, they were roughly treated by the inhabitants, and a storm +afterwards drove them on the coast of Greenland. + +This account was placed in the hands of Marcolini by Nicolò Zeno, a +descendant of the family of the explorers, but it had to be made from +fragments, he himself having, when a boy, from ignorance torn up a +considerable quantity of the original documents, which were letters +written by Antonio Zeno to Carlo his brother. In spite of a considerable +amount of fable and exaggeration, defects which enter into the majority +of early accounts of travel, it is scarcely to be believed that Nicolò +Zeno the younger invented this voyage. He was a man of the highest +reputation, as may be seen by the encomium passed on him by Francesco +Patrizio; see _Della Historia dieci Dialoghi di M. Francesco Patrizio_, +Venetia, 1560, 4to., p. 30 verso. It is well known that the Venetians had +made yearly voyages to the north of Europe for at least two centuries +before the period in question, and the most important part of Zeno’s +publication, viz., the map, the original of which is stated to have hung +up in his palace since the date of the discovery, bears evidence of a +knowledge, however imperfect, of Scandinavian geography. The graduation +of this map was inserted by Nicolò Zeno the younger himself, and although +inaccurate enough to cause much perplexity to geographers, there is no +doubt that Greenland was laid down on it with more correctness than +on any map preceding the date of its publication. No map before that +time shews the Island of Frisland with names thereon tallying with the +names of the Færoe islands. No map before 1558 shews the discoveries +of the Northmen in America, nor were any of the Sagas known to the +Venetians before that time; nor do any books previous to that period set +forth the geography of those parts from which Nicolò Zeno could have +stolen information. Moreover the correspondence of the Zeno map with +surveys much later, as in Davis’s Straits, is highly corroborative of +its genuineness. Mr. Kohl, in his most valuable _Documentary History +of Discovery of the East Coast of North America_, printed by the Maine +Historical Society, 1869, 8vo., suggests that Icaria is Helluland or +Newfoundland; Estotiland, Markland or Nova Scotia; and Drogeo, Vinland or +New England: and he further justly remarks that, assuming that the map is +genuine, “it is the first and oldest known to us on which some sections +of the continent of America have been laid down.” + +On an anonymous map in Weimar of the date of 1424, and on a map by +Andrea Bianco,[4] in the library of St. Mark, bearing the date of 1436, +is laid down a large extent of land, five or six hundred leagues west of +Gibraltar, above which is written the word “Antillia.” With reference to +this subject, Martin Behaim, on his globe of 1492, says, “In the year +734, after the conquest of Spain by the Mahometans, this island Antillia +was discovered and settled by an archbishop from Oporto, who fled to +it in ships with six other bishops and other Christian men and women. +They built there seven towns, from which circumstance it has also been +called Septem Citade, the island of the seven cities. In the year 1414 a +Spanish vessel came very near to it.” Of the island of S. Brandan also, +which is laid down on charts of the fourteenth century, Behaim says, “In +the year 565, Saint Brandan, an Irish bishop, arrived with his vessel on +this island, saw there most wonderful things, and returned afterwards +to his country.” Another of these fancied islands in the Atlantic was +the island of Brazil. So strong was the belief in the existence of these +islands, that we find it stated by Pedro de Ayala, a Spanish envoy in +England writing to the sovereigns in 1498, that the Bristol men had sent +out every year from 1491 (before Columbus’s first great discovery) to +1497, two, three, or four caravels every year in search of the islands of +Brazil and the seven cities, at the instigation of John Cabot. + +The following passage occurs in Sir John Barrow’s _Chronological History +of Voyages in the Arctic Regions_, which, if it stated a defensible +truth, would present another claim, anterior to that of Columbus, to the +discovery of America. The passage is headed “Cortereals, 1500”;— + +“The Portuguese, not content with having discovered a route to India, by +sailing round the tempestuous extremity to Africa, soon after engaged +in an equally dangerous enterprise: that of finding a route to India +and the Spice Islands, by sailing westward round the northern extremity +of America. This bold undertaking was reserved for the CORTEREALS, the +enlightened disciples of the school of Sagres. The first navigator of the +name of Cortereal, who engaged in this enterprise, was John Vaz Costa +Cortereal, a gentleman of the household of the infant Dom Fernando, who, +accompanied by Alvaro Martens Homem, explored the northern seas, by order +of king Affonso the Fifth, and discovered the _Terra de Baccalhaos_ +(the land of cod fish), afterwards called Newfoundland. This voyage is +mentioned by Cordeiro,[5] but he does not state the exact date, which +however is ascertained to have been in 1463 or 1464; for, in their return +from the discovery of Newfoundland, or Terra Nova, they touched at the +island of Terceira, the captaincy of which island having become vacant by +the death of Jacomo Bruges, they solicited the appointment, and in reward +for their services the request was granted, their patent commission +being dated in Evora, 2nd April, 1464.” + +It will be seen by the wording of this passage, that Sir John Barrow has +fallen into the inaccuracy of asserting that, in 1463 or 1464, Cortereal +was engaged in the enterprise of finding a route to India and the Spice +Islands by sailing westward round the northern extremities of America. +We must presume that the Portuguese were aware of the existence of the +American continent, before they could conceive the idea of sailing +westward round its northern extremity. The patent commission of the +appointment of Cortereal and Homem to the government of Terceira does +not specify that the service for which it was granted, was the discovery +of Newfoundland; and, moreover, at the end of Faria y Sousa’s _Asia +Portuguesa_, there is a list of all the armadas which sailed from Lisbon +on voyages of discovery between 1412 and 1640, and this expedition is +passed by in silence; so that the validity of the whole statement hangs +on the authority of Cordeiro: but the account is altogether so extremely +improbable, from the very silence of Portuguese writers of the time on +so important a subject, as to leave Cortereal but small chance of a +successful rivalry with Sebastian Cabot.[6] + +The last on the list of those who have been said to precede Columbus in +the discovery of America is a Polish pilot, named John Szkolny, whose +name has been erroneously Latinized by Hornius, Zurla, Malte Brun, +Wytfliet, and Pontanus, “Scolvus,” or “Sciolvus.” He was in the service +of Christian II of Denmark in the year 1476. He is said to have landed +on the coast of Labrador, after having passed along Norway, Greenland, +and the Friseland of the Zeni. Upon this subject Von Humboldt thus +expresses himself: “I cannot hazard any opinion upon the statement made +to this effect by Wytfliet, Pontanus, and Horn. A country seen _after_ +Greenland may, from the direction indicated, have been Labrador. I am, +however, surprised to find that Gomara, who published his _Historia de +las Indias_ at Saragossa, in 1553, was cognizant even at that time of +this Polish pilot. It is possible that when the codfishery began to bring +the seamen of southern Europe into more frequent connexion with those +of the north, a suspicion may have arisen that the land seen by Szkolny +must have been the same as that visited by John Sebastian Cabot in 1497, +and by Gaspar Cortereal in 1500. Gomara says what is in other respects +not quite correct, _that the English took much pleasure in frequenting +the coast of Labrador, for they found the latitude and climate the same +as that of their native land, and the men of Norway have been there with +the pilot, John Scolvo, as well as the English with Sebastian Cabot_. +Let us not forget that Gomara makes no mention of the Polish pilot with +reference to the question of the predecessors of Columbus, though he is +malignant enough to assert that it is in fact impossible to say to whom +the discovery of the New Indies is due.”[7] + +In the American Philosophical Transactions for 1786, is a letter +addressed to Dr. Franklin by Mr. Otto of New York, in which he not only +asserts that the illustrious cosmographer Martin Behaim discovered +the Azores, but quotes a passage, from what he calls an authentic +record, preserved in the archives of Nuremberg, the tenor of which is +as follows:—“Martin Behem, traversing the Atlantic Ocean for several +years, examined the American Islands, and discovered the strait which +bears the name of Magellan, before either Christopher Columbus or +Magellan navigated those seas; and even mathematically delineated on +a geographical chart for the king of Lusitania, the situation of the +coast around every part of that famous and renowned strait.” He also +quotes passages from the _Nuremberg Chronicle_, and from Cellarius, +in confirmation of this statement. Don Cristóbal Cladera, in his +_Investigaciones Historicas_, says that, in order to refute these +statements, he procured from Nuremberg a description of Behaim’s globe, +together with historical notes on the life and family of that geographer, +and upon examining these and the unpublished works of the Academia de +las Ciencias de Lisboa, he became convinced that the observations of +Mr. Otto were totally unfounded; and De Murr, who has well investigated +the question, assures us that the passage quoted by Mr. Otto from the +_Nuremberg Chronicle_ was not to be found in the German translation of +that work by George Alt in 1493. Moreover, the real globe of Behaim, +made in 1492, does not contain any of the islands or shores of the New +World; a fact which sets at rest the two questions of Behaim’s earlier +discovery, or of Columbus gaining his information from Behaim.[8] + +From the series of evidences contained in the preceding accounts, the +fact that America had been visited by European adventurers before the +time of Columbus is rendered too certain to admit of contradiction even +from the most sanguine advocate of the glory of the great discoverer. +But, on the other side, it cannot be denied that the discovery of +Columbus, however much later in date, deserves the meed of highest +honour, as being the result of sagacity, judgment and indomitable +perseverance, and as having been carried on with an energetic endeavour +to bring into active operation the incalculable advantages which it +opened up to the world at large. To vindicate the correctness of this +statement, it will be well to give a brief sketch of his eventful life, +and to pourtray as briefly as we may the high qualities to which, far +more than to accidental circumstances, the glory of this great discovery +is due. The retrospect of his history will at the same time shew, that +while every previous discovery was attributable to accident, the greater +portion of the accidental or uncontrollable circumstances in the life of +Columbus were such as, instead of assisting him, tended to thwart him at +every step of his painful career. + +It is generally agreed that his father was a wool weaver or carder. There +is reason, however, to presume that though his parentage was humble, he +was descended from a family of consideration. On this subject his son, +Don Ferdinand, denies[9] with great indignation an assertion which occurs +in a curious life of the admiral, inserted in the “_Psaltertium Octuplex +Augustin Justiniani_,” Genoa, 1516, folio, under the comments on the +nineteenth psalm, that he was “vilibus ortus parentibus,” and complains +that he is falsely called a mechanic. + +The date of his birth is a “vexata quæstio,” which it would be well +that we should here examine. For settling a disputed question of the +kind no process seems so sure as the comparing of statements made by +the same individual, if he be a good authority, at different times and +under different circumstances. The following are two statements made +by Columbus himself at entirely different periods and in an entirely +different shape, and yet both having the same result. They are recorded +by his son, Fernando, in the Biography of his father, and are as follows: +“In his book of his first voyage [1492] he says, ‘I was upon the sea +twenty-three years without being off it any time worth the speaking +of, and I saw all the East and all the West, and may say towards the +North or England, and have been at Guinea. Yet I never saw harbours for +goodness like those of the West Indies,’ and a little further he says, +‘That he took to the sea at fourteen years of age and ever after followed +it.’” Now we know for certain that he escaped from Lisbon and came to +Andalusia at the close of 1484; that during his stay in Portugal he had +made many voyages to Guinea, but that from 1484 until his first great +voyage in 1492 he was engaged, not at sea, but in endeavouring to secure +the interest of the Spanish sovereigns in his important project. If then +we add his twenty-three years of almost constant sea-going to fourteen, +his age when he first went to sea, we have thirty-seven years to deduct +from 1484, and we find 1447 to be the date of his birth. Again in 1501, +many years later, he writes to the Spanish sovereigns as follows: “I +went to sea very young and have continued it to this day; ... it is +now forty years that I have been sailing to all those parts at present +frequented.” What “very young” meant he had already told us; viz., 14, +which added to 40 makes 54; and this total deducted from 1501, the date +at which he writes, leaves the same date for his birth as that resulting +from his former statement, viz., 1447. But for the sake of attaining as +near to accuracy as possible, we must not overlook another statement made +in 1503 by Columbus himself in his letter to Ferdinand and Isabella, +describing his fourth voyage. He there says “I was twenty-eight years +old when I came into Your Highnesses service, and now I have not a hair +upon me that is not grey.” It was in 1484 that he went to Spain, and +then, as we have seen, terminated those three-and-twenty years of almost +uninterrupted sea-faring life of which he speaks. Now, if he were then +only eight-and-twenty, he must have first gone to sea at the age of +five instead of fourteen, as he himself informs us. Moreover, by that +reckoning he would have been only fifty when he died, in 1506, an age +entirely incompatible with the statement of Bernaldez, the Cura de los +Palacios, who knew Columbus so well, that he died _in senectute bonâ_, at +the age of seventy, more or less. It is intelligible that such a remark +should be made of a man of sixty, who had passed through hardships so +exhausting to the mind and body as those which had marked the life of +Columbus, but scarcely even of him at the age of fifty. It is clear, +then, that a mistake has been made in this number 28, but if for it we +write 38, it will make the date of Columbus’s birth to be 1446. We have, +however, to bear in mind that the two statements previously made by him +were of a very general character, in which no month or part of a year was +specified. It would therefore seem that, on his own showing, we shall +be safe in placing the date of his birth 1446-47, which agrees with the +inference of the learned and judicious Muñoz, who places it “por los años +1446,” although he does not show the process by which he arrives at his +conclusion. + +With respect to the birthplace of our illustrious navigator, were we +to enter into the complex discussions of those who, with different +arguments of more or less plausibility, place it in Genoa, Nervi, Savona, +Pradello, Cogoleto, Quinto, Bogliasco, Albisola, Chiavara, Oneglia, or +the castle of Cuccaro in Monferrato,—we should but launch upon a sea of +difficulties, with little hope of a successful voyage. It is difficult to +withhold credence from the strong assertion made twice by Columbus in his +will, dated 22nd February 1498, that he was born in the city of Genoa; +namely,—“I, being a native of Genoa”; and “I desire my said son Diego, +or the person who may succeed to the said inheritance, always to keep +and maintain one person of our lineage in the city of Genoa ... because +from thence I came, and there I was born.”[10] But in like manner we know +that Leonardo, who was born at Vinci, persisted in calling himself a +Florentine. + +Having early evinced a strong inclination for the study of geography, +geometry, and astronomy, Columbus found at the college of Pavia an +excellent opportunity of gaining a more than superficial acquaintance +with the principles of those sciences, and at the same time acquired +considerable proficiency in the Latin language. The maritime position +and commercial engagements of his native city doubtless suggested and +fostered much of that propensity for a nautical life, that he exhibited +at so early an age; and although it appears from several historians +that for a short time he worked at his father’s trade, yet this must +have been simply during his earliest boyhood, for by his own account he +commenced the life of a mariner at fourteen years of age. The piratical +character of the sea-faring life of those days necessarily exposed its +followers to unceasing hardships and dangers, and the severity of this +early discipline must have most materially tended to render available and +permanent those distinguished qualities which have subsequently gained +for him the admiration of the world: indeed, no career could have been +better calculated to develope his peculiar genius, or add fuel to those +enthusiastic aspirations which characterised him to the close of his life. + +From the period of his going to sea, which was about the year 1460 until +the year 1472, we meet with no distinct mention of his name; although +in a letter written by him to their Majesties, in 1495, he says: “_It +happened to me that king Réné (whom God has taken to himself) sent me to +Tunis to capture the galley Fernandina, and on arriving at the island +of San Pedro, in Sardinia, I learned that there were two ships and a +caracca with the galley, which so alarmed the crew that they resolved +to proceed no further, but to return to Marseilles for another vessel +and more people; upon which, being unable to force their inclination, +I yielded to their wish, and having first changed the points of the +compass, spread all sail, for it was evening, and at daybreak we were +within the cape of Carthagena, while all believed for a certainty that +they were going to Marseilles._” The date of this occurrence is unknown, +but the expedient of Columbus to alter the point of the needle, reminds +us of his subsequent stratagem, of altering his reckoning, to appease his +discontented crew during his first great voyage of discovery. + +In the year 1472, however, we have evidence of his having been in Savona, +from the fact of his signature having been found appended to the will +of one Nicolò Monleone, under date of the 20th March of that year. The +document is preserved in Savona, among the notarial archives. + +In 1474 we find his name mentioned in a letter addressed by Ferdinand +king of Sicily to Louis king of France, the title of which runs thus: +“_Literæ à Ferdinando Rege Siciliæ ad Ludovicum XI, Galliæ Regem, per +Fæcialem missæ, quibus quæritur, quod Christophorus Columbus triremes +suas deprædatus sit, postulatque sibi ablata restitui. Datum in Terra +Fogiæ die 8 Decembr. 1474._” Then follows a letter in five lengthy +clauses, in which it is stated that the said vessels were attacked and +taken:—“_A Columbo, qui quibusdam navibus præest, Majestatis vestræ +subdito._” + +The title of Louis’s reply runs thus: “_Responsio Ludovici XI quibus +promittit restitutionem, excusat tamen Columbum, quod jus sit in Oceano +capere naves ab hostilibus terris venientes et saltem bona hostium +inde auferre._” These letters are given by Leibnitz, in his _Codex +Juris Gentium Diplomaticus, Prodromus_, art. 16 and 17; but on the +correction of Nicolas Toinard, he acknowledges, in the preface to his +_Mantissa Codicis_, that he had erroneously inserted the Christian name +“Christophorus.” + +Toinard’s correction went to shew that Leibnitz had confounded the name +of Guillaume de Caseneuve, surnamed Coulomp, Coulon, or Colon, as the +Spaniards called him, with that of the illustrious discoverer. This +acknowledgment by Leibnitz of his error might seem to render useless any +reference to the letters in question; but as Christopher Columbus is +stated by his son, Don Ferdinand, to have been of the same family as the +pirate here mentioned, and also to have been engaged at sea with him and +his nephew, it becomes interesting to examine what record exists of these +illustrious pirates, and to see how far the assertion of Don Ferdinand +bears the semblance of correctness. This Caseneuve, or Colon, is called +by Duclos, in speaking of the very circumstance which occasioned these +letters, in his _Histoire de Louis XI_, “_Vice-Amiral de France, et le +plus grand homme de mer de son temps._” And Zurita, in his _Libro 19 de +los Anales de Aragon_, calls him, “_Colon, capitan de la Armada del Rey +de Francia_.” Garnier, in his _Histoire de France_, thus relates the +circumstance: “_Guillaume de Casenove, Vice-Amiral de Normandie, connu +dans notre histoire sous le nom d’Amiral Coulon, s’était rendu formidable +sur toutes les mers de l’Europe, où il exerçait le métier d’armateur: +dans une de ses courses il s’empara de deux riches frégates chargées +pour le compte des plus riches négocians de Naples, de Florence, et de +plusieurs autres villes d’Italie, qui tout sollicitèrent vivement la +restitution de cette importante prise._” + +Another exploit, in which this Colon was successfully engaged, was the +taking of eighty Dutch ships returning from the herring fishery, in +the Baltic, in 1479. Again, another sea-fight related by Marc Antonio +Sabelico, in the eighth book of his tenth Decade, is quoted by Don +Fernando, where Columbus the younger (described by Sabelico as the +nephew, but by Zurita as Francis, the son of the famous corsair), +intercepted, between Lisbon and Cape St. Vincent, four richly laden +Venetian galleys, on their return from Flanders. Fernando further asserts +that his father (Christopher) was present in this engagement, and that +after a desperate contest, which lasted from morning till evening, +the hand-grenades and other fiery missiles used in the battle, caused +a general conflagration among the vessels, which having been lashed +together with iron grapplings, could not be separated, and the crews +were compelled to leap into the water to escape the fire. He then goes +on to say that “his father, who was a good swimmer, finding himself at +the distance of two leagues from the land, seized an oar, and by its aid +succeeded in reaching the shore. Whereupon, learning that he was not +far from Lisbon, where he knew he should find many natives of Genoa, +he went thither, and meeting with a gratifying reception, took up his +abode in that city.” The engagement here described is shown by various +French historians to have taken place in 1485, and as it is certain +that Columbus was in Lisbon prior to 1474 (for in that year he has a +letter addressed to him in that city by Paolo Toscanelli, in reply to one +written by himself from the same place), this relation by Don Ferdinand +assumes a very apocryphal aspect. + +With respect to his other statement, that his father was of the same name +and family as these two renowned corsairs, it is to be remarked that +neither he nor any of the subsequent historians who have claimed this +needless honour for the great discoverer, appears to have been acquainted +with the real name of the pirates; and as Caseneuve was the strict family +name of the latter, and Coulon merely a superadded surname, we may fairly +conclude that the claim to consanguinity has no other foundation than +the identity in the Spanish language of Columbus’s patronymic with the +distinguishing surname of the French vice-admiral. + +In the _Chronique Scandaleuse_ (folio 109) this Caseneuve is said to have +had a very handsome mansion, named Gaillart-Bois, in the neighbourhood +of Notre Dame d’Escouys, in Normandy, at which Louis XI made a stay of +two or three days in the month of June 1475, and returned thither also +in the following month and stayed there some time. Spotorno suggests +that his name of Coulon may have been derived from a place so called in +the province of Berri; so that, in addition to the evidence that he was +not of the same name or family with Christopher Columbus, there arises +strong reason to believe that he was in reality a Frenchman:[11] in +which case it becomes probable that an event which has been generally +attributed to him, or to his still more renowned relative François +Caseneuve, would be with greater correctness ascribed to the Genoese +navigator, Christopher Columbus. It appears that, in a letter dated Terra +d’Otranto, 2nd October, 1476 (preserved, according to Bossi, in the royal +archives at Milan), addressed to the Duke of Milan by two illustrious +gentlemen of that city,—the one Guid’Antonio Arcimboldo, and the other +Giovanni Giacomo Trivulzio—the following story is related. It says that +the captain of the Venetian fleet, when stationed off Cyprus to defend +the island, had twice encountered a _Genoese_ ship, called the “Nave +Palavisina,” which he had taken to be a Turkish caracca; and in these +two engagements one hundred and twenty of the Turks and Genoese had been +killed, and in the Venetian squadron thirty had been killed, and two +hundred wounded. The captain appears to have had doubts whether he might +not have done wrong, and caused offence to the duke of Milan, who might +perhaps be an ally of the Genoese: he therefore goes on to say that his +only desire had been to meet with his enemies (the Turks) and plunder +them; and adds, in confirmation of that assertion, that “a year before +he had met with three times as many galleys, who spoke no evil of his +good name, and that he found Columbus with ships and galleys, and had +cheerfully let him pass by, upon which the cry was raised of ‘Viva San +Georgio,’ and nothing further passed between them.” The Columbus here +mentioned is shewn, by the cry of “Viva San Georgio,” and by the general +tenour of the Venetian captain’s letter, to have been a Genoese, and +with a Genoese crew; and as it appears probable that the Caseneuves were +Frenchmen, and would in all probability sail with French crews, it leaves +strong reason to presume that the Genoese captain here mentioned was +Christopher Columbus, who is allowed by all his early historians to have +been engaged in the Mediterranean about the period referred to. + +His son, Ferdinand Columbus, distinctly states that, “it was in Portugal +that the admiral began to surmise, that, if the Portuguese sailed so far +south, one might also sail westward, and find lands in that direction.” + +The period of Christopher Columbus’s sojourn in Portugal was from 1470 to +the close of 1484, during which time he made several voyages to the coast +of Guinea in the Portuguese service. While at Lisbon he married Felipa +Moñiz de Perestrello, daughter of that Bartollomeu Perestrello to whom +Prince Henry had granted the commandership of the island of Porto Santo. +For some time Columbus and his wife lived at Porto Santo with the widow +of Perestrello, who, observing the interest he took in nautical matters, +spoke much to him of her husband’s expedition, and handed over to him the +papers, journals, maps, and nautical instruments, which Perestrello had +left behind him.[12] + +“It was not only,” says Ferdinand Columbus (see _Vida_, cap. 8), “this +opinion of certain philosophers, that the greatest part of our globe +is dry land, that stimulated the admiral; he learned, also, from many +pilots, experienced in the western voyages to the Azores and the Island +of Madeira, facts and signs which convinced him that there was an unknown +land towards the west.” Martin Vicente, pilot of the King of Portugal, +told him that at a distance of four hundred and fifty leagues from Cape +St. Vincent, he had taken from the water a piece of wood sculptured +very artistically, but not with an iron instrument. This wood had been +driven across by the west wind, which made the sailors believe, that +certainly there were on that side some islands not yet discovered. Pedro +Correa, the brother-in-law of Columbus, told him, that near the island +of Madeira he had found a similar piece of sculptured wood, and coming +from the same western direction. He also said that the King of Portugal +had received information of large canes having been taken up from the +water in these parts, which between one knot and another would hold nine +bottles of wine; and Herrera (Dec. 1, lib. 1, cap. 2) declares that the +king had preserved these canes, and caused them to be shown to Columbus. +The colonists of the Azores related, that when the wind blew from the +west, the sea threw up, especially in the islands of Graciosa and Fayal, +pines of a foreign species. Others related, that in the island of Flores +they found one day on the shore two corpses of men, whose physiognomy and +features differed entirely from those of our coasts. Herrera, perhaps +from the MSS. of Las Casas, says, that the corpses had broad faces, +different from those of Christians. The transport of these objects was +attributed to the action of the west winds. The true cause, however, was +the great current of the Gulf or Florida stream. The west and north-west +winds only increase the ordinary rapidity of the ocean current, prolong +its action towards the east, as far as the Bay of Biscay, and mix the +waters of the Gulf stream with those of the currents of Davis’ Straits +and of North Africa. The same eastward oceanic movement, which in the +fifteenth century carried bamboos and pines upon the shores of the Azores +and Porto Santo, deposits annually on Ireland, the Hebrides, and Norway, +the seeds of tropical plants, and the remains of cargoes of ships which +had been wrecked in the West Indies.[13] + +While availing himself of these sources of information, Columbus studied +with deep and careful attention the works of such geographical authors +as supplied suggestions of the feasibility of a short western passage +to India. Amongst these, the _Imago Mundi_ of Cardinal Pierre d’Ailly +(Petrus de Aliaco) was his favourite, and it is probable that from it +he culled all he knew of the opinions of Aristotle, Strabo, and Seneca, +respecting the facility of reaching India by a western route. Columbus’s +own copy of this work is now in the cathedral of Seville, and forms one +of the most precious items in the valuable library, originally collected +by his son Ferdinand, and bequeathed to the cathedral on condition of +its being constantly preserved for public use. It contains many marginal +notes in his own handwriting, but of comparatively little importance. + +The fondness of Columbus for the works of Pierre d’Ailly, a Frenchman, +has caused a recent French writer, M. Margry, to put forth the empty +pretension that the discovery of America was due to the influence of +French teaching, whereas, not only was the _Imago Mundi_ itself a +compilation from ancient authors, but the first edition was not printed +till many years after Columbus had devoted himself to the purpose +which ended in his great discovery, for his famous correspondence +with Toscanelli, of which I shall presently speak, occurred in 1474. +M. Margry, indeed, _asserts_, but without giving his authority, +that in the Columbian Library at Seville are D’Ailly’s treatises +_printed at Nuremberg in 1472_. This is in contravention of all the +bibliographers—Panzer, Ebert, Hain, Serna Santander, Lambinet, and Jean +de Launoy. + +The earliest date assigned to the first edition of the _Imago Mundi_, +is _about_ 1480 by Serna Santander, 1483 (?) by Lambinet, while Jean +de Launoy, in his _Regii Navarræ Gymnasii Parisiensis Historia_, +Parisiis, 1677, tom. ii, page 478, distinctly gives it the date of +1490. Humboldt, who had Columbus’s copy in his hands, and who, as the +subject was especially his own, cannot be suspected of sleeping over +such an important point, adopts De Launoy’s date of 1490, while Lambinet +gives the queried date of 1483 from actual collation with another work +printed in that year, at Louvain, in the very identical type, by John of +Westphalia. In the recently published second volume of the _Ensayo de +una bibliotheca de libros españoles raros_, por Don Bartolomé Gallardo, +is a list of the books in the Columbian Library, but D’Ailly’s _Imago +Mundi_ is not therein mentioned, although his _Quæstiones_, printed much +later by Jean Petit at Paris, a far less important book, is inserted. The +omission is to be regretted, as we might have hoped for some illustrative +comments from the author. + +But perhaps it may be suggested that Columbus may have possessed, or +seen, a _manuscript_ copy of Pierre d’Ailly at a yet earlier period. +We will willingly suppose it for the sake of the argument; but even +then the reasoning will fail, for I find that the very portion of the +_Imago Mundi_, written in 1410, which is assumed to have supplied the +inspiration for the discovery of America, and which Columbus quoted in +his letter to Ferdinand and Isabella from Haiti in 1498, is _taken by +Pierre d’Ailly, without acknowledgment, almost word for word, from the +“Opus Majus,” of Roger Bacon_, written in 1267, a hundred and forty-three +years before, as will be seen at page 183 of that work, printed Londini, +1733, fol. See Humboldt, _Examen Critique_, tom. i, pp. 64-70. + +Unfortunately Roger Bacon was not a Frenchman, but there remains for +M. Margry the consolatory fact that no Englishman is likely to avail +himself of the circumstance which I have just enunciated, to claim +for his countrymen the honour of having inspired Columbus with the +idea which led to the discovery of America, although, by M. Margry’s +process of reasoning, he might do so if he would. True, Roger Bacon +had been a student in the University of Paris; but this fact did not +communicate the character of French inspiration to the ancient authors +whose statements he quotes. True also (but this is a circumstance either +unknown to or unnoticed by M. Margry), Ferdinand Columbus tells us that +his father was principally influenced in his belief of the smallness of +the space between Spain and Asia, by the opinion of the Arab astronomer, +Al Fergani, or Alfragan, to that effect; and it is further true that +Alfragan is further treated of by Pierre d’Ailly, in his _Mappa Mundi_. +This is a separate work from the _Imago Mundi_, although it happens +to have been printed with it, at a period which we have shown to be +posterior to Columbus’s correspondence with Toscanelli, in 1474. + +It follows, therefore, that either: 1st, the great explorer obtained +his knowledge of Alfragan’s opinion through one of the Arabo-Latin +translations, to which he seems to have had recourse during his +cosmographical studies in Portugal and Spain (see Humboldt, _Examen +Critique_, tom. i, p. 83), in which case French influence is eliminated; +or 2ndly, he derived it from a manuscript of Pierre d’Ailly before +1474, which there is no evidence to show; or 3rdly, he derived it +from the printed copy of Pierre d’Ailly, in which case the influence +of Alfragan on his mind could not have been primarily suggestive, but +only corroborative of conclusions to which he had come several years +before that book was printed. And in either of the two latter cases, the +information supplied by Alfragan would not become French because adduced +by a Frenchman, unless we introduce into serious history a principle +analogous to the old conventional English blunder of giving to the toys +manufactured in Nuremberg the name of “Dutch toys,” because imported +through Holland. + +The suggestions derived from these works were corroborated by the +narratives of Marco Polo and Sir John Mandeville, whose reports of the +vast extent of Asia eastward led to the reasonable inference, that the +western passage to the eastern confines of that continent could not +demand any considerable length of time. The natural tendency of his +thoughts to nautical enterprise being thus fostered by the works that he +studied, and by the animating accounts of recent adventurers, as well as +by the glorious prospects which the broad expanse of the unknown world +opened up to his view, we find that in the year 1474 his ideas had formed +for themselves a determined channel, and his grand project of discovery +was established in his mind as a thing to be done, and done by himself. +The combined enthusiasm and tenacity of purpose which distinguished +his character, caused him to regard his theory, when once formed, as +a matter of such undeniable certainty, that no doubts, opposition, or +disappointment, could divert him from the pursuit of it. It so happened +that while Columbus was at Lisbon a correspondence was being carried on +between Fernam Martins, a prebendary of that place, and the learned Paolo +Toscanelli, of Florence, respecting the commerce of the Portuguese to +the coast of Guinea, and the navigation of the ocean to the Westward. +This came to the knowledge of Columbus, who forthwith despatched by an +Italian, then at his house, a letter to Toscanelli, informing him of his +project. He received an answer in Latin, in which, to demonstrate his +approbation of the design of Columbus, Toscanelli sent him a copy of a +letter which he had written to Martins a few days before, accompanied by +a chart, the most important features of which were laid down from the +descriptions of Marco Polo. The coasts of Asia were drawn at a moderate +distance from the opposite coasts of Europe and Africa, and the islands +of Cipango, Antilla, etc., of whose riches such astonishing accounts had +been given by this traveller, were placed at convenient spaces between +the two continents. + +While all these exciting accounts must have conspired to fan the flame +of his ambition, one of the noblest points in the character of Columbus +had to be put to the test by the difficulty of carrying his project into +effect. The political position of Portugal, engrossed as it was with its +wars with Spain, rendered the thoughts of an application for an expensive +fleet of discovery worse than useless, and several years elapsed before a +convenient opportunity presented itself for making the proposition. + +Meanwhile Columbus was not idle. In the year 1477, he tells us, in a +letter quoted by his son, Don Ferdinand, that “_he sailed a hundred +leagues beyond the island of Thule, the southern part of which is distant +from the equinoctial line seventy-three degrees, and not sixty-three, +as some assert; neither does it lie within the line which includes the +west of Ptolemy, but is much more westerly. To this island, which is as +large as England, the English, especially those from Bristol, go with +their merchandize. At the time that I was there the sea was not frozen, +but the tides were so great as to rise and fall twenty-six fathoms. It +is true that the Thule of which Ptolemy makes mention lies where he says +it does, and by the moderns it is called Frislanda._” Whether the Færoe +islands [see ante, page xxiii], or Iceland, was alluded to is uncertain, +for nothing more is known of the voyage than is contained in this letter. +It is moreover supposed by his son, as has been already stated, that he +passed a considerable portion of his time at sea, with one or both of the +famous pirates of the same name, who were so many years engaged in the +Levant; but upon the whole of this portion of his history there rests an +impenetrable cloud of obscurity. + +About the year 1480, by the joint labours of the celebrated Martin +Behaim and the prince’s two physicians, Roderigo and Josef, who were the +most able geographers and astronomers in the kingdom, the astrolabe was +rendered serviceable for the purposes of navigation, as by its use the +seaman was enabled to ascertain his distance from the equator by the +altitude of the sun. + +Shortly after this invaluable invention Columbus submitted to the king +of Portugal his proposition of a voyage of discovery, and succeeded in +obtaining an audience to advocate his cause. He explained his views with +respect to the facility of the undertaking, from the form of the earth, +and the comparatively small space that intervened between Europe and +the eastern shores of Asia, and proposed, if the king would supply him +with ships and men, to take the direct western route to India across +the Atlantic. His application was received at first discouragingly, +but the king was at length induced, by the excellent arguments of +Columbus, to make a conditional concession, and the result was that the +proposition was referred to a council of men supposed to be learned +in maritime affairs. This council, consisting of the above-mentioned +geographers, Roderigo and Josef, and Cazadilla, bishop of Ceuta, the +king’s confessor, treated the question as an extravagant absurdity. The +king, not satisfied with their judgment, then convoked a second council, +consisting of a considerable number of the most learned men in the +kingdom; but the result of their deliberations was only confirmative of +the verdict of the first junta, and a general sentence of condemnation +was passed upon the proposition. As the king still manifested an +inclination to make a trial of the scheme of Columbus, and expressed a +proportionate dissatisfaction with the decisions of these two juntas, +some of his councillors, who were inimical to Columbus, and at the same +time unwilling to offend the king, suggested a process which coincided +with their own views, but which was at once short-sighted, impolitic, and +ungenerous. Their plan was to procure from Columbus a detailed account +of his design under the pretence of subjecting it to the examination of +the council, and then to dispatch a caravel on the voyage of discovery +under the false pretext of conveying provision to the Cape Verde Islands. +King John, contrary to his general character for prudence and generosity, +yielded to their insidious advice, and their plan was acted upon, but the +caravel which was sent out, after keeping on its westward course for some +days, encountered a storm, and the crew, possessing none of the lofty +motives of Columbus to support their resolution, returned to Lisbon, +ridiculing the scheme in excuse of their own cowardice. So indignant was +Columbus at this unworthy manœuvre, that he resolved to leave Portugal +and offer his services to some other country, and towards the end of 1484 +he left Lisbon secretly with his son Diego. The learned and careful Muñoz +states his opinion that he went immediately to Genoa, and made a personal +proposition to that government, but met with a contemptuous refusal; at +any rate, we are positively informed by Fernando Columbus that his father +went to Spain at the close of 1484. A curious surmise is expressed in a +note to Sharon Turner’s _History of England in the Middle Ages_, in which +the supposition is propounded of the possible identity of Christopher +Columbus with a person named Christofre Colyns, who is recorded in +some grants in the Harleian MSS. to have been military commandant of +Queenborough castle, in the isle of Sheppy, in 1484 and 1485. This man +is distinctly stated in the same grants to have held that post in April +1485, and it may be reasonably conjectured that the cessation of his +office would not take place till the accession of Henry VII, in August +in that year, which leaves but little time for his making his way to +Genoa, and subsequently reaching Spain, so as to make his application +to that court. Moreover, the impoverished condition in which Columbus +presented himself at the convent de la Rabida was very incompatible with +the probable pecuniary position of a person, who is described by the +grants in question not only to have held the prominent station already +mentioned, but to have had a ship given him, with an annuity of £100, +and an especial grant of money to enable him to supply himself with +habiliments of war. These considerations, combined with the statement of +Fernando Columbus just referred to, show that the supposition proposed by +Mr. Turner cannot be regarded as tenable. + +The interesting story of Columbus’s visit to the Franciscan convent of +Santa Maria de Rabida forms the first incident that we find recorded of +him after his arrival in Spain. It is well known that the lively interest +which the worthy prior of that convent, Fray Juan Perez de Marchena, took +in his guest, was the means, through the anticipated influence of his +friend Fernando de Talavera, of first leading Columbus to the Spanish +court, under the hope of obtaining the patronage of the king and queen. +Talavera, who was prior of the monastery of Prado, and confessor to the +queen, possessed great political interest. Juan Perez took advantage +of this influential position of his friend, and addressed him a letter +by the hands of Columbus, strongly recommending the project of the +latter to his favourable consideration, and requesting his advocacy of +it before the sovereigns. It was in the spring of 1486 that Columbus +first ventured to the Spanish court in the hope of gaining a favourable +audience. On reaching Cordova, however, he had the mortification to +find that Talavera, upon whose influence he mainly relied, regarded +his design as unreasonable and preposterous. The court also was at +that time so engrossed with the war at Granada, as to place any hope +of gaining attention to his novel and expensive proposition out of +the question. At length, at the close of 1486, the theory of Columbus, +backed as it was by his forcible arguments and earnest manner, gained +weight with the most important personage at court next to the sovereigns +themselves. This was Mendoza, archbishop of Toledo, and grand cardinal +of Spain; who, pleased with the grandeur of the scheme and the fervent +but clear-headed reasoning of Columbus, adopted his cause, and became +his staunch protector and friend. Through his means an audience was +procured with the sovereigns, and the result of the interview was the +expression of a favourable opinion, qualified by the necessity of an +appeal to the judgment of the literati of the country. But here again +Columbus found himself in a painful predicament, which it required all +his knowledge and prudence to escape from with safety. He was examined +at Salamanca by a council of ecclesiastics, and had to propound opinions +which appeared to be at variance with the descriptions contained in +the sacred Scriptures, and that at a period when the expression of any +sentiment approaching to heresy exposed its owner to the persecution of +the newly established Inquisition. The ignorance of cosmography, and the +blind conclusions drawn from various misinterpreted texts of Scripture, +formed mighty impediments to the pleadings of Columbus, and he began +to find himself in danger of being convicted not only of error, but of +heresy. One learned man of the number, however, Diego de Deza, tutor +to prince John, and afterwards archbishop of Seville, appreciated the +eloquent and lucid reasonings of the adventurer, and aiding him with his +own powers of language and erudition, not only gained for him a hearing, +but won upon the judgments of some of the most learned of the council. +Nevertheless, so important a question could not be hastily decided; +and the result of the united pedantry and sluggish superstition of the +learned body, was to expose the question to protracted argumentation or +neglect, while Talavera, who was at its head, and from whom Columbus had +hoped to receive the greatest assistance, was too busied with political +matters to bring it to a conclusion. At length, in the early part of +1487, the deliberations of the council were brought to a stand-still by +the departure of the court to Cordova, and were not resumed till the +winter of 1491. During this wearisome period the bustle and excitement +of the memorable campaign against the Moors, with its alternations of +triumphant festivity, together with the marriage of the princess Isabella +to the prince Alonzo, heir apparent of Portugal, were far too engrossing +to admit of much attention being given to the schemes of Columbus.[14] +At the close, however, of the year 1491, the learned conclave appears to +have recommenced its consultations; but upon being called upon by the +sovereigns for a decision, a report was returned to Talavera that the +scheme was considered by the general vote of the junta too groundless to +be recommended. Accordingly Talavera was commanded to inform Columbus +that the cares and expenses of the war precluded the possibility of +their highnesses engaging in any new enterprises, but that when it was +concluded, there would be both the will and the opportunity to give the +subject further consideration. Regarding this as nothing better than a +courteous evasion of his application, he retired wearied and disappointed +from the court, and, but for an attachment which he had formed at Cordova +which made him reluctant to leave Spain, he would in all probability have +repaired to France, under the encouragement of a favourable letter which +he had received from that quarter. + +The ensuing period till 1492 was spent in a succession of vexatious +appeals to the Spanish court, during which he had to contend with every +obstacle that ignorance, envy, or a pusillanimous economy could suggest. + +At length having overcome all difficulties, he set sail with a fleet of +three ships on the 3rd of August 1492, on his unprecedented and perilous +voyage. The ordinary difficulties which might be expected to occur in +so novel and precarious an adventure were seriously aggravated by the +alarming discovery of the variation of the needle, as well as by the +mutinous behaviour of his crew; and his life was upon the point of being +sacrificed to their impatience, when the fortunate appearance of land, +on the morning of the 12th of October, converted their indignation into +compunction, and their despondency into unbounded joy. + +With reference to the identity of the first landing place of Columbus +in America, I too readily adopted in 1847 the conclusions of Navarrete +that the Great Turk, the northernmost of the Turk islands, was the +true landfall. I did so under the following process of reasoning. My +predecessors in the consideration of the subject had been the learned +Juan Bautista Muñoz in 1793, Navarrete in 1825, Washington Irving in +1828, and the Baron Alexander von Humboldt in 1837. It was the opinion +of Muñoz that Guanahani was Watling’s Island. Navarrete, as just shown, +placed it in the Grand Turk, far to the east, while Washington Irving +and Humboldt made it to be Cat Island to the west. Such different +conclusions, formed by thoughtful men from an examination of the diary +of Columbus and other early documents, caused me to set a great value +upon any modern reconnaissance of the locality which might throw a fuller +light upon these documents and perhaps show which of the conclusions +was correct. Now, it so happened that a communication made a short time +previously to the New York Historical Society by Mr. Gibbs, a resident on +Turk’s Island, presented several points of evidence strongly confirmative +of the correctness of Navarrete’s deductions. The most important of Mr. +Gibbs’s arguments were the following. Columbus states in his journal +that there were several islands in sight from Guanahani. From the +island now called San Salvador, Mr. Gibbs found no land visible. The +journal speaks of soundings to the eastward of Guanahani: there were +none to the eastward of San Salvador. All the marks wanting at San +Salvador were found at Turk’s Island. The journal describes Guanahani +as well wooded, and having much water; a large lake in the centre, and +two several running streams flowing into the sea. Turk’s Island has +about one-third of its surface covered with lakes of salt and fresh +water; and a few years before vessels had sailed into one of the ponds. +Although the island was now without trees, Mr. Gibbs recollected some +remains of a forest existing in his youth. Moreover the journal makes +no allusion to the Great Bahama Bank, which must have been passed in +approaching San Salvador.[15] As Mr. Gibbs’s personal observation thus +appeared to corroborate the deductions of Señor de Navarrete, I yielded +to this combination of evidence and so submitted it to the reader. Since +that time, however, we have seen other arguments advanced, in which +local investigation, as well as the examination of the early documents, +have resulted in conclusions as divergent as those which preceded them. +Captain Becher, R.N., of our own Hydrographic Office, in his _Landfall of +Columbus_, published London, 1856, examining the question from a seaman’s +point of view, fell in with the opinion formed by Muñoz in 1793, that +Guanahani was Watling’s Island, while Señor de Varnhagen, in his _La +verdadera Guanahani de Colon_, published at Santiago, 1864, maintains +the unique opinion that it was the island of Mayaguana. + +Under these circumstances it has become a duty in me to revise my old +opinion; and while the process to which I shall resort will, as I hope, +finally settle this much vexed question, it is happily one which will not +lay me open to the charge of presumption in giving a judicial verdict +where men of such high renown have differed. I congratulate myself on +having found a means of enabling the reader to judge for himself by a +very simple mode of examination. Annexed is a fac-simile of Herrera’s +map of the Bahama Islands, as laid down from the original documents +in the handwriting of Columbus and his contemporaries, to which, as +official historiographer of the Indies in the sixteenth century, Herrera +had exclusive access; and side by side with it is a map, reduced from +the Admiralty survey, showing those islands as now known, and with +their modern names. I indulge the hope that no one will contest the +identification[16] of the respective islands laid down in the old map +with those which I have set forth as their correlatives in the modern +one, and if so, the Guanahani of Columbus will be plainly seen to be +Watling’s Island. The correctness of this identification is not only +confirmed, but made easily perceptible, by the fact that certain islands +of the series have retained their ancient names without change from +the beginning, thus affording stations for comparison which reduce the +chances of error to a minimum. This map of Herrera’s is of especial value +for the purpose, because while it embodies the information contained in +the map of the pilot Juan de la Cosa, who was with Columbus in his second +voyage (1493-96); it has the advantage over the latter in having been +made nearly a century later, and so contains the entire chain of islands, +many of which had not been explored at the time when De la Cosa laid down +his map in 1500. For the satisfaction of the reader, however, a reduction +of that part of De la Cosa’s map which shows these islands is here given. + +[Illustration: BAHAMA ISLANDS + +ANTONIO DE HERRERA + +1601.] + +[Illustration: BAHAMA ISLANDS + +MODERN] + + Herrera Modern + + _Bahama_ _Gᵗ. Bahama Iᵈ._ + _Bimini_ } _Andros Iˢ._ + _Habacoa_ } + _Cabeça de los Martires_ _Cay Sal Bank_ + _Yucayoneque_ _Gᵗ. Abaco Iᵈ._ + _Cigateo_ _Eleuthera_ + _Curateo_ _Little S. Salvador_ + _Guanima_ _S. Salvador or Cat Iᵈ._ + _Anonymous between Habacoa & Yuma_ _Great Exuma_ + _Guanihana_ _Watlings Iᵈ._ + _Yuma_ _Yuma_ + _Samana_ _Samana_ + _Xumeto_ _Crooked Iᵈ._ + _Yabaque_ _Acklin’s Iᵈ._ + _Mayaguana_ _Mariguana_ + _Caycos_ } _The Caycos Group_ + _Amana_ } + _Canciba_ _Turks Iˢ._ + _Abreojo_ _Mouchoir Carré_ + _Canaman_ _Silver Plate Bank_ + _Macarey_ _Navidad or Ship B._ + _Mira por vos_ _Miraporvos_ + _Ynagua_ _Gᵗ. Inagua_ + _La Tortuga_ _Tortuga_ + +But while it is hoped that the identity of Guanahani with Watling’s +Island will be admitted to be authoritatively established by this +comparison, it would be wanting in respect to those who have put forth +other claims not to show, I will not say the ground on which these claims +were advanced, but rather, for brevity’s sake, the points at which their +arguments fail. I adopt this plan on the principle that a chain is no +stronger than its weakest link. Of all these I fear none occupies so +disadvantageous a position as His Excellency Senhor de Varnhagen; for +having unfortunately adopted for his _protégée_ an island (Mayaguana), +which is represented _together with_ the island of Guanahani both on +De la Cosa’s and Herrera’s maps, I regret to say that he seems to me +to be _ipso facto_ put out of court, since no reasoning whatever could +by any possibility make identical two islands so markedly distinct +that several other islands are shown to lie between them. Washington +Irving, in advocating Cat Island, or the island at present called St. +Salvador, as the genuine Guanahani, adduces an examination of the route +of Columbus by Commander Alexander Slidell Mackenzie of the U.S. navy, +but which being principally addressed to the disproval of Navarrete’s +Turk’s Island, fails to establish Cat Island as the real landfall in +contradistinction to Watling’s Island. In examining this route I observe +a startling inaccuracy, which underlies the whole question. It is stated +that Columbus describes the island as _very large_. On referring to +Columbus’s logbook in Navarrete, I find it, on the contrary, called an +“isleta,” or islet, _i. e._ _small_ island, a term which could scarcely +be applied to an island forty-two miles long and the loftiest of the +Bahamas, which Cat Island is, whereas it would be correctly applied to +Watling’s Island, which is only twelve miles long, cut up by salt water +lagoons, separated from each other by small woody hills. At the close, +reference is made to the identity preserved to Cat Island as San Salvador +with that given by Columbus, and a remonstrance against disturbing the +ancient landmarks. But this is a _petitio principii_, inasmuch as at +the period when the name of San Salvador was first continuously applied +to Cat Island, viz., the middle of the seventeenth century, both map +makers and sailors were possessed of no better materials, nor even so +good, as ourselves, for coming to an accurate determination. Humboldt, +in accepting the conclusions of Commander Mackenzie as adopted by +Irving, thinks them confirmed by the map of Juan de la Cosa, of which I +have given an extract. But here I would observe that the attention of +the illustrious philosopher was bent on the point to which Mackenzie’s +paper was directed, viz., the disproval of Turk’s Island, and not to +a discrimination between Cat Island and Watling’s Island for the true +landfall. A glance will show that the imperfectness of the Bahama group +in Juan de la Cosa’s map renders it perfectly inadequate for settling so +minute a question. + +[Illustration: JUAN DE LA COSA + +1500.] + +It is needless to dwell here upon the events which followed this +discovery, as they are for the most part described in the letter here +translated. The main result of the voyage was the discovery of the +islands of St. Salvador, Santa Maria de la Concepcion, Exuma, Isabella, +Cuba, Bohio, the Archipelago off the south coast of Cuba (which he names +the Jardin del Rey, or King’s Garden), the islands of St. Catherine and +Hispaniola, on which latter Columbus erected the fortress of La Navidad, +and established a colony. Finally, on the 16th of January, he began to +steer his course for Spain, and he was already near the Azores when, on +the 12th February, the wind came on to blow violently, with a heavy +sea, and on the following day a frightful tempest broke upon them, which +obliged them to scud under bare poles. The storm continuing with unabated +violence, on the night of the 14th of February the two caravels parted +company, each following the course where the fury of the tempest drove +them. The sailors, giving themselves up for lost, offered up prayers and +vows; while the admiral, full of gloomy apprehensions that, after all, +his discovery might turn to nought, and his two sons be left destitute, +wrote upon parchment the account of the voyage, addressed it to the +king of Spain, with a promise, written outside, of one thousand ducats +to whomsoever would deliver it unopened. He then wrapped the packet up +in waxed cloth, and put it into the middle of a cake of wax, and after +inclosing it in a barrel well hooped and stopped up, he threw it into the +sea. He also placed on the poop of his own vessel a similar barrel, with +the same account enclosed, in order that if the ship went to the bottom +the barrel might float, and the narrative be saved. During this period +Columbus passed three days and nights without sleep, and with scanty and +bad food, so that when, on the 18th, he arrived at St. Mary’s, one of +the Azores, he felt his limbs quite crippled with exposure to the cold +and wet. There was a small church there, in a solitary place, dedicated +to the Virgin. Columbus, with the view of discharging the vows made +during the storm, sent half of his people on shore to the church, but +the Portuguese Governor of the island took them all prisoners, seized +their boat, and would have attacked Columbus’s own vessel, by orders, +as he said, received from his court, but for the firmness with which +the latter confronted him. Columbus indignantly asserted his own rank +and office, showed his letters patent sealed with the royal seal, and +threatened the Governor with the vengeance of the Castilian government. +After a few days, during which Columbus was driven from his anchorage +and had to beat about in great danger, the Governor, who in the interval +had thought better of the matter, liberated the prisoners and allowed +the caravel to proceed on her course. The state of the weather was most +terrible; the sea ran mountains high; the lightnings rent the clouds, +and the violence of the winds was such that the vessel was obliged to +scud under bare poles, in which state she arrived, at last, in the Tagus, +near Lisbon, on the 4th of March. Columbus immediately wrote a letter +to the King of Portugal, then at Valparaiso, informing him that he was +not come from Guinea but from the Indies, and requesting protection +for his caravel, and permission to bring it up to Lisbon. Not only was +this granted, but Columbus was immediately invited to Valparaiso and +was received by the monarch and his courtiers with the highest honours. +There were not wanting, however, some who would gladly have slain him to +prevent his going to Castile as the bearer of such great and glorious +news. The magnanimity of the king prevented this injustice, and leaving +Portugal in safety, on the 13th of March, Columbus arrived on the 15th +at the little port of Palos, from whence he had sailed on the 3rd of +August in the preceding year. Meanwhile Pinzon, the captain of the other +caravel, who in the late storm had been driven into Galicia, wished to +anticipate the admiral, but an express order from the court, forbidding +him to come without Columbus, made him actually die of spite and chagrin. +The reception of Columbus in Spain was such as the grandeur and dignity +of his unrivalled achievement deserved, and his entrance into Barcelona +was scarcely inferior to a Roman triumph.[17] + +Very shortly after his arrival the papal bull was obtained, which fixed +the famous line of demarcation, determining the right of the Spanish and +Portuguese to discovered lands. This line was drawn from the north to the +south pole, at a hundred leagues west of the Azores and Cape de Verde +islands; the discoveries to the westward were to belong to Spain, and +those to the eastward to Portugal. + +The seductive adulation of the court and the people did not, however, +divert the thoughts of Columbus from the preparations for a second +expedition. A stay of five months sufficed to make all ready for this +purpose; but these preparations gave rise to a malignant feeling towards +him on the part of Juan Rodriguez Fonseca, Bishop of Badajos, which +eventually led to such disgraceful ill-usage of the admiral as will +remain a stain upon the character of Spain while the name of Columbus +exists in the memory of man. + +On the 25th September 1493, Columbus took his departure from Cadiz, with +a fleet of three large ships of heavy burthen, and fourteen caravels, +and after a pleasant voyage reached the island of Dominica on the 3rd of +November. The letter of Dr. Chanca, here translated, gives an interesting +description of a considerable portion of the events of this voyage, but +it is to be regretted that his account terminates so abruptly, and the +“memorial” of Columbus to the sovereigns adds but few incidents of moment +to the narrative. We should be straining the necessary limits of a mere +introduction to these translated documents, were we to undertake to lead +the reader through the various history of this eventful period of the +life of Columbus. Such a task has been rendered perfectly unnecessary +by the much admired work of Washington Irving. Suffice it that we +state, that the principal geographical information supplied by this +voyage consists in the discovery of the Caribbee Islands, Jamaica, an +Archipelago (named by Columbus the Queen’s Gardens, supposed to be the +Morant Keys), Evangelista, or the Isle of Pines; and the island of Mona. + +He sailed with his fleet finally for Spain on the 28th of April, 1496, +and after nearly two months’ struggle against the trade-winds (during +which provisions became so reduced, that there was talk of killing, +and even eating the Indian prisoners), reached the bay of Cadiz on the +11th of June. The emaciated state of the crew when they disembarked, +presenting so mournful a contrast with the joyous and triumphant +appearance which they were expected to make, produced a very discouraging +impression upon the opinions of the public, and reflected a corresponding +depression upon the spirits of Columbus himself. He was reassured, +however, by the receipt of a gracious letter from the sovereigns inviting +him to the court, which was the more gratifying to him that he had feared +he had fallen into disgrace. He was received with distinguished favour, +and had a verbal concession of his request to be furnished with eight +ships for a third voyage. He was doomed, however, to have his patience +severely tried by the delay which occurred in the performance of this +promise, which was partly attributable to the engrossing character of +the public events of the day, and partly to the machinations of his +inveterate enemy, the bishop Fonseca. + +It was not till the 30th of May 1498, that he set sail from San Lucar, +with six of the eight vessels promised, the other two having been +despatched to Hispaniola, with provisions, in the beginning of the +year. When off Ferro he despatched three of his six vessels to the same +island, with a store of fresh supplies for the colony, while with his +remaining three he steered for the Cape Verde Islands, which he reached +on the 27th of June. On the 5th of July he left Boavista, and proceeded +southward and westward. In the course of this voyage the crews suffered +intensely from the heat, having at one time reached the fifth degree of +north latitude, but at length land was descried on the 31st of July,—a +most providential occurrence, as but one cask of water remained in the +ship. The island they came to formed an addition to his discoveries; and +as the first land which appeared consisted of three mountains, united +at their base, he christened the island, from the name of the Trinity, +La Trinidad. It was in this voyage that he discovered terra firma,[18] +and the islands of Margarita and Cubagua. His supposition that Paria had +formed the original abode of our first parents, is curiously described +in our translated letter; and to a careful observer the sagacity of his +mode of reasoning is perceptible even in a speculation so fanciful as +this. On reaching Hispaniola (to which he was drawn by his anxiety on +account of the infant colony), he had the mortification to find that his +authority had suffered considerable diminution, and that the colony was +in a state of organized rebellion. He had scarcely, by his active and at +the same time politic conduct, brought matters to a state of comparative +tranquillity, when a new storm gathered round him from the quarter of +the Spanish court. The hatred of his ancient enemies availed itself of +the clamour raised against him by some of the rebels who had recently +returned to Spain, and charges of tyranny, cruelty, and ambition were +heaped unsparingly upon him. The king and queen, wearied with reiterated +complaints, at length resolved to send out a judge, to inquire into his +conduct,—injudiciously authorizing him to seize the governorship in the +place of Columbus, should the accusations brought against him prove +to be valid. The person chosen was Don Francisco de Bobadilla, whose +character and qualifications for the office are best demonstrated by +the fact, that, on the day after his arrival in Hispaniola, he seized +upon the government before he had investigated the conduct of Columbus, +who was then absent; he also took up his residence in his house, and +took possession of all his property, public and private, even to his +most secret papers. A summons to appear before the new governor was +despatched to Columbus, who was at Fort Concepcion; and in the interval +between the despatch of the summons and his arrival, his brother, Don +Diego, was seized, thrown into irons, and confined on board of a caravel, +without any reason being assigned for his imprisonment. No sooner did +the admiral himself arrive, than he likewise was put in chains, and +thrown into confinement. The habitual reverence due to his venerable +person and exalted character, made each bystander shrink from the task of +fixing the fetters on him, till one of his own domestics, described by +Las Casas as “a graceless and shameless cook,” filled up the measure of +ingratitude that he seemed doomed to experience, by riveting the irons, +not merely with apathy, but with manifest alacrity. In this shackled +condition he was conveyed, in the early part of October, from prison to +the ship that was to convey him home; and when Andreas Martin, the master +of the caravel, touched with respect for Columbus, and deeply moved at +this unworthy treatment, proposed to take off his irons, he declined +the offered benefit, with the following magnanimous reply: “Since the +king has commanded that I should obey his governor, he shall find me as +obedient in this as I have been to all his other orders; nothing but +his command shall release me. If twelve years’ hardship and fatigue; +if continual dangers and frequent famine; if the ocean first opened, +and five times passed and repassed, to add a new world, abounding with +wealth, to the Spanish monarchy; and if an infirm and premature old age, +brought on by these services, deserve these chains as a reward, it is +very fit I should wear them to Spain, and keep them by me as memorials to +the end of my life.” This in truth he did; for he always kept them hung +on the walls of his chamber, and desired that when he died they might be +buried with him. + +His arrival in Spain in this painful and degraded condition produced +so general a sensation of indignation and astonishment, that a warm +manifestation in his favour was the immediate consequence. A letter (here +translated), written by him to Doña Juana de la Torre, a lady of the +court, detailing the wrongs he had suffered, was read to queen Isabella, +whose generous mind was filled with sympathy and indignation at the +recital. The sovereigns hastened to order him to be set at liberty, +and ordered two thousand ducats to be advanced, for the purpose of +bringing him to court with all distinction and an honourable retinue. +His reception at the Alhambra was gracious and flattering in the highest +degree; the strongest indignation was expressed against Bobadilla, with +an assurance that he should be immediately dismissed from his command, +while ample restitution and reward were promised to Columbus, and he had +every sanction for indulging the fondest hopes of returning in honour and +triumph to St. Domingo. But here a grievous disappointment awaited him; +his re-appointment was postponed from time to time with various plausible +excuses. Though Bobadilla was dismissed, it was deemed desirable to +refill his place for two years, by some prudent and talented officer, +who should be able to put a stop to all remaining faction in the colony, +and thus prepare the way for Columbus to enjoy the rights and dignities +of his government both peacefully and beneficially to the crown. The +newly-selected governor was Nicolas de Ovando, who, though described by +Las Casas as a man of prudence, justice, and humanity, certainly betrayed +a want both of generosity and justice in his subsequent transactions with +Columbus. It is possible that the delay manifested by the sovereigns +in redeeming their promise might have continued until the death of +Columbus, had not a fresh stimulant to the cupidity of Ferdinand been +suggested by a new project of discovering a strait, of the existence of +which Columbus felt persuaded from his own observations, and which would +connect the New World which he had discovered with the wealthy shores +of the east. His enthusiasm on the subject was heightened by an emulous +consideration of the recent achievements of Vasco da Gama and Cabral, the +former of whom had, in 1497, found a maritime passage to India by the +Cape, and the latter, in 1500, had discovered for Portugal the vast and +opulent empire of Brazil. The prospect of a more direct and safe route +to India than that discovered by da Gama, at length gained for Columbus +the accomplishment of his wish for another armament; and, finally, on the +9th of May, 1502, he sailed from Cadiz on his fourth and last voyage of +discovery. + +It is painful to contrast the splendour of the fleet with which Ovando +left Spain to assume the government of Hispaniola, with the slender and +inexpensive armament granted to Columbus for the purpose of exploring an +unknown strait into an unknown ocean, the traversing of whose unmeasured +breadth would complete the circumnavigation of the globe. Ovando’s fleet +consisted of thirty sail, five of them from ninety to one hundred and +fifty tons burden, twenty-four caravels of from thirty to ninety tons, +and one bark of twenty-five tons; and the number of souls amounted to +about two thousand five hundred. The heroic and injured man, to whose +unparalleled combination of noble qualities, the very dignity which +called for all this state was indebted for its existence, had now in +the decline of his years and strength, and stripped both of honour and +emolument, to venture forth with four caravels,—the largest of seventy, +and the smallest of fifty tons burthen—accompanied by one hundred and +fifty men, on one of the most toilsome and perilous enterprises of which +the mind can form a conception. + +On the 20th of May he reached the Grand Canary, and starting from thence +on the 25th, took his departure for the west. Favoured by the trade +winds, he made’a gentle and easy passage, and reached one of the Caribbee +Islands, called by the natives Matinino (Martinique), on the 15th of +June. After staying three days at this island, he steered northwards, +and touched at Dominica, and from thence directed his course, contrary +to his own original intention and the commands of the sovereigns, to +St. Domingo. His reason was that his principal vessel sailed so ill +as to delay the progress of the fleet, which he feared might be an +obstacle to the safety and success of the enterprise, and he held this +as a sufficient motive for infringing the orders he had received. On +his arrival at San Domingo, he found the ships which had brought out +Ovando ready to put to sea on their return to Spain. He immediately +sent to the governor to explain that his intention in calling at the +island was to procure a vessel in exchange for one of his caravels, +which was very defective; and further begged permission for his squadron +to take shelter in the harbour, from a hurricane, which, from his +acquaintance with the prognostics of the weather, he had foreseen was +rapidly approaching. This request was ungraciously refused; upon which +Columbus, though denied shelter for himself, endeavoured to avert the +danger of the fleet, which was about to sail, and sent back immediately +to the governor to entreat that he would not allow it to put to sea +for some days. His predictions and requests were treated with equal +contempt, and Columbus had not only to suffer these insulting refusals +and the risk of life for himself and squadron, but the loud murmurings +of his own crew that they had sailed with a commander whose position +exposed them to such treatment. All he could do was to draw his ships +up as close as possible to the shore, and seek the securest anchorage +that chance might present him with. Meanwhile the weather appeared fair +and tranquil, and the fleet of Bobadilla put boldly out to sea. The +predicted storm came on the next night with terrific fury, and all the +ships belonging to the governor’s fleet, with the exception of one, +were either lost, or put back to San Domingo in a shattered condition. +The only vessel that escaped was the one which had been freighted with +some four thousand gold pieces, rescued from the pillage of Columbus’s +fortune. Bobadilla, Roldan, and a number of the most inveterate enemies +of the admiral, perished in this tremendous hurricane, while his own +fleet, though separated and considerably damaged by the storm, all +arrived safe at last at Port Hermoso, on the south of San Domingo. He +repaired his vessels at Port Hermoso, but had scarcely left the harbour +before another storm drove him into Port Brazil, more to the westward. +On the 14th of July he left this port, steering for terra firma, and +on the 30th discovered the small island of Guanaga or Bonacca, a few +leagues east of the bay of Honduras. He continued an eastern course, +and discovered the cape now known as Cape Honduras. While moving along +this coast, he experienced one of those frightful tempests to which the +tropics are liable, and of which he gives so impressive a description in +the letter we have translated. At length, after forty days’ struggle to +make as much as seventy leagues from the cape of Honduras, he reached a +cape, by doubling which he found a direct southward course open, offering +at the same time an unobstructed navigation and a favourable wind. To +commemorate this sudden relief from toil and danger, Columbus named this +point Cape _Gracias a Dios_, or “Thanks to God.” A melancholy occurrence +took place on the 16th of September, while they were anchored off this +coast. The boats had been sent up a large river to procure supplies of +wood and water, when, on returning, the encounter of the sea with the +rapid current of the river caused so violent and sudden a commotion, that +one of the boats was swallowed up, and all on board perished. On the +25th of September he reached Cariay, or Cariari, where he stayed till +the 5th of October. The next point was the Bay of Carumbaru, which was +the first place on that coast where he met with specimens of pure gold. +Leaving this bay on the 17th of October, he sailed along the coast of +Veragua, and here he was informed by the Indians of the wealthy country +of Ciguare, which he supposed to be some province belonging to the Grand +Khan, and also of a river ten days’ journey beyond Ciguare, which he +conceived to be the Ganges. On the 2nd of November he discovered Puerto +Bello, in which harbour he was detained till the 9th by stormy weather; +when, continuing his course eastward, he reached, near the end of the +month, a small harbour, to which he gave the name of El Retrete, or the +Cabinet. It was here that a continuance of stormy weather, in addition +to the murmurs of his crew at-being compelled to prosecute an indefinite +search, with worm-eaten ships, against opposing currents, determined +Columbus on relinquishing his eastward voyage for the present, and to +return in search of the gold mines of Veragua. But on altering his +course to the westward, he had the mortification to find the wind for +which he had long been wishing, come now, as if in direct opposition +to his adopted course, and for nine days he was exposed to so terrible +a storm that it was a marvel how his crazy vessels could outlive it. +At length, after a month’s anxiety and suffering, they anchored, on +the day of the Epiphany, at the mouth of a river called by the natives +Yebra, but which Columbus named Belem, or Bethlehem. Here a settlement +was formed, and here occurred the sad disasters and conflicts with the +natives, which he describes in his letter from Jamaica, and in which +the faithful and zealous Diego Mendez proved an eminently efficient +assistant to his much loved master. The history of this unhappy voyage, +the toils and perils of which were aggravated to Columbus by extreme +bodily suffering, closes by his reaching Jamaica, where he would in +all probability have perished, but for the devotedness and activity of +Mendez. The highly interesting description of that brave man’s exploits +on behalf of Columbus, has been quoted by Navarrete from his will, and is +here translated. When at length, through the agency of Mendez, two ships +arrived from Hispaniola to the assistance of the admiral, he was enabled, +on the 28th of June, 1504, to leave his wrecked vessels behind him, and +start with revived hopes for San Domingo, which he reached on the 13th of +August. His sojourn there was not, as may be judged, calculated to afford +him satisfaction or pleasure. The overstrained courtesy of the governor +offered but a poor alleviation to the rush of rankling feelings which the +past associations and present desolation of the place summoned up to his +mind. + +On the 12th of September he set sail for Spain, and the same tempestuous +weather which had all along tended to make this his last voyage the most +disastrous, did not forsake him now. The ship in which he came home +sprung her mainmast in four places in one tempest, and in a subsequent +storm the foremast was sprung, and finally, on the 7th of November, he +arrived, in a vessel as shattered as his own broken and care-worn frame, +in the welcome harbour of San Lucar. + +The two years which intervened between this period and his death +present a picture of black ingratitude on the part of the crown to this +distinguished benefactor of the kingdom, which it is truly painful to +contemplate. We behold an extraordinary man, the discoverer of a second +hemisphere, reduced by his very success to so low a state of poverty +that, in his prematurely infirm old age, he is compelled to subsist by +borrowing, and to plead, in the apologetic language of a culprit, for the +rights of which the very sovereign whom he has benefited has deprived +him. The death of the benignant and high-minded Isabella, in 1505, gave +a finishing blow to his hope of obtaining redress, and we find him thus +writing subsequently to this period to his old and faithful friend Diego +de Deza:—“It appears that his majesty does not think fit to fulfil that +which he, with the queen, who is now in glory, promised me by word and +seal. For me to contend for the contrary, would be to contend with the +wind. I have done all that I could do: I leave the rest to God, whom I +have ever found propitious to me in my necessities.” The selfish and +cold-hearted Ferdinand beheld his illustrious and loyal servant sink, +without relief, under bodily infirmity, and the palsying sickness of +hope deferred; and at length, on the 20th of May 1506, the generous +heart which had done so much without reward and suffered so much without +upbraiding, found rest in a world where neither gratitude nor justice is +either asked or withheld. + +His body was in the first instance buried at Valladolid, in the parish +church of Santa Maria de la Antigua, but was transferred, in 1513, to +the Cartuja de las Cuevas, near Seville, where a monument was erected +over his grave with the memorable inscription,— + + A CASTILLA Y A LEON + NUEVO MUNDO DIÓ COLON. + +In the year 1536, both his body, and that of his son Diego, who had been +likewise buried in the Cartuja, were transported to St. Domingo, and +deposited in the cathedral of that city. From hence they were removed to +Havannah in 1795, on the cession of Hispaniola to the French, and the +ashes of the immortal discoverer now quietly repose in the cathedral +church of that city.[19] + +But injustice, unhappily, was not buried with Columbus in the tomb. It +was but one twelvemonth after his death that an attempt was made, and +only too successfully, to name the new world which he had discovered, +after another, who was not only his inferior, but his pupil in the +school of maritime enterprise. In an obscure corner of Lorraine, at the +little cathedral town of St. Dié, a cluster of learned priests, who had +there established a printing-press under the auspices of René II, Duke +of Lorraine, suggested to give to the newly discovered continent the +name of the Florentine, Amerigo Vespucci, whose nautical career did not +commence till after Columbus had returned from his second voyage to the +western hemisphere. The first time that the name of Amerigo came into +notice was in the year 1504, when Johann Ottmar published at Augsburg the +_Mundus Novus_, a description of Vespucci’s third voyage, now extremely +rare, embodied in a letter addressed by Vespucci himself to Lorenzo di +Pier Francesco de’ Medici. In this voyage, which occupied from May 1501 +to September 1502, he was in the service of Portugal, and explored the +coasts of South America as far as beyond the fifty-second degree. But +it was not till May, 1507, when Columbus had been a twelvemonth dead, +that the world was informed of four voyages professed to have been made +by Vespucci, of which the one just mentioned was only the third, the +two former having been made, as he states, in the service of Spain. As +the first of these was asserted to have taken place between May 20th, +1497, and October, 1499 [say 1498], and, if correct, would involve the +discovery by him not only of the north coasts of South America, but a +large extent of the coast of North America also, and that in priority of +the claims both of Cabot and Columbus as regards the discovery of the +American continent, it has been a matter of keen interest to many to +examine minutely the correctness of Vespucci’s claim to having made this +voyage. + +It would be out of place here to enter into the complicated arguments +in which this question is involved; but I have elsewhere shown[20] on +how frail a tenure the claim in question is founded. In the same place +I have also traced in detail the mode adopted for giving to the New +World the name of Vespucci instead of that of Columbus, who, by the +exercise of such transcendently superior qualities had earned for himself +that honour. I will here sketch it in brief. Vespucci was an intimate +friend of the Giocondi family, one of whom, the celebrated architect, +Fra Giovanni Giocondi, who built the bridge of Nôtre Dame at Paris, +was the translator into Latin of Vespucci’s letter to Lorenzo di Pier +Francesco de’ Medici describing his third voyage. A young Alsatian, +named Mathias Ringmann, who was at this time pursuing his studies in +Paris, appears to have made the acquaintance of this Giocondi and to +have carried back with him into Alsace an admiration for Vespucci and +his achievements, which showed itself in his editing at Strasbourg in +1505, Giocondi’s translation of Vespucci’s letter, accompanied by some +laudatory verses in Latin by himself. Now in the neighbouring province of +Lorraine, one of the canons of the cathedral at St. Dié, Walter Lud, who +was secretary to René II, Duke of Lorraine, had already for many years +established a gymnasium or college under the duke’s auspices, and also a +printing-press. Ringmann, better known in literature by the pseudonym of +Philesius, became professor of Latin at the college and corrector of the +press in the printing-office. On the 25th of April, 1507, _a year after +the death of Columbus_, one of the members of this little clique, named +Martin Waldseemüller, otherwise known as Hylacomylus, produced from this +press a small work entitled _Cosmographiæ Introductio_, to which was +appended a Latin translation of Vespucci’s four voyages, as described by +himself and addressed to Duke René II, although it can be shown by the +contents to have been really intended for Pietro Soderini, Gonfaloniere +of Florence, who had been Vespucci’s schoolfellow. In my _Life of +Prince Henry the Navigator_, I have ventured to suggest the process +by which these letters, intended for another, came to be addressed to +Duke René, and that suggestion supplies the solution of some riddles, +there treated of, which it would be out of place to speak of here. We +have seen the connection of the Giocondi with Vespucci. We have seen, +also, the connection of Ringmann with the work of Fra Giovanni Giocondi +and his interest in the glory of Vespucci. This interest he infuses +into the little circle of St. Dié, and we can imagine their pleasure at +having the opportunity of blazoning forth to the world, from their own +printing-press, a story which would throw so bright a reflection on the +obscurity of their secluded valley. But in the little book thus issued, +not only were printed for the first time four voyages of Vespucci, but +also a suggestion was made that from his name, Amerigo, should be given +the name of “Amerige” or “America” to the newly-discovered western world. +In September of the same year, 1507, appeared a re-issue of the same +book; and in 1509 a new edition of it was issued from the printing-press +of Johann Grüninger of Strasburg. In this same year, 1509, three years +before the death of Vespucci, the name of America appears, as if it were +already accepted as a well-known denomination, in an anonymous work +entitled _Globus Mundi_, printed also at Strasburg. But although this +work is anonymous, it was my good fortune to detect from the colophon, +in which occur the words “Adelpho Castigatore,” that the source of the +suggestion of the name of America in the one case, and of the adoption of +the suggestion in the other, are either identical or in close proximity, +inasmuch as the already mentioned re-issue of the _Cosmographiæ +Introductio_ in 1509, has in the colophon, “Johanne Adelpho Mulicho +Argentinensi Castigatore.” Now, Mulicho merely means native of Muhlingen, +near Strasburg, and this Adelphus, so named, was a physician established +in that city, and reviser of both the one work and the other. + +The first place in which we find the name of America used a little +further a-field, is in a letter dated Vienna, 1512, from Joachim Vadianus +to Rudolphus Agricola, and inserted in the _Pomponius Mela_ of 1518, +edited by the former. The expression used is “America discovered by +Vesputius.”[21] But although this Vadianus, whose real name was Joachim +Watt, writes from Vienna in 1512, I find that he was a native of St. +Gall, whence in 1508, being then twenty-four years old, he went to the +High School of Vienna. His learned disputations and verses gained him +the chair of the professorship of the liberal arts at that school, and +he subsequently studied medicine, of which faculty he obtained the +doctorate. This attachment to the study of medicine recalls to my mind a +fact which awakens a suspicion that he may have been a personal friend of +John Adelphus, just referred to, and if so, of the little confraternity +of St. Dié. Before Adelphus established himself in Strasburg, he had +practised as a physician at Schaffhausen, and this at the time when +Joachim Watt was a young man, still resident at St. Gall, which is +distant from Schaffhausen seventy English miles, a distance which would +offer very little hindrance to Swiss intercommunication. Whether this +suspicion be worth anything or no, I advance it as a possible clue to +yet further researches which may show the process by which this spurious +appellation of America became adopted, through the efforts of a small +cluster of men in an obscure corner of France. + +The earliest engraved map of the new world yet known as bearing the name +of America, is a mappe-monde by Appianus, bearing the date of 1520, +annexed to the edition by Camers of the Polyhistoria of Julius Solinus +(_Viennæ Austr._, 1520), and a second time to the edition of _Pomponius +Mela_ by Vadianus, printed at Basle in 1522. The earliest manuscript +map hitherto found bearing that name, is in a most precious collection +of drawings by the hand of Leonardo da Vinci, now in Her Majesty’s +collections at Windsor, to which, from an examination of its contents, I +have assigned the date of 1513-14.[22] + +I have thus endeavoured to unravel the intricate story of a great +and irreparable injustice. No one can deny to Vespucci the credit of +possessing courage, perseverance, and a practical acquaintance with the +art of navigation; but he had never been the commander of an expedition, +and had it not been for the great initiatory achievement of Columbus, we +have no reason to suppose that we should ever have heard his name. + +“To say the truth,” as has been well remarked by the illustrious Baron +von Humboldt, “Vespucci shone only by reflection from an age of glory. +When compared with Columbus, Sebastian Cabot, Bartolomé Dias, and Da +Gama, his place is an inferior one. The majesty of great memories seems +concentrated in the name of Christopher Columbus. It is the originality +of his vast idea, the largeness and fertility of his genius, and the +courage which bore up against a long series of misfortunes, which have +exalted the Admiral high above all his contemporaries.” + +A tardy tribute has been at length paid to his memory by his +fellow-citizens of Genoa, and the first stone of a monument in +commemoration of his achievements was laid in that city on the 27th of +September, 1846, and completed in 1862. There is now serious talk of his +canonization. + +Among the many so-called portraits of Columbus, too numerous to be +detailed here, but for elaborate notices of which the reader is referred +to the works mentioned at foot,[23] there is not one that can be regarded +as unquestionably authentic. It was at the suggestion of my friend +M. Ferdinand Denis, the distinguished Librarian of the Ste. Geneviève +in Paris, that I have inserted as the frontispiece to this volume a +chromolithograph fac-simile of the St. Christopher on the famous map +of Juan de la Cosa, Columbus’s pilot, made in 1500. My friend most +reasonably suggests that, in this case, St. Christopher represented +Christopher Columbus carrying the Christian faith across the Atlantic, +and that the face would be a portrait. In corroboration of his idea, +I may quote the words of Herrera, whose possession of the Columbian +documents enabled him to speak with accuracy. He says, “Columbus was +tall of stature, with a long and imposing visage. His nose was aquiline; +his eyes blue; his complexion clear, and having a tendency to a glowing +red; the beard and hair red in his youth, but his fatigues early turned +them white.” The cap and costume seem also less those of the saint than +of the sailor. It is to my late revered and dear friend, His Excellency +the Count de Lavradio, that I am indebted for procuring the coloured +photograph from the original map on his visit to Madrid in 1869. The +chromolithograph has been prepared in Berlin. + + +FOOTNOTES: + +[1] The Society possesses, in my _Early Voyages to Terra Australis_, +printed in 1859, the evidence of these discoveries; and in my _Prince +Henry the Navigator_, published in 1868, will be seen the procession of +these discoveries from the Prince’s efforts. + +[2] The _li_ is about one-tenth of the common league. + +[3] The most strenuous advocate for the truth of the tradition that +America was discovered by Prince Madoc, was Dr. John Williams of +Sydenham, who wrote two tracts on the subject in the year 1791 and 1792, +which, if betraying a little of the bias of prejudice, yet manifest a +degree of research that does great credit to his industry and zeal. + +[4] A copy of this map is given in the second vol. of Sastre’s _Mercurio +Italico_, Lond. 1789, 8vo., and a photograph of it was published in +Venice in 1869 by H. F. and M. Münster. + +[5] The work quoted is Cordeyro’s _Historia Insulana das Ilhas a Portugal +sugeytas no Oceano Occidental_, Lisbon 1717. + +[6] For a demonstration that the discovery of the east coast of North +America was made by Sebastian Cabot in 1497, a year before Columbus +reached the terra firma, I must refer the reader to a paper of mine read +before the Society of Antiquaries on May 5, 1870, and now being printed +for the _Archæologia_. + +[7] Humboldt has fallen into an error in saying that Joachim Lelewel, +in his _Pisma pomniejsze geogr. historyczné_, 1814, has recently called +up fresh attention to this Polish pilot. The editor has examined the +work carefully from beginning to end, and does not find the name even +once mentioned, although the page to which reference is made contains +allusions to early discoveries. + +[8] A copy of this globe is given in Dr. F. W. Ghillany’s _Geschichte des +Seefahrers Ritter Martin Behaim_, Nürnberg, 1853, 4to. + +[9] _Historie del S. D. Fernando Colombo_, cap. iv. + +[10] “_Siendo yo nacido en Genova”; and “mando al dicho Don Diego, mi +hijo, a la persona que heredare el dicho mayorazgo que tenga y sostenga +siempre en la Ciudad de Genova una persona de nuestro linage ... pues que +della salí y en ella nací._” + +[11] Another Caseneuve, probably of this family, is said by De Bry to +have been captain of the fourth expedition of the French to Mexico, in +the year 1567. + +[12] Las Casas, in his _History of the Indies_, tells us distinctly that +Columbus derived much information from Perestrello’s maps and papers, +and adds that “in order to acquaint himself practically with the method +pursued by the Portuguese in navigating to the coast of Guinea, he sailed +several times with them as if he had been one of them.” Las Casas says +that he learned this from the admiral’s son Diego, adding that “some time +before his famous voyage Columbus resided in Madeira, where news of fresh +discoveries was constantly arriving, and this,” he says, “appeared to +have been the occasion of Christopher Columbus coming to Spain, and the +beginning of the discovery of this great world” (America). + +[13] Humboldt, _Examen Critique_, vol. ii, p. 246-251. + +[14] It was shortly after this period that Bartholomew Columbus was +sent by his brother to king Henry VII, to offer his services in a +voyage of navigation; the king is said to have received the offer “con +allegro volto”—“with a cheerful countenance”; but his acceptance of the +proposition was rendered null by Columbus having in the interim attached +himself to the service of queen Isabella. + +[15] Vide _Athenæum_ for 1846, page 1274. + +[16] While agreeing with Captain Becher in the identification of +Guanahani with Watling’s Island, I find that officer entirely at issue +with the Diary of Columbus in making him anchor near the N.E. end of +the island, and then sail round its northern point. In a detailed Paper +on this subject, read by me on the 16th of September of this year, at +the Meeting of the Geographical Section of the British Association at +Liverpool, I had the honour of proving for the first time that the +first anchorage of Columbus in the New World was off the S.E. point +of Watling’s Island, a position which entirely tallies with all his +movements as mentioned in the Diary. + +[17] The following remark by Mr. George Sumner was kindly supplied to me +by that gentleman in 1847, as an interesting item connected with this +period of the history of Columbus:— + +From the brilliant description given by Irving and Prescott of the +arrival of Columbus at Barcelona, and of his reception there by the +Catholic sovereigns, it seemed to me as probable that some contemporary +account of this arrival and reception, as well as of the sojourn of +Columbus, might be found at Barcelona; and, while there in the spring +of 1844, I searched the admirably arranged archives of Aragon, and also +those of the city of Barcelona, for such notice, but without any success. +I could not so much as find a mention of the name of Columbus. + +The _Dietaria_, or day book, of Barcelona, notices the arrival of +ambassadors, the movements of the king and queen, and even records +incidents of as trifling note as those which in our day serve to fill the +columns of a court journal; yet not a word appears in regard to Columbus. + +How account for this silence? Is it another evidence of the old feeling +of jealousy between the Aragonese and Castilians, of which the student of +Spanish history meets so many proofs? Such was the opinion to which I was +forced, and such I found also was the interpretation given to it by the +intelligent Archevero, who had himself gone over this ground a few years +since at the request of Navarrete. The voyage of Columbus was undertaken +at the expense and for the benefit of the crown of Castile. It was not to +Aragon, but to Castilla and Leon, that Columbus gave a new world, and as +the Aragonese did not profit directly by this gift, they saw fit to treat +it and its donor with scornful silence. + +In one of the notes to the great work of Capmany,—_Memorias sobre la +ciudad de Barcelona_, 1789—he gives a list of distinguished men who have +enjoyed the hospitality of the city, and among them places the name of +Columbus, making no allusion however to any contemporary account of his +sojourn there. + +In the _Dietaria_ of Barcelona, under date 15th November 1492, is the +following entry:—“The king, queen, and primogenito, entered to-day the +city, and lodged in the palace of the bishop of Urgil in the Calle +Ancha.” This is followed by a description of the festivities which +followed. “1493, 4th February.—King and queen went to Alserrat. 14th—King +and queen returned to Barcelona.” + +As there appears no notice of the king having changed his abode after +taking possession of the palace in the Calle Ancha, it was probably there +that Columbus recounted to Isabella his adventures and his success. The +American pilgrim may still, in the beautiful Alcazar of the Moorish +kings, recall the figure of the discoverer of his land, standing in the +presence of the Catholic sovereigns of Spain;—in the cotton-spinning town +of Barcelona the besom of modern improvement has long since swept away +the palace of the bishop of Urgil. + +[18] It is well known that Columbus was preceded in the discovery of +terra firma by John Cabot in 1497. + +[19] I am indebted to Mr. George Sumner for the following copy of the +inscription on the tomb of Fernando Columbus, in the pavement of the +cathedral of Seville, and for the note which accompanies it:— + +“Aqui yaze el M. Magnifico S. D. Hernando Colon, el qual aplicó y gastó +toda su vida y hazienda en aumento de las letras, y juntar y perpetuar +en esta ciudad todos sus libros de todas las ciencias, que en su tiempo +halló y en reducirlo a quatro libros. Falleció en esta ciudad a 12 de +Julio de 1539 de edad de 50 años 9 meses y 14 dias, fue hijo del valeroso +y memorable S. D. Christ. Colon primero Almirante que descubrió las +Yndias y nuevo mundo en vida de los Cat. R. D. Fernando y D. Ysabel de +gloriosa memoria a 11 de Oct. de 1492 con tres galeras y 90 personas, y +partió del puerto de Palos a descubrirlas a 3 de Agosto antes, y Bolvió +a Castilla con victoria a 7 de Maio del Año Siguiente y tornó despues +otras dos veces ā poblar lo que descubrió. Falleció en Valladolid à 20 de +Agosto de 1506 años. + + “ROGAD A DIOS POR ELLOS.” + +Beneath this is described, in a circle, a globe, presenting the western +and part of the eastern hemispheres, surmounted by a pair of compasses. +Within the border of the circle is the same inscription as that which was +placed over Columbus himself at the Cartuja, with the exception of the +word “mundo” being placed before, instead of after, the word “nuevo”. + +Throughout all Spain I know of no other inscription to the memory of +Columbus. At Valladolid, where he died, and where his body lay for some +years, there is none that I could discover, neither is there any trace +of any at the Cartuja, near Seville, to which his body was afterwards +transferred, and in which his brother was buried. + +It is a striking confirmation of the reproach of negligence, in regard to +the memory of this great man, that in this solitary inscription in old +Spain, the date of his death should be inaccurately given. + + G. S. + +[20] See _Life of Prince Henry the Navigator_, pp. 367 to 379. + +[21] “Americam a Vespuccio repertam.” + +[22] See _Archæologia_, vol. xl, 1866. + +[23] Carderera (Valentin): Informe sobre los retratos de Cristóbal Colon, +su trage y escudo de Armas. Imprenta de la Real Academia de la historia. +Madrid. 1851. Small 4to. + +Feuillet de Conches (F). “Portraits de Christophe Colomb,” extrait de +la Revue contemporaine, T. xxv, 95ᵐᵉ livraison in 8ᵒ, and in the “Revue +Archéologique,” an article by Mr. Isidore de Lœwenstern, on the Mémoires +of MM. Jomard et Carderera respecting the portraits of Columbus. + + + + +A POEM + +COMPOSED BY GIULIANO DATI IN 1493, + +[FROM COLUMBUS’S FIRST LETTER,] + +And sung in Florence to announce the discovery of the New World. + + +LA LETTERA DELLISOLE CHE HA TROVATO NUOVAMENTE IL RE DISPAGNA. + + Omnipotente idio, che tucto regge, + donami gratia chio possa cantare + allaude tua & di tu sancta legge, + cosa che piaccia achi stara ascoltare + maxim al popol tuo & alla tua grege, + el qual nō resta mai magnificare, + como al ꝕsēte ha fatto nella Spagna, + delle isole trovate cosa magna. + + Io ho gia lecto degli antichi regi + & principi signori stanti in terra, + del re della soria & facti egregi, + & lebactaglie loro & la gran guerra, + & delle giostre gli acquistati pregi + di Bello lessi & selmio dir nō erra, + de persi, medi, & degli ateniensi, + Dāfinione & gli altri egregi immēsi. + + Et de lacedemoni le grandi entrate, + di Labores di Oreste & daltri assai, + del Principe Gisippo cose late, + come si legge so che inteso lhai, + di Tholomeo piu cose smisurate, + & del gran Faraone come saprai. + di judici & de regi de giudei, + che afaccia parlavano con lei. + + Et de latini lessi, & degli albani, + & di quel fiesolano Re Atalante, + de regi & consolati de romani, + & de tribuni lessi cose tante, + dedeci viri electi tanti humani, + & degli īmperadori potrei dir quāte + cose chi tengo nel mio pecto fisse. + ꝓ che sarian nel dir troppo plisse. + + che sio volesse tucti efacti dire + disopra nominati & altri assai, + certo farei latua mente stupire + maximi alcuni che nō ludiron mai, + q̃ste cose alte degne magne et mire + che se tu leggi tu letroverrai + invernacula lingua & ī latino, + si come narra un decto dagostino. + + Ma chi potessi leggere nel futuro + duno Alexādro magno papa sexto, + della sua creatione il modo puro, + grato a ciascūo anessū mai molesto, + & del primanno suo il magno muro, + che nō glipuo nessuno esser infesto + sesto alexādro pappa borgia ispano, + justo nel giudicare & tucto humano. + + Et chi leggesi poi del sua Ferrādo + christianissimo rege xꝕiani + che lisabella tiene al suo comādo, + unica sposa sua, che nelle mani + tanti reami indota allui donando, + gliha dati ītendi ben cō pēsier sani, + che glie re della spagna & di castella + & di leon tolecto villa bella. + + Simile re di cordube chiamato, + & poi dimutia re mipar che sia + & digalitia re incoronato, + dalgarbe re & tienla in sua balia, + re digranata sai che conquistato + diragona signor & divalēzia pia + conte mipar che sia dibarzalona, + & disicilia re isola buona. + + Di quāta altura principe mipare + & disardigna tien la signoria, + & di corsica sifa simil chiamare, + di q̃lla parte che glha in sua balia + & conte di serdeina appellare, + & dirosello conte par che sia + simile re mi pare che dimaiorica, + l’altro reame e poi della minorica. + + Et poi signor dibiscaia & molina, + delalsesiras signor chiamato, + dellasturias terra peregrina, + ꝓ tucto il mondo q̃sto e nominato, + tucto fedele della legge divina, + chi altro crede e mal dallui trattato + come sivede che nō e mai satio, + dimarrani giudei far ogni stratio. + + Pero il signore lha semꝕ īvicto facto, + che si puo uno agusto nominare, + ogni sua lega triegua legge o pacto, + mai nō sividde dallui maculare + lui nō derise mai savio ne macto + limosine per dio sempre fa fare + della chiesa zeloso a tucte lhore + come fedel, xꝕiano, & pio signore. + + Come mōstra lamagna ābascieria, + che glha mandato adar lubidiēza + al suo sesto Alexādro anima pia + che mai sivide tal magnificenza + in tucte cose la sua signoria + dimōstrā aver fra gli altri grā potēza + ī q̃sti magni ābascidor sispechi + chi nol credessi nōcti ꝕsti orecchi. + + Se io volessi e sua titoli dire, + o auditore io ti potrei tediare, + de sua reame io ti farei stupire, + sol que che lisabelela volse dare + indota a q̃sto Re o questo sire, + quando luso ꝓ marito pigliare + q̃sta isabella e dispagna Regina, + honesta doña savia & peregrina. + + Hor vo tornar almio primo tractato + dellisole trovate incognite a te + in q̃sto anno presente q̃sto e stato + nel millequatrocento novātatre, + uno che xꝕofan colōbo chiamato, + che e stato in corte del prefato Re + ha molte volte questo stimolato, + el Re ch’cerchi acrescere il suo stato. + + Dicendo, signor mio, io vo cercare + ꝓ che comprēdo che ce molta terra + che nostri antichi nō seppō trovare + & spero dacquistarle senza guerra, + se vostra signoria si vuol degnare + ajuto darmi che so que non erra + lamente mia spera nel signore + chimbrieve cidara rengo & honore. + + Voi mectetē la roba io la persona + non sara vostra signoria disfacta, + ispesse volte la fortuna dona + ꝓ picol prezo assai & non e macta + che sua sperāza tucto il mōdo sprona + savio e colui che dicercar sadacta + ꝑ che dice elvāgelio ī legge nuova + che chicercādo va spesso truova. + + Hō poi ch’ lebbe ilre piu volte udito + & facto carisposta sorridendo + xꝕofano ripigliando come ardito + q̃sto āno il re secōdo ch’ io cōprēdo + prese di dargli aiuto per partito + & disse il tuo sperare oggi cōmēdo + piglia una nave cō due carovelle + di q̃ste mie armate le piu belle. + + Et comādo de poi che gli sia dato + danari & roba q̃l che fa mestiero, + & poi dimolta gēte acompagnato + divotamente & cō buō pensiero, + al sommo dio che fu racomandato, + & alla madre sua & sancto piero, + & prese q̃ste cose, & poi licentia + dalre & laregina & sua clementia. + + Et navico piu giorni per perduto, + cō pena, con affanni & grāde stento, + pensa che na in mare no e mai tuto, + ma semꝕ cōbactēdo ī acqua & uēto + ꝓdesi spesso elguadagno eltrebuto, + & nōgli gioua dire io menepento + ma come piacqꝫ adio ch’ mai nōerra + in trentatre giornate pose in terra. + + Et messe dua desua huomini armati + a cercar ꝑle terre che han trouate, + seforce siscoprissin qualche aguati, + ma caminaron ben per tre giornate + che nōsi furon mai indrieto uolti, + & nō trouaron mai uille o brigate, + si che simarauiglia che camina + & piu chi e restato alla marina. + + Ma niēte di manco quella terra + era di uari fructi molto ornata, + se chi ha scripto i qua neldir nōerra, + mōtagne e ue daltura ismisurata, + & molti fiumi lacircūda & serra, + doue trouorun poi molta brigata, + sēza pāni, uestite, o arme, o scudi + ma tucti emēbri loro si erano nudi. + + Saluo chalcuna donna che coperte + tiene leparte genitale immonde, + cō bambagia tessuta, & di po certe + lhauen coperte con diuerse frōde, + & come uidon questi lediserte + forte fuggendo ciascun fina scōde, + & questi dua in drieto si tornauano, + & axꝕofano lo facto racontauano. + + Et xꝕofano & glialtri dismontati + armati tucti il paese cercando + isole molte & huomini trouati + come tu intenderai qui ascoltando + & glistendardi del Re ha rizati, + & a ciascuno il suo nome mutando, + come dira questa pistola magna, + da xꝕofano scripta al Re di spagna. + + Perchio so, signor mio, ch’ grā piacer̃ + hara la uostra magna signoria + quando potra intendere o sapere, + delle cose che io presi in mia balia, + ꝑ uirtu del signore & suo potere, + & simil della madre sua maria, + dal partir mio a trētatre giornate, + molte isole & grā gēte iho trouate. + + Lisola prima chio trouai, signore, + io lho ꝑ nome facta nominare + isola magna di san Saluadore, + & la seconda poi feci chiamare + conceptio Marie a suo honore, + di poi laterza feci baptezare + per uostra signoria ch’ tāto ornata + isola ferrandina lho nominata, + + Et la quarta Isabella fo chiamare, + ꝑ la Regina che tānto honorata, + & alla quinta il nome uolsi dare + che lisola Giouanna fia chiamata, + & la festa dun nome uolsi ornare + che cōgruo miparse a q̃lla fiata, + che Laspagnuola qlla sichiamasse, + per che mipar che cosi meritasse. + + Enomi son dellisole trouate + nel india, signor mio, como uiscriuo, + & questa & laltre sopra nominate + notitia auoi nedo signor mio diuo + trecēto uc̄tun miglio ho caminate, + & peruenuto alfin colsancto uliuo + dalla giouāna alla spagnuola elmar̃ + cīquātaquattro miglia largo apare. + + Et per septentrione lanauicai + cinquantaquattro miglia dimarina, + doue che alla spagna io arriuai, + inuerso loriente sauicina, + & per lalinea recta io caminai + da onde la spagnuola li confina + son c̄iquecēsessantaquattro miglia, + e lalargheza che q̄sta isola piglia. + + Et q̄sta & tucte laltre e molto forte, + ma q̄sta sopra laltre par fortissima, + potresi inanzi dare a tucte morte + ch’ una parte sacquisti piccolissima, + certo questo eildestino qsto e lesorte, + ch’ uostra signoria fan felicissima, + e dotata di fructi molte & uarie, + & liti, & porti, & cose necessarie, + + Et molti fiumi, & maxime mōtagne, + che son dalteza molto smisurate, + arbori, fonte, uccegli, & cose magne, + chauostri tempi no san mai trouate, + certo lamente mia signor ne piagne, + per lalegreza delle cose ornate, + di tucte cose cie se io non erro, + saluo ch’ nōsi truoua acciaio o ferro. + + Sonci di septe o uer docto ragioni + di palme che mifan marauigliare, + & se alzando gliocchi poni + pini uison che laria par toccare, + passere lusignuoli & altri doni, + che nonsi potre mai tucto narrare, + della bambagia un pondo ce infinito + & daltre cose assai ce inquesto lito. + + Arbori cison duna ragion fioriti + del mese di novembre chenoi siano + come ī ispagna, & ne suo degno liti, + liarberi sō elmagio, elmōte, elpiano, + si che no altri stiano tucti stupiti + ꝑ labōdantia che trouata habbiano, + sonci gli arberi uerdi & and lelor foglie, + chi credo che nō pdā mai lespoglie. + + Di reubarbaro ce tanta abōdantia, + & dicenamo daltra spetieria, + loro & largento, el metallo ciauāza, + maxime un fiume che per q̃sta uia, + che nō puo questa terra farne senza, + doue ho trouato cō mia fantasia, + che dimoltoro e piena quella rena, + sicome lacqua di quel fiume mena. + + Simil, signore, io uiuoglio auisare, + che inq̄stisola ce molta pianura, + doue difizi molti sipuon fare, + & castelle cipta cō magne mura, + che nō bisogna poi di dubitare, + ne dhauer chi cista nulla paura, + molte terre cison da feminare, + & depascer lebestie & nutricare. + + Ho po trouati certi fiumicelli, + ch’ tucti menano oro & nō gia poco, + & molti porti grādi & da far belli, + che abōdanza ce dacqua diloco, + lherbe & leselue facte co pennelli + nō son si belle & nō cisusa foco, + glhuomini sono affabile formati, + timidi semꝕ & alfuggir parati. + + Sonci assai uille ma son picoolecte, + dhuomini & dōne son tucte calcate, + glihabitacoli qui son capānecte + semplici sono & credule brigate, + & ben che sieno nudi stāno necte, + si che signor dibuona uoglia state, + & credon che no siā di cielo ī terra, + mādati per cāpargli dogni guerra. + + Portano alcun certe cāne appuntate, + socto lebraccia come noi lespade, + archi cō frecce dicanne tagliate, + & uāno īsieme assai come lesquadr̃ + di capegli & di barbe molto ornate, + nō son micidial persone o ladre, + ma tucto q̃l ch’ glhiāno ī lor potere + celodarebbon ꝓ farci piacere. + + Et parmi che cifia grā diferenza + da questa isola a q̃lla di Giouāna + darbori, fructi, and dherbe & diꝕsēza, + nōci manca senon la sancta māna, + doro ce tanto cha uostra potenza + chi guerra far sipensa ī uan safāna + oltre alla roba acquistate lhonore, + tucti son prōti acreder al signore. + + Questi popoli grādi & infiniti, + come ꝑ segni ciāno dimōstrato, + ledōne & lor figluoli & lor mariti + ciascuno spera desser baptezato, + priego il signor iesu che puo glīuiti + apossedere el suo regno beato + di quāto ben cagion signor sarete + coluostro auxilio che dato mhauete. + + Iho menati qui certi indiani + ch’ cōprēdā di q̃sta alcun līguaggio + tal che parlando con cēni dimani + q̃lcū diq̃sti ch’e piu sperto & saggio + dicon di farsi a noi tucti xꝕiani + tal chiho ꝕso signor mio uātaggio + & di legname una bastia fo fare + & lagente uimecto per guardare. + + Et forniti glilascio per uno anno + darme diuectouaglia ben chi spero + che nō haranno molestia ne dāno + ꝑ che gli lascio cō un buon pensiero, + humili mansueti tucti stanno, + sich’ auxilio iluostro signor chiero, + mandimi uostra signoria piacente + allaude del signore omnipotente. + + Chi nō uede signor lisole degne, + & lericheze o nobil creatura, + & lauarieta darbori & legne, + & deglhuomini & dōne lor figura, + nō sa ch’ sia delmōdo lesue ī segne, + chi nō esce delcerchio di sua mura, + nō puo perfectamente idio laudare + chi nō gusta lecose che sa fare. + + Signor mio dolce, lapiaceuoleza + di q̃sta gente io non saprei narrare, + per una stringa che poco sipreza + uolson tanto oro aun diquesti dare + ch’ tre ducati & mezo o che richeza + hare potuto inqueste parte fare, + ma io ho comādato alla mia gente + che ciascun doni & nō pigli niēte. + + Per far lor grata uostra signoria + dimolta roba io ho facto donare + di quella dimie gente & della mia, + come scodelle & piacti damāgiare, + & uetri & pauni chera in mia balia, + senza riserbo alcuno per me fare + ꝓ chio glho conosciuti tante grati, + iglho come fedeli & buō tractati. + + Vero e ch’ sono assai prōti alfugire + per che non sono usati di uedere + gente che usin panni da uestire, + ma per che uegan noi tucto sapere, + ciascun diloro ciadora come sire, + & lalor roba da mangiare o bere, + nō ho ueduto fare ne tuo ne mio, + ma lauita comune alparer mio. + + Volsano ancora ꝓ una bocte trista, + & per un pezo darco che nō uale, + tre once doro darmi & similmista, + tanta bambagia che mezo quintale, + ma poi chi hebbi questa cosa uista + parsemi dipigliar niente male, + & ho cōmesso aciaschedun de mia + chedipigliare niente ardito sia. + + Nō e fra loro alcuna briga o secta, + ma pacifici tucti insieme stanno, + di parole & ni facti mai saspecta, + di far uēdecta alcūa īgiuria o dāno, + beato a q̃llo che seguir sidilecta, + acompagnati abraccio semꝕ uāno, + io glho uisti si buoni recti & grati, + che abuō fine idio glhara chiamati. + + Nō e fra loro idolatria nessuna, + tucti lemani al ciel tengono alzate, + nō adoran pianeti, o sole, o luna, + ma lelor mente al ciel tucte leuate. + dicon la gloria ī ciel esser sol una, + dellaqual patria credon ch’ mādate + lenostre barche siano & noi ī terra, + a far pace colciel dogni lor guerra. + + Io nho cō meco semꝕ alcū menato + equali feci per forza pigliare, + q̃ndo alprīcipio ī terra fui smōtato, + non potendo inaltra forma fare + pelueloce fuggir mai ascoltato + nō era lemie uoci olmio parlare, + & q̃sti che per forza allhor pigliai, + son per amor uenuti sempre mai. + + Semꝕ mangiare, o bere, & adormire, + acanto a me io glho si ben tractati, + ch’ gliaferman ꝑ certo & usan dire + ch’ dalregno del ciel no siā mādati, + uanocci inanzi gridando uenire, + debba ciascuno auedere ebeati, + si chalpresente ognū corre auedere + & portan tucti damāgîare & bere. + + Da luna isola allaltra q̃sti uāno + cō certe barche che inquesta isola e, + lequal dun legno solo facte stanno, + & son chiamate queste canoe, + sō lūghe strecte & par quasi uolādo + andare achiunche messo dētro ce, + bench’ sien grossamente lauorate + cō sassi & legni & ossi son cauate. + + Et hōne uista alcuna tāto grāde + che octanta persone cista dentro, + & ciascūo hal suo remo & leumāde + nauica q̃sti & con buon sētimeto + la roba luno allaltro li sispande + q̃l chio uscriuo signor nulla mēto + & uanno baractando tucti quāti + come sefussin quasi mercatanti. + + Inqueste isole tucte nominate + nō ho ueduta nulla differenza + dincarnati diuisi o dibrigate, + ma tucti quasi son duna presenza + & dun cōstume tucti cōstumate + huomini & dōne sō pie dicremēza, + tucti hāno una loquela & un parlar̃ + che uifarē, signor, marauigliare. + + Che par che util cosa questa sia + acōuerrirgli a nostra sancta fede. + che come scriuo auostra signoria + ciascun disposto ce, & gia lacrede + dique che han uista lapresenza mia + no glho tucti ueduti de siuede + ch’glie margior giouāna senza sotia + che nōe linghilterra con lascotia. + + Son duo ꝓuincie chio nō ho certate, + secondo che q̄sti altri decto hāno, + una cene la qual queste brigate. + dican che quelle gente che uistāno + son con le code tucte quante nate + & Anaan elnome posto lehanno, + poi caminai ꝓ la spagnuola ciglia + ꝑ cinquecēsessantoquattro miglia. + + Doue e lauilla laqual io pigliai, + doue io feci larocca o uer bastia + che la piu bella che io uedessi mai, + come iho scripto a uostra signoria + non miricorda se adir uimandai + inquesta brieue epistolecta mia + elnōe ch’ io lho posto & forse auisto + natiuita del nostro Iesus Xꝕo. + + In queste isole tucti questi stāno + contenti duna dōna ciascheduno, + ma q̄sti principali tucti mhanno + uēti lequal son date lor per uno. + & luno allaltro mai torto nō fanno, + che a cio far nō ce pronto nessuno, + & nelle cose tucte da mangiare + nulla diuision uiueggo fare. + + Et ben che i q̄ste parti caldo sia, + lastate eluerno ce digran freddura, + ma ꝑ che mangiā molta spetieria + lacarne loro alfreddo molto dura + inquesta parte nulla cosa ria, + sitruoua diche questi habbin paura, + saluo che ce unisola allentrare + dellindia per uoler qui arriuare. + + In nella quale sta gente uillana + da q̄sti nō mipar che siano amati, + ꝑ ch’ dice māgiā carne humana, + pero nō son da questi qui prezati, + hanno assai legni q̄sta gente strana, + da nauicare & hanno gia rubati, + aquesti di scorrendo dogni banna + cō archi ī mano & cō frecce dicāna. + + Non e da q̄sti a quegli differenza, + senō innecapegli che q̄gli hanno + lunghi come ledōne & dipresenza + son come q̄sti & fāno molto dāno, + aq̄ste ch’ son ꝑpro essa clemenza, + si che ingelosia sempre nestanno, + ma spero che lauosira signoria + sapra purgare una tal maltaia. + + Una isola cie decta mactanino, + nella qual le donne sole stanno, + & questo iniquo popol glie uicino, + & ausar con q̄ste spesso uanno, + ma q̄sto popol tucto feminino + exercitio di dōne mai nō fanno, + ma cō gliarchi trahēdo tuctauia, + che par per cerbo una grā fantasia. + + Et uanno queste ben tucte coperte, + nō gia di pāni lini, o lani, o ueli, + ma derbe & giūchi, & q̄ste cose certe + son che di qua nq̃e lēzuoli o teli + unaltra isola poi legente offerte, + femine & maschi nascō senza peli, + manzi uoglia cōfuso esser nel dire + chi uoglia alcuna cosa preterire. + + Et dove q̄sti senza peli sono, + piu oro cie chihabbia ācor trouata + di q̄l chi scriuo o parlando ragiono, + signore, io ne son ben giustificato + auostra signoria un magno dono + iho per portar meco preparato + di tucti q̄sti luoghi iuo menare + gente che possin cio testificare. + + Pero, giusto signor, di Spagna degno, + stia uostra signoria dibuona uoglia + chīho cresciuto tāto iluostro regno, + ch’ chi ua īuida po crepar didoglia + doro & dargento passarete el segno + tel ch’ trarra elnimico di sua soglia, + ma q̃l chi so ch’ molto piu prezate + son queste gēte a xꝕo preparate. + + Reubarbero assai & aloe, + Mastice, cinamono, & spetierie, + tanta richeza, signor mio, qui e + che discaccia da me leuoglie rie, + piu allegreza, signor mio, fare, + si fussi certo che per tucte uie + q̃sta scripta uenissi asaluamento + nel mōdo no sare huom piu-cōtēto. + + Nō miacascaltro degno mio signore + scriuere auostra magna signoria, + raccomandomi a q̃lla a tucte lhore, + laqual cōserui ilfigluol di Maria + parato semꝕmai per uostro amore + amecter q̃sta breue uita mia + aquindici de febraio q̃sta sife + nel mille quattrocento nouāta tre. + + Magnifici & discreti circūstanti + q̃sta e gran cosa certo da pensare, + ch’l nostro redēptor̃ cō tucti esancti + nō resta mai legratie sue mandare + douerebbon di q̃sto tucti quanti + ebaptizati a x̃po festa fare, + chi ue chi uimādo & chi ue andato + prepari dio alsuo regno beato. + + Questa ha cōposto de dati Giuliano + apreghiera del magno caualiere + messer Giouanphilippo ciciliano, + che fu di Sixto quarto suo scudiere + & commessario suo & capitano, + a q̄lle cose che fur di mestiere + allaude del signor sicanta & dice + che ciconduca al suo regno felice. + +¶ FINIS LAUS DEO. + + ¶ Finita lastoria della īuētione delle nuoue isole dicānaria + īdiane tracte duna pistola dixꝕofano colōbo, & ꝓmesser + Giuliano dati tradocta dilatino ī uersi uulgari allaude + della christiana religione & aꝕghiera delmagnifico + caualiere messer Giouāfilippo del ignamine + domestico familiare dello illustrissimo + Redispagna xꝕianissimo a + di. xxvi. doctobre. + 14.93. + + _Florentie._ + + + + +BIBLIOGRAPHY. + + +In this bibliographical notice I do not propose to deal with any editions +of the first letter of Columbus beyond the “Incunabula,” which I arrange +in the order of their publication, as ascertained from an examination of +the documents themselves. + + 1. ¶ Epistola Christofori Colom: cui etas nostra multū + debet: de | Insulis Indie supra Gangem nuper inuētis. Ad + quas perqꝫren- | das octauo antea mense auspiciis & ere + invictissimor’ Fernādi & | Helisabet Hispaniar’ Regū missus + fuerat: ad magnificum dñm | Gabrielem Sanchis eorundē + serenissimor’ Regum Tesaurariū | missa: quā nobilis ac + litteratus vir Leander de Cosco ab Hispa | no ideomate in + latinum cōuertit tertio kal’s Maii m.cccc.xciii | Pontificatus + Alexandri Sexti Anno primo. + +Small 4to. This edition, which, as I shall presently show, is the _editio +princeps_, was printed by Stephen Plannck at Rome in 1493. It consists +of four leaves, printed in gothic type, and has 33 lines in a full page. +Copies are in the Grenville and King’s Libraries in the British Museum. + + 2. ¶ Epistola Christofori Colom: cui etas nostra multum + debet: de | Insulis Indie supra Gangem nuper inuētis. Ad + quas perquiren | das octauo antea mense auspiciis & ere + inuictissimorum Fernandi | ac Helisabet Hispaniar’ Regū missus + fuerat: ad Magnificū dñm | Gabrielem Sanches: eorundem + serenissimorum Regum Tesau | rariū missa: Quā generosus + ac litteratus vir Leander de Cosco ab | Hispano idiomate + in latinū cōuertit: tertio Kalen’ Maij M.cccc. | xc.iij. + Pontificatus Alexandri Sexti Anno Primo. | 4to. + + End:—¶ Impressit Rome Eucharius Argenteus [Silber] Anno dñi. + M.ccccxciij. + +Three leaves, printed in gothic letter. 40 lines in a page. A copy is in +the Grenville Library. + + 3. ¶ Epistola Christofori Colom: cui etas nostra multū debet: + de | Insulis Indie supra Gangem nuper inuentis. Ad quas perqui + | rendas octauo antea mense auspicijs & ere invictissimi Fernan + | di Hispaniarum Regis missus fuerat: ad Magnificum dñum Ra | + phaelem Sanxis: eiusdem serenissimi Regis Tesaurariū missa: | + quam nobilis ac litteratus vir Aliander de Cosco ab Hispano | + ideomate in latinum conuertit: tertio kal’s Maij. M.cccc.xciij. + | Pontificatus Alexandri Sexti Anno Primo. + +Small 4to. Gothic letter; four leaves, 34 lines in a full page. This +edition is supposed to have been printed by Stephen Plannck at Rome, +about 1493. 3 or 4 copies are known; two are in the General Library and +Grenville Library, British Museum. + + 4. De Insulis inuentis | Epistola Cristoferi Colom (cui etas + nostra | multū debet: de Insulis in mari Indico nup’ | inuētis. + Ad quas perquirendas octauo antea | mense: auspicijs et ere + Invictissimi Fernandi | Hispaniarum Regis missus fuerat | ad + Magnificum dñm Raphaeleꝫ Sanxis: eiusdē sere | nissimi Regis + Thesaurariū missa. quam nobi | lis ac litterat’ vir Aliander đ + Cosco: ab His | pano ydeomate in latinū conuertit: tercio k’ls + | Maij. M.cccc.xciij. Pontificatus Alexandri | Sexti Anno Primo. + +Small 8vo. Gothic character; ten leaves, 26 and 27 lines in a page. The +title above given is preceded by a leaf bearing on the recto the arms of +Spain, “Regnū hyspanie”—on the verso the cut of the “Oceanica Classis”. +There are 6 woodcuts—the “Oceanica Classis”, being repeated. A copy is +in the Grenville Library. + + 5. Epistola de insulis de | nouo repertis. Impressa | parisius + in cāpo gaillardi. + +Small 4to. Gothic letter; four leaves, 39 lines in a full page. This +edition was printed by Guy Marchand about 1494. Brunet states that the +only copy known is that formerly belonging to M. Ternaux-Compans, now the +property of Mr. John Carter Brown. + +This edition was reprinted in 1865, “Lettre de Christophe Colomb sur la +découverte du Nouveau-Monde, publiée d’après la rarissime version latine +conservée à la Bibliothèque Impériale. Traduite en Français, commentée +et enrichie de notes puisées aux sources originales par Lucien de Rosny. +8vo., Paris, 1865.” + + 6. Epistola de Insulis noui | ter repertis. Impressa parisius + In campo gaillardi. + +Small 4to. Gothic letter; four leaves, 39 lines in a page. The above +title is in two lines, the first printed in a larger character. +Underneath is the device of the printer, “Guiot Marchant”—two cobblers at +work, one cutting the leather, the other making it up. This edition was +printed by Guy Marchand at Paris, about 1494. + +A copy is in the Bodleian Library. A fac-simile made by Mr. John Harris, +sen., is in the British Museum; the impression was limited to five copies. + +All the foregoing editions have at the end the Latin Epigram in eight +verses of R. L. de Corbatia, (a pseudonym for Leonardus de Carninis, +Bishop of Monte Peloso in Naples). In this edition, below the epigram, +on the same page, is a woodcut of the Angel appearing to the Shepherds. +Mr. Lenox has given a fac-simile of this in the Appendix to _Syllacius_. +The title on the recto of the following leaf (sig. a, ij) is the same +as in the Roman editions, having the name of Ferdinand without that of +Isabella. It ends with the words: “Vale. Ulisbone pridie Idus Marcij.” + +A “pictorial” edition of the Latin letter, in 4to., was printed in 1494. +It is appended to a work by Carolus Verardus, “In laudem Serenissimi +Ferdinandi Hispaniar’ regis.... Et de Insulis in mari Indico nuper +inuentis.” + +The work is printed on fifteen pages in Roman characters, and probably +at Basle, by B. de Olpe. The woodcuts are the same as those used in the +small 8vo. edition printed about 1493 (see No. 4). + +No sooner did this letter make its appearance in print in the year 1493, +than the narrative it contained was put forth in Italian ottava rima +by Giuliano Dati, one of the most popular poets of the day; and there +is reason to believe that it was sung about the streets to announce to +the Italians the astounding news of the discovery of a new world. (See +_ante_, p. xc.) + +The only copy of this curious and valuable poem known at the time of +the issue of the first edition of this work in 1847 is that which I now +reprint. + + ¶ La lettera dellisole che ha trouato nuovamente il Re dispagna. + + End: + + ¶ Finita lastoria della iuētione del | le nuoue isole dicānaria + īdiane trac | te duna pistola dixp̃ofano colōbo & | ꝑmesser + Giuliano dati tradocta di la | tino ī uersi uulgari allaude + della ce | lestiale corte & aconsolatione della | christiana + religione & ap̃ghiera del magnifico caualiere messer Giouā | + filippo del ignamine domestico fa | mīliare dello illustrissimo + Re dispa | gna xp̃ianīssimo a di. xxvi. docto | bre. 14.93. + Florentie. + +4to. Printed in Roman characters on four leaves, in double columns. The +poem consists of 68 stanzas in _ottava rima_. Beneath the single-line +title is a woodcut representing the landing of Columbus, and King +Ferdinand seated on his throne on the _opposite shore_. This is the only +copy known. + +Since 1847 another edition has been acquired by the British Museum, +bearing the following title:— + + ¶ Questa e la hystoria della inuentiōe delle diese Isole di + Cannaria In | diane extracte duna Epistola di Christofano + Colombo & per messer Giu | liano Dati traducta de latino in + uersi uulgari a laude e gloria della cele | stiale corte & a + consolatione della christiana religiōe & apreghiera del ma | + gnifico Caualier miser Giouanfilippo Delignamine domestico + familia | re dello Sacratissimo Re di spagna Christianissimo a + di. xxv. doctobre. | M.cccclxxxxiii. | + + End: FINIS + + Joannes dictus Florentinus. + +4to. Printed in gothic characters, in double columns, and, without doubt, +at Florence. A complete copy should contain four leaves. The copy in the +British Museum, the only one of this edition hitherto discovered, is, +unfortunately, deficient in two leaves—viz., the second and the third. +It is printed in a very rude type on coarse paper, and was evidently a +popular edition, sold at a very small price. This edition presents many +variations from the other, both in the orthography and language; _e.g._, +the opening stanza, which may be compared with that given in the present +edition. + + LOīpotente idio ch’l tulto regge + mi presti gr̃a chi possa cantare + allaude sua e di sua sancta legge + cosa che piaza achi stara ascoltare + maxime alpopul suo & a sua gregge + elqual non cessa mai magnificare + come al presente afacto nela spagna + delle isole trouate cosa magna. + +This edition omits the final stanza, which is little else than the +colophon of the other versified:— + + Questa ha cōposta de’ dati Giuliano + etc. etc. etc. + + Eyn schön hübsch lesen von etlichen insslen | dīe do in kurtzen + zyten funden synd durch dē | künig von hispania. vnd sagt vō + grossen wun | derlichen dingen die in dē selbē insslen synd. + + End: + + Getruckt zŭ strassburg vff gruneck vō meīster Bartlomess | + küstler ym iar. M.cccc.xcvij. vff sant Jeronymus tag.— + +Small 4to. Seven leaves, 30 lines in a page. Beneath the title is a +woodcut representing the apprehension of Christ in the garden; this is +repeated on the verso of the last leaf. This edition is very rare. A copy +is in the Grenville Library. + +Besides the foregoing we are in possession of a photo-zincographic +fac-simile published at Milan in 1866, by the Marquis Gerolamo d’Adda, +of an early printed edition of the Spanish original, in the Ambrosian +Library in that city. It bears no printer’s name or place or date of +publication, but it is unquestionably of the fifteenth century, and is +considered by bibliographers to be of the date of 1493. Señor Pascual +de Gayangos (in a valuable paper, entitled “La Carta de Cristóbal Colon +al Escribano Luis de Santangel”, printed in the Madrid Journal, _La +America_, under date of 13th April, 1867) suggests that it was printed in +Lisbon. + +We have also in Navarrete’s _Coleccion de Viages_, printed at Madrid +1825, vol. i, pp. 167-175, what professes to be an attested literal +rendering of a copy of Columbus’s letter in Spanish to the Escribano de +Racion (whom we know from Argensola’s _Anales de Aragon_ to be Luis de +Santangel), in the Archives at Simancas. + +And, further, we have a printed version of a copy of the first letter +in Spanish MS., discovered by His Excellency Senhor de Varnhagen in +Valencia, and published by him in that city in 1858, under the title of +_Primera Epistola del Almirante Don Christobal Colon ... a D. Gabriel +Sanchez Tesorero de Aragon_. As editor, Senhor de Varnhagen assumed +the pseudonym of D. Genaro H. de Volafan; and last year His Excellency +published at Vienna a little work, the nature and contents of which are +explained by its title, which is as follows:—“Carta de Cristóbal Colon +enviada de Lisboa a Barcelona en Marzo de 1493. Nueva Edicion Critica: +Conteniendo las variantes de los diferentes textos, juicio sobre estos, +reflexiones tendentes a mostrar a quien la Carta fue escrita, y varias +otras noticias, por el Seudónimo de Valencia.” + +Be it observed that in all these the _titles_ are supplied by the +respective editors, and consequently have no authority beyond the weight +of each editor’s individual opinion. I have carefully collated the three +documents, and the result is a certain conclusion that neither one nor +the other is a correct transcript of the original letter. The grounds +for this conclusion are, that while no two of them entirely agree _inter +se_, every one of them exhibits certain special errors which, as I +shall presently demonstrate, _could_ not have been in the original. The +apparent rashness of this assertion will disappear if the reader will +accompany me in my effort to detect which of the printed Latin editions +which we possess is to receive the distinction of _editio princeps_. +Various have been the opinions on this subject. Mr. Lenox, following +Brunet, has given the lead to the edition which I have ventured to place +_fourth_. Mr. Harrisse, in his elaborate _Notes on Columbus_, gives the +first place to that which stands _third_ in my series, and His Excellency +Senhor de Varnhagen assigns priority to the edition which I make to +be the _second_. That to which I assign the distinction of taking the +lead has the _second_ place given to it by Senhor de Varnhagen, and the +_third_ by Brunet, Mr. Lenox, and Mr. Harrisse. In offering a conclusion +so much at variance with my predecessors, my only means of escaping the +charge of presumption (but that I hope is an effectual one), is neither +to adopt the opinion of any one else nor to offer any opinion of my own, +but to reduce the matter to demonstration by facts either within or +connected with the documents themselves. + +On examination of the titles it will be seen that the six editions +resolve themselves by several very strongly marked features into two +distinct groups. One of these groups, embracing four of the editions, +is characterized by remarkable inaccuracy in three separate points—all +four exhibiting all these inaccuracies in common; while the remaining +two, being free from them, stand clearly defined into a distinct group by +themselves. + +Thus; the titles of the editions numbered 3, 4, 5, 6, all speak of +Columbus being sent out under the auspices and at the expense of +Ferdinand, King of Spain, without reference to the name of Queen +Isabella. They all describe the letter as addressed to the Treasurer +“Sanxis,” instead of “Sanchez,” whose Christian name they pervert from +“Gabriel” to “Raphael.” Furthermore, they all convert the Christian name +of the translator from “Leander” to “Aliander.” + +The titles of the editions numbered 1 and 2, on the contrary, give the +names of both the sovereigns, call the Treasurer in No. 2 Sanches, in No. +1 “Sanchis,” but not Sanxis, and rightly name the translator “Leander de +Cosco.” + +Now there is no difficulty in showing which of these groups has the merit +of correctness, or which the demerit of incorrectness. + +It is perfectly well known that in 1493 Ferdinand and Isabella held the +common title of _Reyes de España_. Whether “Sanches” or “Sanxis” should +be the correct form of spelling the name of a Spaniard who was treasurer +to the Spanish sovereigns, it would be waste of time to question, and +that his Christian name was Gabriel and not Raphael, we have clear +evidence from an independent document in the Archives of Simancas, dated +December 1495, for which the reader is referred to Navarrete’s _Coleccion +de Viages_, vol. iii, p. 76, line 16, where he is called “El tesorero +Gabriel Sanchez”. His name is also mentioned more than once by Zurita in +his _Anales de Aragon_. + +The question then arises whether the palm of priority is to be conceded +to the correct or to the incorrect form. Now all these six titles agree +in stating that the original Spanish letter of Columbus was _sent_ to +the Treasurer Royal. But for a letter to be sent, it must carry an +address, and if Columbus inserted in such address the Treasurer’s name, +he, who knew Spanish so well, would not have insulted that dignitary by +converting his surname of Sanchez into Sanxis, or his Christian name of +Gabriel into Raphael. But even if we suppose that he omitted the name +altogether, as is probable, and simply superscribed his letter with +the title of the Treasurer, the fact still remains that the translator +or editor of the first edition derived the information that the letter +was so sent, directly from the Treasurer himself, who at least knew his +own name and would not allow it to be transmitted for publication (if +Columbus had been guilty of the blunder) under the form of “Raphael +Sanxis.” Nor would he, holding a high official post, have been guilty of +the _maladresse_ of omitting the name of the queen in the description +of his own title. Now of our two groups of printed letters it is +indisputable that that one must take precedence which comes immediately +in connection with the original source, and as that source is at the same +time the head-quarters of correctness, it follows that correctness must +be the criterion of priority. + +We thus find our six candidates for the glory of “editio princeps” +reduced to two. Now these two issued from two different printing presses. +One of them is printed by Argenteus, _i.e._, Silber, and bears his name +with the imprint, “Rome, 1493.” The other is without printer’s name or +place or date of publication, but is indisputably from the printing +press of Stephanus Plannck, as may be seen by comparing it with a work +of Benedictus de Nursia of the same date, entitled _“Incipit libellus de +conservatione sanitatis secundum ordinem alphabeti distinctus per eximium +doctorem magistrum Benedictum compositus.” Impressum Rome per magistrum +Stephanum Planck, Anno Domini mccccxciii, quarto nōn Maii._ In this and +other works from the same press the form and type precisely correspond +with those of our letter. + +Now these two editions of Plannck and Silber were either printed +simultaneously or not. Instances of the same work being printed by two +different printers on the same day do occur. One example is before me of +this happening in this very year 1493. The work is entitled, “_Illustris +et Reverendi Domini Nicolai Mariæ Estensis Episcopi Hadriensis oratio +pro consanguineo suo inclyto Hercule Estensi Ferrariæ duce secundo_.” +One edition in Roman character bears the colophon, _Romæ impressa per +mgrm Plannck: Julio Campello Spoletino procurante. Anno Salvatoris +mcccclxxxxiii. Nonis Januariis._ The other, in Gothic character, bears +precisely the same title and the same colophon, with the difference +of the words, _impressa per magistrum Andream Fritag_. Both are small +quarto, of the size of our two editions of the letter of Columbus. + +But here it must be observed that there was apparently a special object +in resorting to this exceptional procedure, viz., the production +simultaneously of one edition in Roman and another in Gothic types, +to suit the tastes of purchasers. In the case before us, however, the +question of this motive does not arise, for both Plannck’s and Silber’s +editions are in Gothic type; and any way it is clear that, in a case of +the kind, the same text would be handed to each printer to set up, as any +patent discrepancies between the two would be to the self-stultification +of the editor. Now, in the case of the Columbus letter, such patent +discrepancies do occur; by which I mean no mere printer’s blunders, but +deliberate alterations of Latin expressions, as for example “ambularunt” +in Plannck is “ambulaverunt” in Silber; “serenissimos Reges nostros,” +correct Latin in Plannck, is “serenissimorum regum nostrorum,” making bad +grammar, in Silber. This fact of itself I contend disproves simultaneity +of production. But side by side with these discrepancies we observe the +repetition in the one, of eccentricities or inaccuracies occurring in +the other, as in the words “quom,” “benivolentia,” and “nanque.” The +former, though not incorrect, is quaint and unusual, but the two latter +are faulty peculiarities, and their occurrence, in both editions, side +by side with deliberate alterations, proves the one to be copied from +the other either by the hand of the transcriber or of the compositor. +This fact once established, I have to call attention to the following +remarkable difference between the two editions. In the Plannck edition +the distance sailed by Columbus along the north coast of Hispaniola is +stated as DLXIIII miles. In Silber’s the same figures occur minus the D, +and with no space left for the letter to have fallen out. Now it being +understood that one of these is a copy from the other, whether through +a transcriber’s or a compositor’s hand, if we suppose that the Silber +edition, which was minus the D, appeared first, we must perceive that +the error is one which no special knowledge could enable the editor or +printer of the other to suspect, much less to rectify, and yet in the +Plannck edition we should find it so rectified. Whereas if the Plannck +edition be supposed to be the first, we have no such difficulty to +encounter, but simply meet (in the Silber edition) with a negligent +omission of a letter, which may so easily happen. The next enquiry, of +course, is, which number is right, 564 or 64 miles? Fortunately we have +the means of answering this question with certainty, for as we possess +two copies, or copies of copies, of the original Spanish letter, we find +that the translator, Leander de Cosco, converted the leagues of the +Spanish original into miles by multiplying them, though ignorantly, by +three; and in one of these two copies, which can in other respects be +shown to be far more correct than its fellow, these leagues are stated +as 188, which correspond exactly with 564 miles. It must be clear, then, +that the edition containing the number 564 was derived from the original +accounts, while that which contained the number 64 had allowed the D to +be lost. The result I submit to be that Plannck’s edition must claim the +palm to priority. + +To this conclusion it has been objected by a friend that the argument +is not complete, inasmuch as Cosco the translator, may have sent his +translation to Rome, with instructions that a copy thereof should be +made, and that, as the work was of importance, two printers should at +once be employed in printing from the two copies; that the copyist +may have thought fit to make the alterations which appear between the +two, or, failing him, that these alterations may have been made by the +compositor of one of them. To which I reply that the deviations in the +Silber edition are all on the side of ignorance, and not such as could +have been made by an original translator. To take the most notable +example: in Plannck’s edition occurs this passage, already slightly +referred to, “quæ res perutilis est ad id quod Serenissimos Reges nostros +exoptare præcipue reor.” “Which thing is very useful for the object which +I think that our most serene Sovereigns principally desire.” Here we +find the right grammatical construction of the accusative before the +infinitive mood, just as the translator would write it. In Silber’s +edition the sentence stands thus: “quæ res perutilis est ad id quod +Serenissimorum regum nostrorum exoptare præcipue reor,” a change showing +such ignorance of grammatical construction that it could not have been +the work of the translator. I contend that, under such circumstances, +even if it should be assumed (though there is no warranty for such +assumption) that the two editions were printed simultaneously, Plannck’s +edition would justly take the lead on account of its more immediate +derivation from the original translation. + +But before I leave this subject I must call attention to a notable fact, +which opens up the question whether the real _editio princeps_ has +perished, or not as yet come to our knowledge. It happens that the length +of the north coast of Hispaniola is _twice_ stated by Columbus in this +letter. The _first_ mention of it is given correctly in Plannck’s edition +as “milliaria dlxiiii,” which I have already shown to be a right number, +while in Silber the “d” is lost, and the number stands “lxiiii.” The +_second_ mention of the length of the coast is given _alike incorrectly +by both_ as dxl. This fact, brought into combination with those +evolved by our comparison of the two texts, not only corroborates the +non-originality and secondary position of Silber’s edition, but it raises +a question as to whether Plannck’s was not preceded by another which has +never come to our knowledge, in which both numbers were correctly given. +It might be conjectured that Columbus himself wrote the second number +incorrectly, but here the different Spanish texts come valuably to our +aid, and the curious circumstance that the translator Cosco converted the +leagues of the Spanish into miles in the Latin, supplies a most welcome +means of solving the riddle. Another document, the contemporaneous +rhythmical version of the letter by Giuliano Dati, will also be of great +service in the examination of the subject. For the sake of clearness +I will tabulate them, and distinguish the correct numbers, where they +occur, by italics. + + +--------+--------------------+------------------+------------------+ + | | Ambrosian text. | Valencia MS. | Simancas MS. | + +--------+--------------------+------------------+------------------+ + | First | clxxviii leguas. |_ciento e ochenta | ciento e setenta | + |mention.| | y ocho leguas._ | y ocho leguas. | + | | | | | + | Second | _clxxxviii leguas._| ciento treinta | ciento treinta | + |mention.| | y ocho leguas. | y ocho leguas. | + +--------+--------------------+------------------+------------------+ + + +--------+--------------------+------------------+------------------+ + | | Plannck’s edition. | Silber’s edition.| Dati. | + +--------+--------------------+------------------+------------------+ + | First |milliaria _dlxiiii_.| miliaria lxiiii. |_cinquecensessanta| + |mention.| | | quattro miglia._ | + | | | | | + | Second | milliaria dxl. | miliaria dxl. |_cinquecensessanta| + |mention.| | | quattro miglia._ | + +--------+--------------------+------------------+------------------+ + +From this table it will be seen that the erroneous one hundred and +thirty-eight leagues do not tally with the erroneous five hundred and +forty miles; but the most striking fact that this table presents to +our notice is that the _Dati poem_ is the only one of these documents +that has the number right in both places; and it might at first sight +appear a very simple and easy thing for Dati to see that what was right +measurement in the one case must be the right measurement in the other, +even although the other copyists had failed to realise this fact. But not +so. Dati composed his poem from the Latin translation, and if the edition +from which he worked had been as faulty as that of Plannck, now under +notice, he could have had no means of deciding which number was right, +the dlxiiii of the first mention, or the dxl of the second. We have the +means of knowing, but only because we possess the various copies of the +Spanish, which state the distance in leagues. The necessary conclusion +then is that Dati worked from a copy either MS. or printed, in which the +number was right in both places; and this conclusion is corroborated +by the fact that, of the Spanish documents, the Valencia MS. shows the +number right in the first mention, and the Ambrosian text shows it right +in the second. Furthermore, I observe that Dati, who distinctly states +that his poem was “tradocta di latino,” gives the letter the date of Feb. +15th, a date which occurs in the Spanish, but not in the Latin texts +which we possess. It follows, therefore, that if he worked from a printed +text, that edition is lost to us. + +But there remains the alternative that he worked from the MS. Latin +translation, and that the latter had been fully rendered from the +original Spanish, but was afterwards modified by the compositor in +setting it up in type. That such was in reality the case the reader +will find proved beyond all dispute at the close of this disquisition. +It therefore remains that, while there is no reason to suppose that an +edition is lost, the edition by Plannck, consisting of four leaves, with +thirty-three lines to the page, must take the lead among those which are +known to us. + +But now we come to the very interesting subject of the original Spanish. +Columbus’s manuscript letter is lost, and the only representatives of it +with which we are acquainted are the manuscript copies already mentioned +at Simancas and Valencia, published respectively by Navarrete and Senhor +de Varnhagen, and the valuable printed text in the Ambrosian Library, for +the reproduction of which by photo-zincography all who are interested +in the subject are so deeply indebted to the enlightened liberality of +the Marquis d’Adda. The two former transcripts are confessedly made at +a much later date, while to the latter bibliographers give the credit +of the date of 1493. At the end of the Simancas copy is the expression: +“Esta carta envio Colon al Escribano de Racion de las islas halladas en +las Indias e otra de sus altezas.” This office of Escribano de Racion +was held by Luis de Santangel. The Valencia copy had no such sentence at +the end, but simply bore the title: “Carta del Almirante á D. Gabriel +Sanches.” The Ambrosian text photo-zincographed by the Marquis d’Adda +bore a similar expression at the end to that of the Simancas copy, +but with a difference; thus: “Esta carta embio Colon al Escrivano de +Racion de las Islas halladas en las Indias. Contenida a otra de sus +altezas.” Under these circumstances the Marquis d’Adda, accepting the +pre-supposed fact that Columbus had addressed two similar letters to the +two above-named officials, very naturally regarded the Ambrosian text as +derived from the Simancas MS. A collation of the three texts, _inter se_, +and with the Latin translation of Cosco, exhibits, however, the following +results:—the Valencia MS. addressed to Gabriel Sanchez is almost a +verbatim repetition of the Simancas text addressed to the Escribano +de Racion, while the Ambrosian text also addressed to the Escribano de +Racion agrees with the Latin text addressed to Gabriel Sanchez in certain +forms of expression, which are entirely different from those used in +common in the Valencia and Simancas MSS. to describe the same thing. +This perplexing result has been stated by Senhor de Varnhagen in the +little work published last year already referred to, and I can confirm +it by actual careful collation of all the four documents. The _prima +facie_ inference from this fact would, I think, be that the Escribano de +Racion and Gabriel Sanchez, either really were, or by some mistake had +been taken to be, identical. A very high authority on such a subject, +Senor de Gayangos, in the learned article already referred to, distinctly +maintains the dispatch of two letters to the said two officials, whereas +Senhor de Varnhagen not only limits the dispatch to one single address, +but goes so far as to conclude that the Spanish printed text, from which +he believes the Latin to be translated, is in fact the letter addressed +to the sovereigns, with the change only of “vuestras” into “sus.” But as +his Excellency has given much careful thought to this matter, and has, +under the guidance of a most judicious criticism, supplied an amended +text, derived from a collation of the different texts, it is but justice +to him and to the subject itself to give a literal translation of his +remarks. This is the more requisite as I shall have to submit some facts +which seem to me to lead to conclusions differing from some of those +arrived at by my learned friend. + +His Excellency says: “We hold it for certain that the said _primitive_ +edition (the Ambrosian) which we have had the opportunity of seeing in +Milan, _must have given origin_ to the text published in Rome the 25th +April[24] of that same year (1493) by Cozco, who perhaps from not being +able to transfer easily to the Latin the last part of it, cut it off. +The said fact is principally _shown_ by the mistake of the date of 14th +(instead of 4th) of March, which could not be in the letter of Columbus, +as he had left Lisbon before that day; nor would it be reasonable to +suppose that the error would be repeated in the same manner, if said +original had been kept in sight. Still less could the repetition of such +a mistake be conceived, if the original manuscript were different.” + +Now, before we proceed to an examination of this matter, the first thing +requisite is to lay before the reader a specific difference which exists +between the Spanish and the Latin texts. In the Spanish (I quote from +the Ambrosian text) the letter closes thus: “Esto segun el fecho asi en +breve. Fecha en la calavera sobre las Yslas de Canaria a xv de Febrero +mil et quatrocientos et noventa y tres años.” + +Then comes a + + “Nyma que venia dentro en la carta.” + +“Despues desta escripto y estando en mar de Castilla salyo tanto viento +conmigo sul y sueste que me ha fecho descargar la navios por cosi +(correr?) aqui en este puerto de Lysbona oy, que fue la mayor maravilla +del mundo. Adonde acordé escrivir a sus altezas. En todas las Yndias he +siempre hallado los tenporales como en Mayo, adonde yo fuy en xxxiii dias +et volvi en xxviii, salvo questas tormentas me han detenido xiiii dias +corriendo por esta mar. Dizen aqua todos los honbres de la mar que jamas +ovo tan mal yvierno no ni tantas perdidas de naves, fecha a xiiii dias de +marco. + +“Esta carta embio Colon al Escrivano de racion de las Islas halladas en +las Indias. Contenida a otra de sus altezas.” + +For those who need it, the translation will be found in our printed text +at page 18. + +The Latin translation ends very differently; thus: “Hæc ut gesta sunt sic +breviter enarrata. Vale. Ulisbone, pridie Idus Martii.” + +Now the reader will observe that in the above “nyma” or postscript, +Columbus states that on the day of his reaching Lisbon he resolved to +write to their Highnesses, and we know from his diaries that that day was +the 4th of March, and yet at the end the postscript is dated the 14th of +March, a day on which we know, from the said diaries, that he was off +Cape St. Vincent on his way from Lisbon to Spain, which he was then on +the point of reaching at the harbour of Palos. + +The Latin, it will be perceived, repeats this discrepancy in a more +distinct shape, by bringing the name of Lisbon immediately into +connection with the 14th of March, of which the words: “pridie Idus +Martii” are the equivalent. + +With these specialities in his mind, the reader will be able with +greater clearness to follow the following disquisition:— + +The perfectly sound piece of criticism by Senhor de Varnhagen, which we +have just read, is based upon the accepted premiss that it was on the +4th of March that Columbus dispatched to the King and Queen the letter +describing his voyage, with the nema attached. The words of the “nema” +itself make such an inference highly reasonable. It states that “el +viento me ha fecho descargar los navios por correr aqui en este puerto +de Lisbona _hoy_ ... adonde acordé de escribir a sus altezas.”—“The wind +made me unload the ships to run into this port of Lisbon to-day ... where +I resolved to write to their Highnesses.” The diary shows that this +day was the 4th of March, and hence, _prima facie_, the date of “14th +of March” in the nema would appear to be not written by Columbus, but +a blunder of the printer of the Ambrosian text. This natural inference +_appears_ confirmed, I find, by the distinct statement of Ferdinand +Columbus that on his father’s arrival in Lisbon on the 4th—“Subito espedì +un corriero a’ Re Catolici con la nuova della sua venuta”—“he immediately +dispatched a courier to the Catholic Sovereigns with the news of his +arrival.” + +Now, supposing, for I do not take it for granted, that this statement of +Fernando’s, written many years after, was correct, and that his father +carried out his intention of writing to the Sovereigns from Lisbon, that +statement does not tell us that he then _sent on the account of his +voyage_; and if we inquire a little further, we have good reason to +suppose that he did _not_ forward it on that day. There is no mention +in his Diary of his so doing, although the act would be of sufficient +importance to call for mention. He was in a country where his success in +the cause of Spain was regarded with intense animosity. He was ignorant +of the whereabouts of the Sovereigns, and in prospect of an early arrival +in Spain, when he both would gain the necessary information, and could +send on his precious missive in perfect safety. In harmony with these +suggestions of mine, I find that Herrera, the historiographer, who had +in his charge all the Columbian documents, states that on Wednesday, the +13th March, Columbus left Lisbon for Seville in his caravel. On Thursday, +the 14th, before daybreak, he was off Cape St. Vincent. On Friday, the +15th, at mid-day, he entered the port of Palos, whence he had sailed on +the 3rd of August of the previous year. _And having learned that the +Catholic Sovereigns were at Barcelona_, he at first thought of going +there in his caravel; but subsequently resolving not to go to Barcelona +by sea, he _announced his arrival to the Catholic Sovereigns, and sent +a summary of what had happened to him, reserving the more complete +narrative for their immediate presence_. The _reply_ reached him in +Seville, and contained expressions of joy at his safe arrival and at the +success of his voyage, offered him rewards and honours, and commanded +him to make haste to go to Barcelona. Now, it will be remembered that +Columbus’s narrative was already written, and dated February 15th or +18th, and only waiting to be despatched, and had attached to it the +nema, which Mr. Gayangos tells us was a piece of paper placed on the +outside of a letter like a padlock, and over which the seal was put. On +this nema, beyond all question, was the date of March 4th; and if, as I +gather from Herrera’s statement, Columbus dispatched this narrative of +his voyage, not from Lisbon on the 4th March, but from Palos on the 15th, +or the 16th, it is not unlikely that on the 14th, when he was nearing the +Spanish harbour from which he was looking forward to be able to dispatch +it in safety, he should have altered the remote date of the 4th, which +agreed with the wording of the nema at the time of writing it, into the +later date of the 14th, which was more in accordance with the date of +dispatch. We know that the letter to the Sovereigns was enclosed in the +letter to the Escribano de Racion; and the sentence printed at the end +of the Ambrosian text bears the aspect of an endorsement of the letter +by that officer’s secretary. The date of the Sovereigns’ reply from +Barcelona, March 30th, is in entire harmony, as regards lapse of time, +with the dispatch of Columbus’ letter from Palos on the 15th or 16th of +the month. The Latin translation was completed on the 29th April, a full +month after the arrival of the letter in Barcelona. There was plenty +of time, therefore, it is true, for the letter to have been printed in +Spanish, and for that Spanish to have served for the translation into +Latin; but if my suggestion, as derived from the above data, be correct, +that the alteration of 4 to 14 on the nema was made by Columbus himself, +my friend Senhor de Varnhagen’s conclusion that the Spanish printed text +_must_ have served for that translation becomes a _non sequitur_. Such +alteration by Columbus would naturally lead to the erroneous “ulisbone, +pridie idus Martii” in the Latin text, without the intervention of the +Spanish printed text, in which that alteration would of course also be +copied. + +I have stated these facts to show that the occurrence of March 14th both +in the Ambrosian text and the Latin translation, does not, as Senhor de +Varnhagen concluded, prove of necessity that the latter was derived from +the former, but from a common origin, to wit, in all probability the +original MS. of Columbus. But now that I have shown that the Latin _need +not_ have been derived from the Ambrosian, I proceed to show that it +_could not_ have been so. + +In the Ambrosian we find Guanahani spelt Guanaham; the island of Matinino +called Matremonio, etc., while in the Latin text we find the first name +correctly written Guanahani, Matinino is more nearly correctly written +Mateunin; and we have the name of an island, Charis, which is left out in +the Spanish altogether. But as the Latin translator possessed no special +knowledge by which he could make such corrections, it is clear that the +Ambrosian text could not have served as the basis for the Latin; whereas +if the two were derived from a common source, the errors of the Ambrosian +text would be those of its copyist, while the accurate rendering of +the corresponding passages in the Latin would be the result, not of +correction, as Senhor de Varnhagen suggests, but of attention to the +original. + +Upon this head Senhor de Varnhagen writes as follows:— + +“The Latin texts contain a correction of the words Guanahanin, Charis +(Caribes or Caraibes), and Mateunin (Matinino); but these corrections, +if perchance it should be proved that they were made at the time of the +first edition, and not afterwards (which we cannot here examine, not +having the different editions at hand), may have been pointed out by the +editor himself in sight of the original after the publication of the +printed text; or by Columbus himself, on receiving it on his road to +Barcelona, in order that some correct copies might be sent to Rome, by +way of communicating the news of the discovery that had been made, with +the view of obtaining the famous Bull from Alexander VI.” + +Now it is pretty clear that the Latin translation had nothing in the +world to do with the Papal bull. The name of _De_ Cosco indicates that +the translator was a Spaniard—and it is reasonable to assume that a +Spaniard would be selected to translate from Spanish into Latin—; +therefore we may fairly suppose that the translation was made in Spain. +It was not completed till the 29th of April—tertio kalendas maii—(not the +25th, an error of Navarrete’s, which Senhor de Varnhagen has adopted), +and the first bull was issued on the 3rd of May. The interval of four +days is scarcely sufficient to allow of the formal dispatch of the +document to Rome, its presentation and the drawing up of the bull, much +less if it had to undergo revision by Columbus, still less if it be a +question of correction of printed proofs set up in type at Rome in that +short interval. It is tolerably evident, then, that the Latin was sent to +Rome, not to the Pope, but only for printing. If, therefore, the missive +to the Pope was in Spanish, and included this letter, the corrections +by Columbus or by Sanchez, suggested by Senhor de Varnhagen, would have +been far better applied to the Spanish than to the Latin, instead of the +reverse, as suggested. + +It should, however, be borne in mind that in those days proofs were not +sent out for revision: but as a doubt may reasonably be entertained on +this point, on the score of the many imaginable possibilities that may +not have been foreseen or taken into consideration in this criticism, I +will now proceed to demonstrate that the Spanish and the Latin printed +texts certainly are derived from different, though similar, documents. +That they should be similar is natural, the one being written by Columbus +from the other, with such trivial changes as may have dropped from his +pen in transcribing. + +First: we have a Spanish text, the endorsement of which shows it to +have been sent to the Escribano de Racion. That this officer was Luis +de Santangel we know for certainty from Argensola’s _Anales de Aragon_, +lib. 1, cap. 10, p. 99, _et seq._, where he tells us that when the King +looked coldly on Columbus’s proposals, because the royal finances had +been drained by war, Isabella offered her jewels for the enterprise; but +this was rendered needless, as “Luis de Santangel, Escrivano de Racion +de Aragon, advanced seventeen thousand florins for the expenses of the +Armada.” This leaves no room for doubt that Columbus should immediately +send a copy of his letter to Santangel. In it was enclosed the copy +addressed to the Sovereigns.[25] This text sent to Santangel consisted of +a letter dated February 15th, and a postscript, announcing the arrival +off Lisbon on the 4th, subsequently altered to the 14th March. + +Secondly: we have a Latin text, distinctly stated to have been translated +from a letter addressed to the Royal Treasurer, Gabriel Sanchez. We have +thus clearly two letters addressed to two persons, but to annihilate +this duality Senhor de Varnhagen suggests “Why not suppose that this +last name, Gabriel Sanxis, which Cosco thought it necessary to announce, +was the result of his own verifications? He would inquire in Rome of the +Catholic delegates the name of the Escribano de Racion, and they would +give him that of the Treasurer General.” But this is inventing _one +surmise_ to fortify _another_, whereas Senhor de Varnhagen’s own zealous +research had provided evidence to prove a contrary _fact_. The Marquis +d’Adda has kindly sent me a photo-lithograph of a fragment of an Italian +version of this letter, of which His Excellency Senhor de Varnhagen had +found the title in the catalogue of the Ambrosian Library. This fragment +distinctly states it to have been a copy of one “sent by the Grand +Treasurer to his brother, Joane Sanxis.” + +Thus, beyond all question, it is proved that Columbus addressed these +two several letters to these two different persons, from one of which +the Spanish text was printed, and from the other the Latin translation +was made and subsequently printed. And having reached this point, we +see clearly that my suggestion of Columbus having altered the date of +4th March to 14th _must_ have been correct; and, furthermore, that he +copied the date of “14th,” on whichever of these two letters was written +last, because, while it stands March 14th _in totidem verbis_ in one, +it is rendered “pridie idus Martii” (which means the same thing) in the +translation from the other. We see in this date “Ulisbone, pridie idus +Martii,” a proof that the copy from which the Latin was made, consisted, +like the original of the Ambrosian Spanish text, of a complete letter +with the “nema” added, because the place Lisbon is derived from the +language at the beginning of the nema, and the date from Columbus’s +alteration at the end. Although the printer, Plannck, inserted nothing +of the “nema” beyond the said place and date, which he placed at the +end of the body of the letter in lieu of February 15th, we have a clear +proof that De Cosco had really translated the letter and nema as they +stand in the Spanish, for when we come to look into Dati’s poem, which +he distinctly states to be translated from the Latin, we find _the +date of February 15th retained, but no allusion to the contents of the +nema, which, being detached, had evidently not reached his hands_. This +fact, and others observable in his text, especially when examined in +combination with the Italian, which also came from the Sanchez original, +show that Dati worked from Cosco’s manuscript translation. As to whether +of the two printed texts, the Ambrosian Spanish or Plannck’s Latin, +can claim priority, we have no present means of deciding, but that the +preference is due to the Spanish under critical correction is manifest, +since it has been exposed to modifications from a compositor only, while +the Latin has passed through the two ordeals of a translation and a +compositor’s alterations. For this reason I have adopted the Spanish +in my text, observing that it replaces the very worst Latin text which +I could have adopted, viz., that taken by Navarrete from the _España +Illustrada_. The faults in the Ambrosian text are many and great, and +this has led Señor de Gayangos to suggest that it was printed, not in +Spain, but in Portugal, probably Lisbon. An opinion from one so eminent +has great weight, but while yielding to none in sincere respect for +the judgment of my distinguished friend, I confess I think that the +circumstances of the letter point, as Senhor de Varnhagen has stated, +to Barcelona for the place of printing. Mr. Winter Jones, the Principal +Librarian of the British Museum, and late Keeper of the Department of +Printed Books, whose bibliographical knowledge is so well known, tells +us that he recollects having seen the initial letter S, which commences +the Ambrosian text, but, in spite of great research, I have failed to +find it or the corresponding type in any work in our vast library. It +is here well to remark that no kind of _fac-simile_ is so baulking to +bibliographic comparison as the photographic. The respective sizes of +the letters are altered, and the outline is rendered broken and rotten. +A _fac-simile_ of this same letter, done by the hand, was published in +Milan in 1863, in the sixteenth volume of the _Biblioteca Rara_ of G. +Daelli, and gives the type a far firmer appearance than that in the +photograph. It is obvious that an opportunity is afforded of correcting +the mistakes in the Ambrosian text from the other texts which we possess. +This has been done with great skill and judgment by Senhor de Varnhagen +by collation with the Simancas, the Valencia, and the Latin texts; to +these aids I have added the Italian poem of Giuliano Dati, and the +Italian fragment, for which I have been indebted to the kindness of the +Marquis d’Adda. + +We possess no detailed description of the second voyage of Columbus from +his own hand. That which is here printed is the translation of a letter +addressed to the Chapter of Seville by Dr. Chanca, a native of that city, +who was physician to the fleet in this voyage, and was an eye-witness of +the events that he related. For this reason it is preferred to two other +accounts in Latin which are in existence, but which have both been made +up from hearsay. One of these occurs in the second book of the _Decades_ +of Peter Martyr of Anghiera, published first at Seville (Hispali) in +1511, and afterwards at Alcala de Henares (Compluti) in 1516, and often +subsequently printed. The other is a compilation by Nicolò Scillacio, +of Messina, who, while studying philosophy at Pavia in 1494 (?), and +living with Giovanni Antonio Biretta, received from Spain, from a certain +nobleman named Guglielmo Coma, a description of the recent discoveries +of Columbus. This, as Mr. Lenox tells us, he translated into Latin, +and inserted such other accounts as were then universally current, but +without changing or adding anything. Mr. James Lenox, of New York, who +is the possessor of one of the only two copies of this work known (the +other being in the possession of the Marquis Trivulzio of Milan), and who +states that it was first published in 1494, or early in 1495, reprinted +it in 1859, with a translation by the Rev. John Mulligan, giving as an +appendix my translation of Doctor Chanca’s letter, as printed in the +first edition of the present work in 1847. It is obvious that this work +of Scillacio’s, which is a pedantic compilation, cannot compare for +authenticity with the account of Dr. Chanca; while the latter contains +more incidents, and is more agreeably written than the narrative of Peter +Martyr. + +This letter by Dr. Chanca was copied by Navarrete (as he himself says at +the end of the letter in his work) from a manuscript in the possession +of the Royal Academy of History at Madrid, written in the middle of the +sixteenth century, and was amongst the collection of papers referring +to the West Indies, collected by Father Antonio de Aspa, a monk of the +order of St. Jerome, of the monastery of the Mejorada, near Olmedo.—This +document was unpublished previous to Navarrete’s compilation. A copy +was taken from the original by Don Manuel Avella, and deposited in +the collection of Don Juan Bautista Muñoz, and from that copy, after +collation with the original manuscript, the transfer was made by +Navarrete into his valuable work. This letter is followed by a Memorial +respecting the second voyage, addressed to the sovereigns by Columbus, +through the intervention of Antonio de Torres, governor of the city +of Isabella. At the close of each chapter or item is affixed their +highness’s reply. The document was taken by Navarrete from the Archives +of Seville. + +The two letters next in order in the present translation, are from the +hand of Columbus himself, and are descriptive of the events of the third +voyage. The first, addressed to the Sovereigns, was taken by Navarrete, +under careful collation by himself and Muñoz, from a manuscript in the +handwriting of the bishop Bartolomé de la Casas, found in the archives +of the duke del Infantado. The second, addressed to the nurse of Prince +John, is taken from a collection of manuscripts, relating to the West +Indies, made by Muñoz, and deposited in the Real Academia de la Historia +at Madrid. The text was collated by Navarrete with a copy inserted in the +Codice Colombo-Americano, said to have been written in the monastery of +Santa Maria de las Cuevas in Seville. + +The letter by Columbus, descriptive of his fourth voyage, was taken by +Navarrete from a manuscript in the king’s private library at Madrid, +written in the handwriting of the middle of the sixteenth century, +and probably the same copy as that which Pinelo, at page 61 of his +_Biblioteca Occidental_, 4to., 1629, describes as having been made by Don +Lorenzo Ramirez de Prado, from an edition in 4to., which does not appear +to be now in existence. It was translated into Italian by Constanzo +Bayuera of Brescia, and published at Venice in 1505, and, on account of +its extreme scarcity, was republished, with some learned comments, by +Morelli, the librarian of St. Mark’s at Venice, in 1810. + +That it had been printed in Spanish is asserted both by Pinelo and by +Fernando Columbus. + +It is presumed that the manuscript from which Navarrete made his copy was +that made by Ramirez de Prado, because it had been removed to the king’s +library, from the Colegio Mayor de Cuenca, in Salamanca, where the papers +of Ramirez had been deposited. + +I must not close this bibliographical notice without tendering my warmest +thanks to my friends, William Brenchley Rye, Esq., the learned Keeper of +the Printed Books in the British Museum; and Robert Edmund Graves, Esq., +one of the most accomplished of his Assistant-Librarians;—to the former +for most kindly making out the foregoing list of incunabula of the first +letter, and the latter for very valuable help in my search for collateral +texts by which to fortify my conclusions in the toilsome examination +which I have here brought to a termination. + + +FOOTNOTES: + +[24] It should be 29th. The mistake is copied from Navarrete. + +[25] In pursuance of his idea that not two, but only one letter, was +despatched to head-quarters, Senhor de Varnhagen has translated the +words of the endorsement “Contenida a otra de Sus Altezas.”—“Contenida +_en_ otra, etc.” and then, reasoning from the impossibility of Columbus +showing such familiarity with the Sovereigns, argues, that the letter +was in fact addressed to them only. With all respect I submit that the +natural rendering is “Contenida la otra de Sus Altezas”; Angl. “Contained +the other of their Highnesses”; or, as it would be clearer in French, “Y +contenue l’autre de Leurs Altesses;” and Santangel appropriately appears +as bearer of the missive to the Sovereigns. + + + + +SELECT LETTERS OF CHRISTOPHER COLUMBUS. ETC. + +Transcriber’s Note: In the original, the English text was printed at the +top of each page with the Spanish text below. This is not practical to +reproduce in an e-text, so the English is given first, followed by the +Spanish. + + + + +FIRST VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS.[26] + + +_A Letter sent by Columbus to [Luis de Santangel] Chancellor of the +Exchequer [of Aragon], respecting the Islands found in the Indies, +enclosing another for their Highnesses._ + +SIR,—Believing that you will take pleasure in hearing of the great +success which our Lord has granted me in my voyage, I write you this +letter, whereby you will learn how in thirty-three days’[27] time I +reached the Indies with the fleet which the most illustrious King and +Queen, our Sovereigns, gave to me, where I found very many islands +thickly peopled, of all which I took possession without resistance, +for their Highnesses by proclamation made and with the royal standard +unfurled. To the first island that I found I gave the name of _San +Salvador_,[28] in remembrance of His High Majesty, who hath marvellously +brought all these things to pass; the Indians call it _Guanaham_. To +the second island I gave the name of _Santa-Maria de Concepcion_;[29] +the third I called _Fernandina_;[30] the fourth, _Isabella_;[31] the +fifth, _Juana_;[32] and so to each one I gave a new name. When I reached +_Juana_, I followed its coast to the westward, and found it so large +that I thought it must be the mainland,—the province of _Cathay_; and, +as I found neither towns nor villages on the sea-coast, but only a few +hamlets, with the inhabitants, of which I could not hold conversation, +because they all immediately fled, I kept on the same route, thinking +that I could not fail to light upon some large cities and towns. At +length, after the proceeding of many leagues, and finding that nothing +new presented itself, and that the coast was leading me northwards +(which I wished to avoid, because winter had already set in, and it +was my intention to move southwards; and because moreover the winds +were contrary), I resolved not to wait for a change in the weather, but +returned to a certain harbour which I had remarked, and from which I sent +two men ashore to ascertain whether there was any king or large cities +in that part. They journeyed for three days and found countless small +hamlets with numberless inhabitants, but with nothing like order; they +therefore returned. In the meantime I had learned from some other Indians +whom I had seized, that this land was certainly an island; accordingly, +I followed the coast eastward for a distance of one hundred and seven +leagues, where it ended in a cape. From this cape, I saw another island +to the eastward at a distance of eighteen leagues from the former, to +which I gave the name of _La Española_.[33] Thither I went, and followed +its northern coast to the eastward (just as I had done with the coast +of _Juana_), one hundred and seventy[34]-eight full leagues due east. +This island, like all the others, is extraordinarily large, and this one +extremely so. In it are many seaports with which none that I know in +Christendom can bear comparison, so good and capacious that it is wonder +to see. The lands are high, and there are many very lofty mountains with +which the island of _Cetefrey_ cannot be compared. They are all most +beautiful, of a thousand different shapes, accessible, and covered with +trees of a thousand kinds of such great height that they seemed to reach +the skies. I am told that the trees never lose their foliage, and I can +well understand it, for I observed that they were as green and luxuriant +as in Spain in the month of May. Some were in bloom, others bearing +fruit, and others otherwise according to their nature. The nightingale +was singing as well as other birds of a thousand different kinds; and +that, in November, the month in which I myself was roaming amongst them. +There are palm-trees of six or eight kinds, wonderful in their beautiful +variety; but this is the case with all the other trees and fruits and +grasses; trees, plants, or fruits filled us with admiration. It contains +extraordinary pine groves, and very extensive plains. There is also +honey, a great variety of birds, and many different kind of fruits. In +the interior there are many mines of metals and a population innumerable. +_Española_ is a wonder. Its mountains and plains, and meadows, and +fields, are so beautiful and rich for planting and sowing, and rearing +cattle of all kinds, and for building towns and villages. The harbours +on the coast, and the number and size and wholesomeness of the rivers, +most of them bearing gold, surpass anything that would be believed by one +who had not seen them. There is a great difference between the trees, +fruits, and plants of this island and those of _Juana_. In this island +there are many spices and extensive mines of gold and other metals. The +inhabitants of this and of all the other islands I have found or gained +intelligence of, both men and women, go as naked as they were born, with +the exception that some of the women cover one part only with a single +leaf of grass or with a piece of cotton, made for that purpose. They have +neither iron, nor steel, nor arms, nor are they competent to use them, +not that they are not well-formed and of handsome stature, but because +they are timid to a surprising degree. Their only arms are reeds cut in +the seeding time,[35] to which they fasten small sharpened sticks, and +even these they dare not use; for on several occasions it has happened +that I have sent ashore two or three men to some village to hold a +parley, and the people have come out in countless numbers, but, as soon +as they saw our men approach, would flee with such precipitation that +a father would not even stop to protect his son; and this not because +any harm had been done to any of them, for, from the first, wherever I +went and got speech with them, I gave them of all that I had, such as +cloth and many other things, without receiving anything in return, but +they are, as I have described, incurably timid. It is true that when +they are reassured and have thrown off this fear, they are guileless, +and so liberal of all they have that no one would believe it who had not +seen it. They never refuse anything that they possess when it is asked +of them; on the contrary, they offer it themselves, and they exhibit +so much loving kindness that they would even give their hearts; and, +whether it be something of value or of little worth that is offered +to them, they are satisfied. I forbade that worthless things, such as +pieces of broken porringers and broken glass, and ends of straps, should +be given to them; although, when they succeeded in obtaining them, they +thought they possessed the finest jewel in the world. It was ascertained +that a sailor received for a leather strap a piece of gold weighing two +_castellanos_[36] and a half, and others received for other objects of +far less value, much more. For new _blancas_[37] they would give all that +they had, whether it was two or three _castellanos_ in gold or one or +two arrobas[38] of spun cotton. They took even bits of the broken hoops +of the wine barrels, and gave, like fools, all that they possessed in +exchange, insomuch that I thought it was wrong, and forbade it. I gave +away a thousand good and pretty articles which I had brought with me +in order to win their affection; and that they might be led to become +Christians, and be well inclined to love and serve their Highnesses +and the whole Spanish nation, and that they might aid us by giving us +things of which we stand in need, but which they possess in abundance. +They are not acquainted with any kind of worship, and are not idolaters; +but believe that all power and, indeed, all good things are in heaven; +and they are firmly convinced that I, with my vessels and crews, came +from heaven, and with this belief received me at every place at which I +touched, after they had overcome their apprehension. And this does not +spring from ignorance, for they are very intelligent, and navigate all +these seas, and relate everything to us, so that it is astonishing what +a good account they are able to give of everything; but they have never +seen men with clothes on, nor vessels like ours. On my reaching the +Indies, I took by force, in the first island that I discovered, some of +these natives, that they might learn our language and give me information +in regard to what existed in these parts; and it so happened that they +soon understood us and we them, either by words or signs, and they have +been very serviceable to us. They are still with me, and, from repeated +conversations that I have had with them, I find that they still believe +that I come from heaven. And they were the first to say this wherever +I went, and the others ran from house to house and to the neighbouring +villages, crying with a loud voice: “Come, come, and see the people from +heaven!” And thus they all, men as well as women, after their minds were +at rest about us, came, both large and small, and brought us something +to eat and drink, which they gave us with extraordinary kindness. They +have in all these islands very many canoes like our row-boats: some +larger, some smaller, but most of them larger than a barge of eighteen +seats. They are not so wide, because they are made of one single piece +of timber, but a barge could not keep up with them in rowing, because +they go with incredible speed, and with these canoes they navigate among +these islands, which are innumerable, and carry on their traffic. I have +seen in some of these canoes seventy and eighty men, each with his oar. +In all these islands I did not notice much difference in the appearance +of the inhabitants, nor in their manners nor language, except that they +all understand each other, which is very singular, and leads me to hope +that their Highnesses will take means for their conversion to our holy +faith, towards which they are very well disposed. I have already said +how I had gone one hundred and seven leagues in following the sea-coast +of _Juana_ in a straight line from west to east: and from that survey I +can state that the island is larger than England and Scotland together, +because, beyond these one hundred and seven leagues, there lie to the +west two provinces which I have not yet visited, one of which is called +_Avan_, where the people are born with a tail. These two provinces cannot +be less in length than from fifty to sixty leagues, from what can be +learned from the Indians that I have with me, and who are acquainted with +all these islands. The other, _Española_, has a greater circumference +than all Spain, from Catalonia by the sea-coast to Fuenterabia in Biscay, +since on one of its four sides I made one hundred and eighty-eight great +leagues in a straight line from west to east. This is something to covet, +and when found not to be lost sight of. Although I have taken possession +of all these islands in the name of their Highnesses, and they are all +more abundant in wealth than I am able to express; and although I hold +them all for their Highnesses, so that they can dispose of them quite +as absolutely as they can of the kingdoms of Castile, yet there was one +large town in _Española_ of which especially I took possession, situated +in a locality well adapted for the working of the gold mines, and for +all kinds of commerce, either with the main land on this side, or with +that beyond which is the land of the great Khan, with which there will be +vast commerce and great profit. To that city I gave the name of _Villa de +Navidad_, and fortified it with a fortress, which by this time will be +quite completed, and I have left in it a sufficient number of men with +arms,[39] artillery, and provisions for more than a year, a barge, and a +sailing master skilful in the arts necessary for building others. I have +also established the greatest friendship with the king of that country, +so much so that he took pride in calling me his brother, and treating +me as such. Even should these people change their intentions towards us +and become hostile, they do not know what arms are, but, as I have said, +go naked, and are the most timid people in the world; so that the men I +have left could, alone, destroy the whole country, and this island has +no danger for them, if they only know how to conduct themselves. In all +those islands it seems to me that the men are content with one wife, +except their chief or king, to whom they give twenty. The women seem to +me to work more than the men. I have not been able to learn whether they +have any property of their own. It seemed to me that what one possessed +belonged to all, especially in the matter of eatables. I have not found +in those islands any monsters, as many imagined; but, on the contrary, +the whole race is very well-formed, nor are they black, as in Guinea, +but their hair is flowing, for they do not dwell in that part where the +force of the sun’s rays is too powerful. It is true that the sun has very +great power there, for the country is distant only twenty-six degrees +from the equinoctial line. In the islands where there are high mountains, +the cold this winter was very great, but they endure it, not only from +being habituated to it, but by eating meat with a variety of excessively +hot spices. As to savages, I did not even hear of any, except at an +island which lies the second in one’s way in coming to the Indies.[40] +It is inhabited by a race which is regarded throughout these islands +as extremely ferocious, and eaters of human flesh. These possess many +canoes, in which they visit all the Indian islands, and rob and plunder +whatever they can. They are no worse formed than the rest, except that +they are in the habit of wearing their hair long, like women, and use +bows and arrows made of reeds, with a small stick at the end, for want +of iron, which they do not possess. They are ferocious amongst these +exceedingly timid people; but I think no more of them than of the rest. +These are they which have intercourse with the women of Matenino,[41] +the first island one comes to on the way from Spain to the Indies, and +in which there are no men. These women employ themselves in no labour +suitable to their sex; but use bows and arrows made of reeds like those +above described, and arm and cover themselves with plates of copper, of +which metal they have a great quantity. They assure me that there is +another island larger than _Española_, in which the inhabitants have no +hair. It is extremely rich in gold; and I bring with me Indians taken +from these different islands, who will testify to all these things. +Finally, and speaking only of what has taken place in this voyage, which +has been so hasty, their Highnesses may see that I shall give them all +the gold they require, if they will give me but a very little assistance; +spices also, and cotton, as much as their Highnesses shall command to +be shipped; and mastic, hitherto found only in Greece, in the island of +Chios, and which the Signoria[42] sells at its own price, as much as +their Highnesses shall command to be shipped; lign aloes, as much as +their Highnesses shall command to be shipped; slaves, as many of these +idolators as their Highnesses shall command to be shipped. I think also +I have found rhubarb and cinnamon, and I shall find a thousand other +valuable things by means of the men that I have left behind me, for I +tarried at no point so long as the wind allowed me to proceed, except +in the town of _Navidad_, where I took the necessary precautions for the +security and settlement of the men I left there. Much more I would have +done if my vessels had been in as good a condition as by rights they +ought to have been. This is much, and praised be the eternal God, our +Lord, who gives to all those who walk in his ways victory over things +which seem impossible; of which this is signally one, for, although +others may have spoken or written concerning these countries, it was +all mere conjecture, as no one could say that he had seen them—it +amounting only to this, that those who heard listened the more, and +regarded the matter rather as a fable than anything else. But our +Redeemer hath granted this victory to our illustrious King and Queen and +their kingdoms, which have acquired great fame by an event of such high +importance, in which all Christendom ought to rejoice, and which it ought +to celebrate with great festivals and the offering of solemn thanks to +the Holy Trinity with many solemn prayers, both for the great exaltation +which may accrue to them in turning so many nations to our holy faith, +and also for the temporal benefits which will bring great refreshment and +gain, not only to Spain, but to all Christians. This, thus briefly, in +accordance with the events. + +Done on board the caravel, off the Canary Islands, on the fifteenth of +February, fourteen hundred and ninety-three. + +At your orders. + + THE ADMIRAL. + +After this letter was written, as I was in the sea of Castile, there +arose a south-west wind, which compelled me to lighten my vessels and run +this day into this port of Lisbon, an event which I consider the most +marvellous thing in the world, and whence I resolved to write to their +Highnesses. In all the Indies I have always found the weather like that +in the month of May. I reached them in thirty-three days, and returned in +twenty-eight, with the exception that these storms detained me fourteen +days knocking about in this sea. All seamen say that they have never seen +such a severe winter nor so many vessels lost. + +Done on the fourteenth day of March. + + +_Esta Carta embió Colon al Escrivano de Racion de las Islas halladas en +las Indias. Contenida la otra de Sus Altezas._ + +Señor, por que se que aureis[43] plazer de la grand victoria que nuestro +señor me ha dado en mi vyaie, vos escriuo esta por la qual sabreys commo +en xxxiij dias pase a las jndias[44] con la armada que los illustrissimos +Rey et reyna, nuestros señores, me dieron, donde yo falle muy muchas +Islas pobladas con gente syn numero. Y dellas todas he tomado posession +por sus altezas con pregon y vandera real estendida, y non me fue +contradicho. A la primera que yo falle puse nombre Sant Saluador, a +comemoracion de Su Alta Magestad, el qual marauillosamente todo esto +andado;[45] los jndios la llaman Guanaham. A la segunda puse nombre +la ylsa de santa Maria de Concepcion. A la tercera Ferrandina. A la +quarta la Ysabella. A la quinta la isla Juana, et asy a cada vna nombre +nueuo. Quando yo llegue a la Juana segui yo la costa della al poniente +y la falle tan grande que pense que seria tierra firma, la prouincia +de Catayo, y como no falle asi[46] villas y lugares en la costa de la +mar, salvo pequeñas poblaciones, conla gente de las quales non podia +hauer fabla, por que luego fuyan todos, andaua yo adelante por el dicho +camino, pensando de no errar grandes Ciudades o villas, y al cabo de +muchas leguas visto que no hauia innovacion y que la costa me leuaua al +setentrion, de adonde mi voluntad era contraria, por que el yuierno era +ya encarnado,[47] yo tenia proposito de hazer del[48] al austro y tanbien +el viento me dio adelante, determine de no aguardar otro tiempo, y bolui +atras fasta un señalado puerto da donde enbie dos hombres por la tierra +para saber si auia rey o grandes ciudades. Andouieron tres iornadas y +hallaron infinitas poblaciones pequeñas y gente sin numero, mas no cosa +de regimiento, por lo qual se boluieron. Yo entendia harta de otros +jndios que ya tenia tomados commo continuamente esta tierra era isla, et +asi segui la costa della al oriente ciento y siete leguas faste donde +fazia fin: del qual cabo vi[49] otra isla al oriente, distincta[50] de +esta diez o ocho leguas, a la qual luego puse nombre la Spañola, y fui +alli y segui la parte del setentrion asi commo de la Juana al oriente, +clxxviij[51] grandes leguas[52] por linia recta del oriente asi commo +de la Juana, la qual y todas las otras son fortissimas[53] en demasiado +grado, y esta en estremo; en ella ay muchos puertos enla costa dela +mar, sin comparacion de otros que yo sepa en christianos, y sartos, y +buenos, y grandes, que es marauilla. Las tierras della son altas y en +ella muy muchas sierras y montañas altissimas sin comparacion de ysla de +centre.[54] Son todas fermossimas de mill. fechuras y todas andabiles y +llenas de arboles de mil maneras y altas y pareçen que llegan al cielo; +y tengo por dicho que jamas pierden la foia, segun lo puede comprehender +que los vi tan verdes y tan hermosos commo son por Mayo en Spaña, y +dellos stavan floridos, dellos con fruto, y dellos en otro termino segun +es su calidad; y cantaua el ruiseñol[55] y otros paxaricos[56] de mil +maneras en el mes de nouienbre por alli donde yo andaua. Ay palmas de +seys[57] o de ocho maneras, que es admiracion verlas por la disformidad +fermosa dellas; mas asi commo los otros arboles y frutos et yeruas. En +ella ay pinares a marauilla, e ay canpiñas grandissimas et ay mjel, y de +muchas maneras, de aues y frutas muy diversas. En las tierras ay muchas +minas de metales et ay gente inestimable numero. La spañola es marauilla; +las sierras y las montañas y las uegas y las campiñas y las tierras +tan fermosas y gruesas para plantar et senbrar, para criar ganados de +todas suertes para hedificios de villas y lugares. Los puertos de la +mar aqui no hauria creancia sin vista, et delos rios muchos y grandes y +buenas aguas, los mas delos quales traen oro. En los arboles et frutos +et yeruas ay grandes diferencias de aquellas de la Juana. En esta ay +muchas specierias[58] y grandes minas de oro y d’otros metales. La gente +desta jsla et de todas las otras que he fallado y hauido,[59] in aya +hauido noticia, andan todos desnudos, hombres et mugeres, asi commo sus +madres los paren, avnque algunas mugeres se cobijan vn solo lugar con +vna sola foia de yerua o vna cosa[60] de algodon que para ellos fazen. +Ellos no tienen fierro ni azero ni armas, ni son para ello; no porque +no sea gente bien dispuesta et de fermosa estatura, saluo que son muy +temerosos a marauilla. No tienen otras armas saluo las armas de las +cañas, quando estan con la simiente, a la qual ponen al cabo vn palillo +agudo, et no osan usar de aquellas, que muchas vezes me ha acaescido +enbiar a tierra dos o tres honbres alguna villa para hauer fabla, y +salir a ellos dellos sin numero, et despues que los veyan llegar, fuyan +a no aguardar padre a hijo, y esto no porque a ninguno se aya fecho mal; +antes a toda cabo a donde yo ay estado et podido auer fabla, les he dado +de todo lo que tenia, asi paño commo otras cosas muchas, sin recebir +por ello cosa alguna; mas son asi temerosos sin remedio. Verdad es que +despues que aseguran y pierden esta miedo, ellos son tanto sin engaño y +tan liberales delo que tienen que no lo creerian sino el que lo viese. +Ellos de cosa que tengan pidiendo gela, iamas dizen de no; antes conuidan +la persona con ello, y muestran tanto amor que darian los coraçones, et +quieren sea cosa de valor quien sea de poco precio luego por qualquiera +cosica de qualquiera manera que sea que sele de por ello, sean contentos. +Yo defendi que no se les diesen cosas tan siuiles commo pedaços de +escudillas rotas, y pedaços de vidrio roto, y cabos de agugetas: aunque +quando ellos esto podran llegar,[61] los parescia auer la mejor joya del +mundo: que se açerto auer vn marinero por vna agugeta de oro de peso de +dos castellanos y medio, y otros de otras cosas que muy menos valian, +mucho mas. Ya por blancas nuevas dauan por ellas todo quanto tenian +auer que[62] fuesen dos ni tres castellanos de oro o vna arroua[63] o +dos de algodon fylado. Fasta los pedaços delos arcos rotos de las pipas +tomauan y dauan lo que tenian commo bestias, asy que me parescia mal. Yo +lo defendi y daua yo graciosas mil cosas buenas que yo leuaua, por que +tomen amor y allenda desto se faran[64] cristianos, que se jnclinan al +amor y servicio de sus altezas y de toda la nacion castellana, y procuran +de aiuntar[65] de nos dar de las cosas que tienen en abundancia que nos +son neçessarias. Y no conocian ninguna seta nin ydolatria, saluo que +todos creen que las fuerças y el bien es en el cielo. Y creyan muy firme +que yo con estos nauios y gente venia del cielo, y en tal catamiento me +recibian[66] en todo cabo despues de auer perdido el miedo. Y esto no +precede porque sean ygnorantes, saluo de muy sotil ingenio y hombres que +nauegan todas aquellas mares, que es marauilla la buena cuenta quellos +dan de todo, salvo porque nunca vieron gente vestida ny semejantes +nauios. Y luego que legue a las jndias en la primera ysla que halle, tome +por fuerça algunos dellos para que deprendiesen y me diesen notia delo +que auia en aquellas partes, et asy fue que luego entendiron, y nos a +ellos, quando por lengua o señas, y estos han aprouechado mucho. Oy en +dia los traygo que siempre estan de proposito que vengo del cielo por +mucha conuersacion que ayan auido conmigo, y estos eran los primeros a +pronunciarlo adonde yo llegaua; y los otros andauan corriendo de casa +en casa, y alas villas çercenas con bozes altas, venid, venid a ver la +gente del cielo. Asi todos, hombres commo mugeres, despues de auer el +coraçon seguro de nos, venian[67] que no quedauan grande ni pequeño, y +todos trayan algo de comer y de beuer que dauan con un amor marauilloso. +Ellos tienen todas las yslas muy muchas canoas a manera de fustes[68] +de remo, dellas maioras, dellas menores y algunas y muchas son mayoras +que vna fusta de diez et ocho bancos. No son tan anchas porque son de +vn solo madero, mas vna fusta no terna con ellas al remo porque van que +no es cosa de creer, y con estas nauegan todas aquellas yslas que son +jnnumerables, y traten sus mercaderias. Algunas destas canoas he visto +con. lxx. y lxxx. honbres en ella, y cada vno con su remo. En todas +estas yslas no vide mucha diuersidad de la fechura dela gente ni en las +costumbres ni en la lengua, saluo que todos se entienden, que es cosa +muy singular, para lo que espero que determinaren sus altezas para la +conversacion[69] dellos de nuestra santa fe a la qual son muy dispuestos. +Ya dixe commo yo hauia andada c. vij. leguas por la costa de la mar por +la derecha liña de ocidente a oriente por la ysla Juana, segun el qual +camino puedo desir que esta isla es mayor que inglaterra y escosia juntas +por que allen de destas c. vij. leguas, me queda de la parte de poniente +dos prouincias que yo no he andado; la vna de las quales llaman Auan,[70] +adonde nascen la gente con cola, las quales prouincias no pueden tener en +longura menos de l. o lx. leguas, segund puede[71] entender destos jndios +que yo tengo, los quales saben todas las yslas. Esta otra española en +cierco tiene mas que la españa toda desde colunya[72] por costa de mar +fasta fuente rauia en vi scaya pues en vna quadra anduue clxxxviij.[73] +grandes leguas por recta linia de occidente a oriente. Esta es para +desear, et vista, es para nunca dexar; enla qual puesto que de todas +tenga tomada possession por sus altezas, y todas sean mas abastadas +delo que yo se y puedo dezir, y todas las tengo por de sus altezas qual +dellas pueden disponer commo y tan complidamente commo delos Reynos de +castilla. En esta española en el lugar[74] mas conuenible y meyor comarca +para las minas del oro y de todo trato, asi dela tierra firme de aqua +commo de aquella de alla del grand can, adonde aura[75] grand trato et +grand ganança, he tomado possession de vna villa grande, ala qual puse +nombre la villa de Nauidad. Y en ella he fecho fuerça y fortaleza que +ya a estas horas estara del todo acabada, y he dexada en ella gente que +abasta para semejante fecho, con armas y artellarias et vituallas por +mas de un año; y fusta y maestro de la mar en todas artes para fazer +otras, y grande amistad con el rey de aquella tierra en tanto grado que +se preciaua de me llamar y tener por hermano; y aunque le mudasse[76] la +voluntad a offender esta gente, el ni los suyos no saben que sean armas +y andan desnudos commo ya he dicho: son los mas temerosos que ay en el +mundo, asi que solamente la gente que alla queda, es para destroir toda +aquella tierra, y es ysla syn peligro de sus personas sabiendo se regir. +En todas estas yslas me parece que todos los honbres sean contentos con +vna muger, y a su mayoral o rey dan fasta veynte. Las mugeres me parece +que trabaian mas que los honbres, ni he podido entender si tenien bienes +propios, que me parecio ver que aquello que vno tenia todos hazian +parte, en especial de las cosas comederas. En estas yslas fasta aqui no +he hallado honbres mostrudos, commo muchos pensauan; mas antes es toda +gente de muy lindo acatamiento, ny son negros commo en guinea, saluo con +sus cabellos corredios,[77] y no se crian adonde ay jnpeto[78] demasiado +delos rayos solares. Es verdad quel sol tiene alli grande fuerça, puesto +que es didistinta[79] dela linia inquinocial xxvi. grandes. En estas +islas adonde ay montañas, ay tenida[80] a fuerça el frio este yuierno, +mas ellos lo sufren por la costumbre que con la ayuda delas viandas +que comen con[81] especias muchas y muy calientes en demasia. Asy que +mostruos no he hallado jnnoticia,[82] saluo de una ysla[83] que es aqui +en la segunda a la entrada de las jndias, que es poblada de vna gente +que tienen en todas las yslas por muy ferozes, los quales comen carne +humana.[84] Estos tienen muchas canaos, con las quales corren todas las +yslas de jndia: roban y toman quanto pueden. Ellos no son mas difformes +que los otros, saluo que tienen en costumbre de traer los cabellos largos +commo mugeres, y vsan arcos y flechas de las mismas armas de cañas con +vn palillo al cabo, por defecto de fierro, que no tienen. Son feroses +entre estos otros pueblos que son en demasiado grado couardes, mas yo no +lo tengo a nada mas que a los otros. Estos son aquellos que tratan con +las mugeres de matremonio,[85] que es la primera ysla partiendo despaña +para las jndias que se falla, enla qual no ay honbre ninguno. Ellas no +vsan exercicio femenil, saluo arcos y flechas commo los sobredichos de +cañas, y se arman y cobijan con lamines de arambre, de que tienen mucho. +Otra ysla me seguran mayor que la española, en que las personas no tienen +ningun cabello. En esta ay oro sin cuenta, y desta y de las otras traigo +comigo jndios para testimonio. Y conclusion a fablar desto solamente que +sea fecho este viage, que fue si de corrida que pueden ver sus altezas +que yo les dare oro quanto ovieren[86] menester con muy poquita ajuda +que sus altezas me daran, agora specieria y algodon quanto sus altezas +mandaran cargar, y almastica[87] quanta mandaran cargar, et dela qual +fasta oy no se ha fallado, saluo en grecia enla ysla de xio, y el señorio +la vende commo quiere, y liguñaloe quanto mandaran cargar, y esclavos +quanto mandaran cargar et seran delos ydolatres.[88] Y creo auer hallado +ruybaruo y canela y otras mil cosas de sustancia fallare, que auran +fallado la gente que yo alla dexo, por que yo no me he detenido ningun +cabo, en quanto el viento me aya dado lugar de nauegar, solamente en la +villa de Nauidad en quanto dexe asegurado et bien asentado; y ala verdad +mucho mas ficiera si los nauios me siruieran commo razon demandaua. Esto +es harto[89] y eterno dios nuestro señor el qual da a todos aquellos +que andan su camino victoria de cosas que parecen inposibles: y esta +señaladamente fue la vna; porque avnque destas tierras ayan fallado +o escripto,[90] todo va por conlectura sin allegar devista, saluo +comprendiendo a tanto que los oyentes los mas escuchauan y juzgauan mas +por fabla que por poca[91] cosa dello. + +Asy que pues nuestro redentor dio victoria a nuestros illustrissimos +rey et reyna y a sus reynos famosos de tan alta cosa, adonde toda la +christianidad deve tomar alegria y fazer grandes fiestas, y dar gracias +solennes a la santa trinidad con muchas oraciones solennes por el tanto +enxalçamiento que auran, en tornandose[92] tantos pueblosa nuestra santa +fe, y despues por los bienes temporales; que no solamente a la españa +mas a todos los cristianos ternan aqui refrigerio y ganancia. Esto segun +el fecho asi en breue[93]. Fecha enla calauera[94] sobre las yslas de +canaria[95] a xv.[96] de febrero, Mill. y quatrocientos y nouenta y tres +años. + +Fara[97] lo que mandereys[98]. + + EL ALMIRANTE. + +Nyma[99] que venia dentro en la carta. + +Despues desta escripto:[100] y estando en mar de Castilla salyo tanto +viento conmigo sul y sueste que me ha fecho descargar los nauios por +cori[101] aqui en esto puerto de lysbona oy, que fue la mayor marauilla +del mundo. Adonde acorde escriuir a sus altezas. En todas las yndias +he siempre hallado los tenporales[102] commo en mayo. Adonde yo fuy en +xxxiij.[103] dias y bolui en xxviij.[104] salvo questas tormentas me han +detenido xiiij.[105] dias corriendo por esta mar. Dizen aqua todos los +honbres dela mar que jamas ouo tan mal yuierno, no ni tantas perdidas de +naues.[106] Fecha a. xiiij dias de marco. + +Esta carta embio Colon al escrivano Deracion delas Islas halladas en las +Indias. Contenida a otra[107] de sus Altezas. + + +FOOTNOTES: + +[26] The original spelling of the Ambrosian text, with all its faults, +is here preserved, with the exception of the separation of words fused +together, and the addition of punctuation and capitals for the sake of +clearness. Suggested corrections from the other texts will be placed at +the foot of each page, V. standing for Valencian text; S. for Simancas +text; I. for Italian text; L. for Latin; D. for Dati. Such misspellings +as a Spanish scholar will readily recognize as the blunders of the +Spanish printer I have not thought it necessary to notice. + +[27] From the 8th of September when Columbus sailed from the Canaries, to +the 11th of October when he first saw land, was thirty-three days. + +[28] Watling’s Island. + +[29] Long Island. + +[30] Great Exuma. + +[31] Saometo or Crooked Island. + +[32] Cuba. + +[33] Hispaniola or San Domingo. + +[34] It should be 188 leagues. See Bibliographical Notice. + +[35] These canes are probably the flowering stems of large grasses, +similar to the bamboo or to the arundinaria used by the natives of Guiana +for blowing arrows. + +[36] An old Spanish coin, equal to the fiftieth part of a mark of gold. + +[37] Small copper coins, equal to about the quarter of a farthing. + +[38] One _arroba_ weighs twenty-five pounds. + +[39] There appears to be a doubt as to the exact number of men left +by Columbus at Española, different accounts variously giving it as +thirty-seven, thirty-eight, thirty-nine, and forty. There is, however, a +list of their names included in one of the diplomatic documents printed +in Navarrete’s work, which makes the number amount to forty, independent +of the governor Diego de Arana, and his two lieutenants Pedro Gutierrez +and Rodrigo de Escobedo. All these men were Spaniards, with the exception +of two; one an Irishman named William Ires, a native of Galway, and one +an Englishman, whose name was given as Tallarte de Lajes, but whose +native designation it is difficult to guess at. The document in question, +was a proclamation to the effect that the heirs of those men should, +on presenting at the office of public business at Seville, sufficient +proof of their being the next of kin, receive payment in conformity with +the royal order to that purpose, issued at Burgos, on the twentieth of +December, 1507. + +[40] Dominica. + +[41] Martinique. + +[42] Of Genoa. The island of Chios belonged to the Genoese Republic from +1346 to 1566. + +[43] Habreis. + +[44] V. “pasé de las Islas de Canaria a las Indias.” + +[45] V. and S. “ha dado.” + +[46] V. “ahi.” + +[47] So in all the texts. Senhor de Varnhagen suggests “entrado” for +“encarnado.” + +[48] So in all the texts. Senhor de Varnhagen suggests “hacerme.” + +[49] V. and S. “habia otra isla;” L. “aliam insulam prospexi.” + +[50] V. and S. “distante.” + +[51] V. “ciento e ochenta y ocho.” S. “ciento e setenta y +ocho.” I. “cento otanta otto leghe.” L. “miliaria dlxiiii.” D. +“cinquecensessantaquattro miglia.” + +[52] V. “leguas la cual y todas.” S. “leguas por via reta del oriente asi +como de la Juana, la cual y todos.” I. “leghe por la dritta linea del +oriente cosi como de la Zouana.” + +[53] V. “fertilisimas.” S. “fortisimas.” I. “feralissime.” + +[54] V. “Teneryfe.” S. “Cetrefrey.” I. “Santaffer.” L. omitted. + +[55] V. and S. “ruiseñor.” + +[56] V. and S. “pajaros.” + +[57] V. and S. “seis.” I. “setto.” L. “septem.” D. “septe.” + +[58] V. and S. “especies.” + +[59] V. and S. “y ha havido.” I. “ho travado ho inteso.” + +[60] V. “cofia.” S. “cosa.” I. “cosa.” + +[61] V, “llevar.” + +[62] V. and S. “aunque.” + +[63] V. and S. omitted. + +[64] V. “façan.” + +[65] V. and S. “ayudar.” + +[66] V. and S. “reciben.” + +[67] V. and S. “venieron.” + +[68] “fustas.” + +[69] V. and S. “conversion.” L. “conversionem.” + +[70] V. “Nhan.” S. “Cibau.” L. “Anan.” + +[71] V. and S. “puedo.” + +[72] V. “Colibre.” S. “Colunia.” L. “Colonia.” Misread from an abridged +word in the original, which the sense of the passage would make +“Catalonia.” + +[73] V. and S. “ciento treinta y ocho.” L. “miliaria dxl.” D. +“cinquecensessantoquattro miglia.” + +[74] V. and S. “en lugar.” + +[75] V. and S. “habra.” + +[76] V. and S. “mudasen.” + +[77] V. and S. “correndios.” + +[78] V. “effeto.” S. “espeto.” Navarrete says that in old Spanish +“espeto” meant a “spit.” + +[79] V. and S. “distante.” + +[80] V. and S. “ahi tenia fuerza.” + +[81] V. and S. “como son.” L. “quibus vescuntur.” + +[82] V. and S. “ni noticia.” + +[83] V. “isla de Quarives.” L. “insula Charis nuncupata.” + +[84] V. and S. “viva.” L. “humana.” + +[85] V. “que tomaban las mugeres de Matinino.” S. “que trocaban las +mugeres de matrimonio.” L. “qui coeunt cum quibusdam feminis quæ insulam +Mateunim habitant.” D. “isola decta Matanino.” + +[86] V. and S. “hobieren.” + +[87] V. and S. “almasiga.” + +[88] In the corrupt edition of the Latin translation reprinted +by Navarrete from the _España Illustrada_, this word is rendered +“hydrophilatorum.” + +[89] V. and S. “cierto.” + +[90] V. and S. “fablado otros.” L. “scripserunt vel locuti sunt.” + +[91] V. and S. “otra.” L. “prope videbatur fabula.” + +[92] V. and S. “ayuntandose.” + +[93] V. and S. “esto segundo ha fecho ser muy breve.” L. “hæc ut gesta +sunt sic breviter enarrata.” + +[94] V. and S. “carabela.” + +[95] V. “la isla de Sa. Maria.” + +[96] V. “18.” This latter date is the only one which corresponds with the +fourteen days, mentioned in the postscript, during which Columbus was +detained at sea by the weather previously to his reaching Lisbon on the +4th of March. + +[97] V. “Para.” + +[98] V. “mandaredes.” + +[99] S. “Anima.” V. The entire nema wanting. The same in L. and D. + +[100] S. “escrita.” + +[101] S. “correr.” + +[102] S. “tiempos.” + +[103] S. “noventa y tres.” + +[104] S. “setenta y ocho.” Both are wrong. It should be forty-eight, from +January 16 to March 4. + +[105] S. “trece.” + +[106] S. “los quatro.” Columbus really arrived at Lisbon on the 4th of +March. For an explanation of this discrepancy, see Bibliographical Notice. + +[107] S. “Indias e otra.” + + + + +SECOND VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS. + + +_A Letter addressed to the Chapter of Seville by Dr. Chanca,[108] native +of that city, and physician to the fleet of Columbus, in his second +voyage to the West Indies, describing the principal events which occurred +during that voyage._ + +Most noble sir,—Since the occurrences which I relate in private letters +to other persons, are not of such general interest as those which are +contained in this epistle, I have resolved to give you a distinct +narrative of the events of our voyage, as well as to treat of the other +matters which form the subject of my petition to you. The news I have +to communicate are as follows: The expedition which their Catholic +Majesties sent, by Divine permission, from Spain to the Indies, under +the command of Christopher Columbus, admiral of the ocean, left Cadiz on +the twenty-fifth of September, of the year [109], with wind and weather +favourable for the voyage. This wind lasted two days, during which time +we managed to make nearly fifty leagues. The weather then changing, +we made little or no progress for the next two days; it pleased God, +however, after this, to restore us fine weather, so that in two days more +we reached the Great Canary. Here we put into harbour, which we were +obliged to do, to repair one of the ships which made a great deal of +water; we remained all that day, and on the following set sail again, but +were several times becalmed, so that we were four or five days before we +reached Gomera. We had to remain at Gomera one day to lay in our stores +of meat, wood, and as much water as we could stow, preparatory to the +long voyage which we expected to make without seeing land: thus through +the delay at these two ports, and being calmed the day after leaving +Gomera, we were nineteen or twenty days before we arrived at the Island +of Ferro. After this we had, by the goodness of God, a return of fine +weather, more continuous than any fleet ever enjoyed during so long a +voyage; so that leaving Ferro on the thirteenth of October, within twenty +days we came in sight of land: and we should have seen it in fourteen or +fifteen days, if the ship _Capitana_ had been as good a sailer as the +other vessels; for many times the others had to shorten sail, because +they were leaving us much behind. During all this time we had great +good fortune, for throughout the voyage we encountered no storm, with +the exception of one on St. Simon’s eve, which for four hours put us in +considerable jeopardy. + +On the first Sunday after All Saints, namely, the third of November, +about dawn, a pilot of the ship _Capitana_ cried out “The reward, I see +the land!” + +The joy of the people was so great, that it was wonderful to hear their +cries and exclamations of pleasure; and they had good reason to be +delighted, for they had become so wearied of bad living, and of working +the water out of the ships, that all sighed most anxiously for land. +The pilots of the fleet reckoned on that day, that between leaving Ferro +and first reaching land, we had made eight hundred leagues; others said +seven hundred and eighty (so that the difference was not great), and +three hundred more between Ferro and Cadiz, making in all eleven hundred +leagues; I do not therefore feel as one who had not seen enough of the +water. On the morning of the aforesaid Sunday, we saw lying before us +an island, and soon on the right hand another appeared: the first[110] +was high and mountainous, on the side nearest to us; the other[111] +flat, and very thickly wooded: as soon as it became lighter, other +islands began to appear on both sides; so that on that day, there were +six islands to be seen lying in different directions, and most of them +of considerable size. We directed our course towards that which we had +first seen, and reaching the coast, we proceeded more than a league in +search of a port where we might anchor, but without finding one: all +that part of the island which met our view, appeared mountainous, very +beautiful, and green even up to the water, which was delightful to see, +for at that season there is scarcely any thing green in our own country. +When we found that there was no harbour there,[112] the admiral decided +that we should go to the other island, which appeared on the right, and +which was at four or five leagues distance: one vessel however still +remained on the first island all that day seeking for a harbour, in case +it should be necessary to return thither. At length, having found a good +one, where they saw both people and dwellings, they returned that night +to the fleet, which had put into harbour at the other island,[113] and +there the admiral, accompanied by a great number of men, landed with the +royal banner in his hands, and took formal possession on behalf of their +Majesties. This island was filled with an astonishingly thick growth of +wood; the variety of unknown trees, some bearing fruit and some flowers, +was surprising, and indeed every spot was covered with verdure. We found +there a tree whose leaf had the finest smell of cloves that I have ever +met with; it was like a laurel leaf, but not so large: but I think it +was a species of laurel. There were wild fruits of various kinds, some +of which our men, not very prudently, tasted; and upon only touching +them with their tongues, their countenances became inflamed,[114] and +such great heat and pain followed, that they seemed to be mad, and +were obliged to resort to refrigerants to cure themselves. We found no +signs of any people in this island, and concluded it was uninhabited; +we remained only two hours, for it was very late when we landed, and +on the following morning we left for another very large island,[115] +situated below this at the distance of seven or eight leagues. We +approached it under the side of a great mountain, that seemed almost +to reach the skies, in the middle of which rose a peak higher than all +the rest of the mountain, whence many streams diverged into different +channels, especially towards the part at which we arrived. At three +leagues distance, we could see an immense fall of water, which looked +of the breadth of an ox, and discharged itself from such a height that +it appeared to fall from the sky; it was seen from so great a distance +that it occasioned many wagers to be laid on board the ships, some +maintaining that it was but a series of white rocks, and others that it +was water. When we came nearer to it, it showed itself distinctly, and it +was the most beautiful thing in the world to see from how great a height +and from what a small space so large a fall of water was discharged. As +soon as we neared the island the admiral ordered a light caravel to run +along the coast to search for a harbour; the captain put into land in a +boat, and seeing some houses, leapt on shore and went up to them, the +inhabitants fleeing at sight of our men; he then went into the houses +and there found various household articles that had been left unremoved, +from which he took two parrots, very large and quite different from any +we had before seen; he found a great quantity of cotton, both spun and +prepared for spinning, and articles of food, of all of which he brought +away a portion; besides these, he also brought away four or five bones +of human arms and legs. On seeing these we suspected that we were +amongst the Caribbee islands, whose inhabitants eat human flesh; for the +admiral, guided by the information respecting their situation which he +had received from the Indians of the islands discovered in his former +voyage, had directed his course with a view to their discovery, both +because they were the nearest to Spain, and because this was the direct +track for the island of Española, where he had left some of his people. +Thither, by the goodness of God and the wise management of the admiral, +we came in as straight a track as if we had sailed by a well known and +frequented route. This island is very large, and on the side where we +arrived it seemed to us to be twenty-five leagues in length. We sailed +more than two leagues along the shore in search of a harbour. On the part +towards which we moved appeared very high mountains, and on that which we +left extensive plains; on the sea coast there were a few small villages, +whose inhabitants fled as soon as they saw the sails. At length after +proceeding two leagues we found a port late in the evening. That night +the admiral resolved that some of the men should land at break of day in +order to confer with the natives, and learn what sort of people they +were; although it was suspected, from the appearance of those who had +fled at our approach, that they were naked, like those whom the admiral +had seen in his former voyage. In the morning several detachments under +their respective captains sallied forth; one of them returned at the +dinner hour, with a boy of about fourteen years of age, as it afterwards +appeared, who said that he was one of the prisoners taken by these +people. The others divided themselves, and one party took a little boy, +whom a man was leading by the hand, but who left him and fled; this boy +they sent on board immediately with some of our men; others remained, +and took certain women, natives of the island, together with other women +from among the captives who came of their own accord. One captain of this +last company, not knowing that any intelligence of the people had been +obtained, advanced farther into the island and lost himself, with the +six men who accompanied him: they could not find their way back until +after four days, when they lighted upon the sea shore, and following +the line of coast returned to the fleet.[116] We had already looked +upon them as killed and eaten by the people that are called Caribbees; +for we could not account for their long absence in any other way, since +they had among them some pilots who by their knowledge of the stars +could navigate either to or from Spain, so that we imagined that they +could not lose themselves in so small a space. On this first day of our +landing several men and women came on the beach up to the water’s edge, +and gazed at the ships in astonishment at so novel a sight; and when a +boat pushed on shore in order to speak with them, they cried out “tayno +tayno,” which is as much as to say, “good,” and waited for the landing +of the sailors, standing by the boat in such a manner that they might +escape when they pleased. The result was, that none of the men could be +persuaded to join us, and only two were taken by force, who were secured +and led away. More than twenty of the female captives were taken with +their own consent, and other women natives of the island were surprised +and carried off: several of the boys, who were captives, came to us +fleeing from the natives of the island who had taken them prisoners. +We remained eight days in this port in consequence of the loss of the +aforesaid captain, and went many times on shore, passing amongst the +dwellings and villages which were on the coast; we found a vast number of +human bones and skulls hung up about the houses, like vessels intended +for holding various things. There were very few men to be seen here, and +the women informed us that this was in consequence of ten canoes having +gone to make an attack upon other islands. These islanders appeared to us +to be more civilised than those that we had hitherto seen; for although +all the Indians have houses of straw, yet the houses of these people +are constructed in a much superior fashion, are better stocked with +provisions, and exhibit more evidences of industry, both on the part of +the men and the women. They had a considerable quantity of cotton, both +spun and prepared for spinning, and many cotton sheets, so well woven as +to be no way inferior to those of our country. We inquired of the women, +who were prisoners in the island, what people these islanders were: +they replied that they were Caribbees. As soon as they learned that we +abhorred such people, on account of their evil practice of eating human +flesh, they were much delighted; and, after that, if they brought forward +any woman or man of the Caribbees, they informed us (but secretly), that +they were such, still evincing by their dread of their conquerors, that +they belonged to a vanquished nation, though they knew them all to be in +our power. + +We were enabled to distinguish which of the women were natives, and +which were captives, by the Caribbees wearing on each leg two bands of +woven cotton, the one fastened round the knee, and the other round the +ankle; by this means they make the calves of their legs large, and the +above-mentioned parts very small, which I imagine that they regard as +a matter of prettiness: by this peculiarity we distinguished them. The +habits of these Caribbees are brutal. There are three islands: the one +called Turuqueira; the other, which was the first that we saw, is called +Ceyre;[117] the third is called Ayay: there is a resemblance among the +natives of all these, as if they were of one race, and they do no injury +to each other; but each and all of them wage war against the other +neighbouring islands, and for the purpose of attacking them, make voyages +of a hundred and fifty leagues at sea, with their numerous canoes, which +are a small kind of craft made out of a single trunk of a tree. Their +arms are arrows, in the place of iron weapons, and as they have no iron, +some of them point their arrows with tortoise-shell, and others make +their arrow heads of fish spines, which are naturally barbed like coarse +saws: these prove dangerous weapons to a naked people like the Indians, +and may cause death or severe injury, but to men of our nation they are +not very formidable. In their attacks upon the neighbouring islands, +these people capture as many of the women as they can, especially those +who are young and beautiful, and keep them as concubines; and so great +a number do they carry off, that in fifty houses no men were to be +seen; and out of the number of the captives, more than twenty were +young girls. These women also say that the Caribbees use them with such +cruelty as would scarcely be believed; and that they eat the children +which they bear to them, and only bring up those which they have by their +native wives. Such of their male enemies as they can take alive, they +bring to their houses to make a feast of them, and those who are killed +they devour at once. They say that man’s flesh is so good, that there +is nothing like it in the world; and this is pretty evident, for of the +bones which we found in their houses, they had gnawed everything that +could be gnawed, so that nothing remained of them but what was too tough +to be eaten: in one of the houses we found the neck of a man, undergoing +the process of cooking in a pot. When they take any boys prisoners, they +dismember them, and make use of them until they grow up to manhood, and +then when they wish to make a feast they kill and eat them, for they say +that the flesh of boys and women is not good to eat. Three of these boys +came fleeing to us thus mutilated. + +At the end of four days arrived the captain who had lost himself with +his companions, of whose return we had by this time given up all hope; +for other parties had been twice sent out to seek him, one of which +came back on the same day that he rejoined us, without having gained +any information respecting the wanderers: we rejoiced at their arrival, +regarding it as a new accession to our numbers. The captain and the men +who accompanied him brought back some women and boys, ten in number. +Neither this party, nor those who went out to seek them, had seen any of +the men of the island, which must have arisen either from their having +fled, or possibly from their being but very few men in that locality; +for, as the women informed us, ten canoes had gone away to make an attack +upon the neighbouring islands. The wanderers had returned from the +mountains in such an emaciated condition, that it was distressing to see +them. When we asked them how it was that they lost themselves, they said +that the trees were so thick and close that they could not see the sky. +Some of them who were mariners had climbed the trees to get a sight of +the stars, but could never see them, and if they had not found their way +to the sea coast, it would have been impossible to have returned to the +fleet. We left this island eight days after our arrival.[118] The next +day at noon we saw another island,[119] not very large, at about twelve +leagues distance from the one we were leaving. The greater part of the +first day of our departure we were kept close in to the coast of this +island by a calm, but as the Indian women whom we brought with us said +that it was not inhabited, but had been dispeopled by the Caribbees, we +made no stay in it. On that evening we saw another island:[120] and in +the night finding there were some sand-banks near, we dropped anchor, not +venturing to proceed until the morning. On the morrow another island[121] +appeared, of considerable size, but we touched at none of these because +we were anxious to convey consolation to our people who had been left +in Española; but it did not please God to grant us our desire, as will +hereafter appear. Another day at the dinner hour we arrived at an +island[122] which seemed worth the finding, for judging by the extent +of cultivation in it, it appeared very populous. We went thither and put +into harbour, when the admiral immediately sent on shore a well manned +barge to hold speech with the Indians, in order to ascertain what race +they were, and also because it was necessary to gain some information +respecting our course; although it afterwards plainly appeared that +the admiral, who had never made that passage before, had taken a very +correct route. But as matters of doubt should always be brought to as +great a certainty as possible by inquiry, he wished the natives to be +communicated with, and some of the men who went in the barge landed and +went up to a village, whence the inhabitants had already withdrawn and +hidden themselves. They took in this island five or six women and some +boys, most of whom were captives, like those in the other island; for, +as we learned from the women whom we had brought with us, the natives of +this place also were Caribbees. As this barge was about to return to the +ships with the capture which they had made, a canoe came along the coast +containing four men, two women, and a boy; and when they saw the fleet +they were so stupified with amazement, that for a good hour they remained +motionless at the distance of nearly two gunshots from the ships. In this +position they were seen by those who were in the barge and also by all +the fleet. Meanwhile those in the barge moved towards the canoe, but so +close in shore, that the Indians, in their perplexity and astonishment as +to what all this could mean, never saw them, until they were so near that +escape was impossible; for our men pressed on them so rapidly that they +could not get away, although they made considerable effort to do so. + +When the Caribbees saw that all attempt at flight was useless, they +most courageously took to their bows, both women and men; I say most +courageously, because they were only four men and two women, and our +people were twenty-five in number. Two of our men were wounded by the +Indians, one with two arrow-shots in his breast, and another with one in +his side, and if it had not happened that they carried shields and wooden +bucklers, and that they soon got near them with the barge and upset +their canoe, most of them would have been killed with their arrows. +After their canoe was upset, they remained in the water swimming and +occasionally wading (for there were shallows in that part), still using +their bows as much as they could, so that our men had enough to do to +take them: and after all there was one of them whom they were unable to +secure till he had received a mortal wound with a lance, and whom thus +wounded they took to the ships. The difference between these Caribbees +and the other Indians, with respect to dress, consists in their wearing +their hair very long, while the others have it clipt irregularly and +paint their heads with crosses and a hundred thousand different devices, +each according to his fancy; which they do with sharpened reeds. All +of them, both the Caribbees and the others, are beardless, so that +it is a rare thing to find a man with a beard: the Caribbees whom we +took had their eyes and eyebrows stained, which I imagine they do from +ostentation. It gave them a more formidable appearance. One of these +captives said, that in an island belonging to them called Cayre[123] +(which is the first that we saw, though we did not go to it), there is +a great quantity of gold; and that if we were to take them nails and +tools with which to make their canoes, we might bring away as much gold +as we liked. On the same day we left that island, having been there +no more than six or seven hours; and, steering for another point of +land[124] which appeared to lie in our intended course, we reached it +by night. On the morning of the following day we coasted along it, and +found it to be a large extent of country, but not continuous, for it was +divided into more than forty islets.[125] The land was very high and +most of it barren, an appearance which we have never observed in any of +the islands visited by us before or since: the surface of the ground +seemed to suggest the probability of its containing metals. None of us +went on shore here, but a small latteen caravel went up to one of the +islets and found in it some fishermen’s huts; the Indian women whom we +brought with us said they were not inhabited. We proceeded along the +coast the greater part of that day, and on the evening of the next we +discovered another island called Burenquen,[126] which we judged to be +thirty leagues in length, for we were coasting along it the whole of one +day. This island is very beautiful and apparently fertile: hither the +Caribbees come with the view of subduing the inhabitants, and often carry +away many of the people. These islanders have no boats nor any knowledge +of navigation; but, as our captives inform us, they use bows as well as +the Caribbees, and if by chance when they are attacked they succeed in +taking any of their invaders, they will eat them in like manner as the +Caribbees themselves in the contrary event would devour them. We remained +two days in this island, and a great number of our men went on shore, but +could never get speech of the natives, who had all fled, from fear of +the Caribbees. All the above-mentioned islands were discovered in this +voyage, the admiral having seen nothing of them in his former voyage. +They are all very beautiful and possess a most luxuriant soil, but this +last island appeared to exceed all the others in beauty. Here terminated +the islands, which on the side towards Spain had not been seen before +by the admiral, although we regard it as a matter of certainty that +there is land more than forty leagues beyond the foremost of these newly +discovered islands, on the side nearest to Spain. We believe this to be +the case, because, two days before we saw land, we observed some birds +called rabihorcados (or pelicans), marine birds of prey which do not sit +or sleep upon the water, making circumvolutions in the air at the close +of evening previous to taking their flight towards land for the night. +These birds could not be going to settle at more than twelve or fifteen +leagues distance, because it was late in the evening, and this was on +our right hand on the side towards Spain; from which we all judged that +there was land there still undiscovered; but we did not go in search of +it, because it would have taken us round out of our intended route. I +hope that in a few voyages it will be discovered. It was at dawn that +we left the before-mentioned island of Burenquen,[127] and on that day +before nightfall we caught sight of land, which though not recognized +by any of those who had come hither in the former voyage, we believed to +be Española, from the information given us by the Indian women whom we +had with us: and in this island we remain at present.[128] Between it and +Burenquen[129] another island appeared at a distance, but of no great +size. When we reached Española the land, at the part where we approached +it, was low and very flat,[130] on seeing which, a general doubt arose +as to its identity; for, neither the admiral nor his companions, on the +previous voyage, had seen it on this side. + +The island being large, is divided into provinces; the part which we +first touched at, is called Hayti; another province adjoining it, they +call Xamaná; and the next province is named Bohio, where we now are. +These provinces are again subdivided, for they are of great extent. +Those who have seen the length of its coast, state that it is two +hundred leagues long, and I, myself, should judge it not to be less +than a hundred and fifty leagues: as to its breadth, nothing is hitherto +known; it is now forty days since a caravel left us with the view of +circumnavigating it, and is not yet returned.[131] The country is very +remarkable, and contains a vast number of large rivers, and extensive +chains of mountains, with broad open valleys, and the mountains are very +high: it does not appear that the grass is ever cut throughout the year. +I do not think that they have any winter in this part, for at Christmas +were found many birds-nests, some containing the young birds, and others +containing eggs. No four-footed animal has ever been seen in this or any +of the other islands, except some dogs of various colours, as in our +own country, but in shape like large house-dogs; and also some little +animals, in colour, size, and fur, like a rabbit, with long tails, and +feet like those of a rat; these animals climb up the trees, and many who +have tasted them, say they are very good to eat:[132] there are not any +wild beasts. There are great numbers of small snakes, and some lizards, +but not many; for the Indians consider them as great a luxury as we do +pheasants: they are of the same size as ours, but different in shape. In +a small adjacent island[133] (close by a harbour called Monte Christo, +where we stayed several days), our men saw an enormous kind of lizard, +which they said was as large round as a calf,[134] with a tail as long as +a lance, which they often went out to kill: but bulky as it was, it got +into the sea, so that they could not catch it. There are, both in this +and the other islands, an infinite number of birds like those in our own +country, and many others such as we had never seen. No kind of domestic +fowl has been seen here, with the exception of some ducks in the houses +in Zuruquia; these ducks were larger than those of Spain, though smaller +than geese,—very pretty, with flat crests, most of them as white as snow, +but some black. + +We ran along the coast of this island nearly a hundred leagues, +concluding, that within this range we should find the spot where the +admiral had left some of his men, and which we supposed to be about the +middle of the coast. As we passed by the province called Xamaná, we sent +on shore one of the Indians, who had been taken in the previous voyage, +clothed, and carrying some trifles, which the admiral had ordered to +be given him. On that day died one of our sailors, a Biscayan, who had +been wounded in the affray with the Caribbees, when they were captured, +as I have already described, through their want of caution. As we were +proceeding along the coast, an opportunity was afforded for a boat to +go on shore to bury him, the boat being accompanied by two caravels to +protect it. When they reached the shore, a great number of Indians came +out to the boat, some of them wearing necklaces and ear-rings of gold, +and expressed a wish to accompany the Spaniards to the ships; but our +men refused to take them, because they had not received permission from +the admiral. When the Indians found that they would not take them, two +of them got into a small canoe, and went up to one of the caravels that +had put in to shore; they were received on board with great kindness, +and taken to the admiral’s ship, where, through the medium of an +interpreter, they related that a certain king had sent them to ascertain +who we were, and to invite us to land, adding that they had plenty of +gold, and also of provisions, to which we should be welcome. The admiral +desired that shirts, and caps, and other trifles, should be given to +each of them, and said that as he was going to the place where Guacamari +dwelt, he would not stop then, but that on a future day they would have +an opportunity of seeing him, and with that they departed. We continued +our route till we came to an harbour called Monte Cristi, where we +remained two days, in order to observe the position of the land; for the +admiral had an objection to the spot where his men had been left with +the view of forming a station. We went on shore therefore to observe +the formation of the land. There was a large river of excellent water +close by;[135] but the ground was inundated, and very ill-calculated for +habitation. As we went on making our observations on the river and the +land, some of our men found two dead bodies by the river’s side, one with +a rope round his neck, and the other with one round his foot: this was +on the first day of our landing. On the following day they found two +other corpses farther on, and one of these was observed to have a great +quantity of beard. This was regarded as a very suspicious circumstance +by many of our people, because, as I have already said, all the Indians +are beardless. This harbour is twelve leagues from the place where the +Spaniards had been left under the protection of Guacamari, the king of +that province, whom I suppose to be one of the chief men of the island. +After two days we set sail for that spot, but as it was late when we +arrived,[136] and there were some shoals, where the admiral’s ship had +been lost, we did not venture to put in close to the shore, but remained +that night at a little less than a league from the coast, waiting until +the morning, when we might enter securely. On that evening, a canoe, +containing five or six Indians, came out at a considerable distance +from where we were, and approached us with great celerity. The admiral +believing that he insured our safety by keeping the sails set, would +not wait for them; they, however, perseveringly rowed up to us within +gunshot, and then stopped to look at us; but when they saw that we did +not wait for them, they put back and went away. After we had anchored +that night at the spot in question,[137] the admiral ordered two guns to +be fired, to see if the Spaniards, who had remained with Guacamari, would +fire in return, for they also had guns with them; but when we received +no reply, and could not perceive any fires, nor the slightest symptom of +habitations on the spot, the spirits of our people became much depressed, +and they began to entertain the suspicion which the circumstances were +naturally calculated to excite. While all were in this desponding mood, +and when four or five hours of the night had passed away, the same canoe +which we had seen in the evening, came up, and the Indians with a loud +voice addressed the captain of the caravel which they first approached, +inquiring for the admiral; they were conducted to the admiral’s vessel, +but would not go on board till he had spoken to them, and they had asked +for a light, in order to assure themselves that it was he who conversed +with them. One of them was a cousin of Guacamari, who had been sent +by him once before: it appeared, that after they had turned back the +previous evening, they had been charged by Guacamari with two masks of +gold as a present; one for the admiral, the other for a captain who +had accompanied him on the former voyage. They remained on board for +three hours, talking with the admiral in the presence of all of us, he +showing much pleasure in their conversation, and inquiring respecting +the welfare of the Spaniards whom he had left behind. Guacamari’s cousin +replied, that those who remained were all well, but that some of them +had died of disease, and others had been killed in quarrels that had +arisen amongst them: he said also that the province had been invaded, +by two kings named Caonabó and Mayreni, who had burned the habitations +of the people; and that Guacamari was at some distance, lying ill of a +wound in his leg, which was the occasion of his not appearing, but that +he would come on the next day. The Indians then departed, saying they +would return on the following day with the said Guacamari, and left us +consoled for that night. Next morning we looked for Guacamari’s arrival; +and, meanwhile, some of our men landed by command of the admiral, and +went to the spot where the Spaniards had formerly been: they found the +building which they had inhabited, and which they had in some degree +fortified with a palisade, burnt and levelled with the ground; they +found also some rags and stuffs which the Indians had brought to throw +upon the house. They observed too that the Indians who were seen near +the spot, looked very shy, and dared not approach, but, on the contrary, +fled from them. This we thought did not look well; for the admiral had +told us that in the former voyage, when he arrived at this place, so many +came in canoes to see our people, that there was no keeping them off; +and as we now noticed that they were suspicious of us, it gave us a very +unfavourable impression. We threw trifles, such as buttons and beads, +towards them, in order to conciliate them, but only four, a relation +of Guacamari’s and three others, took courage to enter the boat, and +were rowed on board. When they were asked concerning the Spaniards, they +replied that all of them were dead: we had been told this already by one +of the Indians whom we had brought from Spain, and who had conversed +with the two Indians that on the former occasion came on board with +their canoe, but we had not believed it. Guacamari’s kinsman was asked +who had killed them: he replied that king Caonabó and king Mayreni had +made an attack upon them, and burnt the buildings on the spot, that many +were wounded in the affray, and among them Guacamari, who had received +a wound in his thigh, and had retired to some distance: he also stated +that he wished to go and fetch him; upon which some trifles were given to +him, and he took his departure for the place of Guacamari’s abode. All +that day we remained in expectation of them, and when we saw that they +did not come, many suspected that the Indians who had been on board the +night before, had been drowned; for they had had wine given them two or +three times, and they had come in a small canoe that might be easily +upset. The next morning the admiral went on shore, taking some of us +with him; we went to the spot where the settlement had been, and found +it utterly destroyed by fire, and the clothes of the Spaniards lying +about upon the grass, but on that occasion we saw no dead body. There +were many different opinions amongst us; some suspecting that Guacamari +himself was concerned in the betrayal and death of the Christians; others +thought not, because his own residence was burnt: so that it remained +a very doubtful question. The admiral ordered all the ground which had +been occupied by the fortifications of the Spaniards to be searched, +for he had left orders with them to bury all the gold that they might +get. While this was being done, the admiral wished to examine a spot at +about a league’s distance, which seemed to be suitable for building a +town, for there was yet time to do so;—and some of us went thither with +him, making our observations of the land as we went along the coast, +until we reached a village of seven or eight houses, which the Indians +forsook when they saw us approach, carrying away what they could, and +leaving the things which they could not remove, hidden amongst the +grass, around the houses. These people are so degraded that they have +not even the sense to select a fitting place to live in; those who dwell +on the shore, build for themselves the most miserable hovels that can +be imagined, and all the houses are so covered with grass and dampness, +that I wonder how they can contrive to exist. In these houses we found +many things belonging to the Spaniards, which it could not be supposed +they would have bartered; such as a very handsome Moorish mantle, which +had not been unfolded since it was brought from Spain, stockings and +pieces of cloth, also an anchor belonging to the ship which the admiral +had lost here on the previous voyage; with other articles, which the more +confirmed our suspicions. On examining some things which had been very +cautiously sewn up in a small basket, we found a man’s head wrapped up +with great care; this we judged might be the head of a father, or mother, +or of some person whom they much regarded: I have since heard that many +were found in the same state, which makes me believe that our first +impression was the true one. After this we returned. We went on the same +day to the site of the settlement; and when we arrived, we found many +Indians, who had regained their courage, bartering gold with our men: +they had bartered to the extent of a mark: we also learned that they had +shown where the bodies of eleven of the dead Spaniards were laid, which +were already covered with the grass that had grown over them; and they +all with one voice asserted that Caonabó and Mayreni had killed them; but +notwithstanding all this, we began to hear complaints that one of the +Spaniards had taken three women to himself, and another four, from whence +we drew the inference that jealousy was the cause of the misfortune that +had occurred. On the next morning, as no spot in that vicinity appeared +suitable for our making a settlement, the admiral ordered a caravel to go +in one direction to look for a convenient locality, while some of us went +with him another way. In the course of our explorations, we discovered a +harbour of great security; the neighbourhood of which, so far as regarded +the formation of the land, was excellent for habitation; but as it was +far from any mine of gold, the proximity of which was very desirable, the +admiral decided that we should settle in some spot which would give us +greater certainty of attaining that object, provided the position of the +land should prove equally convenient. On our return, we found the other +caravel arrived, in which Melchior and four or five other trustworthy +men had been exploring with a similar object. They reported that as they +went along the coast, a canoe came out to them containing two Indians, +one of whom was the brother of Guacamari, and was recognised by a pilot +who was in the caravel. When he questioned them as to their purpose, they +replied that Guacamari sent to beg the Spaniards to come on shore, as he +was residing near, with as many as fifty families around him. The chief +men of the party then went on shore in the boat, and proceeding to the +place where Guacamari was, found him stretched on his bed, complaining +of a severe wound. They conferred with him, and inquired respecting the +Spaniards; his reply was in accordance with the account already given by +the others, viz.—that they had been killed by Caonabó and Mayreni, who +also had wounded him in the thigh. In confirmation of his assertion, +he showed them the limb bound up, on seeing which, they concluded that +his statement was correct. At their departure he gave to each of them +a jewel of gold, according to his estimate of their respective merits. +The Indians beat the gold into very thin plates, in order to make masks +of it, and set it in a cement which they make for that purpose. Other +ornaments they make of it, to wear on the head and to hang in the ears +and nostrils, and for these also they require it to be thin. It is not +the costliness of the gold that they value in their ornaments, but its +showy appearance. Guacamari desired them by signs as well as he was able, +to tell the admiral that as he was thus wounded, he prayed him to have +the goodness to come to see him. The sailors told this to the admiral +when he arrived, and he resolved to go the next morning, for the spot +could be reached in three hours, being scarcely three leagues distance +from the place where we were; but as it would be the dinner-hour when we +arrived, we dined before we went on shore. After dinner, the admiral gave +orders that all the captains should come with their barges to proceed +to the shore, for already on that morning, previous to our departure, +the aforesaid brother of Guacamari had come to speak to the admiral +to urge his visit. Then the admiral went on shore accompanied by all +the principal officers, so richly dressed that they would have made a +distinguished appearance even in any of our chief cities: he took with +him some articles as presents, having already received from Guacamari a +certain quantity of gold, and it was reasonable that he should make a +commensurate response to his acts and expressions of good-will: Guacamari +had also provided himself with a present. When we arrived, we found him +stretched upon his bed, which was made of cotton net-work, and, according +to their custom, suspended.[138] He did not arise, but from his bed made +the best gesture of courtesy of which he was capable. He showed much +feeling; with tears in his eyes lamented the death of the Spaniards, and +began by explaining to the best of his power, how some died of disease, +others had gone to Caonabó in search of the mine of gold, and had there +been killed, and that the rest had been attacked and slain in their own +town. According to the appearance of the dead bodies, it was not two +months since this had happened. He then presented the admiral with eight +marks and a half of gold, five or six hundred pieces of jewellery of +various colours, and a cap with similar jewel-work, which I think they +must value very highly, because in it was a jewel which was presented +with great reverence. It appears to me that these people put more value +upon copper than gold. The surgeon of the fleet and myself being present, +the admiral told Guacamari that we were skilled in the treatment of +human disorders, and wished that he would shew us his wound. He replied +that he was willing; upon which I said it would be necessary that he +should, if possible, go out of the house, because we could not see well +on account of the place being darkened by the throng of people; to this +he consented, I think more from timidity than inclination, and left the +house leaning on the arm of the admiral. After he was seated, the surgeon +approached him and began to untie his bandage; then he told the admiral +that the wound was made with a _ciba_, by which he meant with a stone. +When the wound was uncovered, we went up to examine it: it is certain +that there was no more wound on that leg than on the other, although he +cunningly pretended that it pained him much. Ignorant as we were of the +facts, it was impossible to come to a definite conclusion. There were +certainly many proofs of an invasion by a hostile people, so that the +admiral was at a loss what to do. He with many others thought, however, +that for the present, and until they could ascertain the truth, they +ought to conceal their distrust; for, after ascertaining it, they would +be able to claim whatever indemnity they thought proper. That evening +Guacamari accompanied the admiral to the ships, and when they showed +him the horses and other objects of interest, their novelty struck him +with the greatest amazement: he took supper on board, and returned that +evening to his house. The admiral told him that he wished to settle there +and to build houses; to which he assented, but said that the place was +not wholesome, because it was very damp: and so it most certainly was. + +All this passed through the interpretation of two of the Indians who had +gone to Spain in the last voyage, and who were the sole survivors of +seven that had embarked with us; five died on the voyage, and these but +narrowly escaped. The next day we anchored in that port: Guacamari sent +to know when the admiral intended leaving, and was told that he should do +so on the morrow. The same day Guacamari’s brother, and others with him, +came on board, bringing gold to barter: on the day of our departure also +they bartered a great quantity of gold. There were ten women on board, +of those which had been taken in the Caribbee islands, principally from +Burenquen, and it was observed that the brother of Guacamari spoke with +them; we think that he told them to make an effort to escape that night; +for certainly during our first sleep they dropped themselves quietly into +the water, and went on shore, so that by the time they were missed they +had reached such a distance that only four could be taken by the boats +which went in pursuit, and these were secured when just leaving the +water: they had to swim considerably more than half a league. The next +morning the admiral sent to desire that Guacamari would cause search to +be made for the women who had escaped in the night, and that he would +send them back to the ships. When the messengers arrived they found the +place forsaken and not a soul there; this made many openly declare their +suspicions, but others said they might have removed to another village, +as was their custom. That day we remained quiet, because the weather was +unfavourable for our departure. On the next morning the admiral resolved +that as the wind was adverse, it would be well to go with the boats to +inspect a harbour on the coast at two leagues distance further up,[139] +to see if the formation of the land was favourable for a settlement; +and we went thither with all the ship’s boats, leaving the ships in the +harbour. As we moved along the coast the people manifested a sense of +insecurity, and when we reached the spot to which we were bound all the +natives had fled. While we were walking about this place we found an +Indian stretched on the hill-side, close by the houses, with a gaping +wound in his shoulder caused by a dart, so that he had been disabled from +fleeing any further. The natives of this island fight with sharp darts, +which they discharge from cross-bows in the same manner as boys in Spain +shoot their small arrows, and which they send with considerable skill to +a great distance; and certainly upon an unarmed people these weapons are +calculated to do serious injury. The man told us that Caonabó and his +people had wounded him and burnt the houses of Guacamari. Thus we are +still kept in uncertainty respecting the death of our people, on account +of the paucity of information on which to form an opinion, and the +conflicting and equivocal character of the evidence we have obtained. We +did not find the position of the land in this port favourable for healthy +habitation, and the admiral resolved upon returning along the upper coast +by which we had come from Spain, because we had had tidings of gold in +that direction. But the weather was so adverse that it cost more labour +to sail thirty leagues in a backward direction than the whole voyage +from Spain; so that, what with the contrary wind and the length of the +passage, three months had elapsed before we set foot on land. It pleased +God, however, that through the check upon our progress caused by contrary +winds, we succeeded in finding the best and most suitable spot that +we could have selected for a settlement, where there was an excellent +harbour[140] and abundance of fish, an article of which we stood in great +need from the scarcity of meat. The fish caught here are very singular +and more wholesome than those of Spain. The climate does not allow the +fish to be kept from one day to another, for all animal food speedily +becomes unwholesome, on account of the alternate heat and damp. + +The land is very rich for all purposes. Near the harbour there are two +rivers; one large,[141] and another of moderate breadth somewhat near +it: the water is of a very remarkable quality. On the bank of it is +being built a city called Marta,[142] one side of which is bounded by +the water with a ravine of cleft rock, so that at that part there is no +need of fortification; the other half is girt with a plantation of trees +so thick that a rabbit could scarcely pass through it; and so green +that fire will never be able to burn it. A channel has been commenced +for a branch of the river, which the managers say they will lead through +the middle of the settlement, and will place on it mills of all kinds +requiring to be worked by water. Great quantities of vegetables have been +planted, which certainly attain a more luxuriant growth here in eight +days than they would in Spain in twenty. We were frequently visited by +numbers of Indians, among whom were some of their caciques or chiefs, and +many women. They all came loaded with _ages_,[143] a sort of turnip, very +excellent for food, which we dressed in various ways. This food was so +nutritious as to prove a great support to all of us after the privations +we endured when at sea, which in truth were more severe than ever were +suffered by man; and as we could not tell what weather it would please +God to send us on our voyage, we were obliged to limit ourselves most +rigorously with regard to food, in order that, at all events, we might at +least have the means of supporting life: this _age_ the Caribbees call +_nabi_, and the Indians _hage_. The Indians barter gold, provisions, and +every thing they bring with them, for tags of laces, beads, and pins, and +pieces of porringers and dishes. They all, as I have said, go naked as +they were born, except the women of this island, who some of them wear a +covering of cotton, which they bind round their hips, while others use +grass and leaves of trees. When they wish to appear fulldressed, both men +and women paint themselves, some black, others white and various colours, +in so many devices that the effect is very laughable: they shave some +parts of their heads, and in others wear long tufts of matted hair, which +have an indescribably ridiculous appearance: in short, whatever would +be looked upon in our country as characteristic of a madman, is here +regarded by the highest of the Indians as a mark of distinction. + +In our present position, we are in the neighbourhood of many mines of +gold, not one of which, we are told, is more than twenty or twenty-five +leagues off: the Indians say that some of them are in Niti, in the +possession of Caonabó, who killed the Christians; the others are in +another place called Cibao, which, if it please God, we shall see with +our eyes before many days are over; indeed we should go there at once, +but that we have so many things to provide that we are not equal to it at +present. One third of our people have fallen sick within the last four +or five days, which I think has principally arisen from the toil and +privations of the journey; another cause has been the variableness of +the climate; but I hope in our Lord that all will be restored to health. +My idea of this people is, that if we could converse with them, they +would all become converted, for they do whatever they see us do, making +genuflections to the altars, and at the Ave Maria and the other parts of +the devotional service, and making the sign of the cross. They all say +that they wish to be Christians, although in truth they are idolaters, +for in their houses they have many kinds of figures: when asked what such +a figure was, they would reply it is a thing of _Turey_, by which they +meant “of Heaven.” I made a pretence of throwing them on the fire, which +grieved them so that they began to weep: they believe that everything +we bring comes from heaven, and therefore call it _Turey_, which, as I +have already said, means heaven in their language. The first day that I +went on shore to sleep, was the Lord’s day. The little time that we have +spent on land, has been so much occupied in seeking for a fitting spot +for the settlement, and in providing necessaries, that we have had little +opportunity of becoming acquainted with the productions of the soil, yet +although the time has been so short, many marvellous things have been +seen. We have met with trees bearing wool, of a sufficiently fine quality +(according to the opinion of those who are acquainted with the art) to +be woven into good cloth; there are so many of these trees that we might +load the caravels with wool, although it is troublesome to collect, for +the trees are very thorny,[144] but some means may be easily found of +overcoming this difficulty. There are also cotton trees as large as peach +trees, which produce cotton in the greatest abundance. We found trees +producing wax as good both in colour and smell as bees-wax and equally +useful for burning, indeed there is no great difference between them. +There are vast numbers of trees which yield surprisingly fine turpentine, +and a great abundance of tragacanth, also very good. We found other +trees which I think bear nutmegs, because the bark tastes and smells +like that spice, but at present there is no fruit on them;[145] I saw +one root of ginger, which an Indian wore hanging round his neck. There +were also aloes; not like those which we have hitherto seen in Spain, but +no doubt they are of the same kind as those used by our doctors.[146] A +sort of cinnamon also has been found; but, to speak the truth, it is not +so fine as that with which we are already acquainted in Spain. I do not +know whether this arises from ignorance of the proper season to gather +it, or whether the soil does not produce better. We have also seen some +yellow mirabolans; at this season they are all lying under the trees, and +have a bitter flavour, arising, I think, from the rottenness occasioned +by the moisture of the ground; but the taste of such parts as have +remained sound, is that of the genuine mirabolan. There is also very +good mastic. None of the natives of these islands, as far as we have yet +seen, possess any iron; they have, however, many tools, such as hatchets +and axes, made of stone, which are so handsome and well finished, that +it is wonderful how they contrive to make them without the use of iron. +Their food consists of bread, made of the roots of a vegetable which +is between a tree and a vegetable, and the _age_, which I have already +described as being like the turnip, and very good food; they use, to +season it, a spice called _agi_, which they also eat with fish and such +birds as they can catch of the many kinds which abound in the island. +They have, besides, a kind of grain like hazel-nuts, very good to eat. +They eat all the snakes, and lizards, and spiders, and worms, that they +find upon the ground; so that, to my fancy, their bestiality is greater +than that of any beast upon the face of the earth. The admiral had at +one time determined to leave the search for the mines until he had first +dispatched the ships which were to return to Spain[147] on account of +the great sickness which had prevailed among the men, but afterwards +he resolved upon sending two bands under the command of two captains, +the one to Cibao,[148] and the other to Niti, where, as I have already +said, Caonabó lived. These parties went, one of them returning on the +twentieth, and the other on the twenty-first of January. The party that +went to Cibao saw gold in so many places that one scarcely dares state +the fact, for in truth they found it in more than fifty streamlets and +rivers, as well as upon their banks; so that, the captain said they had +only to seek throughout that province, and they would find as much as +they wished. He brought specimens from the different parts, that is, from +the sand of the rivers and small springs. It is thought, that by digging +as we know how, it will be found in greater pieces, for the Indians +neither know how to dig nor have the means of digging more than a hand’s +depth. The other captain who went to Niti, returned also with news of +a great quantity of gold in three or four places; of which he likewise +brought specimens. + +Thus, surely, their Highnesses the King and Queen may henceforth regard +themselves as the most prosperous and wealthy Sovereigns in the world; +never yet, since the creation, has such a thing been seen or read of; +for on the return of the ships from their next voyage, they will be able +to carry back such a quantity of gold as will fill with amazement all +who hear of it. Here I think I shall do well to break off my narrative. +I think those who do not know me who hear these things may consider me +prolix, and somewhat an exaggerator, but God is my witness, that I have +not exceeded, by one tittle, the bounds of truth. + +The preceding is the translation of that part of Doctor Chanca’s letter, +which refers to intelligence respecting the Indies.[149] The remainder +of the letter does not bear upon the subject, but treats of private +matters, in which Doctor Chanca requests the interference and support +of the Chapter of Seville (of which city he was a native), in behalf of +his family and property, which he had left in the said city. This letter +reached Seville in the month of [150] in the year fourteen hundred and +ninety-three. + + +SEGUNDA VIAGE DE COLON. + +_La Carta del Doctor Chanca, que escribió a la Ciudad de Sevilla._ + +Muy magnífico Señor: Porque las cosas que yo particularmente escribo á +otros en otras cartas no son igualmente comunicables como las que en +esta escritura van, acordé de escribir distintamente las nuevas de acá y +las otras que á mi conviene suplicar á vuestra Señoría, é las nuevas son +las siguientes: Que la flota que los Reyes Católicos, nuestros Señores, +enviaron de España para las Indias é gobernacion del su Almirante del mar +Océano Cristóbal Colon por la divina permision, parte de Caliz á veinte y +cinco de Setiembre del año de [109] años con tiempo é viento convenible á +nuestro camino, é duró este tiempo dos dias, en los cuales pudimos andar +al pie de cincuenta leguas: y luego nos cambió el tiempo otros dos, en +los cuales anduvimos muy poco ó no nada; plogó á Dios que pasados los +dias nos tornó buen tiempo, en manera que en otros dos llegamos á la +Gran Canaria donde tomamos puerto, lo cual nos fue necesario por reparar +un navío que hacia mucha agua, y estovímos ende todo aquel dia, é luego +otra dia partimos é fizonos algunas calmerías, de manera que estovímos +en llegar al Gomero cuatro ó cinco dias, y en la Gomera fue necesario +estar algun dia por facer provisiones de carne, leña é agua la, que mas +pudiesen, por la larga jornada que se esperaba hacer sin ver mas tierra: +ansi que en la estada destos puertos y en un dia despues de partidos de +la Gomera, que nos fizo calma, que tardamos en llegar fasta la isla del +Fierro, estovimos diez y nueve ó veinte dias: desde aqui por la bondad +de Dios nos tornó buen tiempo, el mejor que nunca flota llevó tan largo +camino, tal que partidos del Fierro á trece de Octubre dentro de veinte +dias hobimos vista de tierra: y vieramosla á catorce ó quince si la noa +Capitana fuera tan buena velera comos los otros navíos, porque muchas +veces los otros navíos sacaban velas porque nos dejaban mucho atras. En +todo este tiempo hobimos mucha bonanza, que en él ni en todo el camino no +hobimos fortuna, salvo la víspera de S. Simon que nos vino una que por +cuatro horas nos puso en harto estrecho. El primero domingo despues de +Todos Santos, que fue á tres dias de Noviembre, cerca del alba, dijó un +piloto de la nao Capitana: albricias, que tenemos tierra. Fue el alegría +tan grande en la gente que era maravilla oir las gritas y placeres que +todos hacian, y con mucha razon, que la gente venian ya tan fatigados +de mala vida y de pasar agua, que con muchos deseos sospiraban todos +por tierra. Contaron aquel dia los pilotos del armada desde la isla de +Fierro hasta la primera tierra que vimos unas ochocientas leguas, otros +setecientas é ochenta, de manera que la diferencia no ere mucha, é mas +trescientas que ponen de la isla de Fierro fasta Caliz, que eran por +todos mil é ciento; ansí que no siento quien no fuese satisfecho de ver +agua. Vimos el Domingo de mañana sobredicho, por proa de los navíos, una +isla y luego á la man derecha parecio otra: la primera era la tierra alta +de sierras por aquella parte que vimos, la otra era tierra llana, tambien +muy llena de árboles muy espesos, y luego que fue mas de dia comenzó á +parecer á una parte é á otra islas; de manera que aquel dia eran seis +islas á diversas partes, y las mas harto grandes. Fuimos enderezados +para ver aquella que primero habiamos visto, é llegamos por la costa +andando mas de una lagua buscando puerto para sorgir, el cual todo aquel +espacio nunca se pudo hallar. Era en todo aquello que parecia desta isla +todo montaña muy hermosa y muy verde, fasta el agua que era alegria en +mirarla, porque en aquel tiempo no hay en nuestra tierra apenas cosa +verde. Despues que allí no hallamos puerto acordó el Almirante que nos +volviesemos á la otra isla que parescia á la mano derecha, que estaba +desta otra cuatro ó cinco leguas. Quedó por entonces un navío en esta +isla buscando puerto todo aquel dia para cuando fuese necesario venir +á ella, en la cual halló buen puerto é vido casas é gentes, é luego se +tornó aquella noche para donde estaba la flota que habia tomado puerto +en la otra isla, donde decendió el Almirante é mucha gente con él con +la bandera Real en las manos, adonde tomó posesion por sus Altezas en +forma de derecho. En esta isla habia tanta espesura de arboledas que +era maravilla, é tanta diferencia de árboles no conocidos á nadie que +era para espantar, dellos con fruto, dellos con flor, ansí que todo +era verde. Allí hallamos un arbol, cuya hoja tenia el mas fino olor de +clavos que nunca ví, y era como laurel, salvo que no era ansi grande; +yo ansí pienso que era laurel su especia. Allí habia frutas salvaginas +de diferentes maneras, de las quales algunos no muy sabios probaban, +y del gusto solamente tocándoles con las lenguas se les hinchaban las +caras, y les venia tan grande ardor y dolor que parecian que rabiaban, +los cuales se remediaban con cosas frias. En esta isla no hallamos gente +nin señal della, creimos que era despoblada, en la cual estovimos bien +dos horas, porque cuando allí llegamos era sobre tarde, é luego otro dia +de mañana partimos para otra isla que parescia en bajo desta que era muy +grande, fasta la cual desta que habria siete ú ocho leguas, llegamos á +ella hácia la parte de una gran montaña que parecia que queria llegar +al cielo, en medio de la cual montaña estaba un pico mas alto que toda +la otra montaña, del cual se vertian á diversas partes muchus aguas, en +especial hácia la parte donde ibamos: de tres leguas paresció un golpe +de agua tan gordo como un buey, que se despeñaba de tan alto como si +cayera del cielo: parescia de tan lejos, que hobo en los navíos muchas +apuestas, que unos decian que eran peñas blancas y otros que era agua. +Desque llegamos mas á cerca vídose lo cierto, y era la mas hermosa cosa +del mundo de ver cuan alto se despeñaba é de tan poco logar nacia tan +gran golpe de agua. Luego que llegamos cerco mandó el Almirante á una +carbela ligera que fuese costeando á buscar puerto, la cual se adelantó +y llegando á la tierra vido unas casas, é con la barca saltó el Capitan +en tierra é llegó á las casas, en las cuales halló su gente, y luego +que los vieron fueron huyendo, é entró en ellas, donde halló las cosas +que ellos tienen, que no habian llevado nada, donde tomó dos papagayos +muy grandes y muy diferenciados de cuantos se habian visto. Halló mucho +algodon hilado é por hilar, é cosas de sus mantenimientos, é de todo +trajo un poco, en especial trajo cuatro ó cinco huesos de brazos é +piernas de hombres. Luego que aquello vimos sospechamos que aquellas +islas eran las de Caribe, que son habitadas de gente que comen carne +humana, porque el Almirante por las señas que le habian dado del sitio +destas islas, el otro camino, los indios de las islas que antes habian +descubierto, habia enderezado el camino por descubrirlas, porque estaban +mas cerca de España, y tambien porque por allí se hacia el camino derecho +para venir á la isla Española, donde antes habia dejado la gente, á los +cuales, por la bondad de Dios y por el buen saber del Almirante, venimos +tan derechos como si por camino sabido é seguido vinieramos. Esta isla +es muy grande, y por el lado nos pareció que habia de luengo de costa +veinta é cinco leguas: fuimos costeando por ella buscando puerto mas +de dos leguas; por la parte donde ibamos eran montañas muy altas, á la +parte que dejamos parecian grandes llanos, á la orilla de la mar habia +algunos poblados pequeños, é luego que veian las velas huian todos. +Andadas dos leguas hallamos puerto y bien tarde. Esa noche acordó el +Almirante que á la madrugada saliesen algunos para tomar lengua é saber +que gente era, no embargante la sospecha é los que ya habian visto ir +huyendo, que era gente desnuda como la otra que ya el Almirante habia +visto el otro viage. Salieron esa madrugada ciertos Capitanes; los unos +vinieron á hora de comer é trageron un mozo de fasta catorce años, á +lo que despues se sopo, é él dijo que era de los que esta gente tenian +cativos. Los otros se dividieron, los unos tomaron un mochacho pequeño, +al cual llevaba un hombre por la mano, é por huir lo desamparó. Este +enviaron luego con algunos dellos, otros quedaron, é destos unos tomaron +ciertas mugeres naturales de la isla, é otras que se vinieron de grado, +que eran de las cativas. Desta compañía se apartó un Capitan no sabiendo +que se habia habido lengua con seis hombres, el cual se perdió con los +que con él iban, que jamas sopieron tornar, fasta que á cabo de cuatro +dias toparon con la costa de la mar, é siguiendo por ella tornaron á +topar con la flota. Ya los teniamos por perdidos é comidos de aquellas +gentes que se dicen los Caribes, porque no bastaba razon para creer que +eran perdidos de otra manera, porque iban entre ellos pilotos, marineros +que por la estrella saben ir é venir hasta España, creiamos que en tan +pequeño espacio no se podian perder. Este dia primero que allí decendimos +andaban por la playa junto con el agua muchos hombres é mugeres mirando +la flota, é maravillándose de cosa tan nueva é llegándose alguna barca á +tierra á hablar con ellos, diciéndolos _tayno tayno_, que quiere decir +_bueno_, esperaban en tanto que no salian del agua, junto con él moran, +de manera que cuando ellos querian se podian salvar: en conclusion, que +de los hombres ninguno se pudo tomar por fuerza ni por grado, salvo dos +que se seguraron é despues los trajeron por fuerza allí. Se tomaron +mas de veinte mugeres de las cativas, y de su grado se venian otros +naturales de la isla, que fueron salteadas é tomadas por fuerza. Ciertos +mochachos cabtivos se vinieron á nosotros huyendo de los naturales de +la isla que los tenian cabtivos. En este puerto estovimos ocho dias á +causa de la perdida del sobredicho Capitan, donde muchas veces salimos +á tierra andando por sus moradas é pueblos, que estaban á la costa, +donde hallamos infinitos huesos de hombres, é los cascos de las cabezas +colgados por las casas á manera de vasijas para tener cosas. Aquí no +parescieron muchos hombres; la causa era, segun nos dijeron las mugeres, +que eran idas diez canoas con gentes á saltear á otras islas. Esta +gente nos pareció mas pulítica que la que habita en estas otras islas +que habemos visto, aunque todos tienen las moradas de paja; pero estos +las tienen de mucho mejor hechura, é mas proveidas de mantenimientos, +é parece en ellas mas industria ansi veril como femenil. Tenian mucho +algodon hilado y por hilar, y muchas mantas de algodon tan bien tejidas +que no deben nada á las de nuestra patria. Preguntamos á las mugeres, +que eran cativas en esta isla, que qué gente era esta; respondieron que +eran Caribes. Despues que entendieron que nosotros aborreciamos tal gente +por su mal uso de comer carne de hombres, holgaban mucho, y sí de nuevo +traian alguna muger ó hombre de los Caribes, secretamente decian que eran +Caribes, que allí donde estaban todos en nuestro poder mostraban temor +dellos como gente sojuzgada, y de allí conocimos cuáles eran Caribes de +las mugeres é cuáles nó, porque las Caribes traian en las piernas en +cada una dos argollas tejidas de algodon, la una junto con rodilla, la +otra junto con los tobillos; de manera que les hacen las pantorrillas +grandes, é de los sobredichos logares muy ceñidas, que esto me parece +que tienen ellos por cosa gentil, ansi que por esta diferencia conocemos +los unos de los otros. La costumbre desta gente de Caribes es bestial: +son tres islas, esta se llama Turuqueira, la otra que primero vimos se +llama Ceyre, la tercera se llama Ayay; estos todos son conformidad como +si fuesen de un linage, los cuales no se hacen mal: unos é otros hacen +guerra á todas las otras islas comarcanas, los cuales van por mar ciento +é cincuenta leguas á saltear con muchas canoas que tienen, que son unas +fustas pequeñas de un solo madero. Sus armas son frechas en lugar de +hierros; porque no poseen ningun hierro, ponen unas puntas fechas de +huesos de torgugas los unos, otros de otro isla ponen unas espinas de un +pez fechas dentadas, que ansi lo son naturalmente, á manera de sierras +bien recias, que para gente desarmada, como son todos, es cosa que les +puede matar é hacer harto daño; pero para gente de nuestra nacion no son +armas para mucho temer. Esta gente saltea en las otras islas, que traen +las mugeres que pueden haber, en especial mozas y hermosas, las cuales +tienen para su servicio, é para tener por mancebas, é traen tantas que +en cincuenta casas ellos no parecieron, y de las cativas se vinieron +mas de veinte mozas. Dicen tambien estas mugeres que estos usan de una +crueldad que parece cosa increible; que los hijos que en ellas han se +los comen, que solamente crian los que han en sus mugeres naturales. Los +hombres que pueden haber, los que son vivos llevánselos á sus casas para +hacer carnicería dellos, y los que han muertos luego se los comen. Dicen +que la carne del hombre es tan buena que no hay tal cosa en el mundo; y +bien parece porque los huesos que en estas casas hallamos todo lo que se +puede roer todo lo tenian roido, que no habia en ellos sino lo que por +su mucha dureza no se podia comer. Allí se halló en una casa cociendo en +una olla un pezcuezo de un hombre. Los mochachos que cativan cortanlos +el miembro, é sirvense de ellos fasta que son hombres, y despues cuando +quieren facer fiesta mátanlos é cómenselos, porque dicen que que la +carne de los mochachos é de las mogeres no es buena para comer. Destos +mochachos se vinieron para nosotros huyendo tres todos tres cortados sus +miembros. E á cabo de cuatro dias vino el Capitan que se habia perdido, +de cuya venida estabamos ya bien desesparados, porque ya los habian +ido á buscar otras cuadrillas por dos veces, é aquel dia vino la una +caudrilla sin saber dellos ciertamente. Holgamos con su venida como si +nuevamente se hobieran hallado: trajo este Capitan con los que fueron +con él diez cabezas entre mochachos y mugeres. Estos ni los otros que +los fueron á buscar, nunca hallaron hombres porque se habien huido, ó +por ventura que en aquella comarca habia pocos hombres, porque segun se +supo de las mugeres eran idas diez canoas con gentes á saltear á otras +islas. Vino él é los que fueron con él tan destrozados del monte, que +era lástima de los ver: decian, preguntándoles como se habien perdido, +dijeron que era la espesura de los arboles tanta que el cielo no podian +ver, é que algunos de ellos, que eran marineros, habian subido por los +árboles para mirar el estrella é que nunca la podieron ver, é que si no +toparan con el mar fuera imposible tornar á la flota. Partimos desta isla +ocho dias despues que allí llegamos. Luego otro dia á medio dia vimos +otra isla, no muy grande, que estaria desta otra doce leguas; porque el +primero dia que partimos lo mas del dia nos fizo calma, fuimos junto +con la costa desta isla, é dijeron las Indias que llevabamos que no era +habitada, que los Caribes la habian despoblado, é por esto no paramos +en ella. Luego esa tarde vimos otra: á esa noche, cerca desta isla, +fallamos unos bajos, por cuyo temor sorgimos, que no osamos andar fasta +que fuese de dia. Luego á la mañana paresció otra isla harto grande: +á ninguna destas no llegamos por consolar los que habian dejado en la +Española, é no plogó á Dios segun que abajo paracerá. Otro dia á hora +de comer llegamos á una isla é pareciónos mucho bien, porque parecia +muy poblada, segun las muchas labranzas que en ella habia. Fuimos allá +é tomamos puerto en la costa: luego mandó el Almirante ir á tierra una +barca guarnecida de gente para si pudiese tomar lengua para saber que +gente era, é tambien porque habiamos menester informarnos del camino, +caso quel Almirante, aunque nunca habia fecho aquel camino, iba muy bien +encaminado segun en cabo pareció. Pero porque las cosas dubdosas se +deben siempre buscar con la mayor certinidad que haberse pueda, quiso +haber allí lengua, de la cual gente que iba en la barca ciertas personas +saltaron en tierra, llegaron en tierra á un poblado de donde la gente +ya se habia escondido. Tomaron allí cinco ó seis mugeres y ciertos +mochachos, de las cuales las mas eran tambien de las cativas como en la +otra isla, porque tambien estos eran de los Caribes, segun ya sabiamos +por la relacion de las mugeres que traiamos. Ya que esta barca se queria +tornar á los navíos con su presa que habia fecho por parte debajo; por +la costa venia una canoa en que venian cuatro hombres é dos mugeres +é un mochacho, é desque vieron la flota maravillados se embebecieron +tanto que por una grande hora estovieron que no se movieron de un lugar +casi dos tiros de lombarda de los navíos. En esto fueron vistos de los +que estaban en la barca é aun de toda la flota. Luego los de la barca +fueron para ellos tan junto con la tierra, que con el embebecimiento +que tenian, maravillándose é pensando que cosa seria, nunca los vieron +hasta que estovieron muy cerca dellos, que no les pudieron mucho huir +aunque harto trabajaron por ello; pero los nuestros aguijaron con tanta +priesa que no se les pudieron ir. Los Caribes desque vieron que el hoir +no les aprovechaba, con mucha osadia pusieron mano á los arcos, tambien +las mugeres como los hombres; é digo con mucha osadia porque ellos no +eran mas de cuatro hombres y dos mugeres, é los nuestros mas de veinte +é cinco, de los cuales firieron dos, al uno dieron dos frechadas en +los pechos é al otro una por el costado, é sino fuera porque llevaban +adargas é tablachutas, é porque los invistieron presto con la barca é +les trastornaron su canoa, asaetearan con sus frechas los mas dellos. +E despues de trastornada su canoa quedaron en el agua nadando, é á las +veces haciendo pie, que allí habia unos bajos, é tovieron harto que hacer +en tomarlos, que todavía cuanto podian tiraban, é con todo eso el uno +no lo pudieron tomar sino mal herido de una lanzada que murió, el cual +trajeron ansi herido fasta les navíos. La diferencia destos á los otros +indios en el hábito, es que los de Caribe tienen el cabello muy largo, +los otros son tresquilados é fechas cien mil diferencias en las cabezas +de cruces, é de otras pinturas en diversas maneras, cada uno como se le +antoja, lo cual se hacen con cañas agudas. Todos ansi los de Caribe como +los otros es gente sin barbas, que por maravilla hallarás hombre que las +tenga. Estos Caribes que allí tomaron venian tiznados los ojos é las +cejas, lo cual me parece que hacen por gala, é con aquello parescian mas +espantables; el uno destos dice que en una isla dellos, llamada Cayre, +que es la primera que vimos, á la cual no llegamos, hay mucho oro; que +vayan allá con clavos é contezuelas para hacer sus canoas, é que traerán +cuanto oro quisieren. Luego aquel dia partimos de esta isla, que no +estariamos allí mas de seis ó siete horas, fuemos para otra tierra que +pareció á ojo que estaba en el camino que habiamos de facer: llegamos +noche cerca della. Otro dia de mañana fuimos por la costa della: era +muy gran tierra, aunque no era muy continua, que eran mas de cuarenta y +tantos islones, tierra muy alta, é la mas della pelada, la cual no era +ninguna ni es de las que antes ni despues habemos visto. Parescia tierra +dispuesta para haber en ella metales: á esta no llegamos para saltar en +tierra, salvo una carabela latina llegó á un islon de estos, en el cual +hallaron ciertas casas de pescadores. Las Indias que traiamos dijeron +que no eran pobladas. Andovimos por esta costa lo mas deste dia, hasta +otro dia en la tarde que llegamos á vista de otra isla llamada Burenquen, +cuya costa corrimos todo un dia: juzgábase que ternia por aquella banda +treinta leguas. Esta isla es muy hermosa y muy fértil á parecer: á estu +vienon los de Caribe á conquistar, de la cual llevaban mucha gente; estos +no tienen fustas ningunas nin saben andar por mar; pero, segun dicen +estos Caribes que tomamos, usan arcos como ellos, é si por caso cuando +los vienen á saltear los pueden prender tambien se los comen como los de +Caribe á ellos. En un puerto desta isla estovimos dos dias, donde saltó +mucha gente en tierra; pero jamas podimos haber lengua, que todos se +fuyeron como gente temorizadas de los Caribes. Todas estas islas dichas +fueron descubiertas deste camino, que fasta aquí ninguna dellas habia +visto el Almirante el otro viage, todos son muy hermosas é de muy buena +tierra; pero esta paresció mejor á todos: aquí casi se acabaron las islas +que fácia la parte de España habia dejado de ver el Almirante, aunque +tenemos por cosa cierta que hay tierra mas de cuarenta leguas antes de +estas primeras hasta España, porque dos dias antes que viesemos tierra +vimos unas aves que llaman rabihorcados, que son aves de rapiña marinas +é ni sientan ni duermen sobre el agua, sobre tarde rodeando sobir en +alto, é despues tiran su via á buscar tierra para dormir, las cuales +no podrian ir á caer segun era tarde de doce ó quince leguas arriba, y +esto era á la man derecha donde veniamos hasta la parte de España; de +donde todos juzgaron allí quedar tierra, lo cual no se buscó porque se +nos hacia rodeo para la via que traiamos. Espero que á pocos viages se +hallará. Desta isla sobredicha partimos una madrugada, é aquel dia, antes +que fuese noche, hobimos vista de tierra, la cual tampoco era conocida de +ninguno de los qua habian venido el otro viage; pero por las nuevas de +las indias que traiamos sospechamos que era la Española, en la cual agora +estamos. Entre esta isla é la otra de Buriquen parecia de lejos otra, +aunque no era grande. Desque llegamos á esta Española, por el comienzo +de alla era tierra baja y muy llana, del conocimiento de la cual aun +estaban todos dubdosos si fuese la que es, porque aquella parte nin el +Almirante ni los otros que con él vinieron habian visto, é aquesta isla +como es grande es nombrada por provincias, e á esta parte que primero +llegamos llaman Hayti, y luego á la otra provincia junta con esta llaman +Xamaná, é á la otra Bohio; en la cual agora estamos; ansi hay en ellas +muchas provincias porque es gran cosa, porque segun afirman los que la +han visto por la costa de largo, dicen que habrá doscientas leguas: á +mi me parece que á lo menos habrá ciento é cincuenta; del ancho della +hasta agora no se sabe. Alla es ido cuarenta dias ha á rodearla una +carebela, la cual no es venida hasta hoy. Es tierra muy singular, donde +hay infinitos rios grandes é sierras grandes é valles grandes rasos, +grandes montañas: sospecho que nunca se secan las yerbas en todo el año. +Non creo que hay invierno ninguno en esta nin en las atras, porque por +Navidad se fallan muchos nidos de aves, dellas con pájaros, é dellas con +huevos. En ella ni en las otras nunca se ha visto animal de cuatro pies, +salvo algunos perros de todas colores como en nuestra patria, la hechura +como unos gosques grandes; de animales salvages no hay. Otrosí, hay un +animal de color de conejo é de su pelo, el grandor de un conejo nuevo, +el rabo largo, los pies é manos como de raton, suben por los árboles, +muchos los han comido, dicen que es muy bueno de comer: hay culebras +muchas no grandes; lagartos aunque no muchos, porque los indios hacen +tanta fiesta dellos como hariamos allá con faisanes, son del tamaño +de los de allá, salvo que en la hechura son diferentes, aunque en una +isleta pequeña, que está junto con un puerto que llaman Monte Christo, +donde estovimos muchos dias, vieron muchos dias un lagarto muy grande +que decian que seria de gordura de un becerro é atan complido como una +lanza, é muchas veces salieron por lo matar, é con la mucha espesura se +les metia en la mar, de manera que no se pudo haber dél derecho. Hay en +esta isla y en las otras infinitas aves de las de nuestra patria, é otras +muchas que allá nunca se vieron: de las aves domésticas nunca se ha visto +acá ninguna, salvo en la Zuruquia habia en las casas unas ánades, las +mas dellas blancas como la nieve é algunas dellas negras, muy lindas, +con crestas rasas, mayores que las de allá, menores que ánsares. Por +la costa desta isla corrimos al pie de cien leguas porque hasta donde +el Almirante habia dejado la gente, habria en este compás, que será en +comedio ó en medio de la isla. Andando por la provincia della llamada +Xamaná, en derecho echamos en tierra uno de los indios quel etro viage +habian llevado vestido, é con algunas cosillas quel Almirante le habia +mandado dar. Aquel dia se nos murió un marinero vizcaino que habia seido +herido de los Caribes, que ya dije que se tomaron, por su mala guarda, +ó porque ibamos por costa de tierra, dióse lugar que saliese una barca +á enterrarlo, é fueron en reguarda de la barca dos carabelas cerca con +tierra. Salieron á la barca en llegando en tierra muchos indios, de los +cuales algunos traian oro al cuello, é á las orejas; querian venir con +los cristianos á los navíos, é no los quisieron traer, porque no llevaban +licencia del Almirante; los cuales desque vieron que no los querian traer +se metieron dos dellos en una canoa pequeña, é se vinieron á una carabela +de las que se habian acercado á tierra, en la cual los recibieron con +su amor, é trajéronlos á la nao del Almirante, é dijeron, mediante un +interprete, que un Rey fulano les enviaba á saber que gente eramos, é +á rogar que quisiesemos llegar á tierra, porque tenian mucho oro é le +darian dello, é de lo que tenian de comer: el Almirante les mandó dar +sendas camisas é bonetes é otras cosillas, é les dijo que porque iba á +donde estaba Guacamarí non se podria detener, que otro tiempo habria que +le pudiese ver, é con esto se fueron. No cesamos de andar nuestro camino +fasta llegar á un puerto llamado Monte Cristi, donde estuvimos dos dias +para ver la disposicion de la tierra, porque no habia parecido bien +al Almirante el logar donde habia dejado la gente para hacer asiento. +Decendimos en tierra para ver la dispusicion: habia cerca de allí un gran +rio de muy buena agua; pero es toda tierra anegada é muy indispuesta +para habitar. Andando veyendo el rio é tierra hallaron algunos de los +nuestros en una parte dos hombres muertos junto con el rio, el uno con +un lazo al pescuezo y el otro con otro al pie, esto fue el primero dia. +Otro dia siguiente hallaron otros dos muertos mas adelante de aquellos, +el uno destos estaba en disposicion que se le pudo conocer tener muchas +barbas. Algunos de los nuestros sospecharon mas mal que bien, é con +razon, porque los indios son todos desbarbados, como dicho he. Este +puerto está del lugar donde estaba la gente cristiana doce leguas: +pasados dos dias alzamos velas para el lugar donde el Almirante habia +dejado la sobredicha gente, en compañía de un Rey destos indios, que se +llamaba Guacamarí, que pienso ser de los principales desta isla. Este +dia llegamos en derecho de aquel lugar; pero era ya tarde, é porque allí +habia unos bajos donde el otro dia se habia perdido la nao en que habia +ido el Almirante, no osamos tomar el puerto cerca de tierra fasta que +otro dia de mañana se desfondase é pudiesen entrar seguramente: quedamos +aquella noche no una legua de tierra. Esa tarde, viniendo para allí de +lejos, salió una canoa en que parescian cinco ó seis indios, los cuales +venian á prisa para nosotros. El Almirante creyendo que nos seguraba +hasta alzarnos, no quiso que los esperasemos, é porfiando llegaron hasta +un tiro de lombarda de nosotros, é parabanse á mirar, é desde allí desque +vieron que no los esperabamos dieron vuelta é tornaron su via. Despues +que surgimos en aquel lugar sobredicho tarde, el Almirante mandó tirar +dos lombardas á ver si respondian los cristianos que habian quedado con +el dicho Guacamarí, porque tambien tenian lombardas, los cuales nunca +respondieron ni menos parescian huegos ni señal de casas en aquel lugar, +de lo qual se desconsoló mucho la gente é tomaron la sospecha que de +tal caso se debia tomar. Estando ansi todos muy tristes, pasadas cuatro +ó cinco horas de la noche, vino la misma canoa que esa tarde habiamos +visto, é venia dando voces, preguntando por el Almirante un Capitan de +una carabela donde primero llegaron: trajéronlos á la nao del Almirante, +los cuales nunca quisieron entrar hasta que el Almirante los hablase; +demandaron lumbre para lo conocer, é despues que lo conocieron entraron. +Era uno dellos primo del Guacamarí, el cual los habia enviado otra vez. +Despues que se habian tornado aquella tarde traian caratulas de oro +que Guacamarí enviaba en presente; la una para el Almirante é la otra +para un Capitan quel otro viage habia ido con él. Estovieron en la nao +hablando con el Almirante en presencia de todos por tres horas mostrando +mucho placer, preguntándoles por los Cristianos que tales estaban: aquel +pariente dijo que estaban todos buenos, aunque entro ellos habia algunos +muertos de dolencia é otros de diferencia que habia contecido entre +ellos, é que Guacamarí estaba en otro lugar ferido en una pierna é por +eso no habia venido, pero que otro dia vernia; porque otros dos Reyes, +llamado el uno Caonabó y el otro Mayrení, habian venido á pelear con él +é que le habian quemado el logar; é luego esa noche se tornaron diciendo +que otra dia vernian con el dicho Guacamarí, é con esto nos dejaron por +esa noche consolados. Otro dia en la mañana estovimos esperando que +viniese el dicho Guacamarí, é entretanto saltaron en tierra algunos por +mandado del Almirante, é fueron al lugar donde solian estar, é halláronle +quemado un cortijo algo fuerte con una palizada, donde los Cristianos +habitaban, é tenian lo suyo quemado é derribado, é ciertas bernias é +ropas que los indios habian traido á echar en la casa. Los dichos indios +que por allí parecian andaban muy cahareños, que no se osaban allegar á +nosotros, antes huian; lo cual no nos pareció bien porque el Almirante +nos habia dicho que en llegando á quel lugar salian tantas canoas dellos +á bordo de los navíos á vernos que no nos podriamos defender dellos, é +que en el otro viage ansí lo facian; é como agora veiamos que estaban +sospechosos de nosotros no nos parecia bien, con todo halagándoles aquel +dia é arrojándolos algunas cosas, ansi como cascabeles é cuentas, hobo de +asegurarse un su pariente del dicho Guacamarí é otros tres, los cuales +entraron en la barca é trajéronlos á la nao. Despues que le preguntaron +por los Cristianos dijeron que todos eran muertos, aunque ya nos lo +habia dicho un indio de los que llevabamos de Castilla que lo habian +hablado los dos indios que antes habian venido á la nao, que se habian +quedado á bordo de la nao con su canao, pero lo ne habiamos creido. Fue +preguntado á este pariente do Guacamarí quien los habia muerto: dijo +que el Rey de Canoabó y el Rey Mayrení, é que le quemaron las cosas del +lugar, que estaban dellos muchos heridos, é tambien él dicho Guacamarí +estaba pasado un muslo, y él que estaba en otro lugar y que él queria ir +luego allá á lo llamar, al cual dieron algunas cosas, é luego se partió +para donde estaba Guacamarí. Todo aquel dia los estobimos esperando, +é desque vimos que no venian, muchos tenian sospecha que se habian +ahogado los indios que antenoche habian venido, porque los habian dado +á beber dos ó tres veces de vino, é venian en una canoa pequeña que se +los podria trastornar. Otro dia de mañana salió á tierra el Almirante é +algunos de nosotros, é fuemos donde solia estar la villa, la cual nos +vimos toda quemada é los vestidos de los cristianos se hallaban por +aquella yerba. Por aquella hora no vimos ningun muerto. Habia entre +nosotros muchas razones diferentes, unos sospechando que el mismo +Guacamarí fuese en la traicion ó muerte de los Cristianos, otros les +parecia que no, pues estaba quemada su villa, ansí que la cosa era mucho +para dudar. El Almirante mandó catar todo el sitio donde los Cristianos +estaban fortalecidos porquel los habia mandado que desque toviesen +alguna cantidad de oro que lo enterrasen. Entretanto que esto se hacia +quiso llegar á ver á cerca de una legua do nos parecia que podria haber +asiento para poder edificar una villa porque ya era tiempo, adonde fuimos +ciertos con él mirando la tierra por la costa, fasta que llegamos á un +poblado donde habia siete ú ocho casas; las quales habian desamparado +los indios luego que nos vieron ir, é llevaron lo que pudieron é lo otro +dejaron escondido entre yerbas junto con las casas, que es gente tan +bestial que no tienen discrecion para buscar lugar para habitar, que los +que viven á la marina es maravilla cuan bestialmente edifican, que las +casas enderedor tienen tan cubiertas de yerba ó de humidad, que estoy +espantado como viven. En aquellas casas hallamos muchas cosas de los +Cristianos, las cuales no se creian que ellos hobiesen rescatado, ansí +como una almalafa muy gentil, la cual no se habia descogido de como la +llevaron de Castilla, é calzas é pedazos de paños, é una ancla de la +nao quel Almirante habia allí perdido el otro viage, é otras cosas, de +las cuales mas se esforzó nuestra opinion; y de acá hallamos, buscando +las cosas que tenian guardadas en una esportilla mucho cosida é mucho á +recabdo, una cabeza de hombre mucho guardada. Allí juzgamos por entonces +que seria la cabeza de padre ó madre, ó de persona que mucho querian. +Despues he oido que hayan hallado muchas desta manera, por donde creo +ser verdad lo que allí juzgamos; desde allí nos tornamos. Aquel dia +venimos por donde estaba la villa, y cuando llegamos hallamos muchos +indios que se habian asegurado y estaban rescatando oro: tenian rescatado +fasta un marco: hallamos que habian mostrado donde estaban muertos once +cristianos, cubiertos ya de la yerba que habia crecido sobre ellos, é +todos hablaban por una boca que Caonabó é Mayreni les habian muerto; pero +con todo eso asomaban queja que los Cristianos uno tenia tres mugeres, +otro cuatro, doude creemos quel mal que les vino fue de zelos. Otro dia +de mañana, porque en todo aquello no habia logar dispuesto para nosotros +poder hacer asiento, acordó el Almirante fuese una carabela á una parte +para mirar lugar conveniente, é algunos que fuimos con él fuimos á otra +parte, á do hallamos un puerto muy seguro é muy gentil disposicion de +tierra para habitar, pero porque estaba lejos de donde nos deseabamos +que estaba la mina de oro, no acordó el Almirante de poblar sino en otra +parte que fuese mas cierta si se hallase conveniente disposicion. Cuando +venimos deste lugar hallamos venida la otra carabela que habia ido á la +otra parte á buscar el dicho lugar en la cual habio ido Melchior e otros +cuatro ó cinco hombres de pro. E yendo costeando por tierra salió á ellos +una canoa en que venian dos indios, el uno era hermano de Guacamarí, el +cual fue conocido por un piloto que iba en la dicha carabela, é preguntó +quien iba allí, al cual, dijeron los hombres principales, dijeron que +Guacamarí les rogaba que se llegasen á tierra, donde él tenia su asiento +con fasta cincuenta casas. Los dichos prencipales saltaron en tierra con +la barca é fueron donde él estaba, el cual fallaron en su cama echado +faciendo del doliente ferido. Fablaron con él preguntándole por los +Cristianos: respondió concertando con la mesma razon de los otros, que +era que Caonabó é Mayreni los habian muerto, é que á él habian ferido +en un muslo, el cual mostró ligado: los que entonces lo vieron ansí +les pareció que era verdad como él lo dijo: al tiempo del despedirse +dió á cada uno dellos una joya de oro, á cada uno como le pareció que +lo merescia. Este oro facian en fojas muy delgadas, porque lo quieren +para facer carátulas é para poderse asentar en betun que ellos facen, +si así no fuese no se asentaria. Otro facen para traer en la cabeza é +para colgar en las orejas é narices, ansí que todavía es menester que +sea delgado, pues que ellos nada desto hacen por riqueza salvo por buen +parecer. Dijo el dicho Guacamarí por señas e como mejor pudo, que porque +él estaba ansí herido que dijesen al Almirante que quisiese venir á +verlo. Luego quel Almirante llegó los sobredichos le contaron este caso. +Otro dia de mañana acordó partir para allá, al cual lugar llegariamos +dentro de tres horas, porque apenas habria dende donde estábamos allá +tres leguas; ansí que cuando allí llegamos era hora de comer; comimos +ante de salir en tierra. Luego que hobimos comido mandó el Almirante que +todos los Capitanes viniesen con sus barcas para ir en tierra, porque +ya esa mañana antes que partiesemos de donde estábamos habia venido el +sobredicho su hermano á hablar con el Almirante, é á darle priesa que +fuese al lugar donde estaba el dicho Guacamari. Allí fue el Almirante á +tierra é toda la gente de pro con él, tan ataviados que en una cibdad +prencipal parecieran bien: llevó algunas cosas para le presentar porque +ya habia recibido dél alguna cantidad de oro, é era razon le respondiese +con la obra é voluntad quel habia mostrado. El dicho Guacamarí ansí mismo +tenia aparejado para hacerle presente. Cuando llegamos hallámosle echado +en su cama, como ellos lo usan, colgado en el aire, fecha una cama de +algodon como de red; no se levantó, salvo dende la cama hizo el semblante +de cortesia como él mejor sopo, mostró mucho sentimiento con lágrimas +en los ojos por la muerte de los Cristianos, é comenzó á hablar en ello +mostrando, como mejor podia, como unos murieron de dolencia, é como otros +se habian ido á Caonabó á buscar la mina del oro é que allí los habian +muerto, é los otros que se los habian venido á matar allí en su villa. A +lo que parecian los cuerpos de los muertos no habia dos meses que habia +acaecido. Esa hora el presentó al Almirante ocho marcos y medio de oro, é +cinco ó seiscientos labrados de pedreria de diversos colores, é un bonete +de la misma pedrería, lo cual me parece deben tener ellos en mucho. En el +bonete estaba un joyel, lo cual le dió en mucha veneracion. Paraceme que +tienen en mas el cobre quel oro. Estábamos presentes yo y un zurugiano +de armada; entonces dijo el Almirante al dicho Guacamarí que nosotros +eramos sabios de las enfermedades de los hombres que nos quisiese mostrar +la herida: él respondió que le placia, para lo cual yo dije que seria +necesario, si pudiese, que saliese fuera de casa, porque con la mucha +gente estaba escura é no se podria ver bien; lo cual él fizo luego, creo +mas de empacho que de gana; arrimándose á el salió fuera. Despues de +asentado, llego el zurugiano á él é comenzó de desligarle: entonces dijo +al Almirante que era ferida fecha con ciba, que quiere decir con piedra. +Despues que fue desatada llegamos á tentarle. Es cierto que no tenia mas +mal en aquella que en la otra, aunque él hacia del raposo que le dolia +mucho. Ciertamente no se podia bien determinar porque las razones eran +ignotas, que ciertamente muchas cosas habia que mostraban haber venido +á él gente contraria. Ansimesmo el Almirante no sabia que se hacer: +parescióle, é á otros muchos, que por entonces fasta bien saber la verdad +que se debia disimular, porque despues de sabida, cada que quisiesen, +se podia dél recibir enmienda. E aquella tarde se vino con el Almirante +á las naos, é mostráronle caballos é cuanto ahí habia, de lo cual quedó +muy maravillado como de cosa estraña á él; tomó colacion en la nao, é esa +tarde luego se tornó á su casa: el Almirante dijo que queria ir á habitar +allí con él é queria facer casas, y él respondió que le placia, pero que +el lugar era mal sano porque era muy humido, é tal era él por cierto. +Esto todo pasaba estando por intérpretes dos indios de los que el otro +viage habian ido á Castilla, los cuales habian quedado vivos de siete que +metimos en el puerto, que los cinco se murieron en el camino, los cuales +escaparon á uña de caballo. Otro dia estuvimos surtos en aquel puerto; é +quiso saber cuando se partiria el Almirante: le mandó decir que otro dia. +En aquel dia vinieron á la nao el sobredicho hermano suyo é otros con él, +é trajeron algun oro para rescatar. Ansí mesmo el dia que allá salimos se +rescató buena cantidad de oro. En la nao habia diez mugeres de las que se +habian tomado en las islas de Cariby; eran las mas dellas de Boriquen. +Aquel hermano de Guacamarí habló con ellas: creemos que les dijo lo que +luego esa noche pusieron por obra y es que al primer sueño muy mansamente +se echaron al agua é se fueron á tierra, de manera que cuando fueron +falladas menos iban tanto trecho que con las barcas no pudieron tomar +mas de las cuatro, las cuales tomaron al salir del agua; fueron nadando +mas de una gran media legua. Otro dia de mañana envió el Almirante á +decir á Guacamarí que le enviase aquellas mugeres que la noche antes se +habian huido, é que luego las mandase buscar. Cuando fueren hallaron +el lugar despoblado, que no estaba persona en el: ahí tornaron muchos +fuerte á afirmar su sospecha, otros decian que se habria mudado á otra +poblacion quellos ansí lo suelen hacer. Aquel dia estovimos allí quedos +por que el tiempo era contrario para salir: otro dia de mañana acordó +el Almirante, pues que el tiempo era contrario, que seria bien ir con +las barcas á ver un puerto la costa arriba, fasta el cual habria dos +leguas, para ver si habria dispusicion de tierra para hacer habitacion; +donde fuemos con todas las barcas de los navíos dejando los navíos en el +puerto. Fuimos corriendo toda la costa, é tambien estos no se seguraban +bien de nosotros; llegamos á un lugar de donde todos eran huidos. Andando +por él fallamos junto con las casas, metido en el monte, un indio ferido +de una vara, de una ferida que resollaba por las espaldas, que no habia +podido huir mas lejos. Los desta isla pelean con unas varas agudas, las +cuales tiran con unas tiranderas como las que tiran los mochachos las +varillas en Castilla, con las cuales tiran muy lejos asaz certero. Es +cierto que para gente desarmada que pueden hacer harto daño. Este nos +dijo que Caonabó é los suyos lo habian ferido, é habian quemado las casas +á Guacamarí. Ansí quel poco entender que los entendemos é las razones +equívocas nos han traido á todos tan afuscados que fasta agora no se +ha podido saber la verdad de la muerte de nuestra gente, é no hallamos +en aquel puerto dispusicion saludable parer hacer habitacion. Acordó +el Almirante nos tornásemos por la costa arriba por do habiámos venido +de Castilla, porque la nueva del oro era fasta allá. Fuenos el tiempo +contrario, que mayor pena nos fue tornar treinta leguas atrás que venir +desde Castilla, que con el tiempo contrario é la largueza del camino ya +eran tres meses pasados cuando decendimos en tierra. Plugó á nuestro +Señor que por la contrariedad del tiempo que no nos dejó ir mas adelante, +hobimos de tomar tierra en el mejor sitio y dispusicion que pudieramos +escoger, donde hay mucho buen puerto é grrn pesquería, de la cual tenemos +mucha necesidad por el carecimiento de las carnes. Hay en esta tierra muy +singular pescado mas sano quel de España. Verdad sea que la tierra no +consiente que se guarde de un dia para otro porque es caliente é humida, +é por ende luego las cosas introfatibles ligeramente se corrompen. La +tierra es muy gruesa para todas cosas; tiene junto un rio prencipal é +otro razonable, asaz cerca de muy singular agua: edificase sobre la +ribera dél una cibdad Marta, junto quel lugar se deslinda con el agua, de +manera que la metad de la cibdad queda cercada de agua con una barranca +de peña tajada, tal que por allí no ha menester defensa ninguna; la otra +metad está cercada de una arboleda espesa que apenas podrá un conejo +andar por ella; es tan verde que en ningun tiempo del mundo fuego la +podrá quemar: hase comenzado á traer un brazo del rio, el cual dicen los +maestros que trairán por medio del lugar, é asentarán en él moliendas é +sierras de agua, é cuanto se pudiere hacer con agua. Han sembrado mucha +hortaliza, la cual es cierto que crece mas en ocho dias que en España en +veinte. Vienen aquí continuamente muchos indios é caciques con ellos, +que son como capitanes dellos, é muchas indias: todos vienen cargados de +_ages_, que son como nabos, muy excelente manjar, de los cuales facemos +acá muchas maneras de manjares en cualquier manera; es tanto cordial +manjar que nos tiene á todos muy consolados, porque de verdad la vida que +se trajo por la mar ha seido la mas estrecha que nunca hombres pasaron, +é fue ansí necesario porque no sabiamos que tiempo nos haria, ó cuanto +permitiría Dios que estoviesemos en el camino; ansí que fue cordura +estrecharnos, porque cualquier tiempo que viniera pudieramos conservar +la vida. Rescatan el oro é mantenimientos é todo lo que traen por cabos +de agujetas, por cuentas, por alfileres, por pedasos de escudillas é de +plateles. A este _age_ llaman los de Caribi _nabi_, é los indios _hage_. +Toda esta gente, como dicho tengo, andan como nacieron, salvo las mugeres +de esta isla traen cubiertas sus verguenzas, dellos con ropa de algodon +que les ciñen las caderas, otras con yerbas é fojas de árboles. Sus galas +dellos é dellas es pintarse, unos de negro, otros de blanco é colorado, +de tantos visajes que en verlos es bien cosa de reir; las cabezas rapadas +en logares, é en logares con vedijas de tantas maneras que no se podria +escrebir. En conclusion, que todo lo que allá en nuestra España quieren +hacer en la cabeza de un loco; acá el mejor dellos vos lo terná en mucha +merced. Aquí estamos en comarca de muchas minas de ora, que segun lo que +ellos dicen no hay cada una dellas de veinte ó veinte é cinco leguas: +las unas dicen que son en Niti, en poder de Caonabó, aquel que mató los +cristianos; otras hay en otra parte que se llama Cibao, las cuales, si +place á nuestro Señor, sabremos é veremos con los ojos antes que pasen +muchos dias, porque agora se ficiera sino porque hay tantas cosas de +proveer que no bastamos para todo, porque la gente ha adolecido en cuatro +ó cinco dias el tercio della, creo la mayor causa dello ha seido el +trabajo é mala pasada del camino: allende de la diversidad de la tierra; +pero espero en nuestro Señor que todos se levantarán con salud. Lo que +parece desta gente es que si lengua toviesemos que todos se convertirian, +porque cuanto nos veen facer tanto facen, en hincar las rodillas á +los altares, é al Ave Maria, é á las otras devociones é santiguarse: +todos dicen que quieren ser cristianos, puesto que verdaderamente son +idólatras, porque en sus casas hay figuras de muchas maneras; yo les he +preguntado que es aquello, dicenme que es cosa de _Turey_, que quiere +decir del cielo. Yo acometi á querer echarselos en el fuego é haciaseles +de mal que querian llorar: pero ansi piensan que cuanto nosotros traemos +que es cosa del cielo, que á todo llaman _Turey_, que quiere decir cielo. +El dia que yo salí á dormir en tierra fue el primero dia del Señor: el +poco tiempo que habemos gastado en tierra ha seido mas en hacer donde +nos metamos, é buscar las cosas necessarias, que en saber las cosas que +hay en la tierra, pero aunque ha sido poco se han visto cosas bien de +maravillar, que se han visto árboles que llevan lana y harto fina, tal +que los que saben del arte dicen que podrán hacer buenos paños dellos. +Destos árboles hay tantos que se podrán cargar las carabelas de la lana, +aunque es trabajosa de coger, porque los árboles son muy espinosos; +pero bien se puede hallar ingenio para la coger. Hay infinito algodon +de árboles perpetuos tan grandes como duraznos. Hay árboles que llevan +cera en color y en sabor, é en arder tan buena como la de abejas, tal +que no hay diferencia mucha de la una á la otra. Hay infinitos árboles +de trementina muy singular é muy fina. Hay mucho alquitira, tambien +muy buena. Hay árboles que pienso que llevan nueces moscadas, salvo +que agora estan sin fruto, é digo que lo pienso porque el sabor y olor +de la corteza es como de nueces moscadas. Vi una raiz de gengibre que +la traía un indio colgada al cuello. Hay tambien linaloe, aunque no es +de la manera del que fasta agora se ha visto en nuestras partes; pero +no es de dudar que sea una de las especias de linaloes que los dotores +ponemos. Tambien se ha hallado una manera de canela, verdad es que no es +tan fina como la que allá se ha visto, no sabemos si por veutura lo hace +el defeto de saberla coger en sus tiempos como se ha de coger, ó si por +ventura la tierra no la lleva mejor. Tambien se ha hallado mirabolanos +cetrinos, salvo que agora no estan sino debajo del árbol, como la tierra +es muy humida estan podridos, tienen el sabor mucho amargo, yo creo sea +del podrimiento; pero todo lo otro, salvo el sabor que está corrompido, +es de mirabolanos verdaderos. Hay tambien almástica muy buena. Todas +estas gentes destas islas, que fasta agora se han visto, no poseen fierro +ninguno. Tienen muchas ferramientas, ansi como hachas é azuelas hechas de +piedra tan gentiles é tan labradas que es maravilla como sin fierro se +pueden hacer. El mantenimiento suyo es pan hecho de raices de una yerba +que es entre árbol é yerba, é el age, de que ya tengo dicho que es como +nabos, que es muy buen mantenimiento: tienen por especia, por lo adobar, +una especia que se llama _agi_, con la cual comen tambien el pescado, +como aves cuando las pueden haber, que hay infinitas de muchas maneras. +Tienen otrosí unos granos como avellanas, muy buenos de comer. Comen +cuantas culebras é lagartos é arañas é cuantos gusanos se hallan por el +suelo; ansi que me parece es mayor su bestialidad que de ninguna bestia +del mundo. Despues de una vez haber determinado el Almirante de dejar +el descobrir las minas fasta primero enviar los navíos que se habian de +partir á Castilla, por la mucha enfermedad que habia seido en la gente, +acordó de enviar dos cuadrillas con dos Capitanes, el uno á Cibao y el +otro á Niti, donde está Caonobó, de que ya he dicho, las cuales fueron +é vinieron el uno á veinte dias de Enero, é el otro á veinte é uno: el +que fue á Cibao halló oro en tantas partes que no lo osa hombre decir, +que de verdad en mas de cincuenta arroyos é rios hallaban oro, é fuera +de los rios por tierra; de manera que en toda aquella provincia dice que +do quiera que lo quieran buscar lo hallarán. Trajo muestra de muchas +partes como en la arena de los rios é en las hontizuelas, que estan sobre +tierra, creese que cabando, como sabemos hacer, se hallará en mayores +pedazos, porque los indios no saben cabar ni tienen con que puedan cabar +de un palmo arriba. El otro que fue á Niti trajo tambien nueva de mucho +oro en tres ó cuatro partes; ansi mesmo trajo la muestra dello. Ansi +que de cierto los Reyes nuestros Señores desde agora se pueden tener +por los mas prósperos é mas ricos Príncipes del mundo, porque tal cosa +hasta agora no se ha visto ni leido de ninguno en el mundo, porque +verdaderamente á otro camino que los navíos vuelvan pueden llevar tanta +cantidad de oro que se puedan maravillar cualesquiera que lo supieren. +Aquí me parece sera bien cesar el cuento: creo los que no me conocen que +oyeren éstas cosas, me ternán por prolijo é por hombre que ha alargado +algo; pero Dios es testigo que yo no he traspasado una jota los términos +de la verdad. + +Hasta aquí es el treslado de lo que conviene á nuevas de aquellas partes +é Indias. Lo demas que venia en la carta no hace al caso, porque son +cosas particulares que el dicho Dotor Chanca, como natural de Sevilla, +suplicaba y encomendaba á los del Cabildo de Sevilla que tocaba á su +hacienda y á los suyos, que en la dicha cibdad habia dejado, y llegó esta +á Sevilla en el mes de [150] año de mil é cuatrocientos énoventa y tres +años. + + +FOOTNOTES: + +[108] Doctor Chanca was appointed physician to Columbus’s fleet by a +dispatch of the 23rd of May, 1493; and on the 24th, the chief accountants +were instructed to pay him salary and rations as scrivener in the Indies. +Señor de Navarrete, who saw the manuscript, “Historia de la Reyes +Católicos,” says that its author, Andres Bernaldez, Cura de los Palacios, +makes mention of Dr. Chanca, and had this same narration before him, as +may be seen in the one hundred and twentieth chapter of his history. + +[109] A similar gap in the original: it should say _of the year 1493_. + +[110] The island of Dominica, so called from having been discovered on a +Sunday. + +[111] The island Marigalante, so called from the name of the ship in +which Columbus sailed. + +[112] Dominica has no harbours, but there are several good roadsteads on +the western side. + +[113] Marigalante. + +[114] The fruit of the manchineal, which apparently produces similar +effects. + +[115] Guadaloupe. + +[116] It was Diego Marquez, the caterer, who with eight other men went +on shore into the interior of the island, without permission from the +admiral, who caused him to be sought for by parties of men with trumpets, +but without success. One of those who were sent out with this object, was +Alonzo de Hojeda, who took with him forty men, and on their return they +reported that they had found many aromatic plants, a variety of birds, +and some considerable rivers. The wanderers were not able to find their +way to the ships until the eighth of November. (M. F. Navarrete’s note, +from Bartholomeo de las Casas’ Manuscript History, chap. 84.) + +[117] This island, called further on Cayre, is most probably the “Charis” +or “Carib” referred to on page 14, which the log of the first voyage +makes to be next to and westward of Matenin, which latter all evidence +shows to be Martinique. Dominica, therefore, will be Charis or Ceyre. +Turuqueira and Ayay, probably the two islands which form Guadaloupe. + +[118] Tuesday the 12th of November. + +[119] The island Montserrat. See Herrera, Dec. 1. L. 2, c. vii. + +[120] The admiral called it Santa Maria la Redonda. See _ibid._ + +[121] Santa Maria la Antigua. See _ibid._ + +[122] The island of St. Martin. See _ibid._ + +[123] Dominica, see note, p. 31. + +[124] The island of _Santa Cruz_, where they anchored on Thursday the +fourteenth of November. See Herrera, Dec. 1. L. 2, cap. vii. + +[125] The admiral named the largest of these islands _St. Ursula_, and +all the others _The eleven thousand Virgins_. See _ibid._ + +[126] The island of _Porto Rico_, to which the admiral gave the name of +_St. John the Baptist_. See Herrera, Dec. 1. L. 2, cap. vii. + +[127] Porto Rico. + +[128] On Friday, the twenty-second of November, the admiral first caught +sight of the island of Española. See Herrera, Dec. 1. L. 2, cap. vii. + +[129] Mona Island. + +[130] Apparently between Point Macao and Point Engaño, which is flat. The +higher land of the north coast commences at Point Macao. + +[131] On the parallel of 18° 25′ the island has an extreme length of 400 +miles, and its extreme breadth may be taken at 150 on the meridian of 71° +20′. + +[132] In all probability a species of _capromys_. + +[133] Cabras or Goat Island, close to “el Fraile” in the Bay of Monte +Cristi. + +[134] An alligator. + +[135] The river Yaque. + +[136] The admiral anchored at the entrance of the harbour of Navidad, on +Wednesday, the twenty-seventh of November, towards midnight, and on the +following day put into the harbour. See Herrera, Dec. 1. L. 2, cap. viii +and ix. + +[137] The Bay of Caracol, four leagues west of Fort Dauphin. + +[138] This is the earliest mention of a hammock. + +[139] Port Dauphin. + +[140] Port Isabelique, or Isabella, ten leagues to the east of Monte +Christi. + +[141] The river Isabella. + +[142] The infant city of Isabella. + +[143] Yams. + +[144] A species of the natural order _Bombaceæ_; perhaps the _Eriodendron +anfractuosum_. + +[145] These were probably trees of the laurel tribe, the bark of which is +generally spicy like cinnamon. The cinnamon mentioned below was probably +also one of these and not true cinnamon. + +[146] Barbadoes aloes, still considered as of inferior quality to those +of Socotra. + +[147] In fact he sent twelve vessels under the command of Antonio de +Torres, who set sail from the port of Navidad, on the second of February, +1494, charged with an account of all that had occurred. (Navarrete.) + +[148] This was Alonzo de Ojeda, who went out with fifteen men, in the +month of January 1494, to seek the mines of Cibao, and returned a few +days after with good news, having been well received everywhere by the +natives. (Navarrete.) + +[149] It is to be regretted, Navarrete here justly remarks, that +Dr. Chanca should not have described the subsequent occurrences in +Hispaniola, which are very important, and which have been related by +cotemporary historians. + +[150] A similar gap in the original. The date of the year is a mistake. +This letter might have been brought by the ships commanded by Torres, and +consequently must have been written at the end of January, 1494, after +the expedition of Ojeda. (Navarrete.) + + + + +MEMORIAL. + + +_Memorial of the results of the Second Voyage of the Admiral, Christopher +Columbus, to the Indies, drawn up by him for their Highnesses King +Ferdinand and Queen Isabella; and addressed to Antonio de Torres, from +the City of Isabella, the 30th of January, 1494. The reply of their +Highnesses is affixed at the end of each chapter._[151] + +The report which you, Antonio de Torres, captain of the ship +_Marigalante_, and Governor of the city of Isabella, have to make, on my +behalf, to the King and Queen our sovereigns, is as follows: + +Imprimis: after having delivered the credentials which you bear from me +to their Highnesses, you will do homage in my name, and commend me to +them as to my natural sovereigns, in whose service I desire to continue +till death; and you will furthermore be able to lay before them all that +you have yourself seen and known respecting me. + +_Their Highnesses accept and acknowledge the service._ + +Item: Although, by the letters which I have written to their Highnesses, +as well as to Father Buil and to the Treasurer, a clear and comprehensive +idea may be formed of all that has transpired since our arrival; you +will, notwithstanding, inform their Highnesses, on my behalf, that God +has been pleased to manifest such favour towards their service, that not +only has nothing hitherto occurred to diminish the importance of what I +have formerly written or said to their Highnesses; but on the contrary I +hope, by God’s grace, shortly to prove it more clearly by facts; because +we have found upon the sea shore, without penetrating into the interior +of the country, some spots showing so many indications of various spices, +as naturally to suggest the hope of the best results for the future. The +same holds good with respect to the gold mines; for two parties only, +who were sent, out in different directions to discover them, and who, +because they had few people with them, remained out but a short time, +found, nevertheless, a great number of rivers whose sands contained this +precious metal in such quantity, that each man took up a sample of it +in his hand; so that our two messengers returned so joyous, and boasted +so much of the abundance of gold, that I feel a hesitation in speaking +and writing of it to their Highnesses. But as Gorbalan, who was one of +the persons who went on the discovery, is returning to Spain, he will be +able to relate all that he has seen and observed; although there remains +here another individual,—named Hojeda, formerly servant of the Duke of +Medinaceli, and a very discreet and pains-taking youth,—who without doubt +discovered, beyond all comparison, more than the other, judging by the +account which he gave of the rivers he had seen; for he reported, that +each of them contained things that appeared incredible. It results from +all this, that their Highnesses ought to return thanks to God, for the +favour which He thus accords to all their Highnesses’ enterprises. + +_Their Highnesses return thanks to God for all that is recorded, and +regard as a very signal service all that the Admiral has already done, +and is yet doing; for they are sensible that, under God, it is he who +has procured for them their present and future possessions in these +countries; and as they are about to write to him on this subject more at +length, they refer to their letter._ + +Item. You will repeat to their Highnesses what I have already written +to them, that I should have ardently desired to have been able to send +them, by this occasion, a larger quantity of gold than what they have +any hope of our being able to collect, but that the greater part of the +people we employed fell suddenly ill. Moreover, the departure of this +present expedition could not be delayed any longer, for two reasons: +namely, on account of the heavy expense which their stay here occasioned; +and because the weather was favourable for their departure, and for the +return of those who should bring back the articles of which we stand in +the most pressing need. If the former were to put off the time of their +starting, and the latter were to delay their departure, they would not +be able to reach here by the month of May. Besides, if I wished now to +undertake a journey to the rivers with those who are well,—whether with +those who are at sea, or those who are on land in the huts,—I should +experience great difficulties, and even dangers; because, in traversing +three or four-and-twenty leagues, where there are bays and rivers to +pass, we should be obliged to carry, as provision for so long a journey, +and for the time necessary for collecting the gold, many articles of +food, etc., which could not be carried on our backs, and there are +no beasts of burden to be found, to afford the necessary assistance. +Moreover, the roads and passes are not in such a condition as I should +wish for travelling over; but they have already begun to make them +passable. It would be also extremely inconvenient to leave the sick men +here in the open air, or in huts, with such food and defences as they +have on shore; although these Indians appear every day to be more simple +and harmless to those who land for the purpose of making investigations. +In short, although they come every day to visit us, it would nevertheless +be imprudent to risk the loss of our men and our provisions, which might +very easily happen, if an Indian were only, with a lighted coal, to set +fire to the huts, for they ramble about both night and day; for this +reason, we keep sentinels constantly on the watch while the dwellings are +exposed and undefended. + +_He has done well._ + +Further, as we have remarked that the greatest part of those who have +gone out to make discoveries, have fallen sick on their return, and that +some have even been obliged to abandon the undertaking in the middle of +their journey, and return, it was equally to be feared that the same +would occur to those who were at the time enjoying good health, if +they were also to go. There were two evils to fear:—one, the chance of +falling ill in undertaking the same work, in a place where there were no +houses nor any kind of protection, and of being exposed to the attacks +of the cacique called Caonabo, who, by all accounts, is a badly-disposed +man, and extremely daring; who, if he were to find us in a dispirited +condition and sick, might venture upon what he would not dare to do if +we were well. The other evil consisted in the difficulty of carrying the +gold; for, either we should have to carry it in small quantities, and go +and return every day, and thus daily expose ourselves to the chance of +sickness; or we should have to send it under the escort of a party of +our people, and equally run the risk of losing them. + +_He has done well._ + +These are the reasons, you will tell their Highnesses, why the departure +of the expedition has not been delayed, and why only a sample of the +gold is sent to them; but I trust in the mercy of God, who in all +things and in every place has guided us hitherto, that all our men will +be soon restored to health, as, indeed, they are already beginning to +be; for they have but to try this country for a little time and they +speedily recover their health. One thing is certain, that if they could +have fresh meat, they would very quickly, by the help of God, be up and +doing; and those who are most sickly, would speedily recover. I hope +that they may be restored. The small number of those who continue well, +are employed every day in barricading our dwelling, so as to put it in +a state of defence, and in taking necessary measures for the safety +of our ammunition; which will be finished now in a few days, for all +our fortifications will consist simply of stone walls.[152] These +precautions will be sufficient, as the Indians are not a people to be +much afraid of; and, unless they should find us asleep, they would not +dare to undertake any hostile movement against us, even if they should +entertain the idea of so doing. The misfortune which happened to those +who remained here, must be attributed to their want of vigilance; for +however few they were in number, and however favourable the opportunities +that the Indians may have had for doing what they did, they would never +have ventured to do them any injury, if they had only seen that they took +proper precautions against an attack. As soon as this object is gained, I +will undertake to go in search of these rivers; either proceeding hence +by land, and looking out for the best expedients that may offer, or else +by sea, rounding the island until we come to the place which is described +as being only six or seven leagues from where these rivers that I speak +of are situated; so that we may collect the gold in safety, and put it +in security against all attacks in some stronghold or tower, which may +be quickly built for that purpose: and thus, when the two caravels shall +return thither, the gold may be taken away and finally sent home in +safety at the first favourable season for making the voyage. + +_This is well and exactly as he should do._ + +Item. You will inform their Highnesses (as indeed has been already +said), that the cause of the sickness so general among us, is the change +of air and water, for we find that all of us are affected, though few +dangerously; consequently, the preservation of the health of the people +will depend, under God, on their being provided with the same food +that they are accustomed to in Spain: neither those who are here now, +nor those that shall come, will be in a position to be of service to +their Highnesses, unless they enjoy good health. We ought to have fresh +supplies of provisions until the time that we may be able to gather a +sufficient crop from what we shall have sown or planted here: I speak +of wheat, barley, and grapes, towards the cultivation of which not +much has been done this year, from our being unable earlier to choose +a convenient settlement. When we had chosen it, the small number of +labourers that were with us fell sick; and, even when they recovered, +we had so few cattle, and those so lean and weak, that the utmost they +could do was very little; however, they have sown a few plots of ground, +for the sake of trying the soil, which seems excellent, in the hope of +thereby obtaining some relief in our necessities. We are very confident, +from what we can see, that wheat and grapes will grow very well in +this country. We must, however, wait for the fruit; and if it grows as +quickly and well as the corn, in proportion to the number of vines that +have been planted, we shall certainly not stand in need of Andalusia and +Sicily here. There are also sugar-canes, of which the small quantity +that we have planted has taken root. The beauty of the country in these +islands,—the mountains, the valleys, the streams, the fields watered by +broad rivers,—is such that there is no country on which the sun sheds his +beams that can present a more charming appearance. + +_Since the land is so fertile, it is desirable to sow of all kinds as +much as possible; and Don Juan de Fonseca is instructed to send over +immediately everything requisite for that purpose._ + +Item. You will say, that as a large portion of the wine that we brought +with us has run away, in consequence, as most of the men say, of the bad +cooperage of the butts made at Seville, the article that we stand most +in need of now, and shall stand in need of, is wine; and although we +have biscuit and corn for some time longer, it is nevertheless necessary +that a reasonable quantity of these be sent to us, for the voyage is +a long one, and it is impossible to make a calculation for every day; +the same holds good with respect to pork and salt beef, which should be +better than what we brought out with us on this voyage. Sheep, and still +better, lambs and lambkins, more females than males, young calves and +heifers, also are wanted, and should be sent by every caravel that may +be dispatched hither; and at the same time some asses, both male and +female, and mares for labour and tillage; for here there are no beasts +that a man can turn to any use. As I fear that their Highnesses may not +be at Seville, and that their officers or ministers will not, without +their express instructions, make any movement towards the carrying out +of the necessary arrangements for the return voyage; and that, in the +interval between the report and the reply, the favourable moment for the +departure of the vessels which are to return hither (and which should +be in all the month of May) may elapse, you will tell their Highnesses, +as I charged and ordered you, that I have given strict orders that the +gold that you carry with you be placed in the hands of some merchant in +Seville, in order that he may therefrom disburse the sums necessary for +loading the two caravels with wine, corn, and other articles detailed in +this memorial; and this merchant shall convey or send the said gold to +their Highnesses, that they may see it, receive it, and from it cause to +be defrayed the expenses that may arise from the fitting-up and loading +of the said two caravels. It is necessary, for the encouragement of the +men who remain here, and for the support of their spirits, that an effort +should be made to let the expedition arrive in the course of the month of +May, so that before summer they may have the fresh provisions, and other +necessaries, especially against sickness. We particularly stand in need +of raisins, sugar, almonds, honey, and rice, of which we ought to have +had a great quantity, but brought very little with us, and what we had is +now consumed. The greater part of the medicines, also, that we brought +from Spain are used up, so many of our number having been sick. For all +these articles, both for those who are in good health and for the sick, +you carry, as I have already said, memorials signed by my hand; you will +execute my orders to the full, if there be sufficient money wherewith to +do so, or you will at least procure what is more immediately necessary, +and which ought, consequently, to come as speedily as possible by the +two vessels. As to the remainder, you will obtain their Highnesses’ +permission for their being sent by other vessels without loss of time. + +_Their Highnesses will give instructions to Don Juan de Fonseca to make +immediate inquiry respecting the imposition in the matter of the casks, +in order that those who supplied them shall at their own expense make +good the loss occasioned by the waste of the wine, together with the +costs. He will have to see that sugar-canes of good quality be sent, +and will immediately look to the despatch of the other articles herein +required._ + +Item. You will tell their Highnesses, that as we have no interpreter +through whom we can make these people acquainted with our holy faith, +as their Highnesses and we ourselves desire, and as we will do so soon +as we are able, we send by these two vessels some of these cannibal men +and women, as well as some children, both male and female, whom their +Highnesses might order to be placed under the care of the most competent +persons to teach them the language. At the same time they might be +employed in useful occupations, and by degrees through somewhat more care +being bestowed upon them than upon other slaves, they would learn one +from the other. By not seeing or speaking to each other for a long time, +they will learn much sooner in Spain than they will here, and become much +better interpreters. We will, however, not fail to do what we can; it +is true, that as there is but little communication between one of these +islands and another, there is some difference in their mode of expressing +themselves, which mainly depends on the distance between them. But as +amongst all these islands, those inhabited by the cannibals are the +largest and the most populous, it must be evident that nothing but good +can come from sending to Spain men and women who may thus one day be led +to abandon their barbarous custom of eating their fellow-creatures. By +learning the Spanish language in Spain, they will much earlier receive +baptism and advance the welfare of their souls; moreover, we shall gain +great credit with the Indians who do not practise the above-mentioned +cruel custom, when they see that we have seized and led captive those +who injure them, and whose very name alone fills them with horror. You +will assure their Highnesses, that our arrival in this country, and the +sight of so fine a fleet, have produced the most imposing effect for the +present, and promise great security hereafter; for all the inhabitants of +this great island, and of the others, when they see the good treatment +that we shall shew to those who do well, and the punishment that we shall +inflict on those who do wrong, will hasten to submit, so that we shall be +able to lay our commands on them as vassals of their Highnesses. And as +even now they not only readily comply with every wish that we express, +but also of their own accord endeavour to do what they think will please +us, I think that their Highnesses may feel assured that, on the other +side also, the arrival of this fleet has, in many respects, secured for +them, both for the present and the future, a wide renown amongst all +Christian Princes; but they themselves will be able to form a much better +judgment on this subject than it is in my power to give expression to. + +_Let him be informed of what has transpired respecting the cannibals that +came over to Spain. He has done well and let him do as he says; but let +him endeavour by all possible means to convert them to our holy Catholic +religion, and do the same with respect to the inhabitants of all the +islands to which he may go._ + +Item. You will tell their Highnesses, that the welfare of the souls of +the said cannibals, and of the inhabitants of this island also, has +suggested the thought that the greater the number that are sent over to +Spain the better, and thus good service may result to their Highnesses +in the following manner. Considering what great need we have of cattle +and of beasts of burthen, both for food and to assist the settlers in +this and all these islands, both for peopling the land and cultivating +the soil, their Highnesses might authorize a suitable number of caravels +to come here every year to bring over the said cattle, and provisions, +and other articles; these cattle, etc., might be sold at moderate prices +for account of the bearers, and the latter might be paid with slaves, +taken from among the Caribbees, who are a wild people, fit for any work, +well proportioned and very intelligent, and who, when they have got rid +of the cruel habits to which they have become accustomed, will be better +than any other kind of slaves. When they are out of their country, they +will forget their cruel customs; and it will be easy to obtain plenty of +these savages by means of row-boats that we propose to build. It is taken +for granted, that each of the caravels sent by their Highnesses, will +have on board a confidential man, who will take care that the vessels do +not stop anywhere else than here, where they are to unload and reload +their vessels. Their Highnesses might fix duties on the slaves that may +be taken over, upon their arrival in Spain. You will ask for a reply upon +this point, and bring it to me, in order that I may be able to take the +necessary measures, should the proposition merit the approbation of their +Highnesses. + +_The consideration of this subject has been suspended for a time, until +fresh advices arrive from the other side: let the Admiral write what he +thinks upon the subject._ + +Item. You will also tell their Highnesses, that freighting the ships +by the ton, as the Flemish merchants do, will be more advantageous and +less expensive than any other mode, and it is for this reason that I +have given you instructions to freight in this manner the caravels that +you have now to send off, and it will be well to adopt this plan with +all the others that their Highnesses may send provided it meets their +approbation; but I do not mean to say that this measure should be applied +to the vessels that shall come over licensed for the traffic of slaves. + +_Their Highnesses have given directions to Don Juan de Fonseca, to have +the caravels freighted in the manner described, if it can be done._ + +Item. You will tell their Highnesses, that in order to save any extra +expense, I have purchased the caravels mentioned in the memorial of which +you are the bearer, in order to keep them here with the two vessels, +the _Gallega_ and the _Capitana_, of which, by advice of the pilot its +commander, I purchased the three-eighths for the price declared in the +said memorial, signed by my hand. These vessels will not only give +authority and great security to those who will have to remain on shore +and whose duty it will be to make arrangements with the Indians for +collecting the gold; but they will be also very useful to ward off any +attack that may be made upon them by strangers; moreover, the caravels +will be required for the task of making the discovery of terra firma, +and of the islands which lie scattered about in this vicinity. You will +therefore beg their Highnesses to pay, at the term of credit arranged +with the sellers, the sums which these vessels shall cost, for without +doubt their Highnesses will be very soon reimbursed for what they may +expend; at least, such is my belief and hope in the mercy of God. + +_The Admiral has done well. You will tell him that the sum mentioned has +been paid to the seller of the vessels, and that Don Juan de Fonseca has +been ordered to pay the cost of the caravels purchased by the Admiral._ + +Item. You will speak to their Highnesses, and beseech them on my behalf, +in the most humble manner possible, to be pleased to give mature +reflection to the observations I may make, in letters or more detailed +statements, with reference to the peacefulness, harmony, and good +feeling of those who come hither; in order that for their Highnesses +service persons may be selected who will hold in view the purpose for +which these men are sent, rather than their own interest; and since you +yourself have seen and are acquainted with these matters, you will speak +to their Highnesses upon this subject, and will tell them the truth on +every point exactly as you have understood it; you will also take care +that the orders which their Highnesses shall give on this point be put +into effect, if possible, by the first vessels, in order that no further +injury occur here in the matters that affect their service. + +_Their Highnesses are well informed of all that takes place, and will see +to it that everything is done as it should be._ + +Item. You will describe to their Highnesses the position of this city, +the beauty of the province in which it is situated, as you have seen it, +and as you can honestly speak of it; and you can inform them, that in +virtue of the powers which I have received from them, I have made you +governor of the said city; and you will tell them also that I humbly +beseech them, out of consideration for your services, to receive your +nomination favourably, which I sincerely hope they may do. + +_Their Highnesses are pleased to sanction your appointment as governor._ + +Item. As Messire Pedro Margarite, an officer of the household to their +Highnesses, has done good service, and will, I hope, continue to do so +for the future in all matters which may be entrusted to him, I have +felt great pleasure in his continuing his stay in this country; and I +have been much pleased to find that Gaspar and Beltran also remain: +and as they are all three well known to their Highnesses as faithful +servants, I shall place them in posts or employments of trust. You will +beg their Highnesses especially to have regard to the situation of +the said Messire Pedro Margarite, who is married and the father of a +family, and beseech them to give him some vacant command in the order of +Santiago, of which he is a knight, in order that his wife and children +may thus have a competence to live upon. You will also make mention of +Juan Aguado, a servant of their Highnesses; you will inform them of the +zeal and activity with which he has served them in all matters that have +been entrusted to him; and also that I beseech their Highnesses on his +behalf, as well as on behalf of those above mentioned, not to forget my +recommendation, but to give it full consideration. + +_Their Highnesses grant an annual pension of thirty thousand maravedis +to Messire Pedro Margarite, and pensions of fifteen thousand maravedis +to Gaspard and Beltram, which will be reckoned from this day, the 15th +of August 1494. They give orders that the said pensions be paid by the +Admiral out of the sums to be paid in the Indies, and by Don Juan de +Fonseca out of the sums to be paid in Spain. With respect to the matter +of Juan Aguado, their Highnesses will not be forgetful._ + +Item. You will inform their Highnesses of the continual labour that +Doctor Chanca has undergone, from the prodigious number of sick and the +scarcity of provisions: and that, in spite of all this, he exhibits the +greatest zeal and kindness in everything that relates to his profession. +As their highnesses have entrusted me with the charge of fixing the +salary that is to be paid to him while out here (although it is certain +that he neither receives, nor can receive anything from any one, and +does not receive anything from his position, equal to what he did, and +could still do in Spain, where he lived peaceably and at ease, in a very +different style from what he does here; and, although he declares that he +earned more in Spain, exclusive of the pay which he received from their +Highnesses), I have, nevertheless, not ventured to place to the credit +of his account more than fifty thousand maravedis per annum, as the sum +which he is to receive for his yearly labour during the time of his stay +in this country. I beg their Highnesses to give their sanction to this +salary, exclusive of his maintenance while here; and I do so, because he +asserts that all the medical men who attend their Highnesses in the royal +yachts, or in any of their expeditions, are accustomed to receive by +right the day’s pay out of the annual salary of each individual. Let this +be as it may, I am informed for certain, that on whatever service they +are engaged, it is the custom to give them a certain fixed sum, settled +at the will and by order of their Highnesses, as compensation for the +said day’s pay. You will, therefore, beg their Highnesses to decide this +matter, as well with respect to the annual pay as to the above-mentioned +usage, so that the said doctor may be reasonably satisfied. + +_Their Highnesses acknowledge the justice of Doctor Chanca’s +observations, and it is their wish that the Admiral shall pay him the +sum which he has allowed him, exclusive of his fixed annual salary. With +respect to the day’s pay allowed to medical men, it is not the custom to +authorize them to receive it, except when they are in personal attendance +upon our Lord the King._ + +Item. You will tell their Highnesses what great devotion Coronel has +shown to the service in many respects, and what great proofs he has given +of it in every important matter that has been trusted to him, and how +much we feel his loss now that he is sick. You will represent to them +how just it is that he should receive the recompense of such good and +loyal services, not only in the favours which may hereafter be shown to +him, but also in his present pay, in order that he, and all those that +are with us, may see what profit will accrue to them from their zeal in +the service; for the importance and difficulty of exploring the mines +should call for great consideration towards those to whom such extensive +interests are entrusted; and, as the talents of the said Coronel have +made me determine upon appointing him principal constable of this portion +of the Indies, and, as his salary is left open, I beg their Highnesses +to make it as liberal as may be in consideration of his services, and to +confirm his nomination to the service which I have allotted to him, by +giving him an official appointment thereto. + +_Their Highnesses grant him, besides his salary, an annual pension of +fifteen thousand maravedis; the same to be paid him at the same time as +the said salary._ + +Item. You will, at the same time, tell their Highnesses that the +bachelor, Gil Garcia, came out here in quality of principal alcalde, +without having any salary fixed or allowed to him: that he is a good man, +well-informed, correct in his conduct, and very necessary to us; and that +I beg their Highnesses to be pleased to appoint him a salary sufficient +for his support; and that it be remitted to him together with his pay +from the other side. + +_Their Highnesses grant him an annual pension of twenty thousand +maravedis during his stay in the Indies, and that over and above his +fixed appointments; and it is their order that this pension be paid to +him at the same time as his salary._ + +Item. You will tell their Highnesses, as I have already told them in +writing, that I think it will be impossible to go this year to make +discoveries until arrangements have been made to work the two rivers in +which the gold has been found in the most profitable manner for their +Highnesses’ interest; and this may be done more effectively hereafter, +because it is not a thing that every one can do to my satisfaction, or +with advantage to their Highnesses’ service, unless I be present; for +whatever is to be done always turns out best under the eye of the party +interested. + +_It is the most necessary thing possible that he should strive to find +the way to this gold._ + +Item. You will tell their Highnesses, that the horse-soldiers that came +from Grenada to the review which took place at Seville, offered good +horses, but that at the time of their being sent on board, they took +advantage of my absence (for I was somewhat indisposed), and changed them +for others, the best of which does not seem worth two thousand maravedis, +for they sold the first and bought these; and this deception on the part +of the horse-soldiers, is very like what I have known to occur to many +gentlemen in Seville of my acquaintance. It seems that Juan de Soria, +after the price was paid, for some private interest of his own, put +other horses in the place of those that I expected to find, and when I +came to see them, there were horses there that had never been offered +to me for sale. In all this the greatest dishonesty has been shown, +so that I do not know whether I ought to complain of him alone, since +these horse-soldiers have been paid their expenses up to the present +day, besides their salary and the hire of their horses, and when they +are ill, they will not allow their horses to be used, because they are +not present. It is not their Highnesses’ wish that these horses should +be purchased for anything but their Highnesses’ service, but these men +think they are only to be employed on work which requires them to ride +on horse-back, which is not the case at present. All these considerations +lead me to think, that it would be more convenient to buy their horses, +which are worth but little, and thus avoid being exposed daily to new +disputes; finally, their Highnesses will decide on what plan is best for +their own interests. + +_Their Highnesses order Don Juan de Fonseca to make inquiries respecting +the matter of the horses, and if it be true that such a deception has +been practised, to send up the culprits to be punished as they deserve; +also to gain information respecting the other people that the admiral +speaks of, and to send the result of the information to their Highnesses. +With respect to the horse soldiers, it is their Highnesses’ wish and +command that they continue where they are, and remain in service, because +they belong to the guards and to the class of their Highnesses’ servants. +Their Highnesses also command the said horse soldiers to give up their +horses into the charge of the Admiral on all occasions when they shall be +required, and if the use of the horses should occasion any loss, their +Highnesses direct that compensation shall be made for the amount of the +injury, through the medium of the Admiral._ + +Item. You will mention to their Highnesses, that more than two hundred +persons have come here without fixed salaries, and that some of them +are very useful to the service; and in order to preserve system and +uniformity, the others have been ordered to imitate them. For the first +three years, it is desirable that we should have here a thousand men, in +order to keep a safeguard upon the island and upon the rivers that supply +the gold: and even if we were able to mount a hundred men on horse-back, +so far from being an evil, it will be a very necessary thing for us; but +their Highnesses might pass by the question of the horse-men until gold +shall be sent. In short, their Highnesses should give instructions as to +whether the two hundred people who have come over without pay, should +receive pay like the others, if they do their work well; for we certainly +have great need of them to commence our labours, as I have already shown. + +_It is their Highnesses’ wish and command, that the two hundred persons +without pay shall replace such of those who are paid as have failed, or +as shall hereafter fail, in their duty, provided they are fit for the +service and please the Admiral; and their Highnesses order the Accomptant +to enter their names in the place of those who shall fail in their duty, +as the Admiral shall determine._ + +Item. As there are means of diminishing the expenses that these people +occasion, by employing them, as other Princes do, in industrial +occupations, I think it would be well that all ships that come here +should be ordered to bring, besides the ordinary stores and medicines, +shoes, and leather for making shoes, shirts, both of common and superior +quality, doublets, laces, some peasants’ clothing, breeches, and cloth +for making clothes, all at moderate prices; they might also bring other +articles, such as conserves, which do not enter into the daily ration, +yet are good for preserving health. The Spaniards that are here would +always be happy to receive such articles as these in lieu of part of +their pay; and if they were purchased by men who were selected for +their known loyalty, and who take an interest in the service of their +Highnesses, considerable economy would result from this arrangement. +Ascertain their Highnesses’ pleasure on this head, and if the plan be +deemed expedient for the service, it should be put in practice at once. + +_This matter may rest for the present until the Admiral shall write more +fully on the subject; meanwhile, Don Juan de Fonseca shall be ordered to +instruct Don Ximenes de Bribiesca to make the necessary arrangements for +the execution of the proposed plans._ + +Item. You will tell their Highnesses that, in a review that was holden +yesterday, it was remarked that a great number of the people were without +arms, which I think must be attributed partly to the exchange made at +Seville, or in the harbour, when those who presented themselves armed +were left for a while, and for a trifle exchanged their arms for others +of an inferior quality. I think it would be desirable that two hundred +cuirasses, a hundred arquebuses, a hundred arblasts, and many other +articles of defensive armour, should be sent over to us; for we have +great need of them to arm those who are at present without them. + +_Don Juan de Fonseca has already been written to, to provide them._ + +Item. Inasmuch as many married persons have come over here, and are +engaged in regular duties, such as masons and other tradesmen, who have +left their wives in Spain, and wish that the pay that falls due to them +may be paid to their wives, or whomsoever they may appoint, in order that +they may purchase for them such articles as they may need, I therefore +beseech their Highnesses to take such measures as they may deem expedient +on this subject; for it is of importance to their interests that these +people be well provided for. + +_Their Highnesses have already ordered Don Juan de Fonseca to attend to +this matter._ + +Item. Besides the other articles which I have begged from their +Highnesses in the memorial which you bear, signed by my hand, and which +articles consist of provisions and other stores, both for those who are +well and for those who are sick, it would be very serviceable that fifty +pipes of molasses should be sent hither from the island of Madeira; for +it is the most nutritious food in the world, and the most wholesome. A +pipe of it does not ordinarily cost more than two ducats, exclusive of +the casks; and if their Highnesses would order one of the caravels to +call at the said island on the return voyage, the purchase might be made, +and they might, at the same time, buy ten casks of sugar, of which we +stand greatly in need. It is the most favourable season of the year to +obtain it at a cheap rate, that is to say, between this and the month of +April. The necessary orders might be given, if their Highnesses think +proper, and yet the place of destination be carefully concealed. + +_Don Juan de Fonseca will see to it._ + +Item. You will tell their Highnesses that, although the rivers contain +in their beds the quantity of gold described by those who have seen it, +there is no doubt that the gold is produced not in the rivers but the +earth; and that the water happening to come in contact with the mines, +washes it away mingled with the sand. And as among the great number of +rivers that have been already discovered there are some of considerable +magnitude, there are also some so small that they might rather be called +brooks than rivers, only two fingers’ breadth deep, and very short in +their course; there will, therefore, be some men wanted to wash the +gold from the sand, and others to dig it out of the earth. This latter +operation will be the principal and the most productive; it will be +expedient, therefore, that their Highnesses send men both for the +washing and for the mining, from among those who are employed in Spain in +the mines at Almaden[153], so that the work may be done in both manners. +We shall not, however, wait for the arrival of these workmen, but hope, +with the aid of God and with the washers that we have here with us, when +they shall be restored to health, to send a good quantity of gold by the +first caravels that shall leave for Spain. + +_This shall be completely provided for in the next voyage out; meanwhile, +Don Juan de Fonseca has their Highnesses’ orders to send as many miners +as he can find. Their Highnesses write also to Almaden, with instructions +to select the greatest number that can be procured, and to send them up._ + +Item. You will beseech their Highnesses very humbly in my name, to be +pleased to pay regard to my strong recommendation of Villacorta, who, +as their Highnesses are aware, has been extremely useful, and has shown +the greatest possible zeal in this affair. As I know him to be a zealous +man and well disposed to their Highnesses’ service, I shall take it as a +favour if they will deign to grant him some post of trust adapted to his +qualifications, and in which he might give proof of his industry and warm +desire to serve their Highnesses: and you will manage that Villacorta +shall have practical evidence that the work which he has done for me, and +in which I found him needful to me, has been of some profit to him. + +_This shall be done as he wishes._ + +Item. That the said Messire Pedro, Gaspar, Beltran, and others remaining +here, came out in command of caravels which have now gone back, and are +in receipt of no salary whatever; but as these are people who should be +employed in the most important and confidential positions, their pay has +not been fixed, because it ought to be different from that of the rest; +you will beg their Highnesses, therefore, on my behalf, to settle what +ought to be given them either yearly or monthly, for the advantage of +their Highnesses’ service. + +Given in the City of Isabella, the thirtieth of January, in the year +fourteen hundred and ninety-four. + +_This point has been already replied to above; but as in the said clause +he says that they should receive their pay, it is now their Highnesses’ +command that their salary shall be paid to them from the time that they +gave up their command._ + + +MEMORIAL + +_Que para los Reyes Católicos dió el Almirante D. Cristobal Colon, en +la ciudad Isabela, á 30 de Enero de 1494 á Antonio de Torres, sobre el +suceso de su segundo viage á las Indias; y al final de cada capítulo la +respuesta de sus Altezas._ + +Lo que vos Antonio de Torres, capitan de la nao _Marigalante_, é Alcaide +de la ciudad Isabela, habeis de decir é suplicar de mi parte al Rey é la +Reina nuestros Señores es lo siguiente: + +Primeramente, dadas las cartas de creencia que llevais de mí para sus +Altezas, besareis por mi sus reales pies é manos, é me encomendareis en +sus Altezas como á Rey é Reina mis Señores naturales, en cuyo servicio yo +deseo fenecer mis dias, como esto mas largamente vos podreis decir á sus +Altezas, segun lo que en mi vistes é supistes. + +_Sus Altezas se lo tienen en servicio._ + +Item: Como quiera que por las cartas que á sus altezas escribo y aun el +Padre Fray Buil y el Tesorero, podrán comprender todo lo que acá despues +de nuestra llegada se fizo, y esto harto por menudo y extensamente; +con todo direis á sus Altezas de mi parte, que á Dios ha placido darme +tal gracia para en su servicio, que hasta aquí no hallo yo menos ni se +ha hallado en cosa alguna de lo que yo escribí y dije, y afirmé á sus +Altezas en los dias pasados, antes por gracia de Dios espero que aun muy +mas claramente y muy presto por la obra parecerá, porque las cosas de +especeria en solas las orillas de la mar, sin haber entrado dentro en +la tierra, se halla tal rastro é principios della, que es razon que se +esperen muy mejores fines, y esto mismo en las minas del oro, porque con +solos dos que fueron á descubrir cada uno por su parte, sin detenerse +allá porque era poca gente, se han descubierto tantos rios tan poblados +de oro, que cualquier de los que lo vieron é cogieron, solamente con +las manos por muestra, vinieron tan alegres, y dicen tantas cosas de la +abundancia dello, que yo tengo empacho de las decir y escribir á sus +altezas; pero porque allá vá Gorbalan, que fue uno de los descubridores, +el dirá lo que vió, aunque acá queda otro que llaman Hojeda, criado del +Duque de Medinaceli, muy discreto mozo y de muy gran recabdo, que sin +duda y aun sin comparacion, descubrió mucho mas, segun el memorial de +los rios que él trajo, diciendo que en cada uno de ellos hay cosa de no +creella; por lo cual sus Altezas pueden dar gracias á Dios, pues tan +favorablemente se ha en todas sus cosas. + +_Sus Altezas dan muchas gracias a Dios por esto, y tienen en muy senalado +servicio al Almirante todo lo que en esto ha fecho y hace, porque conocen +que despues de Dios á él son en cargo de todo lo que en esto han habido +y hobieren; y porque cerca desto le escriben mas largo, á su carta se +remiten._ + +Item: Dieris á sus Altezas, como quier que ya se les escribe, que yo +deseaba mucho en esta armada poderles enviar mayor cuantidad de oro del +que acá se espera poder coger, si la gente que acá está nuestra, la +mayor parte subitamente no cayera doliente; pero porque ya esta armada +non so podia detener acá mas, siquiera por la costa grande que hace, +siquiera porque el tiempo es este propio para ir y poder volver los +que han de traer acá las cosas que aquí hacen mucha mengua, porque si +tardasen de irse de aquí non podrian volverse para Mayo los que han de +volver, y allende desto si con los sanos que acá se hallan, así en mar +como en tierra en la poblacion, yo quisiera emprender de ir á las minas +ó rios agora, habia muchas dificultades é aun peligros, porque de aquí +á veinte y tres ó veinte y cuatro leguas, en donde hay puertos é rios +para pasar y para tan largo camino, y para estar allá al tiempo que seria +menester para coger el oro, habia menester llevar muchos mantenimientos, +los cuales non podrian llevar á cuestas, ni hay bestias acá que á esto +pudiesen suplir, ni los caminos é pasos non estan tan aparejados, como +quier que se han comenzado á adobar para que se podiesen pasar; y tambien +era grande inconveniente dejar acá los dolientes en lugar abierto y +chozas, y las provisiones y mantenimientos que estan en tierra, que +como quier que estos indios se hayan mostrado á los descubridores, y se +muestran cada dia muy simples y sin malicia; con todo, porque cada dia +vienen acá entre nosotros non pareció que fuera buen consejo meter á +riesgo y á ventura de perderse esta gente y los mantenimientos, lo que un +indio con un tizon podria hacer poniendo huego á las chozas, porque de +noche y de dia siempre van y vienen; á causa dellos tenemos guardas en el +campo mientras la poblacion está abierta y sin defension. + +_Que lo hizo bien._ + +Otrosí: Como habemos visto en los que fueron por tierra á descobrir que +los mas cayeron dolientes despues de vueltos, y aun algunos se hobieron +de volver del camino, era tambien razon de temer que otro tal conteciese +a los que agora irian destos sanos que se hallan, y seguirse hian dos +peligros de allí, el uno de adolecer allá en la misma obra dó no hay +casa ni reparo alguno de aquel Cacique que llaman Caonabó que es hombre, +segun relacion de todos, muy malo y muy mas atrevido, el cual viéndonos +allá así desbaratados y dolientes, podria emprender lo que non osaria si +fuesemos sanos: y con esto mismo se allega otra dificultad de traer acá +lo que llegasemos de oro, porque ó habiamos de traer poco y ir y venir +cada dia, y meterse en el riesgo de las dolencias, ó se habia de enviar +con alguna parte de la gente con el mismo peligro de perderlo. + +_Lo hizo bien._ + +Así que, direis á sus Altezas, que estas son las cabsas porque de +presente non se ha detenido el armada, ni se les envia oro mas de las +muestras; pero confiando en la misericordia de Dios, que en todo y por +todo nos ha guiado hasta aquí, esta gente convalescerá presto, como ya +lo hace, porque solamente les prueba la tierra de algunas ceciones, y +luego se levantan; y es cierto que si toviesen algunas carnes frescas +para convalescer muy presto serian todos en pie con ayuda de Dios, é +aun los mas estarian ya convalescidos en este tiempo, espero que ellos +convalescerán: con estos pocos sanos que acá quedan, cada dia se entiende +en cerrar la poblacion y meterla en alguna defensa, y los mantenimientos +en seguro, que será fecho en breves dias, porque non ha de ser sino +albarradas que non son gente los indios, que si dormiendo non nos +fallasen para emprender cosa ninguna, aunque la toviesen pensada, que +así hicieron á los otros que acá quedaron por su mal recabdo, los cuales +por pocos que fuesen, y por mayores ocasiones que dieran á los indios +de haber é de hacer lo que hicieron, nunca ellos osaran emprender de +dañarles si los vieran á buen recabdo: y esto fecho luego se entenderá +en ir á los dichos rios, ó desde acquí tomando el camino, y buscando los +mejores expedientes que se puedan, ó por la mar rodeando la isla fasta +aquella parte de donde se dice que no debe haber mas de seis ó siete +leguas hasta los dichos rios; por forma que con seguridad se pueda cojer +el oro y ponerlo en recabdo de alguna fortaleza ó torre que allí se haga +luego, para tenerlo cogido al tiempo que las dos carabelas volverán acá, +é para que luego con el primer tiempo que sea para navegar este camino se +envie á buen recabdo. + +_Que está bien, y así lo debe hacer._ + +Item: Direis á sus Altezas, como dicho es, que las causas de las +dolencias tan general de todos es de mudamiento de aguas y aires, porque +vemos que á todos arreo se extiende y peligran pocos; por consiguiente +la conservacion de la sanidad, despues de Dios, está que esta gente sea +proveida de los mantenimientos que en España acostumbraba, porque dellos, +ni de otros que viniesen de nuevo sus Altezas se podrán servir si no +estan sanos; y esta provision ha de durar hasta que acá se haya fecho +cimiento de lo que acá se sembrare é plantare, digo de trigos y cebadas, +é viñas, de lo cual para este año se ho fecho poco, porque no se pudo de +antes tomar asiento, y luego que se tomó adolescieron aquellos poquitos +labradores que acá estaban, los cuales aunque estovieran sanos tenian +tan pocas bestias y tau magras y flacas, que poco es lo que pudieran +hacer: con todo, alguna cosa han sembrado, mas para probar la tierra, que +parece muy maravillosa, para que de alli se puede esperar remedio alguno +en nuestras necesidades. Somos bien ciertos, como la obra lo muestra, +que en esta tierra asi el trigo como el vino nacerá muy bien; pero hase +de esperar el fruto, el cual si tal será como muestra la presteza del +nacer del trigo, y de algunos poquitos de sarmientos que se pusieron, es +cierto que non fará mengua el Andalucía ni Secilia aquí, ni en las cañas +de azucar, segun unas poquitas que se pusieron han prendido; porque es +cierto que la hermosura de la tierra de estas islas, así de montes é +sierras y aguas, como de vegas donde hay rios cabdales, es tal la vista +que ninguna otra tierra que sol escaliente puede ser mejor al parecer ni +tan fermosa. + +_Pues la tierra es tal, que debe procurar que se siembre lo mas que ser +pudiere de todas cosas, y á D. Juan de Fonseca se escribe que envie de +contino todo lo que fuere menester para esto._ + +Item: Direis que á cabsa de haberse derramado mucho vino en este camino +del que la flota traia, y esto, segun dicen los mas, á culpa de la mala +obra que los toneleros ficieron en Sevilla, la mayor mengua que agora +tenemos, aquí, ó esperamos por esto tener, es de vinos, y como quier que +tengamos para mas tiempo así vizcocho como trigo, con todo es necesario +que tambien se envie alguna cuantidad razonable, porque el camino es +largo y cada dia no se puede proveer, é asimismo algunas canales, digo +tocinos, y otra cecina que sea mejor que la que habemos traido este +camino. De carneros vivos y aun antes corderos y cordericas, mas fembras +que machos, y algunos becerros y becerras pequeños son menester, que cada +vez vengan en cualquier carabela que acá se enviare, y algunas asnas +y asnos, y yeguas para trabajo y simiente, que acá ninguna de estas +animalias hay de que hombre se pueda ayudar ni valer. Y porque recelo +que sus Altezas no se fallarán en Sevilla, ni los Oficiales ó Ministros +suyos sin expreso mandamiento non proveerían en lo porque agora con +este primero camino es necesario que venga, porque en la consulta y en +la respuesta se pasaria la sazon del partir los navíos que acá por todo +Mayo es necesario que sean; direis á sus Altezas, como yo vos dí cargo y +mandé, que del oro que allá llevais empeñándolo, ó poniêndolo en poder +de algun mercader en Sevilla, el cual distraya y ponga los maravedis que +serán menester para cargar dos carabelas de víno y de trigo, y de las +otras cosas que llevais por memorial, el cual mercader lleve ó envie el +dicho oro para sus Altezas, que le vean, resciban y hagan pagar lo que +hobiere distraido é puesto para el despacho y cargazon de las dichas +dos carabelas, las cuales por consolar y esforzar esta gente que acá +queda, cumple que fagan mas de poder de ser acá vueltas por todo el +mes de Mayo, porque la gente antes de entrar en el verano vea é tengan +algun refrescamiento destas cosas, en especial para las dolencias; de +las cuales cosas acá ya tenemos gran mengua, como son pasas, azucar, +almendras, miel é arroz, que debiera venir en gran cuantidad y vino muy +poca, é aquello que vino es ya consumido é gastado, y aun la mayor parte +de las medecinas que de allá trojieron, por la muchedumbre de los muchos +dolientes; de las cuales cosas, como dicho es, vos llevais memoriales +así para sanos, como para dolientes, firmados de mi mano, los cuales +cumplidamente si el dinero bastare, ó á lo menos lo que mas necesario sea +para agora despachar, es para que lo puedan luego traer los dichos dos +navíos, y lo que quedare procurareis con sus Altezas que con otros navíos +venga lo mas presto que ser pudiere. + +_Sus Altezas enviaron á mandar á D. Juan de Fonseca que luego haya +informacion de los que hicieron ese engaño en los toneles, y de sus +bienes haga que se cobre todo el daño que vino en el vino, con las +costas; y en lo de las cañas vea como las que se enviaren sean buenas, y +en las otras cosas que aquí dice que las provea luego._ + +Item: Direis á sus Altezas que á cabsa que acá no hay lengua por medio +de la cual á esta gente se pueda dar á entender nuestra santa Fé, +como sus Altezas desean, y aun los que acá estamos, como quier que se +trabajará cuanto pudieren, se envian de presente con estos navíos así +de los canibales, hombres y mugeres y niños y niñas, los cuales sus +Altezas pueden mandar poner en poder de personas con quien puedan mejor +aprender la lengua, ejercitándolos en cosas de servicio, y poco á poco +mandando poner en ellos algun mas cuidado que en otros esclavos para que +deprendan unos de otros, que no se hablen ni se vean sino muy tarde, que +mas presto deprenderán allá que no acá, y serán mejores intérpretes, como +quier que acá non se dejará de hacer lo que se pueda; es verdad que como +esta gente platican poco los de la una isla con los de la otra, en las +lenguas hay alguna diferencia entre ellos, segun como estan mas cerca +ó mas lejos: y porque entre las otras islas las de los canibales son +mucho grandes, y mucho bien pobladas, parecerá acá que tomar dellos y +dellas y enviarlos allá á Castilla non seria sino bien, porque quitarse +hian una vez de aquella inhumana costumbre que tienen de comer hombres, +y allá en Castilla entendiendo la lengua muy mas presto rescibirian el +Bautismo, y farian el provecho de sus animas: aun entre estos pueblos +que non son de esas costumbres, se ganaria gran crédito por nosotros +viendo que aquellos prendiesemos y cativasemos, de quien ellos suelen +rescibir daños, y tienen tamaño miedo que del nombre solo se espantan; +certificando á sus Altezas que la venida é vista de esta flota acá en +esta tierra así junta y hermosa, ha dado muy grande autoridad á esto y +muy grande seguridad para las cosas venideras, por que toda esta gente +de esta grande isla y de las otras, viendo el buen tratamiento que á los +buenos se fará, y el castigo que á los malos se dará, verná á obediencia +prestament para poderlos mandar como vasallos de sus Altezas. Y como +quier que ellos agora donde quier que hombre se halle non solo hacen de +grado lo que hombre quiere que fagan, mas ellos de su voluntad se ponen á +todo lo que entienden que nos puede placer, y tambien pueden ser ciertos +sus Altezas que non menos allá, entre los cristianos Principes haber dado +gran reputacion la venida desta armada por muchos respetos, así presentes +como venideros, los cuales sus Altezas podrán mejor pensar y entender que +non sabria decir. + +_Decirle heis lo que acá ha habido en lo de dos canibales que acá +vinieron._ + +_Que está muy bien, y así lo debe hacer; pero que procure allá, como +si ser pudiere, se reduzgan á nuestra santa Fé católica, y asimismo lo +procure con los de las islas donde está._ + +Item: Direis á sus Altezas, que el provecho de las almas de los dichos +canibales, y aun destos de acá, ha traido el pensamiento que cuantos mas +allá se llevasen seria mejor, y en ello podrian sus Altezas ser servidos +desta manera: que visto cuanto son acá menester los ganados y bestias de +trabajo para el sostenimiento de la gente que acá ha de estar, y bien de +todas estas islas, sus Altezas podrán dar licencia é permiso á un número +de carabelas suficiente que vengan acá cada año, y trayan de los dichos +ganados y otros mantenimientos y cosas para poblar el campo y aprovechar +la tierra, y esto en precios razonables á sus costas de los que las +trugieren, las cuales cosas se les podrian pagar en esclavos de estos +canibales, gente tan fiera y dispuesta, y bien proporcionada y de muy +buen entendimiento, los cuales quitados de aquella inhumanidad creemos +que serán mejores que otros ningunos esclavos, la cual luego perderán que +sean fuera de su tierra, y de estos podrán haber muchos con las fustas de +remos que acá se entienden de hacer, fecho empero presupuesto que cada +una de las carabelas que viniesen de sus Altezas pusiesen una persona +fiable, la cual defendiese las dichas carabelas que non descendiesen +á ninguna otra parte ni isla salvo aquí, donde ha de estar la carga y +descarga de toda la mercaduría; y aun destos esclavos que se llevaren, +sus Altezas podrian haber sus derechos allá; y desto traereís ó enviareis +respuesta, porque acá se hagan los aparejos que son menester con mas +confianza, si á sus Altezas pareciere bien. + +_En esto se ha suspendido por agora hasta que venga otro camino de allá, +y escriba el Almirante lo que en esto le paresciere._ + +Item: Tambien direis á sus Altezas que mas provechoso es, y menos costa, +fletar los navíos como los fletan los mercaderes para Flandes por +toneladas que non de otra manera; por ende que yo vos dí cargo de fletar +á este respecto las dos carabelas que habeis luego de enviar: y así se +podrá hacer de todas las otras que sus Altezas enviaren, si de aquella +forma se ternán por servidos; pero non entiendo decir esto de las que han +de venir con su licencia por la mercaduria de los esclavos. + +_Sus Altezas mandan á D. Juan de Fonseca que en el fletar de las +carabelas tenga esta forma si ser pudiere._ + +Item: Direis á sus Altezas que á causa de escusar alguna mas costa, yo +merqué estas carabelas que llevais por memorial para retenerlas acá con +estos dos naos, conviene á saber, la Gallega y esa otra Capitana, de +la cual merqué por semejante del Maestre della los tres ochavos por el +precio que en el dicho memorial destas copias llevais firmado de mi mano, +los cuales navíos non solo darán autoridad y gran seguridad á la gente +que ha de estar dentro y conversar con los indios para cojer el oro, mas +aun para otra cualquier cosa de peligro que de gente estraña pudiese +acontescer, allende que las carabelas son necesarias para el descubrir de +la tierra firme y otras islas que entre aquí é allá estan; y suplicareis +á sus Altezas que los maravedis que estos navíos cuestan manden pagar en +los tiempos que se les ha prometido, porque sin dubda ellos ganarán bien +su costa, segun yo creo y espero en la misericordia de Dios. + +_El Almirante lo hizo bien, y decirle heis como acá se pago al que vendió +la nao, y mandaron á D. Juan de Fonseca que pague lo de las carabelas que +el Almirante compró._ + +Item: Direis á sus Altezas y suplicareis de mi parte cuanto mas +humilmente pueda, que les plega mucho mirar en lo que por las cartas +y otras escripturas verán mas largamente tocante á la paz é sosiego e +concordia de los que acá estan, y que para las cosas del servicio de +sus Altezas escojan tales personas que non se tenga recelo dellas y que +miren mas á lo por que se envian que non á sus propios intereses; y en +esto, pues que todas las cosas vistes é supistes, hablareis é direis á +sus Altezas la verdad de todas las cosas como las comprendistes, y que +la provision de sus Altezas que sobre ello mandaren facer venga con los +primeros navíos si posible fuere, á fin que acá non se hagan escándalos +en cosa que tanto va en el servicio de sus Altezas. + +_Sus Altezas estan bien informados desto, y en todo se proveerá como +conviene._ + +Item: Direis á sus Altezas el asiento de esta ciudad, é la fermosura de +la provincia alderedor como lo vistes y compreendistes, y como yo vos +hice Alcayde della por los poderes que de sus Altezas tengo para ello, +á las cuales humilmente suplico que en alguna parte de satisfaccion +de vuestros servicios tengan por bien la dicha provision, como de sus +Altezas yo espero. + +_A sus Altezas plaze que vos seais Alcayde._ + +Item: Porque Mosen Pedro Margarité, criado de sus Altezas, há bien +servido, y espero que así lo hara adelante en las cosas que le fueren +encomendadas, he habido placer de su quedada aqui, y tambien de Gaspar +y de Beltran por ser conocidos criados de sus Altezas para los poner en +cosas de confianza: suplicareis á sus Altezas que especial al dicho Mosen +Pedro, que es casado y tiene hijos le provean de alguna encomienda en la +Orden de Santiago, de la cual él tiene el hábito, porque su muger é hijos +tengan en que vivir. Asimismo hareis relacion de Juan Aguado, criado de +sus Altezas, cuan bien é diligentemente ha servido en todo lo que le ha +seido mandado; que suplico á sus Altezas á él é á los sobredichos los +hayan por encomendados é por presentes. + +_Sus Altezas mandan asentar á Mosen Pedro 30000 maravedis cada ano, y +á Gaspar y Beltran á cada uno 15000 maravedis cada año desde hoy 15 de +Agosto de 94 en adelante, y así les haga pagar el Almirante en lo que +allá se hobiere de pagar, y D. Juan de Fonseca en lo que acá se hobiere +de pagar: y en lo de Juan Aguado sus Altezas habrān memoria de él._ + +Item: Direis á sus Altezas el trabajo que el Doctor Chanca tiene con el +afruenta de tantos dolientes, y aun la estrechura de los mantenimientos, +é aun con todo ello se dispone con gran diligencia y caridad en todo lo +que cumple á su oficio, y porque sus Altezas remitieron á mí el salario +que acá se le habia de dar, porque estando acá es cierto quel non toma +ni puede haber nada de ninguno, ni ganar de su oficio como en Castilla +ganaba, ó podria ganar estando á su reposo é viviendo de otra manera +que acá no vive; y así que como quiera que él jura que es mas lo que +allá ganaba allende el salario que sus Altezas le dan, y non me quise +estender mas de cincuenta mil maravedis por el trabajo que acá pasa +cada un año mientras acá estoviere; los cuales suplico á sus Altezas +le manden librar con el sueldo de acá y eso mismo, porque él dice y +afirma que todos los fisicos de vuestras Altezas, que andan en reales ó +semejantes cosas que estas, suelen haber de derecho un dia de sueldo en +todo el año de toda la gente: con todo he seido informado, y dicenme, que +como quier que esto sea, la costumbre es de darles cierta suma tasada á +voluntad y mandamiento de sus Altezas en compensa de aquel dia de sueldo. +Suplicareis á sus Altezas que en ello manden proveer, así en lo del +salario como de esta costumbre, por forma que el dicho Doctor tenga razon +de ser contento. + +_A sus Altezas place desto del Doctor Chanca, y que se le pague esto +desde quel Almirante gelo asentó, y que gelos pague con lo del sueldo._ + +_En esto del dia del sueldo de los fisicos, non lo acostumbran haber sino +donde el Rey nuestro Senor esté en persona._ + +Item: Direis á sus Altezas de Coronel cuanto es hombre para servir á sus +Altezas en muchas cosas, y cuanto ha servido hasta aquí en todo lo mas +necesario, y la mengua que dél sentimos agora que está doliente, y que +sirviendo de tal manera es razon quel sienta el fruto de su servicio, non +solo en las mercedes para despues mas en lo de su salario en lo presente, +en manera quél é los que acá estan sientan que les aprovecha el servicio, +porque segun el ejercicio que acá se ha de tener en cojer este oro, no +son de tener en poco las personas en quien tanta diligencia hay: y porque +por su habilidad se proveyó acá por mí del oficio de Alguacil mayor +destas Indias, y en la provision va el salario en blanco, que suplico á +sus Altezas gelo manden henchir como mas sea su servicio, mirando sus +servicios, confirmándole la provision que acá se le dió, e proveyéndole +de él de juro. + +_Sus Altezas mandan que le asienten quince mil maravedis cada año mas de +su sueldo, é que se le paguen cuando le pagaren su sueldo._ + +Asimismo direis á sus Altezas como aquí vino el Bachiller Gil García por +Alcade mayor é non se le ha consignado ni nombrado salario, y es persona +de bien y de buenas letras, é diligente, é es acá bien necesario; que +suplico á sus Altezas le manden nombrar é consignar su salario, por +manera que él se pueda sostener, é le sea librado con el dinero del +sueldo de acá. + +_Sus Altezas le mandan asentar cada año viente mal maravedis en tanto +que allá estoviere y mas su sueldo, y que gelo paguen cuando pagaren el +sueldo._ + +Item: Direis á sus Altezas como quier que ya se lo escribo por las +cartas, que para este año non entiendo que sea posible ir á descobrir +hasta que esto destos rios que se hallaron de oro sea puesto en el +asiento debido á servicio do sus Altezas, que despues mucho mejor +se podrá facer, porque no es cosa que nadie la podiese facer sin mi +presencia á mi grado, ni á servicio de sus Altezas, por muy bien que lo +ficiese, como es en dubda segun lo que hombre vee por su presencia. + +_Trabaje como lo mas preciso que ser pueda se sepa lo adito de ese oro._ + +Item: Direis á sus Altezas como los escuderos de caballo que vinieron de +Granada, en el alarde que ficieron en Sevilla mostraron buenos caballos, +é despues al embarcar, yo no lo ví porque estaba un poco doliente, +y metiéronlos tales quel mejor dellos non parece que vale dos mil +maravedis, porque vendieron los otros y compraron estos, y esto fue de la +suerte que se hizo lo de mucha gente que allá en los alardes de Sevilla +yo vi muy buena; parece que Juan de Soria, despues dea dado el dinero +del sueldo, por algun interese suyo puso otros en lugar de aquellos que +yo acá pensaba fallar, y fallo gente que yo nunca habia visto: en esto +ha habido gran maldad, de tal manera que yo no sé si me queje dél solo: +por esto, visto que á estos escuderos se ha fecho la costa hasta aquí, +allende de sus sueldos y tambien á sus caballos, y se hace de presente y +son personas que cuando ellos estan dolientes, ó non se les antoja, non +quieren que sus caballos sirvan sin ellos mismos; sus Altezas no quieren +que se les compren estos caballos sino que sirvan á sus Altezas, y esto +mismo no les paresce que deban servir ni cosa ninguna sino á caballo; +lo cual agora de presente non face mucho al caso, é por esto parece que +seria mejor comprarles los caballos, pues que tan poco valen, y non +estar cada dia con ellos en estas pendencias; por ende que sus Altezas +determinen esto como fuere su servicio. + +_Sus Altezas mandan á D. Juan de Fonseca, que se informe de esto de estos +caballos, y si se hallare que es verdad que hicieron ese engaño, lo +envien á sus Altezas porque lo mandarán castigar; y tambien se informe +desto que dice de la otra gente, y envie la pesquisa á sus Altezas: y en +lo destos escuderos sus Altezas mandan que esten allá y sirvan, pues son +de las guardas y criados de sus Altezas; y á los escuderos mandan sus +Altezas que den los caballos cada vez que fueren menester y el Almirante +lo mandare, y si algun daño recibieren los caballos yendo otros en ellos, +por medio del Almirante mandan sus Altezas que gelo paguen._ + +Item: Direis á sus Altezas como aquí han venido mas de doscientas +personas sin sueldo, y hay algunos dellos que sirven bien, y aun los +otros por semejante se mandan que lo hagan así y porque para estos +primeros tres años será gran bien que aqui esten mil hombres para asentar +y poner en muy gran seguridad esta Isla y rios de oro, y aunque hobiese +ciento de caballo non se perderia nada, antes parece necesario, aunque +en estos de caballo fasta que oro se envie sus Altezas podrán sobreceer: +con todo á estas doscientas personas, que vienen sin sueldo, sus Altezas +deben enviar á decir si se les pagará sueldo como á los otros sirviendo +bien, porque cierto son necesarios como dicho tengo para este comienzo. + +_De estas doscientas personas que aquî dice que fueron sin sueldo, mandan +sus Altezas que entren en lugar de los que han faltado y faltaren de los +que iban á sueldo, seyendo habiles y á contentamiento del Almirante, +y sus Altezas mandan al Contador que los asiente en lugar de los que +faltaren como el Almirante lo dijere._ + +Item: Porque en algo la costa de esta gente se puede aliviar con +industria y formas que otros Principes suelen tener en otras, lo gastado +mejor que acá se podria escusar, paresce que seria bien mandar traer +en los navíos que vinieren allende de las otras cosas que son para los +mantenimientos comunes, y de la botica, zapatos y cueras para los mandar +facer; camisas comunes y de otras, jubones, lienzo, sayos, calzas, paños +para vestir en razonables precios; y otras cosas, como son conservas, que +son fuera de racion, y para conservacion de la salud, las cuales cosas +todas la gente de acá rescibiria de grado en descuento de su sueldo, y +si allá esto se mercase por Ministros leales y que mirasen el servicio +de sus Altezas, se ahorraria algo: por ende sabreis la voluntad de sus +Altezas cerca desto, y si les pareciere ser su servicio luego se debe +poner en obra. + +_Por este camino se solia ser fasta que mas escriba el Almirante, y ya +enviarán á mandar á D. Juan de Fonseca con Jimeno de Bribiesca que provea +en esto._ + +Item: Tambien direis á sus Altezas, que por cuanto ayer en el alarde +que se tomó se falló la gente muy desarmada lo cual pienso que en parte +contesció por aquel trocar que allá se fizo en Sevilla ó en el puerto +cuando se dejaron los que se mostraron armados, y tomaron otros que daban +algo á quien los trocaba, paresce que seria bien que se mandasen traer +doscientas corazas, y cien espingardas y cien ballestas, y mucho almacen, +que es la cosa que mas menester habemos, y de todas estas armas se podrán +dar á los desarmados. + +_Ya se escribe á D. Juan de Fonseca que provea en esto._ + +Item: Por cuanto algunos oficiales que acá vinieron como son albañies y +de otros oficios, que son casados y tienen sus mugeres allá, y querrian +que allá lo que se les debe de su sueldo se diese á sus mugeres ó á las +personas á quien ellos enviaren sus recabdos, para que les compren las +cosas que acá han menester; que á sus Altezas suplico les mande librar, +porque su servicio es que estos esten proveidos acá. + +_Ya enviaron á mandar sus Altezas á D. Juan de Fonseca que provea en +esto._ + +Item: Porque allende las otras cosas que allá se envian á pedir por los +memoriales que llevais de mi mano firmados, así para mantenimiento de +los sanos como para los dolientes, seria muy bien que se hobiesen de la +isla de la Madera cincuenta pipas de miel de azúcar, porque es el mejor +mantenimiento del mundo y mas sano, y non suele costar cada pipa sino +á dos ducados sin el casco, y si sus Altezas mandan que á la vuelta +pase por allí alguna carabela las podrá mercar, y tambien diez cajas de +azúcar que es mucho menester, que esta es la mejor sazon del año, digo +entre aquí é el mes de Abril para fallarlo, é haber dello buena razon y +podriase dar orden mandándolo sus Altezas, é que non supiesen allá para +donde lo quieren. + +_D. Juan de Fonseca que provea en esto._ + +Item: Direis á sus Altezas, por cuanto aunque los rios tengan en la +cuantidad que se dice por los que lo han visto, pero que lo cierto dello +es quel oro non se engendra en los rios mas en la tierra, quel agua +topando con las minas lo trae envuelto en las arenas, y porque en estos +tantos rios se han descubierto, como quiera que hay algunos grandecitos +hay otros tan pequeños que son mas fuentes que no rios, que non llevan +de dos dedos de agua, y se falla luego el cabo doede nasce; para lo cual +non solo serán provechosos los lavadores para cogerlo en el arena, mas +los otros para cavarlo en la tierra, que será lo mas especial é de mayor +cuantidad; é por esto será bien que sus Altezas envien lavadores, é de +los que andan en las minas allá en Almaden, porque en la una manera y en +la otra se faga el ejercicio, como quier que acá non esperaremos á ellos, +que con los lavadores que aquí tenemos, esperamos con la ayuda de Dios, +si una vez la gente está sana, allegar un buen golpe de oro para las +primeras carabelas que fueren. + +_A otro camino se proveerá en esto cumplidamente; en tanto mandan sus +Altezas á D. Juan de Fonseca que envie luego los mas minadores que +pudiere haber, y escriben al Almaden, que de allí tomen los que mas +pudieren y los envien._ + +Item: Suplicareis á sus Altezas de mi parte muy humildemente, que quieran +tener por muy encomendado á Villacorta, el cual, como sus Altezas saben, +ha mucho servido en esta negociacion, y con muy buena voluntad, y segun +le conozco persona diligente y afecionada á su servicio; rescebiré merced +que se le dé algun cargo de confianza, para lo cual él ser sufficiente, +y pueda mostrar su deseo de servir y diligencia, y esto procurareis por +forma que el Villacorta conozca por la obra que lo que ha trabajado por +mi en lo que yo le hobe menester le aprovecha en esto. + +_Así se hará._ + +Item: Que los dichos Mosen Pedro y Gaspar y Beltran, y otros que han +quedado acá, trajieron capítanias de carabelas, que son agora vueltas, y +non gozan del sueldo; pero porque son tales personas, que se han de poner +en cosas principales y de confianza, non se les ha determinado el sueldo +que sea diferenciado de los otros: suplicareis de mi parte á sus Altezas +determinen lo que se les ha de dar en cada un año, ó por meses, como mas +fueren servidos. Fecho en la ciudad Isabela á treinta dias de Enero de +mil cuatrocientos y noventa y cuatro años. + +_Ya está respondido arriba, pero porque en el dicho capítulo que en esto +habia dice que gozan del salario, desde agora mandan sus Altezas que se +les cuenten á todos sus salarios desde que dejaron las capitanías._ + + +FOOTNOTES: + +[151] In the original, the replies are affixed in the margin of each +chapter. (Navarrete). + +[152] _Albarrada_—an Arabic word implying a stone wall without mortar. + +[153] In La Mancha, New Castile, famous for mines of quicksilver. + + + + +THIRD VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS. + + +_Narrative of the Voyage which Don Christopher Columbus made the third +time that he came to the Indies, when he discovered terra firma, as he +sent it to their Majesties from the Island of Hispaniola._ + +Most serene and most exalted and powerful Princes, the King and Queen, +our Sovereigns: The Blessed Trinity moved your Highnesses to this +enterprise of the Indies; and of His Infinite goodness has chosen me to +proclaim it to you; wherefore as His ambassador I approached your royal +presence, moved by the consideration that I was appealing to the most +exalted monarchs in Christendom, who exercised so great an influence over +the Christian faith, and its advancement in the world. Those who heard of +it looked upon it as impossible, for they fixed all their hopes on the +favours of fortune, and pinned their faith solely upon chance. I gave +to the subject six or seven years of great anxiety, explaining, to the +best of my ability, how great service might be done to our Lord, by this +undertaking, in promulgating His sacred name and our holy faith among so +many nations;—an enterprise so exalted in itself, and so calculated to +enhance the glory and immortalise the renown of great sovereigns. It was +also requisite to refer to the temporal prosperity which was foretold in +the writings of so many trustworthy and wise historians, who related that +great riches were to be found in these parts. At the same time I thought +it desirable to bring to bear upon the subject the sayings and opinions +of those who have written upon the geography of the world, and finally, +your Highnesses came to the determination that the undertaking should be +entered upon. In this your Highnesses exhibited the noble spirit which +has been always manifested by you on every great subject; for all others +who had thought of the matter or heard it spoken of, unanimously treated +it with contempt, with the exception of two friars,[154] who always +remained constant in their belief of its practicability. I, myself, +in spite of fatiguing opposition, felt sure that the enterprise would +nevertheless prosper, and continue equally confident of it to this day, +because it is a truth, that though everything will pass away, the Word +of God will not, and everything that he has said will be fulfilled; who +so clearly spoke of these lands, by the mouth of the prophet Isaiah, in +so many places in Scripture, that from Spain the holy name of God was +to be spread abroad. Thus I departed in the name of the Holy Trinity, +and returned very soon, bringing with me an account of the practical +fulfilment of everything I had said. Your Highnesses again sent me out, +and in a short space of time, by God’s mercy, not by [155] I discovered +three hundred and thirty-three leagues of terra firma on the eastern +side, and seven hundred islands,[156] besides those which I discovered +on the first voyage; I also succeeded in circumnavigating the island +of Española, which is larger in circumference than all Spain, the +inhabitants of which are countless, and all of whom may be laid under +tribute. It was then that complaints arose, disparaging the enterprise +that I had undertaken, because, forsooth, I had not immediately sent the +ships home laden with gold,—no allowance being made for the shortness +of the time, and all the other impediments of which I have already +spoken. On this account (either as a punishment for my sins, or, as I +trust, for my salvation), I was held in detestation, and had obstacles +placed in the way of every thing I said, or for which I petitioned. I +therefore resolved to apply to your Highnesses, to inform you of all +the wonderful events that I had experienced, and to explain the reason +of every proposition that I made, making reference to the nations that +I had seen, among whom, and by whose instrumentality, many souls may be +saved. I related how the natives of Española had been laid under tribute +to your Highnesses, and regarded you as their sovereigns. And I laid +before your Highnesses abundant samples of gold and copper,—proving the +existence of extensive mines of those metals. I also laid before your +Highnesses many sorts of spices, too numerous to detail; and I spoke +of the great quantity of brazil-wood, and numberless other articles +found in those lands. All this was of no avail with some persons, who +began, with determined hatred, to speak ill of the enterprise, not +taking into account the service done to our Lord in the salvation of +so many souls, nor the enhancement of your Highnesses’ greatness to a +higher pitch than any earthly prince has yet enjoyed; nor considering, +that from the exercise of your Highnesses’ goodness, and the expense +incurred, both spiritual and temporal advantage was to be expected, and +that Spain must in the process of time derive from thence, beyond all +doubt, an unspeakable increase of wealth. This might be manifestly seen +by the proofs given in the written descriptions of the voyages already +made, showing that the fulfilment of every other hope may be reasonably +expected. Nor were they affected by the consideration of what great +princes throughout the world have done to increase their fame: as, for +example, Solomon, who sent from Jerusalem, to the uttermost parts of +the east, to see Mount Sopora [Σωφίρ, Ophir], in which expedition his +ships were detained three years; and which mountain your Highnesses now +possess in the island of Española. Nor, as in the case of Alexander, who +sent to observe the mode of government in the island of Taprobana,[157] +in India; and Cæsar Nero, to explore the sources of the Nile,[158] and to +learn the causes of its increase in the summer, when water is needed; and +many other mighty deeds that princes have done, and which it is allotted +to princes to achieve. Nor was it of any avail that no prince of Spain, +as far as I have read, has ever hitherto gained possession of land out +of Spain; and that the world of which I speak is different from that +of which the Romans, and Alexander, and the Greeks made mighty efforts +with great armies to gain possession. Nor have they been affected by the +recent noble example of the kings of Portugal, who have had the courage +to explore as far as Guinea, and to make the discovery of it, expending +so much gold and so many lives in the undertaking, that a calculation of +the population of the kingdom would show that one half of them have died +in Guinea: and though it is now a long time since they commenced these +great exertions, the return for their labour and expense has hitherto +been but trifling; this people has also dared to make conquests in +Africa, and to carry on their exploits to Ceuta, Tangier, Argilla, and +Alcazar, repeatedly giving battle to the Moors; and all this at great +expense; simply because it was an exploit worthy of a prince, undertaken +for the service of God, and to advance the enlargement of His kingdom. +The more I said on the subject, the more two-fold was reproach cast upon +it, even to the expression of abhorrence, no consideration being given +to the honour and fame that accrued to your Highnesses throughout all +Christendom from your Highnesses having undertaken this enterprise; so +that there was neither great nor small who did not desire to hear tidings +of it. Your Highnesses replied to me encouragingly, and desired that I +should pay no regard to those who spoke ill of the undertaking, inasmuch +as they had received no authority or countenance whatever from your +Highnesses. + +I started from San Lucar, in the name of the most Holy Trinity, on +Wednesday the 30th of May,[159] much fatigued with my voyage, for I had +hoped, when I left the Indies, to find repose in Spain; whereas, on the +contrary, I experienced nothing but opposition and vexation. I sailed +to the island of Madeira by a circuitous route, in order to avoid any +encounter with an armed fleet from France,[160] which was on the look +out for me off Cape St. Vincent. Thence I went to the Canaries,[161] +from which islands I sailed with but one ship and two caravels, having +dispatched the other ships to Española by the direct road to the +Indies;[162] while I myself moved southward, with the view of reaching +the equinoctial line, and of then proceeding westward, so as to leave +the island of Española to the north. But having reached the Cape Verde +islands[163] (an incorrect name[164], for they are so barren that nothing +green was to be seen there, and the people so sickly that I did not +venture to remain among them), I sailed away four hundred and eighty +miles, which is equivalent to a hundred and twenty leagues, towards the +south-west, where, when it grew dark, I found the north star to be in +the fifth degree. The wind then failed me, and I entered a climate where +the intensity of the heat was such, that I thought both ships and men +would have been burnt up, and everything suddenly got into such a state +of confusion, that no man dared go below deck to attend to the securing +of the water-cask and the provisions. This heat lasted eight days; on the +first day the weather was fine, but on the seven other days it rained +and was cloudy, yet we found no alleviation of our distress; so that I +certainly believe, that if the sun had shone as on the first day, we +should not have been able to escape in any way. + +I recollect, that in sailing towards the Indies, as soon as I passed a +hundred leagues to the westward of the Azores, I found the temperature +change: and this is so all along from north to south. I determined, +therefore, if it should please the Lord to give me a favourable wind and +good weather, so that I might leave the part where I then was, that I +would give up pursuing the southward course, yet not turn backwards, but +sail towards the west, moving in that direction in the hope of finding +the same temperature that I had experienced when I sailed in the parallel +of the Canaries,—and then, if it proved so, I should still be able to +proceed more to the south. At the end of these eight days it pleased +our Lord to give me a favourable east wind, and I steered to the west, +but did not venture to move lower down towards the south, because I +discovered a very great change in the sky and the stars, although I found +no alteration in the temperature. I resolved, therefore, to keep on the +direct westward course, in a line from Sierra Leone, and not to change +it until I reached the point where I had thought I should find land, +where I would repair the vessels, and renew, if possible, our stock of +provisions, and take in what water we wanted. At the end of seventeen +days, during which our Lord gave me a propitious wind, we saw land at +noon of Tuesday the 31st of July.[165] This I had expected on the Monday +before, and held that route up to this point; but as the sun’s strength +increased, and our supply of water was failing, I resolved to make for +the Caribee Islands, and set sail in that direction; when, by the mercy +of God, which He has always extended to me, one of the sailors went up +to the main-top and saw to the westward a range of three mountains. Upon +this we repeated the “Salve Regina,” and other prayers, and all of us +gave many thanks to our Lord. I then gave up our northward course, and +put in for the land: at the hour of complines we reached a cape, which I +called Cape Galea,[166] having already given to the island the name of +Trinidad, and here we found a harbour, which would have been excellent +but there was no good anchorage. We saw houses and people on the spot, +and the country around was very beautiful, and as fresh and green as +the gardens of Valencia in the month of March. I was disappointed at +not being able to put into the harbour, and ran along the coast to +the westward. After sailing five leagues I found very good bottom and +anchored. The next day I set sail in the same direction, in search of a +harbour where I might repair the vessels and take in water, as well as +improve the stock of provisions which I had brought out with me. When +we had taken in a pipe of water, we proceeded onwards till we reached +the cape, and there finding good anchorage and protection from the east +wind, I ordered the anchors to be dropped, the water-cask to be repaired, +a supply of water and wood to be taken in, and the people to rest +themselves from the fatigues which they had endured for so long a time. +I gave to this point the name of Sandy Point (Punta del Arenal). All +the ground in the neighbourhood was filled with foot-marks of animals, +like the impression of the foot of a goat;[167] but although it would +have appeared from this circumstance that they were very numerous, only +one was seen, and that was dead. On the following day a large canoe +came from the eastward, containing twenty-four men, all in the prime +of life, and well provided with arms, such as bows, arrows, and wooden +shields; they were all, as I have said, young, well-proportioned, and +not dark black, but whiter than any other Indians that I had seen,—of +very graceful gesture and handsome forms, wearing their hair long and +straight, and cut in the Spanish style. Their heads were bound round +with cotton scarfs elaborately worked in colours, which resembled the +Moorish head-dresses. Some of these scarfs were worn round the body and +used as a covering in lieu of trousers. The natives spoke to us from +the canoe while it was yet at a considerable distance, but none of us +could understand them; I made signs to, them, however, to come nearer +to us, and more than two hours were spent in this manner,—but if by any +chance they moved a little nearer, they soon pushed off again. I caused +basins and other shining objects to be shown to them to tempt them to +come near; and after a long time, they came somewhat nearer than they +had hitherto done,—upon which, as I was very anxious to speak with them +and had nothing else to show them to induce them to approach, I ordered +a drum to be played upon the quarter-deck, and some of our young men +to dance, believing the Indians would come to see the amusement. No +sooner, however, did they perceive the beating of the drum and the +dancing, than they all left their oars, and strung their bows, and each +man laying hold of his shield, they commenced discharging their arrows +at us; upon this, the music and dancing soon ceased; and I ordered a +charge to be made from some of our cross-bows; they then left us, and +went rapidly to the other caravel, and placed themselves under its poop. +The pilot of that vessel received them courteously, and gave to the man +who appeared to be their chief, a coat and hat; and it was then arranged +between them, that he should go to speak with him on shore. Upon this the +Indians immediately went thither and waited for him; but as he would not +go without my permission, he came to my ship in a boat, whereupon the +Indians got into their canoe again and went away, and I never saw any +more of them or of any of the other inhabitants of the island. When I +reached the point of Arenal, I found that the island of Trinidad formed +with the land of Gracia[168] a strait of two leagues’ width from west to +east, and as we had to pass through it to go to the north, we found some +strong currents which crossed the strait, and which made a great roaring, +so that I concluded there must be a reef of sand or rocks, which would +preclude our entrance; and behind this current was another and another, +all making a roaring noise like the sound of breakers against the rocks. +I anchored there, under the said point of Arenal, outside of the strait, +and found the water rush from east to west with as much impetuosity as +that of the Guadalquivir at its conflux with the sea; and this continued +constantly day and night, so that it appeared to be impossible to move +backwards for the current or forwards for the shoals. In the dead of +night, while I was on deck, I heard an awful roaring that came from the +south towards the ship; I stopped to observe what it might be, and I saw +the sea rolling from west to east like a mountain as high as the ship, +and approaching by little and little; on the top of this rolling sea came +a mighty wave roaring with a frightful noise and the same terrific uproar +as the other currents, producing, as I have already said, a sound as of +breakers upon the rocks.[169] To this day I have a vivid recollection +of the dread I then felt, lest the ship might founder under the force +of that tremendous sea; but it passed by, and reached the mouth of the +before-mentioned passage, where the uproar lasted for a considerable +time. On the following day I sent out boats to take soundings, and found +that in the strait, at the deepest part of the embouchure, there were +six or seven fathoms of water, and that there were constant contrary +currents, one running inwards, and the other outwards. It pleased the +Lord, however, to give us a favourable wind, and I passed inwards through +that strait, and soon came to still water. In fact some water which was +drawn up from the sea, proved to be fresh. I then sailed northwards till +I came to a very high mountain, at about twenty-six leagues from the +Punta del Arenal; here two lofty headlands appeared, one towards the +east, and forming part of the island of Trinidad,[170] and the other, on +the west, being part of the land which I have already called Gracia;[171] +we found here a channel still narrower than that of Arenal,[172] with +similar currents, and a tremendous roaring of water; the water here also +was fresh. Hitherto I had held no communication with any of the people of +this country, although I very earnestly desired it; I therefore sailed +along the coast westwards, and the further I advanced, the fresher and +more wholesome I found the water; and when I had proceeded a considerable +distance, I reached a spot where the land appeared to be cultivated. +There I anchored, and sent the boats ashore, and the men who went in them +found the natives had recently left the place; they also observed that +the mountain was covered with monkeys. They came back, and as the coast +at that part presented nothing but a chain of mountains, I concluded that +further west we should find the land flatter, and consequently in all +probability inhabited. Actuated by this thought I weighed anchor, and +ran along the coast until we came to the end of the cordillera; I then +anchored at the mouth of a river, and we were soon visited by a great +number of the inhabitants, who informed us, that the country was called +Paria, and that further westward it was more fully peopled. I took four +of these natives, and proceeded on my westward voyage; and when I had +gone eight leagues further, I found on the other side of a point which +I called Punta de la Aguja (Needle Point)[173] one of the most lovely +countries in the world, and very thickly peopled: it was three o’clock +in the morning when I reached it, and seeing its verdure and beauty, I +resolved to anchor there and communicate with the inhabitants. Some of +the natives soon came out to the ship, in canoes, to beg me, in the name +of their king, to go on shore; and when they saw that I paid no attention +to them, they came to the ship in their canoes in countless numbers, many +of them wearing pieces of gold on their breasts, and some with bracelets +of pearls on their arms; on seeing which I was much delighted, and made +many inquiries with the view of learning where they found them. They +informed me, that they were to be procured in their own neighbourhood, +and also northward of that country. I would have remained here, but the +provisions of corn, and wine, and meats, which I had brought out with so +much care for the people whom I had left behind, were nearly wasted, so +that all my anxiety was to get them into a place of safety, and not to +stop for any thing. I wished, however, to get some of the pearls that I +had seen, and with that view sent the boats on shore. The natives are +very numerous, and all handsome in person, and of the same colour as +the Indians we had already seen; they are, moreover, very affable, and +received our men who went on shore most courteously, seeming very well +disposed towards us. These men relate, that when the boats reached the +shore, two of the chiefs, whom they took to be father and son, came +forward in advance of the mass of the people, and conducted them to a +very large house with façades, and not round and tent-shaped as the +other houses were; in this house were many seats, on which they made our +men sit down, they themselves sitting with them. They then caused bread +to be brought, with many kinds of fruits, and various sorts of wine, +both white and red, not made of grapes, but apparently produced from +different fruits. The most reasonable inference is, that they use maize, +which is a plant that bears an ear like that of wheat, some of which I +took with me to Spain, where it now grows abundantly; the best of this +they seemed to regard as most excellent, and set a great value upon +it. The men remained together at one end of the house, and the women at +the other. Great vexation was felt by both parties that they could not +understand each other, for they were mutually anxious to make inquiries +respecting each other’s country. After our men had been entertained +at the house of the elder Indian, the younger took them to his house, +and gave them an equally cordial reception; after which they returned +to their boats and came on board. I weighed anchor forthwith, for I +was hastened by my anxiety to save the provisions which were becoming +spoiled, and which I had procured and preserved with so much care and +trouble, as well as to attend to my own health, which had been affected +by long watching; and although on my former voyage, when I went out to +discover terra firma, I passed thirty-three days without natural rest, +and was all that time without seeing it, yet never were my eyes so much +affected with bleeding or so painful as at this period. These people, as +I have already said, are very graceful in form,—tall, and lithe in their +movements, and wear their hair very long and smooth. They also bind +their heads with handsome worked handkerchiefs, which from a distance +look like silk or gauze; others use the same material in a longer form, +wound round them so as to cover them like trousers, and this is done +by both the men and the women. These people are of a whiter skin than +any I have seen in the Indies. It is the fashion among all classes to +wear something at the breast, and on the arms, and many wear pieces of +gold hanging low on the bosom. Their canoes are larger, lighter, and +of better build than those of the islands which I have hitherto seen, +and in the middle of each they have a cabin or room, which I found was +occupied by the chiefs and their wives. I called this place “Jardines,” +that is “the Gardens,” for it corresponded to that appellation. I made +many inquiries as to where they found the gold, in reply to which, all +of them directed me to an elevated tract of land at no great distance, +on the confines of their country, lying to the westward; but they all +advised me not to go there, for fear of being eaten, and at the time, I +imagined that by their description they wished to imply, that they were +cannibals who dwelt there, but I have since thought it possible, that +they meant merely to express, that the country was filled with beasts +of prey. I also inquired of them where they obtained the pearls, and +in reply to this question likewise, they directed me to the westward, +and also to the north, behind the country they occupied. I did not put +this information to the test, on account of the provisions, and the +weakness of my eyes, and because the large ship that I had with me was +not calculated for such an undertaking. The short time that I spent with +them was all passed in putting questions; and at the hour of vespers +[six P.M.], as I have already said, we returned to the ships, upon which +I weighed anchor and sailed to the westward. I proceeded onwards on the +following day, until I found that we were only in three fathoms water; +at this time I was still under the idea that it was but an island, and +that I should be able to make my exit by the north. With this view I sent +a light caravel in advance of us, to see whether there was any exit, or +whether the passage was closed. The caravel proceeded a great distance, +until it reached a very large gulf, in which there appeared to be four +smaller gulfs, from one of which debouched a large river. They invariably +found ground at five fathoms, and a great quantity of very fresh water, +indeed, I never tasted any equal to it. I was very disappointed when I +found that I could make no exit, either by the north, south, or west, +but that I was enclosed on all three sides by land. I therefore weighed +anchor, and sailed in a backward direction, with the hope of finding a +passage to the north by the strait, which I have already described; but +I could not return along the inhabited part where I had already been, on +account of the currents, which drove me entirely out of my course. But +constantly, at every headland, I found the water sweet and clear, and we +were carried eastwards very powerfully towards the two straits already +mentioned. I then conjectured, that the currents and the overwhelming +mountains of water which rushed into these straits with such an awful +roaring, arose from the contest between the fresh water and the sea. The +fresh water struggled with the salt to oppose its entrance, and the salt +contended against the fresh in its efforts to gain a passage outwards. I +also formed the conjecture, that at one time there was a continuous neck +of land from the island of Trinidad to the land of Gracia, where the +two straits now are, as your Highnesses will see, by the drawing which +accompanies this letter. I passed out by this northern strait, and found +the fresh water come even there; and when, by the force of the wind, I +was enabled to effect a passage, I remarked, while on one of the watery +billows which I have described, that the water on the inner side of the +current was fresh, and on the outside salt. + +When I sailed from Spain to the Indies, I found, that as soon as I had +passed a hundred leagues westward of the Azores, there was a very great +change in the sky and the stars, in the temperature of the air, and in +the water of the sea; and I have been very diligent in observing these +things. I remarked, that from north to south, in traversing these hundred +leagues from the said islands, the needle of the compass, which hitherto +had turned towards the north-east, turned a full quarter of the wind to +the north-west, and this took place from the time when we reached that +line. At the same time an appearance was presented, as if the sea shore +had been transplanted thither, for we found the sea covered all over +with a sort of weed, resembling pine branches, and with fruits like +that of the mastic tree, so thick, that on my first voyage I thought it +was a reef, and that the ships could not avoid running aground; whereas +until I reached this line, I did not meet with a single bough. I also +observed, that at this point the sea was very smooth, and that though the +wind was rough, the ships never rolled. I likewise found, that within +the same line, towards the west, the temperature was always mild, and +that it did not vary summer or winter. While there, I observed that the +north star described a circle five degrees in diameter; that when its +satellites[174] are on the right side, then the star was at its lowest +point, and from this point it continues rising until it reaches the +left side, where it is also at five degrees, and then again it sinks +until it at length returns to the right side. In this voyage I proceeded +immediately from Spain to the island of Madeira, thence to the Canaries, +and then to the Cape Verde islands, and from the Cape Verde islands I +sailed southwards, even below the equinoctial line, as I have already +described. When I reached the parallel of Sierra Leone, in Guinea, I +found the heat so intense, and the rays of the sun so fierce, that I +thought that we should have been burnt; and although it rained and +the sky was heavy with clouds, I still suffered the same oppression, +until our Lord was pleased to grant me a favourable wind, giving me an +opportunity of sailing to the west, so that I reached a latitude where +I experienced, as I have already said, a change in the temperature. +Immediately upon my reaching this line, the temperature became very +mild, and the more I advanced, the more this mildness increased; but I +did not find the positions of the stars correspond with these effects. +I remarked at this place, that when night came on, the polar star was +five degrees high, and then the satellites were over head; afterwards, +at midnight, I found that star elevated ten degrees, and when morning +approached, the satellites were fifteen degrees below. I found the +smoothness of the sea continue, but not so the weeds; as to the polar +star, I watched it with great wonder, and devoted many nights to a +careful examination of it with the quadrant, and I always found that +the lead and line fell to the same point. I look upon this as something +new, and it will probably be admitted, that it is a short distance for +so great a change to take place in the temperature. I have always read, +that the world comprising the land and the water was spherical, and the +recorded experiences of Ptolemy and all others, have proved this by the +eclipses of the moon, and other observations made from east to west, as +well as by the elevation of the pole from north to south. But as I have +already described, I have now seen so much irregularity, that I have +come to another conclusion respecting the earth, namely, that it is not +round as they describe, but of the form of a pear, which is very round +except where the stalk grows, at which part it is most prominent; or +like a round ball, upon one part of which is a prominence like a woman’s +nipple, this protrusion being the highest and nearest the sky, situated +under the equinoctial line, and at the eastern extremity of this sea,—I +call that the eastern extremity, where the land and the islands end. +In confirmation of my opinion, I revert to the arguments which I have +above detailed respecting the line, which passes from north to south, a +hundred leagues westward of the Azores; for in sailing thence westward, +the ships went on rising smoothly towards the sky, and then the weather +was felt to be milder, on account of which mildness, the needle shifted +one point of the compass; the further we went, the more the needle moved +to the north-west, this elevation producing the variation of the circle, +which the north star describes with its satellites; and the nearer I +approached the equinoctial line, the more they rose, and the greater +was the difference in these stars and in their circles. Ptolemy and the +other philosophers, who have written upon the globe, thought that it was +spherical, believing that this hemisphere was round as well as that in +which they themselves dwelt, the centre of which was in the island of +Arin,[175] which is under the equinoctial line between the Arabian Gulf +and the Gulf of Persia; and the circle passes over Cape St. Vincent, +in Portugal, westward, and eastward, by Cangara and the Seras,[176] in +which hemisphere I make no difficulty as to its being a perfect sphere +as they describe; but this western half of the world, I maintain, is +like the half of a very round pear, having a raised projection for +the stalk, as I have already described, or like a woman’s nipple on a +round ball. Ptolemy and the others who have written upon the globe, +had no information respecting this part of the world, which was then +unexplored; they only established their arguments with respect to their +own hemisphere, which, as I have already said, is half of a perfect +sphere. And now that your Highnesses have commissioned me to make this +voyage of discovery, the truths which I have stated are evidently proved, +because in this voyage, when I was off the island of Hargin,[177] and +its vicinity, which is twenty degrees to the north of the equinoctial +line, I found the people are black, and the land very much burnt; and +when after that I went to the Cape Verde islands, I found the people +there much darker still, and the more southward we went, the more they +approach the extreme of blackness; so that when I reached the parallel of +Sierra Leone, where, as night came on, the north star rose five degrees, +the people there were excessively black; and as I sailed westward, the +heat became extreme. But after I had passed the meridian, or line which +I have already described, I found the climate become gradually more +temperate; so that when I reached the island of Trinidad, where the +north star rose five degrees as night came on, there, and in the land +of Gracia, I found the temperature exceedingly mild; the fields and the +foliage likewise were remarkably fresh and green, and as beautiful as +the gardens of Valencia in April. The people there are very graceful in +form, less dark than those whom I had before seen in the Indies, and wear +their hair long and smooth; they are also more shrewd, intelligent, and +courageous. The sun was then in the sign of Virgo, over our heads and +theirs; therefore, all this must proceed from the extreme blandness of +the temperature, which arises, as I have said, from this country being +the most elevated in the world, and the nearest to the sky. On these +grounds, therefore, I affirm, that the globe is not spherical, but that +there is the difference in its form which I have described; the which +is to be found in this hemisphere, at the point where the Indies meet +the ocean, the extremity of the hemisphere being below the equinoctial +line. And a great confirmation of this is, that when our Lord made the +sun, the first light appeared in the first point of the east, where the +most elevated point of the globe is; and although it was the opinion of +Aristotle, that the antarctic pole, or the land under it, was the highest +part of the world, and the nearest to the heavens, other philosophers +oppose him, and say, that the highest part was below the arctic pole, by +which reasoning it appears, that they understood, that one part of the +world must be loftier, and nearer the sky, than the other; but it never +struck them that it might be under the equinoctial, in the way that I +have said, which is not to be wondered at, because they had no certain +knowledge respecting this hemisphere, but merely vague suppositions, for +no one has ever gone or been sent to investigate the matter, until now +that your Highnesses have sent me to explore both the sea and the land. +I found that between the two straits, which, as I have said, face each +other in a line from north to south, is a distance of twenty-six leagues; +and there can be no mistake in this calculation, because it was made +with the quadrant. I also find, that from these two straits on the west +up to the above-mentioned gulf, to which I gave the name of the Gulf of +Pearls,[178] there are sixty-eight leagues of four miles to the league, +which is the reckoning we are accustomed to make at sea; from this gulf +the water runs constantly with great impetuosity towards the east, and +this is the cause why, in these two straits, there is so fierce a turmoil +from the fresh water encountering the water of the sea. In the southern +strait, which I named the Serpent’s Mouth, I found that towards evening +the polar star was nearly at five degrees elevation; and in the northern, +which I called the Dragon’s Mouth, it was at an elevation of nearly seven +degrees. The before-mentioned Gulf of Pearls is to the west of the [179] +of Ptolemy, nearly three thousand nine hundred miles, which make nearly +seventy equinoctial degrees, reckoning fifty-six miles and two-thirds +to a degree. The Holy Scriptures record, that our Lord made the earthly +paradise, and planted in it the tree of life, and thence springs a +fountain from which the four principal rivers in the world take their +source; namely, the Ganges in India, the Tigris, and Euphrates in [180] +which rivers divide a chain of mountains, and forming Mesopotamia, flow +thence into Persia,—and the Nile, which rises in Ethiopia, and falls into +the sea at Alexandria. + +I do not find, nor have ever found, any account by the Romans or Greeks, +which fixes in a positive manner the site of the terrestrial paradise, +neither have I seen it given in any mappe-monde, laid down from authentic +sources. Some placed it in Ethiopia, at the sources of the Nile, but +others, traversing all these countries, found neither the temperature +nor the altitude of the sun correspond with their ideas respecting it; +nor did it appear that the overwhelming waters of the deluge had been +there. Some pagans pretended to adduce arguments to establish that it was +in the Fortunate Islands, now called the Canaries, etc. + +St. Isidore, Bede, Strabo,[181] and the Master of scholastic +history,[182] with St. Ambrose, and Scotus, and all the learned +theologians, agree that the earthly paradise is in the east, etc. + +I have already described my ideas concerning this hemisphere and its +form, and I have no doubt, that if I could pass below the equinoctial +line, after reaching the highest point of which I have spoken, I should +find a much milder temperature, and a variation in the stars and in the +water; not that I suppose that elevated point to be navigable, nor even +that there is water there; indeed, I believe it is impossible to ascend +thither, because I am convinced that it is the spot of the earthly +paradise, whither no one can go but by God’s permission; but this land +which your Highnesses have now sent me to explore, is very extensive, +and I think there are many other countries in the south, of which the +world has never had any knowledge. + +I do not suppose that the earthly paradise is in the form of a rugged +mountain, as the descriptions of it have made it appear, but that it is +on the summit of the spot, which I have described as being in the form +of the stalk of a pear; the approach to it from a distance must be by a +constant and gradual ascent; but I believe that, as I have already said, +no one could ever reach the top; I think also, that the water I have +described may proceed from it, though it be far off, and that stopping +at the place which I have just left, it forms this lake. There are +great indications of this being the terrestrial paradise, for its site +coincides with the opinion of the holy and wise theologians whom I have +mentioned; and moreover, the other evidences agree with the supposition, +for I have never either read or heard of fresh water coming in so large +a quantity, in close conjunction with the water of the sea; the idea is +also corroborated by the blandness of the temperature; and if the water +of which I speak, does not proceed from the earthly paradise, it seems to +be a still greater wonder, for I do not believe that there is any river +in the world so large or so deep. + +When I left the Dragon’s Mouth, which is the northernmost of the two +straits which I have described, and which I so named on the day of +our Lady of August,[183] I found that the sea ran so strongly to the +westward, that between the hour of mass,[184] when I weighed anchor, and +the hour of complines,[185] I made sixty-five leagues of four miles each; +and not only was the wind not violent, but on the contrary very gentle, +which confirmed me in the conclusion, that in sailing southward, there is +a continuous ascent, while there is a corresponding descent towards the +north. + +I hold it for certain, that the waters of the sea move from east to west +with the sky, and that in passing this track, they hold a more rapid +course, and have thus eaten away large tracts of land, and hence has +resulted this great number of islands; indeed, these islands themselves +afford an additional proof of it, for on the one hand all those which lie +west and east, or a little more obliquely north-west and south-east, +are broad; while those which lie north and south, or north-east and +south-west, that is, in a directly contrary direction to the said winds, +are narrow; furthermore, that these islands should possess the most +costly productions, is to be accounted for by the mild temperature, which +comes to them from heaven, since these are the most elevated parts of +the world. It is true, that in some parts, the waters do not appear to +take this course, but this only occurs in certain spots, where they are +obstructed by land, and hence they appear to take different directions. + +Pliny writes that the sea and land together form a sphere, but that the +ocean forms the greatest mass, and lies uppermost, while the earth is +below and supports the ocean, and that the two afford a mutual support to +each other, as the kernel of a nut is confined by its shell. The Master +of scholastic history, in commenting upon Genesis, says, that the waters +are not very extensive; and that although when they were first created +they covered the earth, they were yet vaporous like a cloud, and that +afterwards they became condensed, and occupied but small space, and in +this notion Nicolas de Lira agrees. Aristotle says that the world is +small, and the water very limited in extent, and that it is easy to pass +from Spain to the Indies; and this is confirmed by Avenruyz,[186] and +by the Cardinal Pedro de Aliaco, who, in supporting this opinion, shows +that it agrees with that of Seneca, and says that Aristotle had been +enabled to gain information respecting the world by means of Alexander +the Great, and Seneca by means of the Emperor Nero, and Pliny through the +Romans; all of them having expended large sums of money, and employed +a vast number of people, in diligent inquiry concerning the secrets of +the world, and in spreading abroad the knowledge thus obtained. The said +cardinal allows to these writers greater authority than to Ptolemy, and +other Greeks and Arabs; and in confirmation of their opinion concerning +the small quantity of water on the surface of the globe, and the limited +amount of land covered by that water, in comparison of what had been +related on the authority of Ptolemy and his disciples, he finds a +passage in the third book of Esdras, where that sacred writer says, that +of seven parts of the world six are discovered, and the other is covered +with water. The authority of the third and fourth books of Esdras is +also confirmed by holy persons, such as St. Augustin, and St. Ambrose +in his _Exameron_, where he says,—“Here my son Jesus shall first come, +and here my son Christ shall die!” These holy men say that Esdras was a +prophet as well as Zacharias, the father of St. John, and _El Braso_[187] +Simon; authorities which are also quoted by Francis de Mairones.[188] +With respect to the dryness of the land, experience has shown that it is +greater than is commonly believed; and this is no wonder, for the further +one goes the more one learns. + +I now return to my subject of the land of Gracia, and of the river and +lake found there, which latter might more properly be called a sea; for +a lake is but a small expanse of water, which, when it becomes great, +deserves the name of a sea, just as we speak of the Sea of Galilee and +the Dead Sea; and I think that if the river mentioned does not proceed +from the terrestrial paradise, it comes from an immense tract of land +situated in the south, of which no knowledge has been hitherto obtained. +But the more I reason on the subject, the more satisfied I become that +the terrestrial paradise is situated in the spot I have described; and I +ground my opinion upon the arguments and authorities already quoted. May +it please the Lord to grant your Highnesses a long life, and health and +peace to follow out so noble an investigation; in which I think our Lord +will receive great service, Spain considerable increase of its greatness, +and all Christians much consolation and pleasure, because by this means +the name of our Lord will be published abroad. + +In all the countries visited by your Highnesses’ ships, I have caused +a high cross to be fixed upon every headland, and have proclaimed, to +every nation that I have discovered, the lofty estate of your Highnesses, +and of your court in Spain. I also tell them all I can respecting our +holy faith and of the belief in the holy mother Church, which has its +members in all the world; and I speak to them also of the courtesy and +nobleness of all Christians, and of the faith they have in the Holy +Trinity. May it please the Lord to forgive those who have calumniated +and still calumniate this excellent enterprise, and oppose and have +opposed its advancement, without considering how much glory and greatness +will accrue from it to your Highnesses throughout all the world. They +cannot state anything in disparagement of it, except its expense, and +that I have not immediately sent back the ships loaded with gold. They +speak this without considering the shortness of the time, and how many +difficulties there are to contend with; and that every year there are +individuals who singly earn by their deserts out of your Majesties’ own +household, more revenue than would cover the whole of this expense. Nor +do they take into consideration that the princes of Spain have never +gained possession of any land out of their own country, until now that +your Highnesses have become the masters of another world, where our holy +faith may become so much increased, and whence such stores of wealth may +be derived; for although we have not sent home ships laden with gold, +we have, nevertheless, sent satisfactory samples, both of gold and of +other valuable commodities, by which it may be judged that in a short +time large profit may be derived. Neither do they take into consideration +the noble spirit of the princes of Portugal, who so long ago carried into +execution the exploration of Guinea, and still follow it up along the +coast of Africa, in which one-half of the population of the country has +been employed, and yet the King is more determined on the enterprise than +ever. The Lord grant all that I have said, and lead them to think deeply +upon what I have written; which is not the thousandth part of what might +be written of the deeds of princes who have set their minds upon gaining +knowledge, and upon obtaining territory and keeping it. + +I say all this, not because I doubt the inclination of your Highnesses +to pursue the enterprise while you live,—for I rely confidently on the +answers your Highnesses once gave me by word of mouth,—nor because I +have seen any change in your Highnesses, but from the fear of what I +have heard from those of whom I have been speaking; for I know that +water dropping on a stone will at length make a hole. Your Highnesses +responded to me with that nobleness of feeling which all the world knows +you to possess, and told me to pay no attention to these calumniations; +for that your intention was to follow up and support the undertaking, +even if nothing were gained by it but stones and sand. Your Highnesses +also desired me to be in no way anxious about the expense, for that much +greater cost had been incurred on much more trifling matters, and that +you considered all the past and future expense as well laid out; for that +your Highnesses believed that our holy faith would be increased, and your +royal dignity enhanced, and that they were no friends of the royal estate +who spoke ill of the enterprise. + +And now, during the despatch of the information respecting these lands +which I have recently discovered, and where I believe in my soul that +the earthly paradise is situated, the “Adelantado” will proceed with +three ships, well stocked with provisions, on a further investigation, +and will make all the discoveries he can about these parts. Meanwhile, +I shall send your Highnesses this letter, accompanied by a map of the +country, and your Majesties will determine on what is to be done, and +give your orders as to how it is your pleasure that I should proceed: the +which, by the aid of the Holy Trinity, shall be carried into execution +with all possible diligence, in the faithful service and to the entire +satisfaction of your Majesties. Thanks be to God. + + +TERCER VIAGE DE COLON. + +_La historia del viage quel Almirante D. Cristobal Colon hizo la tercera +vez que vino á las Indias cuando descubrió la tierra firme, como lo envió +á los Reyes desde la Isla Española._ + +Serenísimos é muy altos é muy poderosos Príncipes Rey é Reina nuestros +Señores: La Santa Trinidad movió á vuestras Altezas á esta empresa de las +Indias, y por su infinita bondad hizo á mí mensagero dello, al cual vine +con el embajada á su Real conspetu, movido como á los mas altos Príncipes +de cristianos y que tanto se ejercisaban en la fé y acrecentamiento +della; las personas que entendieron en ello lo tuvieron por imposible, +y el caudal hacian sobre bienes de fortuna, y allí echaron el clavo. +Puse en esto seis ó siete años de grave pena, amostrando lo mejor que +yo sabia cuanto servicio se podia hacer á nuestro Señor en esto en +divulgar su santo nombre y Fé á tantos pueblos; lo cual todo era cosa +de tanta excelencia y buena fama y gran memoria para grandes Príncipes: +fue tambien necesario de hablar del temporal adonde se les amostró el +escrebir de tantos sabios dignos de fé, los cuales escribieron historias. +Los cuales contaban que en estas partes habia muchas riquezas, y asimismo +fue necesario traer á esto el decir é epinion de aquellos que escribieron +é situaron el mundo: en fin vuestras Altezas determinaron questo se +pusiese en obra. Aquí mostraron el grande corazon que siempre ficieron +en toda cosa grande, porque todos los que habian entendido en ello y +oido esta platica todos á una mano lo tenian á burla, salvo dos frailes +que siempre fueron constantes. Yo, bien que llevase fatiga, estaba bien +seguro que esto no vernia á menos, y estoy de contino, porque es verdad +que todo pasará, y no la palabra de Dios, y se complirá todo lo que dijó; +el cual tan claro habló de estas tierras por la boca de Isaías en tantos +lugares de su Escriptura, afirmando que de España les seria divulgado su +santo nombre. E partí en nombre de la Santa Trinidad, y volví muy presto +con la experiencia de todo cuanto yo habia dicho en la mano: tornáronme á +enviar vuestras Altezas, y en poco espacio digo, no de [155] le descubri +por virtud divinal trescientas y treinta y tres leguas de la tierra +firme, fin de Oriente, y setcentas [_sic_] islas de nombre, allende de +lo descubierto en el primero víage, y le allané la Isla Española que +boja mas que España, en que la gente della es sin cuento, y que todos +le pagasen tributo. Nació allí mal decir y menosprecio de la empresa +comenzada en ello, porque no habia yo enviado luego los navíos cargados +de oro, sin considerar le brevedad del tiempo, y lo otro que yo dije +de tantos inconvenientes; y en esto por mis pecados ó por mi salvacion +creo que será, fue puesto en aborrecimiento y dado impedimento á cuanto +yo decia y demandaba; por lo cual acordé de venir á vuestras Altezas, +y maravillarme de todo, y mostrarles la razon que en todo habia, y les +dige de los pneblos que yo habia visto, en qué ó de qué se podrian +salvar muchas animas, y les truje las obligaciones de la gente de la +Isla Española, de como se obligaban á pagar tributo é les tenian por sos +Reyes y Señores, y les truje abastante muestra de oro, y que hay mineros +y granos muy grandes, y asimismo de cobre; y les truje de muchas maneras +de especerias, de que seria largo de escrebir, y les dije de la gran +cantidad de brasil, y otras infinitas cosas. Todo no aprovechó para con +algunas personas que tenian gana y dado comienzo á mal decir del negocio, +ni entrar con fabla del servicio de nuestro Señor con se salvar tantas +animas, ni á decir questo era grandeza de vuestras Altezas, de la mejor +calidad que hasta hoy haya usado Príncipe, por quel ejercicio é gasto +era para el espiritual y temporal, y que no podia ser que andando el +tiempo no hobiese la España de aquí grandes provechos, pues que se veian +las señales que escribieron de lo de estas partidas tan manifiestas; +que tambien se llegaria á ver todo el otro complimiento, ni á decir +cosas que usaron grandes Principes en el mundo para crecer su fama, así +como de Salomon que envió desde Hierusalem en fin de Oriente á ver el +monte Sopora, en que se detovieron los navíos tres años, el cual tienen +vuestras Altezas agora en la Isla Española; ni de Alejandre, que envió á +ver el regimiento de la Isla de Trapobana en India, y Nero Cesar á ver +las fuentes del Nilo, y la razon porque crecian en el verano, cuando las +aguas son pocas, y otras muchas grandezas que hicieron Príncipes, y que +á Príncipes son estas cosas dadas de hacer; ni valia decir que yo nunca +habia leido que Príncipes de Castilla jamas hobiesen ganado tierra fuera +della, y que esta de acáes otro mundo en que se trabajaron Romanos y +Alejandre y Griegos, para la haber con grandes ejercicios, ni decir del +presente de los Reyes de Portugal, que tovieron corazon para sostener á +Guinea, y del descobrir della, y que gastaron oro y gente á tanta, que +quien contase toda la del Reino se hallaria que otra tanta como la mitad +son muertos en Guinea, y todavia la continuaron hasta que les salió +dello lo que parece, lo cual todo comenzaron de largo tiempo, y hay muy +poco que les da renta; los cuales tambien osaron conquistar en Africa, y +sostener la empresa á Cepta, Tanjar y Arcilla, é Alcazar, y de contino +dar guerra á los moros, y todo esto con grande gasto, solo por hacer cosa +de Príncipe servir á Dios y acrecentar su Señorío. + +Cuanto yo mas decia tanto mas se doblaba á poner esto á vituperio, +amostrando en ello aborrecimiento, sin considerar cuánto bien parecio en +todo el mundo, y cuánto bien se dijo en todos los cristianos de vuestras +Altezas por haber tomado esta empresa, que no hobo grande ni pequeño +que no quisiese dello carta. Respondiéronme vuestras Altezas riéndose y +diciendo que yo no curase de nada porque no daban autoridad ni creencia á +quien les mal decia de esta empresa. + +Partí en nombre de la Santísima Trinidad, Miercoles 30 de Mayo de la +villa de S. Lúcar, bien fatigado de mi viage, que adonde esperaba +descanso, cuando yo partí de estas Indias, se me dobló la pena, y navegué +á la Isla de la Madera por camino no acostumbrado, por evitar escándalo +que pudiera tener con un armada de Francia, que me aguardaba al Cabo de +S. Vicente, y de allí á las Islas de Canaria, de adonde me partí con +una nao y dos carabelas, y envié los otros navíos á derecho camino á +las Indias á la Isla Española, y yo navegué al Austro con propósito de +llegar á la línea equinocial, y de allí seguir al Poniente hasta que la +Isla Española me quedase al Septentrion, y llegado á las Islas de Cabo +Verde, falso nombre, porque son atan secas que no ví cosa verde en ellas, +y toda la gente enferma, que no osé detenerme en ellas, y navegué al +Sudueste cuatrocientas y ochenta millas, que son ciento y veinte leguas, +adonde en anocheciendo tenia la estrella del norte en cinco grados; allí +me desamparó el viento y entré en tanto ardor y tan grande que creí +que se me quemasen los navíos y gente, que todo de un golpe vino á tan +desordenado, que no habia persona que osase descender debajo de cubierta +á remediar la vasija y mantenimientos; duró este ardor ocho dias; al +primer dia fue claro, y los siete dias siguientes llovió é hizo ñumblado, +y con todo no fallamos remedio, que cierto si así fuera de sol como el +primero, yo creo que no pudiera escapar en ninguna manera. + +Acórdome que navegando á las Indias siempre que yo paso al Poniente de +las Islas de los Azores cien leguas, allí fallo mudar la temperanza, +y esto es todo de Septentrion en Austro, y determiné que si á nuestro +Señor le pluguiese de me dar viento y buen tiempo que pudiese salir de +adonde estaba, de dejar de ir mas al Austro, ni volver tampoco atrás, +salvo de navegar al Poniente, á tanto que ya llegase á estar con esta +raya con esperanza que yo fallaria allí así temperamiento, como habia +fallado cuando yo navegaba en el paralelo de Canaria. E que si así fuese +que entonces yo podria ir mas al Austro, y plugó á nuestro Señor que al +cabo de estos ocho dias de me dar buen viento Levante, y yo seguí al +Poniente, mas no osé declinar abajo al Austro porque fallé grandísimo +mudamiento en el cielo y en las estrellas, mas non fallé mudamiento en la +temperancia; así acordé de proseguir delante siempre justo al Poniente, +en aquel derecho de la Sierra Lioa, con propósito de non mudar derrota +fasta adonde yo habia pensado que fallaria tierra, y allí adobar los +navíos, y remediar si pudiese los mantenimientos y tomar agua que no +tenia; y al cabo de diez y siete dias, los cuales nuestro Señor me dió de +próspero viento, Martes 31 de Julio á medio dia nos amostró tierra é yo +la esperaba el Lunes antes, y tuve aquel camino fasta entonces, que en +saliendo el sol, por defecto del agua que no tenia, determiné de andar á +las Islas de los Caribales, y tomé esa vuelta; y como su alta Magestad +haya siempre usado de misericordia conmigo, por acertamiento subió un +marinero á la gavia, y vido al Poniente tres moñtanas juntas: dijimos +la Salve Regina y otras prosas, y dimos todos muchas gracias á nuestro +Señor, y despues dejé el camino de Septentrion, y volví hácia la tierra, +adonde yo llegué á hora de completas á un Cabo á que dije de la Galea +despues de haber nombrado á la Isla de la Trinidad, y allí hobiera muy +buen puerto si fuera fondo, y habia casas y gente, y muy lindas tierras, +atan fermosas y verdes come las huertas de Valencia en Marzo. Pesóme +cuando no pude entrar en el puerto, y corri la costa de esta tierra del +luengo fasta el poniente, y andadas cinco leguas fallé muy buen fondo y +surgí, y en el otro dia dí la vela á este camino buscando puerto para +adobar los navíos y tomar agua, y remediar el trigo y los bastimentos que +llevaba solamente. Allí tomé una pipa de agua, y con ella anduve ansi +hasta llegar al cabo, y allí fallé abrigo de Levante y buen fondo, y así +mandé surgir y adobar la vasija y tomar agua y leña, y descendir la gente +á descansar de tanto tiempo que andaban penando. + +A esta punta llamé del Arenal, y allí se falló toda la tierra follada +de unas animalías que tenian la pata como de cabra, y bien que segun +parece ser allí haya muchas, no se vido sino una muerta. El dia siguiente +vino de hácia oriente una grande canoa con veinte y cuatro hombres, +todos mancebos é muy ataviados de armas, arcos y flechas y tablachinas, +y ellos, como dije, todos, mancebos, de buena disposicion y no negros, +salvo mas blancos que otros que haya visto en las Indias, y de muy lindo +gesto, y fermosos cuerpos, y los cabellos largos y llanos, cortados á +la guisa Castilla, y traian la cabeza atada con un pañuelo de algodon +tejido á labores y colores, el cual creia yo que era almaizar. Otro de +estos pañuelos traían ceñido é se cobijaban con él en lugar de pañetes. +Cuando llegó esta canoa habló de muy lejos, é yo ni otro ninguno no los +entendiamos, salvo que yo les mandaba hacer señas que se allegasen, y +en esto se pasó mas de dos horas, y si se llegaban un poco luego se +desviaban. Yo les hacia mostrar bacines y otras cosas que lucian por +enamorarlos porque viniesen, y á cabo de buen rato se allegaron mas que +hasta entonces no habian, y yo deseaba mucho haber lengua, y no tenia +ya cosa que me pareciese que era de mostrarles para que viniesen; salvo +que hice sobir un tamborin en el castillo de popa que tañesen, é unos +mancebos que danzasen, creyendo que se allegarian á ver la fiesta; +y luego que vieron tañer y danzar todos dejaron los remos y echaron +mano á los arcos y los encordaron, y embrazo cada uno su tablachina, y +comenzaron á tirarnos flechas: cesó luego el tañer y danzar, y mandé +luego sacar unas ballestas, y ellos dejáronme y fueren á mas andar á otra +carabela y de golpe se fueron debajo la popa della, y el piloto entró con +ellos, y dió un sayo é un bonete á un hombre principal que le pareció +dellos, y quedó concertado que le iria hablar allí en la playa, adonde +ellos luego fueron con la canoa esperándole, y él como no quiso ir sin mi +licencia, como ellos le vieron venir á la nao con la barca, tornaron á +entrar en la canoa é se fueron, é nunca mas los vide ni á otros de esta +isla. + +Cuando yo llegué á esta punta del Arenal, allí se hace una boca grande de +dos leguas de Poniente á Levante, la Isla de la Trinidad con la tierra de +Gracia y que para haber de entrar dentro para pasar al Septentrion habia +unos hileros de corrientes que atravesaban aquella boca y traían un rugir +muy grande, y creí yo que sería un arrecife de bajos é peñas, por el cual +no se ponria entrar dentro en ella, y detras de este hilero habia otro y +otro que todos traian un rugir grande como ola de la mar que va á romper +y dar en peñas. Surgí allí á la dicha punta del Arenal, fuera de la dicha +boca, y fallé que venia el agua del Oriente fasta el Poniente con tanta +furia como hace Guadalquivir en tiempo de avenida, y esto de contino +noche y dia, que creí quo no podria volver atrás por la corriente, ni ir +adelante por los bajos; y en la noche ya muy tarde, estando al bordo de +la nao, oí un rugir muy terrible que venia de la parte del Austro hácia +la nao, y me paré á mirar, y ví levantando la mar de Poniente á Levante, +en manera de una loma tan alta como la nao, y todavia venia hácia mi poco +á poco, y encima della venia un filero de corriente que venia rugiendo +con muy grande estrépito con aquella furia de aquel rugir que de los +otros hileros que yo dije que me parecian ondas de mar que daban en +peñas, que hoy en dia tengo el miedo en el cuerpo que no me trabucasen la +nao cuando llegasen debajo della, y passó y llegó fasta la boca adonde +allí se detuvo grande espacio. Y el otro dia siguiente envié las barcas á +sondar y fallé en el mas bajo de la boca, que habia seis ó siete brazas +de fondo, y de contino andaban aquellos hileros unos por entrar y otros +por salir, y plugo á nuestro Señor de me dar buen viento, y atravesé por +esa boca adentro, y luego hallé tranquilidad, y por acertamiento se sacó +del agua de la mar y la hallé dulce. Navegué al Septentrion fasta una +sierra muy alta, adonde serian veinte y seis leguas de esta punta del +Arenal, y allí habia dos cabos de tierra muy alta, el uno de la parte del +Oriente, y era de la misma Isla de la Trinidad, y el otro del Occidente +de la tierra que dije de Gracia, y allí hacia una boca muy angosta mas +que aquella de la punta del Arenal, y allí habia los mismos hileros y +aquel rugir fuerte del agua como era en la punta del Arenal, y asimismo +allí la mar era agua dulce; y fasta entonces yo no habia habido lengua +con ninguna gente de estas tierras, y lo deseaba en gran manera, y por +esto navegué al luengo de la costa de esta tierra hácia el Poniente, y +cuanto mas andaba hallaba el agua de la mar mas dulce y mas sabrosa, y +andando una gran parte llegué á un lugar donde me parecian las tierras +labradas y surgí y envié las barcas á tierra, y fallaron que de fresco +se habia ido de allí gente, y fallaron todo el monte cubierto de gatos +paules: volviéronse, y como esta fuese sierra me pareció que mas allá +al Poniente las tierras eran mas llanas, y que allí seria poblado, y +por esto seria poblado, y mandé levantar las anclas y corrí esta costa +fasta el cabo de esta sierra, y allí á un rio surgi, y luego vino mucha +gente, y me dijeron como llamaron á esta tierra Paria y que de allí mas +al Poniente era mas poblada; tomé dellos cuatro, y despues navegué al +Poniente, y andadas ocho leguas mas al Poniente allende una punta á que +yo llamé del Aguja: hallé unas tierras las mas hermosas del mundo, y +muy pobladas: llegué allí una mañana á hora de tercia, y por ver esta +verdura y esta hermosura acordé surgir y ver esta gente, de los cuales +luego vinieron en canoas á la nao á rogarme, de partes de su Rey, que +descendiese en tierra; é cuando vieron que no curé dellos vinieron á la +nao infinitísimos en canoas, y muchos traían piezas de oro al pescuezo, y +algunos atados á los brazos algunas perlas: holgué mucho cuando las ví é +procuré mucho de saber donde las hallaban, y me dijeron que allí, y de la +parte del Norte de aquella tierra. + +Quisiera detenerme, mas estos bastimentos, que yo traía, trigo y vino é +carne para esta gente que acá esta se me acababan de perder, los cuales +hobe allá con tanta fatiga, y por esto yo no buscaba sino á mas andar á +venir á poner en ellos cobro, y no me detener para cosa alguna: procuré +de haber de aquellas perlas, y envié las barcas á tierra: esta gente es +muy mucha, y toda de muy buen parecer, de la misma color que los otros de +antes, y muy tratables: la gente nuestra que fue á tierra los hallaron +tan convenibles, y los recibieron muy honradamente: dicen que luego que +llegaron las barcas á tierra que vinieron dos personas principales cón +todo el pueblo, creen que el uno el padre y el otro era su hijo, y los +llevaron á una casa muy grande hecha á dos aguas, y no redonda, como +tienda de campo, como son estas otras, y allí tenian muchas sillas á +donde los ficieron asentar, y otras donde ellos se asentaron; y hicieron +traer pan, y de muchas maneras frutas é vino de muchas maneras blanco +é tinto, mas no de uvas: debe él de ser de diversas maneras uno de una +fruta y otro de otra; y asimismo debe de ser dello de maiz, que es una +simiente que hace una espiga como una mazorca de que llevé yo allá, y hay +ya mucho en Castilla, y parece que aquel que lo tenia mejor lo traía por +mayor excelencia, y lo daba en gran precio: los hombres todos estaban +juntos á un cabo de la casa, y las mugeres en otro. Recibieron ambas +las partes gran pena porque no se entendian, ellos para preguntar á los +otros de nuestra patria, y los nuestros por saber de la suya. E despues +que hobieron rescebido colacion allí en casa del mas viejo, los llevó el +mozo á la suya, e fizo otro tanto, é despues se pusieron en las barcas +é se vinieron á la nao, é yo luego levanté las anclas porque andaba +mucho de priesa por remediar los mantenimientos que se me perdian que yo +habia habido con tanta fatiga, y tambien por remediarme á mí que habia +adolescido por el desvelar de los ojos, que bien quel viage que yo fuí +á descubrir la tierra firme estuviese teinta y tres dias sin concebir +sueño, y estoviese tanto tiempo sin vista, non se me deñaron los ojos, ni +se me rompieron de sangre y con tantos dolores como agora. + +Esta gente, como ya dije, son todos de muy linda estatura, altos de +cuerpos, é de muy lindos gestos, los cabellos muy largos é llanos, y +traen las cabezas atadas con unos pañuelos labrados, como ya dije, +hermosos, que parecen de lejos de seda y almaizares: otro traen ceñido +mas largo que se cobijan con él en lugar de pañetes, ansi hombres como +mugeres. La color de esta gente es mas blanca que otra que haya visto en +las Indias; todos traían al pescuezo y á los brazos algo á la guisa de +estas tierras, y muchos traían piezas de oro bajo colgado al pescuezo. +Las canoas de ellos son muy grandes y de mejor hechura que no son estas +otras, y mas livianas, y en el medio de cada una tienen un apartamiento +como cámara en que ví que andaban los principales con sus mugeres. Llamé +allí á este lugar Jardines, porque así conforman por el nombre. Procuré +mucho de saber donde cogian aquel oro, y todos me aseñalaban una tierra +frontera dellos al Poniente, que era muy alta, mas no lejos; mas todos +me decian que no fuese allá porque allí comian los hombres, y entendí +entonces que decian que eran hombres caribales, é que serian como los +otros, y despues he pensado que podria ser que lo decian porque allí +habria animalias. Tambien les pregunté adonde cogian las perlas, y me +señalaron tambien que al Poniente, y al Norte detrás de esta tierra donde +estaban. Dejélo de probar por esto de los mantenimientos, y del mal de +mis ojos, y por una nao grande que traigo que no es para semejante hecho. + +Y como el tiempo fue breve se pasó todo en preguntas, y se volvieron á +los navíos, que seria hora de visperas, como ya dije, y luego levanté las +anclas y navegué al Poniente; y asimesmo el dia siguiente fasta que me +fallé que no habia si non tres brazas de fondo, con creencia que todavía +esta seria isla, y que yo podria salir al Norte; y así visto envié una +carabela sotil adelante á ver si habia salida ó si estaba cerrado, y ansi +anduvo mucho camino fasta un golfo muy grande en el cual parecia que +habia otros cuatro medianos, y del uno salia un rio grandísimo: fallaron +siempre cinco brazas de fondo y el agua muy dulce, en tanta cantidad que +yo jamas bebíla pareja della. Fuí yo muy descontento della cuando ví +que no podia salir al Norte ni podia andar ya al Austro ni al Poniente +porque yo estaba cercado por todas partes de la tierra, y así levanté +las anclas, y torne atrás para salir al Norte por la boca que yo arriba +dije, y no pude volver por la poblacion adonde yo habia estado, por causa +de las corrientes que me habian desviado della, y siempre en todo cabo +hallaba el agua dulce y clara, y que me llevaba al Oriente muy recio +fácia las dos bocas que arriba dije, y entonces conjeturé que los hilos +de la corriente, y aquellas lomas que salian y entraban en estas bocas +con aquel rugir tan fuerte que era pelea del agua dulce con la salada. La +dulce empujaba á la otra porque no entrase, y la salada porque la otra no +saliese; y conjeturé que allí donde son estas dos bocas que algun tiempo +seria tierra continua á la Isla de la Trinidad con la tierra de Gracia, +como podrán ver vuestras Altezas por la pintura de lo que con esta les +envio. Salí yo por esta boca del Norte y hallé quel agua dulce siempre +vencia, y cuando pasé, que fue con fuerza de viento, estando en una de +aquellas lomas, hallé en aquellos hilos de la parte de dentro el agua +dulce, y de fuera salada. + +Cuando yo navegué de España á las Indias fallo luego en pasando cien +leguas á Poniente de los Azores grandísimo mudamiento en el cielo é en +las estrellas, y en la temperancia del aire, y en las aguas de la mar, y +en esto he tenido mucha diligencia en la experiencia. + +Fallo que de Septentrion en Austro, pasando las dichas cien leguas de +las dichas islas, que luego en las agujas de marear, que fasta entonces +nordesteaban, noruestean una cuarta de viento todo entero, y esto es en +allegando allí á aquella línea, como quien traspone una cuesta, asimesmo +fallo la mar toda llena de yerba de una calidad que parece ramitos de +pino y muy cargada de fruta como de lantisco, y es tan espesa que al +primer viage pensé que era bajo, y que daria en seco con los navíos, y +hasta llegar con esta raya no se falla un solo ramito: fallo tambien en +llegando allí la mar muy suave y llana, y bien que vente recio nunca +se levanta. Asimismo hallo dentro de la dicha raya hácia Poniente la +temperancia del cielo muy suave, y no discrepa de la cantidad quier sea +invierno, quier sea en verano. Cuando allí estoy hallo que la estrella +del Norte escribe un círculo el cualo tiene en el diámetro cinco grados, +y estando las guardas en el brazo derecho estonces está la estrella en el +mas bajo, y se vá alzando fasta que llega al brazo izquierdo, y estonces +está cinco grados, y de allí se vá abajando fasta llegar á volver otra +vez al brazo derecho. + +Yo allegué agora de España á la Isla de la Madera, y de allí á Canaria, y +dende á las Islas de Cabo Verde, de adonde cometí el viage para navegar +al Austro fasta debajo la linea equinocial, como ya dije: allegado á +estar en derecho con el paralelo que pasa por la Sierra Leoa en Guinea, +fallo tan grande ardor, y los rayos del sol tan calientes que pensaba +de quemar, y bien que lloviese y el cielo fuese muy turbado siempre yo +estaba en esta fatiga, fasta que nuestro Señor proveyó de buen viento y +á mi puso en voluntad que yo navegase al Occidente con este esfuerzo, +que en llegando á la raya de que yo dije que allí fallaria mudamiento +en la temperancia. Despues que yo emparejé á estar en derecho de esta +raya luego fallé la temperancia del cielo muy suave, y cuanto mas andaba +adelante mas multiplicaba; mas no hallé conforme á esto las estrellas. + +Fallé allí que en anocheciendo tenia yo la estrella del Norte alta cinco +grados, y estonces las guardas estaban encima de la cabeza, y despues á +la media noche fallaba la estrella alta diez grados, y en amaneciendo que +las guardas estaban en los pies quince. + +La suavelidad de la mar fallé conforme, mas no en la yerba: en esto de la +estrella del Norte tomé grande admiracion, y por esto muchas noches con +mucha diligencia tornaba yo á repricar la vista della con el cuadrante, y +siempre fallé que caía el plomo y hilo á un punto. + +Por cosa nueva tengo yo esto, y podrá ser que será tenida que en poco +espacio haga tanta diferencia el cielo. + +Yo siempre lei que el mundo, tierra é agua era esférico é las autoridades +y esperiencias que Tolomeo y todos los otros escribieron de este +sitio, daban é amostraban para ello así por eclipses de la luna y +otras demostraciones que hacen de Oriente fasta Occidente, como de la +elevacion del polo de Septentrion en Austro. Agora ví tanta disformidad, +como ya dije, y por esto me puse á tener esto del mundo, y fallé que no +era redondo en la forma que escriben; salvo que es de la forma de una +pera que sea toda muy redonda, salvo allí donde tiene el pezon que allí +tiene mas alto, ó como quien tiene una pelota muy redonda, y en un lugar +della fuese como una teta de muger allí puesta, y que esta parte deste +pezon sea la mas alta é mas propincua al cielo, y sea debajo la línea +equinocial, y en esta mar Océana en fin del Oriente: llamo yo fin de +Oriente, adonde acaba toda la tierra é islas, é para esto allego todas +las razones sobre-escriptas de la raya que pasa al Occidente delas islas +de los Azores cien leguas de Septentrion en Austro, que en pasando de +allí al Poniente ya van los navíos alzándose hácia el cielo suavemente, y +entonces se goza de mas suave temperancia y se muda el aguja del marear +por causa de la suavidad desa cuarta de viento, y cuanto mas va adelante +é alzándose mas noruestea, y esta altura causa el desvariar del circulo +que escribe la estrella del Norte con las guardas, y cuanto mas pasare +junto con la línea equinocial, mas se subirán en alto, y mas diferencia +habrá en las dichas estrellas, y en los circulos dellas. Y Tolomeo y los +otros sabios que escribieron de este mundo, creyeron que era esférico, +creyendo queste hemisferio que fuese redondo como aquel de allá donde +ellos estaban, el cual tiene el centro en la Isla de Arin, qués debajo la +linea equinocial entre el sino Arabico y aquel de Persia, y el círculo +pasa sobre el Cabo de S. Vicente en Portugal por el Poniente, y pasa en +Oriente por Cangara y por las Seras, en el cual hemisferio no hago yo que +hay ninguna dificultad, salvo que sea esférico redondo como ellos dicen: +mas este otro digo que es como sería la mitad de la pera bien redonda, la +cual toviese el pezon alto como y dije, ó como una teta de muger en una +pelota redonda, así que desta media parte non hobo noticia Tolomeo ni los +otros que escribieron del mundo por ser muy ignoto; solamente hicieron +raiz sobre el hemisferio, adonde ellos estaban ques redondo esférico, +como arriba dije. Y agora que vuestras Altezas lo han mandado navegar y +buscar y descobrir, se amuestra evidentísimo, porque estando yo en este +viage al Septentrion veinte grados de la línea equinocial, allí era en +derecho de Hargin, é de aquellas tierras: é allí es la gente negra é la +tierra muy quemada, y despues que fuí á las Islas de Cabo Verde, allí en +aquellas tierras es la gente mucho mas negra, y cuanto mas bajo se van al +Austro tanto mas llegan al extremo, en manera que allí en derecho donde +yo estaba, qués la Sierra Leoa, adonde se me alzaba la estrella del Norte +en anocheciendo cinco grados, allí es la gente negra en extrema cantidad, +y despues que de allí navegué al Occidente tan extremos calores; y pasada +la raya de que yo dije fallé multiplicar la temperancia, andando en +tanta cantidad que cuando yo llegué á la isla de la Trinidad, adonde la +estrella del Norte en anocheciendo tambien se me alzaba cinco grados, +allí y en la tierra de Gracia hallé temperancia suavísima, y las tierras +y árboles muy verdes, y tan hermosos como en Abril en las huertas de +Valencia; y la gente de allí de muy linda estatura, y blancos mas que +otros que haya visto en las Indias, é los cabellos muy largos é llanos, é +gente mas astuta é de mayor ingenio, é no cobardes. Entonces era el sol +en Virgen encima de nuestras cabezas é suyas, ansí que todo esto procede +por la suavísima temperancia que allí es, la cual procede por estar mas +alto en el mundo mas cerca del aire que cuento; y así me afirmo quel +mundo no es esférico, salvo que tiene esta diferencia que ya dije: la +cual es en este hemisferio adonde caen las Indias é la mar Oceana, y el +extremo dello es debajo la línea equinocial, y ayuda mucho á esto que +sea ansí, porque el sol cuando nuestro Señor lo hizo fue en el primer +punto de Oriente, ó la primera luz fue aquí en Oriente, allí donde es el +extremo de la altura deste mundo; y bien quel parecer de Aristotel fuese +que el Polo antártico ó la tierra ques debajo dél sea la mas alta parte +en el mundo, y mas propincua al cielo, otros sabios le impugnan diciendo +que es esta ques debajo del ártico, por las cuales razones parece que +entendian que una parte deste mundo debia de ser mas propincua y noble al +cielo que otra, y no cayeron en esto que sea debajo del equinocial por +la forma que yo dije, y no es maravilla porque deste hemisferio non se +hobiese noticia cierta, salvo muy liviana y por argumento, porque nadie +nunca lo ha andado ni enviado á buscar, hasta agora que vuestras Altezas +le mandaron explorar é descubrir la mar y la tierra. + +Fallo que de allí de estas dos bocas, las cuales como yo dije estan +frontero por línea de Septentrion en Austro, que haya de la una á la otra +veinte y seis leguas, y no pudo haber en ello yerro porque se midieron +con cuadrante, y destas dos bocas de accidente fasta el golfo que yo +dije, al cual llamé de las Perlas, que son sesenta é ocho leguas de +cuatro millas dada una como acostumbramos en la mar, y que de allá de +este golfo corre de contino el agua muy fuerte hácia el oriente; y que +por esto tienen aquel combate estas dos bocas con la salada. En esta +boca de Austro á que yo llamé de la Sierpe, fallé en anocheciendo que yo +tenia la estrella del Norte alta cuasi cinco grados, y en aquella del +otra Septentrion, á que yo llamé del Drago, eran cuasi siete, y fallo +queldicho Golfo de las Perlas está occidentalal Occidente de el [179] de +Tolomeo cuasi tres mil é novecientas millas, que son cuasi setenta grados +equinociales, contando por cada uno cincuenta y seis millas é dos tercios. + +La Sacra Escriptura testifica que nuestro Señor hizo al Paraiso terrenal, +y en él puso el Arbol de la vida, y del sale una fuente de donde +resultan en este mundo cuatro rios principales: Ganges en India, Tigris +y Eufrates en [180] los cuales apartan la sierra y hacen la Mesopotamia +y van à tener en Persia, y el Nilo que nace en Etiopia y va en la mar en +Alejandría. + +Yo no hallo ni jamas he hallado escriptura de Latinos ni de Griegos que +certificadamente diga el sitio en este mundo del Paraiso terrenal, ni +visto en ningun mapamundo, salvo, situado con autoridad de argumento. +Algunos le ponian allí donde son las fuentes del Nilo en Etiopia; mas +otros anduvieron todas estas tierras y no hallaron conformidad dello en +la temperancia del cielo, en la altura hácia el cielo, porque se pudiese +comprehender que el era allí, ni que las aguas del diluvio hobiesen +llegado allí, las cuales subieron encima, &c. Algunos gentiles quisieron +decir por argumentos, que el era en las islas Fortunatas que son las +Canarias, &c. + +S. Isidro y Beda y Strabo, y el Maestro de la historia escolástica, y San +Ambrosio, y Scoto, y todos los sanos teólogos conciertan quel Paraiso +terrenal es en el Oriente, &c. + +Ya dije lo que yo hallaba deste hemisferio y de la hechura, y creo que si +yo pasara por debajo de la línea equinocial que en llegando allí en esto +mas alto que fallara muy mayor temperancia, y diversidad en las estrellas +y en las aguas; no porque yo crea que allí donde es el altura del extremo +sea navegable ni agua, ni que se pueda subir allá, porque creo que allí +es el Paraiso terrenal adonde no puede llegar nadie, salvo por voluntad +Divina; y creo que esta tierra que agora mandaron descubrir vuestras +Altezas sea grandísima y haya otras muchas en el Austro de que jamas se +hobo noticia. + +Yo no tomo quel Paraise terrenal sea en forma de montaña aspera como el +escrebir dello nos amuestra, salvo quel sea en el colmo allí donde dije +la figura del pezon de la pera, y que poco á poco andando hácía allí +desde muy lejos se va subiendo á él; y creo que nadie no podria llegar +al colmo como yo dije, y creo que pueda salir de allí esa agua, bien que +sea lejos y venga á parar allí donde yo vengo, y faga este lago. Grandes +indicios son estos del Paraiso terrenal, porquel sitio es conforme á la +opinion de estos santos é sanos teólogos, y asimismo las señales son +muy conformes, que yo jamas leí ni oí que tanta cantidad de agua dulce +fuese así adentro é vecina con la salada; y en ello ayuda asimismo la +suavísima temperancia, y si de allí del Paraiso no sale, parece aun mayor +maravilla, porque no creo que se sepa en el mundo de rio tan grande y tan +fondo. + +Despues que yo salí de la boca del Dragon, ques la una de las dos aquella +del Septentrion, á la cual así puse nombre, el dia siguiente, que fue dia +de Nuestra Señora de Agosto, fallé que corria tanto la mar al Poniente, +que despues de hora de misa que entré en camino, anduve fasta hora de +completas sesenta y cinco leguas de cuatro millas cada una, y el viento +no era demasiado, salvo muy suave; y esto ayuda el cognoscimiento que de +allí yendo al Austro se va mas alto, y andando hácia el Septentrion, como +entonces, se va descendiendo. + +Muy conoscido tengo que las aguas de la mar llevan su curso de Oriente á +Occidente con los cielos, y que allí en esta comarca cuando pasan llevan +mas veloce camino, y por esto han comido tanta parte de la tierra, porque +por eso son acá tantas islas, y ellas mismas hacen desto testimonio, +porque todas á una mano son largas de Poniente á Levante, y Norueste +é Sueste ques un poco mas alto é bajo, y angostas de Norte á Sur, y +Nordeste Sudueste, que son en contrario de los otros dichos vientos, y +aquí en ellas todas nascen cosas preciosas por la suave temperancia que +les procede del cielo por estar hácia el mas alto del mundo. Verdad es +que parece en algunos lugares que las aguas no hagan este curso; mas esto +no es, salvo particularmente en algunos lugares donde alguna tierra le +está al encuentro, y hace parecer que andan diversos caminos. + +Plinio escribe que la mar é la tierra hace todo una esfera, y pone questa +mar Oceana sea la mayor cantidad del agua, y está hácia el cielo, y +que la tierra sea debajo y que le sostenga, y mezclado es uno con otro +como el amago de la nuez con una tela gorda que va abrazado en ello. El +Maestro de la Historia escolástica sobre el Genesis dice que las aguas +son muy pocas, que bien que cuando fueron criadas que cobijasen toda la +tierra que entonces eran vaporables en manera de niebla, y que despues +que fueron sólidas é juntadas que ocuparon muy poco lugar, y en esto +concierta Nicolao de Lira. El Aristotel dice que este mundo es pequeño +y es el agua muy poca, y que facilmente se puede pasar de España á las +Indias, y esto confirma el Avenruyz y le alega el Cardenal Pedro de +Aliaco, autorizando este decir y aquel de Séneca, el cual conforma con +estos diciendo que Aristoteles pudo saber muchos secretos del mundo á +causa de Alejandro Magno, y Séneca á causa de Cesar Nero y Plinio por +respecto de los Romanos, los cuales todos gastaron dineros é gente, y +pusieron mucha diligencia en saber los secretos del mundo y darlos á +entender á los pueblos; el cual Cardenal da á estos grande autoridad mas +que á Tolomeo ni á otros Griegos ni Arabes, y á confirmacion de decir +quel agua sea poca y quel cubierto del mundo della sea poco, al respecto +de lo que se decia por autoridad de Tolomeo y de sus secuaces: á esto +trae una autoridad de Esdras del 3ᵒ. libro suyo, adonde dice que de +siete partes del mundo las seis son descubiertas y la una es cubierta de +agua, la cual autoridad es aprobada por Santos, los cuales dan autoridad +al 3ᵒ. é 4ᵒ. libro de Esdras, ansí como es S. Agustin é S. Ambrosio en +su _exameron_, adonde alega allí vendrá mi hijo Jesus é morira mi hijo +Cristo, y dicen que Esdrás fue Profeta, y asimismo Zacarías, padre de S. +Juan, y el braso Simon; las cuales autoridades tambien alega Francisco +de Mairones: en cuanto en esto del enjuto de la tierra mucho se ha +experimentado ques mucho mas de lo quel vulgo crea; y no es maravilla, +porque andando mas mas se sabe. + +Torno á mi propósito de la tierra de Gracia y rio y lago que allí fallé, +atan grande que mas se le puede llamar mar que lago, porque _lago_ es +lugar de agua, y en seyendo grande se dice _mar_, como se dijo á la mar +de Galilea y al mar Muerto, y digo que sino procede del Paraiso terrenal +que viene este rio y procede de tierra infinita, pues al Austro, de la +cual fasta agora no se ha habido noticia, mas yo muy asentado tengo en el +anima que allí adonde dije es el Paraiso terrenal, y descanso sobre las +razones y autoridades sobre-escriptas. + +Plega á nuestro Señor de dar mucha vida y salud y descanso á vuestras +Altezas para que puedan proseguir esta tan noble empresa, en la cual me +parece que rescibe nuestro Señor mucho servicio, y la España crece de +mucha grandeza, y todos los Cristianos mucha consolacion y placer, porque +aquí se divulgará el nombre de nuestro Señor; y en todas las tierras +adonde los navíos de vuestras Altezas van, y en todo cabo mando plantar +una alta cruz, y á toda la gente que hallo notifico el estado de vuestras +Altezas y como su asiento es en España, y les digo de nuestra santa fe +todo lo que yo puedo, y de la creencia de la Santa Madre Iglesia, la cual +tiene sus miembros en todo el mundo, y les digo la policía y nobleza de +todos los Cristianos, y la fe que en la Santa Trinidad tienen; y plega +á nuestro Señor de tirar de memoria á las personas que han impugnado y +impugnan tan excelente empresa, y impiden y impidieron porque no vaya +adelante, sin considerar cuanta honra y grandeza es del Real Estado da +vuestras Altezas en todo el mundo; no saben que entreponer á maldecir +de esto, salvo que se hace gasto en ello, y porque luego no enviaron +los navíos cargados de oro sin considerar la brevedad del tiempo y +tantos inconvenientes como acá se han habido, y no considerar que en +Castilla en casa de vuestras Altezas salen cada año personas que por +su merecimiento ganaron en ella mas de renta cada uno dellos mas de +lo ques necesario que se gaste en esto; ansimesmo sin considerar que +ningunos Príncipes de España jamas ganaron tierra alguna fuera della, +salvo agora que vuestras Altezas tienen acá otro mundo, de adonde puede +ser tan acrescentada nuestra santa fe, y de donde se podrán sacar tantos +provechos, que bien que no se hayan enviado los navíos cargados de oro, +se han enviado suficientes muestras dello y de otras cosas de valor, por +donde se puede juzgar que en breve tiempo se podrá haber mucho provecho, +y sin mirar el gran corazon de los Príncipes de Portugal que há tanto +tiempo que prosiguen la impresa de Guinea, y prosiguen aquella de Africa, +adonde han gastado la mitad de la gente de su Reino, y agora está el Rey +mas determinado á ello que nunca. Nuestro Señor provea en esto como yo +dije, y les ponga en memoria de considerar de todo esto que va escripto, +que no es de mil partes la una de lo que yo podria escrebir de cosas de +Príncipes que se ocuparon á saber y conquistar y sostener. + +Todo esto dije, y no porque crea que la voluntad de vuestras Altezas sea +salvo proseguir en ello en cuanto vivan, y tengo por muy firme lo que me +respondió vuestras Altezas una vez que por palabra le decir desto, no +porque yo hobiese visto mudamiento ninguno en vuestras Altezas salvo por +temor de lo que yo oia destos que yo digo, y tanto da una gotera de agua +en una piedra que le hace un agujero; y vuestras Altezas me respondió +con aquel corazon que se sabe en todo el mundo que tienen, y me dijo +que no curase de nada de eso, porque su voluntad era de proseguir esta +empresa y sostenerla, aunque no fuese sino piedras y peñas, y quel gasto +que en ello se hacia que lo tenia en nada, que en otras cosas no tan +grandes gastaban mucho mas, y que lo tenian todo por muy bien gastado lo +del pasado y lo que se gastase en adelante, porque creian que nuestra +santa fe sería acrecentada y su Real Señorío ensanchado, y que no eran +amigos de su Real Estado aquellos que les maldecian de esta empresa: y +agora entre tanto que vengan á noticia desto destas tierras que agora +nuevamente he descubierto, en que tengo asentado en el ánima que allí es +el Paraiso terrenal, irá el Adelantado con tres navíos bien ataviados +para ello á ver mas adelante, y descubrirán todo lo que pudieren hacia +aquellas partes. Entretanto yo enviaré á vuestras Altezas esta escriptura +y la pintura de la tierra, y acordarán lo que en ello se deba facer, y me +enviarán á mandar, y se cumplirá con ayuda de la Santa Trinidad con toda +diligencia en manera que vuestras Altezas sean servidos y hayan placer. +Deo gracias. + + +FOOTNOTES: + +[154] These were Fray Juan Perez de Marchena, a Franciscan, keeper of the +Convent de la Rabida, and Fray Diejo de Deza, a Dominican, afterwards +Archbishop of Seville. + +[155] A similar gap in the original. + +[156] He did not discover terra firma in the second voyage as he here +says, but imagined the island of Cuba to be terra firma, because +he was unable to explore it fully; nor was it ascertained to be an +island till two years after his death, when, by order of the king, the +Comendador Mayor Nicolas Ovando gave Sebastian de Ocampo a commission to +circumnavigate the island, and he explored the whole coast in the year +1508. (See Herrera, Dec. i, lib. 7, cap. i.) Amongst the number of these +islands, Columbus doubtless included many of those to the south of Cuba, +lying in the part which he called the _Queen’s Gardens_. + +[157] Ceylon. + +[158] These examples quoted by the admiral from ancient history, are +commented upon very learnedly, and at considerable length, by his +historian, Las Casas, in chapters 128 and 129 of his unpublished history. +(Navarrete.) + +[159] Of the year 1498. + +[160] Herrera says (Dec. i, lib. 3, cap. 9) that it was a Portuguese +squadron; but Las Casas (cap. 30) distinctly states it to have been +French. + +[161] Herrera and Don Ferdinand Columbus say that he reached the island +of Puerto Santo on the seventh of June, from which island he sailed +directly for Madeira, and thence to Gomera, which he reached on the +nineteenth, and put to sea again on the twenty-first. + +[162] The commanders of the three ships which the admiral despatched to +Española, were Pedro de Arana, native of Cordova, brother to the mother +of Ferdinand Columbus; Alonzo Sanchez de Carabajal, magistrate of Baeza; +and Juan Antonio Columbus, a relative of the admiral; all of whom were +known to and are spoken of by F. Bartolomé de Las Casas, in chapter 130 +of his unpublished history. (Navarrete.) + +[163] This was on the twenty-seventh of June. He anchored in the island +of Sal, and on the thirtieth proceeded to the island of Santiago, from +whence he put to sea again on the fourth of July. + +[164] The islands took the name from the Cape itself, not from the +verdure which had caused that name to be given to the Cape. The Cape +Verde was discovered by Diniz Dias about 1445: the Cape Verde Islands +were discovered in 1460 by Diogo Gomez, as shown for the first time in my +_Prince Henry the Navigator_, pp. 297-298, and not by Antonio de Nolle in +1457, as incorrectly stated by Cadamosto. + +[165] It was first seen by a mariner of Huelva, a servant of the admiral, +named Alonzo Perez. (Navarrete.) + +[166] It is now called Cape Galeota, and is the most south-eastern point +of the island of Trinidad. + +[167] In all probability deer. + +[168] Coast of Paria. + +[169] Produced by the confluence of the Oronoco with the sea. See Rapin, +_Hist. Phil._, vol. iv, p. 272. + +[170] Point Peña Blanca. + +[171] Point Peña. + +[172] Serpent’s Mouth. + +[173] It is now called Point Alcatraz, or Point Pelican. + +[174] The stars composing the constellation of Ursa Minor. + +[175] A misspelling, not infrequent in those days, for the sacred city +(not island) of Odjein or Ougein in Malwa, whence the Indians reckoned +their first meridian. The change of the name to Arin in Arabic is thus +explained by M. Reinaud in his _Mémoire sur l’Inde_, p. 373. The dj of +the Indians was sometimes rendered z by the Arabs, and thus the Arab +translators wrote the word Ozein; but as in manuscripts the vowels +were often omitted, the mass of readers to whom the name of Odjein was +indifferent, would pronounce it Azin, and as the copyist would sometimes +forget to insert the point which distinguished a z from an r, Azin would +be read Arin. + +[176] Japan and China. + +[177] Arguin, off the west coast of Africa. + +[178] The innermost gulf within the Gulf of Paria. + +[179] A similar gap in the original. In all probability “first meridian” +or some such words, are omitted. + +[180] A similar gap in the original, which would seem to want the words +“Asiatic Turkey.” + +[181] Walafried Strabus, Abbé of Reichenau in Baden. + +[182] Petrus Comestor, who wrote the “Historica Scholastica.” + +[183] The feast of the Assumption. + +[184] Probably six A.M. + +[185] Nine P.M. + +[186] Averrhóes, an Arabian philosopher of the twelfth century. + +[187] This expression is described by the ancient copyist of the letter +as being “badly written”; probably miscopied for “El beato”, “The +blessed.” + +[188] A Scotist of the fourteenth century, surnamed “Doctor illuminatus +et acutus.” + + + + +LETTER + + +_Of the Admiral to the (quondam) nurse[189] of the Prince John, written +near the end of the year 1500._ + +Most virtuous lady: Although it is a novelty for me to complain of +the ill-usage of the world, it is, nevertheless, no novelty for the +world to practise ill-usage. Innumerable are the contests which I have +had with it, and I have resisted all its attacks until now, when I +find, that neither strength nor prudence is of any avail to me: it has +cruelly reduced me to the lowest ebb. Hope in Him who created us all +is my support: His assistance I have always found near at hand. On one +occasion, not long since, when I was extremely depressed, He raised me +with His Divine arm, saying: “O man of little faith, arise, it is I, +be not afraid.”[190] I offered myself with such earnest devotion to the +service of these princes, and I have served them with a fidelity hitherto +unequalled and unheard of. God made me the messenger of the new heaven +and the new earth, of which He spoke in the Apocalypse by St. John, after +having spoken of it by the mouth of Isaiah; and He showed me the spot +where to find it. All proved incredulous; except the Queen my mistress, +to whom the Lord gave the spirit of intelligence and great courage, +and made her the heiress of all, as a dear and well beloved daughter. +I went to take possession of it in her royal name. All sought to cover +the ignorance in which they were sunk, by dwelling on the inconveniences +and expense of the proposed enterprise. Her Highness held the contrary +opinion, and supported it with all her power. Seven years passed away in +deliberations, and nine have been spent in accomplishing things truly +memorable, and worthy of being preserved in the history of man. Never had +such a thing been conceived. + +I have now reached that point, that there is no man so vile but thinks +it his right to insult me. The day will come when the world will reckon +it a virtue to him who has not given his consent to their abuse. If I +had plundered the Indies, even to the country where is the fabled altar +of St. Peter’s, and had given them all to the Moors, they could not have +shown towards me more bitter enmity than they have done in Spain. Who +would believe such things of a country where there has always been so +much nobility? I should much like to clear myself of this affair, if only +it were consistent with etiquette to do so, face to face with my queen. +The support which I have found in our Lord, and in her Highness, made +me persevere, and, in order to relieve somewhat the griefs which death +had occasioned her,[191] I undertook another voyage to the new heavens +and new earth, which had been hitherto concealed; and if these are not +appreciated in Spain, like the other parts of the Indies, it is not at +all wonderful, since it is to my labours that they are indebted for them. +The Holy Spirit encompassed St. Peter, and the rest of the twelve, who +all had conflicts here below; they wrought many works, they suffered +great fatigues, but at last they obtained the victory. I believed that +this voyage to Paria would produce a certain amount of contentment, +because of the pearls and the discovery of gold in the island of +Española. I left orders for the people to fish for pearls, and collect +them together, and made an agreement with them that I should return for +them; and I was given to understand that the supply would be abundant. + +If I have not written respecting this to their Highnesses, it is because +I wished first to render an equally favourable account of the gold; but +it has happened with this as with many other things; I should not have +lost them, and with them my honour, if I had been only occupied about my +own private interests, and had suffered Española to be lost, or even if +they had respected my privileges and the treaties. I say the same with +regard to the gold which I had then collected, and which I have brought +in safety, by Divine grace, after so much loss of life and such excessive +fatigues. + +In the voyage which I made by way of Paria, I found nearly half the +colonists of Española in a state of revolt, and they have made war upon +me until now as if I had been a Moor;[192] while on the other side, I +had to contend with the no less cruel Indians. Then arrived Hojeda,[193] +and he attempted to put the seal to all these disorders; he said that +their Highnesses had sent him, with promises of presents, of immunities, +and treaties; he collected a numerous band, for in the whole island of +Española, there were few men who were not vagabonds, and there were +none who had either wife or children. This Hojeda troubled me much, but +he was obliged to retreat, and at his departure he said, that he would +return with more ships and men, and reported also, that he had left the +queen at the point of death.[194] In the meanwhile, Vincent Yañez came +with four caravels; and there were some tumults and suspicions, but no +further evil. The Indians reported many other caravels to the cannibals, +and in Paria; and afterwards spread the news of the arrival of six other +caravels, commanded by a brother of the alcalde; but this was from pure +malice, and at a time when at length there remained but little hope +that their Highnesses would send any more ships to the Indies, and we +no longer expected them, and when it was said openly that her Highness +(the queen) was dead. At this time, one Adrian attempted a new revolt, +as he had done before;[195] but our Lord did not permit his evil designs +to succeed. I had determined not to inflict punishment on any person, +but his ingratitude obliged me, however regretfully, to abandon this +resolution, I should not have acted otherwise with my own brother, if +he had sought to assassinate me, and to rob me of the lordship which my +sovereigns had given to my keeping. This Adrian, as is now evident, had +sent Don Ferdinand to Xaragua, to assemble some of his partisans, and +had some discussions with the alcalde, which ended in violence, but all +without any good. The alcalde seized him and a part of his band; and in +fact, executed justice without my having ordered it. While they were in +prison, they were expecting a caravel, in which they hoped to embark; but +the news which I told them of what had happened to Hojeda, deprived them +of the hope that he would arrive in this ship. It is now six months that +I have been ready to leave, to bring to their Highnesses the good news of +the gold, and to give up the government of these dissolute people, who +fear neither God nor their king nor queen, but are full of imbecility +and malice. I should have been able to pay every one with six hundred +thousand maravedis, and for this purpose there were four millions and +more of the tithes, without reckoning the third part of the gold. + +Before my departure (from Spain) I have often entreated their Highnesses +to send to these parts, at my expense, some one charged to administer +justice; and since, when I found the alcalde in a state of revolt, I +have besought them afresh to send at least one of their servants with +letters, because I myself have had so strange a character given to me, +that if I were to build churches or hospitals, they would call them +caves for robbers. Their Highnesses provided for this at last, but in +a manner quite unequal to the urgency of the circumstances; however, +let that point rest, since such is their good pleasure. I remained two +years in Spain without being able to obtain anything for myself, or +those who came with me,[196] but this man has gained for himself a full +purse: God knows if all will be employed for his service. Already, to +begin with, there is a revenue for twenty years, which is, according to +man’s calculation, an age; and they gather gold in such abundance, that +there are people who, in four hours, have found the equivalent of five +marks; but I will speak on this subject more fully hereafter. If their +Highnesses would condescend to silence the popular rumours, which have +gained credence among those who know what fatigues I have sustained, it +would be a real charity; for calumny has done me more injury than the +services which I have rendered to their Highnesses, and the care with +which I have preserved their property and their government, have done me +good. By their so doing, I should be re-established in reputation, and +spoken of throughout the universe: for the matter is of a kind which must +every day be more talked of and appreciated. + +In the meanwhile, the commander Bobadilla arrived at St. Domingo,[197] at +which time I was at La Vega, and the Adelantado at Xaragua, where this +Adrian had made his attempt; but by that time everything was quiet, the +land was thriving, and the people at peace. The day after his arrival +he declared himself governor, created magistrates, ordered executions, +published immunities from the collection of gold and from the paying of +tithes; and, in fine, announced a general franchise for twenty years, +which is, as I have said, the calculation of an age. He also gave out +that he was going to pay everyone, although they had not even done the +service which was due up to that day; and he further proclaimed that he +had to send me back loaded with chains, and my brother also (this he +has done);[198] and that neither I, nor any of my family, should ever +return to these lands: and, in addition, he made innumerable unjust and +disgraceful charges against me. All this took place, as I have said, on +the very day after his arrival, at which time I was absent at a distance, +thinking neither of him nor of his coming. Some letters of their +Highnesses, of which he brought a considerable number signed in blank, +he filled up with exaggerated language, and sent round to the alcalde +and his myrmidons, accompanying them with compliments and flattery. To +me he never sent either a letter or a messenger, nor has he done so to +this day. Reflect upon this, madam! what could any man in my situation +think? Could it be that honour and favour were to be conferred on him who +had lent himself to plundering their Highnesses of their sovereignty, and +who had done so much injury and mischief?—Could it be that he who had +defended and preserved their cause through so many dangers, was to be +dragged through the mire? When I heard this, I thought he must be like +Hojeda, or one of the other rebels; but I held my peace, when I learned +for certain, from the friars, that he had been sent by their Highnesses. +I wrote to him, to salute him on his arrival, to let him know that I was +ready to set out to go to court, and that I had put up to sale all that +I possessed. I entreated him not to be in haste on the subject of the +grants; and I assured him that I would shortly yield this, and everything +else connected with the government, implicitly into his charge. I wrote +the same thing to the ecclesiastics, but I received no answer either +from the one or the other. On the contrary, he took a hostile position, +and obliged those who went to his residence to acknowledge him for +governor, as I have been told, for twenty years. As soon as I knew what +he had done with regard to the immunities, I proposed to repair this +great mistake, and I thought he would himself be glad of it; for, without +any reason or necessity, he had bestowed upon vagabonds privileges of +such importance, that they would have been excessive even for men with +wives and children. I published verbally, and in writing, that he could +not make use of his credentials, because mine were of higher authority, +and I showed the grants brought by Juan Aguado. All this I did for the +purpose of gaining time, that their Highnesses might be informed as to +the state of the country, and that they might have opportunity to give +fresh orders upon everything touching their interests. It is useless +to publish such grants in the Indies,—all is in favour of the settlers +who have taken up their abode there, because the best lands are given +up to them; and, at a low estimate, they are worth two hundred thousand +maravedis a head for the four years, at which they are taken, without a +single stroke of the mattock. I should not say so much if these people +were married men; but there are not six among them all, whose purpose +is not to amass all they can, and then decamp with it. It would be well +that people should come from Spain, but that only such should be sent +as are well known, so that the country may be peopled with honest men. +I had agreed with these settlers that they should pay the third of the +gold and of the tithes; and this they not only assented to, but were +very grateful to their Highnesses. I reproached them when I heard they +had afterwards refused it; they expected, however, to deal with me on +the same terms as with the commander, but I would not consent to it. He +meanwhile irritated them against me, saying, that I wished to deprive +them of that which their Highnesses had given them; and strove to make me +appear their enemy, in which he succeeded to the full. He induced them to +write to their Highnesses, that they should send me no more commissioned +as governor (truly I do not desire it any more for myself, or for any +who belong to me, while the people remain unchanged); and to conciliate +them, he ordered inquiries to be made respecting me with reference to +imputed misdeeds, such as were never invented in hell. But God is above, +who with so much wisdom and power rescued Daniel and the three children, +and who, if he please, can rescue me with a similar manifestation of +his power, and to the advancement of his own cause. I should have known +well enough how to find a remedy for the evils which I now describe and +have been describing as having happened to me since I came to the Indies, +if I had had the wish or had thought it decent, to busy myself about my +personal interest; but now I find myself undone, because I have hitherto +maintained the justice and augmented the territorial dominions of their +Highnesses. Now that so much gold is found, these people stop to consider +whether they can obtain the greatest quantity of it by theft, or by +going to the mines. For one woman they give a hundred castellanos,[199] +as for a farm; and this sort of trading is very common, and there are +already a great number of merchants who go in search of girls; there are +at this moment from nine or ten on sale; they fetch a good price, let +their age be what it will. I assert that when I said that the commander +could not confer immunities, I did what he desired, although I told him +that it was to gain time until their Highnesses had received information +respecting the country, and had given their orders as to the regulations +best calculated to advance their interest. I assert that the calumnies +of injurious men have done me more harm, than my services have done me +good: which is a bad example for the present as well as for the future. +I declare solemnly that a great number of men have been to the Indies, +who did not deserve baptism in the eyes of God or men, and who are now +returning thither. The governor has made every one hostile to me; and +it appears, from the manner of his acting, and the plans that he has +adopted, that he was already my enemy, and very virulent against me when +he arrived; and it is said, that he has been at great expense to obtain +this office: but I know nothing about the matter except what I have +heard. I never before heard of any one who was commissioned to make an +inquiry, assembling the rebels, and taking, as evidence against their +governor, wretches without faith, and who are unworthy of unbelief. If +their Highnesses would cause a general inquiry to be made throughout the +land, I assure you they would be astonished, that the island has not +been swallowed up. I believe that you will recollect, that when I was +driven by a tempest into the port of Lisbon (having lost my sails), I was +falsely accused of having put in thither with the intention of giving the +Indies to the sovereign of that country. Since then, their Highnesses +have learned the contrary, and that it was all malice. Although I am an +ignorant man, I do not imagine that any one supposed me so stupid as +not to be aware, that even if the Indies had belonged to me, I could +not support myself without the assistance of some prince. In such case +where should I find better support, or more security against expulsion, +than in the king and queen our sovereigns? who, from nothing, have +raised me to so great an elevation, and who are the greatest princes of +the world, on the land and on the sea. These princes know how I have +served them, and they uphold my privileges and rewards; and if any one +violates them, their Highnesses augment them by ordering great favour to +be shown me, and ordain me many honours, as was shown in the affair of +Juan Aguado. Yes, as I have said, their Highnesses have received some +services from me, and have taken my sons into their household, which +would not have happened with another prince, because where there is no +attachment, all other considerations prove of little weight. If I have +now spoken severely of a malicious slander, it is against my will, for +it is a subject I would not willingly recall even in my dreams. The +governor Bobadilla has maliciously exhibited in open day his character +and conduct in this affair; but I will prove without difficulty, that his +ignorance, his cowardice, and his inordinate cupidity, have frustrated +all his undertakings. I have already said that I wrote to him, as well +as to the monks, and I set out almost alone, all our people being with +the Adelantado and elsewhere, to remove suspicion; when he heard this he +seized Don Diego, and sent him on board a caravel, loaded with irons; +on my arrival he did the same to me; and afterwards to the Adelantado +when he came. I have never spoken with him, and to this day he has not +permitted any one to hold converse with me, and I solemnly declare that +I cannot think for what reason I was made prisoner. His first care was +to take the gold that I had, and that without measuring or weighing it, +although I was absent; he said he would pay those to whom it was owing, +and if I am to believe what has been reported to me, he reserved to +himself the greater part, and sent for strangers to make the bargains. +I had put aside some samples of this gold, some as large as a goose’s +or a hen’s egg, and of various sizes, which a few persons had collected +in a short space of time, that their Highnesses might be gratified and +impressed with the importance of the affair, when they saw a quantity of +large stones full of gold. This gold was the first that, after he had +feathered his own nest (which he was in great haste to do), his malice +suggested to give away, in order that their Highnesses might have a low +opinion of the whole affair: the gold which required melting, diminished +at the fire, and a chain weighing nearly twenty marks disappeared +altogether. I have been yet more concerned respecting this matter of +the gold than even about the affair of the pearls, that I have not been +able to bring them to their Highnesses. In every thing that he thought +could add to my annoyance, the governor has always shown himself ready +to bestir himself. Thus, as I have said, with six hundred thousand +maravedis, I should have paid every one, without injustice to any; and +I had more than four millions of tithes and constabulary dues, without +touching the gold. He made the most absurd gifts, although I believe he +began with himself first; their Highnesses will be able to ascertain +the truth on this subject when they demand the account to be rendered +them, especially if I may assist at the examination. He is continually +saying, that there is a considerable sum owing, while it is only what I +have already reported, and even less. I have been wounded extremely by +the thought, that a man should have been sent out to make inquiry into +my conduct, who knew, that if he sent home a very aggravated account +of the result of his investigation, he would remain at the head of the +government. Would to God, their Highnesses had sent either him or some +other person two years ago, for then I know that I should have had no +cause to fear either scandal or disgrace; they could not then have taken +away my honour, and I could not have been in the position to have lost +it. God is just, and He will in due time make known by whom and how it +has been done. Let them judge me, as a governor who had been sent to +Sicily or some province or city under regular government, and where the +laws could be executed without fear of danger to the public weal or +subjection to any enormous wrong. I ought to be judged as a captain sent +from Spain to the Indies, to conquer a nation numerous and warlike, with +customs and religion altogether different to ours; a people who dwell +in the mountains, without regular habitations for themselves or for +us; and where, by the Divine will, I have subdued another world to the +dominion of the King and Queen, our sovereigns; in consequence of which, +Spain, that used to be called poor, is now the most wealthy of kingdoms. +I ought to be judged as a captain, who for so many years has borne arms, +never quitting them for an instant. I ought to be judged by cavaliers who +have themselves won the meed of victory;[200] by knights of the sword +and not of title deeds; as least, so it would have been among the Greeks +and Romans, or any modern nation in which exists so much nobility as in +Spain; for under any other judgment I receive great injury, because in +the Indies there is neither civil right nor judgment seat. + +Already the road is opened to the gold and pearls, and it may surely +be hoped that precious stones, spices, and a thousand other things, +will also be found. Would to God that it were as certain that I should +suffer no greater wrongs than I have already experienced, as it is that +I would, in the name of our Lord, again undertake my first voyage; and +that I would undertake to go to Arabia Felix as far as Mecca, as I have +said in the letter that I sent to their Highnesses by Antonio de Torres, +in answer to the division of the sea and land between Spain and the +Portuguese; and I would go afterwards to the North Pole, as I have said +and given in writing to the monastery of the Mejorada. + +The tidings of the gold which I said I would give, are, that on +Christmas-day, being greatly afflicted and tormented by the wicked +Spaniards and the Indians, when I was at the point of leaving all to +save my life if possible, our Lord comforted me miraculously, saying to +me, “_Take courage, be not dismayed nor fear, I will provide for all; +the seven years, the term of the gold, are not yet passed; and in this, +as in the rest, I will redress thee._” I learned that same day, that +there were twenty-four leagues of land where they found mines at every +step, which appear now to form but one. Some of the people collected a +hundred and twenty castellanos’ worth in one day, others ninety; and +there have been those who have gathered the equivalent of nearly two +hundred and fifty castellanos. They consider it a good day’s work when +they collect from fifty to seventy, or even from twenty to fifty, and +many continue searching; the mean day’s work is from six to twelve, and +those who get less are very dissatisfied. It appears that these mines, +like all others, do not yield equally every day; the mines are new, and +those who collect their produce inexperienced. According to the judgment +of everybody here, it seems that, if all Spain were to come over, every +individual, however inexpert he might be, would gain the equivalent of +at least one or two castellanos in a day; and so it is up to the present +time. It is certain that any man who has an Indian to work for him, +collects as much, but the management depends upon the Spaniard. See, now, +what discernment was shown by Bobadilla when he gave up everything for +nothing, and four millions of tithes without any reason, and even without +being asked to do so, and without first giving notice to their Highnesses +of his intention; and this is not the only evil which he has caused. I +know, assuredly, that the errors which I may have fallen into, have been +committed without any intention of doing wrong, and I think that their +Highnesses will believe me when I say so; but I know and see that they +show mercy towards those who intentionally do injury to their service. I, +however, feel very certain that the day will come when they will treat me +much better; since, if I have been in error, it has been innocently and +under the force of circumstances, as they will shortly understand beyond +all doubt: I, who am their creature, and whose services and usefulness +they will every day be more willing to acknowledge. They will weigh all +in the balance, even as, according to the Holy Scripture, it will be with +the evil and the good at the day of judgment. If, nevertheless, their +Highnesses ordain me another judge, which I do not expect, and if my +examination is to be holden in the Indies, I humbly beseech them to send +over two conscientious and respectable persons at my expense, and they +would readily acknowledge that, at this time, five marks of gold may be +found in four hours: be it however as it may, it is highly necessary that +their Highnesses should have this matter inquired into. The governor, +on his arrival at St. Domingo, took up his abode in my house, and +appropriated to himself all that was therein. Well and good; perhaps +he was in want of it: but even a pirate does not behave in this manner +towards the merchants that he plunders. That which grieves me most is the +seizure of my papers, of which I have never been able to recover one; and +those that would have been most useful to me in proving my innocence, +are precisely those which he has kept most carefully concealed. Behold +the just and honest inquisitor! But whatever he may have done, they tell +me that he has now bidden good bye to justice and is simply a despot. Our +Lord God retains His power and wisdom as of old; and, above all things, +He punishes injustice and ingratitude. + + +CARTA + +_Del Almirante al ama (que habia sido) del Principe D. Juan, escrita +hacia fines del año 1500._ + +Muy virtuosa Señora: Si mi queja del mundo es nueva, su uso de maltratar +es de muy antiguo. Mil combates me ha dado y á todos resistí fasta agora +que no me aprovechó armas ni avisos. Con crueldad me tiene echado al +fondo. La esperanza de aquel que crio á todos me sostiene: su socorro +fue siempre muy presto. Otra vez, y no de lejos estando yo mas bajo, me +levantó con su brazo divino, diciendo: _ó hombre de poca fe, levantate +que yo soy, no hayas miedo_. Yo vine con amor tan entrañable á servir +á estos Principes, y hé servido de servicio de que jamas se oyó ni +vido. Del nuevo cielo y tierra que decia muestro Señor por S. Juan +en el Apocalipse, despues de dicho por boca de Isaías, me hizo dello +mensagero, y amostró en cual parte. En todos hobo incredulidad, y á la +Reina mi Señor dió dello el espíritu de inteligencia y esfuerzo grande, +y lo hizo de todo heredera como á cara y muy amada hija. La posesion de +todo esto fuí yo á tomar en su Real nombre. La ignorancia en que habian +estado todos quisieron enmendallo traspasando el poco saber á fablar en +inconvenientes y gastos. Su Alteza lo aprobaba al contrario, y lo sostuvo +fasta que pudo. Siete años se pasaron en la platica y nueve ejecutando +cosas muy señaladas y dignas de memoria se pasaron en este tiempo: de +todo no se fizo concepto. Llegué yo y estoy que non ha nadie tan vil que +no piense de ultrajarme. Por virtud se contará en el mundo á quien puede +no consentillo. Si yo robara las Indias ó tierra que san face[201] en +ello de que agora es la fabla del altar de S. Pedro, y las diera á los +moros, no pudieran en España amostrarme mayor enemiga. Quién creyera tal +adonde hobo siempre tanta nobleza? Yo mucho quisiera despedir del negocio +si fuera honesto para con mi Reina: el esfuerzo de nuestro Señor y de +su Alteza fizo que yo continuase, y por aliviarle algo de los enojos +en que á causa de la muerte estaba, cometí viaje nuevo al nuevo cielo +é mundo, que fasta entonces estaba en oculto, y sino es tenido allí en +estima, así como los otros de las Indias, no es maravilla porque salió +á parecer de mi industria. A S. Pedro abrasó el Espíritu Santo y con él +otros doce, y todos combatieron acá, y los trabajos y fatigas fueron +muchas; en fin de todo llevaron la victoria. Este viaje de Paria creí que +apaciguara algo por las perlas y la fallada del oro en la Española. Las +perlas mandé yo ayuntar y pescar á la gente con quien quedó el concierto +de mi vuelta por ellas, y á mi comprender á medida de fanega: si yo non +lo escribí a SS. AA. fue porque así quisiera haber fecho del oro antes. +Esto me salió como otras cosas muchas; no las perdiera ni mi honra si +buscara yo mi bien propio y dejara perder la Española, ó se guardaran +mis previlegios é asientos. Y otro tanto digo del oro que yo tenia agora +junto, que con tantas muertés y trabajos, por virtud divinal, he llegado +á perfecto. Cuando yo fuí á Paria fallé cuasi la mitad de la gente en +la Española alzados, y me han guerreado fasta agora como á moro, y los +indios por otro cabo gravemente. En esto vino Hojeda y probó á echar +el sello, y dijo que sus Altezas lo enviaban con promesas de dádivas y +franquezas y paga: allegó gran cuadrilla, que en toda la Española muy +pocos hay, salvo vagabundos y ninguno con muger y fijos. Este Hojeda me +trabajó harto y fuele necesario de se ir, y dejó dicho que luego seria de +vuelta con mas navíos y gente, y que dejaba la Real persona de la Reina +á la muerte. En esto llegó Viceinte Yañez con cuatro carabelas: hobo +alboroto y sospechas, mas no daño. Los indios dijeron de otras muchas á +los canibales y en Paria, y despues una nueva de seis otras carabelas que +traía un hermano del Alcalde, mas fue con malicia, y esto fue ya á la +postre cuando ya estaba muy rota la esperanza que sus Altezas hobiesen +jamas de enviar navios á las Indias, ni nos esperarlos, y que vulgarmente +decian que su Alteza era muerta. Un Adrian en este tiempo probó alzarse +otra vez como de antes, mas nuestro Señor no quiso que llegase á efecto +su mal propósito. Yo tenia propuesto en mi de no tocar el cabello á +nadie, y á este por su ingratitud con lágrimas no se pudo guardar, así +como yo lo tenia pensado. A mi hermano no hiciera menos si me quisiera +matar y robar el señorío que mi Rey é Reina me tenian dado en guarda. +Este Adrian, segun se muestra, tenia enviado á D. Fernando á Jaragua á +allegar á algunos sus secuaces, y allá hobo debate con el Alcalde, adonde +nació discordia de muerte; mas no llegó á efecto. El Alcalde le prendió +y á parte de su cuadrilla: y el caso era que él los justiciaba sin que +yo lo proveyere: estovieren presos esperando carabela en que se fuesen: +las nuevas de Hojeda que yo dije ficieron perder la esperanza que ya no +venia. Seis meses habia que yo estaba despachado para venir á sus Altezas +con las buenas nuevas del oro y fuir de gobernar gente disoluta que no +teme á Dios ni á su Rey ni Reina, llena de achaques y de malicias. A la +gente acabara yo de pagar con seiscientos mil maravedises: y para ello +habia cuatro cuentos de diezmos é alguno sin el tercio del oro. Antes de +mi partida supliqué tantas veces á sus Altezas que enviasen allá á mi +costa á quien tuviese cargo de la justicia, y despues que fallé alzado +al Alcalde se lo supliqué de nuevo ó por alguna gente, ó al menos algun +criado con cartas, porque mi fama es tal que aunque yo faga iglesias y +hospitales siempre serán dichas espeluncas para latrones. Proveyeron ya +al fin, y fue muy al contrario de lo que la negociacion demandaba: vaya +en buena, hora, pues que es á su grado. Yo estuve allá dos años sin poder +ganar una provision de favor para mí ni por los que allá fuesen, y este +llevó una arca llena: si pararán todas á su servicio Dios lo sabe. Ya por +comienzos hay franquezas por veinte años, que es la edad de un hombre, y +se coge el oro, que hobo persona de cinco marcos en cuatro horas, de que +diré despues mas largo. Si pluguiese á sus Altezas de desfacer un vulgo +de los que saben mis fatigas, que mayor daño me ha hecho el mal decir de +las gentes que no me ha aprovechado el mucho servir y guardar su facienda +y senorío, seria limosna, é yo restituido en mi honra, é se fablaria +dello en todo el mundo, porquel negocio es de calidad que cada dia ha de +ser mas sonada y en alta estima. En esto vino el Comendador Bobadilla á +Santo Domingo, yo estaba en la Vega y el Adelantado en Jaragua, donde +este Adrian habia hecho cabeza, mas ya todo era llano y la tierra rica, y +en paz toda. El segundo dia que llegó se crió Gobernador y fizo oficiales +y ejecuciones, y apregonó franquezas del oro y diezmos, y generalmente de +toda otra cosa por veinte años, que como digo es la edad de un hombre, +y que venia para pagar á todos, bien que no habian servido llenamente +hasta ese dia, y publicó que á mi me habia de enviar en fierros, y á mis +hermanos, así como lo ha fecho, y que nunca yo volveria mas allí ni otro +de mi linage, diciendo de mi mil deshonestidades y descorteses cosas. +Esto todo fue el segundo dia quel llegó, como dije, y estando yo lejos +absente sin saber dello ni de su venida. Unas cartas de sus Altezas +firmadas en blanco, de que el llevaba una cantidad, hinchó y envió al +Alcalde y á su compañía con favores y encomiendas. A mi nunca me envió +carta ni mensagero, ni me ha dado fasta hoy. Piense vuestra merced qué +pensaria quien tuviera mi cargo? honrar y favorecer á quien probó á robar +á sus Altezas el señorío, y ha fecho tanto mal y daño! y arrastrar á +quien con tantos peligros se lo sostuvo? Cuando supe esto, creí que esto +seria como lo de Hojeda, ó uno de los otros: templóme que supe de los +frailes de cierto que sus Altezas lo enviaban. Escrebile yo que su venida +fuese en buena hora, y que yo estaba despachado para ir á la corte, y +fecho almoneda de cuanto yo tenia, y que en esto de las franquezas que no +se acelerase, que esto y el gobierno yo se lo daria luego tan llano como +la palma, y así lo escribí a los religiosos. Ni él ni ellos me dieron +respuesta, antes se puso él en son de guerra, y apremiaba á cuantos allí +iban que le jurasen por Gobernador, dijeronme que por veinte años. Luego +que yo supe de estas franquezas pensé de adobar un yerro tan grande, +y que él seria contento, las cuales dió sin necesidad y causa de cosa +tan gruesa y á gente vagabunda, que fuera demasiado para quien trujera +muger y hijos. Publiqué por palabra y por cartas que él no podia usar +de sus provisiones, porque las mias eran las mas fuertes, y les mostré +las franquezas que llevó Juan Aguado. Todo esto que yo fice era por +dilatar, porque sus Altezas fuesen sabidores del estado de la tierra, y +hobiesen lugar de tornar á mandar en ello lo que fuese su servicio. Tales +franquezas escusado es de las apregonar en las Indias. Los vecinos que +han tomado vecindad es logro, porque se les dan las mejores tierras y á +poco valer valerán docientos mil maravedis al cabo de los cuatro años +que la vecindad se acaba, sin que den una azadonada en ellas. No diria +yo así si los vecinos fuesen casados, mas no hay seis entre todos que no +esten sobre el aviso de ayuntar lo que pudieren y se ir en buena hora. De +Castilla seria bien que fuesen, y aun saber quién y cómo, y se poblase de +gente honrada. Yo tenia asentado con estos vecinos que pagarian el tercio +del oro y los diezmos, y esto á su ruego, y lo recibieron en grande +merced de sus Altezas. Reprendiles cuando yo oí que se dejaban dello, y +esperaban quél conmigo faria otro tanto, mas fue el contrario. Indignólos +contra mí diciendo, que yo les queria quitar lo que sus Altezas les +daban, y trabajo de me los echar acuestas, y lo hizo, y que escribiesen +á sus Altezas que no me enviasen mas al cargo, y así se lo suplico yo +por mí y por toda cosa mia, en cuanto no haya otro pueblo, y me ordenó +él con ellos pesquisas de maldades que al infierno nunca se supo de las +semejantes. Allí está nuestro Señor que escapó á Daniel y á los tres +muchachos con tanto saber y fuerza como tenia, y con tanto aparejo si le +pluguiere como con su gana. Supiera yo remediar todo esto y lo otro que +está dicho y ha pasado despues que estoy en las Indias, si me consintiera +la voluntad á procurar por mi bien propio y me fuera honesto. Mas el +sostener de la justicia y acrecentar el señorío de sus Altezas fasta +agora, me tiene al fondo. Hoy en dia que se falla tanto oro hay division +en que haya mas ganancia, ir robando ó ir á las minas. Por una muger +tambien se fallan cien castellanos como por una labranza, y es mucho en +uso, y ha ya fartos mercaderes que andan buscando muchachas: de nueve á +diez son agora en precio: de todas edades ha de tener un bueno. Digo que +en decir yo que el Comendador no podia dar franquezas que hice yo lo que +él deseaba; bien que yo á él dijese que era para dilatar fasta que sus +Altezas toviesen el aviso de la tierra y tornasen á ver y mandar lo que +fuese su servicio. Digo que la fuerza del maldecir de desconcertados me +ha hecho mas daño que mis servicios fecho provecho: mal ejemplo es por +lo presente y por lo futuro. Fago juramento que cantidad de hombres han +ido á las Indias que no merescian el agua para con Dios y con el mundo, +y agora vuelven allá. Enemistólos á ellos todos conmigo, y él parece, +segun se hobo y segun sus formas, que ya lo venia y bien encendido, ó es +que se dice que ha gastado mucho por venir á este negocio; no se dello +mas de lo que oyo. Yo nunca oí que el pesquisidor allegase los rebeldes y +los tomase por testigos contra aquel que gobierna á ellos y á otros sin +fe, ni dignos della. Si sus Altezas mandasen hacer una pesquisa general +allí vos digo yo que verian por gran maravilla como la isla no sé funde. +Yo creo que se acordará vuestra merced cuando lo tormenta sin velas me +echó en Lisbona, que fuí acusado falsamente que habia ido ya allá al Rey +para darle las Indias. Despues supieron sus Altezas al contrario, y que +todo fue con malicia. Bien que yo sepa poco: no sé quien me tenga por tan +torpe que yo no conozca que aunque las Indias fuesen mias, que yo no me +pudiera sostener sin ayuda de Príncipe. Si esto es así, adónde pudiera +yo tener mejor arrimo y seguridad de no ser echado dellas del todo que +en el Rey é Reina nuestros Señores, que de nada me han puesto en tanta +honra y son los mas altos Príncipes por la mar y por la tierra del mundo? +los cuales tienen que yo les haya servido, é me guardan mis privilegios y +mercedes, y si alguien me los quebranta sus Altezas me los acrescientan +con aventaja, como se vido en lo de Juan Aguado, y me mandar hacer mucha +honra, y como dije ya sus Altezas rescibieron de mí servicios y tienen +mis hijos sus criados, lo que en ninguna manera pudiera esto llegar con +otro Príncipe, porque adonde no hay amor todo lo otro cesa. Dije yo agora +ansi contra un maldecir con malicia y contra mi voluntad, porque es cosa +que ni en sueños debiera allegar á memoria, porque las formas y fechos +del Comendador Bobadilla, con malicia las quiere alumbrar en esto: mas yo +le faré ver con el brazo izquierdo que su poco saber y gran cobardiá con +desordenada cudicia le ha fecho caer en ello. Ya dije como yo le escrebí +y á los frailes, y luego partí así como le dije muy solo, porque toda la +gente estaba con el Adelantado, y tambien por le quitar de sospecha: él +cuando lo supo echó á D. Diego preso en una carabela cargado de fierros, +y á mi en llegando fizo otro tanto, y despues al Adelantado, cuando vino. +Ni le fablé mas á él ni consintió que hasta hoy nadie me haya fablado, +y fago juramento que no puedo pensar por qué sea yo preso. La primera +diligencia que fizo fue á tomar el oro, el cual hobo sin medida ni peso, +é yo absente dijo que queria él pagar dello á la gente, y segun oí para +sí fizo la primera parte, y enviar por resgate resgatadores nuevos. Desto +oro tenia yo apartado ciertas muestras, granos muy gruesos como huevos +como de ánsar, de gallina y de pollas, y de otras muchas fechuras, que +algunas personas tenian cogido en breve espacio, con que se alegrasen sus +Altezas, y por ello comprendiesen el negocio con una cantidad de piedras +grandes llenas de oro. Este fue el primero á se dar con malicia, porque +sus Altezas no tuviesen este negocio en algo fasta quel tenga fecho el +nido de que se dá buena priesa. El oro que está por fundir mengua al +fuego: una cadena que pesaria fasta veinte marcos nunca se ha visto. Yo +he sido muy agraviado en esto del oro mas aun que de las perlas, porque +no las he traido á sus Altezas. El Comendador en todo lo que le pareció +que me dañaria luego fue puesto en obra. Ya dije, con seiscientos mil +maravedises pagara á todos sin robar á nadie y habia mas de cuatro +cuentos de diezmos y alguacilazgo sin tocar en el oro. Hizo unas +larguezas que son de risa, bien que creo que encomenzó en sí la primera +parte: allá lo sabran sus Altezas cuando le mandaren tomar cuenta, en +especial si yo estuviese á ella. El no face sino decir que se debe gran +suma, y es la que yo dije y no tanto. Yo he sido muy mucho agraviado en +que se haya enviado pesquisidor sobre mí, que sepa que si la pesquisa +que él enviare fuere muy grave que él quedará en el gobierno.—Pluguiera +á nuestro Señor que sus Altezas le enviaran á él ó á otro dos años ha, +porque sé que yo fuera ya libre de escándalo y de infamia, y no se me +quitara mi honra ni la perdiera: Dios es justo, y ha de hacer que se +sepa por que y cómo. Allí me juzgan como Gobernador que fue á Cecilia ó +ciudad ó villa puesta en regimiento y adonde las leyes se pueden guardar +por entero sin temor de que se pierda todo, y rescibo grande agravio. +Yo debo ser juzgado como Capitan que fue de España á conquistar fasta +las Indias á gente belicosa y mucha, y de costumbres y seta á nos muy +contraria: los cuales viven por sierras y montes, sin pueblo asentado +ni nosotros; y adonde por voluntad Divina he puesto só el señorio del +Rey é de la Reina nuestros Señores otro mundo; y por donde la España, +que era dicha pobre, es la mas rica. Yo dobo ser juzgado como Capitan +que de tanto tiempo fasta hoy trae las armas á cuestas sin las dejar una +hora, y de Caballeros de conquistas y del uso, y no de letras, salvo si +fuesen de Griegos ó de Romanos, ó de otros modernos de que hay tantos y +tan nobles en España, ca de otra guisa rescibo grande agravio porque en +las Indias no hay pueblo ni asiento. Del oro y perlas ya está abierta la +puerta y cantidad de todo, piedras preciosas y especería, y de otras mil +cosas se pueden esperar firmemente; y nunca mas mal me viniese como con +el nombre de Nuestro Señor le daria el primer viage, así como diera la +negociacion del Arabia feliz fasta la Meca, como yo escribí á sus Altezas +con Antonio de Torres en la respuesta de la reparticion del mar é tierra +con los Portogueses: y despues viniera á lo de polo artico, así coma lo +dije y dí por escripto en el monesterio de la Mejorada. Las nuevas del +oro que yo dije que daria son que dia de Navidad, estando yo muy afligido +guerreado de los malos Cristianos y de Indios, en términos de dejar todo +y escapar si pudiese la vida; me consoló nuestro Señor milagrosamente y +dijo: “_Esfuerza, no desmayes mi temas: yo proveeré en todo; los siete +años del término del oro no son pasados, y en ello y en lo otro te daré +remedio._” Ese dia supe que habia ochenta leguas de tierra, y en todo +cabo dellas minas; el parecer agora es que sea toda una. Algunos han +cogido ciento y veinte castellanos en un dia, otros noventa, y se ha +llegado fasta docientos y cincuenta. De cincuenta fasta setenta, y otros +muchos de veínte fasta cincuenta, es tenido por buen jornal y muchos lo +continuaban: el comun es seis fasta doce, y quien de aquí abaja no es +contento. Parece tambien que estas minas son como las otras que responden +en los dias no igualmente: las minas son nuevas y los cogedores. El +parecer de todos es que aunque vaya allá toda Castilla, que por torpe +que sea la persona, que no abajará de un castellano ó dos cada dia, y +agora es esto así en fresco. Es verdad que el que tiene algun indio coge +esto, mas el negocio consiste en el Cristiano. Ved que discrecion fue +de Bobadilla dar todo por ninguno y cuatro cuentos de diezmos sin causa +ni ser requerido, sin primero lo notificar á sus Altezas; y el daño no +es este solo. Yo sé que mis yerros no han sido con fin de facer mal, y +creo que sus Altezas lo creen así como yo lo digo; y sé y veo que usan de +misericordia con quien maliciosamente los desirve. Yo creo y tengo por +muy cierto que muy mejor y mas piedad harán conmigo que caí en ello con +inocencia y forzosamente, como sabran despues por entero, y el cual soy +su fechura, y mirirán á mis servicíos, y cognoscerán de cada dia que son +muy aventajados. Todo pornan en una balanza, así como nos cuenta la Santa +Escriptura que será el bien con el mal en el dia del juicio. Si todavía +mandan que otro me juzgue, lo cual no espero, y que sea por pesquisa +de las Indias, humilmente les suplico que envien allá dos personas de +consciencia y honrados á mi costa, los cuales fallaran de ligero agora +que se halla el oro cinco marcos en cuatro horas, con esto é sin ello es +muy necesario que lo provean. El Comendador, en llegando á Santo Domingo +se aposentó en mi casa; así como la falló así dió todo por suyo: vaya en +buena hora, quizá lo habia menester: cosario nunca tal usó con mercader. +De mis escripturas tengo yo mayor queja que así me las haya tomado, que +jamas se le pudo sacar una, y aquellas que mas me habian de aprovechar en +mi disculpa esas tenia mas ocultas. Ved que justo y honesto pesquisidor. +Cosa de cuantas él haya hecho me dicen que haya seido con término de +justicia, salvo absolutamente. Dios nuestro Señor está con sus fuerzas y +saber, como solia, y castiga en todo cabo, en especial la ingratitud de +injurias. + + +FOOTNOTES: + +[189] Although Zuñiga says that Doña Maria de Guzman was appointed nurse +by Queen Isabella at the birth of Prince John, it is nevertheless certain +that this letter was addressed by Columbus to Doña Juana de la Torres, a +great favourite of the queen, sister of Antonio de Torres, who was with +the admiral in the second voyage, and who bore the memorial to their +Highnesses. + +[190] This is related by his son Don Ferdinand, in cap. 84 of his +history, and is more amply described in the letter addressed by Columbus +to the sovereigns, describing his fourth voyage. It took place the day +after Christmas day, 1499. + +[191] He refers to the death of Prince John, which occurred in Salamanca, +on the fourth of October 1497. + +[192] After the admiral had discovered the island of Trinidad, he sailed +along the coast of Paria, discovered the island of Margarita, and entered +the harbour of San Domingo the thirtieth of August 1498, where he found +the colony in rebellion, and the Spaniards embroiled in quarrels, both +with each other and with the Indians. + +[193] Alonzo de Hojeda reached Española on the fifth of September 1498. + +[194] Roldan was by this time reconciled to the Admiral, and the +rebellion was allayed, when Hojeda arrived, making great boast of his +favour with bishop Fonseca, Columbus’ enemy, and endeavoured to excite +fresh animosity against him; but he had to leave Española completely. + +[195] Adrian Mogica, who had been one of the rebels with Roldan. + +[196] Columbus returned to Cadiz from his second voyage, on the 11th of +June, 1496. He was well received by the sovereigns, and they gave orders +for preparing the requisites for a third voyage; but the fulfilment of +these orders was delayed by Bishop Fonseca until the 30th of May, 1498. + +[197] Francesco de Bobadilla, commander of the order of Calatrava, +reached San Domingo on the 23rd of August, 1500. + +[198] This expression of the Admiral’s, makes it appear that he wrote +this letter when he was near reaching Cadiz, on the 25th of November, +1500. + +[199] An ancient gold coin, varying in value under different kings. + +[200] The old Spaniards used to give the name of “_caballero de +conquista_,” to each of the conquerors, among whom the conquered lands +were divided. + +[201] There is no sense in this expression, nor as it is given in the +“Codice Colombo Americano”, where it stands thus: “que jaz hase ellas de +que”, etc. Perhaps “hase” is miscopied for “hacia” “towards.” + + + + +FOURTH VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS. + + +_A Letter written by Don Christopher Columbus, Viceroy and Admiral of +the Indies, to the most Christian and mighty Sovereigns, the King and +Queen of Spain, in which are described the events of his voyage, and +the countries, provinces, cities, rivers, and other marvellous matters +therein discovered, as well as the places where gold and other substances +of great richness and value are to be found._ + +Most Serene, and very high and mighty Princes, the King and Queen our +Sovereigns:—My passage from Cadiz to the Canary occupied four days, and +thence to the Indies, from which I wrote, sixteen days. My intention was +to expedite my voyage as much as possible while I had good vessels, good +crews and stores, and because Jamaica was the place to which I was bound. +I wrote this in Dominica. + +Up to the period of my reaching these shores I experienced most +excellent weather, but the night of my arrival came in with a dreadful +tempest, and the same bad weather has continued ever since. On reaching +the island of Española I despatched a packet of letters, by which I +begged as a favour that a ship should be supplied me at my own cost in +lieu of one of those that I had brought with me, and which had become +unseaworthy, and could no longer carry sail. The letters were taken, +and your Highnesses will know if a reply has been given to them. For my +part I was forbidden to go on shore; the hearts of my people failed them +lest I should take them further, and they said that if any danger were +to befall them, they should receive no succour, but, on the contrary, +in all probability have some great affront offered them. Moreover every +man had it in his power to tell me that the new Governor would have the +superintendence of the countries that I might acquire. + +The tempest was terrible throughout the night, all the ships were +separated, and each one driven to the last extremity, without hope of +anything but death; each of them also looked upon the loss of the rest +as a matter of certainty. What man was ever born, not even excepting +Job, who would not have been ready to die of despair at finding himself +as I then was, in anxious fear for my own safety, and that of my son, my +brother, and my friends, and yet refused permission either to land or +to put into harbour on the shores which by God’s mercy I had gained for +Spain with so much toil and danger? + +But to return to the ships: although the tempest had so completely +separated them from me as to leave me single, yet the Lord restored them +to me in his own good time. The ship which we had the greatest fear +for, had put out to sea for safety, and reached the island of Gallega, +having lost her boat and a great part of her provisions, which latter +loss indeed all the ships suffered. The vessel in which I was, though +dreadfully buffeted, was saved by our Lord’s mercy from any injury +whatever; my brother went in the ship that was unsound, and he under God +was the cause of its being saved. With this tempest I struggled on till +I reached Jamaica, and there the sea became calm, but there was a strong +current which carried me as far as the Queen’s Garden without seeing +land. Hence as opportunity afforded I pushed on for terra firma, in spite +of the wind and a fearful contrary current, against which I contended +for sixty days, and after all only made seventy leagues. All this time +I was unable to get into harbour, nor was there any cessation of the +tempest, which was one continuation of rain, thunder, and lightning; +indeed it seemed as if it were the end of the world. I at length +reached the Cape of Gracias a Dios, and after that the Lord granted me +fair wind and tide; this was on the twelfth of September. Eighty-eight +days did this fearful tempest continue, during which I was at sea, and +saw neither sun nor stars; my ships lay exposed, with sails torn, and +anchors, rigging, cables, boats, and a great quantity of provisions lost; +my people were very weak and humbled in spirit, many of them promising +to lead a religious life, and all making vows and promising to perform +pilgrimages, while some of them would frequently go to their messmates +to make confession. Other tempests have been experienced, but never of +so long a duration or so fearful as this: many whom we looked upon as +brave men, on several occasions showed considerable trepidation; but the +distress of my son who was with me grieved me to the soul, and the more +when I considered his tender age, for he was but thirteen years old, +and he enduring so much toil for so long a time. Our Lord, however, gave +him strength even to enable him to encourage the rest, and he worked as +if he had been eighty years at sea, and all this was a consolation to +me. I myself had fallen sick, and was many times at the point of death, +but from a little cabin that I had caused to be constructed on deck, I +directed our course. My brother was in the ship that was in the worst +condition and the most exposed to danger; and my grief on this account +was the greater that I brought him with me against his will. + +Such is my fate, that the twenty years of service through which I have +passed with so much toil and danger, have profited me nothing, and at +this very day I do not possess a roof in Spain that I can call my own; if +I wish to eat or sleep, I have nowhere to go but to the inn or tavern, +and most times lack wherewith to pay the bill. Another anxiety wrung my +very heartstrings, which was the thought of my son Diego, whom I had left +an orphan in Spain, and stripped of the honour and property which were +due to him on my account, although I had looked upon it as a certainty, +that your Majesties, as just and grateful Princes, would restore it to +him in all respects with increase. I reached the land of Cariay, where I +stopped to repair my vessels and take in provisions, as well as to afford +relaxation to the men, who had become very weak. I myself (who, as I said +before, had been several times at the point of death) gained information +respecting the gold mines of which I was in search, in the province of +Ciamba; and two Indians conducted me to Carambaru, where the people (who +go naked) wear golden mirrors round their necks, which they will neither +sell, give, nor part with for any consideration. They named to me many +places on the sea-coast where there were both gold and mines. The last +that they mentioned was Veragua, which was about five-and-twenty leagues +distant from the place where we then were. I started with the intention +of visiting all of them, but when I had reached the middle of my journey +I learned that there were other mines at so short a distance that they +might be reached in two days. I determined on sending to see them. It was +on the eve of St. Simon and St. Jude, which was the day fixed for our +departure; but that night there arose so violent a storm, that we were +forced to go wherever it drove us, and the Indian who was to conduct us +to the mines was with us all the time. As I had found every thing true +that had been told me in the different places which I had visited, I felt +satisfied it would be the same with respect to Ciguare, which according +to their account, is nine days’ journey across the country westward: they +tell me there is a great quantity of gold there, and that the inhabitants +wear coral ornaments on their heads, and very large coral bracelets and +anklets, with which article also they adorn and inlay their seats, boxes, +and tables. They also said that the women there wore necklaces hanging +down to their shoulders. All the people agree in the report I now repeat, +and their account is so favourable that I should be content with the +tithe of the advantages that their description holds out. They are all +likewise acquainted with the pepper-plant. According to the account of +these people, the inhabitants of Ciguare are accustomed to hold fairs and +markets for carrying on their commerce, and they showed me also the mode +and form in which they transact their various exchanges. Others assert +that their ships carry guns, and that the men go clothed and use bows +and arrows, swords, and cuirasses, and that on shore they have horses +which they use in battle, and that they wear rich clothes and have most +excellent houses.[202] They also say that the sea surrounds Ciguare, and +that at ten days’ journey from thence is the river Ganges. These lands +appear to have the same bearings with respect to Veragua, as Tortosa +has to Fontarabia, or Pisa to Venice. When I left Carambaru and reached +the places in its neighbourhood, which I have above-mentioned as being +spoken of by the Indians, I found the customs of the people correspond +with the accounts that had been given of them, except as regarded the +golden mirrors: any man who had one of them would willingly part with it +for three hawks’-bells, although they were equivalent in weight to ten +or fifteen ducats. These people resemble the natives of Española in all +their habits. They have various modes of collecting the gold, none of +which will bear comparison with the plans adopted by the Christians. + +All that I have here stated is from hearsay. This, however, I know, that +in the year ninety-four I sailed twenty-four degrees to the westward in +nine hours, and there can be no mistake upon the subject, because there +was an eclipse; the sun was in Libra and the moon in Aries. What I had +learned by the mouth of these people I already knew in detail from books. +Ptolemy thought that he had satisfactorily corrected Marinus, and yet +this latter appears to have come very near to the truth. Ptolemy places +Catigara at a distance of twelve lines to the west of his meridian,[203] +which he fixes at two degrees and a third above Cape St. Vincent, in +Portugal. Marinus comprises the earth and its limits in fifteen lines, +and the same author describes the Indus in Ethiopia as being more than +four-and-twenty degrees from the equinoctial line, and now that the +Portuguese have sailed there they find it correct. Ptolemy says also that +the most southern land is the first boundary, and that it does not go +lower down than fifteen degrees and a third. The world is but small; out +of seven divisions of it the dry part occupies six, and the seventh only +is covered by water.[204] Experience has shown it, and I have written it +with quotations from the Holy Scripture, in other letters, where I have +treated of the situation of the terrestrial paradise, as approved by Holy +Church; and I say that the world is not so large as vulgar opinion makes +it, and that one degree from the equinoctial line measures fifty-six +miles and two-thirds; and this may be proved to a nicety. But I leave +this subject, which it is not my intention now to treat upon, but simply +to give a narrative of my laborious and painful voyage, although of all +my voyages it is the most honourable and advantageous. I have said that +on the eve of St. Simon and St. Jude I ran before the wind wherever it +took me, without power to resist it; at length I found shelter for ten +days from the roughness of the sea and the tempest overhead, and resolved +not to attempt to go back to the mines, which I regarded as already in +our possession. When I started in pursuance of my voyage it was under +a heavy rain, and reaching the harbour of Bastimentos I put in, though +much against my will. The storm and a rapid current kept me in for +fourteen days, when I again set sail, but not with favourable weather. +After I had made fifteen leagues with great exertions, the wind and the +current drove me back again with great fury, but in again making for +the port which I had quitted, I found on the way another port, which I +named Retrete, where I put in for shelter with as much risk as regret, +the ships being in sad condition, and my crews and myself exceedingly +fatigued. I remained there fifteen days, kept in by stress of weather, +and when I fancied my troubles were at an end, I found them only begun. +It was then that I changed my resolution with respect to proceeding to +the mines, and proposed doing something in the interim, until the weather +should prove more favourable for my voyage. I had already made four +leagues when the storm recommenced, and wearied me to such a degree that +I absolutely knew not what to do; my wound reopened, and for nine days my +life was despaired of. Never was the sea seen so high, so terrific, and +so covered with foam; not only did the wind oppose our proceeding onward, +but it also rendered it highly dangerous to run in for any headland, and +kept me in that sea which seemed to me as a sea of blood, seething like a +cauldron on a mighty fire. Never did the sky look more fearful; during +one day and one night it burned like a furnace, and emitted flashes in +such fashion that each time I looked to see if my masts and my sails +were not destroyed; these flashes came with such alarming fury that we +all thought the ship must have been consumed. All this time the waters +from heaven never ceased, not to say that it rained, for it was like a +repetition of the deluge. The men were at this time so crushed in spirit, +that they longed for death as a deliverance from so many martyrdoms. +Twice already had the ships suffered loss in boats, anchors, and rigging, +and were now lying bare without sails. + +When it pleased our Lord, I returned to Puerto Gordo, where I recruited +my condition as well as I could. I then once more attempted the voyage +towards Veragua, although I was by no means in a fit state to undertake +it. The wind and currents were still contrary. I arrived at nearly the +same spot as before, and there again the wind and currents still opposed +my progress; once more I was compelled to put into harbour, not daring +to encounter the opposition of Saturn[205] with such a boisterous sea, +and on so formidable a coast; for it almost always brings on a tempest +or severe weather. This was on Christmas-day, about the hour of mass. +Thus, after all these fatigues, I had once more to return to the spot +from whence I started; and when the new year had set in, I returned +again to my task: but although I had fine weather for my voyage, the +ships were no longer in a sailing condition, and my people were either +dying or very sick. On the day of the Epiphany, I reached Veragua in a +state of exhaustion; there, by our Lord’s goodness, I found a river and +a safe harbour, although at the entrance there were only ten spans of +water. I succeeded in making an entry, but with great difficulty; and +on the following day the storm recommenced, and had I been still on the +outside at that time, I should have been unable to enter on account of +the bar. It rained without ceasing until the fourteenth of February, so +that I could find no opportunity of penetrating into the interior, nor of +recruiting my condition in any respect whatever; and on the twenty-fourth +of January, when I considered myself in perfect safety, the river +suddenly rose with great violence to a considerable height, breaking my +cables and the supports[206] to which they were fastened, and nearly +carrying away my ships altogether, which certainly appeared to me to be +in greater danger than ever. Our Lord, however, brought a remedy as He +has always done. I do not know if any one else ever suffered greater +trials. + +On the sixth of February, while it was still raining, I sent seventy men +on shore to go into the interior, and, at five leagues’ distance they +found several mines. The Indians who went with them, conducted them to +a very lofty mountain, and thence showing them the country all round, +as far as the eye could reach, told them there was gold in every part, +and that, towards the west, the mines extended twenty days’ journey; +they also recounted the names of the towns and villages where there was +more or less of it. I afterwards learned that the cacique Quibian, who +had lent these Indians, had ordered them to show the distant mines, and +which belonged to an enemy of his; but that in his own territory, one +man might, if he would, collect in ten days as much as a child could +carry. I bring with me some Indians, his servants, who can bear witness +to this fact. The boats went up to the spot where the dwellings of these +people are situated; and, after four hours, my brother returned with +the guides, all of them bringing back gold which they had collected at +that place. The gold must therefore be abundant, and of good quality, +for none of these men had ever seen mines before; very many of them had +never seen pure gold, and most of them were seamen and lads. Having +building materials in abundance, I established a settlement, and made +many presents to Quibian, which is the name they gave to the lord of the +country. I plainly saw that harmony would not last long, for the natives +are of a very rough disposition, and the Spaniards very encroaching; +and, moreover, I had taken possession of land belonging to Quibian. When +he saw what we did, and found the traffic increasing, he resolved upon +burning the houses, and putting us all to death; but his project did not +succeed, for we took him prisoner, together with his wives, his children, +and his servants. His captivity, it is true, lasted but a short time, for +he eluded the custody of a trustworthy man, into whose charge he had +been given, with a guard of men; and his sons escaped from a ship, in +which they had been placed under the special charge of the master. + +In the month of January the mouth of the river was entirely closed up, +and in April the vessels were so eaten with the teredo, that they could +scarcely be kept above water. At this time the river forced a channel for +itself, by which I managed, with great difficulty, to extricate three of +them after I had unloaded them. The boats were then sent back into the +river for water and salt, but the sea became so high and furious, that +it afforded them no chance of exit; upon which the Indians collected +themselves together in great numbers, and made an attack upon the boats, +and at length massacred the men. My brother, and all the rest of our +people, were in a ship which remained inside; I was alone, outside, +upon that dangerous coast, suffering from a severe fever and worn with +fatigue. All hope of escape was gone. I toiled up to the highest part of +the ship, and, with a quivering voice and fast-falling tears, I called +upon your Highnesses’ war-captains from each point of the compass to +come to my succour, but there was no reply. At length, groaning with +exhaustion, I fell asleep, and heard a compassionate voice address me +thus:—“_O fool, and slow to believe and to serve thy God, the God of +all! what did He do more for Moses, or for David his servant, than +He has done for thee? From thine infancy He has kept thee under His +constant and watchful care. When He saw thee arrived at an age which +suited His designs respecting thee, He brought wonderful renown to thy +name throughout all the land. He gave thee for thine own the Indies, +which form so rich a portion of the world, and thou hast divided them +as it pleased thee, for He gave thee power to do so. He gave thee also +the keys of those barriers of the ocean sea which were closed with such +mighty chains; and thou wast obeyed through many lands, and gained an +honourable fame throughout Christendom. What did the Most High do for the +people of Israel, when He brought them out of Egypt? or for David, whom +from a shepherd He made to be king in Judæa? Turn to Him, and acknowledge +thine error—His mercy is infinite. Thine old age shall not prevent thee +from accomplishing any great undertaking. He holds under His sway the +greatest possessions. Abraham had exceeded a hundred years of age when +he begat Isaac; nor was Sarah young. Thou criest out for uncertain help: +answer, who has afflicted thee so much and so often, God or the world? +The privileges promised by God, He never fails in bestowing; nor does +He ever declare, after a service has been rendered Him, that such was +not agreeable with His intention, or that He had regarded the matter in +another light; nor does He inflict suffering, in order to make a show of +His power. His acts answer to His words; and He performs all His promises +with interest. Is this the usual course? Thus I have told you what the +Creator has done for thee, and what He does for all men. Even now He +partially shows thee the reward of so many toils and dangers incurred by +thee in the service of others._” + +I heard all this, as it were, in a trance; but I had no answer to give +in definite words, and could but weep for my errors. He who spoke to +me, whoever he was, concluded by saying,—“_Fear not, but trust; all +these tribulations are recorded on marble, and not without cause._” I +arose as soon as I could; and at the end of nine days there came fine +weather, but not sufficiently so to allow of drawing the vessels out of +the river. I collected the men who were on land, and, in fact, all of +them that I could, because there were not enough to admit of one party +remaining on shore while another stayed on board to work the vessels. I +myself should have remained with my men to defend the buildings I had +constructed, had your Highnesses been cognizant of all the facts; but +the doubt whether any ships would ever reach the spot where we were, as +well as the thought, that while I was asking for succour I might bring +succour to myself, made me decide upon leaving. I departed, in the name +of the Holy Trinity, on Easter night, with the ships rotten, worm-eaten, +and full of holes. One of them I left at Belem, with a supply of +necessaries; I did the same at Belpuerto. I then had only two left, and +they in the same state as the others. I was without boats or provisions, +and in this condition I had to cross seven thousand miles of sea; or, as +an alternative, to die on the passage with my son, my brother, and so +many of my people. Let those who are in the habit of finding fault and +censuring, ask, while they sit in security at home, “Why did you not do +so and so under such circumstances?” I wish they now had this voyage to +make. I verily believe that another journey of another kind awaits them, +if there is any reliance to be placed upon our holy faith. + +On the thirteenth of May I reached the province of Mago,[207] which is +contiguous to that of Cathay, and thence I started for the island of +Española. I sailed two days with a good wind, after which it became +contrary. The route that I followed called forth all my care to avoid the +numerous islands, that I might not be stranded on the shoals that lie +in their neighbourhood. The sea was very tempestuous, and I was driven +backward under bare poles. I anchored at an island, where I lost, at +one stroke, three anchors; and, at midnight, when the weather was such +that the world appeared to be coming to an end, the cables of the other +ship broke, and it came down upon my vessel with such force that it was +a wonder we were not dashed to pieces; the single anchor that remained +to me, was, next to the Lord, our only preservation. After six days, +when the weather became calm, I resumed my journey having already lost +all my tackle; my ships were pierced with worm-holes, like a bee-hive, +and the crew entirely paralysed with fear and in despair. I reached the +island a little beyond the point at which I first arrived at it, and +there I stayed to recover myself from the effects of the storm; but I +afterwards put into a much safer port in the same island. After eight +days I put to sea again, and reached Jamaica by the end of June; but +always beating against contrary winds, and with the ships in the worst +possible condition. With three pumps, and the use of pots and kettles, we +could scarcely with all hands clear the water that came into the ship, +there being no remedy but this for the mischief done by the ship-worm. I +steered in such a manner as to come as near as possible to Española, from +which we were twenty-eight leagues distant, but I afterwards wished I had +not done so, for the other ship which was half under water was obliged +to run in for a port. I determined on keeping the sea in spite of the +weather, and my vessel was on the very point of sinking when our Lord +miraculously brought us upon land. Who will believe what I now write? +I assert that in this letter I have not related one hundredth part of +the wonderful events that occurred in this voyage; those who were with +the Admiral[208] can bear witness to it. If your Highnesses would be +graciously pleased to send to my help a ship of above sixty-four tons, +with two hundred quintals of biscuits and other provisions, there would +then be sufficient to carry me and my crew from Española to Spain. I have +already said that there are not twenty-eight leagues between Jamaica and +Española; and I should not have gone there, even if the ships had been in +a fit condition for so doing, because your Highnesses ordered me not to +land there. God knows if this command has proved of any service. I send +this letter by means of and by the hands of Indians; it will be a miracle +if it reaches its destination. + +This is the account I have to give of my voyage. The men who accompanied +me were a hundred and fifty in number, among whom were many calculated +for pilots and good sailors, but none of them can explain whither I +went nor whence I came. The reason is very simple. I started from a +point above the port of Brazil, and while I was in Española, the storm +prevented me from following my intended route, for I was obliged to go +wherever the wind drove me; at the same time I fell very sick, and there +was no one who had navigated in these parts before. However, after some +days, the wind and sea became tranquil, and the storm was succeeded by +a calm, but accompanied with rapid currents. I put into harbour at an +island called Isla de las Bocas, and then steered for terra firma; but +it is impossible to give a correct account of all our movements, because +I was carried away by the current so many days without seeing land. I +ascertained, however, by the compass and by observation, that I moved +parallel with the coast of terra firma. No one could tell under what +part of the heavens we were, nor at what period I bent my course for +the island of Española. The pilots thought we had come to the island of +St. John, whereas it was the land of Mango, four hundred leagues to the +westward of where they said. Let them answer and say if they know where +Veragua is situated. I assert that they can give no other account than +that they went to lands, where there was an abundance of gold, and this +they can certify surely enough; but they do not know the way to return +thither for such a purpose; they would be obliged to go on a voyage of +discovery as much as if they had never been there before. There is a +mode of reckoning derived from astronomy which is sure and safe, and a +sufficient guide to anyone who understands it. This resembles a prophetic +vision. The Indian vessels do not sail except with the wind abaft, +but this is not because they are badly built or clumsy, but because +the strong currents in those parts, together with the wind, render it +impossible to sail with the bowline,[209] for in one day they would lose +as much way as they might have made in seven; for the same reason I could +make no use of caravels, even though they were Portuguese latteens. This +is the cause that they do not sail unless with a regular breeze, and they +will sometimes stay in harbour waiting for this seven or eight months at +a time; nor is this anything wonderful, for the same very often occurs +in Spain. The nation of which Pope Pius writes[210] has now been found, +judging at least by the situation and other evidences, excepting the +horses with the saddles and poitrels and bridles of gold; but this is not +to be wondered at, for the lands on the sea-coast are only inhabited by +fishermen, and moreover I made no stay there, because I was in haste to +proceed on my voyage. In Cariay and the neighbouring country there are +great enchanters of a very fearful character. They would have given the +world to prevent my remaining there an hour. When I arrived they sent +me immediately two girls very showily dressed; the eldest could not be +more than eleven years of age and the other seven, and both exhibited so +much immodesty, that more could not be expected from public women; they +carried concealed about them a magic powder; when they came I gave them +some articles to dress themselves out with, and directly sent them back +to the shore. I saw here, built on a mountain, a sepulchre as large as a +house, and elaborately sculptured, the body lay uncovered and with the +face downwards; they also spoke to me of other very excellent works of +art. There are many species of animals both small and large, and very +different from those of our country. I had at the time two boars, that +an Irish dog would not dare to face. An archer had wounded an animal +like an ape, except that it was larger, and had a face like a man’s; the +arrow had pierced it from the neck to the tail, which made it so fierce +that they were obliged to disable it by cutting off one of its arms and +a leg; one of the boars grew wild on seeing this and fled; upon which I +ordered the _begare_ (as the inhabitants called him) to be thrown to the +boar, and though the animal was nearly dead, and the arrow had passed +quite through his body, yet he threw his tail round the snout of the +boar, and then holding him firmly, seized him by the nape of the neck +with his remaining hand, as if he were engaged with an enemy. This action +was so novel and so extraordinary, that I have thought it worth while +to describe it here. There is a great variety of animals here, but they +all die of the barra.[211] I saw some very large fowls (the feathers of +which resemble wool), lions, stags, fallow-deer, and birds. + +When we were so harassed with our troubles at sea, some of our men +imagined that we were under the influence of sorcery, and even to this +day entertain the same notion. Some of the people whom I discovered were +cannibals, as was evidenced by the brutality of their countenances. They +say that there are great mines of copper in the country, of which they +make hatchets and other elaborate articles, both cast and soldered; +they also make of it forges, with all the apparatus of the goldsmith, +and crucibles. The inhabitants go clothed; and in that province I saw +some large sheets of cotton very elaborately and cleverly worked, and +others very delicately pencilled in colours. They told me that more +inland towards Cathay they have them interwoven with gold. For want of +an interpreter we were able to learn but very little respecting these +countries, or what they contain. Although the country is very thickly +peopled, yet each nation has a very different language; indeed so much +so, that they can no more understand each other than we understand the +Arabs. I think, however, that this applies to the barbarians on the +sea-coast, and not to the people who live more inland. When I discovered +the Indies, I said that they composed the richest lordship in the world; +I spoke of gold and pearls and precious stones, of spices, and the +traffic that might be carried on in them; and because all these things +were not forthcoming at once I was abused. This punishment causes me to +refrain from relating anything but what the natives tell me. One thing +I can venture upon stating, because there are so many witnesses of it, +viz., that in this land of Veragua I saw more signs of gold in the two +first days than I saw in Española during four years, and that there is +not a more fertile or better cultivated country in all the world, nor +one whose inhabitants are more timid; added to which there is a good +harbour, a beautiful river, and the whole place is capable of being +easily put into a state of defence. All this tends to the security of the +Christians, and the permanency of their sovereignty, while it affords the +hope of great increase and honour to the Christian religion; moreover +the road hither will be as short as that to Española, because there is a +certainty of a fair wind for the passage. Your Highnesses are as much +lords of this country as of Xeres or Toledo, and your ships that may +come here will do so with the same freedom as if they were going to your +own royal palace. From hence they will obtain gold, and whereas if they +should wish to become masters of the products of other lands, they will +have to take them by force, or retire empty-handed, in this country they +will simply have to trust their persons in the hands of a savage. + +I have already explained my reason for refraining to treat of other +subjects respecting which I might speak. I do not state as certain, nor +do I confirm even the sixth part of all that I have said or written, +nor do I pretend to be at the fountain-head of the information. The +Genoese, Venetians, and all other nations that possess pearls, precious +stones, and other articles of value, take them to the ends of the world +to exchange them for gold. Gold is the most precious of all commodities; +gold constitutes treasure, and he who possesses it has all he needs in +this world, as also the means of rescuing souls from purgatory, and +restoring them to the enjoyment of paradise. They say that when one of +the lords of the country of Veragua dies, they bury all the gold he +possessed with his body. There were brought to Solomon at one journey +six hundred and sixty-six quintals of gold, besides what the merchants +and sailors brought, and that which was paid in Arabia. Of this gold he +made two hundred lances and three hundred shields, and the entablature +which was above them was also of gold, and ornamented with precious +stones: many other things he made likewise of gold, and a great number of +vessels of great size, which he enriched with precious stones. This is +related by Josephus in his Chronicle “de Antiquitatibus”; mention is also +made of it in the Chronicles and in the Book of Kings. Josephus thinks +that this gold was found in the Aurea; if it were so, I contend that +these mines of the Aurea are identical with those of Veragua, which, as +I have said before, extends westward twenty days’ journey, at an equal +distance from the Pole and the Line. Solomon bought all of it,—gold, +precious stones, and silver,—but your Majesties need only send to seek +them to have them at your pleasure. David, in his will, left three +thousand quintals of Indian gold to Solomon, to assist in building the +Temple; and, according to Josephus, it came from these lands. Jerusalem +and Mount Sion are to be rebuilt by the hands of Christians, as God has +declared by the mouth of His prophet in the fourteenth Psalm. The Abbé +Joaquim said that he who should do this was to come from Spain; Saint +Jerome showed the holy woman the way to accomplish it; and the emperor +of Cathay has, some time since, sent for wise men to instruct him in +the faith of Christ. Who will offer himself for this work? Should any +one do so, I pledge myself, in the name of God, to convey him safely +thither, provided the Lord permits me to return to Spain. The people who +have sailed with me have passed through incredible toil and danger, and +I beseech your Highnesses, since they are poor, to pay them promptly, +and to be gracious to each of them according to their respective merits; +for I can safely assert, that to my belief they are the bearers of the +best news that ever were carried to Spain. With respect to the gold +which belongs to Quibian, the cacique of Veragua, and other chiefs in +the neighbouring country, although it appears by the accounts we have +received of it to be very abundant, I do not think it would be well or +desirable, on the part of your Highnesses, to take possession of it +in the way of plunder; by fair dealing, scandal and disrepute will be +avoided, and all the gold will thus reach your Highnesses’ treasury +without the loss of a grain. With one month of fair weather I shall +complete my voyage. As I was deficient in ships, I did not persist in +delaying my course; but in everything that concerns your Highnesses’ +service, I trust in Him who made me, and I hope also that my health will +be re-established. I think your Highnesses will remember that I had +intended to build some ships in a new manner, but the shortness of the +time did not permit it. I had certainly foreseen how things would be. I +think more of this opening for commerce, and of the lordship over such +extensive mines, than of all that has been done in the Indies. This is +not a child to be left to the care of a step-mother. + +I never think of Española, and Paria, and the other countries, without +shedding tears. I thought that what had occurred there would have been +an example for others; on the contrary, these settlements are now in a +languid state, although not dead, and the malady is incurable, or at +least very extensive: let him who brought the evil come now and cure +it, if he knows the remedy, or how to apply it; but when a disturbance +is on foot, every one is ready to take the lead. It used to be the +custom to give thanks and promotion to him who placed his person in +jeopardy; but there is no justice in allowing the man who opposed this +undertaking, to enjoy the fruits of it with his children. Those who +left the Indies, avoiding the toils consequent upon the enterprise, +and speaking evil of it and me, have since returned with official +appointments,—such is the case now in Veragua: it is an evil example, and +profitless both as regards the business in which we are embarked, and +as respects the general maintenance of justice. The fear of this, with +other sufficient considerations, which I clearly foresaw, caused me to +beg your Highnesses, previously to my coming to discover these islands +and terra firma, to grant me permission to govern in your royal name. +Your Highnesses granted my request; and it was a privilege and treaty +granted under the royal seal and oath, by which I was nominated viceroy, +and admiral, and governor-general of all: and your Highnesses limited the +extent of my government to a hundred leagues beyond the Azores and Cape +Verde islands, by a line passing from one pole to the other, and gave me +ample power over all that I might discover beyond this line; all which +is more fully described in the official document. + +But the most important affair of all, and that which cries most loudly +for redress, remains inexplicable to this moment. For seven years was +I at your royal court, where every one to whom the enterprise was +mentioned, treated it as ridiculous; but now there is not a man, down to +the very tailors, who does not beg to be allowed to become a discoverer. +There is reason to believe, that they make the voyage only for plunder, +and that they are permitted to do so, to the great disparagement of my +honour, and the detriment of the undertaking itself. It is right to give +God His due,—and to receive that which belongs to one’s self. This is a +just sentiment, and proceeds from just feelings. The lands in this part +of the world, which are now under your Highnesses’ sway, are richer and +more extensive than those of any other Christian power, and yet, after +that I had, by the Divine will, placed them under your high and royal +sovereignty, and was on the point of bringing your majesties into the +receipt of a very great and unexpected revenue; and while I was waiting +for ships, to convey me in safety, and with a heart full of joy, to your +royal presence, victoriously to announce the news of the gold that I +had discovered, I was arrested and thrown, with my two brothers, loaded +with irons, into a ship, stripped, and very ill-treated, without being +allowed any appeal to justice. Who could believe, that a poor foreigner +would have risen against your Highnesses, in such a place, without any +motive or argument on his side; without even the assistance of any other +prince upon which to rely; but on the contrary, amongst your own vassals +and natural subjects, and with my sons staying at your royal court? I was +twenty-eight years old[212] when I came into your Highnesses’ service, +and now I have not a hair upon me that is not grey; my body is infirm, +and all that was left to me, as well as to my brothers, has been taken +away and sold, even to the frock that I wore, to my great dishonour. I +cannot but believe that this was done without your royal permission. +The restitution of my honour, the reparation of my losses, and the +punishment of those who have inflicted them, will redound to the honour +of your royal character; a similar punishment also is due to those who +plundered me of my pearls, and who have brought a disparagement upon +the privileges of my admiralty. Great and unexampled will be the glory +and fame of your Highnesses, if you do this, and the memory of your +Highnesses, as just and grateful sovereigns, will survive as a bright +example to Spain in future ages. The honest devotedness I have always +shown to your majesties’ service, and the so unmerited outrage with which +it has been repaid, will not allow my soul to keep silence, however much +I may wish it: I implore your Highnesses to forgive my complaints. I am +indeed in as ruined a condition as I have related; hitherto I have wept +over others;—may Heaven now have mercy upon me, and may the earth weep +for me. With regard to temporal things, I have not even a blanca for an +offering; and in spiritual things, I have ceased here in the Indies from +observing the prescribed forms of religion. Solitary in my trouble, sick, +and in daily expectation of death, surrounded by millions of hostile +savages full of cruelty, and thus separated from the blessed sacraments +of our holy Church, how will my soul be forgotten if it be separated from +the body in this foreign land? Weep for me, whoever has charity, truth, +and justice! I did not come out on this voyage to gain to myself honour +or wealth; this is a certain fact, for at that time all hope of such a +thing was dead. I do not lie when I say that I went to your Highnesses +with honest purpose of heart, and sincere zeal in your cause. I humbly +beseech your Highnesses, that if it please God to rescue me from this +place, you will graciously sanction my pilgrimage to Rome and other holy +places. May the Holy Trinity protect your Highnesses’ lives, and add to +the prosperity of your exalted position. + +Done in the Indies, in the island of Jamaica, on the seventh of July, in +the year one thousand five hundred and three. + + +CUARTO VIAGE DE COLON. + +_Carta que escribió D. Cristóbal Colon, Virey y Almirante de las Indias, +á los Cristianísimos y muy poderosos Rey y Reina de España, nuestros +Señores, en que les notifica cuanto le ha acontecido en su viage; y las +tierras, provincias, ciudades, rios y otras cosas maravillosas, y donde +hay minas de oro en mucha cantidad, y otras cosas de gran riqueza y +valor._ + +Serenísimos y muy altos y poderosos Príncipes Rey é Reina, nuestros +Señores: De Caliz pasé á Canaria en cuatro dias, y dende á las Indias en +diez y seis dias, donde escribia. Mi intencion era dar prisa á mi viage +en cuanto yo tenia los navíos buenos, la gente y los bastimentos, y que +mi derrota era en el Isla Jamaica; y en la Isla Dominica escribí esto: +fasta allí truje el tiempo á pedir por la boca. Esa noche que alli entré +fué con tormenta y grande, y me persiguió despues siempre. Cuando llegué +sobre la Española invié el envoltorio de cartas, y á pedir por merced un +navío por mis dineros, porque otro que yo llevaba era inavegable y no +sufria velas. Las cartas tomaron, y sabrán si se las dieron la respuesta. +Para mí fué mandarme de parte de ahí, que yo no pasase ni llegase á la +tierra: cayó el corazon á la gente que iba conmigo, por temor de los +llevar yo lejos, diciendo que si algun caso de peligro les viniese que +no serian remediados allí, antes les sería fecha alguna grande afrenta. +Tambien á quien plugo dijo que el Comendador habia de proveer las tierras +que yo ganase. La tormenta era terrible, y en aquella noche me desmembró +los navíos: á cada uno llevó por su cabo sin esperanzas, salvo de +muerte: cada uno de ellos tenia por cierto que los otros eran perdidos. +¿Quién nasció, sin quitar á Job, que no muriera desesperado? que por mi +salvacion y de mi fijo, hermano y amigos me fuese en tal tiempo defendida +la tierra y los puertos que yo, por la voluntad de Dios, gané á España +sudando sangre? E torno á los navíos que así me habia llevado la tormenta +y dejado á mí solo. Deparómelos nuestro Señor cuando le plugo. El navío +Sospechoso habia echado á la mar, por escapar, fasta la isola la Gallega; +perdió la barca, y todos gran parte de los bastimentos: en el que yo +iba, abalumado á maravilla, nuestro Señor le salvó que no hubo daño de +una paja. En el Sospechoso iba mi hermano; y él, despues de Dios, fue +su remedio. E con esta tormenta, así a gatas, me llegué á Jamaica: allí +se mudó de mar alta on calmería y grande corriente, y me llevó fasta +el Jardin de la Reina sin ver tierra. De allí, cuando pude, navegué +á la tierra firme; adonde me salió el viento y corriente terrible al +opósito: combati con ellos sesenta dias, y en fin no le pude ganar mas +de setenta leguas. En todo este tiempo no entré puerto, ni pude, ni me +dejó tormenta del cielo, agua y trombones y relámpagos de continuo, que +parecia el fin del mundo. Llegué al cabo de Gracias á Dios, y de allí +me dió nuestro Señor próspero el viento y corriente. Esto fue á doce de +Setiembre. Ochenta y ocho dias habia que no me habia dejado espantable +tormenta, á tanto que no vide el sol ni estrellas por mar; que á los +navíos tenia yo abiertos, á las velas rotas, y perdidas anclas y jarcia, +cables, con las barcas y muchos bastimentos, la gento muy enferma, y +todos contritos, y muchos con promesa de religion, y no ninguno sin otros +votos y romerías. Muchas veces habian llegado á se confesar los unos +á los otros. Otras tormentas se han visto, mas no durar tanto ni con +tanto espanto. Muchos esmorecieron, harto y hartas veces, que teniamos +por esforzados. El dolor del fijo que yo tenia allí me arrancaba el +ánima, y mas por verle de tan nueva edad de trece años en tanta fatiga, +y durar en ello tanto: nuestro Señor le dió tal esfuerzo que él avivaba +á los otros, y en las obras hacia el como si hubiera navegado ochenta +años, y él me consolaba. Yo habia adolescido y llegado fartas veces á +la muerte. De una camarilla, que yo mandé facer sobre cubierta, mandaba +la via. Mi hermano estaba en el peor navío y mas peligroso. Gran dolor +era mio, y mayor porque lo truje contra su grado; porque por mi dicha, +poco me han aprovechado veinte años de servicio que yo he servido con +tantos trabajos y peligros, que hoy dia no tengo en Castilla una teja; +si quiero comer ó dormir no tengo, salvo al meson ó taberna, y las mas +de las veces falta parar pagar el escote. Otra lastima me arrancaba el +corazon por las espaldas, y era D. Diego mi hijo, que yo dejé en España +tan huérfano y desposesionado de mi honra é hacienda; bien que tenia por +cierto que allá como justos y agradecidos Principes le restituirian con +acrescentamiento en todo. Llegué á tierra de Cariay, adonde me detuve +á remediar los navíos y bastimentos, y dar aliento á la gente, que +venia muy enferma. Yo que, como dije, habia llegado muchas veces á la +muerte, allí supe de las minas del oro de la provincia de Ciamba, que +yo buscaba. Dos indios me llevaron á Carambaru, adonde la gente anda +desnuda y al cuello un espejo de oro, mas no le querian vender ni dar á +trueque. Nombraronme muchos lugares en la costa de la mar, adonde decian +que habia oro y minas; el postrero era Veragua, y lejos de allí obra +de veinte y cinco leguas: partí con intencion de los tentar á todos, y +llegado ya el medio supe que habia minas á dos jornadas de andadura: +acorde de inviarlas á ver vispera de San Simon y Judas, que habia de ser +la partida: en esa noche se levantó tanta mar y viento, que fue necesario +de correr hácia adonde él quiso; é el indio adalid de las minas siempre +conmigo. En todos estos lugares, adonde yo habia estado, fallé verdad +todo lo que yo habia oido: esto me certifico que es así de la provincia +de Ciguare, que segun ellos, es descrita nueve jornadas de andadura por +tierra al Poniente: allí dicen que hay infinito oro, y que traen corales +en las cabezas, manillas á los pies y á los brazos dello, y bien gordas; +y dél, sillas, arcas, y mesas las guarnecen y enforran. Tambien dijeron +que las mugeres de allí traian collares colgados de la cabeza á las +espaldas. En esto que yo dijo, la gente toda de estos lugares conciertan +en ello, y dicen tanto que yo seria contento con el diezmo. Tambien todos +conocieron la pimienta. En Ciguare usan tratar en ferias y mercaderías: +esta gente así lo cuentan, y me amostraban el modo y forma que tienen en +la barata. Otrosi dicen que las naos traen bombardas, arcos y fiechas, +espadas y corazas, y andan vestidos, y en la tierra hay caballos, y usan +la guerra, y traen ricas vestiduras, y tienen buenas cosas. Tambien +dicen que la mar boxa á Ciguare, y de allí á diez jornadas es el rio de +Gangnes. Parece que estas tierras estan con Veragua, como Tortosa con +Fuenterabía, ó Pisa con Venecia. Cuando yo partí de Carambaru y llegué +á esos lugares que dije, fallé la gente en aquel mismo uso, salvo que +los espejos del oro: quien los tenia los daba por tres cascabeles de +gabilan por el uno, bien que pesasan diez ó quince ducados de peso. +En todos sus usos son como los de la Española. El oro cogen con otras +artes, bien que todos son nada con los de los Cristianos. Esto que yo +he dicho es lo que oyo. Lo que yo sé es que el año de noventa y cuatro +navegué en veinte y cuatro grados al Poniente en término de nueve horas, +y no pudo haber yerro porque hubo eclipses: el sol estaba en Libra y la +luna en Ariete. Tambien esto que yo supe por palabra habialo yo sabido +largo por escrito. Tolomeo creyó de haber bien remedado á Marino, y +ahora se falla su escritura bien propincua al cierto. Tolomeo asienta +Catigara á doce lineas lejos de su Occidente, que él asentó sobre el +cabo de San Vicente en Portugal dos grados y un tercio. Marino en quince +líneas constituyó la tierra é términos. Marino en Etiopia escribe al +Indo la línea equinocial mas de veinte y cuatro grados, y ahora que los +Portugueses le navegan le fallan cierto. Tolomeo diz que la tierra mas +austral es el plazo primero, y que no abaja mas de quince grados y un +tercio. E el mundo es poco: el enjuto de ello es seis partes, la séptima +solamente cubierta de agua: la experiencia ya está vista, y la escribí +por otras letras y con adornamiento de la Sacra Escriptura con el sitio +del Paraiso terrenal, que la santa Iglesia aprueba: digo que el mundo no +es tan grande como dice el vulgo, y que un grado de la equinoccial está +cincuenta y seis millas y dos tercios: pero esto se tocará con el dedo. +Dejo esto, por cuanto no es mi propósito de fablar en aquella materia, +salvo de dar cuenta de mi duro y trabajoso viage, bien que él sea el mas +noble y provechoso. Digo que víspera de San Simon y Judas corrí donde el +viento me llevaba, sin poder resistirle. En un puerto excusé diez dias de +gran fortuna de la mar y del cielo: allí acordé de no volver atras á las +minas, y dejelas ya por ganadas. Partí, por seguir mi viage, lloviendo: +llegué á puerto de Bastimentos, adonde entré y no de grado: la tormenta y +gran corriente me entró allí catorce dias; y despues partí, y no con buen +tiempo. Cuando yo hube andado quince leguas forzosamente, me reposó atras +el viento y corriente con furia: volviendo yo al puerto de donde habia +salido fallé en el camino al Retrete, adonde me retruje con harto peligro +y enojo y bien fatigado yo y los navíos y la gente: detúveme allí quince +dias, que así lo quiso el cruel tiempo; y cuando creí de haber acabado +me fallé de comienzo: allí mudé de sentencia de volver á las minas, y +hacer algo fasta que me viniese tiempo para mi viage y marear; y llegado +con cuatro leguas revino la tormenta, y me fatigó tanto á tanto que ya +no sabia de mi parte. Allí se me refrescó del mal la llaga: nueve dias +anduve perdido sin esperanza de vida: ojos nunca vieron la mar tan alta, +fea y hecha espuma. El viento no era para ir adelante, ni daba lugar para +correr hácia algun cabo. Allí me detenia en aquella mar fecha sangre, +herbiendo como caldera por gran fuego. El cielo jamas fue visto tan +espantoso: un dia con la noche ardió como forno: y así echaba la llama +con los rayos, que cada vez miraba yo si me habia llevado los masteles +y velas; venian con tanta furia espantables que todos creiamos que me +habian de fundir los navíos. En todo este tiempo jamas cesó agua del +cielo, y no para decir que llovia, salvo que resegundaba otro diluvio. La +gente estaba ya tan molida que deseaban la muerte para salir de tantos +martirios. Los navíos ya habian perdido dos veces las barcas, anclas, +cuerdas, y estaban abiertos, sin velas. + +Cuando plugo á nuestro Señor volví á Puerto Gordo, adonde reparé lo +mejor que pude. Volví otra vez hácia Veragua para mi viage, aunque yo +no estuviera para ello. Todavía era el viento y corrientes contrarios. +Llegué casi adonde antes, y allí me salió otra vez el viento y corrientes +al encuentro, y volví otra vez al puerto, que no osé esparar la oposicion +de Saturno con mares tan desbaratados en costa brava, porque las mas de +las veces trae tempestad ó fuerte tiempo. Esto fue dia de Navidad en +horas de misa. Volví otra vez adonde yo habia salido con harta fatiga; +y pasado año nuevo torné á la porfia, que aunque me hiciera buen tiempo +para mi viage, ya tenia los navíos innavegables, y la gente muerta y +enferma. Dia de la Epifania llegué á Veragua, ya sin aliento: allí me +deparó nuestro Señor un rio y seguro puerto, bien que á la entrada +no tenia salvo diez palmos de fondo: metíme en él con pena, y el dia +siguiente recordó la fortuna: si me falla fuera, no pudiera entrar á +causa del banco. Llovió sin cesar fasta catorce de Febrero, que nunca +hubo lugar de entrar en la tierra, ni de me remediar en nada: y estando +ya seguro á veinte y cuatro de Enero, de improviso vino el rio muy alto +y fuerte; quebróme las amarras y proeses, y hubo de llevar los navíos, +y cierto los ví en mayor peligro que nunca. Remedió nuestro Señor, como +siempre hizo. No sé si hubo otro con mas martirios. + +A seis de Febrero, lloviendo, invié setenta hombres la tierra adentro; y +á las cinco leguas fallaron muchas minas: los Indios que iban con ellos +los llevaron á un cerro muy alto, y de allí les mostraron hácia toda +parte cuanto los ojos alcanzaban, diciendo que en toda parte habia oro, +y que hácia el Poniente llegaban las minas veinte jornadas, y nombraban +las villas y lugares, y adonde habia de ello mas ó menos. Despues supe +yo que el Quibian que habia dado estos Indios, les habia mandado que +fuesen á mostrar las minas lejos y de otro su contrario; y que adentro +de su pueblo cogian, cuando el queria, un hombre en diez dias una mozada +de oro: los indios sus criados y testigos de esto traigo conmigo. Adonde +él tiene el pueblo llegan las barcas. Volvió mi hermano con esa gente, y +todos con oro que habian cogido en cuatro horas qué fué allá á la estada. +La calidad es grande, porque ninguno de estos jamas habia visto minas, +y los mas oro. Los mas eran gente de la mar, y casí todos grumetes. Yo +tenia mucho aparejo para edificar y muchos bastimentos. Asenté pueblo, +y dí muchas dádivas al Quibian, que así llaman al Señor de la tierra; +y bien sabia que no habia de durar la concordia: ellos muy rústicos y +nuestra gente muy importunos, y me aposesionaba en su término: despues +que él vido las cosas fechas y el tráfago tan vivo acordó de las quemar +y matarnos á todos: muy al reves salió su propósito: quedó preso él, +mugeres y fijos y criados; bien que su prision duró poco: el Quibian +se fuyo á un hombre honrado, á quien se habia entregado con guarda de +hombres; é los hijos se fueron á un Maestre de navío, a quien se dieron +en él á buen recaudo. + +En Enero se habia cerrado la boca del rio. En Abril los navíos estaban +todos comidos de broma, y no los podia sostener sobre agua. En este +tiempo hizo el rio una canal, por donde saqué tres dellos vacios con gran +pena. Las barcas volvieron adentro por la sal y agua. La mar se puso +alta y fea, y no les dejó salir fuera: los Indios fueron muchos y juntos +y las combatieron, y en fin los mataron. Mi hermano y la otra gente +toda estaban en un navío que quedo adentro: yo muy solo de fuera en tan +brava costa, con fuerte fiebre, en tanta fatiga: la esperanza de escapar +era muerta: subi así trabajando lo mas alto, llamando á voz temerosa, +llorando y muy aprisa, los maestros de la guerra de vuestras Altezas, +á todos cuatro los vientos, por socorro; mas nunca me respondieron. +Cansado, me dormecí gimiendo: una voz muy piadosa oí, diciendo: “_¡O +estulto y tardo á creer y servir á tu Dios, Dios de todos! ¿Que hizo él +mas por Moysés ó por David su siervo? Desque nasciste, siempre él tuvo +de tí muy grande cargo. Cuando te vido en edad de que él fue contento, +maravillosamente hizo sonar tu nombre en la tierra. Las Indias, que +son parte del mundo tam ricas, te las dió por tuyas: tu las repartiste +adonde te plugo, y te dió poder para ello. De los atamientos de la mar +océana, que estaban cerrados con cadenas tan fuertes, te dió las llaves; +y fuiste obedescido en tantas tierras, y de los cristianos cobraste tan +honrada fama. ¿Qué hizo el mas Alto [por el] pueblo de Israel cuando le +sacó de Egipto? ¿Ni por David, que de pastor hizo Rey en Judea? Tórnate +á el, y conoce ya tu yerro: su misericordia es infinita: tu vejez no +impedirá á toda cosa grande: muchas heredades tiene él grandísimas. +Abrahan pasaba de cien años cuando engendró á Isaac, ¿ni Sara era moza? +Tú llamas por socorro incierto: responde, ¿quién te ha afligido tanto y +tantas veces, Dios ó el mundo? Los privilegios y promesas que dá Dios, +no las quebranta, ni dice despues de haber recibido el servicio, que su +intencion no era este, y que se entiende de otra manera, ni dá martirios +por dar color á la fuerza: él vá al pie de la letra: todo lo que él +promete cumple con acrescentamiento: ¿esto es uso? Dicho tengo lo que tu +Criador ha fecho por tí y hace con todos. Ahora medio muestra el galardon +áe estos afanes y peligros que has pasado sirviendo á otros._” + +Yo así amortecido oí todo; mas no tuve yo respuesta á palabras tan +ciertas, salvo llorar por mis yerros. Acabó él de fablar, quien quiera +que fuese, diciendo: “_No temas, confia: todas estas tribulaciones estan +escritas en piedra mármol, y no sin causa._” + +Levantéme cuando pude: y al cabo de nueve dias hizo bonanza, mas no +para sacar navíos del rio. Recogí la gente que estaba en tierra, y todo +el resto que puede, porque no bastaban para quedar y para navegar los +navíos. Quedara yo á sostener el pueblo contodos, si vuestras Altezas +supieran de ello. El temor que nunca aportarian allí navíos me determinó +á esto, y la cuenta que cuando se haya de proveer de socorro se proveera +de todo. Partí en nombre de la Santísima Trinidad, la noche de Pascua, +con los navíos podridos, abrumados, todos fechos agujeros. Allí en Belen +dejé uno, y hartas cosas. En Belpuerto hice otro tanto. No me quedaron +salvo dos en el estado de los otros, y sin barcas y bastimentos, por +haber de pasar siete mil millas de mar y de agua, ó morir en la via con +fijo y hermano y tanta gente. Respondan ahora los que suelen tachar y +reprender, diciendo allá de en salvo: ¿por qué no haciades esto allí? +Los quisiera yo en esta jornada. Yo bien creo que otra de otro saber los +aguarda: á nuestra fe es ninguna. Llegué á trece de Mayo en la provincia +de Mago, que parte con aquella del Catayo, y de allí partí para la +Española: navegué dos dias con buen tiempo, y despues fue contrario. +El camino que yo llevaba era para desechar tanto número de islas, por +no me embarazar en los bajos de ellas. La mar brava me hizo fuerza, y +hube volver atras sin velas: surgí á una isla adonde de golpe perdí tres +anclas, y á la media noche, que parecia que el mundo se ensolvia, se +rompieron las amarras al otro navío, y vino sobre mí, que fue maravilla +como no nos acabamos de se hacer rajas: el ancla, de forma que me quedó, +fue ella despues de nuestro Señor, quien me sostuvo. Al cabo de seis +dias que ya era bonanza, volví á mi camino: asi ya perdido del todo +de aparejos y con los navíos horadados de gusanos mas que un panal de +abejas, y la gente tan acobardada y perdida, pasé algo adelante de donde +yo habia llegado denantes: allí me torné á reposar atras la fortuna: paré +en la misma isla en mas seguro puerto: al cabo de ocho dias torné á la +via y llegué á Jamaica en fin de Junio siempre con vientos punteros, y +los navíos en peor estado: con tres bombas, tinas y calderas no podian +con toda la gente vencer el agua que entraba en el navío, ni para este +mal de broma hay otra cura. Cometí el camino para me acercar á lo mas +cercar de la Española, que son veinte y ocho leguas, y no quisiera +haber comenzado. El otro navío corrió á buscar puerto casi anegado. +Yo porfié la vuelta de la mar con tormenta. El navio se me anegó, que +milagrosamente me trujo nuestro Señor á tierra. ¿Quién creyera lo que +yo aquí escribo? Digo que de cien partes no he dicho la una en esta +letra. Los que fueron con el Almirante lo atestigüen. Si place á vuestras +Altezas de me hacer merced de socorro un navío que pase de sesenta y +cuatro, con ducientos quintales de bizcocho y algun otro bastimento, +abastará para me llevar á mí y á esta gente á España de la Española. En +Jamaica ya dije que no hay veinte y ocho leguas á la Española. No fuera +yo, bien que los navíos estuvieran para ello. Ya dije que me fue mandado +de parte de vuestras Altezas que no llegase á alla. Si este mandar ha +aprovechado, Dios lo sabe. Esta carta invio por via y mano de Indios: +grande maravilla será si allá llega. De mi viage digo: que fueron ciento +y cincuenta personas conmigo, en que hay hartos suficientes para pilotos +y grandes marineros: ninguno puede dar razon cierta por donde fuí yo ni +vine: la razon es muy presta. Yo partí de sobre el puerto del Brasil: +en la Española no me dejó la tormenta ir al camino que yo queria: fue +por fuerza correr adonde el viento quiso. En ese dia caí yo muy enfermo: +ninguno habia navegado hácia aquella parte: cesó el viento y mar dende +á ciertos dias, y se mudó la tormenta en calmería y grandes corrientes. +Fuí á aportar á una isla que se dijo de las Bocas, y de allí a Tierra +firme. Ninguno puede dar cuenta verdadera de esto, porque no hay razon +que abaste; porque fue ir con corriente sin ver tierra tanto número de +dias. Seguí la costa de la Tierra firme: esta se asentó con compás y +arte. Ninguno hay que diga debajo cuál parte del cielo ó cuándo yo partí +de ella para venir á la Española. Los pilotos creian venir á parar á la +isla de Sanct-Joan; y fue en tierra de Mango, cuatrocientas leguas mas +al Poniente de adonde decian. Respondan, si saben, adónde es el sitio de +Veragua. Digo que no pueden dar otra razon ni cuenta, salvo que fueron +á unas tierras adonde hay mucho oro, y certificarle; mas para volver á +ella el camino tienen ignoto: seria necesario para ir á ella descubrirla +como de primero. Una cuenta hay y razon de astrología y cierta: quien la +entiende esto le abasta. A vision profética se asemeja esto. Las naos +de las Indias, si no navegan salvo á popa, no es por la mala fechura, +ni por ser fuertes; las grandes corrientes que allí vienen; juntamente +con el viento hacen que nadie porfie con bolina, porque en un dia +perderian lo que hubiesen ganado en siete; ni saco carabela aunque sea +latina portuguesa. Esta razon hace que no naveguen, salvo con colla, +y por esperarle se detienen á las veces seis y ocho meses en puerto; +ni es maravilla, pues que en España muchas veces acaece otro tanto. La +gente de que escribe Papa Pio, segun el sitio y señas, se ha hallado, +mas no los caballos, pretales y frenos de oro, ni es maravilla, porque +allí las tierras de la costa de la mar no reuieren, salvo pescadores, ni +yo me detuve porque andaba á prisa. En Cariay y en essas tierras de su +comarca, son grandes fechiceros y muy medrosos. Dieran el mundo porque +no me detuviera allí una hora. Cuando llegué allí luego me inviaron dos +muchachas muy ataviadas: la mas vieja no seria de once años y la otra de +siete; ambas con tanta desenvoltura que no serian mas unas putas: traian +polvos de hechizos escondidos: en llegando las mandé adornar de nuestras +cosas y las invié luego á tierra: allí vide una sepultura en el monte, +grande como una casa y labrada, y el cuerpo descubierto y mirando en +ella. De otras artes me dijeron y mas excelentes. Animalias menudas y +grandes hay hartas y muy diversas de las nuestras. Dos puercos hube yo en +presente, y un perro de Irlanda no osaba esperarlos. Un ballestero habia +herido una animalia, que se parece á gato paul, salvo que es mucho mas +grande, y el rostro de hombre: teniale atravesado con una saeta desde +los pechos á la cola, y porque era feroz le hubo de cortar un brazo y +una pierna: el puerco en viéndole se le encrespó y se fue huyendo: yo +cuando esto ví mandé echarle _begare_, que así se llama adonde estaba: en +llegando á él, así estando á la muerte y la saeta siempre en el cuerpo, +le echó la cola por el hocico y se la amarró muy fuerte, y con la mano +que le quedaba le arrebató por el copete como á enemigo. El auto tan +nuevo y hermosa montería me hizo escribir esto. De muchas maneras de +animalias se hubo, mas todas mueren de barra. Gallinas muy grandes y la +pluma como lana vide hartas. Leones, ciervos, corzos otro tanto, y así +aves. + +Cuando yo andaba por aquella mar en fatiga en algunos se puso heregía +que estabamos enfechizados, que hoy dia estan en ello. Otra gente fallé +que comian hombres: la desformidad de su gesto lo dice. Allí dicen qué +hay grandes mineros de cobre: hachas de ello, otras cosas labradas, +fundidas, soladas hube, y fraguas con todo su aparejo de platero y +los crisoles. Allí van vestidos; y en aquella provincia vide sábanas +grandes de algodon, labradas de muy sotiles labores; otras píntadas muy +sútilmente á colores con pinceles. Dicen que en la tierra adentro hácia +el Catayo las hay tejidas de oro. De todas estas tierras y de lo que hay +en ellas, falta de lengua, no se saben tan presto. Los pueblos, bien +que sean espesos, cada uno tiene diferenciada lengua, y es en tanto que +no se entienden los unos con los otros, mas que nos con los de Arabia. +Yo creo que esto sea en esta gente salvage de la costa de la mar, mas +no en la tierra dentro. Cuando yo descubrí las Indias dije que eran el +mayor señorío rico que hay en el mundo. Yo dije del oro, perlas, piedras +preciosas, especerías, con los tratos y ferias, y porque no pareció todo +tan presto fuí escandalizado. Este castigo me hace agora que no diga +salvo lo que yo oigo de los naturales de la tierra. De una oso decir, +porque hay tantos testigos, y es que yo vide en esta tierra de Veragua +mayor señal de oro en dos dias primeros que en la Española en cuatro +años, y que las tierras de la comarca no pueden ser mas fermosas, ni +mas labradas, ni la gente mas cobarde, y buen puerto, y fermoso rio, y +defensible al mundo. Todo esto es seguridad de los cristianos y certeza +de señorío, con grande esperanza de la honra y acrescentamiento de la +religion cristiana; y el camino, allí será tan breve como á la Española, +porque ha de ser con viento. Tan señores son vuestras Altezas de esto +como de Jerez ó Toledo: sus navíos que fueren allí van á su casa. De +allí sacarán oro: en otras tierras, para haber de lo que hay en ellas, +conviene que se lo lleven, ó se volverán vacíos; y en la tierra es +necesario que fien sus personas de un salvage. Del otro que yo dejo de +decir, ya dije por qué me encerré: no digo así, ni que yo me afirme en +el tres doble en todo lo que yo haya jamas dicho ni escrito, y que yo +estó a la fuente. Genoveses, Venecianos y toda gente que tenga perlas, +piedras preciosas y otras cosas de valor, todos las llevan hasta el cabo +del mundo para las trocar, convertir en oro: el oro es excelentísimo: +del oro se hace tesoro, y con él, quien lo tiene, hace cuanto quiere +en el mundo, y llega á que echa las animas al paraiso. Los señores de +aquellas tierras de la comarca Veragua cuando mueren entierran el oro +que tienen con el cuerpo, así lo dicen: á Salomon llevaron de un camino +seiscientos y sesenta y seis quintales de oro, allende lo que llevaron +los mercaderes y marineros, y allende lo que se pagó en Arabia. De este +oro fizo doscientas lanzas y trescientos escudos, y fizo el tablado que +habia de estar arriba dellas de oro y adornado de piedras preciosas, y +fizo otras muchas cosas de oro, y vasos muchos y muy grandes y ricos de +piedras preciosas. Josefo en su corónica de Antiquitatibus lo escribe. +En el Paralipomenon y en el libro de los Reyes se cuenta de esto. Josefo +quiere que este oro se hobiese en la Aurea: si así fuese digo que +aquellas minas de la Aurea son unas y se convienen con estas de Veragua, +que como yo dije arriba se alarga al Poniente veinte jornadas, y son en +una distancia lejos del polo y de la línea. Salomon compró todo aquello, +oro, piedras y plata, é allí le pueden mandar á coger si les aplace. +David en su testamento dejó tres mil quintales de oro de las Indías á +Salomon para ayuda de edificar el templo, y segun Josefo era el destas +mismas tierras. Hierusalem y el monte Sion ha de ser reedificado por mano +de cristianos: quien ha de ser, Dios por boca del Profeta en el décimo +cuarto salmo lo dice. El Abad Joaquin dijo que este habia de salir de +España. San Gerónimo á la santa muger le mostró el camino para ello. El +Emperador del Catayo ha dias que mandó sabios que le enseñen en la fé +de Cristo. ¿Quién será que se ofrezca á esto? Si nuestro Señor me lleva +á España, yo me obligo de llevarle, con el nombre de Dios, en salvo. +Esta gente que vino conmigo han pasado increibles peligros y trabajos. +Suplico á V. A., porque son pobres, que les mande pagar luego, y les haga +mercedes á cada uno segun la calidad de la persona, que les certifico +que á mi creer les traen las mejores nuevas que nunca fueron á España. +El oro que tiene el Quibian de Veragua y los otros de la comarca, bien +que segun informacion él sea mucho, no me paresció bien ni servicio de +vuestras Altezas de se le tomar por via de robo: lo buena orden evitará +escándalo y mala fama, y hará que todo ello venga al tesoro, que no quede +un grano. Con un mes de buen tiempo yo acabára todo mi viage: por falta +de los navíos no porfié á esperarle para tornar á ello, y para toda cosa +de su servicio espero en aquel que me hizo, y estaré bueno. Yo creo que +V. A. se acordará que yo queria mandar hacer los navíos de nueva manera: +la brevedad del tiempo no dió lugar á ello, y cierto yo habio caido en lo +que cumplia. Yo tengo en mas esta negociacion y minas con esta escala y +señorio, que todo lo otro que está hecho en las Indias. No es este hijo +para dar á criar á madrastra. De la Española, de Paria y de las otras +tierras no me acuerdo de ellas, que yo no llore: creia yo que el ejemplo +dellas hobiese de ser por estotras al contrario: ellas estan boca á yuso, +bien que no mueren: la enfermedad es incurable, ó muy larga: quien las +llegó á esto venga agora con el remedio si puede ó sabe: al descomponer +cada uno es maestro. Las gracias y acrescentamiento siempre fue uso +de las dar á quien puso su cuerpo á peligro. No es razon que quien ha +sido tan contrario á esta negociacion le goce ni sus fijos. Los que se +fueron de las Indias fuyendo los trabajos y diciendo mal dellas y de mí, +volvieron con cargos: así se ordenaba agora en Veragua: malo ejemplo, y +sin provecho del negocio y para la justicia del mundo: este temor con +otros casos hartos que yo veia claro, me hizo suplicar á V. A. antes que +yo viniese á descubrir esas islas y tierra firme, que me las dejasen +gobernar en su Real nombre: plúgoles: fue por privilegio y asiento, y con +sello y juramento, y me intitularon de Viso-Rey y Almirante y Gobernador +general de todo; y aseñalaron el término sobre las islas de los Azores +cien leguas, y aquellas del Cabo Verde por línea que pasa de polo á +polo, y desto y de todo que mas se descubriese, y me dieron poder largo: +la escritura á mas largamente lo dice. El otro negocio famosísimo está +con los brazos abiertos llamando: extrangero ha sido fasta ahora. Siete +años estuve yo en su Real corte, que á cuantos se fabló de esta empresa +todos á una dijeron que era burla: agora fasta los sastres suplican por +descubrir. Es de creer que van á saltear, y se les otorga, que cobran con +mucho perjuicio de mi honra y tanto daño del negocio. Bueno es de dar á +Dios lo suyo y acetar lo que le pertenece. Esta es justa sentencia, y de +justo. Las tierras que acá obedecen á V. A. son mas que todas las otras +de cristianos y ricas. Despues que yo, por voluntad divina, las hube +puestas debajo de su Real y alto señorío, y en filo para haber grandísima +rénta, de improviso, esperando navíos para venir á su alto conspecto +con victoria y grandes nuevas del oro, muy seguro y alegre, fuí preso +y echado con dos hermanos en un navío, cargados de fierros, desnudo en +cuerpo, con muy mal tratamiento, sin ser llamado ni vencido por justicia: +¿quién creerá que un pobre extrangero se hobiese de alzar en tal lugar +contra V. A. sin causa, ni sin brazo de otro Príncipe, y estando solo +entre sus vasallos y naturales, y teniendo todos mis fijos en su Real +corte? Yo vine á servir de veinte y ocho años, y agora no tengo cabello +en mi persona que no sea cano y el cuerpo enfermo, y gastado cuanto me +quedó de aquellos, y me fue tomado y vendido, y á mis hermanos fasta el +sayo, sin ser oido ni visto, con gran deshonor mio. Es de creer que esto +no se hizo por su Real mandado. La restitucion de mi honra y daños, y el +castigo en quien lo fizo, fará sonar su Real nobleza; y otro tanto en +quien me robó las perlas, y de quien ha fecho daño en ese almirantado. +Grandísima virtud, fama con ejemplo será si hacen esto, y quedará á la +España gloriosa memoria con la de vuestras Altezas de agradecidos y +justos Príncipes. La intencion tan sana que yo siempre tuve al servicio +de vuestras Altezas, y la afrenta tan desigual, no da lugar al anima +que calle, bíen que yo quiera: suplico á vuestras Altezas me perdonen. +Yo estoy tan perdido como dije: yo he llorado fasta aquí á otros: haya +misericordia agora el Cielo, y llore por mi la tierra. En el temporal no +tengo solamente una blanca para el oferta: en el espiritual he parado +aquí en las Indias de la forma que está dicho: aislado en esta pena, +enfermo, aguardando cada dia por la muerte, y cercado de un cuento de +salvages y llenos de crueldad y enemigos nuestros, y tan apartado de +los Santos Sacramentos de la Santa Iglesia, que se olvidará desta anima +si se aparta acá del cuerpo. Llore por mí quien tiene caridad, verdad y +justicia. Yo no vine este viage á navegar por ganar honra ni hacienda: +esto es cierto, porque estaba ya la esperanza de todo en ella muerta. +Yo vine á V. A. con sana intencion y buen zelo, y no miento. Suplico +humildemente á V. A. que si á Dios place de me sacar de aquí, que haya +por bien mi ida á Roma y otras romerías. Cuya vida y alto estado la Santa +Trinidad guarde y acresciente. Fecha en las Indias en la Isla de Jamaica +á siete de Julio de mil quinientos y tres años. + + +FOOTNOTES: + +[202] The word “cosas” has been replaced on conjecture by “casas,” such +being the idea entertained in the Italian translation, republished by +Morelli. + +[203] The “line” of Columbus implies fifteen degrees, or one hour of +longitude; and the twelve lines which describe the distance of Catigara +from the meridian of Ptolemy, equal one hundred and eighty degrees. +Marinus of Tyre, reckoned two hundred and twenty-five degrees to the same +space, which is equivalent to the fifteen lines stated by Columbus. + +[204] Every one will immediately see the incorrectness of this notion, +arising from the belief of Columbus that the country he had discovered +was the east coast of Asia. Instead of the land bearing a proportion +of six-sevenths to the water, the water bears a proportion of about +two-thirds to the land. + +[205] Morelli has given this passage thus: “la opposizion de Saturno con +Marte.” The adjective “desbarados,” however, sufficiently proves this +reading to be incorrect. It would seem that Columbus meant the opposition +of Saturn with the Sun. + +[206] The word _proeses_ or _proizes_, answers to our English word +bollards—or the posts to which cables are fastened. + +[207] Columbus, who now fancies himself in China, by this word “Mago,” +means Mangi, the name given by Marco Polo, whose travels he had read, to +Southern China, while Northern China was Cathay. + +[208] Of course he here speaks of himself. + +[209] Bow-lines are ropes employed to keep the windward edges of +the principal sails steady, and are only used when the wind is so +unfavourable that the sails must be all braced sideways, or close hauled +to the wind. + +[210] In this remarkable notion, Columbus refers to a work of the learned +Æneas Sylvius Piccolomini, entitled _Cosmographia Pape Pii_, printed in +Venice in 1503. It is not paginated, but if the reader will count to the +nineteenth and twentieth pages he will find the following passages: “Post +Sacas ad septentrionem Messagetæ reperiuntur: ... Fæda gens et brutis +simillima apud quam genus mortis optimum judicabatur ut senio confecti +in frusta cœderentur et cum carnibus ovilis promiscue ederentur: eos +qui morbo decederent ut impios abjicientes tamque dignos qui a feris +devorarentur. Equites ac pedites inter eos optimi fuere arcu; gladio; +thorace; ac securi æneâ utentes; aureas zonas; aurea equorum frena ac +pectoralia habentes. Ferri parum apud eos fuit: argento carebant; ære +et auro abundabant: insularum cultores herbarum radices edebant, et +agrestes fructus: ex quibus pocula exprimebant. Vestis erat arborum +cortex: qui paludes inhabitabant piscibus vescebantur: focarum coria e +mari prodeuntium induebant,” etc. From Herodotus we gather an accurate +idea of the situation of the Massagetæ, viz., in the immense plain to +the east of the Caspian and on the east bank of the Jaxaretes. Strabo +corroborates the account of Herodotus as to the repulsive habits of these +old Mongolians. + +[211] This is a malady undefined in any dictionary. + +[212] This is most certainly a mistake; probably thirty-eight was +originally written, which, supposing Columbus to have been born in +1446-7, would bring the date referred to to 1484, when Columbus really +did escape from Portugal into Spain. + + + + +A NARRATIVE + + +_Given by Diego Mendez [in his will] of some events that occurred in the +last voyage of the Admiral Don Christopher Columbus._ + +Diego Mendez, citizen of St. Domingo, in the island of Española, being +in the city of Valladolid, where the Court of their Majesties was at +the time staying, made his will on the sixth day of June, of the year +one thousand five hundred and thirty-six, before Fernando Perez, their +Majesties’ scrivener, and notary public in that their Court, and in all +their Kingdoms and Lordships, the witnesses to the same being Diego de +Arana, Juan Diez Miranda de la Cuadra, Martin de Orduña, Lucas Fernandez, +Alonzo de Angulo, Francisco de Hinojosa and Diego de Aguilar, all +servants of my Lady the Vicequeen of the Indies.[213] And among other +chapters of the said will there is one which runs literally as follows:— + +Clause of the will, Item: The very illustrious gentlemen, the admiral Don +Christopher Columbus, of glorious memory, and his son the admiral Don +Diego Columbus, and his grandson the admiral Don Louis, (whom may God +long preserve), and through them my Lady the Vicequeen, as tutress and +guardian of the latter, are in debt to me, for many and great services +that I have rendered them, in as much as I have spent and worn out the +best part of my life even to its close in their service; especially did +I serve the admiral Don Christopher, going with his Lordship to the +discovery of the islands and terra firma, and often putting myself in +danger of death in order to save his life and the lives of those who +were with him, more particularly when we were shut in at the mouth of +the river Belen or Yebra, through the violence of the sea and the winds +which drove up the sand, and raised such a mountain of it as to close up +the entrance of the port. His Lordship being there greatly afflicted, a +multitude of Indians collected together on shore to burn the ships, and +kill us all, pretending that they were going to make war against other +Indians of the province of Cabrava Aurira, with whom they were at enmity. +Though many of them passed by that part where our ships were lying, +none of the fleet took notice of the matter except myself, who went to +the admiral and said to him, “Sir, these people who have passed by in +order of battle, say that they go to unite themselves with the people +of Veragua, to attack the people of Cobrava Aurira: I do not believe +it, but, on the contrary, I think that they are collected together +to burn our ships and kill all of us,”—as in fact was the case. The +admiral then asked me what were the best means of preventing this, and +I proposed to his Lordship that I should go with a boat along the coast +towards Veragua, to see where the royal court sat. I had not proceeded +on my errand half a league when I found nearly a thousand men of war +with great stores of provisions of all kinds, and I went on shore alone +amongst them, leaving my boat afloat; I then spoke with them, making +them understand me as well as I could, and offered to go with them to +the battle with that armed boat; but this they strongly refused, saying +there was no need of such a thing. After that I returned to the boat, +and remained there in sight of them all that night, so that they could +not go to the ships to burn or destroy them, according to their previous +arrangements, without my seeing them, upon which they changed their plan, +and on that same night they all returned to Veragua. I then went back to +the ships, and related all this to his Lordship, who thought no little +of what I had done, and upon his consulting me as to the best manner +of proceeding so as clearly to ascertain what was the intention of the +people, I offered to go to them with one single companion; and this task +I undertook, though more certain of death than of life in the result. + +After journeying along the beach up to the river of Veragua, I found two +canoes of strange Indians, who related to me more in detail, that these +people were indeed collected together to burn our ships and kill us all, +and that they had forsaken their purpose in consequence of the boat +coming up to the spot, but that they intended to return after two days +to make the attempt once more. I then asked them to carry me in their +canoes to the upper part of the river, offering to remunerate them if +they would do so; but they excused themselves, and advised me by no means +to go, for that both myself and my companion would certainly be killed. +At length, in spite of their advice, I prevailed upon them to take me in +their canoes to the upper part of the river, until I reached the villages +of the Indians, whom I found in order of battle. They, however, would +not, at first, allow me to go to the principal residence of the cacique, +till I pretended that I was come as a surgeon to cure him of a wound +that he had in his leg; then, after I had made them some presents, they +suffered me to proceed to the seat of royalty, which was situated on the +top of a hillock, surmounted by a plain, with a large square surrounded +by three hundred heads of the enemies he had slain in battle. When I +had passed through the square, and reached the royal house, there was a +great clamour of women and children at the gate, who ran into the palace +screaming. Upon this, one of the chief’s sons came out in a high passion, +uttering angry words in his own language; and, laying hands upon me, with +one push he thrust me far away from him. In order to appease him, I told +him that I was come to cure the wound in his father’s leg, and showed +him an ointment that I had brought for that purpose; but he replied, +that on no account whatever should I go in to the place where his father +was. When I saw that I had no chance of appeasing him in that way, I +took out a comb, a pair of scissors, and a mirror, and caused Escobar, +my companion, to comb my hair and then cut it off. When the Indian, and +those who were with him, saw this, they stood in astonishment; upon +which I prevailed on him to suffer his own hair to be combed and cut by +Escobar; I then made him a present of the scissors, with the comb and the +mirror, and thus he became appeased. After this, I begged him to allow +some food to be brought, which was soon done, and we ate and drank in +love and good fellowship, like very good friends. I then left him and +returned to the ships, and related all this to my lord the Admiral, who +was not a little pleased when he heard all these circumstances, and the +things that had happened to me. He ordered a large stock of provisions to +be put into the ships, and into certain straw houses that we had built +there, with a view that I should remain, with some of the men, to examine +and ascertain the secrets of the country. The next morning his lordship +called me to take counsel with me as to what was to be done. My opinion +was that we ought to seize that chief and all his captains; because, +when they were taken, the common people would submit. His lordship was +of the same opinion. I then submitted the stratagem and plan by which +this might be accomplished; and his lordship ordered that the Adelantado, +his brother, and I, accompanied by eighty men, should go to put it into +execution. We went, and our Lord gave us such good fortune, that we took +the cacique and most of his captains, his wives, sons, and grandsons, +with all the princes of his race; but in sending them to the ships, thus +captured, the cacique extricated himself from the too slight grasp of +the man who held him, a circumstance which afterwards caused us much +injury. At this moment it pleased God to cause it to rain very heavily, +occasioning a great flood, by which the mouth of the harbour was opened +and the Admiral enabled to draw out the ships to sea, in order to proceed +to Spain; I, meanwhile, remaining on land as Accountant of his Highness, +with seventy men, and the greater part of the provisions of biscuit, +wine, oil, and vinegar being left with me. + +The Admiral had scarcely got to sea (while I stayed on shore with about +twenty men, for the others had gone to assist the Admiral), when suddenly +more than four hundred natives, armed with cross-bows and arrows, came +down upon me, extending themselves along the face of the mountain; +they then gave a shriek, then another, and another, and these repeated +cries, by the goodness of God, gave me opportunity to prepare for the +engagement. While I was on the shore among the huts which we had built, +and they were collected on the mountain at about the distance of an +arrow’s flight, they began to shoot their arrows and hurl their darts, as +if they had been attacking a bull. The arrows and cross-bow shots came +down thick as hail, and some of the Indians then separated themselves +from the rest, for the purpose of attacking us with clubs; none of them, +however, returned, for with our swords we cut off their arms and legs, +and killed them on the spot; upon which the rest took such fright, that +they fled, after having killed in the contest seven out of twenty of our +men; while, on their side, they lost nine or ten of those who advanced +the most boldly towards us. This contest lasted three long hours, and +our Lord gave us the victory in a marvellous manner, we being so few +and they so numerous. After this fight was over, the captain, Diego +Tristan, came with the boats from the ships to ascend the river, in +order to take in water for the voyage; and, notwithstanding I advised +and warned him not to go, he would not trust me, but, against my wish, +went up the river with two boats and twelve men; upon which the natives +attacked him, and killed him and all the men that he took with him, +except one who escaped by swimming, and from whom we heard the news. The +Indians then took the boats and broke them to pieces, which caused us +great vexation; for the Admiral was at sea with his ships without boats, +while we were on shore deprived of the means of going to him. Besides +this, the Indians came continually to assail us; every instant playing +trumpets and kettle-drums, and uttering loud cries in the belief that +they had conquered us. The only means of defending ourselves against +these people, were two very good brass falconets and plenty of powder +and ball, with which we frightened them so much that they did not dare +approach us. This lasted for the space of four days, during which time +I caused several bags to be made out of the sails of one of the vessels +which we had remaining on shore, and into them I put all our biscuit. I +then took two canoes, and secured them together with sticks across the +tops, and, after loading them with the biscuit, the pipes of wine, and +the oil and vinegar, I fastened them together with a rope, and had them +towed along the sea while it was calm, so that in the seven trips we +contrived to get all of it to the ships, and the people were also carried +over by few at a time. Meanwhile I remained with five men to the last, +and at night I put to sea with the last boatful. The Admiral thought +very highly of this conduct of mine, and did not content himself with +embracing me and kissing me on the cheeks for having performed so great +a service, but asked me to take the captaincy of the ship _Capitana_, +with the government of all the crew, and, in fact, of the entire voyage; +which I accepted in order to oblige him, as it was a service of great +responsibility. + +On the last day of April, in the year fifteen hundred and three, we +left Veragua, with three ships, intending to make our passage homeward +to Spain, but as the ships were all pierced and eaten by the teredo, we +could not keep them above water; we abandoned one of them after we had +proceeded thirty leagues; the two which remained were even in a worse +condition than that,[214] so that all the hands were not sufficient with +the use of pumps and kettles and pans to draw off the water that came +through the holes made by the worms. In this state, with the utmost toil +and danger, we sailed for thirty-five days, thinking to reach Spain, and +at the end of this time we arrived at the lowest point of the island of +Cuba, at the province of Homo, where the city of Trinidad now stands, so +that we were three hundred leagues further from Spain than when we left +Veragua for the purpose of proceeding thither; and this, as I have said, +with the vessels in very bad condition, unfit to encounter the sea, and +our provisions nearly gone. It pleased God that we were enabled to reach +the island of Jamaica, where we drove the two ships on shore, and made of +them two cabins thatched with straw, in which we took up our dwelling, +not however without considerable danger from the natives, who were not +yet subdued, and who might easily set fire to our habitation in the +night, in spite of the greatest watchfulness. It was there that I gave +out the last ration of biscuit and wine; I then took a sword in my hand, +three men only accompanying me, and advanced into the island; for no one +else dared go to seek food for the Admiral and those who were with him. +It pleased God that I found some people who were very gentle and did us +no harm, but received us cheerfully, and gave us food with hearty good +will. I then made a stipulation with the Indians, who lived in a village +called Aguacadiba, and with their cacique, that they should make cassava +bread, and that they should hunt and fish to supply the Admiral every +day with a sufficient quantity of provisions, which they were to bring to +the ships, where I promised there should be a person ready to pay them in +blue beads, combs and knives, hawks’-bells and fish-hooks, and other such +articles which we had with us for that purpose. With this understanding, +I despatched one of the Spaniards whom I had brought with me to the +admiral, in order that he might send a person to pay for the provisions, +and secure their being sent. From thence I went to another village, at +three leagues distance from the former, and made a similar agreement with +the natives and their cacique, and then despatched another Spaniard to +the admiral, begging him to send another person with a similar object to +this village. After this I went further on, and came to a great cacique +named Huareo, living in a place which is now called Melilla, thirteen +leagues from where the ships lay. I was very well received by him; he +gave me plenty to eat, and ordered all his subjects to bring together +in the course of three days a great quantity of provisions, which they +did, and laid them before him, whereupon I paid him for them to his full +satisfaction. I stipulated with him that they should furnish a constant +supply, and engaged that there should be a person appointed to pay them; +having made this arrangement, I sent the other Spaniard to the admiral +with the provisions they had given me, and then begged the cacique to +allow me two Indians to go with me to the extremity of the island, one to +carry the hammock in which I slept, and the other carrying the food. + +In this manner I journeyed eastward to the end of the island, and came +to a cacique who was named Ameyro, with whom I entered into close +friendship. I gave him my name and took his, which amongst these people +is regarded as a pledge of brotherly attachment. I bought of him a very +good canoe, and gave him in exchange an excellent brass helmet that I +carried in a bag, a frock, and one of the two shirts that I had with me; +I then put out to sea in this canoe, in search of the place that I had +left, the cacique having given me six Indians to assist in guiding the +canoe. When I reached the spot to which I had dispatched the provisions, +I found there the Spaniards whom the admiral had sent, and I loaded them +with the victuals that I had brought with me, and went myself to the +admiral, who gave me a very cordial reception. He was not satisfied with +seeing and embracing me, but asked me respecting everything that had +occurred in the voyage, and offered up thanks to God for having delivered +me in safety from so barbarous a people. The men rejoiced greatly at +my arrival, for there was not a loaf left in the ships when I returned +to them with the means of allaying their hunger; this, and every day +after that, the Indians came to the ships loaded with provisions from +the places where I had made the agreements; so that there was enough for +the two hundred and thirty people who were with the admiral. Ten days +after this, the admiral called me aside, and spoke to me of the great +peril he was in, addressing me as follows:—“Diego Mendez, my son, not +one of those whom I have here with me has any idea of the great danger +in which we stand except myself and you; for we are but few in number, +and these wild Indians are numerous and very fickle and capricious: and +whenever they may take it into their heads to come and burn us in our two +ships, which we have made into straw-thatched cabins, they may easily +do so by setting fire to them on the land side, and so destroy us all. +The arrangement that you have made with them for the supply of food, to +which they agreed with such good-will, may soon prove disagreeable to +them; and it would not be surprising if, on the morrow, they were not to +bring us anything at all: in such case we are not in a position to take +it by main force, but shall be compelled to accede to their terms. I have +thought of a remedy, if you consider it advisable; which is, that some +one should go out in the canoe that you have purchased, and make his way +in it to Española, to purchase a vessel with which we may escape from the +extremely dangerous position in which we now are. Tell me your opinion.” +To which I answered:—“My lord, I distinctly see the danger in which we +stand, which is much greater than would be readily imagined. With respect +to the passage from this island to Española in so small a vessel as a +canoe, I look upon it not merely as difficult, but impossible; for I know +not who would venture to encounter so terrific a danger as to cross a +gulf of forty leagues of sea, and amongst islands where the sea is most +impetuous, and scarcely ever at rest.” His lordship did not agree with +the opinion that I expressed, but adduced strong arguments to show that +I was the person to undertake the enterprise. To which I replied:—“My +lord, I have many times put my life in danger to save yours, and the +lives of all those who are with you, and God has marvellously preserved +me: in consequence of this, there have not been wanting murmurers who +have said that your lordship entrusts every honourable undertaking to me, +while there are others amongst them who would perform them as well as I. +My opinion is, therefore, that your lordship would do well to summon all +the men, and lay this business before them, to see if, amongst them all, +there is one who will volunteer to undertake it, which I certainly doubt; +and if all refuse, I will risk my life in your service, as I have done +many times already.” + +On the following day his lordship caused all the men to appear together +before him, and then opened the matter to them in the same manner as +he had done to me. When they heard it they were all silent, until some +said that it was out of the question to speak of such a thing; for it was +impossible, in so small a craft, to cross a boisterous and perilous gulf +of forty leagues’ breadth, and to pass between those two islands, where +very strong vessels had been lost in going to make discoveries, not being +able to encounter the force and fury of the currents. I then arose, and +said:—“My lord, I have but one life, and I am willing to hazard it in +the service of your lordship, and for the welfare of all those who are +here with us; for I trust in God, that in consideration of the motive +which actuates me, he will give me deliverance, as he has already done +on many other occasions.” When the admiral heard my determination, he +arose and embraced me, and, kissing me on the cheek, said,—“Well did I +know that there was no one here but yourself who would dare to undertake +this enterprise: I trust in God, our Lord, that you will come out of it +victoriously, as you have done in the others which you have undertaken.” +On the following day I drew my canoe on to the shore; fixed a false +keel on it, and pitched and greased it; I then nailed some boards upon +the poop and prow, to prevent the sea from coming in, as it was liable +to do from the lowness of the gunwales; I also fixed a mast in it, +set up a sail, and laid in the necessary provisions for myself, one +Spaniard, and six Indians, making eight in all, which was as many as +the canoe would hold. I then bade farewell to his lordship, and all the +others, and proceeded along the coast of Jamaica, up to the extremity +of the island,[215] which was thirty-five leagues from the point whence +we started. Even this distance was not traversed without considerable +toil and danger; for on the passage I was taken prisoner by some Indian +pirates, from whom God delivered me in a marvellous manner. When we had +reached the end of the island, and were remaining there in the hope of +the sea becoming sufficiently calm to allow us to continue our voyage +across it, many of the natives collected together with the determination +of killing me, and seizing the canoe with its contents, and they cast +lots for my life, to see which of them should carry their design into +execution. + +As soon as I became aware of their project, I betook myself secretly to +my canoe, which I had left at three leagues distance from where I then +was, and set sail for the spot where the admiral was staying, and reached +it after an interval of fifteen days from my departure. I related to +him all that had happened, and how God had miraculously rescued me from +the hands of those savages. His lordship was very joyful at my arrival, +and asked me if I would recommence my voyage; I replied that I would, +if I might be allowed to take some men, to be with me at the extremity +of the island until I should find a fair opportunity of putting to sea +to prosecute my voyage. The admiral gave me seventy men, and with them +his brother the Adelantado, to stay with me until I put to sea, and to +remain there for three days after my departure; with this arrangement +I returned to the extremity of the island and waited there four days. +Finding the sea become calm I parted from the rest of the men with much +mutual sorrow; I then commended myself to God and our Lady of Antigua, +and was at sea five days and four nights without laying down the oar from +my hand, but continued steering the canoe while my companions rowed. +It pleased God that at the end of five days I reached the Island of +Española at Cape San Miguel,[216] having been two days without eating or +drinking, for our provisions were exhausted. I brought my canoe up to a +very beautiful part of the coast, to which many of the natives soon came, +and brought with them many articles of food, so that I remained there two +days to take rest. I took six Indians from this place, and leaving those +that I had brought with me, I put off to sea again, moving along the +coast of Española, for it was a hundred and thirty leagues from the spot +where I landed to the city of St. Domingo, where the Governor dwelt, who +was the Commander de Lares. When I had proceeded eighty leagues along the +coast of the island (not without great toil and danger, for that part of +the island was not yet brought into subjugation), I reached the province +of Azoa, which is twenty-four leagues from San Domingo, and there I +learned from the commander Gallego, that the governor was gone out to +subdue the province of Xuragoa, which was at fifty leagues distance. +When I heard this I left my canoe and took the road for Xuragoa,[217] +where I found the governor, who kept me with him seven months, until he +had burned and hanged eighty-four caciques, lords of vassals, and with +them Nacaona, the sovereign mistress of the island, to whom all rendered +service and obedience. When that expedition was finished I went on foot +to San Domingo, a distance of seventy leagues, and waited in expectation +of the arrival of ships from Spain, it being now more than a year since +any had come. In this interval it pleased God that three ships arrived, +one of which I bought, and loaded it with provisions, bread, wine, meat, +hogs, sheep, and fruit, and despatched it to the place where the admiral +was staying, in order that he might come over in it with all his people +to San Domingo, and from thence sail for Spain. I myself went on in +advance with the two other ships, in order to give an account to the king +and queen of all that had occurred in this voyage. + +I think I should now do well to say somewhat of the events which +occurred to the admiral and to his family during the year that they were +left on the island. A few days after my departure the Indians became +refractory, and refused to bring food as they had hitherto done; the +admiral therefore caused all the caciques to be summoned, and expressed +to them his surprise that they should not send food as they were wont to +do, knowing as they did, and as he had already told them, that he had +come there by the command of God. He said that he perceived that God was +angry with them, and that He would that very night give tokens of His +displeasure by signs that He would cause to appear in the heavens; and +as on that night there was to be an almost total eclipse of the moon, he +told them that God caused that appearance to signify His anger against +them for not bringing the food. The Indians, believing him, were very +frightened, and promised that they would always bring him food in future; +and so in fact they did until the arrival of the ship which I had sent +loaded with provisions. The Admiral, and those who were with him, felt +no small joy at the arrival of this ship; and his lordship afterwards +informed me in Spain, that in no part of his life did he ever experience +so joyful a day, for he had never hoped to have left that place alive: +and in that same ship he set sail,[218] and went to San Domingo, and +thence to Spain. + +I have wished thus to give a succinct account of my troubles, and of +my great and important services; which are such as no man in the world +ever rendered to a master, or ever will again; and I do so in order that +my sons may know these facts, and be encouraged to serve faithfully, +and that, at the same time, his lordship may see that he is bound to +make them a handsome return for such services. When his lordship came +to the court, and while he was at Salamanca, confined to his bed with +the gout, and I was left in sole charge of his affairs, endeavouring to +obtain the restitution of his estate and government for his son Diego, I +addressed him thus: “My lord, your lordship knows how much I have done +in your service, and what trouble I am still taking, night and day, in +the management of your affairs; I beseech your lordship to grant me some +recompense for what I have done.” He cheerfully replied that he would +do for me whatever I asked, adding that there was very great reason for +his so doing. I then specified my wish, and begged his lordship to do me +the favour to grant me the office of principal Alguazil of the island +of Española for life; to which his lordship assented most cordially, +saying, that it was but a trifling remuneration for the great services +I had rendered. He also desired me to communicate his wish to his son +Diego, who was very glad to hear of the favour his father had shown me in +appointing me to the said office; and said, that if his father gave it me +with one hand, he, for his part, gave it with both hands. This promise +holds good as much now as it did then; but when, after I had succeeded, +with considerable difficulty, in securing the restitution of the +government of the Indies to my lord the Admiral Don Diego, (his father +being then dead), I asked him for the provision of the said office, his +lordship replied that he had given it to his uncle, the Adelantado, +saying, however, that he would give me another post equivalent to it. I +told him that he ought to make such a proposition to his uncle, and that +he ought to give me that which his father, and he himself, had promised +to me. But he did not do so; and thus I remained without any recompense +for all my services: while my lord, the Adelantado, without having +rendered any service at all, continued in the enjoyment of the dignity +which belonged to me, and reaped the reward of all my exertions. + +When his lordship arrived at the city of San Domingo, he assumed the +reins as governor, and gave the post which he had promised to me, to +Francisco de Garay, a servant of the Adelantado, to hold it for him. This +took place on the tenth day of July of the year fifteen hundred and ten, +and the office was then worth at least a million per annum. My lady, the +Vicequeen, as tutress and guardian of my lord the viceroy, and my lord +the viceroy himself, are really chargeable to me for this loss, and are +debtors to me for it in justice and on the score of conscience. The post +had been given to me by way of recompense, and nothing has been done in +my favour towards the accomplishment of the Admiral’s promise, since the +day in which it was given, to this, the close of my life; if it had been +given to me, I should have been the richest and most honoured man in +the island; whereas, I am now the poorest, and have not even a house of +my own to live in, but am obliged to pay rent for the roof over my head. +As it would be very difficult to refund the revenues which this office +has produced, I will suggest an alternative, which is this: that his +lordship grant the rank of principal Alguazil of the city of San Domingo, +to one of my sons, for his life, and bestow upon the other the rank of +Vice-Admiral in the same city: by the grant of these two offices to my +sons in the manner I have said, and by appointing some one to hold them +on their behalf until they come of age, his lordship will discharge the +conscience of the Admiral his father, and I shall hold myself satisfied, +as duly paid for my services. I shall say nothing further upon the +subject, but leave it to the consciences of their lordships, and let them +do whatever they think proper. + +Item. I leave as executors and administrators of my will here at the +court, the bachelor Estrada and Diego de Arana, together with my lady +the Vicequeen; and I beg his lordship to undertake this charge, and to +direct the others to undertake it likewise. + +_Another clause._ Item. I order that my executors purchase a large +stone, the best that they can find, and place it upon my grave, and that +they write round the edge of it these words: “Here lies the honourable +Chevalier Diego Mendez, who rendered great services to the royal crown +of Spain, in the discovery and conquest of the Indies, in company with +the discoverer of them, the Admiral Don Christopher Columbus, of glorious +memory, and afterwards rendered other great services by himself, with his +own ships, and at his own cost. He died, etc. He asks of your charity a +Paternoster and an Ave Maria.” + +Item. In the middle of the said stone let there be the representation +of a canoe, which is a hollowed tree, such as the Indians use for +navigation; for in such a vessel did I cross three hundred leagues of +sea; and let them engrave above it this word: “Canoa.” + +My dear and beloved sons, children of my very dear and beloved wife Doña +Francisca de Ribera,—may the blessing of God Almighty, Father, Son, and +Holy Ghost, descend upon you, together with my blessing, and protect +you, and make you Catholic Christians, and give you grace always to love +and fear Him. My sons, I earnestly recommend you to cultivate peace and +harmony amongst yourselves, and that you be obliging, and not haughty, +but very humble and courteous towards those with whom you have to do, so +that all may love you. Serve loyally my lord the Admiral, and may his +lordship grant you large recompense, considering who he is himself, and +by what great services I have deserved his favours. Above all I charge +you, my sons, to be very pious, and to hear very devoutly the divine +offices, and in so doing, may the Lord grant you long life. May it please +Him of His infinite goodness, to make you as good as I wish you to be, +and guide you always with His hand. Amen. + +The books which I send to you are as follows: + +_The Art of Well-dying_, by Erasmus; a _Sermon_, of Erasmus, in Spanish; +_Josephus de Bello Judaico_; the _Moral Philosophy_, of Aristotle; the +books called _Lingua Erasmi_; the book of _The Holy Land_;[219] _The +conversations of Erasmus_; _A treatise on the Complaints of Peace_; _A +book of Contemplation of the Passion of our Redeemer_; _A treatise on the +Revenging of the Death of Agamemnon_; and other small tracts. + +I have already told you, my sons, that I leave you these books as +heir-looms under the conditions described above in my will, and I wish +them to be put together with my other documents, which will be found in +the cedar box, at Seville, as I have already said; I wish also the marble +mortar should be placed in it, which is now in the possession of Don +Ferdinand, or of his major-domo. + +I, Diego Mendez, affirm that this document, contained in thirteen sheets, +is my last will and testament, for I have dictated it and caused it to +be written, and have signed it with my name; and by it I revoke and +annul any other will or wills whatever made by me at any other time or +place, and I desire that this only be considered valid. Made in the city +of Valladolid, the nineteenth day of June, in the year of our Redeemer +one thousand five hundred and thirty-six.—DIEGO MENDEZ. And I, the said +Garcia de Vera, scrivener and notary public, was present at all which has +been herein said; and it has all been set down by me by order of the said +lord-lieutenant, and by request of the said Bachelor Estrada, forming the +testament in these twenty-six leaves of folio paper, as is here seen. +I caused it to be written as it was presented and laid before me, and +have kept the original in my possession. And to this effect I have here +placed this my seal (_here was placed the seal_), in testimony of the +truth.—(_Signed_) GARCIA DE VERA. + +_This agrees literally with the clauses copied from a will sealed and +signed by the said scrivener, Garcia de Vera, the original of which is +in the archives of the most excellent the Admiral Duke of Veraguas, from +which I copied it in Madrid on the twenty-eighth day of March, in the +year eighteen hundred and twenty-five.—Thomas Gonzalez._ + +_Note.—The other clauses of this will of Diego Mendez, refer to his +funeral arrangements, and the declaration of debts, due both to him +and by him, in Spain and in the island of Hispaniola, as well as other +matters purely personal, and relating to his family; but they bear no +reference or allusion to the Admiral Columbus, or to his voyages and +discoveries, and therefore have not been copied._ + + +RELACION + +_Hecha por Diego Mendez, de algunos acontecimientos del último viage del +Almirante Don Cristóbal Colon._ + +Diego Mendez, vecino de la ciudad de Santo Domingo de la Isla Española, +hallándose en la villa de Valladolid, donde á la sazon estaba la Corte +de SS. MM., otorgó testamento en seis dias del mes de Junio del año de +mil quinientos treinta y seis, por testimonio de Fernan Perez, escribano +de SS. MM., y su notario público en la su Corte y en todos los sus +Reinos y Señoríos; siendo testigos al otorgamiento Diego de Arana, Juan +Diez Miranda de la Cuadra, Martin de Orduña, Lucas Fernandez, Alonso de +Angulo, Francísco de Hinojosa y Diego de Aguilar, todos criados de la +Señora Vireina de las Indias. Y entre otros capítulos del mencionado +testamento hay uno que á la letra dice así. + +Cláusula del testamento. Item: Los muy ilustres Señores, el Almirante D. +Cristobal Colon, de gloriosa memoria, y su hijo el Almirante D. Diego +Colon, y su nieto el Almirante D. Luis, á quien Dios dé largos dias +de vida, y por ellos la Vireina mi Señora, como su tutriz y curadora, +me son en cargo de muchos y grandes servicios que yo les hice, en que +consumí y gasté todo lo mejor de mi vida hasta acaballa en su servicio; +especialmente serví al gran Almirante D. Cristóbal andando con su Señoria +descubriendo Islas y Tierra firme, en que puse muchas veces mi persona á +péligro de muerte por salvar su vida y de los que con él iban y estaban; +mayormente cuando se nos cerró el puerto del rio de Belen ó Yebra donde +estábamos con la fuerza de las tempestades de la mar y de los vientos +que acarrearon y amontonaron la arena en cantidad con que cegaron la +entrada del puerto. Y estando su Señoria allí muy congojado, juntóse +gran multitud de Indios de la tierra para venir á quemarnos los navios y +matarnos á todos, con color que decian que iban á hacer guerra a otros +Indios de las provincias de Cobrava Aurira con quien tenian guerra: y +como pasaron muchos dellos por aquel puerto en que teniamos nosotros +las naos, ninguno de la armada caia en el negocio sino yo, que fuí al +Almirante y le dije: “Señor, estas gentes que por aquí han pasado en +orden de guerra dicen que se han de juntar con los de Veragoa para ir +contra los de Cobrava Aurira: yo no lo creo sino el contrario, y es que +se juntan para quemarnos los navíos y matarnos á todos,” como de hecho lo +era. Y diciéndome el Almirante cómo se remediaria, yo dije á su Señoría +que saldria con una barca é iría por la costa hácia Veragoa, para ver +donde asentaban el real. Y no hube andado media legua cuando halle al +pie de mil hombres de guerra con muchas vituallas y brevages, y salté en +tierra solo entre ellos, dejando mi barca puesta en flota: y hablé con +ellos segun pude entender, y ofrecíme que queria ir con ellos á la guerra +con aquella barca armada, y ellos se escusaron reciamente diciendo que +no le habian menester: y como yo me volviese á la barca y estuviese allí +á vista dellos toda la noche, vieron que no podian ir á las naos para +quemallas y destruillas, segun tenian acordado, sin que yo lo viese, y +mudaron propósito: y aquella noche se volvieron todos á Veragoa, y yo +me volví á las naos y hice relacion de todo á su Señoría, é no lo tuvo +en poco. Y platicando conmigo sobrello sobre que manera se ternia para +saber claramente el intento de aquella gente, yo me ofrecí de ir allá +con un solo compañero, y lo puse por obra, yendo mas cierto de la muerte +que dela vida: y habiendo caminado por la playa hasta el rio de Veragoa +hallé dos canoas de Indios extrangeros que me contaron muy á la clara +como aquellas gentes iban para quemar las naos y matarnos á todos, y que +lo dejaron de hacer por la barca que allí sobrevino, y questaban todavia +de propósito de volver á hacello dende á dos dias, é yo les rogué que +me llevasen en sus canoas el rio arriba, y que gelo pagaria; y ellos +se escusaban aconsejándome que en ninguna manera fuese, porque fuese +cierto que en llegando me matarian á mí y al compañero que llevaba. E sin +embargo de sus consejos hice que me llevasen en sus canaos el rio arriba +hasta llegar á los pueblos de los Indios, los cuales hallé todos puestos +en orden de guerra, que no me querian dejar ir al asiento principal del +Cacique; y yo fingiendo que le iba á curar como cirujano de una llaga +que tenia en una pierna, y con dádivas que les dí me dejaron ir hasta el +asiento Real, que estaba encima de un cerro llano con una plaza grande, +rodeada de trescientas cabezas de muertos que habian ellos muerto en una +batalla: y como yo hubiese pasado toda la plaza y llegado á la Casa Real +hubo grande alboroto de mugeres y muchachos que estaban á la puerta, que +entraron gritando dentro en el palacio. Y salió de él un hijo del Señor +muy enojado diciendo palabras recias en su lenguage, é puso las manos +en mí y de un empellon me desvió muy lejos de sí: diciéndole yo por +amansarle como iba á curar á su padre de la pierna, y mostrándole cierto +unguento que para ello llevaba, dijo que en ninguna manera habia de +entrar donde estaba su padre. Y visto por mí que por aquella via no podia +amansarle, saqué un peine y unas tijeras y un espejo, y hice que Escobar +mi compañero me peinase y cortase el cabello. Lo cual visto por él y por +los que allí estaban quedaban espantados; y yo entonces hice que Escobar +le peinase á él y le cortase el cabello con las tijeras, y díselas y el +peine y el espejo, y con esto se amansó; y yo pedí que trajesen algo de +comer, y luego lo trajeron, y comimos y bebimos en amor y compaña, y +quedamos amigos; y despedime dél y vine á las naos, y hice relacion de +todo esto al Almirante mi Señor, el cual no poco holgó en saber todas +estas circumstancias y cosas acaecidas por mi; y mandó poner gran recabdo +en las naos y en ciertas casas de paja, que teniamos hechas allí en la +playa con intencion que habia yo de quedar allí con cierta gente para +calar y saber los secretos de la tierra. + +Otro dia de mañana su Señoría me llamó para tomar parecer conmigo +de lo que sobre ello se debia hacer, y fue mi parecer que debiamos +prender aquel Señor y todos sus Capitanes, porque presos aquellos se +sojuzgaria la gente menuda; y su Señoria fue del mismo parecer: é yo di +el ardid y la manera con que se debia hacer, y su Señoría mandó que el +Señor Adelantado, su hermano, y yo con él fuesemos á poner en efecto +lo sobredicho con ochenta hombres. Y fuimos, y diónos Nuestro Señor +tan buena dicha que prendimos el Cacique y los mas de sus Capitanes y +mugeres y hijos y nietos con todos los principales de su generacion; y +enviándolos á las naos ansí presos, soltóse el Cacique al que le llevaba +por su mal recabdo, el cual despues nos hizo mucho daño. En este instante +plugó á Dios que lovíó mucho, y con la gran avenida abriósenos el puerto, +y el Almirante sacó los navíos á la mar para venirse á Castilla, quedando +yo en tierra para haber de quedar en ella por Contador de su Alteza con +setenta hombres, y quedábame allí la mayor parte de los mantenimientos de +bizcocho y vino y aceite y vinagre. + +Acabado de salir el Almirante á la mar, y quedando yo en tierra con obra +de veinte hombres porque los otros se habian salido con el Almirante á +despedir, subitamente sobrevino sobre mi mucha gente de la tierra, que +serian mas de cuatrocientos hombres armados con sus varas y flechas y +tiraderos, y tendierónse por el monte en haz y dieron una grita y otra +y luego otra, con las cuales plugo á Dios me apercibieron á la pelea y +defensa de ellos: y estando yo en la playa entre los bohios que tenia +hechos, y ellos en el monte á trecho de tíro de dardo, comenzaron á +flechar y á garrochar como quien agarrocha toro, y eran las flechas +y tiraderas tantas y tan continuas como granizo; y algunos dellos se +desmandaban para venirnos á dar con las machadasnas; pero ninguno +dellos volvian porque quedaban allí cortados brazos y piernas y muertos +á espada: de lo cual cobraron tanto miedo que se retiraron atras, +habiéndonos muerto siete hombres en la pelea de veinte que eramos, y +de ellos murieron diez ó nueve de los que se venian á nosotros mas +arriscados. Duró esta pelea tres horas grandes, y Nuestro Soñor nos dio +la vitoria milagrosamente, siendo nosotros tan poquitos y ellos tanta +muchedumbre. + +Acabada esta pelea vino de las naos el Capitan Diego Tristan con las +barcas para subir el rio arriba á tomar agua para su viage; y no +embargante que yo le aconsejé y amonesté que no subiese el rio arriba +no me quiso creer, y contra mi grado subió con las dos barcas y doce +hombres el rio arriba, donde le toparon aquella gente y pelearon con +él, y le mataron á él y todos los que llavaba, que no escapó sino uno +á nado que trujo la nueva; y tomaron las barcas y hiciéronlas pedazos, +de que quedamos en gran fatiga, ansí el Almrante en la mar con sus naos +sin barcas como nosotros en tierra sin tener con que poder ir á él. Y á +todo esto no cesaban los Indios de venirnos á cometer cada rato tañiendo +bocinas y atabales, y dando alaridos pensando que nos tenian vencidos. +El remedio contra esta gente que teniamos eran dos tiros falconetes de +fruslera, muy buenos, y mucha pólvora y pelotas con que los ojeábamos +que no osaban llegar á nosotros. Y esto duró por espacio de cuatro dias, +en los cuales yo hice cosar muchos costales de las velas de una nao que +nos quedaba, y en aquellos puse todo el bizcocho que teniamos, y tomé +dos canoas y até la una con la otra parejas, con unos palos atravesados +por encima, y en estos cargué el bizcocho todo en viages, y las pipas +de vino y azeite y vinagre atadas en una guindaleja y á jorno [_sic_, +jorro] por la mar, tirando por ellas las canoas, abonanzando la mar, en +siete caminos que hicieron lo llevaron todo á las naos, y la gente que +conmigo estaba poco á poco la llevaron, é yo quedé con cinco hombres +á la postre siendo de noche, y en la postrera barcada me embarqué: lo +cual el Almirante tuvo á mucho, y no se hartaba de me abrazar y besar en +los carrillos por tan gran servicio como allí le hice, y me rogó tomase +la capitanía de la nao Capitana y el regimiento de toda la gente y del +viage, lo cual yo acepté por le hacer servicio en ello por ser, como era, +cosa de gran trabajo. + +Postrero de Abril de mil quinientos y tres partimos de Veragoa con tres +navíos, pensando venir la vuelta de Castilla: y comō los navíos estaban +todos abujerados y comidos de gusanos no los podiamos tener sobre agua; +y andadas treinta leguas dejamos el uno, quedándonos otros dos peor +acondicionados que aquel, que toda la gente no bastaba con las bombas y +calderas y vasijas á sacar el agua que se nos entraba por los abujeros +de la broma: y de esta manera, no sin grandísimo trabajo y peligro, +pensando venir á Castilla navegamos treinta y cinco dias, y en cabo +dellos llegamos á la isla de Cuba á lo mas bajo della, á la provincia +de Homo, allá donde agora está el pueblo de la Trinidad; de manera que +estábamos mas lejos de Castilla trescientas leguas que cuando partimos +de Veragoa para ir á ella; y como digo los navíos mal acondicionados, +innavegables, y las vituallas que se nos acababan. Plugo á Dios Nuestro +Señor que pudimos llegar á la isla de Jamaica, donde zabordamos los dos +navíos en tierra, y hicimos de ellos dos casas pajizas, en que estabamos +no sin gran peligro de la gente de aquella isla, que no estaba domada ni +conquistada, nos pusiesen fuego de noche, que fácilmente lo podian hacer +por mas que nosotros velabamos. + +Aquí acabé de dar la postrera racion de bizcocho y vino, y tomé una +espada en la mano y tres hombres conmigo, y fuíme por esa isla adelante, +porque ninguno osaba ir á buscar de comer para el Almirante y los que +con él estaban: y plugo á Dios que hallaba la gente tan mansa que no +me hacian mal, antes se holgaban conmigo y me daban de comer de buena +voluntad. Y en un pueblo que se llama Aguacadiba, concerté con los Indios +y Cacique que harian pan cazabe, y que cazarian y pescarian, y que +darian de todas las vituallas al Almirante cierta cuantía cada dia, y lo +llevarian á las naos, con que estuviese allí persona que ge lo pagase +en cuentas azules y peines y cuchillos y cascabeles, y anzuelos y otros +rescates que para ello llevabamos: y con esto concierto despaché uno +de los dos cristianos que conmigo traía al Almirante, para que enviase +persona que tuviese cargo de pagar aquellas vituallas y enviarlas. + +Y de allí fuí á otro pueblo que estaba tres leguas de este y hice el +mismo concierto con el Cacique y Indios, de él, y envié otro cristiano al +Almirante para que enviase allí otra persona al mismo cargo. + +Y de allí pasé adelante y llegué á un gran Cacique que se llamaba +Huareo, donde agora dicen Melilla, que es trece leguas de las naos, del +cual fuí muy bien recebido, que me dió muy bien de comer, y mandó que +todos sus vasallos trajiesen dende á tres dias muchas vituallas, que le +presentaron, é yo ge las pagué de manera que fueron contentos: y concerté +que ordinariamente las traerian, habiendo allí persona que ge las pagase, +y con este concierto envié el otro cristiano con los mantenimientos que +allá me dieron al Almirante, y pedí al Cacique que me diese dos Indios +que fuesen conmigo fasta el cabo de la isla, que el uno me llevaba la +hamaca en que dormia é el otro la comida. Y desta manera caminé hasta el +cabo de la isla, á la parte del Oriente, y llegué á un Cacique que se +llamaba Ameyro, é hice con él amistades de hermandad, y díle mi nombre y +tomé el suyo, que entre ellos se tiene por grande hermandad. Y compréle +una canoa muy buena que él tenia, y díle por ella una bacineta de laton +muy buena que llevaba en la manga y el sayo y una camisa de dos que +llevaba, y embarquéme en aquella canoa, y vine por la mar requiriendo las +estancias que habia dejado con seis Indios que el Cacique me dió para que +me la ayudasen á navegar, y venido á los lugares donde yo habia proveido, +hallé en ellos los cristianos que el Almirante habia enviado, y cargué de +todas las vituallas que les hallé, y fuime al Almirante, del cual fuí muy +bien recebido, que no se hartaba de verme y abrazarme, y preguntar lo que +me habia sucedido en el viage, dando gracias á Dios que me habia llevado +y traido á salvamiento libre de tanta gente salvage. Y como el tiempo que +yo llegué á las naos no habia en ellas un pan que comer, fueron todos +muy alegres con mi venida, porque les maté la hambre en tiempo de tanta +necesidad, y de allí adelante cada dia venian los Indios cargados de +vituallas á las naos de aquellos lugares que yo habia concertado, que +bastaban para doscientas y treinta personas que estaban con el Almirante. +Dende á diez dias el Almirante me llamó á parte y me dijo el gran peligro +en que estaba, diciéndome ansi: “Diego Mendez, hijo: ninguno de cuantos +aquí yo tengo siente el gran peligro en que estamos sino yo y vos, porque +somos muy poquitos, y estos indios salvages son muchos y muy mudables y +antojadizos, y en la hora que se les antojare de venir y quemarnos aquí +donde estamos en estos dos navioa hechos casas pajizas fácilmente pueden +echar fuego dende tierra y abrasarnos aquí á todos: y el concierto que +vos habeis hecho con ellos del traer los mantenimientos que traen de tan +buena gana, mañana se les antojará otra cosa y no nos traerán nada, y +nosotros no somos parte para tomargelo per fuerza si no estar á lo que +ellos quisieren. Yo he pensado un remedio si á vos os parece: que en esta +canoa que comprastes se aventurase alguno á pasar á la Isla Española á +comprar una nao en que pudiesen salir de tan gran peligro como este en +que estamos. Decidme vuestro parecer.” Yo le respondí: “Señor: el peligro +en que estamos bien lo veo, que es muy mayor de lo que se puede pensar. +El pasar desta Isla á la Isla Española en tan poca vasija como es la +canoa, no solamente lo tengo por dificultoso, sino por imposible: porque +haber de atravesar un golfo de cuarenta leguas de mar y entre islas donde +la mar es mas impetuosa y de menos reposo, no sé quien se ose aventurar á +peligro tan notorio”. Su Señoría no me replicó, persuadiendome reciamente +que yo era el que lo habia de hacer, á lo cual yo respondí: “Señor: +muchas veces he puesto mi vida á peligro de muerte por salvar la vuestra +y de todos estos que aqui estan, y nuestro Señor milagrosamente me ha +guardado y la vida; y con todo no han faltado murmuradores que dicen que +vuestra Señoria me acomete á mí todas las cosas de honra, habiendo en la +compañía otros que las harian tan bien como yo: y por tanto paréceme á mí +que vuestra Señoría los haga llamar á todos y los proponga este negocio, +para ver si entre todos ellos habrá alguno que lo quiera emprender, lo +cual yo dudo; y cuando todos se echen de fuera, yo pondré mi vida á +muerte por vuestro servicio, como muchas veces lo he hecho”. + +Luego el dia siguiente su Señoría los hizo juntar á todos delante sí, y +les propuso el negocio de la manera que á mí: é oido, todos enmudecieron, +y algunos dijeron que era por demas platicarse en semejante cosa, porque +era imposible en tan pequeña vasija pasar tan impetuoso y peligroso golfo +de cuarenta leguas como este, entre estas dos islas donde muy recias +naos se habian perdido andando á descubrir, sin poder romper ni forzar +el ímpetu y furia de las corrientes. Entonces yo me levanté y dije: +“Señor: una vida tengo no mas, yo la quiero aventurar por servicio de +vuestra Señoría y por el bien de todos los que aquí estan, porque tengo +esperanza en Dios nuestro Señor que vista la intencion con que yo lo hago +me librará, como otras muchas veces lo ha hecho.” Oida por el Almirante +mi determinacion levantóse y abrazóme y besóme en el carrillo, diciendo: +“Bien sabia yo que no habia aquí ninguno que osase tomar esta empresa +sino vos: esperanza tengo en Dios nuestro Señor saldreis della con +vitoria como de las otras que habeis emprendido.” + +El dia siguiente yo puse mi canoa á monte, y le eché una quilla postiza, +y le dí su brea y sebo, y en la popa y proa clavéle algunas tablas para +defensa de la mar que no se me entrase como hiciera siendo rasa; y +púsele un mástil y su vela, y metí los mantenimientos que pude para mí +y para un cristiano y para seis indios, que éramos ocho personas, y no +cabian mas en la canoa: y despedíme de su Señoría y de todos, y fuime la +costa arriba de la Isla de Jamaica, donde estábamos, que hay dende las +naos hasta el cabo della treinta y cinco leguas, las cuales yo navegué +con gran peligro y trabajo, porque fuí preso en el camino de Indios +salteadores en la mar, de que Dios me libró milagrosamente. Y llegado al +cabo de la isla, estando esperando que la mar se amansase para acometer +mi viage, juntáronse muchos Indios y determinaron de matarme y tomar la +canoa y lo que en ella llevaba; y así juntos jugaron mi vida á la pelota +para ver á cual dellos cabria la ejecucion del negocio. Lo cual sentido +por mí víneme ascondidamente á mi canoa, que tenia tres leguas de allí, +y hícime á la vela y víneme donde estaba el Almirante, habiendo qnince +dias que de allí habia partido: y contele todo lo sucedido, cómo Dios +milagrosamente me habia librado de las manos de aquellos salvages. Su +Señoría fue muy alegre de mi venida, y preguntóme si volveria al viage. +Yo dije que sí, llevando gente que estuviese conmigo en el cabo de la +isla hasta que yo entrase en la mar á proseguir mi viage. Su Señoría me +dió setenta hombres y con ellos á su hermano le Adelantado, que fuesen +y estuviesen conmigo hasta embarcarme, y tres dias despues. Y desta +manera volví al cabo de la isla donde estuve cuatro dias. Viendo que la +mar se amansaba me despedí dellos y ellos de mí, con hartas lágrimas; y +encomendéme á Dios y á nuestra Señora del Antigua, y navegué cinco dias +y cuatro noches que jamas perdí el remo de la mano gobernando la canoa y +los compañeros remando. Plugo á Dios nuestro Señor que en cabo de cinco +dias yo arribé á la Isla Española, al Cabo de S. Miguel, habiendo dos +dias que no comiamos ni bebiamos por no tenello; y entré con mi canoa +en una ribera muy hermosa, donde luego vino mucha gente de la tierra y +trajeron muchas cosas de comer, y estuve allá dos dias descansando. Yo +tomé seis Indios de allí, dejados los que llevaba, y comencé á navegar +por la costa de la Isla Española, que hay dende allí hasta la Cibdad +de Santo Domingo ciento y treinta leguas que yo habia de andar, porque +estaba allí el Gobernador, que era el Comendador de Lares; y habiendo +andado por la costa de la isla ochenta leguas, no sin grandes peligros y +trabajos, porque la isla no estaba conquistada ni allanada, llegué á la +Provincia de Azoa, que es veinte y cuatro leguas antes de Santo Domingo, +y allí supe del Comendador Gallego como el Gobernador era partido á +la Provincia de Xuragoa á allanarla; la cual estaba cincuenta leguas +de allí. Y esto sabido dejé mi canoa y tomé el camino por tierra de +Xuragoa, donde hallé el Gobernador, el cual me detuvo allí siete meses +hasta que hizo quemar y ahorcar ochenta y cuatro Caciques, señores de +vasallos, y con ellos á Nacaona la mayor señora de la isla, á quien todos +ellos obedecian y servian. Y esto acabado vine de pie á tierra de Santo +Domingo, que era setenta leguas de allí, y estuve esperando viniesen naos +de Castilla, que habia mas de un año que no habian venido. Y en este +comedio plugo á Dios que vinieron tres naos, de las cuales yo compré la +una y la cargué de vituallas, de pan y vino y carne y puercos y carneros +y frutas, y la envié adonde estaba el Almirante para en que viniesen él y +toda la gente como vinieron allí á Santo Domingo y de allí á Castilla. E +yo me vine delante en las otras dos naos á hacer relacion al Rey y á la +Reina de todo lo sucedido en aquel viage. + +Paraceme que será bien que se diga algo de lo acaecido al Almirante y +á su familiar en un año que estuvieron perdidos en aquesta isla: y es +que dende á pocos dias que yo me partí los Indios se amotinaron y no +le querian traer de comer como antes; y él los hizo llamar á todos los +Caciques y les digo que se maravillaba dellos en no traerle la comida +como solian, sabiendo como él les habia dicho, que habia venido allí +por mandado de Dios, y que Dios estaba enojado dellos, y que él ge lo +mostraria aquella noche por señales que haria en el cielo; y como aquella +noche era el eclipse de la luna que casi toda se escureció, díjoles que +Dios hacia aquello por enojo que tenia dellos porque no le traian de +comer, y ellos lo creyeron y fueron muy espantados, y prometieron que le +traerian siempre de comer, como de hecho lo hicieron, hasta que llegó la +nao con los mantenimentos que yo envié, de que no pequeño gozo fue en el +Almirante y en todos los que con él estaban: que despues en Castilla me +dijo su Señoría que en toda su vida [nunca?] habia visto tan alegre dia, +y que nunca pensó salir de allí vivo: y en esta nao se embarcó y vino á +Santo Domingo y de allí á Castilla. + +He querido poner aquí esta breve suma de mis trabajos y grandes señalados +servicios, cuales nunca hizo hombre á Señor, ni los hará de aquí adelante +del mundo; y esto á fin que mis hijos lo sepan y se animen á servir, é su +Señoria sepa que es obligado á hacerles muchas mercedes. + +Venido su Señoría á la Corte, y estando en Salamanca en la cama enfermo +de gota, andando yo solo entendiendo en sus negocios y en la restitucion +de su estado y de la gobernacion para su hijo D. Diego, yo le dije ansi: +“Señor: ya vuestra Señoría sabe lo mucho que os he servido y lo mas +que trabajo de noche y de dia en vuestros negocios: suplico á vuestra +Señoria me señale algun galardon para en pago dello:” y él me respondió +alegremente que yo lo señalase y él lo cumpliria, porque era mucha razon. +Y entonces yo le señalé y supliqué á su Señoría me hiciese merced del +oficio del Alguacilazgo mayor de la Isla Española para en toda mi vida: y +su Señoría dijo que de muy buena voluntad, y que era poco para lo mucho +que yo habia servido; y mandóme que lo dijese ansi al Sr. D. Diego, su +hijo, el cual fue muy alegre de la merced á mí hecha de dicho oficio, y +dijo que si su padre me lo daba con una mano, él con dos. Y esto es ansi +la verdad para el siglo que á ellos tiene y á mi espera. + +Habiendo yo acabado, no sin grandes trabajos mios, de negociar la +restitucion de la gobernacion de las Indias al Almirante D. Diego, mi +Señor, siendo su padre fallecido, le pedí la provision del dicho oficio. +Su Señoria me respondió que lo tenia dado al Adelantado su tio; pero que +él me daria otra cosa equivalente á aquella. Yo dije que aquella diese +él á su tio, y á mi me diese lo que su padre y él me habian prometido, +lo cual no se hizo; y yo quedé cargado de servicios sin ningun galardon, +y el Sr. Adelantado, sin haberlo servido, quedó con mi oficio y con el +galardon de todos mis afanes. + +Llegado su Señoría á la Cibdad de Santo Domingo por Gobernador tomó las +varas dió este oficio á Francisco de Garay, criado del Sr. Adelantado, +que lo sirviese por él. Esto fue en diez dias del mes de Julio de mil +quinientas diez años. Valia entonces el oficio á lo menos un cuento de +renta, del cual la Vireina, mi Señora, como tutriz y curadora del Virey, +mi Señor, y él me son en cargo realmente y me lo deben de justicia y _de +foro conscientiæ_, porque me fue hecha la merced de él, y no se cumplió +conmigo dende el dia que se dió al Adelantado hasta el postrero de mis +dias, porque si se me diera yo fuera el mas rico hombre de la isla y mas +honrado; y por no se me dar soy el mas pobre della, tanto que no tengo +una casa en que more sin alquiler. + +Y porque haberseme de pagar lo que el oficio ha rentado seria muy +dificultoso, yo quiero dar un medio y será este: que su Señoría haga +merced del Alguacilazgo mayor de la Cibdad de Santo Domingo á uno de +mis hijos para en toda su vida, y al otro le haga merced de su Teniente +de Almirante en la dicha Cibdad: y con hacer merced destos dos oficios +á mis hijos de la manera que he aquí dicho, y poniéndolos en cabeza de +quien los serva por ellos hasta que sean de edad, su Señoría descargará +la conciencia del Almirante su padre, y yo me satisfaré de la paga que +se me debe de mis servicios: y en esto no diré mes de dejallo en sus +conciencias de sus Señorías, y hagan en ello lo que mejor les pareciere. + +Item: Dejo por mis albaceas y ejecutores deste mi testamento, aquí en +la corte, al Bachiller Estrada y á Diego de Arana, juntamente con la +Vireina, mi Señora, y suplico yo á su Señoría lo acepte y les mande á +ellos lo mismo. + +_Otra cláusula._ Item: Mando que mis albaceas compren una piedra grande, +la mejor que hallaren, y se ponga sobre mi sepultura, y se escriba en +derredor della estas letras: “Aquí yace el honrado caballero Diego Mendez +que sirvió mucho á la Corona Real de España en el descubrimiento y +conquista de las Indias con el Almirante D. Cristobal Colon, de gloriosa +memoria, que las descubrió, y despues por sí con naos suyas á su costa: +falleció, etc. Pido de limosna un Pater noster y una Ave María.” + +Item: En medio de la dicha piedra se haga una canoa, que es un madero +cavado en que los Indios navegan, porque en otra tal navegó trescientas +leguas, y encima pongan unas letras que digan: “Canoa.” + +Caros y amados hijos mios, y de mi muy cara y amada muger Doña +Francisca de Ribera, la bendicion de Dios Todopoderoso, Padre y Hijo +y Espíritu Santo y la mia descienda sobre vos y vos cubra y os haga +catolicos cristianos, y os dé gracia que siempre le ameis y temais. +Hijos: encomiendoos mucho la paz y concordia, y que seais muy conformes +y no soberbios, sino muy humildes y muy amigables á todos los que +contratáredes, porque todos os tengan amor: servid lealmente al Almirante +mi Señor, y su Señoría os hará muchas mercedes por quien él es, y +porque mis grandes servicios lo merecen; y sobre todo os mando, hijos +mios, seais muy devotos y oyais muy devotamente los Oficios Divinos, y +haciéndolo ansi Dios nuestro Señor os dará largos dias de vida. A él +plega por su infinita bondad haceros tan buenos como yo deseo que seais, +y os tenga siempre de su mano. Amen. + +Los libros que de acá os envio son los siguientes: + +Arte de bien morir de Erasmo. Un sermon de Erasmo en romance. Josefo de +Bello Judaico. La Filosofía moral de Aristóteles. Los libros que se dicen +Lingua Erasmi. El libro de la Tierra santa. Los coloquios de Erasmo. Un +tratado de las querellas de la Paz. Un libro de Contemplaciones de la +Pasion de nuestro Redentor. Un tratado de le venganza de la muerte de +Agamenon, y otros tratadillos. + +Ya dije, hijos mios, que estos libros os dejo por mayorazgo, con las +condiciones que estan dichas de suso en el testamento, y quiero que +vayan todos con algunas Escrituras mias, que se hallarán en el arca que +está en Sevilla, que es de cedro, como ya está dicho: pongan tambien en +esta el mortero de mármol que está en poder del Sr. D. Hernando, ó de su +mayordomo. + +Digo yo Diego Mendez que esta Escritura contenida en trece hojas es mi +testamento y postrimera voluntad, porque yo lo ordené é hice escribir, +y lo firmé de mi nombre, y por él revoco y doy por ningunos otros +cualesquier testamentos hechos en cualesquier otros tiempos ó lugar; +y solo este quiero que valga, que es hecho en la villa de Valladolid +en diez y nueve dias del mes de Junio, año de nuestro Redentor de mil +quinientos treinta y seis años. Diego Mendez. E yo el dicho García de +Vera, Escribano Notario público, presente fui á todo lo que dicho es, que +de mi se hace mencion, é por mandado del dicho Sr. Teniente é pedimento +del dicho Bachiller Estrada, este testamento en estas veinte é seis hojas +de papel, pliego entero, como aquí parece, fice escrebir como ante mí se +presentó é abrió, é ansi queda originalmente en mi poder. E por ende fice +aquí este mi signo tal en (_está signado_) testimonio de verdad. García +de Vera. (_Está firmado._) + +_Concuerda literalmente con las cláusulas copiadas de un testimonio +signado y firmado por el expresado Escribano García de Vera, que obra +originalmente en el Archivo del Excmo. Sr. Almirante Duque de Veraguas, +de donde lo copié en Madrid á veinte y cinco dias del mes de Marzo de mil +ochocientos veinte y cinco años.—Tomas Gonzalez._ + + +FOOTNOTES: + +[213] Donna Maria de Toledo, widow of Diego Columbus. + +[214] Possibly the ship they abandoned was inferior in size, or in some +other respect. + +[215] Ferdinand Columbus says that the Indians called this eastern point +of the island Aramaquique, and that it was thirty-four leagues from +Maima, where the admiral was. + +[216] This cape is since called Cape Tiburon. Mendez does not speak of +his arrival at the little island of Naraza, and other places spoken of by +Ferdinand Columbus and Herrera. + +[217] This should be Xaragua. + +[218] On the twenty-eighth of June 1504; he entered the harbour of St. +Domingo on the thirteenth of August, started for Spain on the twelfth of +September, and arrived at San Lucar on Thursday, the seventh of November. + +[219] By B. von Breydenbach.(?) + + +FINIS. + + + + +INDEX. + + + Adda (Marquis d’), his reproduction of the printed text of the first + letter, cxxv + + Adelantado, _see_ Bartholomew Columbus + + Adelphus (John), his connection with St. Dié, lxxxvi + + Ages, a kind of turnip used by the Indians, 63, 68 + + Aguacadiba, village in Jamaica, 223 + + Aguado (Juan), recommended to the notice of the King and Queen, 93 + + Aguja (Punta de la), Needle Point, 125 + + Ailly (Cardinal Pierre d’), his Imago Mundi studied by Columbus, xlv + + Alcatraz (Point), 125 + + Alfragan, the Arab astronomer, his influence on Columbus, xlvii + + Aloes, found in Española, 67 + + Ameyro (The Cacique), his friendship for Diego Mendez, 225 + + Animals in Española, 42 + + —— of Cariay, 200 + + Antillia, supposed island of, xxvi + + Appianus, his Mappe-monde bearing the name of America, lxxxvii + + Arabian expedition to America, xix + + Arana (Diego de), Governor of Española, 12 + + —— (Pedro de), commander of one of the ships sent on by Columbus + to Española in the third voyage, 115 + + Arenal (Point of), 119 + + Arguin, called by Columbus Hargin, 136 + + Arin, Island of, 135 + + Arrows used by the Caribbees, 31 + + Astrolabe rendered useful for seamen, li + + Atlantis, spoken of by Plato, v + + Australia discovered by the Portuguese within one hundred years of + the rounding of Cape Bojador by Prince Henry’s navigators, i + + Avan, a province of Juana, 10 + + Ayala (Pedro de), on the supposed islands in the Atlantic, xxvi + + Ayay, one of the Caribbee Islands, 31 + + Axes made of stone used by the Indians, 68 + + Azoa, Province of Española, 232 + + + Bacon (Roger), his _Opus Majus_ supplied the portion of the _Imago + Mundi_ which is supposed to have inspired Columbus with the + idea of discovering America, xlvii + + Bardson (Heriulf), establishes himself at Heriulfsnes in Greenland, x + + Barrow (Sir John), his account of Cortereal’s expedition, xxvii + + Bastimentos, harbour of, 184 + + Becher (Captain), agrees with Muñoz on the landfall of Columbus, lx + + Behaim (Martin), on the supposed islands in the Atlantic, xxvi; + said to have discovered the Azores, xxx; + the evidence of his globe, xxxi; + in conjunction with Roderigo and Josef, renders the astrolabe + useful for seamen, li + + Belem and Belpuerto, disabled ships left there, 193 + + —— or Yebra, river, 213 + + Beltran, recommended to the notice of the King and Queen, 92 + + Bianco (Andrea), his map, on which is the word “Antillia,” xxvi + + Bibliography, cviii + + Birds’ nests in Española at Christmas, 42 + + Bobadilla (D. Francisco de), his infamous treatment of Columbus, lxxi; + his death, lxxvi + + —— ——, Columbus’s account of his arrival in Española, 159; + his conduct, 160; + arrests Columbus, 167; + seizes his house and papers, 173 + + Bohio discovered, lxiii + + Bohio, a province of Española, 41 + + Bojador (Cape), rounded by Prince Henry’s navigators in 1434, i + + Bonacca, _see_ Guanaga + + Brazil, supposed island of, xxvi + + Bremen (Adam of), makes the earliest allusion (_printed_) to the + colonization of America by the Scandinavians, viii + + Brerewood (Edward), derives the Americans from the Tartars, vi + + Burenquen (Porto Rico), discovered, 39 + + + Cabot (John), his zeal for the discovery of the supposed islands in + the Atlantic, xxvi + + —— (Sebastian), his discovery demonstrated, xxviii + + Cabras, Goat Island, 43 + + Canaanites supposed to have peopled America, vi + + Cannibals, Caribbee, 26, 29 + + —— in Cariay, 201 + + Canoes, 9, 10 + + Caonabó, a chief in Española accused of having burned the Spanish + settlement, 48; + gold mines in Niti belonging to him, 64; + his bad disposition towards the Christians, 77 + + Cape Gracias a Dios, 178 + + Cape Honduras, lxxvii + + Cape Verde Islands discovered by Diego Gomez (see _Life of Prince + Henry the Navigator_), 115, 116 + + Capitana ship, the captaincy given to Diego Mendez, 222 + + Carabajal, Alonzo Sanchez de, commanded one of the ships sent on by + Columbus to Española in the third voyage, 115 + + Caracol, Bay of, in Española, 47 + + Caradoc of Llancarvan’s account of the Welsh expedition, xxi + + Carambaru, golden mirrors worn by the Indians, 180 + + Cariay, Columbus arrives there in his fourth voyage, 180; + enchanters, 199; + sepulchre, 199; + animals, 200; + cannibals, 201; + copper mines, 201; + cotton beautifully worked, 201 + + Caribbee Islands discovered, 25 + + Caseneuve (Guillaume de), his name confounded with that of Columbus, + xxxviii + + Cathay, Northern China, 194 + + Cazadilla, bishop of Ceuta, condemns the proposed enterprise of + Columbus, lii + + Celts supposed to have peopled America, ix + + Ceyre, Cayre or Charis (Dominica), 31; + said to abound in gold, 37, 38 + + Chanca’s (Dr.) letter, iii; + history of, cxxxviii, cxl; + physician to the fleet of Columbus, in his second voyage, his + letter, 19; + mentioned in the memorial of Columbus, 93 + + Chinese supposed to have reached America by the north, vii + + Ciamba, province of, gold mines, 180 + + Cibao, gold mines of, 69 + + Ciguare, dress and customs of the people, 181 + + Cladera (Don Cristóbal) refutes the statements respecting Behaim, xxx + + Cobrava Aurira, province, 214 + + Columbus (Bartholomew) sent by his brother to Henry VII, lvi; + arrested by Bobadilla, 167 + + Columbus (Christopher) derives the idea of explorations to the West + from Prince Henry’s researches into the Atlantic, i; + the importance of his original letters, ii; + the pathos and dignity of his complaints, iii; + the evidence of European adventurers having visited America before + his time, does not detract from his merit, xxxi; + every previous discovery having been accidental, xxxii; + his parentage and date of birth, xxxii, xxxiv; + birthplace, xxxv; + education, xxxv; + his connection with Guillaume de Caseneuve discussed, xxxvii, xlii; + his sojourn in Portugal, where he first receives the inspiration + of his great discovery, his marriage with the daughter of + Perestrello and consequent inheritance of his papers, etc., + xlii, xliii; + the facts and signs which convinced him there was land to the West, + xliii, xliv; + his studies, xlv; + influenced by al Fergani or Alfragan, xlvii; + Marco Polo and Sir John Mandeville, xlviii; + his letter to Toscanelli and the answer, xlix; + his patience in biding his time for application to the King of + Portugal, l; + his letters of 1477 quoted by his son, l; + his audience with the king, li; + his enterprise condemned by the Council, lii; + his unworthy treatment, lii; + and departure, liii; + conjectures respecting his subsequent history, liii; + his visit to the Convent of Rabida, liv; + his various fortune at the Court of Spain, liv, lvii; + sets out on his first great voyage, lvii; + discovers the Island of San Salvador, etc., the true landfall + discussed, lviii-lxiii; + establishes a colony in Hispaniola, lxiii; + his stormy passage home, lxiv; + reception at the Azores, lxiv; + arrives at Lisbon, lxv; + and reaches Spain in safety, lxvi; + his triumph at Barcelona, lxvi; + the Papal bull obtained, lxvii; + his second voyage, lxviii; + and return, lxix; + third voyage, lxix; + his cruel treatment, lxxi, lxxii; + arrives in Spain and is honourably received by the sovereigns, + lxxiii; + his fourth voyage, lxxiv; + and return, lxxix; + his sufferings till death, lxxx; + his first letter addressed to Raphael Sanchez, 1; + discovers San Salvador, Santa Maria de Conception, Fernandina, + Isabella and Juana, 2; + sees another island and names it Española, 3; + takes possession of Española and builds the fortress of Villa de + Navidad, 11; + describes the benefits to be derived from his discoveries, 15, 16; + leaves Cadiz for his second voyage, arrives at the Great Canary, + Gomera, 20; + Ferro, 21; + discovers Dominica and Marigalante, 22; + discovers Guadaloupe, 24; + discovers Montserrat, Santa Maria la Redonda, Santa Maria la + Antigua, and St. Martin, 34; + discovers Santa Cruz and St. Ursula, 38; + discovers Porto Rico, which he names St. John the Baptist, 39; + arrives at Española, 41; + receives a deputation from Guacamari, 44; + finds the settlement destroyed by fire, 51; + goes to visit Guacamari, 54; + selects Port Isabella for the new settlement, builds the City of + Marta, 62; + sends two parties in search of gold mines, 69; + his memorial to the King and Queen of the results of the second + voyage, 72; + refers to Gorbalan and Hojeda for an account of the gold to be + found, 74; + describes the difficulties and dangers to be encountered, 75, 81; + describes the fertility of the country, 81; + asks for supplies, 82, 84; + asks for the confirmation of Antonio de Torres as governor of the + City of Isabella, 92; + recommends to the notice of the King and Queen Messire Pedro + Margarite, Gaspar, Beltran, and Juan Aguado, 92, 93; + also Dr. Chanca, 93; + Coronel, 95; + also Gil Garcia, 96; + complains of the conduct of Juan de Soria, 98; + asks for further assistance and stores, 100, 104; + recommends Villacorta, 105; + his narrative of his third voyage, 108; + his address to the King and Queen, 108, 114; + sails from San Lucar, 114; + discovers Trinidad, 118; + describes Indians in a canoe near the point of Arenal, 119; + violent currents near the Point, 122; + beauty of the country at the Punta de la Aguja, 125; + conjectures respecting the violent currents, 130; + the north star, 133; + form of the earth, 134, 135; + describe the Gulf of Pearls, 139; + his conjectures as to the situation of Paradise, 141, 146; + letter to the nurse of Prince John, 152; + describes his troubles on arriving at Española, 155, 156; + conduct of Hojeda and Vincent Yañez, 156; + of Adrian Mogica and Don Ferdinand, 157; + describes Bobadilla’s arrival, 160; + his arrest by Bobadilla, 167; + his house and papers seized, 173; + letter to the King and Queen on his fourth voyage, 175; + his reception in Española, 176; + dreadful storm, 176, 178; + his distress on account of his son and brother, 178, 179; + arrives at Cariay, hears of gold mines in Ciamba, goes to + Carambaru, 180; + describes the people of Ciguare, 181; + his conjectures with regard to the earth, 183; + reaches the harbour of Bastimentos, 184; + his suffering during an awful tempest, 185; + returns to Puerto Gordo, 186; + reaches Veragua, 187; + finds gold mines, 188; + deceit of the Cacique Quibian, 188; + establishes a settlement, 189; + takes the Cacique prisoner, 189; + describes pathetically his misfortunes on this coast, 190; + his dream, 191, 192; + supposes himself in China, 194; + reaches Jamaica, 195; + repeats the course of his voyage, 196, 197; + describes the enchanters of Cariay, 199; + sculptured sepulchre, 199; + animals, 200; + products, 201; + abundance of gold in Veragua, 202; + conjectures concerning the gold of Solomon, 204; + his distress for the condition of Española and Paria, 206; + his touching complaint of cruel treatment, 209, 211; + his conference with Diego Mendez related by the latter, 226 + + Columbus (Diego), information given by him to Las Casas respecting + his father, xliii; + leaves Lisbon with his father, liii; + his father’s anxiety about him, 179 + + —— (Juan Antonio), commanded one of the ships sent on by Columbus + to Española in the third voyage, 115 + + —— (Ferdinand), on the subject of his father’s parentage and date + of birth, xxxii; + on the subject of Caseneuve, xxxviii; + on the subject of his father’s first thoughts of his great + discovery, xlii; + relates the facts and signs which led him on to the West, xliii; + collects his father’s books and bequeaths them to the Cathedral of + Seville, xlv; + speaks of the influence of Alfragan, xlvii; + quotes a letter of his father’s, l; + his statement that his father went to Spain in 1484, liii + + Copper mines in Cariay, 201 + + Coral ornaments worn by the Indians of Ciguare, 181 + + Cordeiro quoted by Sir John Barrow, xxvii + + Coronel recommended to the notice of the King and Queen, 95 + + Correa (Pedro), brother-in-law of Columbus, confirms his idea of land + to the West, xliii + + Cortereals, the Portuguese explorers, xxvii + + Cosa (Juan de la), his map, lxi, lxii, lxxxix + + Cosmographiæ Introductio, of Waldseemüller, lxxxiv + + Cotton worn by the Indian women, 6; + great quantities in the islands, 15; + found in Guadaloupe, both spun and prepared for spinning, 25; + spun and woven into sheets by the Caribbees, 29; + worn in bands round the knee and ankle by the Caribbee women, 30; + hammock of, 56; + worn by the Indian women, 64; + trees of in Española, 66; + worked in colours and worn by Indians near Point Arenal, 120; + beautifully worked in Cariay, 201 + + Crantor confirms the story told by Plato, v + + Cuba, _see_ Juana + + Cubagua discovered, lxx + + + Dati (Giuliano), his poem, xc, cvii + + Dauphin (Port) in Española, 60 + + De Murr, his evidence on the subject of Behaim, xxxi + + De Guignes, states that the Chinese reached America by the north, + vii; + his opinion on the Arabian expedition, xix + + Deza (Diego de), the faithful friend of Columbus, lv, lxxx + + Documents—Columbus’ letter on the first voyage, 1; + Dr. Chanca’s on the second voyage, 19; + Memorial of Columbus on the second voyage, 72; + letter of Columbus on the third voyage, 108; + his letter to the nurse of Prince John, 152; + his letter on the fourth voyage, 175; + narrative of Diego Mendez, 212 + + Dogs in Española, 42 + + Dominica, Island of, discovered, 22; + described in second voyage, 31; + report of gold there, 37 + + Dragon’s mouth, 139 + + Ducks found in Zuruquia, 13 + + + Editio Princeps of first letter of Columbus, the rival claims + discussed, cxxii, cxxxviii + + Edrisi on the Arabian expedition, xx + + Egyptians supposed to have colonised America, etc., vi + + El Retrete, lxxviii + + Engaño, Point, Española, 41 + + Eric the Red colonises Greenland, x + + Eric, Greenland Bishop, visits Vineland in 1121, xvii + + Escobar, companion of Diego Mendez, 217 + + Escobedo, Rodrigo de, lieutenant to the governor of Española, 12 + + Española (St. Domingo), seen from Juana, 3; + scenery, harbours, vegetation, spices, gold and other metals, 4-5; + inhabitants, 5-9; + great size, 11; + town of Villa de Navidad, 11; + manners and customs, 12-14; + products, 15; + arrival of Columbus on his second voyage, 41; + its division into provinces, 41; + country described, birds and animals, 42-43; + harbour of Monte Cristi, 45; + river Yaque, 45; + Bay of Caracol, 47; + Port Dauphin, 60; + Port Isabella, 62; + city of Marta, 62; + vegetation, 63; + the people, 64; + gold mines, 64; + products, 66-68; + abundance of gold, 69-70; + Columbus finds the colony in a state of revolt when he arrives + there in his third voyage, 155; + Bobadilla’s arrival, 160; + reception of Columbus on his fourth voyage, 176 + + Evangelista discovered, lxviii + + Exuma discovered, lxiii + + + Fernandina (Great Exuma) discovered, 2 + + Fonseca (Juan Rodriguez), Bishop of Badajos, his enmity to Columbus, + lxviii and 156 + + Fortress built at Villa de Navidad, 11-12 + + + Galea, Cape, now Cape Galeota, the south-east point of Trinidad, 118 + + Gallardo (Don Bartolomé), the _Imago Mundi_ not mentioned in his list + of books in the Columbian library, xlvi + + Gallega Island, 177 + + Garcia, land of, 121; + violent currents between it and the I. of Trinidad, 123 + + Garcia (Gil), recommended to the notice of the King and Queen, 96 + + Gardar, a Dane, discovers Iceland in 863, x + + Gaspar recommended to the notice of the King and Queen, 92 + + Genoa, birthplace of Columbus according to his own assertion, xxxv + + Ghillany’s (Dr. F. W.) copy of Martin Behaim’s globe, xxxi + + Gibbs (Mr.) confirms Navarrete on the landfall of Columbus, lviii + + Giocondi (Fra Giovanni) translated Vespucci’s letter into Latin, + lxxxiv + + Globus Mundi, lxxxv + + Gold and other metals in Española, 5, 15; + report of large quantities at Cayre, 37; + ear-rings and necklaces worn by the Indians, 44; + masks sent as presents by Guacamari, 48; + beaten into thin plates by the Indians, 55; + mines at Cibao and Niti, 69; + great quantities found by Gorbalan and Hojeda, 74; + ornaments of, worn by the Indians of Paria, 125; + Indians direct Columbus where to find it, 128; + seizure of, by Bobadilla, 167; + gold mines of Ciamba, 180; + mirrors of, worn by the Indians of Carambaru, 180; + ornaments of worn by the Indians of Ciguare, 181; + mines of Veragua, 188; + abundance of, in Veragua, 202; + of Solomon, 204 + + Gomara on the subject of the Polish pilot, xxix + + Gorbalan, his discovery of gold, 74 + + Greenland discovered and colonised, x + + Grotius (Hugo) describes America as peopled from Norway, ix + + Grüninger (Johann) of Strasburg, his edition of the _Cosmographiæ + Introductio_, lxxxv + + Guacamari sends a deputation to Columbus, 44; + sends his cousin with an account of the destruction of the Spanish + settlement, 48; + receives Melchior and his party, 54; + his interview with Columbus, 56; + his hammock of cotton net-work, 56; + his pretended wound, 58; + his disappearance, 60 + + Guadaloupe, Island of, discovered, 24; + immense waterfall, 25; + deserted houses, 25; + the inhabitants, 27; + their arts, 29; + manners and customs, 30-32 + + Guanaga Island discovered, lxxvii + + Guanahani (San Salvador, now Watling’s Island) discovered, 2, lxi + + Gunnbiorn discovers Greenland in 877, x + + Gutierrez (Pedro), lieutenant to the governor of Española, 12 + + + Hair, various ways of wearing among the Indians, 37 + + Hammocks used in Española, 56 + + Hatchets and axes made of stone, 68 + + —— etc., made of copper in Cariay, 201 + + Hayti, a province of Española, 41 + + Helgason (Adalbrand and Thorwald), Icelandic clergymen and explorers + in 1285, xviii + + Henry VII. willing to accept the services of Columbus, lvi + + Herrera on the signs which led Columbus to the West, xliv; + his map, its evidence on the landfall of Columbus, lx, lxii + + Hispaniola, _see_ Española + + Hojeda (Alonzo de) sent by Columbus to examine gold mines, 74; + causes great trouble to Columbus in Española, 156 + + Homo, province of Cuba, 222 + + Honey found in Española, 5 + + Hornius, his treatise “_De originibus Americanis_,” vi + + Huareo, Cacique, 224 + + Humboldt’s answer to the theory of De Guignes, viii; + his assertion respecting Ortelius, viii; + his opinion on the Arabian expedition, xx; + on the subject of the Polish pilot, xxix-xxx; + on the date of the _Imago Mundi_, xlvi; + on Roger Bacon, xlvii; + on the landfall of Columbus, lviii; + his testimony to the glory of Columbus, lxxxviii + + Hylacomylus, _see_ Waldseemüller + + + Iceland discovered and colonised, x + + Idolatry not practised by the Indians, 8 + + _Imago Mundi_, studied by Columbus, xlv; + dates assigned to the first edition, xlvi + + Indians, their weapons, 6; + their want of courage, 7; + simple, honest and liberal, 7; + not idolaters, 8; + very intelligent, 9; + their canoes, 10; + manners and customs, 13-14; + deserted houses in Guadeloupe found to contain cotton and human + bones, 25; + Caribbee, their characteristics, 29-30; + their customs, 31-32; + dress, 37; + miserable hovels in Española, 52; + their manner of working gold, 55; + join readily with the Christians in their acts of worship, 65; + tools made of stone, 68; + their food, 68; + of Paria, description of, 119, 124; + their houses, food, etc., 126; + dress, 128; + tell Columbus where to find gold, 128; + of Trinidad described, 137; + of Carambaru wear golden mirrors round their necks, 180; + of Ciguare, dress and customs, 181; + of Cariay, enchanters, 199, 201; + of Veragua, 215, 217; + conflict with, 219, 221; + refuse to supply Columbus, but are frightened into obedience by the + prediction of an eclipse, 234 + + Ingolf, a Norwegian, colonises Iceland, x + + Ires (William), native of Galway, one of the men left by Columbus in + Española, 12 + + Iron not known by the Indians, 6 + + Isabella, her sympathy with Columbus, lxxiii; + her death, lxxx + + —— (Saometo or Crooked Island) discovered, 2 + + —— city, river, and port of Española, 62 + + Isle of Pines, _see_ Evangelista + + Isla de las Bocas, 197 + + + Jamaica, letter on the fourth voyage dated from, 211; + Diego Mendez treats with the natives, 223 + + John, King of Portugal, grants an audience to Columbus, li; + calls a council to consider his proposition, li; + yields to the unworthy advice of his enemies, lii + + Josef and Roderigo, with the assistance of Behaim, render the + astrolabe useful for seamen, li; + condemn the proposed enterprise of Columbus, lii + + Juana (Cuba) discovered, 2; + its size, 10; + contained two provinces, 10 + + + Karlsefne (Thorfinn), distinguished early discoverer, xiii + + King’s Garden (The) discovered, lxiii + + Kircher (Athanasius), his conjectures concerning the colonisation of + America, etc., vi + + Klaproth, his answer to the theory of De Guignes, vii + + Kohl, on the Venetian expedition, xxv + + + Lajes (Tallarte de), an Englishman, one of the men left by Columbus + in Española, 12 + + Lambinet on the date of the _Imago Mundi_, xlvi + + Landfall of Columbus discussed, lviii, lxiii + + Las Casas, his evidence respecting Columbus and Perestrello, xliii + + Launoy (Jean de), on the date of the _Imago Mundi_, xlvi + + Leibnitz acknowledges that he had erroneously inserted the name of + “Christophorus” into the letters supposed to refer to Columbus, + xxxvii-xxxviii + + Lescarbot (Marc) derives the Americans from the Canaanites, vi + + Lief, son of Eric the Red, discovers Newfoundland and Nova Scotia in + the year 1000, xi; + also New England, xii + + Li-Yen, Chinese historian quoted by De Guignes, vii + + Lizards, an Indian luxury, 43 + + Lud (Walter), canon of St. Dié, his college and printing press, + lxxxiv + + + Macao (Point), Española, 41 + + Mackenzie (Commander Alexander Slidell) on the route of Columbus, lxii + + Malte Brun on the Arabian expedition, xx + + Manchineal, fruit of, 24 + + Mandeville (Sir John), influence on Columbus, xlviii + + Mangi, name given to Southern China by Marco Polo, 194 + + Maps: by Nicolò Zeno, xxv; + anonymous, xxvi; + by Andrea Bianco, xxvi; + the earliest MS. bearing the name of America, lxxxvii + + _Mappa Mundi_, by Pierre d’Ailly, treats of Alfragan, xlvii + + Mappe-monde, by Appianus, bearing the name of America, lxxxvii + + Marchena (Fray Juan Perez de), his interest in Columbus, liv + + Marco Polo, influence of his work on Columbus, xlviii + + Marcolini (Francesco), his account of the Venetian expedition, xxii + + Margarita, Island, discovered, 156 + + Margarite, Messire Pedro, recommended to the notice of the King and + Queen, 92 + + Margry (M.), his pretension founded on the fondness of Columbus for + the works of Pierre d’Ailly, xlv; + disproved, xlv + + Marigalante (Island of) discovered, 22 + + Marquez (Diego) and his party lost for four days, 27, 28 + + Marta (City of), Española, 62 + + Martin (Andreas), his respectful treatment of Columbus in his + trouble, lxxii + + Martin (Fernam), his correspondence with Toscanelli, xlix + + Masks of gold made by the Indians, 55 + + Mastic found, 15 + + Matenino (Martinique), 14 + + Mayaguana, supposed by Varnhagen to be the landfall of Columbus, lx + + Mayreni, a chief in Española, accused of burning the Spanish + settlement, 48 + + Medici (Lorenzo di Pier Francesco de’), letter to him from Vespucci, + lxxxiii + + Melchior and his party received by Guacamari, 54 + + Melilla, 224 + + Memorial of Columbus on the second voyage, 72 + + Mendez (Diego), extract from his will, iii; + his devotion to Columbus, lxxviii, lxxix; + his narrative, 212; + renders assistance to Columbus at Veragua, 213; + his reception by the Indians, 216; + conflict with, 219; + made captain of the ship _Capitana_, 222; + goes to treat with the natives of Jamaica for food, 223; + goes to Española and purchases a ship for Columbus, 233; + his interview with Columbus and promised reward, 235, 236; + his disappointment, 237; + directions respecting his grave, 239 + + Mendoza, archbishop of Toledo, adopts the cause of Columbus, lv + + Mogica (Adrian), one of the rebels in Española, 157 + + Mona, 41 + + Monte Cristi, harbour in Española, 45 + + Montserrat (Island of), discovered, 34 + + Mundus Novus of Johann Ottmar, lxxxii + + Muñoz, his opinion that Columbus went to Genoa from Lisbon, liii; + his opinion on the landfall of Columbus, lviii + + Mylius (Abraham) supposes America to have been peopled by the Celts, + ix + + + Narrative by Diego Mendez, 212 + + Navarrete on the landfall of Columbus, lviii + + Navidad, villa de, town and fortress in Española, 12 + + New England discovered, xii + + Newfoundland discovered A.D. 1000, xi + + Nightingales and other birds singing in November in Española, 4 + + Niti, gold mines of, 69 + + Norwegians supposed to have peopled America, ix + + Nova Scotia discovered in the year 1000, xi + + + Odjein or Ougein, 135 + + _Opus Majus_ of Roger Bacon supplied the portion of the _Imago + Mundi_ which is supposed to have given Columbus the idea of + discovering America, xlvii + + Oronoco, confluence of the, with the sea, 123 + + Ortelius, _not_ the first to recognize the discovery of America by + the Northmen, viii + + Ottmar (Johann), his _Mundus Novus_, lxxxii + + Otto (Mr.) of New York, his assertion respecting Martin Behaim and + the Azores, xxx + + Ovando (Nicolas de), the governor of St. Domingo after Bobadilla, + lxxiii + + + Palm-trees, very fine in Española, 4, 5 + + Paracelsus, his statement of the peopling of the New World, vi + + Paradise, supposed situation of, 141 + + Paria, coast of, 121 + + Parrots found in deserted houses in Guadaloupe, 25 + + Pearls, Gulf of, 139 + + Pearls, bracelets of, worn by the Indians of Paria, 125; + Columbus leaves orders with the people in Española to fish for + them, 155 + + Pelicans show that land was near, 40 + + Pelican (Point), 125 + + Peña Blanca (Point), 123 + + Pepper plant, known to the people of Ciguare, 181 + + Perestrello (Felipe Moñiz de), wife of Columbus, and daughter of + Bartollomeu Perestrello, xlii + + —— (Bartollomeu), received the commandership of Porto Santo from + Prince Henry, his widow gives up his papers, etc., to Columbus, + xlii, xliii + + Perez (Alonzo), the first to see land in the third voyage, 118 + + Philesius, pseudonym of Ringmann, lxxxiv + + Pilot of the ship _Capitana_ first to see land on the second voyage, + 21 + + Pinzon, his jealousy of Columbus, lxvi + + Plato speaks of an island called Atlantis, v + + Polar star, observations of Columbus on, 133 + + _Pomponius Mela_, edited by Vadianus, lxxxvi, lxxxvii + + Porto Rico, named by Columbus St. John the Baptist, discovered, 39 + + Portuguese expedition to America, xxvii + + Prince Henry originates the researches into the Atlantic which led to + the discoveries of Columbus, i + + Puerto Bello discovered, lxxviii + + Puerto Gordo, 186 + + + Queen’s Gardens discovered, lxviii + + Quibian, the Cacique, attempts to deceive Columbus, 188; + taken prisoner, 189; + advice of Columbus respecting him, 205 + + + Rabida (Convent of Santa Maria de), Columbus’s visit there, liv + + Rafn (Professor), his work _Antiquitates Americanæ_, ix; + his collection of MSS. on the discoveries of the Northmen, and his + inferences, ix, xviii + + Reeds used as Indian weapons, 6 + + René II, Duke of Lorraine, patron of Walter Lud, lxxxiv + + Reptiles eaten by the Indians, 68 + + Rhubarb and other drugs in Española, 15 + + Ringmann (Mathias), his admiration of Vespucci, lxxxiv; + suggests the name of America, lxxxv + + Roderigo and Josef, with the assistance of Behaim, render the + astrolabe useful for seaman, li; + condemn the proposed enterprise of Columbus, lii + + Roldan, the enemy of Columbus, perishes in a storm, lxxvi + + + Sais, priests of, their story of the Island of Atlantis, v + + Sandy Point (Punta del Arenal), 119 + + S. Brandan, supposed island of, xxvi + + St. Catherine discovered, lxiii + + St. Domingo, _see_ Española + + St. Martin (Island of) discovered, 34 + + St. Ursula and the eleven thousand virgins (Islands of) discovered, + 38 + + San Miguel (Cape), 232 + + —— Salvador (Watling’s Island), name given by Columbus to + Guanahani, 2 + + Santa Cruz (Island of) discovered, 38 + + —— Maria la Antigua (Island of) discovered, 34 + + —— Maria de Concepcion (Long Island) discovered, 2 + + —— Maria la Redonda (Island of) discovered, 34 + + Santander (Serna) on the earliest date of the first edition of the + _Imago Mundi_, xlvi + + Scandinavians supposed to have peopled America, viii + + Sepulchre in Cariay, 199 + + Serpent’s mouth, 123, 139 + + Snakes in Española, 42 + + Soderini (Pietro), Vespucci’s schoolfellow, the letter intended for + him, lxxxiv + + Solon, remarkable story related to, v + + Soria (Juan de), the complaint of Columbus respecting his conduct, 98 + + Sousa, Faria y, silent respecting the Cortereals, xxviii; + supposed discovery of Newfoundland, xxviii + + Spice in Española, 5; + trees, 67 + + Spinning and weaving among the Caribbees, 29 + + Sugar canes, 81 + + Sumner (Mr. George), his search in the archives of Aragon and + Barcelona for records of Columbus, lxvi + + Szkolny (John), Polish pilot said to have discovered America in 1476, + xxix + + + Talavera, his opposition to the projects of Columbus, liv + + Tartars supposed to have peopled America, vi + + Terra firma, note on the supposed discovery in the second voyage, 110; + discovered in the third voyage, 121 + + Theopompus, his story relating to the “New World”, iv + + Thorwald, Lief’s brother explores the coast of America, xii + + Toinard (Nicolas), his correction of Leibnitz, xxxviii + + Torfæus (Thormodus), Norwegian historian, relates the discovery of + America by the Northmen, ix + + Torres (Antonio de), Columbus begs the King and Queen to confirm his + appointment as governor of the city of Isabella, 92 + + —— (Doña Juana de la), letter of Columbus to, lxxii, 152 + + Toscanelli (Paolo), his correspondence with Martins and afterwards + with Columbus, xlv, xlviii, xlix + + Trinidad, Island of, 121; + violent currents between it and Garcia, 123; + city of, 222 + + Tristan (Diego) killed by Indians, 220 + + Turk’s Island, supposed landfall of Columbus, lviii + + Turner’s (Sharon) curious surmise respecting Columbus, liii + + Turuqueira and Ayay, probably the two islands which form Guadaloupe, + 31 + + Tychsen’s opinion on the Arabian expedition, xx + + + Vadianus (Joachim) uses the name of America in 1512, lxxxvi + + Varnhagen (Señor de), his opinion on the landfall of Columbus, lx; + proved to be mistaken, lxii; + referred to on the subject of the earliest edition of the first + letter, cxxv, cxxvii + + Venetian expedition to America, xxii + + Veragua, Columbus arrives there in his fourth voyage, 187; + gold mines, 188; + custom with regard to burial of the chiefs, 203 + + Vespucci (Amerigo), his letter addressed to Lorenzo di Pier Francesco + de’ Medici, lxxxii; + the question of his voyage discussed, lxxxiii; + the way in which his name was given to America, lxxxv + + Vicente (Martin), Portuguese pilot, confirms Columbus in his idea of + land to the West, xliii + + Villacorta recommended to the notice of the King and Queen, 105 + + Vineland, New England, xii + + Vitalis (Ordericus) speaks of the country visited by the + Scandinavians, ix + + + Waldseemüller (Martin), his _Cosmographiæ Introductio_, lxxxiv + + Washington Irving on the landfall of Columbus, lviii; + disproved, lxii + + Watling’s Island proved to be the landfall of Columbus, lxi + + Watt (Joachim), _see_ Vadianus + + Welsh expedition to America, xx + + Williams (Dr.) advocates the truth of the Welsh expedition, xxii + + + Xamaná, a province of Española, 41 + + Xuragoa (Xaragua), 232 + + + Yams in Española, 63 + + Yañez (Vincent), helps the disaffected in Española, 156 + + Yaque (River) in Española, 45 + + + Zeno (Nicolò and Antonio), Venetian nobles, their expedition, xxii, + xxiv; + map published by their descendant, xxv + + Zuruquia, ducks found there, 43 + + T. RICHARDS, 37, QUEEN STREET, W.C. + +[Illustration] + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 77820 *** diff --git a/77820-h/77820-h.htm b/77820-h/77820-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ac71ba6 --- /dev/null +++ b/77820-h/77820-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,15991 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html> +<html lang="en"> +<head> + <meta charset="UTF-8"> + <title> + Select letters of Christopher Columbus | Project Gutenberg + </title> + <link rel="icon" href="images/cover.jpg" type="image/x-cover"> + <style> + +a { + text-decoration: none; +} + +body { + margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; +} + +h1,h2,h3 { + text-align: center; + clear: both; +} + +h2.nobreak { + page-break-before: avoid; +} + +h3.hanging { + text-align: justify; + padding-left: 2em; + text-indent: -2em; + font-weight: normal; + clear: none; +} + +hr.chap { + margin-top: 2em; + margin-bottom: 2em; + clear: both; + width: 65%; + margin-left: 17.5%; + margin-right: 17.5%; +} + +img.w100 { + width: 100%; +} + +div.chapter { + page-break-before: always; +} + +ul { + list-style-type: none; +} + +li.indx { + margin-top: .5em; + padding-left: 2em; + text-indent: -2em; +} + +li.ifrst { + margin-top: 2em; + padding-left: 2em; + text-indent: -2em; +} + +li.isub1 { + padding-left: 4em; + text-indent: -2em; +} + +p { + margin-top: 0.5em; + text-align: justify; + margin-bottom: 0.5em; + text-indent: 1em; +} + +table { + margin: 1em auto 1em auto; + max-width: 40em; + border-collapse: collapse; +} + +td { + padding-left: 2.25em; + padding-right: 0.25em; + vertical-align: top; + text-indent: -2em; + text-align: justify; +} + +td.in2 { + padding-left: 4.25em; +} + +td.in4 { + padding-left: 6.25em; +} + +.pad-top td { + padding-top: 1em; +} + +table.borders { + border: thin solid black; + font-size: 90%; + max-width: 50em; +} + +table.borders th { + padding: 0.25em; + font-weight: normal; + border: thin solid black; +} + +table.borders td { + text-align: center; + padding: 0.25em; + text-indent: 0; + border-left: thin solid black; + border-right: thin solid black; +} + +blockquote { + margin: 1.5em 10%; +} + +.center { + text-align: center; + text-indent: 0; +} + +.dedication { + text-align: center; + text-indent: 0; + line-height: 1.8em; +} + +.english { + display: inline-block; + width: 52%; + vertical-align: top; + padding-right: 1em; +} + +.spanish { + display: inline-block; + width: 44%; + vertical-align: top; +} + +figcaption p { + text-align: center; + margin-bottom: 1em; + font-size: 90%; + text-indent: 0; +} + +.figcenter { + margin: auto; + text-align: center; +} + +.footnotes { + margin-top: 1em; + border: dashed 1px; +} + +.footnote { + margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; + font-size: 0.9em; +} + +.footnote .label { + position: absolute; + right: 84%; + text-align: right; +} + +.fnanchor { + vertical-align: super; + font-size: .8em; + text-decoration: none; +} + +.gothic { + font-family: 'Old English Text MT', 'Old English', serif; +} + +.hide { + display: none; +} + +.lacuna { + margin-left: 2em; + margin-right: 2em; +} + +.larger { + font-size: 150%; +} + +.mid { + font-size: 125%; +} + +.note { + margin-top: 2em; +} + +.nw { + white-space: nowrap; +} + +.pagenum { + position: absolute; + right: 4%; + font-size: smaller; + text-align: right; + font-style: normal; +} + +.poetry-container { + text-align: center; +} + +.poetry { + display: inline-block; + text-align: left; +} + +.poetry .stanza { + margin: 1em 0em 1em 0em; +} + +.poetry .verse { + padding-left: 3em; +} + +.poetry .indent0 { + text-indent: -3em; +} + +.right { + text-align: right; +} + +.smaller { + font-size: 80%; +} + +.smcap { + font-variant: small-caps; + font-style: normal; +} + +.allsmcap { + font-variant: small-caps; + font-style: normal; + text-transform: lowercase; +} + +.spacer { + margin-left: 2em; + margin-right: 2em; +} + +.titlepage { + text-align: center; + margin-top: 3em; + text-indent: 0; +} + +.transnote { + background-color: #E6E6FA; + color: black; + text-align: center; + font-size: smaller; + padding: 0.5em; + margin-bottom: 5em; +} + +.valign { + vertical-align: middle; +} + +.x-ebookmaker img { + max-width: 100%; + width: auto; + height: auto; +} + +.x-ebookmaker .poetry { + display: block; + margin-left: 1.5em; +} + +.x-ebookmaker blockquote { + margin: 1.5em 5%; +} + +.x-ebookmaker .hide { + display: block; +} + +.x-ebookmaker .english { + display: block; + width: 100%; + vertical-align: baseline; + padding-right: 0; +} + +.x-ebookmaker .spanish { + display: block; + width: 100%; + vertical-align: baseline; +} + +/* Illustration classes */ +.illowp48 {width: 48%;} +.x-ebookmaker .illowp48 {width: 100%;} +.illowp100 {width: 100%;} +.illowp81 {width: 81%;} +.x-ebookmaker .illowp81 {width: 100%;} + </style> + </head> +<body> +<div style='text-align:center'>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 77820 ***</div> + +<div class="transnote"> +<p>Transcriber’s Note: In keeping with the author’s note that “Such +misspellings as a Spanish scholar will readily recognize as the +blunders of the Spanish printer I have not thought it necessary to +notice”, errors in the Spanish parts of the text have been left as +printed. Some evident blunders of the English printer have, however, +been corrected.</p> +</div> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<p class="titlepage">WORKS ISSUED BY<br> +<span class="larger gothic">The Hakluyt Society.</span></p> + +<p class="titlepage">SELECT<br> +LETTERS OF<br> +CHRISTOPHER COLUMBUS,<br> +<span class="smaller">ETC.</span></p> + +<p class="titlepage smaller">M.DCCC.LXX.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="INSTRUCTIONS_TO_BINDER">INSTRUCTIONS TO BINDER.</h2> + +</div> + +<p><a href="#frontispiece">Portrait of S. Christopher</a> to face Title.</p> + +<p><a href="#map1">Herrera’s map</a> and <a href="#map2">Bahama Islands, modern</a>, opposite each other, +between pp. lx and lxi; the first at top, the second at bottom, +both reading the same way.</p> + +<p><a href="#map3">Juan de la Cosa’s map</a> to face page lxiii.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<figure class="figcenter illowp48" id="frontispiece" style="max-width: 40.625em;"> + <img class="w100" src="images/frontispiece.jpg" alt=""> +</figure> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<p class="titlepage"><span class="smaller">SELECT</span><br> +LETTERS<br> +<span class="smaller">OF</span><br> +<span class="larger">CHRISTOPHER COLUMBUS,</span><br> +<span class="smaller">WITH OTHER ORIGINAL DOCUMENTS,<br> +RELATING TO HIS</span><br> +FOUR VOYAGES<br> +<span class="smaller">TO</span><br> +<span class="larger">THE NEW WORLD.</span></p> + +<p class="titlepage"><span class="smaller">TRANSLATED AND EDITED BY</span><br> +<span class="smcap">R. H. MAJOR, F.S.A., etc.</span>,<br> +<span class="smaller">KEEPER OF THE DEPARTMENT OF MAPS AND CHARTS IN THE BRITISH MUSEUM,<br> +AND HON. SEC. OF THE ROYAL GEOGRAPHICAL SOCIETY.</span></p> + +<p class="titlepage gothic">Second Edition.</p> + +<div class="poetry-container"> + <div class="poetry"> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">“Tu spiegherai, Colombo, a un novo polo</div> + <div class="verse indent0">Lontane sì le fortunate antenne,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">Ch’ a pena seguirà con gli occhi il volo</div> + <div class="verse indent0">La Fama ch’ ha mille occhi e mille penne.</div> + <div class="verse indent0">Canti ella Alcide e Bacco, e di te solo</div> + <div class="verse indent0">Basti a’ posteri tuoi ch’alquanto accenne;</div> + <div class="verse indent0">Chè quel poco darà lunga memoria</div> + <div class="verse indent0">Di poema dignissima e d’ istoria.”</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse right"><i>Tasso.—Gerusalemme Liberata.</i> Canto xv, 32.</div> + </div> + </div> +</div> + +<p class="titlepage">LONDON:<br> +PRINTED FOR THE HAKLUYT SOCIETY.<br> +<span class="smaller">M.DCCC.LXX.</span></p> + +<p class="titlepage smaller">T. RICHARDS, 37, GREAT QUEEN STREET.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="COUNCIL"><span class="smaller">COUNCIL<br> +<span class="smaller">OF</span></span><br> +THE HAKLUYT SOCIETY.</h2> + +</div> + +<table> + <tr> + <td colspan="3"><span class="smcap">SIR RODERICK IMPEY MURCHISON, Bart.</span>, + K.C.B., G.C.St.S., F.R.S., F.R.G.S., D.C.L., Mem. Imp. Acad. Sc. St. + Petersburgh, Corr. Mem. Inst. Fr. etc., etc., <span class="smcap">President</span>.</td> + </tr> + <tr class="pad-top"> + <td class="in2 nw"><span class="smcap">Rear-Admiral C. R. DRINKWATER + BETHUNE, C.B.</span>,</td> + <td>}</td> + <td rowspan="2" class="valign nw"><span class="smcap">Vice-Presidents.</span></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="in2"><span class="smcap">The Right Hon. SIR DAVID DUNDAS</span>,</td> + <td>}</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="in4" colspan="3"><span class="smcap">Rev. G. P. BADGER, F.R.G.S.</span></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="in4" colspan="3"><span class="smcap">J. BARROW, Esq., F.R.S.</span></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="in4" colspan="3"><span class="smcap">E. H. BUNBURY, Esq.</span></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="in4" colspan="3"><span class="smcap">LORD ALFRED CHURCHILL.</span></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="in4" colspan="3"><span class="smcap">Rear-Admiral R. COLLINSON, C.B.</span></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="in4" colspan="3"><span class="smcap">Sir WALTER ELLIOTT, K.S.I.</span></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="in4" colspan="3"><span class="smcap">General C. FOX.</span></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="in4" colspan="3"><span class="smcap">W. E. FRERE, Esq.</span></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="in4" colspan="3"><span class="smcap">Captain J. G. GOODENOUGH, R.N.</span></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="in4" colspan="3"><span class="smcap">CHARLES GREY, Esq.</span></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="in4" colspan="3"><span class="smcap">EGERTON VERNON HARCOURT, Esq.</span></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="in4" colspan="3"><span class="smcap">JOHN WINTER JONES, Esq., F.S.A.</span></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="in4" colspan="3"><span class="smcap">R. H. MAJOR, Esq., F.S.A.</span></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="in4" colspan="3"><span class="smcap">Sir CHARLES NICHOLSON, Bart.</span></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="in4" colspan="3"><span class="smcap">Sir WILLIAM STIRLING MAXWELL, Bart.</span></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="in4" colspan="3"><span class="smcap">Major-General Sir HENRY C. RAWLINSON, K.C.B.</span></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="in4" colspan="3"><span class="smcap">The LORD STANLEY of Alderley</span>.</td> + </tr> + <tr class="pad-top"> + <td class="in4" colspan="3"><span class="smcap">CLEMENTS R. MARKHAM, + Esq., Honorary Secretary</span>.</td> + </tr> +</table> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<p class="dedication"><span class="allsmcap">TO<br> +THE HONOURED AND BELOVED</span><br> +MEMORY<br> +<span class="allsmcap">OF HIS EXCELLENCY</span><br> +<span class="mid">THE COUNT DE LAVRADIO,</span><br> +<span class="allsmcap">LATE<br> +ENVOY EXTRAORDINARY AND MINISTER PLENIPOTENTIARY OF</span><br> +HIS MOST FAITHFUL MAJESTY<br> +<span class="allsmcap">AT THE COURT OF ST. JAMES’S,<br> +ETC., ETC., ETC.,<br> +A WARM APPRECIATOR OF<br> +THE EXALTED MERITS OF</span><br> +COLUMBUS,<br> +<span class="allsmcap">THE FOLLOWING PAGES<br> +ARE REVERENTLY INSCRIBED BY</span><br> +THE EDITOR.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Hakluyt_Page_i">[i]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="PREFACE">PREFACE.</h2> + +</div> + +<p>It has been thought desirable by some of the leading +members of our Council that I should avail myself of +the opportunity offered by this second Edition of the +<i>Select Letters of Columbus</i>, to lay before the Society +a correspondence in which I have endeavoured to +vindicate the character of the Society’s early productions, +and especially the first edition of this work, +from a most unjustifiable attack made upon them by +Mr. Froude in the <i>Westminster Review</i> in 1852, and +<i>repeated</i> in the second volume of that gentleman’s +<i>Short Studies on Great Subjects</i>, printed in 1867, and +<i>reprinted</i> in a popular edition in the same year. +The letters themselves will convey to the reader the +whole of the facts, minus only the bitterness and +ferocity of Mr. Froude’s attack.</p> + +<blockquote> + +<p class="center"><i>The Athenæum, July 13th, 1867.</i></p> + +<p class="right">“British Museum, July 3rd, 1867.</p> + +<p>“Will you allow me to appeal against a wrong done to the +Hakluyt Society in general, and to myself in particular, in +a work now very extensively read?</p> + +<p>“In the second volume of Mr. Froude’s <i>Short Studies on +Great Subjects</i>, at page 102, is an article on ‘England’s +Forgotten Worthies,’ in which the author makes an attack +on the Hakluyt Society, the bitter expressions of which need +not be repeated here. It is headed by the titles of three of +the Society’s early publications, and the first he states to be +<i>The Observations of Sir Richard Hawkins, Knt., in his Voyage +in the South Sea in 1593</i>. Reprinted from the edition of +1622, and <i>edited by R. H. Major, Esq., of the British Museum</i>; +<span class="pagenum" id="Hakluyt_Page_ii">[ii]</span>whereas I had nothing to do with the editing of that work. +This done, at page 108, Mr. Froude says: ‘<i>The Editor of +the Letters of Columbus</i> (which I did edit in 1847) <i>apologizes +for the rudeness of the old seaman’s phraseology. Columbus, +he tells us, was not so great a master of the pen as of the +art of navigation. We are to make excuses for him. We +are put on our guard, and, warned not to be offended, before +we are introduced to the sublime record of sufferings under +which a man of the highest order was staggering towards +the end of his earthly calamities; although the inarticulate +fragments in which his thought breaks out from him, are +strokes of natural art, by the side of which literary pathos is +poor and meaningless.</i>’ I warmly deny that I apologized +for Columbus’s language. So far from it, I repeatedly expressed +my sympathy with and admiration of his manly and +touching record of his sufferings. What I did apologize for +was any mischievous result which might possibly have +accrued, though I do not think it did accrue, to my own +diction from that occasional want of connectedness in the +original which I had to contend with in translating. The +two things are manifestly different, and it is not pleasant to +find the reader’s highest sympathies appealed to in order to +bring down greater condemnation on me for a fault that I +had never committed. But I should not trouble you with +such a personal matter, were it not that, having fabricated +this handle for censure on me, Mr. Froude makes it a hook +for the following criticism on the Hakluyt Society: ‘<i>And +even in the subjects which they select, they are pursued by +the same curious fatality</i>,’ the selection blamed being that of +<i>Drake’s Last Voyage in 1595</i>, edited from the original MSS. +Then, after magisterially condemning this elsewhere unblamed +selection as a ‘<i>fatal</i>’ sin, Mr. Froude proceeds to say, at the +foot of page 109, ‘<i>But every bad has a worse below it, and +more offensive than all these is the Editor of “Hawkins’s +Voyage to the South Sea,”</i>’—and if the reader refers to the +head of the article for the name of <i>this most offensive editor</i>, +he will, as I have already said, find my name, who never +had anything to do with it. It is true that on page 110 the +name of the real editor, Admiral Bethune, occurs; but as +Mr. Froude’s article is a reprint from the <i>Westminster Review</i> +of 1852 (not 1853, as Mr. Froude again blunders in saying), +there has been time enough for that gentleman to correct +the injurious errors into which he had fallen. Although +naturally annoyed at this treatment of my name, I left the +<span class="pagenum" id="Hakluyt_Page_iii">[iii]</span>offence unnoticed at the time; but now that, after a lapse +of fifteen years, it is reprinted, with all faults in a widely-circulated +publication, I call on Mr. Froude to correct his +mis-statements.</p> + +<p>“I am, happily, able to state, from the experience of +twenty years, that the estimate of the Hakluyt Society’s +publications by the literary world is far from supporting +Mr. Froude in his supercilious treatment of that Society. +Whatever opinion, however, those publications may deserve, +it is the duty of a critic to be correct, and the greater the +severity, the greater the need of correctness; but when a +critic lashes not only one’s self, but one’s friends, by means +of misrepresentations and blunders of his own making, +what does that critic deserve?</p> + +<p class="right"><span class="smcap">R. H. Major.</span>”</p> + +</blockquote> + +<blockquote> + +<p class="center"><i>The Athenæum, July 20th, 1867.</i></p> + +<p class="right">“5, Onslow Gardens, July 15, 1867.</p> + +<p>“I am sorry to have given Mr. Major cause to complain +of me. Should my <i>Essays</i> be reprinted, the mistake which +he points out shall be corrected; and I can only regret the +injustice which meanwhile is done to his name. At the same +time the only error which I can acknowledge is confined to +the title of a work which stands at the head of the article. +In the article itself the volumes criticised are assigned to +their proper editors.</p> + +<p class="right"><span class="smcap">J. A. Froude.</span>”</p> + +</blockquote> + +<blockquote> + +<p class="center"><i>The Athenæum, July 27th, 1867.</i></p> + +<p class="right">“British Museum, July 23, 1867.</p> + +<p>“I beg to thank Mr. Froude for his courteous expression +of regret for what, I am quite sure, was done inadvertently, +and I would thankfully accept his promise of reparation if it +were extended to all the mischief that is being done to me. +Unfortunately for me, <i>two editions</i> of Mr. Froude’s <i>Essays</i> +have been issued this year, <i>the second this very month</i>, in a +<i>cheap and popular form</i>; thus diffusing and prolonging, in +the most effectual manner, an injustice to my name which +has existed for fifteen years, and postponing indefinitely the +chance of reparation in a future edition.</p> + +<p>“Under such circumstances, I read with regret that, while +acknowledging one error, Mr. Froude does not also acknowledge +what everyone else sees clearly and condemns, the injustice +of his censure on me with respect to Columbus, and +which he makes a ground for censure on the Hakluyt +Society. That Society stands too high to need any defence +<span class="pagenum" id="Hakluyt_Page_iv">[iv]</span>from its former Honorary Secretary, but I may be excused +for specially asking that this censure may be expunged; for +I have a letter from Mr. Bancroft, who was Ambassador here +at the time, in which he eulogizes, in terms so warm that I +may not repeat them, the spirit in which I had written both +of the sufferings of Columbus, and of the touching language +in which he had recorded them. This is exactly the contrary +of what Mr. Froude’s two editions are telling everybody that +I have done.</p> + +<p class="right"><span class="smcap">R. H. Major.</span>”</p> + +</blockquote> + +<p>Now that, in revising my translation for this second +edition, I have again gone through the texts of Columbus’s +letters, I uncompromisingly repeat the expression +which in 1847 I used <i>solely</i> in exculpation +of any mischievous result to my own diction from the +disconnectedness of the original, viz., that “Columbus +was not so great a master of the pen as of the art of +navigation.” Whether my judgment on this point +be of more or less weight than Mr. Froude’s is of no +moment whatever; but it is of moment that the mischievous +effect of a savage criticism, built up on the +critic’s own blunders, should be neutralized as far as +possible. The reader has the realities of the whole +case before him, and may judge for himself.</p> + +<p class="right">R. H. M.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_i">[i]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="INTRODUCTION">INTRODUCTION.</h2> + +</div> + +<p>Nearly three thousand years have passed since the +wisest of men declared that there was nothing new +under the sun. The saying has held good to the +present day, for men are perpetually finding out +that their recent discoveries had been already made, +but under circumstances which did not reveal the +full value of that which had been discovered. No +greater examples of this truth can be adduced than +in the history of the Atlantic, of America, and +of Australia. Until the days of Prince Henry the +Navigator, the Atlantic was so unknown that it +justly bore the name of the “Sea of Darkness;” and +yet, during the previous two thousand years occasional +glimpses of light had in fact been thrown +upon the face of that mysterious ocean. “Nil novi +sub sole” was still an indisputable proverb. In the +researches into the Atlantic originated by Prince +Henry, Columbus took part, and hence, as we shall +presently more fully see, derived the idea of the +great importance of explorations to the West. Within +one hundred years of the triumphant rounding by +Prince Henry’s navigators (in 1434) of Cape Bojador, +which till then had been the limit of Atlantic exploration, +the Portuguese had discovered both the +eastern and western shores of the continental island +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_ii">[ii]</span>of Australia. And yet till recently men knew not +that they owed the knowledge either of America +or of Australia⁠<a id="FNanchor_1" href="#Footnote_1" class="fnanchor">[1]</a> to the initiatory efforts of a Prince +with whose name, in fact, they were almost entirely +unacquainted.</p> + +<p>Such facts show the great injustice done to the +originators of great explorations who, working with +the smallest means, really deserve the highest meed +of honour.</p> + +<p>Yet in the estimate of merit it must be conceded +that priority, immense as are its claims, is not all-absorbent. +Columbus, as we shall presently see, +was anticipated in the discovery of America, and +yet such were the special virtues brought to bear +upon the execution of his great achievement, that, +as Humboldt has eloquently said, “the majesty of +grand recollections seems concentred” on his illustrious +name. The peculiar value of the following +letters, descriptive of the four important voyages of +Columbus, is that the events described are from the +pens of those to whom the events occurred. In them +we have laid before us, as it were from Columbus’s +own mouth, a clear statement of his opinions and +conjectures on what were to him great cosmical +riddles—riddles which have since been solved mainly +through the light which his illustrious deeds have +shed upon the field of our observation. In these +letters also we trace the magnanimity with which +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_iii">[iii]</span>Columbus could support an accumulated burthen of +undeserved affliction. It is impossible to read without +the deepest sympathy the occasional murmurings +and half suppressed complaints which are uttered in +the course of his letter to Ferdinand and Isabella, +describing his fourth voyage. These murmurings +and complaints were wrung from his manly spirit +by sickness and sorrow, and though reduced almost +to the brink of despair by the injustice of the +king, yet do we find nothing harsh or disrespectful +in his language to the sovereign. A curious +contrast is presented to us. The gift of a world could +not move the monarch to gratitude; the infliction of +chains, as a recompense for that gift, could not provoke +the subject to disloyalty. The same great heart +which through more than twenty wearisome years of +disappointment and chagrin gave him strength to +beg and to buffet his way to glory, still taught him +to bear with majestic meekness the conversion of +that glory into unmerited shame.</p> + +<p>The translated documents are seven in number. +Five of them are letters from the hand of Columbus +himself, describing respectively his first, third, and +fourth voyages. Another, describing the second +voyage, is by Dr. Chanca, the physician to the fleet +during that expedition, and the seventh document +is an extract from the will of Diego Mendez, one +of Columbus’s officers during the fourth voyage, who +gives a detailed account of many most interesting +adventures undertaken by himself, but left undescribed +by Columbus.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_iv">[iv]</span></p> + +<p>I shall not pause here to enter into the important +bibliography of these documents, which has no charm +for many readers, and is therefore placed at the end +of this introduction. A series of original documents +of such importance might appear to need but few +words of introduction or recommendation, since the +entire history of civilisation presents us with no +event, with the exception perhaps of the art of printing, +so momentous as the discovery of the western +world; and, independently of the lustre which the +grandeur of that event confers upon the discoverer, +there is no individual who has rendered himself, on +the score of personal character and conduct, more +illustrious than Christopher Columbus. There have, +nevertheless, not been wanting those, who, from +various motives, and on grounds of various trustworthiness, +have endeavoured to lessen his glory, by +impeaching his claim to the priority of discovery, or +by arguing that the discovery itself has proved a +misfortune rather than advantage to the world at +large. By way, therefore, of vindicating the value of +the original documents here translated, a brief account +of such pretensions to prior discovery as have +been at different times put forth, may not be thought +superfluous.</p> + +<p>The oldest story which seems possibly to bear reference +to what we call the “new world” is related +by Theopompus.</p> + +<p>Theopompus lived in the fourth century before +the Christian era; in a fragment of his works preserved +by Ælian is a conversation between Silenus +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_v">[v]</span>and Midas, King of Phrygia, in which the former +says that Europe, Asia, and Africa were surrounded +by the sea, but that beyond this known world was +an island of immense extent, containing huge animals +and men of twice our stature, and long-lived in proportion. +There were in it many great cities whose +inhabitants had laws and customs entirely different +from ours. Fabulous as the story is as a whole, we +cannot escape from the thought that it suggests, +though vaguely, a notion of the real existence of a +great western country. This idea is strengthened +by the remarkable story related to Solon by a priest +of Sais from the sacred inscriptions in the temples, +and presented to us by Plato in his Timæus and +Critias, wherein he speaks of an island called Atlantis, +opposite the Pillars of Hercules, larger than +Africa and Asia united, but which in one day +and night was swallowed up by an earthquake and +disappeared beneath the waters. The result was +that no one had since been able to navigate or +explore that sea on account of the slime which the +submerged island had produced. Many as have +been the doubts and conjectures to which this narrative +has been subjected by the learned in ancient +and modern times, it is a remarkable fact +that Crantor, in a commentary on Plato quoted by +Proclus, declares that he found this same account +retained by the priests of Sais three hundred years +after the period of Solon, and that he was shown +the inscriptions in which it was embodied. It is +also deserving of notice that precisely in that part +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_vi">[vi]</span>of the ocean described in the legend we find the +island groups of the Azores, Madeira, the Canaries, +and a host of other rocks and sand-banks, while the +great bank of varec, or floating seaweed, occupying +the middle portion of the basin of the North Atlantic, +and covering, according to Humboldt, an area about +six times as large as Germany, has been reasonably +regarded as explanatory of the obstacle to navigation +to which the tradition refers.</p> + +<p>Various have been the speculations respecting the +original colonisation of the western hemisphere. +Athanasius Kircher, in his <i>Prodromus Coptus and +Œdipus Ægyptiacus</i>, gives the Egyptians the credit +of colonising America, as well as India, China, and +Japan, grounding his argument upon the religious +worship of the sun, moon, stars, and animals. Edward +Brerewood, at pages 96 and 97 of his <i>Enquiries +touching the Diversity of Languages</i>, contends, and +he is far from being alone in his opinion, that the +Americans are the progeny of the Tartars. Marc +Lescarbot, in his <i>Histoire de la Nouvelle France</i>, +maintains that the Canaanites, when routed by +Joshua, were driven into America by storms, and +that Noah was born in America, and after the flood +showed his descendants the way into their paternal +country, and assigned to some of them their places of +abode there; while Hornius, in his treatise <i>De originibus +Americanis</i>, after touching upon the various conjectures +here quoted, animadverts on the presumption +and folly of Paracelsus, when he states that a +second Adam and Eve were created for the peopling +of the western world.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_vii">[vii]</span></p> + +<p>The first specific statement, however, of a supposed +migration from the shores of the old world to those +of the new, is that which the elder De Guignes presumes +to be demonstrable from the relation given by +a Chinese historian, Li-Yen, who lived at the commencement +of the seventh century. (See <i>Mémoires +de l’Académie des Inscriptions et Belles Lettres</i>, +vol. 28, p. 504.) The said historian speaks of a +country, named Fou-sang, more than forty thousand +<i>li</i>⁠<a id="FNanchor_2" href="#Footnote_2" class="fnanchor">[2]</a> to the East of China. He says that they who +went thither started from the province of Leaton, +situated to the north of Peking; that after having +made twelve thousand li, they came to Japan; +that travelling seven thousand li northward from +that place, they arrived at the country of Venchin, +and at five thousand li eastward of the latter, +they found the country of Tahan, whence they journeyed +to Fou-sang, which was twenty thousand li +distant from Tahan. From this account De Guignes +endeavours, by a long chain of argument, to prove +that the Chinese had pushed their investigations into +Jeso, Kamtschatka, and into that part of America +which is situated opposite the most eastern coast of +Asia.</p> + +<p>This surmise of De Guignes has been answered by +Klaproth, in a paper which appeared in the <i>Nouvelles +Annales des Voyages</i> (tom. 51, 2ᵉ serie, p. 53). His +arguments go to show that the country named Fou-sang +is Japan; and that the country of Tahan, +situated to the west of Asiatic Vinland, can only be +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_viii">[viii]</span>the island of Saghalian. Humboldt observes upon +this subject, that the number of horses, the practice +of writing, and the manufacture of paper from the +Fou-sang tree, mentioned in the account given by +the Chinese historian, ought to have shown De +Guignes that the country of which he spoke was +not America.</p> + +<p>The presumed discovery of America which comes +next in chronological rotation, is that by the Scandinavians, +the earliest <i>printed allusion</i> to which occurs +in Adam of Bremen’s <i>Historia Ecclesiastica Ecclesiarum +Hamburgensis et Bremensis</i>, published at Copenhagen, +1579, 4to. The Baron Von Humboldt has +asserted that the merit of first recognising the discovery +of America by the Northmen, <i>belongs indisputably</i> +to Ortelius, who, in his <i>Theatrum Orbis +Terrarum</i>, with unjust severity says, that Christopher +Columbus had done nothing more than to place +the new world in a permanently useful and commercial +relationship with Europe. The ground upon which +the priority is claimed for Ortelius, is that the first +edition of his work came out in 1570, although the +reference which Humboldt himself gives is to an +edition of 1601 which was after the death of Ortelius, +and the earlier editions do not contain the chapter on +the Pacific Ocean in which the passage occurs. It is +true that in the <i>Bibliotheca Hulthemiana</i> the edition +of 1601 is said to have been revised and augmented +by Ortelius before his death in 1598, but, even if the +assertion was made by Ortelius, and not by the +editor of his work after his death, it still leaves perfectly +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_ix">[ix]</span>unimpeached the claim to priority of the +Copenhagen edition of Adam of Bremen in 1579. +Adam of Bremen’s work was written soon after the +middle of the eleventh century, and was followed in +the next half century by the <i>Historia Ecclesiastica</i> +of Ordericus Vitalis, who also speaks of the country +visited by the Scandinavians. Abraham Mylius, in +his <i>Treatise de Antiquitate Linguæ Belgicæ</i>, Leyden, +1611, makes all Americans to be sprung from Celts; +stating that many Celtic words were to be found in +use there; and with more reasonable showing affirms +that the coast of Labrador was visited by wanderers +from Iceland. Hugo Grotius, in his <i>Dissertatio de +Origine Gentium Americanarum</i>, (Paris, 1642, 8vo.), +follows Mylius, and states that America was colonised +by a Norwegian race, who came thither from Iceland, +through Greenland, and passed through North +America down to the Isthmus.</p> + +<p>The earliest <i>printed detail</i> of these discoveries is +given by the Norwegian historian, Thormodus Torfæus, +in a work entitled <i>Historia Vinlandiæ Antiquæ, +ex Antiquitatibus Islandicis in lucem producta</i>, +(Hauniæ, 1705, 12mo.) But in the invaluable work +by Professor Rafn, published in 1837 by the Danish +Royal Society of Antiquaries, under the title of <i>Antiquitates +Americanæ</i>, the manuscripts which record +these discoveries are given at length in the original, +accompanied by a Latin translation, and careful and +learned geographical illustrations. The following is +a summary of the principal events recorded in this +highly interesting volume, and the geographical +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_x">[x]</span>inferences are those supplied by the professor himself.</p> + +<p>Irish Christians were the first Europeans, which we +know from well established history, to have migrated +into and inhabited Iceland. Close upon the end of +the eighth century this island was visited by Irish +hermits; but the first discovery of it by the Northmen +was made by a Dane named Gardar, of Swedish +origin, in the year 863. The regular colonisation of +the country was commenced in 874 by Ingolf, a +Norwegian, and was carried on continuously for the +space of sixty years by some of the most influential +and civilised families of Scandinavia. In 877 the +mountainous coast of Greenland was for the first +time seen by a man named Gunnbiorn, but it was +in 983 that this country was first visited by Eric +Rauda, or Eric the Red, son of Thorwald, a Norwegian +noble, who had been condemned to a +banishment of three years for killing Eyolf his neighbour. +After three years absence, he returned to Iceland, +and in order to hold out an inducement to +colonisation, named the newly discovered country +Greenland, intending by that name to express the +richness of the woods and meadows with which it +abounded. Amongst those who had accompanied +Eric was a man named Heriulf Bardson, who established +himself at Heriulfsnes. Biarne, the son of +the latter, finding, on his return home from a trading +voyage to Norway, that his father had quitted Iceland, +resolved upon following him, though he, as well +as those who had accompanied him, were quite unacquainted +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xi">[xi]</span>with the Greenland sea. Soon after leaving +Iceland they met with northerly winds and fogs, +and were carried they knew not whither: the weather +clearing, they found themselves near a flat woody +country, which, not corresponding with the descriptions +of Greenland, they left to larboard. After five +days’ sailing with a south-west wind, they came to a +mountainous country, covered with glaciers, which +they found to be an island; but as its appearance +was not inviting, they bore away from the island, and +standing out to sea with the same wind, after four +days’ sailing with fresh gales, they reached Heriulfsnes +in Greenland.</p> + +<p>Some time after this, in the year 1000, Lief, son of +Eric the Red, equipped a ship with thirty-five men +to make a voyage of discovery, with the view of examining +the new found lands more narrowly. They +came to a land were no grass was to be seen, but +everywhere there were vast glaciers, while the space +intervening between these ice mountains and the shore +appeared as one uninterrupted plain of slate. This +country they named Helluland, <i>i. e.</i> Slate-land (Newfoundland). +Thence they stood out to sea again, and +reached a level wooded country, with cliffs of white +sand. They called this country Markland, <i>i. e.</i> Woodland +(Nova Scotia). Again they put to sea, and after +two days’ sail reached an island, to the eastward of +the mainland, and passed through the strait between +this island and the mainland. They sailed westward, +and landed at a place where a river, issuing from a +lake, fell into the sea. Here they wintered and built +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xii">[xii]</span>houses, which were afterwards called Leifsbuder +(Leifsbooths.) During their stay, one of their number, +named Tyrker, a German, happened to wander +some distance from the settlement, and on his return +reported that he had found vines and grapes. These +proving to be plentiful, Lief named the country Vinland +or Vineland (New England), and in the ensuing +spring returned to Greenland. In the year 1002, +Thorwald, Lief’s brother, being of opinion that the +country had been too little explored, borrowed his +brother’s ship, and with the assistance of his advice +and instructions, set out on a new voyage. They +arrived at Liefsbooths, in Vinland, remained there +for the winter, and, in the spring of 1003, Thorwald +sent a party in the ship’s long boat on a voyage of +discovery southwards. They found a beautiful and +well-wooded country, with extensive ranges of white +sand, but no traces of men, except a wooden shed +which they found on an island lying to the westward. +They returned to Liefsbooths in the autumn. In the +summer of 1004, Thorwald sailed eastward and then +northward, past a remarkable headland enclosing a +bay, and which was opposite to another headland. +They called it Kialarnes (Keel-Cape). Continuing +along the east coast, they reached a beautiful promontory, +where they landed. Thorwald was so +pleased with the place that he exclaimed, “Here is +a beautiful spot, and here I should like well to fix +my dwelling.” He had scarcely spoken before they +encountered some Skrellings (Esquimaux) with whom +they fell to blows, and a sharp conflict ensuing, Thorwald +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xiii">[xiii]</span>received a mortal wound in his arm from an +arrow. He died, and was buried by his own instructions +on the spot which had excited his admiring +remark, the language of which appeared prophetic +of a longer stay there than he had at first contemplated.</p> + +<p>The most distinguished, however, of all the first +American discoverers is Thorfinn Karlsefne, an Icelander, +whose genealogy is carried back in the old +northern annals to Danish, Swedish, Norwegian, +Scottish, and Irish ancestors, some of them of royal +blood. In 1006 this chieftain visited Greenland, and +there married Gudrida, the widow of Thurstein (son +of Eric the Red), who had died the year before in an +unsuccessful expedition to Vinland. Accompanied +by Snorre Thorbrandson, also a man of illustrious +lineage, Biarne Grimolfson of Breidefiord, and Thorhall +Gamlason of Austfiord, he set sail in the spring +of 1007 with three ships for Vinland.</p> + +<p>They had in all one hundred and sixty men, and +as they went with the intention of colonising, they +took with them a great variety and quantity of live +stock. They sailed, first, to the Tresterbyd, and +afterwards to Biarney (Disco); then to Helluland, +where they found an abundance of foxes; and thence +to Markland, which was overgrown with wood, and +plentifully stocked with a variety of animals. Proceeding +still in a south-westerly direction, with the +land on the right, they came to a place where a frith +penetrated far into the country; off the mouth of it +was an island, on which they found an immense +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xiv">[xiv]</span>number of eyder ducks, so that it was scarcely possible +to walk without treading on their eggs. They +called the island Straumey (Stream Isle) from the +strong current which ran past it, and the frith they +called Straumfiordr (Stream Frith). Here Thorhall +and eight others left the party in quest of Vinland, +but were driven by westerly gales to the coast of +Iceland, where some say that they were beaten, and +put into servitude. Karlsefne, however, with the +remaining one hundred and fifty men, sailed southwards, +and reached a place were a river falls into the +sea from a lake; large islands were situated opposite +the mouth of the river; passing these, they steered +into the lake, and called the place Hop. The low +grounds were covered with wheat growing wild; and +the rising grounds with vines. Here they stayed till +the beginning of the year 1008, when finding their +lives in constant jeopardy from the hostile attacks of +the natives, they quitted the place, and returned to +Eric’s fiorde. In 1011 a ship arrived in Greenland, +from Norway, commanded by two Icelandic brothers +named Helge and Finnboge: to these men, Freydisa, +a natural daughter of Eric the Red, proposed a voyage +to Vinland, stipulating that they should share +equally with her the profits of the voyage. To this +they assented, and it was agreed that each party +should have thirty able-bodied men on board the +ship, besides women; but Freydisa secretly took +with her five men in addition to that number. They +reached Liefsbooths in 1012, and wintered there; +when a discussion arising, Freydisa had the subtlety +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xv">[xv]</span>to prevail on her husband to massacre the brothers +and their followers; after the perpetration of which +base deed they returned to Greenland in the spring +of 1013.</p> + +<p>In his expedition to Vinland in 1007, Thorfinn +Karlsefne had been accompanied by his wife, Gudrida, +who bore him a son, Snorre, who became the +founder of an illustrious family in Iceland, which +gave that island several of its first bishops. Among +these may be mentioned the learned Bishop Thorlak +Runolfson, to whom we are principally indebted for +the oldest ecclesiastical code of Iceland, written in +the year 1123. It is also probable that the accounts +of the voyages were originally compiled by him.</p> + +<p>The notices given in these old Icelandic accounts, +of the climate, soil, and productions of the new +country are very characteristic. It is curious that +Adam of Bremen, in the eleventh century, though +himself not a northman, states, on the authority of +Svein Estridson, the King of Denmark, a nephew of +Canute the Great, that the country of Vinland got +its name from the vine growing wild there, and for +the same reason the English re-discoverers gave the +name of Martha’s Vineyard to the large island close +off the coast.</p> + +<p>It is fortunate that in these ancient accounts they +have preserved the statement of the course steered +and the distance sailed in a day. From various ancient +Icelandic geographical works it may be gathered +that the distance of a day’s sailing was estimated at +from twenty-seven to thirty geographical miles—German +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xvi">[xvi]</span>or Danish—of which fifteen are equal to a +degree, and are consequently equivalent to four +English miles. From the island of Helluland, afterwards +called little Helluland, Biarne sailed to Herjulfsnes +(Ikigeit), in Greenland, with strong south-westerly +winds, in four days. The distance between +that cape and Newfoundland is about one hundred +and fifty miles, which, if we allow for the strong +south-westerly gales, will correspond with Biarne’s +voyage; while the well-known barrenness of the flats +of Newfoundland corresponds with the Hellue, or +slates, which suggested the name the Northmen gave +to the island.</p> + +<p>Markland being described as three days’ sail south-west +of Helluland, appears to be Nova Scotia; and +the low and level character of the country, covered +with woods, tallies precisely with the descriptions of +later writers.</p> + +<p>Vinland was stated to be two days’ sail to the +south-west of Markland, which would be from fifty-four +to sixty miles. The distance from Cape Sable +to Cape Cod is reckoned at about two hundred and +ten English miles, which answers to about fifty-two +Danish miles; and in the account given by Biarne +of their finding many shallows off the island to the +eastward, we recognize an accurate description of +Nantucket, and Kialarnes must consequently be +Cape Cod. The Straumfiordr of the Northmen is +supposed to be Buzzard’s Bay, and Straumey, Martha’s +Vineyard, though the account of the many eggs +found there, would seem to correspond more correctly +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xvii">[xvii]</span>with Egg Island, which lies off the entrance of Vineyard +Sound.</p> + +<p>Krossanes is probably Gurnet Point. The Hóp +answers to Mount Hope’s Bay, through which the +Taunton river flows, and it was here that the Leifsbooths +were situated.</p> + +<p>The ancient documents likewise make mention of a +country called Huitramannaland (Whiteman’s Land), +otherwise Irland it Mikla (Great Ireland) supposed to +be that part of the coast of North America, including +North and South Carolina, Georgia and Florida. +There is a tradition among the Shawanese Indians, +who emigrated some years ago from Florida and settled +in Ohio, that Florida was once inhabited by white +people, who possessed iron instruments. The powerful +chieftain, Are Marson of Reykianes, in Iceland,—according +to the account given by his contemporary +Rafn, surnamed the Limerick trader,—was driven to +Huitramannaland by storms in 983, and was baptised +there. Are Frode likewise (the first compiler of the +Landnama, and a descendant in the fourth degree +from Are Marson) states that his uncle, Thorkell +Gellerson, had been informed by Icelanders that Are +Marson had been recognised in Huitramannaland, +and was held in high respect there. This statement +therefore shows that there was an occasional intercourse +in those days between the Orkneys and Iceland, +and this part of America.</p> + +<p>It is further recorded in the ancient MSS. that the +Greenland bishop Eric went over to Vinland in the +year 1121; but nothing more than the fact is stated, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xviii">[xviii]</span>and it simply corroborates the supposition of intercourse +between the countries. Again, in the year +1266, a voyage of discovery to the Arctic regions of +America is said to have been performed, under the +auspices of some clergymen of the bishopric of Gardar +in Greenland; and from the recorded observations +made by the explorers, would seem to have been carried +to regions whose geographical position has been +more accurately determined by our own navigators, +Parry and the two Rosses. The next recorded discovery +was made by Adalbrand and Thorwald Helgason, +two Icelandic clergymen, in the year 1285. Contemporaneous +accounts state that they discovered a +new land to the westward of Iceland, supposed to +have been Newfoundland. The last record preserved +in the ancient Icelandic MSS. relates a voyage from +Greenland to Markland, performed by a crew of +seventeen men, in the year 1347. The account written +by a contemporary nine years after the event, induces +the belief that intercourse between Greenland and +America had been maintained as late as the period +here mentioned, for he speaks of Markland as a +country still known and visited in those days.</p> + +<p>The obscurity of many portions of these narratives +leaves much to be cleared up with reference to this +interesting subject; but their general truthfulness +being corroborated by the traces of the residence and +settlement of the ancient northmen exhibited in the +inscriptions discovered in Kinkigtorsoak, Greenland, +and Massachusetts, no room is left for disputing the +main fact of the discovery.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_xix">[xix]</span></p> + +<p>Between this period and the date of the first voyage +of Columbus, the coast of America is reported to have +been visited by the Arabians of the Spanish Peninsula, +the Welsh, the Venetians, the Portuguese, and +also by a Pole in the service of Denmark.</p> + +<p>The Arabian expedition is described both by Edrisi +and by Ibn-al-Wardi. It appears to have been undertaken +by eight persons of the same family, called the +Almagrurins or the Wandering Brothers, who having +provided themselves with everything requisite for a +long voyage, swore they would not return till they +had penetrated to the extreme limits of the Sea of +Darkness. They sailed from the port of Aschbona or +Lisbon, and steered towards the south-west, and at +the end of thirty-five days arrived at the island of +Gana or Sheep Island. The flesh of the sheep of +this island being too bitter for them to eat, they put +to sea again, and after sailing twelve days in a +southerly direction, reached an island inhabited by +people of a red skin, lofty stature, and with hair of +thin growth but long and flowing over their shoulders. +The inhabitants of this island told them that persons +had sailed twenty days to the west without discovering +land, and the Arabian brothers, diverted from +the pursuit of their hardy enterprise by this discouraging +account, retraced their course, and returned +safely to Lisbon. From this description the elder de +Guignes inferred that the Arabs had either reached +the eastern coast of America, or at least one of the +American islands; an opinion, however, which appears +to have as little to sanction it, as his above +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xx">[xx]</span>mentioned conjecture that the Chinese had discovered +the west coast of America in the fifth century. The +Baron von Humboldt concurs with the opinion expressed +by the learned orientalist Tychsen in his +<i>Neue oriental und exegetische Bibliothek</i>, and repeated +by Malte Brun, that the island reached by +the Arab wanderers was one of the African islands. +This conclusion is drawn from the circumstance that +the Guanches, the original people of the Canary +group, were a pastoral race, and also possessed the +same external characteristics as the islanders here +described. Moreover, the fact that the king of the +island had an interpreter who spoke Arabic, together +with the circumstance that the red men had sailed +westward for a month without seeing land, strongly +corroborates the opinion advanced. The precise date +of this voyage is unknown, but Humboldt presumes +that it must have been considerably anterior to the +expulsion of the Arabs from Lisbon in 1147; because +Edrisi, whose work was finished in 1153, speaks of +the occurrence as if it were by no means recent.</p> + +<p>It is but upon a slight foundation, that the Welsh +have pretended to raise a claim to the discovery; but +slight as it is, there is certainly enough to render a +decidedly negative assertion on the subject to the +full as presumptuous as one decidedly affirmative +would be. But as we have no concern with mere +conjectures, we must in candour narrate, as succinctly +as possible, the grounds upon which these +pretensions have been founded.</p> + +<p>The first account of this discovery is found in +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xxi">[xxi]</span>Humphrey Llwyd’s translation of the <i>History of +Wales</i>, by Caradoc of Llancarvan, published by Dr. +Powell in 1584. According to him the occurrence +took place as follows:—On the death of Owen +Gwynedd, prince of North Wales, in 1169, a contention +arose amongst his numerous sons respecting the +succession to the crown, when Madawe, or Madoc, +one of their number, seeing his native country was +likely to be embroiled in a civil war, deemed it more +prudent to try his fortune abroad. In pursuance of +this object he sailed with a small fleet of ships to +the westward, and leaving Iceland on the north, +came at length to an unknown country, where everything +appeared new and uncommon and the manner +of the natives different from all that he had ever +seen. The country appearing to him, from its fertility +and beauty, to be very desirable for a settlement, he +left most of his own men behind him, (amounting, +according to Sir Thomas Herbert, to a hundred and +twenty), and returning to Wales, persuaded a considerable +number of the Welsh to go out with him +to the newly discovered country, and so with ten +ships he again departed, and bade a final adieu to +his native soil. This account of the historian Caradoc +of Llancarvan is the only affirmative written +document the story has upon which to ground its +claim to authenticity, with the exception of an ode, +written by a Welsh bard, Meredyth ab Rhys, who +died in 1477, fifteen years before Columbus’s first expedition, +in which an allusion is made to the event.⁠<a id="FNanchor_3" href="#Footnote_3" class="fnanchor">[3]</a> +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xxii">[xxii]</span>A circumstance which would appear to confirm the +truth of Madoc’s voyages, is a peculiar resemblance +that has been found between some of the American +dialects and the Welsh language; but, as Dr. Robertson +reasonably remarks, the affinity has been observed +in so few instances, and in some of these is so obscure +or so fanciful, that no conclusion can be drawn from +the casual resemblance of a small number of words. +Dr. Williams adduces in confirmation of his favourite +idea the authorities of Lopez de Gomara, Hornius, +and Peter Martyr, pretending that they assert that +traces of Christianity were found among the Americans +by the Spaniards, as well as that there was +a tradition among the Mexicans, that many years +before a strange nation came amongst them, and +taught them a knowledge of God. His references +however appear entirely incorrect.</p> + +<p>Another pretension to an early discovery of America +has been founded upon an account given in a +work published in Venice by Francesco Marcolini +in 1558, entitled “<i>Dello scoprimento dell’ Isole Frislanda, +Eslanda, Engrovelanda, Estotilanda, ed Icaria, +fatto sotto il Polo Artico da due fratelli Zeni, M. +Nicolò il K. e M. Antonio</i>.” The substance of the +account is, that in 1380, Nicolò Zeno, a Venetian +noble, fitted out a vessel at his own cost, and made +a voyage to the north, with the intention of visiting +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xxiii">[xxiii]</span>England and Flanders, but was driven by a storm to +Friseland, now proved to be the Færoe Archipelago. +Being rescued from the attacks of the natives by +Zichmni, a neighbouring prince, Zeno entered into +the service of the latter, and assisted him in conquering +Friseland and other northern islands. He shortly +after dispatched a letter to his brother Antonio, requesting +him to find means to join him; whereupon +the latter purchased a vessel, and succeeded in reaching +Friseland, where he remained fourteen years. +During his residence there he wrote to his brother +Carlo in Venice, and gave an account of a report +brought by a certain fisherman, about a land to the +westward. This account stated that about twenty-six +years before, the fisherman, when out at sea with +four fishing boats, was overtaken by a tempest, which +drove them about for many days, and at length cast +them on an island called Estotiland, about a thousand +miles from Friseland. The inhabitants conveyed +them to a fair and populous city, where the king sent +for many interpreters to converse with them, but +none that they could understand, until a man was +found, who had likewise been cast away upon the +coast, and who spoke Latin. They remained several +days upon the island, which was rich and fruitful, +abounding with all kinds of metals, and especially +gold. Though much given to navigation, they were +ignorant of the use of the compass, and finding the +Friselanders acquainted with it, the king of the place +sent them with twelve barques to visit a country to +the south, called Drogeo. They had nearly perished +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xxiv">[xxiv]</span>in a storm, but were cast away upon the coast of +Drogeo. The fisherman described this Drogeo as a +country of vast extent, and that the inhabitants were +naked and eaters of human flesh. He remained +many years in the country, and became rich with +trafficking between Estotiland and the main land, +and subsequently fitted out a vessel of his own, and +made his way back to Friseland. His narrative induced +Zichmni to undertake a voyage thither, in +which he was accompanied by Antonio Zeno. It was +unsuccessful: landing on an island called Icaria, they +were roughly treated by the inhabitants, and a storm +afterwards drove them on the coast of Greenland.</p> + +<p>This account was placed in the hands of Marcolini +by Nicolò Zeno, a descendant of the family of the +explorers, but it had to be made from fragments, he +himself having, when a boy, from ignorance torn up +a considerable quantity of the original documents, +which were letters written by Antonio Zeno to Carlo +his brother. In spite of a considerable amount of +fable and exaggeration, defects which enter into the +majority of early accounts of travel, it is scarcely to +be believed that Nicolò Zeno the younger invented +this voyage. He was a man of the highest reputation, +as may be seen by the encomium passed on him +by Francesco Patrizio; see <i>Della Historia dieci Dialoghi +di M. Francesco Patrizio</i>, Venetia, 1560, 4to., +p. 30 verso. It is well known that the Venetians +had made yearly voyages to the north of Europe for +at least two centuries before the period in question, +and the most important part of Zeno’s publication, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xxv">[xxv]</span>viz., the map, the original of which is stated to have +hung up in his palace since the date of the discovery, +bears evidence of a knowledge, however imperfect, of +Scandinavian geography. The graduation of this +map was inserted by Nicolò Zeno the younger himself, +and although inaccurate enough to cause much +perplexity to geographers, there is no doubt that +Greenland was laid down on it with more correctness +than on any map preceding the date of its publication. +No map before that time shews the Island +of Frisland with names thereon tallying with the +names of the Færoe islands. No map before 1558 +shews the discoveries of the Northmen in America, +nor were any of the Sagas known to the Venetians +before that time; nor do any books previous to that +period set forth the geography of those parts from +which Nicolò Zeno could have stolen information. +Moreover the correspondence of the Zeno map with +surveys much later, as in Davis’s Straits, is highly +corroborative of its genuineness. Mr. Kohl, in his +most valuable <i>Documentary History of Discovery +of the East Coast of North America</i>, printed by +the Maine Historical Society, 1869, 8vo., suggests +that Icaria is Helluland or Newfoundland; Estotiland, +Markland or Nova Scotia; and Drogeo, Vinland +or New England: and he further justly remarks +that, assuming that the map is genuine, “it is the +first and oldest known to us on which some sections +of the continent of America have been laid +down.”</p> + +<p>On an anonymous map in Weimar of the date of +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xxvi">[xxvi]</span>1424, and on a map by Andrea Bianco,⁠<a id="FNanchor_4" href="#Footnote_4" class="fnanchor">[4]</a> in the +library of St. Mark, bearing the date of 1436, is laid +down a large extent of land, five or six hundred +leagues west of Gibraltar, above which is written the +word “Antillia.” With reference to this subject, +Martin Behaim, on his globe of 1492, says, “In the +year 734, after the conquest of Spain by the Mahometans, +this island Antillia was discovered and settled +by an archbishop from Oporto, who fled to it in +ships with six other bishops and other Christian men +and women. They built there seven towns, from +which circumstance it has also been called Septem +Citade, the island of the seven cities. In the year +1414 a Spanish vessel came very near to it.” Of the +island of S. Brandan also, which is laid down on charts +of the fourteenth century, Behaim says, “In the +year 565, Saint Brandan, an Irish bishop, arrived +with his vessel on this island, saw there most wonderful +things, and returned afterwards to his country.” +Another of these fancied islands in the Atlantic +was the island of Brazil. So strong was the belief in +the existence of these islands, that we find it stated +by Pedro de Ayala, a Spanish envoy in England writing +to the sovereigns in 1498, that the Bristol men +had sent out every year from 1491 (before Columbus’s +first great discovery) to 1497, two, three, or four caravels +every year in search of the islands of Brazil and +the seven cities, at the instigation of John Cabot.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_xxvii">[xxvii]</span></p> + +<p>The following passage occurs in Sir John Barrow’s +<i>Chronological History of Voyages in the Arctic Regions</i>, +which, if it stated a defensible truth, would +present another claim, anterior to that of Columbus, +to the discovery of America. The passage is headed +“Cortereals, 1500”;—</p> + +<p>“The Portuguese, not content with having discovered +a route to India, by sailing round the tempestuous +extremity to Africa, soon after engaged in +an equally dangerous enterprise: that of finding a +route to India and the Spice Islands, by sailing +westward round the northern extremity of America. +This bold undertaking was reserved for the <span class="smcap">Cortereals</span>, +the enlightened disciples of the school of +Sagres. The first navigator of the name of Cortereal, +who engaged in this enterprise, was John Vaz Costa +Cortereal, a gentleman of the household of the infant +Dom Fernando, who, accompanied by Alvaro Martens +Homem, explored the northern seas, by order of king +Affonso the Fifth, and discovered the <i>Terra de Baccalhaos</i> +(the land of cod fish), afterwards called Newfoundland. +This voyage is mentioned by Cordeiro,⁠<a id="FNanchor_5" href="#Footnote_5" class="fnanchor">[5]</a> +but he does not state the exact date, which however +is ascertained to have been in 1463 or 1464; for, in +their return from the discovery of Newfoundland, or +Terra Nova, they touched at the island of Terceira, +the captaincy of which island having become vacant +by the death of Jacomo Bruges, they solicited the +appointment, and in reward for their services the request +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xxviii">[xxviii]</span>was granted, their patent commission being +dated in Evora, 2nd April, 1464.”</p> + +<p>It will be seen by the wording of this passage, that +Sir John Barrow has fallen into the inaccuracy of asserting +that, in 1463 or 1464, Cortereal was engaged +in the enterprise of finding a route to India and the +Spice Islands by sailing westward round the northern +extremities of America. We must presume that the +Portuguese were aware of the existence of the American +continent, before they could conceive the idea of +sailing westward round its northern extremity. The +patent commission of the appointment of Cortereal +and Homem to the government of Terceira does not +specify that the service for which it was granted, +was the discovery of Newfoundland; and, moreover, +at the end of Faria y Sousa’s <i>Asia Portuguesa</i>, there +is a list of all the armadas which sailed from Lisbon +on voyages of discovery between 1412 and 1640, +and this expedition is passed by in silence; so that +the validity of the whole statement hangs on the +authority of Cordeiro: but the account is altogether +so extremely improbable, from the very silence of +Portuguese writers of the time on so important a +subject, as to leave Cortereal but small chance of a +successful rivalry with Sebastian Cabot.⁠<a id="FNanchor_6" href="#Footnote_6" class="fnanchor">[6]</a></p> + +<p>The last on the list of those who have been said to +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xxix">[xxix]</span>precede Columbus in the discovery of America is a +Polish pilot, named John Szkolny, whose name has +been erroneously Latinized by Hornius, Zurla, Malte +Brun, Wytfliet, and Pontanus, “Scolvus,” or “Sciolvus.” +He was in the service of Christian II of Denmark +in the year 1476. He is said to have landed +on the coast of Labrador, after having passed along +Norway, Greenland, and the Friseland of the Zeni. +Upon this subject Von Humboldt thus expresses +himself: “I cannot hazard any opinion upon the +statement made to this effect by Wytfliet, Pontanus, +and Horn. A country seen <i>after</i> Greenland may, +from the direction indicated, have been Labrador. I +am, however, surprised to find that Gomara, who +published his <i>Historia de las Indias</i> at Saragossa, in +1553, was cognizant even at that time of this Polish +pilot. It is possible that when the codfishery began +to bring the seamen of southern Europe into more +frequent connexion with those of the north, a suspicion +may have arisen that the land seen by Szkolny +must have been the same as that visited by John +Sebastian Cabot in 1497, and by Gaspar Cortereal +in 1500. Gomara says what is in other respects not +quite correct, <i>that the English took much pleasure in +frequenting the coast of Labrador, for they found +the latitude and climate the same as that of their +native land, and the men of Norway have been there +with the pilot, John Scolvo, as well as the English +with Sebastian Cabot</i>. Let us not forget that Gomara +makes no mention of the Polish pilot with reference +to the question of the predecessors of Columbus, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xxx">[xxx]</span>though he is malignant enough to assert that it is in +fact impossible to say to whom the discovery of the +New Indies is due.”⁠<a id="FNanchor_7" href="#Footnote_7" class="fnanchor">[7]</a></p> + +<p>In the American Philosophical Transactions for +1786, is a letter addressed to Dr. Franklin by Mr. +Otto of New York, in which he not only asserts that +the illustrious cosmographer Martin Behaim discovered +the Azores, but quotes a passage, from what +he calls an authentic record, preserved in the archives +of Nuremberg, the tenor of which is as follows:—“Martin +Behem, traversing the Atlantic Ocean for +several years, examined the American Islands, and +discovered the strait which bears the name of Magellan, +before either Christopher Columbus or Magellan +navigated those seas; and even mathematically delineated +on a geographical chart for the king of +Lusitania, the situation of the coast around every +part of that famous and renowned strait.” He also +quotes passages from the <i>Nuremberg Chronicle</i>, and +from Cellarius, in confirmation of this statement. +Don Cristóbal Cladera, in his <i>Investigaciones Historicas</i>, +says that, in order to refute these statements, +he procured from Nuremberg a description of Behaim’s +globe, together with historical notes on the life and +family of that geographer, and upon examining these +and the unpublished works of the Academia de las +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xxxi">[xxxi]</span>Ciencias de Lisboa, he became convinced that the +observations of Mr. Otto were totally unfounded; +and De Murr, who has well investigated the question, +assures us that the passage quoted by Mr. Otto from +the <i>Nuremberg Chronicle</i> was not to be found in the +German translation of that work by George Alt in +1493. Moreover, the real globe of Behaim, made in +1492, does not contain any of the islands or shores of +the New World; a fact which sets at rest the two +questions of Behaim’s earlier discovery, or of Columbus +gaining his information from Behaim.⁠<a id="FNanchor_8" href="#Footnote_8" class="fnanchor">[8]</a></p> + +<p>From the series of evidences contained in the preceding +accounts, the fact that America had been +visited by European adventurers before the time of +Columbus is rendered too certain to admit of contradiction +even from the most sanguine advocate of +the glory of the great discoverer. But, on the other +side, it cannot be denied that the discovery of +Columbus, however much later in date, deserves the +meed of highest honour, as being the result of +sagacity, judgment and indomitable perseverance, +and as having been carried on with an energetic +endeavour to bring into active operation the incalculable +advantages which it opened up to the +world at large. To vindicate the correctness of +this statement, it will be well to give a brief sketch +of his eventful life, and to pourtray as briefly as +we may the high qualities to which, far more than +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xxxii">[xxxii]</span>to accidental circumstances, the glory of this great +discovery is due. The retrospect of his history will +at the same time shew, that while every previous +discovery was attributable to accident, the greater +portion of the accidental or uncontrollable circumstances +in the life of Columbus were such as, instead +of assisting him, tended to thwart him at every step +of his painful career.</p> + +<p>It is generally agreed that his father was a wool +weaver or carder. There is reason, however, to presume +that though his parentage was humble, he was +descended from a family of consideration. On this +subject his son, Don Ferdinand, denies⁠<a id="FNanchor_9" href="#Footnote_9" class="fnanchor">[9]</a> with great +indignation an assertion which occurs in a curious +life of the admiral, inserted in the “<i>Psaltertium Octuplex +Augustin Justiniani</i>,” Genoa, 1516, folio, under +the comments on the nineteenth psalm, that he was +“vilibus ortus parentibus,” and complains that he is +falsely called a mechanic.</p> + +<p>The date of his birth is a “vexata quæstio,” which +it would be well that we should here examine. For +settling a disputed question of the kind no process +seems so sure as the comparing of statements made +by the same individual, if he be a good authority, at +different times and under different circumstances. +The following are two statements made by Columbus +himself at entirely different periods and in an entirely +different shape, and yet both having the same result. +They are recorded by his son, Fernando, in the Biography +of his father, and are as follows: “In his +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xxxiii">[xxxiii]</span>book of his first voyage [1492] he says, ‘I was upon +the sea twenty-three years without being off it any +time worth the speaking of, and I saw all the East +and all the West, and may say towards the North or +England, and have been at Guinea. Yet I never saw +harbours for goodness like those of the West Indies,’ +and a little further he says, ‘That he took to the sea +at fourteen years of age and ever after followed it.’” +Now we know for certain that he escaped from Lisbon +and came to Andalusia at the close of 1484; that +during his stay in Portugal he had made many +voyages to Guinea, but that from 1484 until his first +great voyage in 1492 he was engaged, not at sea, but +in endeavouring to secure the interest of the Spanish +sovereigns in his important project. If then we add +his twenty-three years of almost constant sea-going +to fourteen, his age when he first went to sea, we +have thirty-seven years to deduct from 1484, and we +find 1447 to be the date of his birth. Again in 1501, +many years later, he writes to the Spanish sovereigns +as follows: “I went to sea very young and have continued +it to this day; ... it is now forty years that I +have been sailing to all those parts at present frequented.” +What “very young” meant he had already +told us; viz., 14, which added to 40 makes 54; and +this total deducted from 1501, the date at which he +writes, leaves the same date for his birth as that +resulting from his former statement, viz., 1447. But +for the sake of attaining as near to accuracy as possible, +we must not overlook another statement made +in 1503 by Columbus himself in his letter to Ferdinand +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xxxiv">[xxxiv]</span>and Isabella, describing his fourth voyage. He +there says “I was twenty-eight years old when I +came into Your Highnesses service, and now I have +not a hair upon me that is not grey.” It was in +1484 that he went to Spain, and then, as we have +seen, terminated those three-and-twenty years of +almost uninterrupted sea-faring life of which he +speaks. Now, if he were then only eight-and-twenty, +he must have first gone to sea at the age of five instead +of fourteen, as he himself informs us. Moreover, +by that reckoning he would have been only fifty +when he died, in 1506, an age entirely incompatible +with the statement of Bernaldez, the Cura de los +Palacios, who knew Columbus so well, that he died +<i>in senectute bonâ</i>, at the age of seventy, more or less. +It is intelligible that such a remark should be made +of a man of sixty, who had passed through hardships +so exhausting to the mind and body as those which +had marked the life of Columbus, but scarcely even +of him at the age of fifty. It is clear, then, that a +mistake has been made in this number 28, but if for +it we write 38, it will make the date of Columbus’s +birth to be 1446. We have, however, to bear in +mind that the two statements previously made by +him were of a very general character, in which no +month or part of a year was specified. It would +therefore seem that, on his own showing, we shall be +safe in placing the date of his birth 1446-47, which +agrees with the inference of the learned and judicious +Muñoz, who places it “por los años 1446,” +although he does not show the process by which he +arrives at his conclusion.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_xxxv">[xxxv]</span></p> + +<p>With respect to the birthplace of our illustrious +navigator, were we to enter into the complex discussions +of those who, with different arguments of more +or less plausibility, place it in Genoa, Nervi, Savona, +Pradello, Cogoleto, Quinto, Bogliasco, Albisola, Chiavara, +Oneglia, or the castle of Cuccaro in Monferrato,—we +should but launch upon a sea of difficulties, +with little hope of a successful voyage. It is difficult +to withhold credence from the strong assertion made +twice by Columbus in his will, dated 22nd February +1498, that he was born in the city of Genoa; namely,—“I, +being a native of Genoa”; and “I desire my +said son Diego, or the person who may succeed to +the said inheritance, always to keep and maintain +one person of our lineage in the city of Genoa ... because +from thence I came, and there I was born.”⁠<a id="FNanchor_10" href="#Footnote_10" class="fnanchor">[10]</a> +But in like manner we know that Leonardo, who +was born at Vinci, persisted in calling himself a +Florentine.</p> + +<p>Having early evinced a strong inclination for the +study of geography, geometry, and astronomy, Columbus +found at the college of Pavia an excellent opportunity +of gaining a more than superficial acquaintance +with the principles of those sciences, and at the same +time acquired considerable proficiency in the Latin +language. The maritime position and commercial engagements +of his native city doubtless suggested and +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xxxvi">[xxxvi]</span>fostered much of that propensity for a nautical life, +that he exhibited at so early an age; and although it +appears from several historians that for a short time +he worked at his father’s trade, yet this must have +been simply during his earliest boyhood, for by his own +account he commenced the life of a mariner at fourteen +years of age. The piratical character of the sea-faring +life of those days necessarily exposed its followers to +unceasing hardships and dangers, and the severity of +this early discipline must have most materially tended +to render available and permanent those distinguished +qualities which have subsequently gained for him the +admiration of the world: indeed, no career could have +been better calculated to develope his peculiar genius, +or add fuel to those enthusiastic aspirations which +characterised him to the close of his life.</p> + +<p>From the period of his going to sea, which was +about the year 1460 until the year 1472, we meet with +no distinct mention of his name; although in a letter +written by him to their Majesties, in 1495, he says: +“<i>It happened to me that king Réné (whom God has +taken to himself) sent me to Tunis to capture the +galley Fernandina, and on arriving at the island of +San Pedro, in Sardinia, I learned that there were +two ships and a caracca with the galley, which so +alarmed the crew that they resolved to proceed no +further, but to return to Marseilles for another vessel +and more people; upon which, being unable to force +their inclination, I yielded to their wish, and having +first changed the points of the compass, spread all +sail, for it was evening, and at daybreak we were +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xxxvii">[xxxvii]</span>within the cape of Carthagena, while all believed for +a certainty that they were going to Marseilles.</i>” The +date of this occurrence is unknown, but the expedient +of Columbus to alter the point of the needle, reminds +us of his subsequent stratagem, of altering his reckoning, +to appease his discontented crew during his first +great voyage of discovery.</p> + +<p>In the year 1472, however, we have evidence of his +having been in Savona, from the fact of his signature +having been found appended to the will of one Nicolò +Monleone, under date of the 20th March of that year. +The document is preserved in Savona, among the +notarial archives.</p> + +<p>In 1474 we find his name mentioned in a letter +addressed by Ferdinand king of Sicily to Louis king +of France, the title of which runs thus: “<i>Literæ à +Ferdinando Rege Siciliæ ad Ludovicum XI, Galliæ +Regem, per Fæcialem missæ, quibus quæritur, quod +Christophorus Columbus triremes suas deprædatus +sit, postulatque sibi ablata restitui. Datum in Terra +Fogiæ die 8 Decembr. 1474.</i>” Then follows a letter +in five lengthy clauses, in which it is stated that the +said vessels were attacked and taken:—“<i>A Columbo, +qui quibusdam navibus præest, Majestatis vestræ +subdito.</i>”</p> + +<p>The title of Louis’s reply runs thus: “<i>Responsio +Ludovici XI quibus promittit restitutionem, excusat +tamen Columbum, quod jus sit in Oceano capere +naves ab hostilibus terris venientes et saltem bona +hostium inde auferre.</i>” These letters are given by +Leibnitz, in his <i>Codex Juris Gentium Diplomaticus, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xxxviii">[xxxviii]</span>Prodromus</i>, art. 16 and 17; but on the correction of +Nicolas Toinard, he acknowledges, in the preface to +his <i>Mantissa Codicis</i>, that he had erroneously inserted +the Christian name “Christophorus.”</p> + +<p>Toinard’s correction went to shew that Leibnitz +had confounded the name of Guillaume de Caseneuve, +surnamed Coulomp, Coulon, or Colon, as the Spaniards +called him, with that of the illustrious discoverer. +This acknowledgment by Leibnitz of his error might +seem to render useless any reference to the letters in +question; but as Christopher Columbus is stated by +his son, Don Ferdinand, to have been of the same +family as the pirate here mentioned, and also to have +been engaged at sea with him and his nephew, it +becomes interesting to examine what record exists of +these illustrious pirates, and to see how far the assertion +of Don Ferdinand bears the semblance of correctness. +This Caseneuve, or Colon, is called by +Duclos, in speaking of the very circumstance which +occasioned these letters, in his <i>Histoire de Louis XI</i>, +“<i>Vice-Amiral de France, et le plus grand homme de +mer de son temps.</i>” And Zurita, in his <i>Libro 19 de +los Anales de Aragon</i>, calls him, “<i>Colon, capitan de +la Armada del Rey de Francia</i>.” Garnier, in his +<i>Histoire de France</i>, thus relates the circumstance: +“<i>Guillaume de Casenove, Vice-Amiral de Normandie, +connu dans notre histoire sous le nom d’Amiral +Coulon, s’était rendu formidable sur toutes les mers +de l’Europe, où il exerçait le métier d’armateur: +dans une de ses courses il s’empara de deux riches +frégates chargées pour le compte des plus riches +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xxxix">[xxxix]</span>négocians de Naples, de Florence, et de plusieurs +autres villes d’Italie, qui tout sollicitèrent vivement la +restitution de cette importante prise.</i>”</p> + +<p>Another exploit, in which this Colon was successfully +engaged, was the taking of eighty Dutch ships +returning from the herring fishery, in the Baltic, in +1479. Again, another sea-fight related by Marc Antonio +Sabelico, in the eighth book of his tenth Decade, +is quoted by Don Fernando, where Columbus the +younger (described by Sabelico as the nephew, but by +Zurita as Francis, the son of the famous corsair), +intercepted, between Lisbon and Cape St. Vincent, +four richly laden Venetian galleys, on their return +from Flanders. Fernando further asserts that his +father (Christopher) was present in this engagement, +and that after a desperate contest, which lasted from +morning till evening, the hand-grenades and other +fiery missiles used in the battle, caused a general conflagration +among the vessels, which having been lashed +together with iron grapplings, could not be separated, +and the crews were compelled to leap into the water +to escape the fire. He then goes on to say that “his +father, who was a good swimmer, finding himself at +the distance of two leagues from the land, seized an +oar, and by its aid succeeded in reaching the shore. +Whereupon, learning that he was not far from Lisbon, +where he knew he should find many natives of Genoa, +he went thither, and meeting with a gratifying reception, +took up his abode in that city.” The engagement +here described is shown by various French historians +to have taken place in 1485, and as it is certain that +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xl">[xl]</span>Columbus was in Lisbon prior to 1474 (for in that +year he has a letter addressed to him in that city by +Paolo Toscanelli, in reply to one written by himself +from the same place), this relation by Don Ferdinand +assumes a very apocryphal aspect.</p> + +<p>With respect to his other statement, that his father +was of the same name and family as these two renowned +corsairs, it is to be remarked that neither he +nor any of the subsequent historians who have claimed +this needless honour for the great discoverer, appears +to have been acquainted with the real name of the +pirates; and as Caseneuve was the strict family name +of the latter, and Coulon merely a superadded surname, +we may fairly conclude that the claim to consanguinity +has no other foundation than the identity +in the Spanish language of Columbus’s patronymic +with the distinguishing surname of the French vice-admiral.</p> + +<p>In the <i>Chronique Scandaleuse</i> (folio 109) this Caseneuve +is said to have had a very handsome mansion, +named Gaillart-Bois, in the neighbourhood of +Notre Dame d’Escouys, in Normandy, at which Louis +XI made a stay of two or three days in the month of +June 1475, and returned thither also in the following +month and stayed there some time. Spotorno suggests +that his name of Coulon may have been derived +from a place so called in the province of Berri; so +that, in addition to the evidence that he was not of +the same name or family with Christopher Columbus, +there arises strong reason to believe that he was in +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xli">[xli]</span>reality a Frenchman:⁠<a id="FNanchor_11" href="#Footnote_11" class="fnanchor">[11]</a> in which case it becomes probable +that an event which has been generally attributed +to him, or to his still more renowned relative +François Caseneuve, would be with greater correctness +ascribed to the Genoese navigator, Christopher Columbus. +It appears that, in a letter dated Terra +d’Otranto, 2nd October, 1476 (preserved, according to +Bossi, in the royal archives at Milan), addressed to the +Duke of Milan by two illustrious gentlemen of that +city,—the one Guid’Antonio Arcimboldo, and the +other Giovanni Giacomo Trivulzio—the following +story is related. It says that the captain of the Venetian +fleet, when stationed off Cyprus to defend the +island, had twice encountered a <i>Genoese</i> ship, called +the “Nave Palavisina,” which he had taken to be a +Turkish caracca; and in these two engagements one +hundred and twenty of the Turks and Genoese had +been killed, and in the Venetian squadron thirty had +been killed, and two hundred wounded. The captain +appears to have had doubts whether he might not +have done wrong, and caused offence to the duke of +Milan, who might perhaps be an ally of the Genoese: +he therefore goes on to say that his only desire had +been to meet with his enemies (the Turks) and plunder +them; and adds, in confirmation of that assertion, +that “a year before he had met with three times as +many galleys, who spoke no evil of his good name, and +that he found Columbus with ships and galleys, and +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xlii">[xlii]</span>had cheerfully let him pass by, upon which the cry was +raised of ‘Viva San Georgio,’ and nothing further +passed between them.” The Columbus here mentioned +is shewn, by the cry of “Viva San Georgio,” and by the +general tenour of the Venetian captain’s letter, to have +been a Genoese, and with a Genoese crew; and as it +appears probable that the Caseneuves were Frenchmen, +and would in all probability sail with French +crews, it leaves strong reason to presume that the +Genoese captain here mentioned was Christopher +Columbus, who is allowed by all his early historians +to have been engaged in the Mediterranean about the +period referred to.</p> + +<p>His son, Ferdinand Columbus, distinctly states +that, “it was in Portugal that the admiral began to +surmise, that, if the Portuguese sailed so far south, +one might also sail westward, and find lands in that +direction.”</p> + +<p>The period of Christopher Columbus’s sojourn in +Portugal was from 1470 to the close of 1484, during +which time he made several voyages to the coast of +Guinea in the Portuguese service. While at Lisbon +he married Felipa Moñiz de Perestrello, daughter of +that Bartollomeu Perestrello to whom Prince Henry +had granted the commandership of the island of +Porto Santo. For some time Columbus and his wife +lived at Porto Santo with the widow of Perestrello, +who, observing the interest he took in nautical +matters, spoke much to him of her husband’s expedition, +and handed over to him the papers, journals, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xliii">[xliii]</span>maps, and nautical instruments, which Perestrello +had left behind him.⁠<a id="FNanchor_12" href="#Footnote_12" class="fnanchor">[12]</a></p> + +<p>“It was not only,” says Ferdinand Columbus (see +<i>Vida</i>, cap. 8), “this opinion of certain philosophers, +that the greatest part of our globe is dry land, that +stimulated the admiral; he learned, also, from many +pilots, experienced in the western voyages to the +Azores and the Island of Madeira, facts and signs +which convinced him that there was an unknown land +towards the west.” Martin Vicente, pilot of the +King of Portugal, told him that at a distance of four +hundred and fifty leagues from Cape St. Vincent, he +had taken from the water a piece of wood sculptured +very artistically, but not with an iron instrument. +This wood had been driven across by the west wind, +which made the sailors believe, that certainly there +were on that side some islands not yet discovered. Pedro +Correa, the brother-in-law of Columbus, told him, +that near the island of Madeira he had found a similar +piece of sculptured wood, and coming from the same +western direction. He also said that the King of +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xliv">[xliv]</span>Portugal had received information of large canes +having been taken up from the water in these parts, +which between one knot and another would hold nine +bottles of wine; and Herrera (Dec. 1, lib. 1, cap. 2) +declares that the king had preserved these canes, and +caused them to be shown to Columbus. The colonists +of the Azores related, that when the wind blew +from the west, the sea threw up, especially in the +islands of Graciosa and Fayal, pines of a foreign species. +Others related, that in the island of Flores +they found one day on the shore two corpses of men, +whose physiognomy and features differed entirely +from those of our coasts. Herrera, perhaps from the +MSS. of Las Casas, says, that the corpses had broad +faces, different from those of Christians. The transport +of these objects was attributed to the action of +the west winds. The true cause, however, was the +great current of the Gulf or Florida stream. The +west and north-west winds only increase the ordinary +rapidity of the ocean current, prolong its action +towards the east, as far as the Bay of Biscay, and +mix the waters of the Gulf stream with those of the +currents of Davis’ Straits and of North Africa. The +same eastward oceanic movement, which in the fifteenth +century carried bamboos and pines upon the +shores of the Azores and Porto Santo, deposits annually +on Ireland, the Hebrides, and Norway, the +seeds of tropical plants, and the remains of cargoes +of ships which had been wrecked in the West Indies.⁠<a id="FNanchor_13" href="#Footnote_13" class="fnanchor">[13]</a></p> + +<p>While availing himself of these sources of information, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xlv">[xlv]</span>Columbus studied with deep and careful attention +the works of such geographical authors as supplied +suggestions of the feasibility of a short western +passage to India. Amongst these, the <i>Imago Mundi</i> +of Cardinal Pierre d’Ailly (Petrus de Aliaco) was his +favourite, and it is probable that from it he culled +all he knew of the opinions of Aristotle, Strabo, and +Seneca, respecting the facility of reaching India by a +western route. Columbus’s own copy of this work +is now in the cathedral of Seville, and forms one of +the most precious items in the valuable library, +originally collected by his son Ferdinand, and bequeathed +to the cathedral on condition of its being +constantly preserved for public use. It contains +many marginal notes in his own handwriting, but of +comparatively little importance.</p> + +<p>The fondness of Columbus for the works of Pierre +d’Ailly, a Frenchman, has caused a recent French +writer, M. Margry, to put forth the empty pretension +that the discovery of America was due to the +influence of French teaching, whereas, not only was +the <i>Imago Mundi</i> itself a compilation from ancient +authors, but the first edition was not printed till +many years after Columbus had devoted himself to +the purpose which ended in his great discovery, for +his famous correspondence with Toscanelli, of which +I shall presently speak, occurred in 1474. M. Margry, +indeed, <i>asserts</i>, but without giving his authority, that +in the Columbian Library at Seville are D’Ailly’s +treatises <i>printed at Nuremberg in 1472</i>. This is in +contravention of all the bibliographers—Panzer, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xlvi">[xlvi]</span>Ebert, Hain, Serna Santander, Lambinet, and Jean +de Launoy.</p> + +<p>The earliest date assigned to the first edition of +the <i>Imago Mundi</i>, is <i>about</i> 1480 by Serna Santander, +1483 (?) by Lambinet, while Jean de Launoy, in his +<i>Regii Navarræ Gymnasii Parisiensis Historia</i>, +Parisiis, 1677, tom. ii, page 478, distinctly gives +it the date of 1490. Humboldt, who had Columbus’s +copy in his hands, and who, as the subject was especially +his own, cannot be suspected of sleeping +over such an important point, adopts De Launoy’s +date of 1490, while Lambinet gives the queried +date of 1483 from actual collation with another +work printed in that year, at Louvain, in the very +identical type, by John of Westphalia. In the +recently published second volume of the <i>Ensayo de +una bibliotheca de libros españoles raros</i>, por Don +Bartolomé Gallardo, is a list of the books in the +Columbian Library, but D’Ailly’s <i>Imago Mundi</i> is +not therein mentioned, although his <i>Quæstiones</i>, +printed much later by Jean Petit at Paris, a far less +important book, is inserted. The omission is to be +regretted, as we might have hoped for some illustrative +comments from the author.</p> + +<p>But perhaps it may be suggested that Columbus +may have possessed, or seen, a <i>manuscript</i> copy of +Pierre d’Ailly at a yet earlier period. We will willingly +suppose it for the sake of the argument; but +even then the reasoning will fail, for I find that the +very portion of the <i>Imago Mundi</i>, written in 1410, +which is assumed to have supplied the inspiration +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xlvii">[xlvii]</span>for the discovery of America, and which Columbus +quoted in his letter to Ferdinand and Isabella from +Haiti in 1498, is <i>taken by Pierre d’Ailly, without +acknowledgment, almost word for word, from the +“Opus Majus,” of Roger Bacon</i>, written in 1267, a +hundred and forty-three years before, as will be seen +at page 183 of that work, printed Londini, 1733, +fol. See Humboldt, <i>Examen Critique</i>, tom. i, pp. +64-70.</p> + +<p>Unfortunately Roger Bacon was not a Frenchman, +but there remains for M. Margry the consolatory fact +that no Englishman is likely to avail himself of the +circumstance which I have just enunciated, to claim +for his countrymen the honour of having inspired +Columbus with the idea which led to the discovery +of America, although, by M. Margry’s process of +reasoning, he might do so if he would. True, Roger +Bacon had been a student in the University of Paris; +but this fact did not communicate the character of +French inspiration to the ancient authors whose +statements he quotes. True also (but this is a circumstance +either unknown to or unnoticed by M. +Margry), Ferdinand Columbus tells us that his +father was principally influenced in his belief of the +smallness of the space between Spain and Asia, by +the opinion of the Arab astronomer, Al Fergani, or +Alfragan, to that effect; and it is further true that +Alfragan is further treated of by Pierre d’Ailly, in +his <i>Mappa Mundi</i>. This is a separate work from the +<i>Imago Mundi</i>, although it happens to have been +printed with it, at a period which we have shown to +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xlviii">[xlviii]</span>be posterior to Columbus’s correspondence with +Toscanelli, in 1474.</p> + +<p>It follows, therefore, that either: 1st, the great +explorer obtained his knowledge of Alfragan’s opinion +through one of the Arabo-Latin translations, to which +he seems to have had recourse during his cosmographical +studies in Portugal and Spain (see Humboldt, +<i>Examen Critique</i>, tom. i, p. 83), in which case +French influence is eliminated; or 2ndly, he derived +it from a manuscript of Pierre d’Ailly before 1474, +which there is no evidence to show; or 3rdly, he derived +it from the printed copy of Pierre d’Ailly, in +which case the influence of Alfragan on his mind +could not have been primarily suggestive, but only +corroborative of conclusions to which he had come +several years before that book was printed. And in +either of the two latter cases, the information supplied +by Alfragan would not become French because +adduced by a Frenchman, unless we introduce into +serious history a principle analogous to the old conventional +English blunder of giving to the toys +manufactured in Nuremberg the name of “Dutch +toys,” because imported through Holland.</p> + +<p>The suggestions derived from these works were corroborated +by the narratives of Marco Polo and Sir +John Mandeville, whose reports of the vast extent of +Asia eastward led to the reasonable inference, that +the western passage to the eastern confines of that +continent could not demand any considerable length +of time. The natural tendency of his thoughts to +nautical enterprise being thus fostered by the works +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xlix">[xlix]</span>that he studied, and by the animating accounts of +recent adventurers, as well as by the glorious prospects +which the broad expanse of the unknown world +opened up to his view, we find that in the year 1474 +his ideas had formed for themselves a determined +channel, and his grand project of discovery was +established in his mind as a thing to be done, and +done by himself. The combined enthusiasm and +tenacity of purpose which distinguished his character, +caused him to regard his theory, when once formed, +as a matter of such undeniable certainty, that no +doubts, opposition, or disappointment, could divert +him from the pursuit of it. It so happened that +while Columbus was at Lisbon a correspondence was +being carried on between Fernam Martins, a prebendary +of that place, and the learned Paolo Toscanelli, +of Florence, respecting the commerce of the +Portuguese to the coast of Guinea, and the navigation +of the ocean to the Westward. This came to the +knowledge of Columbus, who forthwith despatched +by an Italian, then at his house, a letter to Toscanelli, +informing him of his project. He received an answer +in Latin, in which, to demonstrate his approbation of +the design of Columbus, Toscanelli sent him a copy +of a letter which he had written to Martins a few +days before, accompanied by a chart, the most important +features of which were laid down from the +descriptions of Marco Polo. The coasts of Asia were +drawn at a moderate distance from the opposite +coasts of Europe and Africa, and the islands of Cipango, +Antilla, etc., of whose riches such astonishing +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_l">[l]</span>accounts had been given by this traveller, were +placed at convenient spaces between the two continents.</p> + +<p>While all these exciting accounts must have conspired +to fan the flame of his ambition, one of the +noblest points in the character of Columbus had to +be put to the test by the difficulty of carrying his +project into effect. The political position of Portugal, +engrossed as it was with its wars with Spain, rendered +the thoughts of an application for an expensive +fleet of discovery worse than useless, and several years +elapsed before a convenient opportunity presented +itself for making the proposition.</p> + +<p>Meanwhile Columbus was not idle. In the year +1477, he tells us, in a letter quoted by his son, Don +Ferdinand, that “<i>he sailed a hundred leagues beyond +the island of Thule, the southern part of which is distant +from the equinoctial line seventy-three degrees, +and not sixty-three, as some assert; neither does it lie +within the line which includes the west of Ptolemy, +but is much more westerly. To this island, which is +as large as England, the English, especially those +from Bristol, go with their merchandize. At the +time that I was there the sea was not frozen, but +the tides were so great as to rise and fall twenty-six +fathoms. It is true that the Thule of which Ptolemy +makes mention lies where he says it does, and by the +moderns it is called Frislanda.</i>” Whether the Færoe +islands [see ante, <a href="#Page_xxiii">page xxiii</a>], or Iceland, was alluded +to is uncertain, for nothing more is known of the +voyage than is contained in this letter. It is moreover +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_li">[li]</span>supposed by his son, as has been already stated, +that he passed a considerable portion of his time at +sea, with one or both of the famous pirates of the +same name, who were so many years engaged in the +Levant; but upon the whole of this portion of his +history there rests an impenetrable cloud of obscurity.</p> + +<p>About the year 1480, by the joint labours of the +celebrated Martin Behaim and the prince’s two physicians, +Roderigo and Josef, who were the most able +geographers and astronomers in the kingdom, the +astrolabe was rendered serviceable for the purposes +of navigation, as by its use the seaman was enabled +to ascertain his distance from the equator by the +altitude of the sun.</p> + +<p>Shortly after this invaluable invention Columbus +submitted to the king of Portugal his proposition of +a voyage of discovery, and succeeded in obtaining an +audience to advocate his cause. He explained his +views with respect to the facility of the undertaking, +from the form of the earth, and the comparatively +small space that intervened between Europe and the +eastern shores of Asia, and proposed, if the king +would supply him with ships and men, to take the +direct western route to India across the Atlantic. +His application was received at first discouragingly, +but the king was at length induced, by the +excellent arguments of Columbus, to make a conditional +concession, and the result was that the proposition +was referred to a council of men supposed +to be learned in maritime affairs. This council, consisting +of the above-mentioned geographers, Roderigo +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lii">[lii]</span>and Josef, and Cazadilla, bishop of Ceuta, the king’s +confessor, treated the question as an extravagant +absurdity. The king, not satisfied with their judgment, +then convoked a second council, consisting of +a considerable number of the most learned men in +the kingdom; but the result of their deliberations +was only confirmative of the verdict of the first junta, +and a general sentence of condemnation was passed +upon the proposition. As the king still manifested +an inclination to make a trial of the scheme of Columbus, +and expressed a proportionate dissatisfaction with +the decisions of these two juntas, some of his councillors, +who were inimical to Columbus, and at the +same time unwilling to offend the king, suggested a +process which coincided with their own views, but +which was at once short-sighted, impolitic, and ungenerous. +Their plan was to procure from Columbus +a detailed account of his design under the pretence +of subjecting it to the examination of the council, and +then to dispatch a caravel on the voyage of discovery +under the false pretext of conveying provision to the +Cape Verde Islands. King John, contrary to his +general character for prudence and generosity, yielded +to their insidious advice, and their plan was acted +upon, but the caravel which was sent out, after +keeping on its westward course for some days, encountered +a storm, and the crew, possessing none of +the lofty motives of Columbus to support their resolution, +returned to Lisbon, ridiculing the scheme in +excuse of their own cowardice. So indignant was +Columbus at this unworthy manœuvre, that he resolved +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_liii">[liii]</span>to leave Portugal and offer his services to some +other country, and towards the end of 1484 he left +Lisbon secretly with his son Diego. The learned and +careful Muñoz states his opinion that he went immediately +to Genoa, and made a personal proposition to +that government, but met with a contemptuous refusal; +at any rate, we are positively informed by +Fernando Columbus that his father went to Spain at +the close of 1484. A curious surmise is expressed +in a note to Sharon Turner’s <i>History of England in +the Middle Ages</i>, in which the supposition is propounded +of the possible identity of Christopher +Columbus with a person named Christofre Colyns, +who is recorded in some grants in the Harleian MSS. +to have been military commandant of Queenborough +castle, in the isle of Sheppy, in 1484 and 1485. +This man is distinctly stated in the same grants to +have held that post in April 1485, and it may be +reasonably conjectured that the cessation of his office +would not take place till the accession of Henry +VII, in August in that year, which leaves but little +time for his making his way to Genoa, and subsequently +reaching Spain, so as to make his application +to that court. Moreover, the impoverished condition +in which Columbus presented himself at the convent +de la Rabida was very incompatible with the probable +pecuniary position of a person, who is described by +the grants in question not only to have held the prominent +station already mentioned, but to have had +a ship given him, with an annuity of £100, and an +especial grant of money to enable him to supply +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_liv">[liv]</span>himself with habiliments of war. These considerations, +combined with the statement of Fernando +Columbus just referred to, show that the supposition +proposed by Mr. Turner cannot be regarded as +tenable.</p> + +<p>The interesting story of Columbus’s visit to the +Franciscan convent of Santa Maria de Rabida forms +the first incident that we find recorded of him +after his arrival in Spain. It is well known that +the lively interest which the worthy prior of that +convent, Fray Juan Perez de Marchena, took in his +guest, was the means, through the anticipated influence +of his friend Fernando de Talavera, of first +leading Columbus to the Spanish court, under the +hope of obtaining the patronage of the king and +queen. Talavera, who was prior of the monastery of +Prado, and confessor to the queen, possessed great +political interest. Juan Perez took advantage of this +influential position of his friend, and addressed him +a letter by the hands of Columbus, strongly recommending +the project of the latter to his favourable +consideration, and requesting his advocacy of it before +the sovereigns. It was in the spring of 1486 that +Columbus first ventured to the Spanish court in the +hope of gaining a favourable audience. On reaching +Cordova, however, he had the mortification to find +that Talavera, upon whose influence he mainly relied, +regarded his design as unreasonable and preposterous. +The court also was at that time so engrossed with +the war at Granada, as to place any hope of gaining +attention to his novel and expensive proposition out +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lv">[lv]</span>of the question. At length, at the close of 1486, +the theory of Columbus, backed as it was by his +forcible arguments and earnest manner, gained weight +with the most important personage at court next to +the sovereigns themselves. This was Mendoza, archbishop +of Toledo, and grand cardinal of Spain; who, +pleased with the grandeur of the scheme and the +fervent but clear-headed reasoning of Columbus, +adopted his cause, and became his staunch protector +and friend. Through his means an audience was +procured with the sovereigns, and the result of the +interview was the expression of a favourable opinion, +qualified by the necessity of an appeal to the judgment +of the literati of the country. But here again +Columbus found himself in a painful predicament, +which it required all his knowledge and prudence to +escape from with safety. He was examined at Salamanca +by a council of ecclesiastics, and had to propound +opinions which appeared to be at variance +with the descriptions contained in the sacred Scriptures, +and that at a period when the expression of +any sentiment approaching to heresy exposed its +owner to the persecution of the newly established +Inquisition. The ignorance of cosmography, and the +blind conclusions drawn from various misinterpreted +texts of Scripture, formed mighty impediments to +the pleadings of Columbus, and he began to find +himself in danger of being convicted not only of +error, but of heresy. One learned man of the number, +however, Diego de Deza, tutor to prince John, +and afterwards archbishop of Seville, appreciated the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lvi">[lvi]</span>eloquent and lucid reasonings of the adventurer, and +aiding him with his own powers of language and +erudition, not only gained for him a hearing, but +won upon the judgments of some of the most learned +of the council. Nevertheless, so important a question +could not be hastily decided; and the result of +the united pedantry and sluggish superstition of +the learned body, was to expose the question to +protracted argumentation or neglect, while Talavera, +who was at its head, and from whom Columbus had +hoped to receive the greatest assistance, was too busied +with political matters to bring it to a conclusion. At +length, in the early part of 1487, the deliberations +of the council were brought to a stand-still by the +departure of the court to Cordova, and were not resumed +till the winter of 1491. During this wearisome +period the bustle and excitement of the +memorable campaign against the Moors, with its +alternations of triumphant festivity, together with +the marriage of the princess Isabella to the prince +Alonzo, heir apparent of Portugal, were far too engrossing +to admit of much attention being given to +the schemes of Columbus.⁠<a id="FNanchor_14" href="#Footnote_14" class="fnanchor">[14]</a> At the close, however, +of the year 1491, the learned conclave appears to +have recommenced its consultations; but upon being +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lvii">[lvii]</span>called upon by the sovereigns for a decision, a report +was returned to Talavera that the scheme was considered +by the general vote of the junta too groundless +to be recommended. Accordingly Talavera was +commanded to inform Columbus that the cares and +expenses of the war precluded the possibility of their +highnesses engaging in any new enterprises, but that +when it was concluded, there would be both the will +and the opportunity to give the subject further consideration. +Regarding this as nothing better than +a courteous evasion of his application, he retired +wearied and disappointed from the court, and, but +for an attachment which he had formed at Cordova +which made him reluctant to leave Spain, he would +in all probability have repaired to France, under the +encouragement of a favourable letter which he had +received from that quarter.</p> + +<p>The ensuing period till 1492 was spent in a succession +of vexatious appeals to the Spanish court, during +which he had to contend with every obstacle that +ignorance, envy, or a pusillanimous economy could +suggest.</p> + +<p>At length having overcome all difficulties, he set +sail with a fleet of three ships on the 3rd of August +1492, on his unprecedented and perilous voyage. The +ordinary difficulties which might be expected to occur +in so novel and precarious an adventure were seriously +aggravated by the alarming discovery of the variation +of the needle, as well as by the mutinous behaviour +of his crew; and his life was upon the point of being +sacrificed to their impatience, when the fortunate +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lviii">[lviii]</span>appearance of land, on the morning of the 12th of +October, converted their indignation into compunction, +and their despondency into unbounded joy.</p> + +<p>With reference to the identity of the first landing +place of Columbus in America, I too readily adopted +in 1847 the conclusions of Navarrete that the Great +Turk, the northernmost of the Turk islands, was +the true landfall. I did so under the following +process of reasoning. My predecessors in the consideration +of the subject had been the learned Juan +Bautista Muñoz in 1793, Navarrete in 1825, Washington +Irving in 1828, and the Baron Alexander +von Humboldt in 1837. It was the opinion of +Muñoz that Guanahani was Watling’s Island. Navarrete, +as just shown, placed it in the Grand Turk, +far to the east, while Washington Irving and Humboldt +made it to be Cat Island to the west. Such +different conclusions, formed by thoughtful men from +an examination of the diary of Columbus and other +early documents, caused me to set a great value upon +any modern reconnaissance of the locality which +might throw a fuller light upon these documents and +perhaps show which of the conclusions was correct. +Now, it so happened that a communication made a +short time previously to the New York Historical +Society by Mr. Gibbs, a resident on Turk’s Island, +presented several points of evidence strongly confirmative +of the correctness of Navarrete’s deductions. +The most important of Mr. Gibbs’s arguments were +the following. Columbus states in his journal that +there were several islands in sight from Guanahani. +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lix">[lix]</span>From the island now called San Salvador, Mr. Gibbs +found no land visible. The journal speaks of soundings +to the eastward of Guanahani: there were none +to the eastward of San Salvador. All the marks +wanting at San Salvador were found at Turk’s +Island. The journal describes Guanahani as well +wooded, and having much water; a large lake in the +centre, and two several running streams flowing into +the sea. Turk’s Island has about one-third of its +surface covered with lakes of salt and fresh water; +and a few years before vessels had sailed into one of +the ponds. Although the island was now without +trees, Mr. Gibbs recollected some remains of a forest +existing in his youth. Moreover the journal makes +no allusion to the Great Bahama Bank, which must +have been passed in approaching San Salvador.⁠<a id="FNanchor_15" href="#Footnote_15" class="fnanchor">[15]</a> +As Mr. Gibbs’s personal observation thus appeared +to corroborate the deductions of Señor de Navarrete, +I yielded to this combination of evidence and so submitted +it to the reader. Since that time, however, +we have seen other arguments advanced, in which +local investigation, as well as the examination of the +early documents, have resulted in conclusions as +divergent as those which preceded them. Captain +Becher, R.N., of our own Hydrographic Office, in his +<i>Landfall of Columbus</i>, published London, 1856, +examining the question from a seaman’s point of view, +fell in with the opinion formed by Muñoz in 1793, +that Guanahani was Watling’s Island, while Señor de +Varnhagen, in his <i>La verdadera Guanahani de Colon</i>, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lx">[lx]</span>published at Santiago, 1864, maintains the unique +opinion that it was the island of Mayaguana.</p> + +<p>Under these circumstances it has become a duty +in me to revise my old opinion; and while the process +to which I shall resort will, as I hope, finally +settle this much vexed question, it is happily one +which will not lay me open to the charge of presumption +in giving a judicial verdict where men of +such high renown have differed. I congratulate +myself on having found a means of enabling the +reader to judge for himself by a very simple mode +of examination. Annexed is a fac-simile of Herrera’s +map of the Bahama Islands, as laid down from the +original documents in the handwriting of Columbus +and his contemporaries, to which, as official historiographer +of the Indies in the sixteenth century, Herrera +had exclusive access; and side by side with it +is a map, reduced from the Admiralty survey, showing +those islands as now known, and with their +modern names. I indulge the hope that no one will +contest the identification⁠<a id="FNanchor_16" href="#Footnote_16" class="fnanchor">[16]</a> of the respective islands +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxi">[lxi]</span>laid down in the old map with those which I have +set forth as their correlatives in the modern one, and +if so, the Guanahani of Columbus will be plainly +seen to be Watling’s Island. The correctness of this +identification is not only confirmed, but made easily +perceptible, by the fact that certain islands of the +series have retained their ancient names without +change from the beginning, thus affording stations +for comparison which reduce the chances of error to +a minimum. This map of Herrera’s is of especial +value for the purpose, because while it embodies the +information contained in the map of the pilot Juan +de la Cosa, who was with Columbus in his second +voyage (1493-96); it has the advantage over the latter +in having been made nearly a century later, and so contains +the entire chain of islands, many of which had +not been explored at the time when De la Cosa laid +down his map in 1500. For the satisfaction of the +reader, however, a reduction of that part of De la +Cosa’s map which shows these islands is here given.</p> + +<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="map1" style="max-width: 62.5em;"> + <img class="w100" src="images/map1.jpg" alt=""> + <figcaption> + <p>BAHAMA ISLANDS<br>ANTONIO DE HERRERA<br>1601.</p> + </figcaption> +</figure> + +<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="map2" style="max-width: 62.5em;"> + <img class="w100" src="images/map2.jpg" alt=""> + <figcaption> + <p>BAHAMA ISLANDS<br>MODERN</p> + </figcaption> +</figure> + +<table> + <tr> + <th>Herrera</th> + <th></th> + <th>Modern</th> + </tr> + <tr> + <td><i>Bahama</i></td> + <td></td> + <td><i>Gᵗ. Bahama Iᵈ.</i></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td><i>Bimini</i></td> + <td>}</td> + <td rowspan="2" class="valign"><i>Andros Iˢ.</i></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td><i>Habacoa</i></td> + <td>}</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td><i>Cabeça de los Martires</i></td> + <td></td> + <td><i>Cay Sal Bank</i></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td><i>Yucayoneque</i></td> + <td></td> + <td><i>Gᵗ. Abaco Iᵈ.</i></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td><i>Cigateo</i></td> + <td></td> + <td><i>Eleuthera</i></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td><i>Curateo</i></td> + <td></td> + <td><i>Little S. Salvador</i></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td><i>Guanima</i></td> + <td></td> + <td><i>S. Salvador or Cat Iᵈ.</i></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="nw"><i>Anonymous between Habacoa & Yuma</i></td> + <td></td> + <td><i>Great Exuma</i></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td><i>Guanihana</i></td> + <td></td> + <td><i>Watlings Iᵈ.</i></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td><i>Yuma</i></td> + <td></td> + <td><i>Yuma</i></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td><i>Samana</i></td> + <td></td> + <td><i>Samana</i></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td><i>Xumeto</i></td> + <td></td> + <td><i>Crooked Iᵈ.</i></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td><i>Yabaque</i></td> + <td></td> + <td><i>Acklin’s Iᵈ.</i></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td><i>Mayaguana</i></td> + <td></td> + <td><i>Mariguana</i></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td><i>Caycos</i></td> + <td>}</td> + <td rowspan="2" class="valign"><i>The Caycos Group</i></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td><i>Amana</i></td> + <td>}</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td><i>Canciba</i></td> + <td></td> + <td><i>Turks Iˢ.</i></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td><i>Abreojo</i></td> + <td></td> + <td><i>Mouchoir Carré</i></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td><i>Canaman</i></td> + <td></td> + <td><i>Silver Plate Bank</i></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td><i>Macarey</i></td> + <td></td> + <td><i>Navidad or Ship B.</i></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td><i>Mira por vos</i></td> + <td></td> + <td><i>Miraporvos</i></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td><i>Ynagua</i></td> + <td></td> + <td><i>Gᵗ. Inagua</i></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td><i>La Tortuga</i></td> + <td></td> + <td><i>Tortuga</i></td> + </tr> +</table> + +<p>But while it is hoped that the identity of Guanahani +with Watling’s Island will be admitted to be +authoritatively established by this comparison, it +would be wanting in respect to those who have put +forth other claims not to show, I will not say the +ground on which these claims were advanced, but +rather, for brevity’s sake, the points at which their +arguments fail. I adopt this plan on the principle that a +chain is no stronger than its weakest link. Of all these +I fear none occupies so disadvantageous a position as +His Excellency Senhor de Varnhagen; for having unfortunately +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxii">[lxii]</span>adopted for his <i>protégée</i> an island (Mayaguana), +which is represented <i>together with</i> the island +of Guanahani both on De la Cosa’s and Herrera’s maps, +I regret to say that he seems to me to be <i>ipso facto</i> +put out of court, since no reasoning whatever could +by any possibility make identical two islands so +markedly distinct that several other islands are +shown to lie between them. Washington Irving, in +advocating Cat Island, or the island at present called +St. Salvador, as the genuine Guanahani, adduces an +examination of the route of Columbus by Commander +Alexander Slidell Mackenzie of the U.S. +navy, but which being principally addressed to the +disproval of Navarrete’s Turk’s Island, fails to establish +Cat Island as the real landfall in contradistinction +to Watling’s Island. In examining this +route I observe a startling inaccuracy, which underlies +the whole question. It is stated that Columbus describes +the island as <i>very large</i>. On referring to +Columbus’s logbook in Navarrete, I find it, on the +contrary, called an “isleta,” or islet, <i>i. e.</i> <i>small</i> island, +a term which could scarcely be applied to an island +forty-two miles long and the loftiest of the Bahamas, +which Cat Island is, whereas it would be correctly +applied to Watling’s Island, which is only twelve +miles long, cut up by salt water lagoons, separated +from each other by small woody hills. At the close, +reference is made to the identity preserved to Cat +Island as San Salvador with that given by Columbus, +and a remonstrance against disturbing the +ancient landmarks. But this is a <i>petitio principii</i>, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxiii">[lxiii]</span>inasmuch as at the period when the name of San +Salvador was first continuously applied to Cat Island, +viz., the middle of the seventeenth century, both +map makers and sailors were possessed of no better +materials, nor even so good, as ourselves, for coming +to an accurate determination. Humboldt, in accepting +the conclusions of Commander Mackenzie as +adopted by Irving, thinks them confirmed by the +map of Juan de la Cosa, of which I have given an +extract. But here I would observe that the attention +of the illustrious philosopher was bent on the +point to which Mackenzie’s paper was directed, viz., +the disproval of Turk’s Island, and not to a discrimination +between Cat Island and Watling’s Island +for the true landfall. A glance will show that the +imperfectness of the Bahama group in Juan de la +Cosa’s map renders it perfectly inadequate for settling +so minute a question.</p> + +<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="map3" style="max-width: 62.5em;"> + <img class="w100" src="images/map3.jpg" alt=""> + <figcaption> + <p>JUAN DE LA COSA<br>1500.</p> + </figcaption> +</figure> + +<p>It is needless to dwell here upon the events +which followed this discovery, as they are for the +most part described in the letter here translated. +The main result of the voyage was the discovery of +the islands of St. Salvador, Santa Maria de la Concepcion, +Exuma, Isabella, Cuba, Bohio, the Archipelago +off the south coast of Cuba (which he names the +Jardin del Rey, or King’s Garden), the islands of +St. Catherine and Hispaniola, on which latter Columbus +erected the fortress of La Navidad, and +established a colony. Finally, on the 16th of January, +he began to steer his course for Spain, and he was +already near the Azores when, on the 12th February, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxiv">[lxiv]</span>the wind came on to blow violently, with a heavy sea, +and on the following day a frightful tempest broke +upon them, which obliged them to scud under bare +poles. The storm continuing with unabated violence, +on the night of the 14th of February the two caravels +parted company, each following the course where the +fury of the tempest drove them. The sailors, giving +themselves up for lost, offered up prayers and vows; +while the admiral, full of gloomy apprehensions that, +after all, his discovery might turn to nought, and his +two sons be left destitute, wrote upon parchment the +account of the voyage, addressed it to the king of +Spain, with a promise, written outside, of one thousand +ducats to whomsoever would deliver it unopened. +He then wrapped the packet up in waxed cloth, and +put it into the middle of a cake of wax, and after +inclosing it in a barrel well hooped and stopped up, +he threw it into the sea. He also placed on the poop +of his own vessel a similar barrel, with the same +account enclosed, in order that if the ship went to +the bottom the barrel might float, and the narrative +be saved. During this period Columbus passed +three days and nights without sleep, and with scanty +and bad food, so that when, on the 18th, he arrived +at St. Mary’s, one of the Azores, he felt his limbs +quite crippled with exposure to the cold and wet. +There was a small church there, in a solitary place, +dedicated to the Virgin. Columbus, with the view +of discharging the vows made during the storm, +sent half of his people on shore to the church, but +the Portuguese Governor of the island took them all +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxv">[lxv]</span>prisoners, seized their boat, and would have attacked +Columbus’s own vessel, by orders, as he said, received +from his court, but for the firmness with which the +latter confronted him. Columbus indignantly asserted +his own rank and office, showed his letters +patent sealed with the royal seal, and threatened +the Governor with the vengeance of the Castilian +government. After a few days, during which Columbus +was driven from his anchorage and had to +beat about in great danger, the Governor, who in +the interval had thought better of the matter, +liberated the prisoners and allowed the caravel to +proceed on her course. The state of the weather +was most terrible; the sea ran mountains high; the +lightnings rent the clouds, and the violence of the +winds was such that the vessel was obliged to scud +under bare poles, in which state she arrived, at last, +in the Tagus, near Lisbon, on the 4th of March. +Columbus immediately wrote a letter to the King of +Portugal, then at Valparaiso, informing him that he +was not come from Guinea but from the Indies, and +requesting protection for his caravel, and permission +to bring it up to Lisbon. Not only was this granted, +but Columbus was immediately invited to Valparaiso +and was received by the monarch and his courtiers +with the highest honours. There were not +wanting, however, some who would gladly have slain +him to prevent his going to Castile as the bearer of +such great and glorious news. The magnanimity of +the king prevented this injustice, and leaving Portugal +in safety, on the 13th of March, Columbus +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxvi">[lxvi]</span>arrived on the 15th at the little port of Palos, from +whence he had sailed on the 3rd of August in the +preceding year. Meanwhile Pinzon, the captain of +the other caravel, who in the late storm had been +driven into Galicia, wished to anticipate the admiral, +but an express order from the court, forbidding him +to come without Columbus, made him actually die +of spite and chagrin. The reception of Columbus in +Spain was such as the grandeur and dignity of his +unrivalled achievement deserved, and his entrance +into Barcelona was scarcely inferior to a Roman +triumph.⁠<a id="FNanchor_17" href="#Footnote_17" class="fnanchor">[17]</a></p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxvii">[lxvii]</span></p> + +<p>Very shortly after his arrival the papal bull was +obtained, which fixed the famous line of demarcation, +determining the right of the Spanish and Portuguese +to discovered lands. This line was drawn +from the north to the south pole, at a hundred leagues +west of the Azores and Cape de Verde islands; the +discoveries to the westward were to belong to Spain, +and those to the eastward to Portugal.</p> + +<p>The seductive adulation of the court and the people +did not, however, divert the thoughts of Columbus +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxviii">[lxviii]</span>from the preparations for a second expedition. A +stay of five months sufficed to make all ready for +this purpose; but these preparations gave rise to a +malignant feeling towards him on the part of Juan +Rodriguez Fonseca, Bishop of Badajos, which eventually +led to such disgraceful ill-usage of the admiral +as will remain a stain upon the character of Spain +while the name of Columbus exists in the memory +of man.</p> + +<p>On the 25th September 1493, Columbus took his +departure from Cadiz, with a fleet of three large +ships of heavy burthen, and fourteen caravels, and +after a pleasant voyage reached the island of Dominica +on the 3rd of November. The letter of Dr. Chanca, +here translated, gives an interesting description of a +considerable portion of the events of this voyage, +but it is to be regretted that his account terminates +so abruptly, and the “memorial” of Columbus to the +sovereigns adds but few incidents of moment to the +narrative. We should be straining the necessary +limits of a mere introduction to these translated +documents, were we to undertake to lead the reader +through the various history of this eventful period of +the life of Columbus. Such a task has been rendered +perfectly unnecessary by the much admired work of +Washington Irving. Suffice it that we state, that +the principal geographical information supplied by +this voyage consists in the discovery of the Caribbee +Islands, Jamaica, an Archipelago (named by Columbus +the Queen’s Gardens, supposed to be the Morant +Keys), Evangelista, or the Isle of Pines; and the +island of Mona.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxix">[lxix]</span></p> + +<p>He sailed with his fleet finally for Spain on the +28th of April, 1496, and after nearly two months’ +struggle against the trade-winds (during which provisions +became so reduced, that there was talk of killing, +and even eating the Indian prisoners), reached +the bay of Cadiz on the 11th of June. The emaciated +state of the crew when they disembarked, presenting +so mournful a contrast with the joyous and triumphant +appearance which they were expected to make, produced +a very discouraging impression upon the opinions +of the public, and reflected a corresponding depression +upon the spirits of Columbus himself. He +was reassured, however, by the receipt of a gracious +letter from the sovereigns inviting him to the court, +which was the more gratifying to him that he had +feared he had fallen into disgrace. He was received +with distinguished favour, and had a verbal concession +of his request to be furnished with eight ships +for a third voyage. He was doomed, however, to +have his patience severely tried by the delay which +occurred in the performance of this promise, which +was partly attributable to the engrossing character of +the public events of the day, and partly to the machinations +of his inveterate enemy, the bishop Fonseca.</p> + +<p>It was not till the 30th of May 1498, that he set +sail from San Lucar, with six of the eight vessels +promised, the other two having been despatched to +Hispaniola, with provisions, in the beginning of the +year. When off Ferro he despatched three of his +six vessels to the same island, with a store of fresh +supplies for the colony, while with his remaining three +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxx">[lxx]</span>he steered for the Cape Verde Islands, which he +reached on the 27th of June. On the 5th of July +he left Boavista, and proceeded southward and westward. +In the course of this voyage the crews suffered +intensely from the heat, having at one time +reached the fifth degree of north latitude, but at +length land was descried on the 31st of July,—a +most providential occurrence, as but one cask of +water remained in the ship. The island they came +to formed an addition to his discoveries; and as the +first land which appeared consisted of three mountains, +united at their base, he christened the island, +from the name of the Trinity, La Trinidad. It was +in this voyage that he discovered terra firma,⁠<a id="FNanchor_18" href="#Footnote_18" class="fnanchor">[18]</a> and +the islands of Margarita and Cubagua. His supposition +that Paria had formed the original abode of +our first parents, is curiously described in our translated +letter; and to a careful observer the sagacity +of his mode of reasoning is perceptible even in a +speculation so fanciful as this. On reaching Hispaniola +(to which he was drawn by his anxiety on +account of the infant colony), he had the mortification +to find that his authority had suffered considerable +diminution, and that the colony was in a state of +organized rebellion. He had scarcely, by his active +and at the same time politic conduct, brought matters +to a state of comparative tranquillity, when a new +storm gathered round him from the quarter of the +Spanish court. The hatred of his ancient enemies +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxxi">[lxxi]</span>availed itself of the clamour raised against him by +some of the rebels who had recently returned to +Spain, and charges of tyranny, cruelty, and ambition +were heaped unsparingly upon him. The king and +queen, wearied with reiterated complaints, at length +resolved to send out a judge, to inquire into his conduct,—injudiciously +authorizing him to seize the +governorship in the place of Columbus, should the +accusations brought against him prove to be valid. +The person chosen was Don Francisco de Bobadilla, +whose character and qualifications for the office are +best demonstrated by the fact, that, on the day after +his arrival in Hispaniola, he seized upon the government +before he had investigated the conduct of +Columbus, who was then absent; he also took up +his residence in his house, and took possession of all +his property, public and private, even to his most +secret papers. A summons to appear before the new +governor was despatched to Columbus, who was at +Fort Concepcion; and in the interval between the +despatch of the summons and his arrival, his brother, +Don Diego, was seized, thrown into irons, and confined +on board of a caravel, without any reason being +assigned for his imprisonment. No sooner did the +admiral himself arrive, than he likewise was put in +chains, and thrown into confinement. The habitual +reverence due to his venerable person and exalted +character, made each bystander shrink from the task +of fixing the fetters on him, till one of his own domestics, +described by Las Casas as “a graceless and +shameless cook,” filled up the measure of ingratitude +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxxii">[lxxii]</span>that he seemed doomed to experience, by riveting the +irons, not merely with apathy, but with manifest +alacrity. In this shackled condition he was conveyed, +in the early part of October, from prison to the ship +that was to convey him home; and when Andreas +Martin, the master of the caravel, touched with respect +for Columbus, and deeply moved at this unworthy +treatment, proposed to take off his irons, he declined +the offered benefit, with the following magnanimous +reply: “Since the king has commanded that I +should obey his governor, he shall find me as obedient +in this as I have been to all his other orders; nothing +but his command shall release me. If twelve years’ +hardship and fatigue; if continual dangers and frequent +famine; if the ocean first opened, and five times +passed and repassed, to add a new world, abounding +with wealth, to the Spanish monarchy; and if an infirm +and premature old age, brought on by these services, +deserve these chains as a reward, it is very fit +I should wear them to Spain, and keep them by me as +memorials to the end of my life.” This in truth he +did; for he always kept them hung on the walls of +his chamber, and desired that when he died they +might be buried with him.</p> + +<p>His arrival in Spain in this painful and degraded +condition produced so general a sensation of indignation +and astonishment, that a warm manifestation +in his favour was the immediate consequence. A +letter (here translated), written by him to Doña +Juana de la Torre, a lady of the court, detailing the +wrongs he had suffered, was read to queen Isabella, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxxiii">[lxxiii]</span>whose generous mind was filled with sympathy and +indignation at the recital. The sovereigns hastened +to order him to be set at liberty, and ordered two +thousand ducats to be advanced, for the purpose of +bringing him to court with all distinction and an +honourable retinue. His reception at the Alhambra +was gracious and flattering in the highest degree; +the strongest indignation was expressed against +Bobadilla, with an assurance that he should be immediately +dismissed from his command, while ample +restitution and reward were promised to Columbus, +and he had every sanction for indulging the fondest +hopes of returning in honour and triumph to St. +Domingo. But here a grievous disappointment +awaited him; his re-appointment was postponed +from time to time with various plausible excuses. +Though Bobadilla was dismissed, it was deemed +desirable to refill his place for two years, by some +prudent and talented officer, who should be able to +put a stop to all remaining faction in the colony, +and thus prepare the way for Columbus to enjoy the +rights and dignities of his government both peacefully +and beneficially to the crown. The newly-selected +governor was Nicolas de Ovando, who, +though described by Las Casas as a man of prudence, +justice, and humanity, certainly betrayed a +want both of generosity and justice in his subsequent +transactions with Columbus. It is possible +that the delay manifested by the sovereigns in redeeming +their promise might have continued until +the death of Columbus, had not a fresh stimulant to +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxxiv">[lxxiv]</span>the cupidity of Ferdinand been suggested by a new +project of discovering a strait, of the existence of +which Columbus felt persuaded from his own observations, +and which would connect the New World +which he had discovered with the wealthy shores of +the east. His enthusiasm on the subject was heightened +by an emulous consideration of the recent +achievements of Vasco da Gama and Cabral, the +former of whom had, in 1497, found a maritime +passage to India by the Cape, and the latter, in +1500, had discovered for Portugal the vast and opulent +empire of Brazil. The prospect of a more direct +and safe route to India than that discovered by da +Gama, at length gained for Columbus the accomplishment +of his wish for another armament; and, finally, +on the 9th of May, 1502, he sailed from Cadiz on +his fourth and last voyage of discovery.</p> + +<p>It is painful to contrast the splendour of the fleet +with which Ovando left Spain to assume the government +of Hispaniola, with the slender and inexpensive +armament granted to Columbus for the purpose of exploring +an unknown strait into an unknown ocean, +the traversing of whose unmeasured breadth would +complete the circumnavigation of the globe. Ovando’s +fleet consisted of thirty sail, five of them from ninety +to one hundred and fifty tons burden, twenty-four +caravels of from thirty to ninety tons, and one bark +of twenty-five tons; and the number of souls amounted +to about two thousand five hundred. The heroic and +injured man, to whose unparalleled combination of +noble qualities, the very dignity which called for all +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxxv">[lxxv]</span>this state was indebted for its existence, had now in +the decline of his years and strength, and stripped +both of honour and emolument, to venture forth +with four caravels,—the largest of seventy, and the +smallest of fifty tons burthen—accompanied by one +hundred and fifty men, on one of the most toilsome +and perilous enterprises of which the mind can form +a conception.</p> + +<p>On the 20th of May he reached the Grand Canary, +and starting from thence on the 25th, took his +departure for the west. Favoured by the trade +winds, he made’a gentle and easy passage, and +reached one of the Caribbee Islands, called by the +natives Matinino (Martinique), on the 15th of June. +After staying three days at this island, he steered +northwards, and touched at Dominica, and from +thence directed his course, contrary to his own original +intention and the commands of the sovereigns, +to St. Domingo. His reason was that his principal +vessel sailed so ill as to delay the progress of +the fleet, which he feared might be an obstacle to +the safety and success of the enterprise, and he +held this as a sufficient motive for infringing the +orders he had received. On his arrival at San Domingo, +he found the ships which had brought out +Ovando ready to put to sea on their return to Spain. +He immediately sent to the governor to explain that +his intention in calling at the island was to procure +a vessel in exchange for one of his caravels, which +was very defective; and further begged permission +for his squadron to take shelter in the harbour, from +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxxvi">[lxxvi]</span>a hurricane, which, from his acquaintance with the +prognostics of the weather, he had foreseen was +rapidly approaching. This request was ungraciously +refused; upon which Columbus, though denied shelter +for himself, endeavoured to avert the danger of +the fleet, which was about to sail, and sent back +immediately to the governor to entreat that he would +not allow it to put to sea for some days. His predictions +and requests were treated with equal contempt, +and Columbus had not only to suffer these +insulting refusals and the risk of life for himself and +squadron, but the loud murmurings of his own crew +that they had sailed with a commander whose position +exposed them to such treatment. All he could +do was to draw his ships up as close as possible to +the shore, and seek the securest anchorage that +chance might present him with. Meanwhile the +weather appeared fair and tranquil, and the fleet of +Bobadilla put boldly out to sea. The predicted +storm came on the next night with terrific fury, and +all the ships belonging to the governor’s fleet, with +the exception of one, were either lost, or put back +to San Domingo in a shattered condition. The only +vessel that escaped was the one which had been +freighted with some four thousand gold pieces, rescued +from the pillage of Columbus’s fortune. Bobadilla, +Roldan, and a number of the most inveterate enemies +of the admiral, perished in this tremendous +hurricane, while his own fleet, though separated and +considerably damaged by the storm, all arrived safe at +last at Port Hermoso, on the south of San Domingo. +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxxvii">[lxxvii]</span>He repaired his vessels at Port Hermoso, but had +scarcely left the harbour before another storm drove +him into Port Brazil, more to the westward. On the +14th of July he left this port, steering for terra firma, +and on the 30th discovered the small island of Guanaga +or Bonacca, a few leagues east of the bay of Honduras. +He continued an eastern course, and discovered the +cape now known as Cape Honduras. While moving +along this coast, he experienced one of those frightful +tempests to which the tropics are liable, and of which +he gives so impressive a description in the letter we +have translated. At length, after forty days’ struggle +to make as much as seventy leagues from the cape +of Honduras, he reached a cape, by doubling which +he found a direct southward course open, offering +at the same time an unobstructed navigation and +a favourable wind. To commemorate this sudden +relief from toil and danger, Columbus named this +point Cape <i>Gracias a Dios</i>, or “Thanks to God.” A +melancholy occurrence took place on the 16th of September, +while they were anchored off this coast. The +boats had been sent up a large river to procure supplies +of wood and water, when, on returning, the +encounter of the sea with the rapid current of the +river caused so violent and sudden a commotion, that +one of the boats was swallowed up, and all on board +perished. On the 25th of September he reached +Cariay, or Cariari, where he stayed till the 5th of +October. The next point was the Bay of Carumbaru, +which was the first place on that coast where he met +with specimens of pure gold. Leaving this bay on +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxxviii">[lxxviii]</span>the 17th of October, he sailed along the coast of +Veragua, and here he was informed by the Indians +of the wealthy country of Ciguare, which he supposed +to be some province belonging to the Grand Khan, +and also of a river ten days’ journey beyond Ciguare, +which he conceived to be the Ganges. On the 2nd +of November he discovered Puerto Bello, in which +harbour he was detained till the 9th by stormy +weather; when, continuing his course eastward, he +reached, near the end of the month, a small harbour, to +which he gave the name of El Retrete, or the Cabinet. +It was here that a continuance of stormy weather, in +addition to the murmurs of his crew at-being compelled +to prosecute an indefinite search, with worm-eaten +ships, against opposing currents, determined +Columbus on relinquishing his eastward voyage for +the present, and to return in search of the gold mines +of Veragua. But on altering his course to the westward, +he had the mortification to find the wind for +which he had long been wishing, come now, as if in +direct opposition to his adopted course, and for nine +days he was exposed to so terrible a storm that it was +a marvel how his crazy vessels could outlive it. At +length, after a month’s anxiety and suffering, they +anchored, on the day of the Epiphany, at the mouth +of a river called by the natives Yebra, but which +Columbus named Belem, or Bethlehem. Here a +settlement was formed, and here occurred the sad +disasters and conflicts with the natives, which he +describes in his letter from Jamaica, and in which +the faithful and zealous Diego Mendez proved an +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxxix">[lxxix]</span>eminently efficient assistant to his much loved master. +The history of this unhappy voyage, the toils and +perils of which were aggravated to Columbus by extreme +bodily suffering, closes by his reaching Jamaica, +where he would in all probability have perished, but +for the devotedness and activity of Mendez. The +highly interesting description of that brave man’s +exploits on behalf of Columbus, has been quoted by +Navarrete from his will, and is here translated. +When at length, through the agency of Mendez, two +ships arrived from Hispaniola to the assistance of the +admiral, he was enabled, on the 28th of June, 1504, +to leave his wrecked vessels behind him, and start +with revived hopes for San Domingo, which he reached +on the 13th of August. His sojourn there was not, +as may be judged, calculated to afford him satisfaction +or pleasure. The overstrained courtesy of the governor +offered but a poor alleviation to the rush of rankling +feelings which the past associations and present +desolation of the place summoned up to his mind.</p> + +<p>On the 12th of September he set sail for Spain, +and the same tempestuous weather which had all along +tended to make this his last voyage the most disastrous, +did not forsake him now. The ship in which +he came home sprung her mainmast in four places in +one tempest, and in a subsequent storm the foremast +was sprung, and finally, on the 7th of November, he +arrived, in a vessel as shattered as his own broken +and care-worn frame, in the welcome harbour of San +Lucar.</p> + +<p>The two years which intervened between this +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxxx">[lxxx]</span>period and his death present a picture of black ingratitude +on the part of the crown to this distinguished +benefactor of the kingdom, which it is truly +painful to contemplate. We behold an extraordinary +man, the discoverer of a second hemisphere, reduced +by his very success to so low a state of poverty that, +in his prematurely infirm old age, he is compelled to +subsist by borrowing, and to plead, in the apologetic +language of a culprit, for the rights of which the very +sovereign whom he has benefited has deprived him. +The death of the benignant and high-minded Isabella, +in 1505, gave a finishing blow to his hope of obtaining +redress, and we find him thus writing subsequently to +this period to his old and faithful friend Diego de +Deza:—“It appears that his majesty does not think +fit to fulfil that which he, with the queen, who is now +in glory, promised me by word and seal. For me to +contend for the contrary, would be to contend with +the wind. I have done all that I could do: I leave +the rest to God, whom I have ever found propitious +to me in my necessities.” The selfish and cold-hearted +Ferdinand beheld his illustrious and loyal +servant sink, without relief, under bodily infirmity, +and the palsying sickness of hope deferred; and at +length, on the 20th of May 1506, the generous heart +which had done so much without reward and suffered +so much without upbraiding, found rest in a world +where neither gratitude nor justice is either asked or +withheld.</p> + +<p>His body was in the first instance buried at Valladolid, +in the parish church of Santa Maria de la +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxxxi">[lxxxi]</span>Antigua, but was transferred, in 1513, to the Cartuja +de las Cuevas, near Seville, where a monument was +erected over his grave with the memorable inscription,—</p> + +<p class="center allsmcap">A CASTILLA Y A LEON<br> +NUEVO MUNDO DIÓ COLON.</p> + +<p>In the year 1536, both his body, and that of his +son Diego, who had been likewise buried in the +Cartuja, were transported to St. Domingo, and deposited +in the cathedral of that city. From hence +they were removed to Havannah in 1795, on the +cession of Hispaniola to the French, and the ashes of +the immortal discoverer now quietly repose in the +cathedral church of that city.⁠<a id="FNanchor_19" href="#Footnote_19" class="fnanchor">[19]</a></p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxxxii">[lxxxii]</span></p> + +<p>But injustice, unhappily, was not buried with Columbus +in the tomb. It was but one twelvemonth +after his death that an attempt was made, and only +too successfully, to name the new world which he +had discovered, after another, who was not only his +inferior, but his pupil in the school of maritime enterprise. +In an obscure corner of Lorraine, at the +little cathedral town of St. Dié, a cluster of learned +priests, who had there established a printing-press +under the auspices of René II, Duke of Lorraine, +suggested to give to the newly discovered continent +the name of the Florentine, Amerigo Vespucci, whose +nautical career did not commence till after Columbus +had returned from his second voyage to the western +hemisphere. The first time that the name of Amerigo +came into notice was in the year 1504, when Johann +Ottmar published at Augsburg the <i>Mundus Novus</i>, +a description of Vespucci’s third voyage, now extremely +rare, embodied in a letter addressed by Vespucci +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxxxiii">[lxxxiii]</span>himself to Lorenzo di Pier Francesco de’ Medici. +In this voyage, which occupied from May +1501 to September 1502, he was in the service of +Portugal, and explored the coasts of South America +as far as beyond the fifty-second degree. But it was +not till May, 1507, when Columbus had been a +twelvemonth dead, that the world was informed of +four voyages professed to have been made by Vespucci, +of which the one just mentioned was only the +third, the two former having been made, as he states, +in the service of Spain. As the first of these was +asserted to have taken place between May 20th, +1497, and October, 1499 [say 1498], and, if correct, +would involve the discovery by him not only of the +north coasts of South America, but a large extent of +the coast of North America also, and that in priority +of the claims both of Cabot and Columbus as regards +the discovery of the American continent, it has been +a matter of keen interest to many to examine minutely +the correctness of Vespucci’s claim to having +made this voyage.</p> + +<p>It would be out of place here to enter into the +complicated arguments in which this question is involved; +but I have elsewhere shown⁠<a id="FNanchor_20" href="#Footnote_20" class="fnanchor">[20]</a> on how frail a +tenure the claim in question is founded. In the +same place I have also traced in detail the mode +adopted for giving to the New World the name of +Vespucci instead of that of Columbus, who, by the +exercise of such transcendently superior qualities had +earned for himself that honour. I will here sketch +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxxxiv">[lxxxiv]</span>it in brief. Vespucci was an intimate friend of the +Giocondi family, one of whom, the celebrated architect, +Fra Giovanni Giocondi, who built the bridge of +Nôtre Dame at Paris, was the translator into Latin of +Vespucci’s letter to Lorenzo di Pier Francesco de’ +Medici describing his third voyage. A young Alsatian, +named Mathias Ringmann, who was at this time +pursuing his studies in Paris, appears to have made +the acquaintance of this Giocondi and to have carried +back with him into Alsace an admiration for +Vespucci and his achievements, which showed itself +in his editing at Strasbourg in 1505, Giocondi’s +translation of Vespucci’s letter, accompanied by some +laudatory verses in Latin by himself. Now in the +neighbouring province of Lorraine, one of the canons +of the cathedral at St. Dié, Walter Lud, who was +secretary to René II, Duke of Lorraine, had already +for many years established a gymnasium or college +under the duke’s auspices, and also a printing-press. +Ringmann, better known in literature by the pseudonym +of Philesius, became professor of Latin at the +college and corrector of the press in the printing-office. +On the 25th of April, 1507, <i>a year after the +death of Columbus</i>, one of the members of this little +clique, named Martin Waldseemüller, otherwise +known as Hylacomylus, produced from this press a +small work entitled <i>Cosmographiæ Introductio</i>, to +which was appended a Latin translation of Vespucci’s +four voyages, as described by himself and addressed +to Duke René II, although it can be shown +by the contents to have been really intended for +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxxxv">[lxxxv]</span>Pietro Soderini, Gonfaloniere of Florence, who had +been Vespucci’s schoolfellow. In my <i>Life of Prince +Henry the Navigator</i>, I have ventured to suggest +the process by which these letters, intended for another, +came to be addressed to Duke René, and that +suggestion supplies the solution of some riddles, there +treated of, which it would be out of place to speak of +here. We have seen the connection of the Giocondi +with Vespucci. We have seen, also, the connection of +Ringmann with the work of Fra Giovanni Giocondi +and his interest in the glory of Vespucci. This interest +he infuses into the little circle of St. Dié, and we +can imagine their pleasure at having the opportunity +of blazoning forth to the world, from their own +printing-press, a story which would throw so bright +a reflection on the obscurity of their secluded valley. +But in the little book thus issued, not only were +printed for the first time four voyages of Vespucci, +but also a suggestion was made that from his +name, Amerigo, should be given the name of “Amerige” +or “America” to the newly-discovered western +world. In September of the same year, 1507, appeared +a re-issue of the same book; and in 1509 a +new edition of it was issued from the printing-press +of Johann Grüninger of Strasburg. In this same +year, 1509, three years before the death of Vespucci, +the name of America appears, as if it were already +accepted as a well-known denomination, in an anonymous +work entitled <i>Globus Mundi</i>, printed also at +Strasburg. But although this work is anonymous, +it was my good fortune to detect from the colophon, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxxxvi">[lxxxvi]</span>in which occur the words “Adelpho Castigatore,” +that the source of the suggestion of the name of +America in the one case, and of the adoption of the +suggestion in the other, are either identical or in close +proximity, inasmuch as the already mentioned re-issue +of the <i>Cosmographiæ Introductio</i> in 1509, has in the +colophon, “Johanne Adelpho Mulicho Argentinensi +Castigatore.” Now, Mulicho merely means native of +Muhlingen, near Strasburg, and this Adelphus, so +named, was a physician established in that city, and +reviser of both the one work and the other.</p> + +<p>The first place in which we find the name of America +used a little further a-field, is in a letter dated +Vienna, 1512, from Joachim Vadianus to Rudolphus +Agricola, and inserted in the <i>Pomponius Mela</i> of +1518, edited by the former. The expression used is +“America discovered by Vesputius.”⁠<a id="FNanchor_21" href="#Footnote_21" class="fnanchor">[21]</a> But although +this Vadianus, whose real name was Joachim Watt, +writes from Vienna in 1512, I find that he was a +native of St. Gall, whence in 1508, being then twenty-four +years old, he went to the High School of Vienna. +His learned disputations and verses gained him the +chair of the professorship of the liberal arts at that +school, and he subsequently studied medicine, of +which faculty he obtained the doctorate. This attachment +to the study of medicine recalls to my mind +a fact which awakens a suspicion that he may have +been a personal friend of John Adelphus, just referred +to, and if so, of the little confraternity of St. Dié. +Before Adelphus established himself in Strasburg, he +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxxxvii">[lxxxvii]</span>had practised as a physician at Schaffhausen, and +this at the time when Joachim Watt was a young +man, still resident at St. Gall, which is distant from +Schaffhausen seventy English miles, a distance which +would offer very little hindrance to Swiss intercommunication. +Whether this suspicion be worth anything +or no, I advance it as a possible clue to yet +further researches which may show the process by +which this spurious appellation of America became +adopted, through the efforts of a small cluster of men +in an obscure corner of France.</p> + +<p>The earliest engraved map of the new world yet +known as bearing the name of America, is a mappe-monde +by Appianus, bearing the date of 1520, annexed +to the edition by Camers of the Polyhistoria +of Julius Solinus (<i>Viennæ Austr.</i>, 1520), and a +second time to the edition of <i>Pomponius Mela</i> by +Vadianus, printed at Basle in 1522. The earliest +manuscript map hitherto found bearing that name, is +in a most precious collection of drawings by the hand +of Leonardo da Vinci, now in Her Majesty’s collections +at Windsor, to which, from an examination of +its contents, I have assigned the date of 1513-14.⁠<a id="FNanchor_22" href="#Footnote_22" class="fnanchor">[22]</a></p> + +<p>I have thus endeavoured to unravel the intricate +story of a great and irreparable injustice. No one +can deny to Vespucci the credit of possessing courage, +perseverance, and a practical acquaintance with +the art of navigation; but he had never been the +commander of an expedition, and had it not been +for the great initiatory achievement of Columbus, we +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxxxviii">[lxxxviii]</span>have no reason to suppose that we should ever have +heard his name.</p> + +<p>“To say the truth,” as has been well remarked by +the illustrious Baron von Humboldt, “Vespucci shone +only by reflection from an age of glory. When compared +with Columbus, Sebastian Cabot, Bartolomé +Dias, and Da Gama, his place is an inferior one. +The majesty of great memories seems concentrated +in the name of Christopher Columbus. It is the +originality of his vast idea, the largeness and fertility +of his genius, and the courage which bore up against +a long series of misfortunes, which have exalted the +Admiral high above all his contemporaries.”</p> + +<p>A tardy tribute has been at length paid to his +memory by his fellow-citizens of Genoa, and the first +stone of a monument in commemoration of his achievements +was laid in that city on the 27th of September, +1846, and completed in 1862. There is now serious +talk of his canonization.</p> + +<p>Among the many so-called portraits of Columbus, +too numerous to be detailed here, but for elaborate +notices of which the reader is referred to the works +mentioned at foot,⁠<a id="FNanchor_23" href="#Footnote_23" class="fnanchor">[23]</a> there is not one that can be regarded +as unquestionably authentic. It was at the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_lxxxix">[lxxxix]</span>suggestion of my friend M. Ferdinand Denis, the +distinguished Librarian of the Ste. Geneviève in +Paris, that I have inserted as the frontispiece to this +volume a chromolithograph fac-simile of the St. Christopher +on the famous map of Juan de la Cosa, +Columbus’s pilot, made in 1500. My friend most +reasonably suggests that, in this case, St. Christopher +represented Christopher Columbus carrying the Christian +faith across the Atlantic, and that the face would +be a portrait. In corroboration of his idea, I may +quote the words of Herrera, whose possession of the +Columbian documents enabled him to speak with +accuracy. He says, “Columbus was tall of stature, +with a long and imposing visage. His nose was +aquiline; his eyes blue; his complexion clear, and +having a tendency to a glowing red; the beard and +hair red in his youth, but his fatigues early turned +them white.” The cap and costume seem also less +those of the saint than of the sailor. It is to my +late revered and dear friend, His Excellency the +Count de Lavradio, that I am indebted for procuring +the coloured photograph from the original map on his +visit to Madrid in 1869. The chromolithograph has +been prepared in Berlin.</p> + +<div class="footnotes"> + +<h3>FOOTNOTES:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_1" href="#FNanchor_1" class="label">[1]</a> The Society possesses, in my <i>Early Voyages to Terra Australis</i>, +printed in 1859, the evidence of these discoveries; and in +my <i>Prince Henry the Navigator</i>, published in 1868, will be seen +the procession of these discoveries from the Prince’s efforts.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_2" href="#FNanchor_2" class="label">[2]</a> The <i>li</i> is about one-tenth of the common league.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_3" href="#FNanchor_3" class="label">[3]</a> The most strenuous advocate for the truth of the tradition +that America was discovered by Prince Madoc, was Dr. John +Williams of Sydenham, who wrote two tracts on the subject +in the year 1791 and 1792, which, if betraying a little of the bias +of prejudice, yet manifest a degree of research that does great +credit to his industry and zeal.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_4" href="#FNanchor_4" class="label">[4]</a> A copy of this map is given in the second vol. of Sastre’s +<i>Mercurio Italico</i>, Lond. 1789, 8vo., and a photograph of it was +published in Venice in 1869 by H. F. and M. Münster.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_5" href="#FNanchor_5" class="label">[5]</a> The work quoted is Cordeyro’s <i>Historia Insulana das Ilhas a +Portugal sugeytas no Oceano Occidental</i>, Lisbon 1717.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_6" href="#FNanchor_6" class="label">[6]</a> For a demonstration that the discovery of the east coast of +North America was made by Sebastian Cabot in 1497, a year +before Columbus reached the terra firma, I must refer the reader +to a paper of mine read before the Society of Antiquaries on +May 5, 1870, and now being printed for the <i>Archæologia</i>.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_7" href="#FNanchor_7" class="label">[7]</a> Humboldt has fallen into an error in saying that Joachim +Lelewel, in his <i>Pisma pomniejsze geogr. historyczné</i>, 1814, has +recently called up fresh attention to this Polish pilot. The editor +has examined the work carefully from beginning to end, and does +not find the name even once mentioned, although the page to +which reference is made contains allusions to early discoveries.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_8" href="#FNanchor_8" class="label">[8]</a> A copy of this globe is given in Dr. F. W. Ghillany’s +<i>Geschichte des Seefahrers Ritter Martin Behaim</i>, Nürnberg, 1853, +4to.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_9" href="#FNanchor_9" class="label">[9]</a> <i>Historie del S. D. Fernando Colombo</i>, cap. iv.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_10" href="#FNanchor_10" class="label">[10]</a> “<i>Siendo yo nacido en Genova”; and “mando al dicho Don +Diego, mi hijo, a la persona que heredare el dicho mayorazgo que +tenga y sostenga siempre en la Ciudad de Genova una persona de +nuestro linage ... pues que della salí y en ella nací.</i>”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_11" href="#FNanchor_11" class="label">[11]</a> Another Caseneuve, probably of this family, is said by De +Bry to have been captain of the fourth expedition of the French +to Mexico, in the year 1567.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_12" href="#FNanchor_12" class="label">[12]</a> Las Casas, in his <i>History of the Indies</i>, tells us distinctly that +Columbus derived much information from Perestrello’s maps and +papers, and adds that “in order to acquaint himself practically +with the method pursued by the Portuguese in navigating to the +coast of Guinea, he sailed several times with them as if he had +been one of them.” Las Casas says that he learned this from +the admiral’s son Diego, adding that “some time before his +famous voyage Columbus resided in Madeira, where news of +fresh discoveries was constantly arriving, and this,” he says, +“appeared to have been the occasion of Christopher Columbus +coming to Spain, and the beginning of the discovery of this +great world” (America).</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_13" href="#FNanchor_13" class="label">[13]</a> Humboldt, <i>Examen Critique</i>, vol. ii, p. 246-251.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_14" href="#FNanchor_14" class="label">[14]</a> It was shortly after this period that Bartholomew Columbus +was sent by his brother to king Henry VII, to offer his services +in a voyage of navigation; the king is said to have received the +offer “con allegro volto”—“with a cheerful countenance”; but +his acceptance of the proposition was rendered null by Columbus +having in the interim attached himself to the service of +queen Isabella.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_15" href="#FNanchor_15" class="label">[15]</a> Vide <i>Athenæum</i> for 1846, page 1274.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_16" href="#FNanchor_16" class="label">[16]</a> While agreeing with Captain Becher in the identification of +Guanahani with Watling’s Island, I find that officer entirely at +issue with the Diary of Columbus in making him anchor near the +N.E. end of the island, and then sail round its northern point. +In a detailed Paper on this subject, read by me on the 16th of +September of this year, at the Meeting of the Geographical +Section of the British Association at Liverpool, I had the honour +of proving for the first time that the first anchorage of Columbus +in the New World was off the S.E. point of Watling’s Island, a +position which entirely tallies with all his movements as mentioned +in the Diary.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_17" href="#FNanchor_17" class="label">[17]</a> The following remark by Mr. George Sumner was kindly +supplied to me by that gentleman in 1847, as an interesting +item connected with this period of the history of Columbus:—</p> + +<p>From the brilliant description given by Irving and Prescott +of the arrival of Columbus at Barcelona, and of his reception +there by the Catholic sovereigns, it seemed to me as probable +that some contemporary account of this arrival and reception, as +well as of the sojourn of Columbus, might be found at Barcelona; +and, while there in the spring of 1844, I searched the admirably +arranged archives of Aragon, and also those of the city of Barcelona, +for such notice, but without any success. I could not so +much as find a mention of the name of Columbus.</p> + +<p>The <i>Dietaria</i>, or day book, of Barcelona, notices the arrival of +ambassadors, the movements of the king and queen, and even +records incidents of as trifling note as those which in our day +serve to fill the columns of a court journal; yet not a word +appears in regard to Columbus.</p> + +<p>How account for this silence? Is it another evidence of the +old feeling of jealousy between the Aragonese and Castilians, of +which the student of Spanish history meets so many proofs? +Such was the opinion to which I was forced, and such I found +also was the interpretation given to it by the intelligent Archevero, +who had himself gone over this ground a few years since +at the request of Navarrete. The voyage of Columbus was undertaken +at the expense and for the benefit of the crown of Castile. +It was not to Aragon, but to Castilla and Leon, that Columbus +gave a new world, and as the Aragonese did not profit +directly by this gift, they saw fit to treat it and its donor with +scornful silence.</p> + +<p>In one of the notes to the great work of Capmany,—<i>Memorias +sobre la ciudad de Barcelona</i>, 1789—he gives a list of distinguished +men who have enjoyed the hospitality of the city, and among +them places the name of Columbus, making no allusion however +to any contemporary account of his sojourn there.</p> + +<p>In the <i>Dietaria</i> of Barcelona, under date 15th November 1492, +is the following entry:—“The king, queen, and primogenito, +entered to-day the city, and lodged in the palace of the bishop +of Urgil in the Calle Ancha.” This is followed by a description +of the festivities which followed. “1493, 4th February.—King +and queen went to Alserrat. 14th—King and queen returned to +Barcelona.”</p> + +<p>As there appears no notice of the king having changed his +abode after taking possession of the palace in the Calle Ancha, +it was probably there that Columbus recounted to Isabella his +adventures and his success. The American pilgrim may still, in +the beautiful Alcazar of the Moorish kings, recall the figure of +the discoverer of his land, standing in the presence of the Catholic +sovereigns of Spain;—in the cotton-spinning town of Barcelona +the besom of modern improvement has long since swept away +the palace of the bishop of Urgil.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_18" href="#FNanchor_18" class="label">[18]</a> It is well known that Columbus was preceded in the discovery +of terra firma by John Cabot in 1497.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_19" href="#FNanchor_19" class="label">[19]</a> I am indebted to Mr. George Sumner for the following copy +of the inscription on the tomb of Fernando Columbus, in the +pavement of the cathedral of Seville, and for the note which +accompanies it:—</p> + +<p>“Aqui yaze el M. Magnifico S. D. Hernando Colon, el qual +aplicó y gastó toda su vida y hazienda en aumento de las letras, y +juntar y perpetuar en esta ciudad todos sus libros de todas las +ciencias, que en su tiempo halló y en reducirlo a quatro libros. +Falleció en esta ciudad a 12 de Julio de 1539 de edad de 50 años +9 meses y 14 dias, fue hijo del valeroso y memorable S. D. Christ. +Colon primero Almirante que descubrió las Yndias y nuevo +mundo en vida de los Cat. R. D. Fernando y D. Ysabel de gloriosa +memoria a 11 de Oct. de 1492 con tres galeras y 90 personas, +y partió del puerto de Palos a descubrirlas a 3 de Agosto +antes, y Bolvió a Castilla con victoria a 7 de Maio del Año Siguiente +y tornó despues otras dos veces ā poblar lo que descubrió. +Falleció en Valladolid à 20 de Agosto de 1506 años.</p> + +<p class="center allsmcap">“ROGAD A DIOS POR ELLOS.”</p> + +<p>Beneath this is described, in a circle, a globe, presenting the +western and part of the eastern hemispheres, surmounted by a +pair of compasses. Within the border of the circle is the same +inscription as that which was placed over Columbus himself at +the Cartuja, with the exception of the word “mundo” being +placed before, instead of after, the word “nuevo”.</p> + +<p>Throughout all Spain I know of no other inscription to the +memory of Columbus. At Valladolid, where he died, and where +his body lay for some years, there is none that I could discover, +neither is there any trace of any at the Cartuja, near Seville, to +which his body was afterwards transferred, and in which his +brother was buried.</p> + +<p>It is a striking confirmation of the reproach of negligence, in +regard to the memory of this great man, that in this solitary inscription +in old Spain, the date of his death should be inaccurately +given.</p> + +<p class="right"><span class="allsmcap">G. S.</span></p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_20" href="#FNanchor_20" class="label">[20]</a> See <i>Life of Prince Henry the Navigator</i>, pp. 367 to 379.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_21" href="#FNanchor_21" class="label">[21]</a> “Americam a Vespuccio repertam.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_22" href="#FNanchor_22" class="label">[22]</a> See <i>Archæologia</i>, vol. xl, 1866.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_23" href="#FNanchor_23" class="label">[23]</a> Carderera (Valentin): Informe sobre los retratos de Cristóbal +Colon, su trage y escudo de Armas. Imprenta de la Real Academia +de la historia. Madrid. 1851. Small 4to.</p> + +<p>Feuillet de Conches (F). “Portraits de Christophe Colomb,” extrait +de la Revue contemporaine, T. xxv, 95ᵐᵉ livraison in 8ᵒ, and in +the “Revue Archéologique,” an article by Mr. Isidore de Lœwenstern, +on the Mémoires of MM. Jomard et Carderera respecting +the portraits of Columbus.</p></div> + +</div> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_xc">[xc]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="A_POEM">A POEM<br> +<span class="smaller">COMPOSED BY GIULIANO DATI IN 1493,<br> +[FROM COLUMBUS’S FIRST LETTER,]<br> +<span class="smaller">And sung in Florence to announce the discovery of the New World.</span></span></h2> + +</div> + +<h3>LA LETTERA DELLISOLE CHE HA TROVATO NUOVAMENTE +IL RE DISPAGNA.</h3> + +<div class="poetry-container"> + <div class="poetry"> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Omnipotente idio, che tucto regge,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">donami gratia chio possa cantare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">allaude tua & di tu sancta legge,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">cosa che piaccia achi stara ascoltare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">maxim al popol tuo & alla tua grege,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">el qual nō resta mai magnificare,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">como al ꝕsēte ha fatto nella Spagna,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">delle isole trovate cosa magna.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Io ho gia lecto degli antichi regi</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& principi signori stanti in terra,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">del re della soria & facti egregi,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& lebactaglie loro & la gran guerra,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& delle giostre gli acquistati pregi</div> + <div class="verse indent0">di Bello lessi & selmio dir nō erra,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">de persi, medi, & degli ateniensi,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">Dāfinione & gli altri egregi immēsi.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Et de lacedemoni le grandi entrate,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">di Labores di Oreste & daltri assai,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">del Principe Gisippo cose late,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">come si legge so che inteso lhai,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">di Tholomeo piu cose smisurate,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& del gran Faraone come saprai.</div> + <div class="verse indent0">di judici & de regi de giudei,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che afaccia parlavano con lei.</div> +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xci">[xci]</span> </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Et de latini lessi, & degli albani,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& di quel fiesolano Re Atalante,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">de regi & consolati de romani,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& de tribuni lessi cose tante,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">dedeci viri electi tanti humani,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& degli īmperadori potrei dir quāte</div> + <div class="verse indent0">cose chi tengo nel mio pecto fisse.</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ꝓ che sarian nel dir troppo plisse.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">che sio volesse tucti efacti dire</div> + <div class="verse indent0">disopra nominati & altri assai,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">certo farei latua mente stupire</div> + <div class="verse indent0">maximi alcuni che nō ludiron mai,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">q̃ste cose alte degne magne et mire</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che se tu leggi tu letroverrai</div> + <div class="verse indent0">invernacula lingua & ī latino,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">si come narra un decto dagostino.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Ma chi potessi leggere nel futuro</div> + <div class="verse indent0">duno Alexādro magno papa sexto,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">della sua creatione il modo puro,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">grato a ciascūo anessū mai molesto,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& del primanno suo il magno muro,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che nō glipuo nessuno esser infesto</div> + <div class="verse indent0">sesto alexādro pappa borgia ispano,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">justo nel giudicare & tucto humano.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Et chi leggesi poi del sua Ferrādo</div> + <div class="verse indent0">christianissimo rege xꝕiani</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che lisabella tiene al suo comādo,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">unica sposa sua, che nelle mani</div> + <div class="verse indent0">tanti reami indota allui donando,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">gliha dati ītendi ben cō pēsier sani,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che glie re della spagna & di castella</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& di leon tolecto villa bella.</div> +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xcii">[xcii]</span> </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Simile re di cordube chiamato,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& poi dimutia re mipar che sia</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& digalitia re incoronato,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">dalgarbe re & tienla in sua balia,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">re digranata sai che conquistato</div> + <div class="verse indent0">diragona signor & divalēzia pia</div> + <div class="verse indent0">conte mipar che sia dibarzalona,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& disicilia re isola buona.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Di quāta altura principe mipare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& disardigna tien la signoria,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& di corsica sifa simil chiamare,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">di q̃lla parte che glha in sua balia</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& conte di serdeina appellare,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& dirosello conte par che sia</div> + <div class="verse indent0">simile re mi pare che dimaiorica,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">l’altro reame e poi della minorica.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Et poi signor dibiscaia & molina,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">delalsesiras signor chiamato,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">dellasturias terra peregrina,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ꝓ tucto il mondo q̃sto e nominato,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">tucto fedele della legge divina,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">chi altro crede e mal dallui trattato</div> + <div class="verse indent0">come sivede che nō e mai satio,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">dimarrani giudei far ogni stratio.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Pero il signore lha semꝕ īvicto facto,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che si puo uno agusto nominare,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ogni sua lega triegua legge o pacto,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">mai nō sividde dallui maculare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">lui nō derise mai savio ne macto</div> + <div class="verse indent0">limosine per dio sempre fa fare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">della chiesa zeloso a tucte lhore</div> + <div class="verse indent0">come fedel, xꝕiano, & pio signore.</div> +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xciii">[xciii]</span> </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Come mōstra lamagna ābascieria,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che glha mandato adar lubidiēza</div> + <div class="verse indent0">al suo sesto Alexādro anima pia</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che mai sivide tal magnificenza</div> + <div class="verse indent0">in tucte cose la sua signoria</div> + <div class="verse indent0">dimōstrā aver fra gli altri grā potēza</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ī q̃sti magni ābascidor sispechi</div> + <div class="verse indent0">chi nol credessi nōcti ꝕsti orecchi.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Se io volessi e sua titoli dire,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">o auditore io ti potrei tediare,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">de sua reame io ti farei stupire,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">sol que che lisabelela volse dare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">indota a q̃sto Re o questo sire,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">quando luso ꝓ marito pigliare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">q̃sta isabella e dispagna Regina,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">honesta doña savia & peregrina.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Hor vo tornar almio primo tractato</div> + <div class="verse indent0">dellisole trovate incognite a te</div> + <div class="verse indent0">in q̃sto anno presente q̃sto e stato</div> + <div class="verse indent0">nel millequatrocento novātatre,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">uno che xꝕofan colōbo chiamato,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che e stato in corte del prefato Re</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ha molte volte questo stimolato,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">el Re ch’cerchi acrescere il suo stato.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Dicendo, signor mio, io vo cercare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ꝓ che comprēdo che ce molta terra</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che nostri antichi nō seppō trovare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& spero dacquistarle senza guerra,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">se vostra signoria si vuol degnare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ajuto darmi che so que non erra</div> + <div class="verse indent0">lamente mia spera nel signore</div> + <div class="verse indent0">chimbrieve cidara rengo & honore.</div> +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xciv">[xciv]</span> </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Voi mectetē la roba io la persona</div> + <div class="verse indent0">non sara vostra signoria disfacta,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ispesse volte la fortuna dona</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ꝓ picol prezo assai & non e macta</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che sua sperāza tucto il mōdo sprona</div> + <div class="verse indent0">savio e colui che dicercar sadacta</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ꝑ che dice elvāgelio ī legge nuova</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che chicercādo va spesso truova.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Hō poi ch’ lebbe ilre piu volte udito</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& facto carisposta sorridendo</div> + <div class="verse indent0">xꝕofano ripigliando come ardito</div> + <div class="verse indent0">q̃sto āno il re secōdo ch’ io cōprēdo</div> + <div class="verse indent0">prese di dargli aiuto per partito</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& disse il tuo sperare oggi cōmēdo</div> + <div class="verse indent0">piglia una nave cō due carovelle</div> + <div class="verse indent0">di q̃ste mie armate le piu belle.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Et comādo de poi che gli sia dato</div> + <div class="verse indent0">danari & roba q̃l che fa mestiero,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& poi dimolta gēte acompagnato</div> + <div class="verse indent0">divotamente & cō buō pensiero,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">al sommo dio che fu racomandato,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& alla madre sua & sancto piero,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& prese q̃ste cose, & poi licentia</div> + <div class="verse indent0">dalre & laregina & sua clementia.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Et navico piu giorni per perduto,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">cō pena, con affanni & grāde stento,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">pensa che na in mare no e mai tuto,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ma semꝕ cōbactēdo ī acqua & uēto</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ꝓdesi spesso elguadagno eltrebuto,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& nōgli gioua dire io menepento</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ma come piacqꝫ adio ch’ mai nōerra</div> + <div class="verse indent0">in trentatre giornate pose in terra.</div> +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xcv">[xcv]</span> </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Et messe dua desua huomini armati</div> + <div class="verse indent0">a cercar ꝑle terre che han trouate,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">seforce siscoprissin qualche aguati,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ma caminaron ben per tre giornate</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che nōsi furon mai indrieto uolti,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& nō trouaron mai uille o brigate,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">si che simarauiglia che camina</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& piu chi e restato alla marina.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Ma niēte di manco quella terra</div> + <div class="verse indent0">era di uari fructi molto ornata,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">se chi ha scripto i qua neldir nōerra,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">mōtagne e ue daltura ismisurata,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& molti fiumi lacircūda & serra,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">doue trouorun poi molta brigata,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">sēza pāni, uestite, o arme, o scudi</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ma tucti emēbri loro si erano nudi.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Saluo chalcuna donna che coperte</div> + <div class="verse indent0">tiene leparte genitale immonde,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">cō bambagia tessuta, & di po certe</div> + <div class="verse indent0">lhauen coperte con diuerse frōde,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& come uidon questi lediserte</div> + <div class="verse indent0">forte fuggendo ciascun fina scōde,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& questi dua in drieto si tornauano,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& axꝕofano lo facto racontauano.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Et xꝕofano & glialtri dismontati</div> + <div class="verse indent0">armati tucti il paese cercando</div> + <div class="verse indent0">isole molte & huomini trouati</div> + <div class="verse indent0">come tu intenderai qui ascoltando</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& glistendardi del Re ha rizati,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& a ciascuno il suo nome mutando,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">come dira questa pistola magna,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">da xꝕofano scripta al Re di spagna.</div> +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xcvi">[xcvi]</span> </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Perchio so, signor mio, ch’ grā piacer̃</div> + <div class="verse indent0">hara la uostra magna signoria</div> + <div class="verse indent0">quando potra intendere o sapere,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">delle cose che io presi in mia balia,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ꝑ uirtu del signore & suo potere,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& simil della madre sua maria,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">dal partir mio a trētatre giornate,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">molte isole & grā gēte iho trouate.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Lisola prima chio trouai, signore,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">io lho ꝑ nome facta nominare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">isola magna di san Saluadore,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& la seconda poi feci chiamare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">conceptio Marie a suo honore,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">di poi laterza feci baptezare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">per uostra signoria ch’ tāto ornata</div> + <div class="verse indent0">isola ferrandina lho nominata,</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Et la quarta Isabella fo chiamare,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ꝑ la Regina che tānto honorata,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& alla quinta il nome uolsi dare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che lisola Giouanna fia chiamata,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& la festa dun nome uolsi ornare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che cōgruo miparse a q̃lla fiata,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che Laspagnuola qlla sichiamasse,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">per che mipar che cosi meritasse.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Enomi son dellisole trouate</div> + <div class="verse indent0">nel india, signor mio, como uiscriuo,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& questa & laltre sopra nominate</div> + <div class="verse indent0">notitia auoi nedo signor mio diuo</div> + <div class="verse indent0">trecēto uc̄tun miglio ho caminate,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& peruenuto alfin colsancto uliuo</div> + <div class="verse indent0">dalla giouāna alla spagnuola elmar̃</div> + <div class="verse indent0">cīquātaquattro miglia largo apare.</div> +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xcvii">[xcvii]</span> </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Et per septentrione lanauicai</div> + <div class="verse indent0">cinquantaquattro miglia dimarina,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">doue che alla spagna io arriuai,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">inuerso loriente sauicina,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& per lalinea recta io caminai</div> + <div class="verse indent0">da onde la spagnuola li confina</div> + <div class="verse indent0">son c̄iquecēsessantaquattro miglia,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">e lalargheza che q̄sta isola piglia.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Et q̄sta & tucte laltre e molto forte,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ma q̄sta sopra laltre par fortissima,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">potresi inanzi dare a tucte morte</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ch’ una parte sacquisti piccolissima,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">certo questo eildestino qsto e lesorte,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ch’ uostra signoria fan felicissima,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">e dotata di fructi molte & uarie,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& liti, & porti, & cose necessarie,</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Et molti fiumi, & maxime mōtagne,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che son dalteza molto smisurate,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">arbori, fonte, uccegli, & cose magne,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">chauostri tempi no san mai trouate,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">certo lamente mia signor ne piagne,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">per lalegreza delle cose ornate,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">di tucte cose cie se io non erro,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">saluo ch’ nōsi truoua acciaio o ferro.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Sonci di septe o uer docto ragioni</div> + <div class="verse indent0">di palme che mifan marauigliare,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& se alzando gliocchi poni</div> + <div class="verse indent0">pini uison che laria par toccare,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">passere lusignuoli & altri doni,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che nonsi potre mai tucto narrare,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">della bambagia un pondo ce infinito</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& daltre cose assai ce inquesto lito.</div> +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xcviii">[xcviii]</span> </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Arbori cison duna ragion fioriti</div> + <div class="verse indent0">del mese di novembre chenoi siano</div> + <div class="verse indent0">come ī ispagna, & ne suo degno liti,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">liarberi sō elmagio, elmōte, elpiano,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">si che no altri stiano tucti stupiti</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ꝑ labōdantia che trouata habbiano,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">sonci gli arberi uerdi & and lelor foglie,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">chi credo che nō pdā mai lespoglie.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Di reubarbaro ce tanta abōdantia,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& dicenamo daltra spetieria,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">loro & largento, el metallo ciauāza,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">maxime un fiume che per q̃sta uia,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che nō puo questa terra farne senza,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">doue ho trouato cō mia fantasia,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che dimoltoro e piena quella rena,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">sicome lacqua di quel fiume mena.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Simil, signore, io uiuoglio auisare,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che inq̄stisola ce molta pianura,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">doue difizi molti sipuon fare,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& castelle cipta cō magne mura,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che nō bisogna poi di dubitare,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ne dhauer chi cista nulla paura,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">molte terre cison da feminare,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& depascer lebestie & nutricare.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Ho po trouati certi fiumicelli,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ch’ tucti menano oro & nō gia poco,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& molti porti grādi & da far belli,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che abōdanza ce dacqua diloco,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">lherbe & leselue facte co pennelli</div> + <div class="verse indent0">nō son si belle & nō cisusa foco,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">glhuomini sono affabile formati,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">timidi semꝕ & alfuggir parati.</div> +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_xcix">[xcix]</span> </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Sonci assai uille ma son picoolecte,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">dhuomini & dōne son tucte calcate,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">glihabitacoli qui son capānecte</div> + <div class="verse indent0">semplici sono & credule brigate,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& ben che sieno nudi stāno necte,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">si che signor dibuona uoglia state,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& credon che no siā di cielo ī terra,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">mādati per cāpargli dogni guerra.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Portano alcun certe cāne appuntate,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">socto lebraccia come noi lespade,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">archi cō frecce dicanne tagliate,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& uāno īsieme assai come lesquadr̃</div> + <div class="verse indent0">di capegli & di barbe molto ornate,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">nō son micidial persone o ladre,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ma tucto q̃l ch’ glhiāno ī lor potere</div> + <div class="verse indent0">celodarebbon ꝓ farci piacere.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Et parmi che cifia grā diferenza</div> + <div class="verse indent0">da questa isola a q̃lla di Giouāna</div> + <div class="verse indent0">darbori, fructi, and dherbe & diꝕsēza,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">nōci manca senon la sancta māna,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">doro ce tanto cha uostra potenza</div> + <div class="verse indent0">chi guerra far sipensa ī uan safāna</div> + <div class="verse indent0">oltre alla roba acquistate lhonore,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">tucti son prōti acreder al signore.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Questi popoli grādi & infiniti,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">come ꝑ segni ciāno dimōstrato,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ledōne & lor figluoli & lor mariti</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ciascuno spera desser baptezato,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">priego il signor iesu che puo glīuiti</div> + <div class="verse indent0">apossedere el suo regno beato</div> + <div class="verse indent0">di quāto ben cagion signor sarete</div> + <div class="verse indent0">coluostro auxilio che dato mhauete.</div> +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_c">[c]</span> </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Iho menati qui certi indiani</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ch’ cōprēdā di q̃sta alcun līguaggio</div> + <div class="verse indent0">tal che parlando con cēni dimani</div> + <div class="verse indent0">q̃lcū diq̃sti ch’e piu sperto & saggio</div> + <div class="verse indent0">dicon di farsi a noi tucti xꝕiani</div> + <div class="verse indent0">tal chiho ꝕso signor mio uātaggio</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& di legname una bastia fo fare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& lagente uimecto per guardare.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Et forniti glilascio per uno anno</div> + <div class="verse indent0">darme diuectouaglia ben chi spero</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che nō haranno molestia ne dāno</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ꝑ che gli lascio cō un buon pensiero,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">humili mansueti tucti stanno,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">sich’ auxilio iluostro signor chiero,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">mandimi uostra signoria piacente</div> + <div class="verse indent0">allaude del signore omnipotente.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Chi nō uede signor lisole degne,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& lericheze o nobil creatura,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& lauarieta darbori & legne,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& deglhuomini & dōne lor figura,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">nō sa ch’ sia delmōdo lesue ī segne,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">chi nō esce delcerchio di sua mura,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">nō puo perfectamente idio laudare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">chi nō gusta lecose che sa fare.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Signor mio dolce, lapiaceuoleza</div> + <div class="verse indent0">di q̃sta gente io non saprei narrare,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">per una stringa che poco sipreza</div> + <div class="verse indent0">uolson tanto oro aun diquesti dare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ch’ tre ducati & mezo o che richeza</div> + <div class="verse indent0">hare potuto inqueste parte fare,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ma io ho comādato alla mia gente</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che ciascun doni & nō pigli niēte.</div> +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_ci">[ci]</span> </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Per far lor grata uostra signoria</div> + <div class="verse indent0">dimolta roba io ho facto donare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">di quella dimie gente & della mia,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">come scodelle & piacti damāgiare,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& uetri & pauni chera in mia balia,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">senza riserbo alcuno per me fare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ꝓ chio glho conosciuti tante grati,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">iglho come fedeli & buō tractati.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Vero e ch’ sono assai prōti alfugire</div> + <div class="verse indent0">per che non sono usati di uedere</div> + <div class="verse indent0">gente che usin panni da uestire,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ma per che uegan noi tucto sapere,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ciascun diloro ciadora come sire,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& lalor roba da mangiare o bere,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">nō ho ueduto fare ne tuo ne mio,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ma lauita comune alparer mio.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Volsano ancora ꝓ una bocte trista,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& per un pezo darco che nō uale,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">tre once doro darmi & similmista,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">tanta bambagia che mezo quintale,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ma poi chi hebbi questa cosa uista</div> + <div class="verse indent0">parsemi dipigliar niente male,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& ho cōmesso aciaschedun de mia</div> + <div class="verse indent0">chedipigliare niente ardito sia.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Nō e fra loro alcuna briga o secta,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ma pacifici tucti insieme stanno,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">di parole & ni facti mai saspecta,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">di far uēdecta alcūa īgiuria o dāno,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">beato a q̃llo che seguir sidilecta,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">acompagnati abraccio semꝕ uāno,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">io glho uisti si buoni recti & grati,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che abuō fine idio glhara chiamati.</div> +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cii">[cii]</span> </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Nō e fra loro idolatria nessuna,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">tucti lemani al ciel tengono alzate,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">nō adoran pianeti, o sole, o luna,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ma lelor mente al ciel tucte leuate.</div> + <div class="verse indent0">dicon la gloria ī ciel esser sol una,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">dellaqual patria credon ch’ mādate</div> + <div class="verse indent0">lenostre barche siano & noi ī terra,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">a far pace colciel dogni lor guerra.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Io nho cō meco semꝕ alcū menato</div> + <div class="verse indent0">equali feci per forza pigliare,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">q̃ndo alprīcipio ī terra fui smōtato,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">non potendo inaltra forma fare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">pelueloce fuggir mai ascoltato</div> + <div class="verse indent0">nō era lemie uoci olmio parlare,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& q̃sti che per forza allhor pigliai,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">son per amor uenuti sempre mai.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Semꝕ mangiare, o bere, & adormire,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">acanto a me io glho si ben tractati,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ch’ gliaferman ꝑ certo & usan dire</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ch’ dalregno del ciel no siā mādati,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">uanocci inanzi gridando uenire,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">debba ciascuno auedere ebeati,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">si chalpresente ognū corre auedere</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& portan tucti damāgîare & bere.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Da luna isola allaltra q̃sti uāno</div> + <div class="verse indent0">cō certe barche che inquesta isola e,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">lequal dun legno solo facte stanno,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& son chiamate queste canoe,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">sō lūghe strecte & par quasi uolādo</div> + <div class="verse indent0">andare achiunche messo dētro ce,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">bench’ sien grossamente lauorate</div> + <div class="verse indent0">cō sassi & legni & ossi son cauate.</div> +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_ciii">[ciii]</span> </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Et hōne uista alcuna tāto grāde</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che octanta persone cista dentro,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& ciascūo hal suo remo & leumāde</div> + <div class="verse indent0">nauica q̃sti & con buon sētimeto</div> + <div class="verse indent0">la roba luno allaltro li sispande</div> + <div class="verse indent0">q̃l chio uscriuo signor nulla mēto</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& uanno baractando tucti quāti</div> + <div class="verse indent0">come sefussin quasi mercatanti.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Inqueste isole tucte nominate</div> + <div class="verse indent0">nō ho ueduta nulla differenza</div> + <div class="verse indent0">dincarnati diuisi o dibrigate,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ma tucti quasi son duna presenza</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& dun cōstume tucti cōstumate</div> + <div class="verse indent0">huomini & dōne sō pie dicremēza,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">tucti hāno una loquela & un parlar̃</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che uifarē, signor, marauigliare.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Che par che util cosa questa sia</div> + <div class="verse indent0">acōuerrirgli a nostra sancta fede.</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che come scriuo auostra signoria</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ciascun disposto ce, & gia lacrede</div> + <div class="verse indent0">dique che han uista lapresenza mia</div> + <div class="verse indent0">no glho tucti ueduti de siuede</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ch’glie margior giouāna senza sotia</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che nōe linghilterra con lascotia.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Son duo ꝓuincie chio nō ho certate,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">secondo che q̄sti altri decto hāno,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">una cene la qual queste brigate.</div> + <div class="verse indent0">dican che quelle gente che uistāno</div> + <div class="verse indent0">son con le code tucte quante nate</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& Anaan elnome posto lehanno,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">poi caminai ꝓ la spagnuola ciglia</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ꝑ cinquecēsessantoquattro miglia.</div> +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_civ">[civ]</span> </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Doue e lauilla laqual io pigliai,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">doue io feci larocca o uer bastia</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che la piu bella che io uedessi mai,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">come iho scripto a uostra signoria</div> + <div class="verse indent0">non miricorda se adir uimandai</div> + <div class="verse indent0">inquesta brieue epistolecta mia</div> + <div class="verse indent0">elnōe ch’ io lho posto & forse auisto</div> + <div class="verse indent0">natiuita del nostro Iesus Xꝕo.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">In queste isole tucti questi stāno</div> + <div class="verse indent0">contenti duna dōna ciascheduno,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ma q̄sti principali tucti mhanno</div> + <div class="verse indent0">uēti lequal son date lor per uno.</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& luno allaltro mai torto nō fanno,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che a cio far nō ce pronto nessuno,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& nelle cose tucte da mangiare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">nulla diuision uiueggo fare.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Et ben che i q̄ste parti caldo sia,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">lastate eluerno ce digran freddura,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ma ꝑ che mangiā molta spetieria</div> + <div class="verse indent0">lacarne loro alfreddo molto dura</div> + <div class="verse indent0">inquesta parte nulla cosa ria,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">sitruoua diche questi habbin paura,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">saluo che ce unisola allentrare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">dellindia per uoler qui arriuare.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">In nella quale sta gente uillana</div> + <div class="verse indent0">da q̄sti nō mipar che siano amati,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ꝑ ch’ dice māgiā carne humana,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">pero nō son da questi qui prezati,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">hanno assai legni q̄sta gente strana,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">da nauicare & hanno gia rubati,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">aquesti di scorrendo dogni banna</div> + <div class="verse indent0">cō archi ī mano & cō frecce dicāna.</div> +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cv">[cv]</span> </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Non e da q̄sti a quegli differenza,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">senō innecapegli che q̄gli hanno</div> + <div class="verse indent0">lunghi come ledōne & dipresenza</div> + <div class="verse indent0">son come q̄sti & fāno molto dāno,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">aq̄ste ch’ son ꝑpro essa clemenza,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">si che ingelosia sempre nestanno,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ma spero che lauosira signoria</div> + <div class="verse indent0">sapra purgare una tal maltaia.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Una isola cie decta mactanino,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">nella qual le donne sole stanno,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& questo iniquo popol glie uicino,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& ausar con q̄ste spesso uanno,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ma q̄sto popol tucto feminino</div> + <div class="verse indent0">exercitio di dōne mai nō fanno,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ma cō gliarchi trahēdo tuctauia,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che par per cerbo una grā fantasia.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Et uanno queste ben tucte coperte,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">nō gia di pāni lini, o lani, o ueli,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ma derbe & giūchi, & q̄ste cose certe</div> + <div class="verse indent0">son che di qua nq̃e lēzuoli o teli</div> + <div class="verse indent0">unaltra isola poi legente offerte,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">femine & maschi nascō senza peli,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">manzi uoglia cōfuso esser nel dire</div> + <div class="verse indent0">chi uoglia alcuna cosa preterire.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Et dove q̄sti senza peli sono,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">piu oro cie chihabbia ācor trouata</div> + <div class="verse indent0">di q̄l chi scriuo o parlando ragiono,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">signore, io ne son ben giustificato</div> + <div class="verse indent0">auostra signoria un magno dono</div> + <div class="verse indent0">iho per portar meco preparato</div> + <div class="verse indent0">di tucti q̄sti luoghi iuo menare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">gente che possin cio testificare.</div> +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cvi">[cvi]</span> </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Pero, giusto signor, di Spagna degno,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">stia uostra signoria dibuona uoglia</div> + <div class="verse indent0">chīho cresciuto tāto iluostro regno,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ch’ chi ua īuida po crepar didoglia</div> + <div class="verse indent0">doro & dargento passarete el segno</div> + <div class="verse indent0">tel ch’ trarra elnimico di sua soglia,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ma q̃l chi so ch’ molto piu prezate</div> + <div class="verse indent0">son queste gēte a xꝕo preparate.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Reubarbero assai & aloe,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">Mastice, cinamono, & spetierie,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">tanta richeza, signor mio, qui e</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che discaccia da me leuoglie rie,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">piu allegreza, signor mio, fare,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">si fussi certo che per tucte uie</div> + <div class="verse indent0">q̃sta scripta uenissi asaluamento</div> + <div class="verse indent0">nel mōdo no sare huom piu-cōtēto.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Nō miacascaltro degno mio signore</div> + <div class="verse indent0">scriuere auostra magna signoria,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">raccomandomi a q̃lla a tucte lhore,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">laqual cōserui ilfigluol di Maria</div> + <div class="verse indent0">parato semꝕmai per uostro amore</div> + <div class="verse indent0">amecter q̃sta breue uita mia</div> + <div class="verse indent0">aquindici de febraio q̃sta sife</div> + <div class="verse indent0">nel mille quattrocento nouāta tre.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Magnifici & discreti circūstanti</div> + <div class="verse indent0">q̃sta e gran cosa certo da pensare,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ch’l nostro redēptor̃ cō tucti esancti</div> + <div class="verse indent0">nō resta mai legratie sue mandare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">douerebbon di q̃sto tucti quanti</div> + <div class="verse indent0">ebaptizati a x̃po festa fare,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">chi ue chi uimādo & chi ue andato</div> + <div class="verse indent0">prepari dio alsuo regno beato.</div> +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cvii">[cvii]</span> </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Questa ha cōposto de dati Giuliano</div> + <div class="verse indent0">apreghiera del magno caualiere</div> + <div class="verse indent0">messer Giouanphilippo ciciliano,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che fu di Sixto quarto suo scudiere</div> + <div class="verse indent0">& commessario suo & capitano,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">a q̄lle cose che fur di mestiere</div> + <div class="verse indent0">allaude del signor sicanta & dice</div> + <div class="verse indent0">che ciconduca al suo regno felice.</div> + </div> + </div> +</div> + +<p class="center">¶ FINIS LAUS DEO.</p> + +<p class="center">¶ Finita lastoria della īuētione delle nuoue isole dicānaria<br> +īdiane tracte duna pistola dixꝕofano colōbo, & ꝓmesser<br> +Giuliano dati tradocta dilatino ī uersi uulgari allaude<br> +della christiana religione & aꝕghiera delmagnifico<br> +caualiere messer Giouāfilippo del ignamine<br> +domestico familiare dello illustrissimo<br> +Redispagna xꝕianissimo a<br> +di. xxvi. doctobre.<br> +14.93.</p> + +<p class="center"><i>Florentie.</i></p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_cviii">[cviii]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="BIBLIOGRAPHY">BIBLIOGRAPHY.</h2> + +</div> + +<p>In this bibliographical notice I do not propose to +deal with any editions of the first letter of Columbus +beyond the “Incunabula,” which I arrange in the +order of their publication, as ascertained from an +examination of the documents themselves.</p> + +<blockquote> + +<p>1. ¶ Epistola Christofori Colom: cui etas nostra multū +debet: de | Insulis Indie supra Gangem nuper inuētis. Ad +quas perqꝫren- | das octauo antea mense auspiciis & ere invictissimor’ +Fernādi & | Helisabet Hispaniar’ Regū missus +fuerat: ad magnificum dñm | Gabrielem Sanchis eorundē +serenissimor’ Regum Tesaurariū | missa: quā nobilis ac +litteratus vir Leander de Cosco ab Hispa | no ideomate in +latinum cōuertit tertio kal’s Maii m.cccc.xciii | Pontificatus +Alexandri Sexti Anno primo.</p> + +</blockquote> + +<p>Small 4to. This edition, which, as I shall presently +show, is the <i>editio princeps</i>, was printed by Stephen +Plannck at Rome in 1493. It consists of four leaves, +printed in gothic type, and has 33 lines in a full page. +Copies are in the Grenville and King’s Libraries in +the British Museum.</p> + +<blockquote> + +<p>2. ¶ Epistola Christofori Colom: cui etas nostra multum +debet: de | Insulis Indie supra Gangem nuper inuētis. Ad +quas perquiren | das octauo antea mense auspiciis & ere +inuictissimorum Fernandi | ac Helisabet Hispaniar’ Regū +missus fuerat: ad Magnificū dñm | Gabrielem Sanches: +eorundem serenissimorum Regum Tesau | rariū missa: Quā +generosus ac litteratus vir Leander de Cosco ab | Hispano +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cix">[cix]</span>idiomate in latinū cōuertit: tertio Kalen’ Maij M.cccc. | +xc.iij. Pontificatus Alexandri Sexti Anno Primo. | 4to.</p> + +<p>End:—¶ Impressit Rome Eucharius Argenteus [Silber] +Anno dñi. M.ccccxciij.</p> + +</blockquote> + +<p>Three leaves, printed in gothic letter. 40 lines in +a page. A copy is in the Grenville Library.</p> + +<blockquote> + +<p>3. ¶ Epistola Christofori Colom: cui etas nostra multū +debet: de | Insulis Indie supra Gangem nuper inuentis. Ad +quas perqui | rendas octauo antea mense auspicijs & ere +invictissimi Fernan | di Hispaniarum Regis missus fuerat: +ad Magnificum dñum Ra | phaelem Sanxis: eiusdem serenissimi +Regis Tesaurariū missa: | quam nobilis ac litteratus +vir Aliander de Cosco ab Hispano | ideomate in latinum +conuertit: tertio kal’s Maij. M.cccc.xciij. | Pontificatus +Alexandri Sexti Anno Primo.</p> + +</blockquote> + +<p>Small 4to. Gothic letter; four leaves, 34 lines in +a full page. This edition is supposed to have been +printed by Stephen Plannck at Rome, about 1493. +3 or 4 copies are known; two are in the General +Library and Grenville Library, British Museum.</p> + +<blockquote> + +<p>4. De Insulis inuentis | Epistola Cristoferi Colom (cui etas +nostra | multū debet: de Insulis in mari Indico nup’ | +inuētis. Ad quas perquirendas octauo antea | mense: auspicijs +et ere Invictissimi Fernandi | Hispaniarum Regis +missus fuerat | ad Magnificum dñm Raphaeleꝫ Sanxis: +eiusdē sere | nissimi Regis Thesaurariū missa. quam +nobi | lis ac litterat’ vir Aliander đ Cosco: ab His | pano +ydeomate in latinū conuertit: tercio k’ls | Maij. M.cccc.xciij. +Pontificatus Alexandri | Sexti Anno Primo.</p> + +</blockquote> + +<p>Small 8vo. Gothic character; ten leaves, 26 and 27 +lines in a page. The title above given is preceded +by a leaf bearing on the recto the arms of Spain, +“Regnū hyspanie”—on the verso the cut of the +“Oceanica Classis”. There are 6 woodcuts—the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cx">[cx]</span>“Oceanica Classis”, being repeated. A copy is in +the Grenville Library.</p> + +<blockquote> + +<p>5. Epistola de insulis de | nouo repertis. Impressa | +parisius in cāpo gaillardi.</p> + +</blockquote> + +<p>Small 4to. Gothic letter; four leaves, 39 lines in a +full page. This edition was printed by Guy Marchand +about 1494. Brunet states that the only copy known +is that formerly belonging to M. Ternaux-Compans, +now the property of Mr. John Carter Brown.</p> + +<p>This edition was reprinted in 1865, “Lettre de +Christophe Colomb sur la découverte du Nouveau-Monde, +publiée d’après la rarissime version latine +conservée à la Bibliothèque Impériale. Traduite en +Français, commentée et enrichie de notes puisées aux +sources originales par Lucien de Rosny. 8vo., Paris, +1865.”</p> + +<blockquote> + +<p>6. Epistola de Insulis noui | ter repertis. Impressa +parisius In campo gaillardi.</p> + +</blockquote> + +<p>Small 4to. Gothic letter; four leaves, 39 lines in a +page. The above title is in two lines, the first printed +in a larger character. Underneath is the device of the +printer, “Guiot Marchant”—two cobblers at work, +one cutting the leather, the other making it up. +This edition was printed by Guy Marchand at Paris, +about 1494.</p> + +<p>A copy is in the Bodleian Library. A fac-simile +made by Mr. John Harris, sen., is in the British +Museum; the impression was limited to five copies.</p> + +<p>All the foregoing editions have at the end the +Latin Epigram in eight verses of R. L. de Corbatia, +(a pseudonym for Leonardus de Carninis, Bishop +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxi">[cxi]</span>of Monte Peloso in Naples). In this edition, below +the epigram, on the same page, is a woodcut +of the Angel appearing to the Shepherds. Mr. +Lenox has given a fac-simile of this in the Appendix +to <i>Syllacius</i>. The title on the recto of the following +leaf (sig. a, ij) is the same as in the Roman editions, +having the name of Ferdinand without that of +Isabella. It ends with the words: “Vale. Ulisbone +pridie Idus Marcij.”</p> + +<p>A “pictorial” edition of the Latin letter, in 4to., +was printed in 1494. It is appended to a work by +Carolus Verardus, “In laudem Serenissimi Ferdinandi +Hispaniar’ regis.... Et de Insulis in mari Indico nuper +inuentis.”</p> + +<p>The work is printed on fifteen pages in Roman characters, +and probably at Basle, by B. de Olpe. The +woodcuts are the same as those used in the small +8vo. edition printed about 1493 (see No. 4).</p> + +<p>No sooner did this letter make its appearance in +print in the year 1493, than the narrative it contained +was put forth in Italian ottava rima by Giuliano +Dati, one of the most popular poets of the day; +and there is reason to believe that it was sung about +the streets to announce to the Italians the astounding +news of the discovery of a new world. (See <i>ante</i>, <a href="#Page_xc">p. xc</a>.)</p> + +<p>The only copy of this curious and valuable poem +known at the time of the issue of the first edition of +this work in 1847 is that which I now reprint.</p> + +<blockquote> + +<p>¶ La lettera dellisole che ha trouato nuovamente il Re +dispagna.</p> + +<p>End:</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxii">[cxii]</span></p> + +<p>¶ Finita lastoria della iuētione del | le nuoue isole dicānaria +īdiane trac | te duna pistola dixp̃ofano colōbo & | +ꝑmesser Giuliano dati tradocta di la | tino ī uersi uulgari +allaude della ce | lestiale corte & aconsolatione della | +christiana religione & ap̃ghiera del magnifico caualiere +messer Giouā | filippo del ignamine domestico fa | mīliare +dello illustrissimo Re dispa | gna xp̃ianīssimo a di. xxvi. +docto | bre. 14.93. Florentie.</p> + +</blockquote> + +<p>4to. Printed in Roman characters on four leaves, in +double columns. The poem consists of 68 stanzas in +<i>ottava rima</i>. Beneath the single-line title is a woodcut +representing the landing of Columbus, and King +Ferdinand seated on his throne on the <i>opposite shore</i>. +This is the only copy known.</p> + +<p>Since 1847 another edition has been acquired by +the British Museum, bearing the following title:—</p> + +<blockquote> + +<p>¶ Questa e la hystoria della inuentiōe delle diese Isole +di Cannaria In | diane extracte duna Epistola di Christofano +Colombo & per messer Giu | liano Dati traducta +de latino in uersi uulgari a laude e gloria della cele | +stiale corte & a consolatione della christiana religiōe & +apreghiera del ma | gnifico Caualier miser Giouanfilippo +Delignamine domestico familia | re dello Sacratissimo Re +di spagna Christianissimo a di. xxv. doctobre. | +M.cccclxxxxiii. |</p> + +<p>End: <span class="smcap">Finis</span></p> + +<p class="center">Joannes dictus Florentinus.</p> + +</blockquote> + +<p>4to. Printed in gothic characters, in double +columns, and, without doubt, at Florence. A complete +copy should contain four leaves. The copy in +the British Museum, the only one of this edition +hitherto discovered, is, unfortunately, deficient in two +leaves—viz., the second and the third. It is printed +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxiii">[cxiii]</span>in a very rude type on coarse paper, and was evidently +a popular edition, sold at a very small price. +This edition presents many variations from the other, +both in the orthography and language; <i>e.g.</i>, the +opening stanza, which may be compared with that +given in the present edition.</p> + +<div class="poetry-container"> + <div class="poetry"> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">LOīpotente idio ch’l tulto regge</div> + <div class="verse indent0">mi presti gr̃a chi possa cantare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">allaude sua e di sua sancta legge</div> + <div class="verse indent0">cosa che piaza achi stara ascoltare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">maxime alpopul suo & a sua gregge</div> + <div class="verse indent0">elqual non cessa mai magnificare</div> + <div class="verse indent0">come al presente afacto nela spagna</div> + <div class="verse indent0">delle isole trouate cosa magna.</div> + </div> + </div> +</div> + +<p>This edition omits the final stanza, which is little +else than the colophon of the other versified:—</p> + +<blockquote> + +<p class="center">Questa ha cōposta de’ dati Giuliano<br> +etc. <span class="spacer">etc.</span> etc.</p> + +</blockquote> + +<blockquote> + +<p>Eyn schön hübsch lesen von etlichen insslen | dīe do in +kurtzen zyten funden synd durch dē | künig von hispania. +vnd sagt vō grossen wun | derlichen dingen die in dē selbē +insslen synd.</p> + +<p>End:</p> + +<p>Getruckt zŭ strassburg vff gruneck vō meīster Bartlomess +| küstler ym iar. M.cccc.xcvij. vff sant Jeronymus +tag.—</p> + +</blockquote> + +<p>Small 4to. Seven leaves, 30 lines in a page. Beneath +the title is a woodcut representing the apprehension +of Christ in the garden; this is repeated on +the verso of the last leaf. This edition is very rare. +A copy is in the Grenville Library.</p> + +<p>Besides the foregoing we are in possession of a +photo-zincographic fac-simile published at Milan in +1866, by the Marquis Gerolamo d’Adda, of an early +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxiv">[cxiv]</span>printed edition of the Spanish original, in the Ambrosian +Library in that city. It bears no printer’s +name or place or date of publication, but it is unquestionably +of the fifteenth century, and is considered +by bibliographers to be of the date of 1493. +Señor Pascual de Gayangos (in a valuable paper, +entitled “La Carta de Cristóbal Colon al Escribano +Luis de Santangel”, printed in the Madrid Journal, +<i>La America</i>, under date of 13th April, 1867) suggests +that it was printed in Lisbon.</p> + +<p>We have also in Navarrete’s <i>Coleccion de Viages</i>, +printed at Madrid 1825, vol. i, pp. 167-175, what +professes to be an attested literal rendering of a copy +of Columbus’s letter in Spanish to the Escribano de +Racion (whom we know from Argensola’s <i>Anales de +Aragon</i> to be Luis de Santangel), in the Archives at +Simancas.</p> + +<p>And, further, we have a printed version of a copy +of the first letter in Spanish MS., discovered by His +Excellency Senhor de Varnhagen in Valencia, and +published by him in that city in 1858, under the +title of <i>Primera Epistola del Almirante Don Christobal +Colon ... a D. Gabriel Sanchez Tesorero de Aragon</i>. +As editor, Senhor de Varnhagen assumed the +pseudonym of D. Genaro H. de Volafan; and last +year His Excellency published at Vienna a little +work, the nature and contents of which are explained +by its title, which is as follows:—“Carta de Cristóbal +Colon enviada de Lisboa a Barcelona en Marzo de +1493. Nueva Edicion Critica: Conteniendo las variantes +de los diferentes textos, juicio sobre estos, reflexiones +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxv">[cxv]</span>tendentes a mostrar a quien la Carta fue +escrita, y varias otras noticias, por el Seudónimo de +Valencia.”</p> + +<p>Be it observed that in all these the <i>titles</i> are supplied +by the respective editors, and consequently +have no authority beyond the weight of each editor’s +individual opinion. I have carefully collated the +three documents, and the result is a certain conclusion +that neither one nor the other is a correct +transcript of the original letter. The grounds for +this conclusion are, that while no two of them entirely +agree <i>inter se</i>, every one of them exhibits certain +special errors which, as I shall presently demonstrate, +<i>could</i> not have been in the original. The apparent +rashness of this assertion will disappear if the +reader will accompany me in my effort to detect +which of the printed Latin editions which we possess +is to receive the distinction of <i>editio princeps</i>. Various +have been the opinions on this subject. Mr. +Lenox, following Brunet, has given the lead to the +edition which I have ventured to place <i>fourth</i>. Mr. +Harrisse, in his elaborate <i>Notes on Columbus</i>, gives the +first place to that which stands <i>third</i> in my series, and +His Excellency Senhor de Varnhagen assigns priority +to the edition which I make to be the <i>second</i>. That to +which I assign the distinction of taking the lead has +the <i>second</i> place given to it by Senhor de Varnhagen, +and the <i>third</i> by Brunet, Mr. Lenox, and Mr. Harrisse. +In offering a conclusion so much at variance with my +predecessors, my only means of escaping the charge +of presumption (but that I hope is an effectual one), +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxvi">[cxvi]</span>is neither to adopt the opinion of any one else nor to +offer any opinion of my own, but to reduce the matter +to demonstration by facts either within or connected +with the documents themselves.</p> + +<p>On examination of the titles it will be seen that +the six editions resolve themselves by several very +strongly marked features into two distinct groups. +One of these groups, embracing four of the editions, +is characterized by remarkable inaccuracy in three +separate points—all four exhibiting all these inaccuracies +in common; while the remaining two, being +free from them, stand clearly defined into a distinct +group by themselves.</p> + +<p>Thus; the titles of the editions numbered 3, 4, 5, +6, all speak of Columbus being sent out under the +auspices and at the expense of Ferdinand, King of +Spain, without reference to the name of Queen Isabella. +They all describe the letter as addressed to +the Treasurer “Sanxis,” instead of “Sanchez,” whose +Christian name they pervert from “Gabriel” to “Raphael.” +Furthermore, they all convert the Christian +name of the translator from “Leander” to “Aliander.”</p> + +<p>The titles of the editions numbered 1 and 2, on the +contrary, give the names of both the sovereigns, call +the Treasurer in No. 2 Sanches, in No. 1 “Sanchis,” +but not Sanxis, and rightly name the translator +“Leander de Cosco.”</p> + +<p>Now there is no difficulty in showing which of +these groups has the merit of correctness, or which +the demerit of incorrectness.</p> + +<p>It is perfectly well known that in 1493 Ferdinand +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxvii">[cxvii]</span>and Isabella held the common title of <i>Reyes de +España</i>. Whether “Sanches” or “Sanxis” should be +the correct form of spelling the name of a Spaniard +who was treasurer to the Spanish sovereigns, it +would be waste of time to question, and that his +Christian name was Gabriel and not Raphael, we +have clear evidence from an independent document +in the Archives of Simancas, dated December 1495, +for which the reader is referred to Navarrete’s <i>Coleccion +de Viages</i>, vol. iii, p. 76, line 16, where he is +called “El tesorero Gabriel Sanchez”. His name is +also mentioned more than once by Zurita in his +<i>Anales de Aragon</i>.</p> + +<p>The question then arises whether the palm of +priority is to be conceded to the correct or to the +incorrect form. Now all these six titles agree in +stating that the original Spanish letter of Columbus +was <i>sent</i> to the Treasurer Royal. But for a letter to +be sent, it must carry an address, and if Columbus +inserted in such address the Treasurer’s name, he, +who knew Spanish so well, would not have insulted +that dignitary by converting his surname of Sanchez +into Sanxis, or his Christian name of Gabriel into +Raphael. But even if we suppose that he omitted +the name altogether, as is probable, and simply +superscribed his letter with the title of the Treasurer, +the fact still remains that the translator or editor of +the first edition derived the information that the +letter was so sent, directly from the Treasurer himself, +who at least knew his own name and would not +allow it to be transmitted for publication (if Columbus +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxviii">[cxviii]</span>had been guilty of the blunder) under the form of +“Raphael Sanxis.” Nor would he, holding a high +official post, have been guilty of the <i>maladresse</i> of +omitting the name of the queen in the description of +his own title. Now of our two groups of printed +letters it is indisputable that that one must take +precedence which comes immediately in connection +with the original source, and as that source is at the +same time the head-quarters of correctness, it follows +that correctness must be the criterion of priority.</p> + +<p>We thus find our six candidates for the glory of +“editio princeps” reduced to two. Now these two +issued from two different printing presses. One of +them is printed by Argenteus, <i>i.e.</i>, Silber, and bears +his name with the imprint, “Rome, 1493.” The other +is without printer’s name or place or date of publication, +but is indisputably from the printing press of +Stephanus Plannck, as may be seen by comparing +it with a work of Benedictus de Nursia of the same +date, entitled <i>“Incipit libellus de conservatione sanitatis +secundum ordinem alphabeti distinctus per eximium +doctorem magistrum Benedictum compositus.” +Impressum Rome per magistrum Stephanum Planck, +Anno Domini mccccxciii, quarto nōn Maii.</i> In this +and other works from the same press the form and +type precisely correspond with those of our letter.</p> + +<p>Now these two editions of Plannck and Silber were +either printed simultaneously or not. Instances of +the same work being printed by two different printers +on the same day do occur. One example is before +me of this happening in this very year 1493. The +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxix">[cxix]</span>work is entitled, “<i>Illustris et Reverendi Domini +Nicolai Mariæ Estensis Episcopi Hadriensis oratio +pro consanguineo suo inclyto Hercule Estensi Ferrariæ +duce secundo</i>.” One edition in Roman character +bears the colophon, <i>Romæ impressa per mgrm +Plannck: Julio Campello Spoletino procurante. +Anno Salvatoris mcccclxxxxiii. Nonis Januariis.</i> +The other, in Gothic character, bears precisely the +same title and the same colophon, with the difference +of the words, <i>impressa per magistrum Andream +Fritag</i>. Both are small quarto, of the size of our +two editions of the letter of Columbus.</p> + +<p>But here it must be observed that there was +apparently a special object in resorting to this exceptional +procedure, viz., the production simultaneously +of one edition in Roman and another in Gothic +types, to suit the tastes of purchasers. In the case +before us, however, the question of this motive does +not arise, for both Plannck’s and Silber’s editions +are in Gothic type; and any way it is clear that, in a +case of the kind, the same text would be handed to +each printer to set up, as any patent discrepancies +between the two would be to the self-stultification of +the editor. Now, in the case of the Columbus letter, +such patent discrepancies do occur; by which I mean +no mere printer’s blunders, but deliberate alterations +of Latin expressions, as for example “ambularunt” +in Plannck is “ambulaverunt” in Silber; +“serenissimos Reges nostros,” correct Latin in Plannck, +is “serenissimorum regum nostrorum,” making bad +grammar, in Silber. This fact of itself I contend disproves +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxx">[cxx]</span>simultaneity of production. But side by side +with these discrepancies we observe the repetition in +the one, of eccentricities or inaccuracies occurring in +the other, as in the words “quom,” “benivolentia,” +and “nanque.” The former, though not incorrect, is +quaint and unusual, but the two latter are faulty +peculiarities, and their occurrence, in both editions, +side by side with deliberate alterations, proves the +one to be copied from the other either by the hand +of the transcriber or of the compositor. This fact +once established, I have to call attention to the following +remarkable difference between the two editions. +In the Plannck edition the distance sailed by Columbus +along the north coast of Hispaniola is stated as +<span class="allsmcap">DLXIIII</span> miles. In Silber’s the same figures occur +minus the <span class="allsmcap">D</span>, and with no space left for the letter to +have fallen out. Now it being understood that one +of these is a copy from the other, whether through a +transcriber’s or a compositor’s hand, if we suppose +that the Silber edition, which was minus the <span class="allsmcap">D</span>, appeared +first, we must perceive that the error is one +which no special knowledge could enable the editor +or printer of the other to suspect, much less to rectify, +and yet in the Plannck edition we should find it so +rectified. Whereas if the Plannck edition be supposed +to be the first, we have no such difficulty to +encounter, but simply meet (in the Silber edition) +with a negligent omission of a letter, which may so +easily happen. The next enquiry, of course, is, which +number is right, 564 or 64 miles? Fortunately we +have the means of answering this question with certainty, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxxi">[cxxi]</span>for as we possess two copies, or copies of copies, +of the original Spanish letter, we find that the translator, +Leander de Cosco, converted the leagues of the +Spanish original into miles by multiplying them, +though ignorantly, by three; and in one of these two +copies, which can in other respects be shown to be +far more correct than its fellow, these leagues are +stated as 188, which correspond exactly with 564 +miles. It must be clear, then, that the edition containing +the number 564 was derived from the original +accounts, while that which contained the number 64 +had allowed the <span class="allsmcap">D</span> to be lost. The result I submit to be +that Plannck’s edition must claim the palm to priority.</p> + +<p>To this conclusion it has been objected by a friend +that the argument is not complete, inasmuch as Cosco +the translator, may have sent his translation to Rome, +with instructions that a copy thereof should be made, +and that, as the work was of importance, two printers +should at once be employed in printing from the two +copies; that the copyist may have thought fit to make +the alterations which appear between the two, or, +failing him, that these alterations may have been +made by the compositor of one of them. To which I +reply that the deviations in the Silber edition are all +on the side of ignorance, and not such as could have +been made by an original translator. To take the +most notable example: in Plannck’s edition occurs +this passage, already slightly referred to, “quæ res +perutilis est ad id quod Serenissimos Reges nostros +exoptare præcipue reor.” “Which thing is very useful +for the object which I think that our most serene +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxxii">[cxxii]</span>Sovereigns principally desire.” Here we find the +right grammatical construction of the accusative before +the infinitive mood, just as the translator would +write it. In Silber’s edition the sentence stands +thus: “quæ res perutilis est ad id quod Serenissimorum +regum nostrorum exoptare præcipue reor,” a +change showing such ignorance of grammatical construction +that it could not have been the work of the +translator. I contend that, under such circumstances, +even if it should be assumed (though there is no +warranty for such assumption) that the two editions +were printed simultaneously, Plannck’s edition would +justly take the lead on account of its more immediate +derivation from the original translation.</p> + +<p>But before I leave this subject I must call attention +to a notable fact, which opens up the question whether +the real <i>editio princeps</i> has perished, or not as yet +come to our knowledge. It happens that the length +of the north coast of Hispaniola is <i>twice</i> stated by +Columbus in this letter. The <i>first</i> mention of it is +given correctly in Plannck’s edition as “milliaria +dlxiiii,” which I have already shown to be a right +number, while in Silber the “d” is lost, and the number +stands “lxiiii.” The <i>second</i> mention of the length +of the coast is given <i>alike incorrectly by both</i> as dxl. +This fact, brought into combination with those evolved +by our comparison of the two texts, not only corroborates +the non-originality and secondary position of +Silber’s edition, but it raises a question as to whether +Plannck’s was not preceded by another which has never +come to our knowledge, in which both numbers were +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxxiii">[cxxiii]</span>correctly given. It might be conjectured that Columbus +himself wrote the second number incorrectly, but +here the different Spanish texts come valuably to our +aid, and the curious circumstance that the translator +Cosco converted the leagues of the Spanish into miles +in the Latin, supplies a most welcome means of +solving the riddle. Another document, the contemporaneous +rhythmical version of the letter by Giuliano +Dati, will also be of great service in the examination +of the subject. For the sake of clearness I +will tabulate them, and distinguish the correct numbers, +where they occur, by italics.</p> + +<table class="borders"> + <tr> + <th></th> + <th>Ambrosian text.</th> + <th>Valencia MS.</th> + <th>Simancas MS.</th> + <th>Plannck’s edition.</th> + <th>Silber’s edition.</th> + <th>Dati.</th> + </tr> + <tr> + <td>First mention.</td> + <td>clxxviii leguas.</td> + <td><i>ciento e ochenta y ocho leguas.</i></td> + <td>ciento e setenta y ocho leguas.</td> + <td>milliaria <i>dlxiiii</i>.</td> + <td>miliaria lxiiii.</td> + <td><i>cinquecensessanta quattro miglia.</i></td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td>Second mention.</td> + <td><i>clxxxviii leguas.</i></td> + <td>ciento treinta y ocho leguas.</td> + <td>ciento treinta y ocho leguas.</td> + <td>milliaria dxl.</td> + <td>miliaria dxl.</td> + <td><i>cinquecensessanta quattro miglia.</i></td> + </tr> +</table> + +<p>From this table it will be seen that the erroneous +one hundred and thirty-eight leagues do not tally +with the erroneous five hundred and forty miles; but +the most striking fact that this table presents to our +notice is that the <i>Dati poem</i> is the only one of these +documents that has the number right in both places; +and it might at first sight appear a very simple and +easy thing for Dati to see that what was right measurement +in the one case must be the right measurement +in the other, even although the other copyists +had failed to realise this fact. But not so. Dati composed +his poem from the Latin translation, and if the +edition from which he worked had been as faulty as +that of Plannck, now under notice, he could have had +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxxiv">[cxxiv]</span>no means of deciding which number was right, the +dlxiiii of the first mention, or the dxl of the second. +We have the means of knowing, but only because we +possess the various copies of the Spanish, which state +the distance in leagues. The necessary conclusion then +is that Dati worked from a copy either MS. or printed, +in which the number was right in both places; and +this conclusion is corroborated by the fact that, of the +Spanish documents, the Valencia MS. shows the number +right in the first mention, and the Ambrosian +text shows it right in the second. Furthermore, I +observe that Dati, who distinctly states that his poem +was “tradocta di latino,” gives the letter the date of +Feb. 15th, a date which occurs in the Spanish, but not +in the Latin texts which we possess. It follows, +therefore, that if he worked from a printed text, that +edition is lost to us.</p> + +<p>But there remains the alternative that he worked +from the MS. Latin translation, and that the latter +had been fully rendered from the original Spanish, +but was afterwards modified by the compositor in setting +it up in type. That such was in reality the +case the reader will find proved beyond all dispute +at the close of this disquisition. It therefore remains +that, while there is no reason to suppose that an +edition is lost, the edition by Plannck, consisting of +four leaves, with thirty-three lines to the page, must +take the lead among those which are known to us.</p> + +<p>But now we come to the very interesting subject +of the original Spanish. Columbus’s manuscript +letter is lost, and the only representatives of it with +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxxv">[cxxv]</span>which we are acquainted are the manuscript copies +already mentioned at Simancas and Valencia, published +respectively by Navarrete and Senhor de Varnhagen, +and the valuable printed text in the Ambrosian +Library, for the reproduction of which by photo-zincography +all who are interested in the subject are +so deeply indebted to the enlightened liberality of the +Marquis d’Adda. The two former transcripts are +confessedly made at a much later date, while to the +latter bibliographers give the credit of the date of +1493. At the end of the Simancas copy is the expression: +“Esta carta envio Colon al Escribano de +Racion de las islas halladas en las Indias e otra de sus +altezas.” This office of Escribano de Racion was held +by Luis de Santangel. The Valencia copy had no +such sentence at the end, but simply bore the title: +“Carta del Almirante á D. Gabriel Sanches.” The +Ambrosian text photo-zincographed by the Marquis +d’Adda bore a similar expression at the end to that +of the Simancas copy, but with a difference; thus: +“Esta carta embio Colon al Escrivano de Racion de +las Islas halladas en las Indias. Contenida a otra de +sus altezas.” Under these circumstances the Marquis +d’Adda, accepting the pre-supposed fact that Columbus +had addressed two similar letters to the two above-named +officials, very naturally regarded the Ambrosian +text as derived from the Simancas MS. A collation +of the three texts, <i>inter se</i>, and with the Latin +translation of Cosco, exhibits, however, the following +results:—the Valencia MS. addressed to Gabriel +Sanchez is almost a verbatim repetition of the Simancas +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxxvi">[cxxvi]</span>text addressed to the Escribano de Racion, +while the Ambrosian text also addressed to the Escribano +de Racion agrees with the Latin text addressed +to Gabriel Sanchez in certain forms of expression, +which are entirely different from those used in common +in the Valencia and Simancas MSS. to describe the +same thing. This perplexing result has been stated +by Senhor de Varnhagen in the little work published +last year already referred to, and I can confirm +it by actual careful collation of all the four documents. +The <i>prima facie</i> inference from this fact +would, I think, be that the Escribano de Racion and +Gabriel Sanchez, either really were, or by some mistake +had been taken to be, identical. A very high +authority on such a subject, Senor de Gayangos, in +the learned article already referred to, distinctly +maintains the dispatch of two letters to the said two +officials, whereas Senhor de Varnhagen not only limits +the dispatch to one single address, but goes so far as +to conclude that the Spanish printed text, from which +he believes the Latin to be translated, is in fact the +letter addressed to the sovereigns, with the change +only of “vuestras” into “sus.” But as his Excellency +has given much careful thought to this matter, +and has, under the guidance of a most judicious criticism, +supplied an amended text, derived from a collation +of the different texts, it is but justice to him +and to the subject itself to give a literal translation +of his remarks. This is the more requisite as I shall +have to submit some facts which seem to me to lead +to conclusions differing from some of those arrived at +by my learned friend.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxxvii">[cxxvii]</span></p> + +<p>His Excellency says: “We hold it for certain that +the said <i>primitive</i> edition (the Ambrosian) which we +have had the opportunity of seeing in Milan, <i>must +have given origin</i> to the text published in Rome the +25th April⁠<a id="FNanchor_24" href="#Footnote_24" class="fnanchor">[24]</a> of that same year (1493) by Cozco, who +perhaps from not being able to transfer easily to the +Latin the last part of it, cut it off. The said fact is +principally <i>shown</i> by the mistake of the date of 14th +(instead of 4th) of March, which could not be in the +letter of Columbus, as he had left Lisbon before that +day; nor would it be reasonable to suppose that the +error would be repeated in the same manner, if said +original had been kept in sight. Still less could the +repetition of such a mistake be conceived, if the original +manuscript were different.”</p> + +<p>Now, before we proceed to an examination of this +matter, the first thing requisite is to lay before the +reader a specific difference which exists between the +Spanish and the Latin texts. In the Spanish (I quote +from the Ambrosian text) the letter closes thus: +“Esto segun el fecho asi en breve. Fecha en la calavera +sobre las Yslas de Canaria a xv de Febrero mil +et quatrocientos et noventa y tres años.”</p> + +<p>Then comes a</p> + +<p class="center">“Nyma que venia dentro en la carta.”</p> + +<p>“Despues desta escripto y estando en mar de Castilla +salyo tanto viento conmigo sul y sueste que me +ha fecho descargar la navios por cosi (correr?) aqui en +este puerto de Lysbona oy, que fue la mayor maravilla +del mundo. Adonde acordé escrivir a sus altezas. En +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxxviii">[cxxviii]</span>todas las Yndias he siempre hallado los tenporales como +en Mayo, adonde yo fuy en xxxiii dias et volvi en +xxviii, salvo questas tormentas me han detenido xiiii +dias corriendo por esta mar. Dizen aqua todos los +honbres de la mar que jamas ovo tan mal yvierno no +ni tantas perdidas de naves, fecha a xiiii dias de +marco.</p> + +<p>“Esta carta embio Colon al Escrivano de racion de +las Islas halladas en las Indias. Contenida a otra +de sus altezas.”</p> + +<p>For those who need it, the translation will be found +in our printed text at page 18.</p> + +<p>The Latin translation ends very differently; thus: +“Hæc ut gesta sunt sic breviter enarrata. Vale. +Ulisbone, pridie Idus Martii.”</p> + +<p>Now the reader will observe that in the above +“nyma” or postscript, Columbus states that on the +day of his reaching Lisbon he resolved to write to +their Highnesses, and we know from his diaries that +that day was the 4th of March, and yet at the end +the postscript is dated the 14th of March, a day on +which we know, from the said diaries, that he was off +Cape St. Vincent on his way from Lisbon to Spain, +which he was then on the point of reaching at the +harbour of Palos.</p> + +<p>The Latin, it will be perceived, repeats this discrepancy +in a more distinct shape, by bringing the name +of Lisbon immediately into connection with the 14th +of March, of which the words: “pridie Idus Martii” +are the equivalent.</p> + +<p>With these specialities in his mind, the reader will +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxxix">[cxxix]</span>be able with greater clearness to follow the following +disquisition:—</p> + +<p>The perfectly sound piece of criticism by Senhor de +Varnhagen, which we have just read, is based upon +the accepted premiss that it was on the 4th of March +that Columbus dispatched to the King and Queen +the letter describing his voyage, with the nema attached. +The words of the “nema” itself make such +an inference highly reasonable. It states that “el +viento me ha fecho descargar los navios por correr +aqui en este puerto de Lisbona <i>hoy</i> ... adonde acordé +de escribir a sus altezas.”—“The wind made me unload +the ships to run into this port of Lisbon to-day +... where I resolved to write to their Highnesses.” +The diary shows that this day was the 4th of March, +and hence, <i>prima facie</i>, the date of “14th of March” in +the nema would appear to be not written by Columbus, +but a blunder of the printer of the Ambrosian +text. This natural inference <i>appears</i> confirmed, I +find, by the distinct statement of Ferdinand Columbus +that on his father’s arrival in Lisbon on the 4th—“Subito +espedì un corriero a’ Re Catolici con la +nuova della sua venuta”—“he immediately dispatched +a courier to the Catholic Sovereigns with the news of +his arrival.”</p> + +<p>Now, supposing, for I do not take it for granted, +that this statement of Fernando’s, written many years +after, was correct, and that his father carried out his +intention of writing to the Sovereigns from Lisbon, +that statement does not tell us that he then <i>sent on +the account of his voyage</i>; and if we inquire a little +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxxx">[cxxx]</span>further, we have good reason to suppose that he did +<i>not</i> forward it on that day. There is no mention in +his Diary of his so doing, although the act would +be of sufficient importance to call for mention. He +was in a country where his success in the cause of +Spain was regarded with intense animosity. He was +ignorant of the whereabouts of the Sovereigns, and +in prospect of an early arrival in Spain, when he +both would gain the necessary information, and could +send on his precious missive in perfect safety. In +harmony with these suggestions of mine, I find that +Herrera, the historiographer, who had in his charge +all the Columbian documents, states that on Wednesday, +the 13th March, Columbus left Lisbon for Seville +in his caravel. On Thursday, the 14th, before daybreak, +he was off Cape St. Vincent. On Friday, the +15th, at mid-day, he entered the port of Palos, whence +he had sailed on the 3rd of August of the previous +year. <i>And having learned that the Catholic Sovereigns +were at Barcelona</i>, he at first thought of going +there in his caravel; but subsequently resolving +not to go to Barcelona by sea, he <i>announced his arrival +to the Catholic Sovereigns, and sent a summary of +what had happened to him, reserving the more complete +narrative for their immediate presence</i>. The +<i>reply</i> reached him in Seville, and contained expressions +of joy at his safe arrival and at the success of +his voyage, offered him rewards and honours, and +commanded him to make haste to go to Barcelona. +Now, it will be remembered that Columbus’s narrative +was already written, and dated February 15th or +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxxxi">[cxxxi]</span>18th, and only waiting to be despatched, and had attached +to it the nema, which Mr. Gayangos tells us +was a piece of paper placed on the outside of a letter +like a padlock, and over which the seal was put. On +this nema, beyond all question, was the date of March +4th; and if, as I gather from Herrera’s statement, +Columbus dispatched this narrative of his voyage, not +from Lisbon on the 4th March, but from Palos on the +15th, or the 16th, it is not unlikely that on the 14th, +when he was nearing the Spanish harbour from which +he was looking forward to be able to dispatch it in +safety, he should have altered the remote date of the +4th, which agreed with the wording of the nema at the +time of writing it, into the later date of the 14th, which +was more in accordance with the date of dispatch. We +know that the letter to the Sovereigns was enclosed +in the letter to the Escribano de Racion; and the +sentence printed at the end of the Ambrosian text +bears the aspect of an endorsement of the letter by +that officer’s secretary. The date of the Sovereigns’ +reply from Barcelona, March 30th, is in entire harmony, +as regards lapse of time, with the dispatch of +Columbus’ letter from Palos on the 15th or 16th +of the month. The Latin translation was completed +on the 29th April, a full month after the arrival of the +letter in Barcelona. There was plenty of time, therefore, +it is true, for the letter to have been printed in +Spanish, and for that Spanish to have served for the +translation into Latin; but if my suggestion, as derived +from the above data, be correct, that the alteration +of 4 to 14 on the nema was made by Columbus himself, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxxxii">[cxxxii]</span>my friend Senhor de Varnhagen’s conclusion that +the Spanish printed text <i>must</i> have served for that +translation becomes a <i>non sequitur</i>. Such alteration +by Columbus would naturally lead to the erroneous +“ulisbone, pridie idus Martii” in the Latin text, without +the intervention of the Spanish printed text, in +which that alteration would of course also be copied.</p> + +<p>I have stated these facts to show that the occurrence +of March 14th both in the Ambrosian text and +the Latin translation, does not, as Senhor de Varnhagen +concluded, prove of necessity that the latter +was derived from the former, but from a common +origin, to wit, in all probability the original MS. of +Columbus. But now that I have shown that the +Latin <i>need not</i> have been derived from the Ambrosian, +I proceed to show that it <i>could not</i> have been so.</p> + +<p>In the Ambrosian we find Guanahani spelt Guanaham; +the island of Matinino called Matremonio, etc., +while in the Latin text we find the first name correctly +written Guanahani, Matinino is more nearly +correctly written Mateunin; and we have the name +of an island, Charis, which is left out in the Spanish +altogether. But as the Latin translator possessed no +special knowledge by which he could make such corrections, +it is clear that the Ambrosian text could +not have served as the basis for the Latin; whereas +if the two were derived from a common source, the +errors of the Ambrosian text would be those of its +copyist, while the accurate rendering of the corresponding +passages in the Latin would be the result, +not of correction, as Senhor de Varnhagen suggests, +but of attention to the original.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxxxiii">[cxxxiii]</span></p> + +<p>Upon this head Senhor de Varnhagen writes as +follows:—</p> + +<p>“The Latin texts contain a correction of the words +Guanahanin, Charis (Caribes or Caraibes), and Mateunin +(Matinino); but these corrections, if perchance +it should be proved that they were made at the time +of the first edition, and not afterwards (which we cannot +here examine, not having the different editions +at hand), may have been pointed out by the editor +himself in sight of the original after the publication +of the printed text; or by Columbus himself, on receiving +it on his road to Barcelona, in order that some +correct copies might be sent to Rome, by way of +communicating the news of the discovery that had +been made, with the view of obtaining the famous +Bull from Alexander VI.”</p> + +<p>Now it is pretty clear that the Latin translation +had nothing in the world to do with the Papal bull. +The name of <i>De</i> Cosco indicates that the translator +was a Spaniard—and it is reasonable to assume that +a Spaniard would be selected to translate from Spanish +into Latin—; therefore we may fairly suppose that +the translation was made in Spain. It was not completed +till the 29th of April—tertio kalendas maii—(not +the 25th, an error of Navarrete’s, which Senhor +de Varnhagen has adopted), and the first bull was +issued on the 3rd of May. The interval of four days +is scarcely sufficient to allow of the formal dispatch +of the document to Rome, its presentation and the +drawing up of the bull, much less if it had to undergo +revision by Columbus, still less if it be a question +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxxxiv">[cxxxiv]</span>of correction of printed proofs set up in type at Rome +in that short interval. It is tolerably evident, then, +that the Latin was sent to Rome, not to the Pope, +but only for printing. If, therefore, the missive to +the Pope was in Spanish, and included this letter, +the corrections by Columbus or by Sanchez, suggested +by Senhor de Varnhagen, would have been far better +applied to the Spanish than to the Latin, instead of +the reverse, as suggested.</p> + +<p>It should, however, be borne in mind that in those +days proofs were not sent out for revision: but as a +doubt may reasonably be entertained on this point, +on the score of the many imaginable possibilities that +may not have been foreseen or taken into consideration +in this criticism, I will now proceed to demonstrate +that the Spanish and the Latin printed texts +certainly are derived from different, though similar, +documents. That they should be similar is natural, +the one being written by Columbus from the other, +with such trivial changes as may have dropped from +his pen in transcribing.</p> + +<p>First: we have a Spanish text, the endorsement of +which shows it to have been sent to the Escribano de +Racion. That this officer was Luis de Santangel we +know for certainty from Argensola’s <i>Anales de Aragon</i>, +lib. 1, cap. 10, p. 99, <i>et seq.</i>, where he tells us +that when the King looked coldly on Columbus’s proposals, +because the royal finances had been drained by +war, Isabella offered her jewels for the enterprise; +but this was rendered needless, as “Luis de Santangel, +Escrivano de Racion de Aragon, advanced +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxxxv">[cxxxv]</span>seventeen thousand florins for the expenses of the +Armada.” This leaves no room for doubt that Columbus +should immediately send a copy of his letter +to Santangel. In it was enclosed the copy addressed +to the Sovereigns.⁠<a id="FNanchor_25" href="#Footnote_25" class="fnanchor">[25]</a> This text sent to Santangel consisted +of a letter dated February 15th, and a postscript, +announcing the arrival off Lisbon on the 4th, subsequently +altered to the 14th March.</p> + +<p>Secondly: we have a Latin text, distinctly stated +to have been translated from a letter addressed to the +Royal Treasurer, Gabriel Sanchez. We have thus +clearly two letters addressed to two persons, but to +annihilate this duality Senhor de Varnhagen suggests +“Why not suppose that this last name, Gabriel +Sanxis, which Cosco thought it necessary to announce, +was the result of his own verifications? He would +inquire in Rome of the Catholic delegates the name +of the Escribano de Racion, and they would give him +that of the Treasurer General.” But this is inventing +<i>one surmise</i> to fortify <i>another</i>, whereas Senhor de +Varnhagen’s own zealous research had provided evidence +to prove a contrary <i>fact</i>. The Marquis d’Adda +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxxxvi">[cxxxvi]</span>has kindly sent me a photo-lithograph of a fragment +of an Italian version of this letter, of which His Excellency +Senhor de Varnhagen had found the title in +the catalogue of the Ambrosian Library. This fragment +distinctly states it to have been a copy of one +“sent by the Grand Treasurer to his brother, Joane +Sanxis.”</p> + +<p>Thus, beyond all question, it is proved that Columbus +addressed these two several letters to these two +different persons, from one of which the Spanish text +was printed, and from the other the Latin translation +was made and subsequently printed. And having +reached this point, we see clearly that my suggestion +of Columbus having altered the date of 4th +March to 14th <i>must</i> have been correct; and, furthermore, +that he copied the date of “14th,” on whichever +of these two letters was written last, because, while it +stands March 14th <i>in totidem verbis</i> in one, it is +rendered “pridie idus Martii” (which means the same +thing) in the translation from the other. We see in +this date “Ulisbone, pridie idus Martii,” a proof that +the copy from which the Latin was made, consisted, +like the original of the Ambrosian Spanish text, of a +complete letter with the “nema” added, because the +place Lisbon is derived from the language at the beginning +of the nema, and the date from Columbus’s +alteration at the end. Although the printer, Plannck, +inserted nothing of the “nema” beyond the said place +and date, which he placed at the end of the body of +the letter in lieu of February 15th, we have a clear +proof that De Cosco had really translated the letter +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxxxvii">[cxxxvii]</span>and nema as they stand in the Spanish, for when we +come to look into Dati’s poem, which he distinctly +states to be translated from the Latin, we find <i>the +date of February 15th retained, but no allusion to the +contents of the nema, which, being detached, had evidently +not reached his hands</i>. This fact, and others +observable in his text, especially when examined in +combination with the Italian, which also came from +the Sanchez original, show that Dati worked from +Cosco’s manuscript translation. As to whether of the +two printed texts, the Ambrosian Spanish or Plannck’s +Latin, can claim priority, we have no present means +of deciding, but that the preference is due to the +Spanish under critical correction is manifest, since it +has been exposed to modifications from a compositor +only, while the Latin has passed through the two +ordeals of a translation and a compositor’s alterations. +For this reason I have adopted the Spanish in my +text, observing that it replaces the very worst Latin +text which I could have adopted, viz., that taken by +Navarrete from the <i>España Illustrada</i>. The faults +in the Ambrosian text are many and great, and this +has led Señor de Gayangos to suggest that it was +printed, not in Spain, but in Portugal, probably Lisbon. +An opinion from one so eminent has great +weight, but while yielding to none in sincere respect +for the judgment of my distinguished friend, I confess +I think that the circumstances of the letter point, as +Senhor de Varnhagen has stated, to Barcelona for the +place of printing. Mr. Winter Jones, the Principal +Librarian of the British Museum, and late Keeper of +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxxxviii">[cxxxviii]</span>the Department of Printed Books, whose bibliographical +knowledge is so well known, tells us that he +recollects having seen the initial letter S, which commences +the Ambrosian text, but, in spite of great research, +I have failed to find it or the corresponding +type in any work in our vast library. It is here well +to remark that no kind of <i>fac-simile</i> is so baulking +to bibliographic comparison as the photographic. +The respective sizes of the letters are altered, and +the outline is rendered broken and rotten. A <i>fac-simile</i> +of this same letter, done by the hand, was published +in Milan in 1863, in the sixteenth volume of +the <i>Biblioteca Rara</i> of G. Daelli, and gives the type +a far firmer appearance than that in the photograph. +It is obvious that an opportunity is afforded of correcting +the mistakes in the Ambrosian text from the +other texts which we possess. This has been done +with great skill and judgment by Senhor de Varnhagen +by collation with the Simancas, the Valencia, +and the Latin texts; to these aids I have added the +Italian poem of Giuliano Dati, and the Italian fragment, +for which I have been indebted to the kindness +of the Marquis d’Adda.</p> + +<p>We possess no detailed description of the second +voyage of Columbus from his own hand. That which +is here printed is the translation of a letter addressed +to the Chapter of Seville by Dr. Chanca, a native of +that city, who was physician to the fleet in this voyage, +and was an eye-witness of the events that he +related. For this reason it is preferred to two other +accounts in Latin which are in existence, but which +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxxxix">[cxxxix]</span>have both been made up from hearsay. One of these +occurs in the second book of the <i>Decades</i> of Peter +Martyr of Anghiera, published first at Seville (Hispali) +in 1511, and afterwards at Alcala de Henares +(Compluti) in 1516, and often subsequently printed. +The other is a compilation by Nicolò Scillacio, of Messina, +who, while studying philosophy at Pavia in +1494 (?), and living with Giovanni Antonio Biretta, +received from Spain, from a certain nobleman named +Guglielmo Coma, a description of the recent discoveries +of Columbus. This, as Mr. Lenox tells us, he +translated into Latin, and inserted such other accounts +as were then universally current, but without +changing or adding anything. Mr. James Lenox, of +New York, who is the possessor of one of the only +two copies of this work known (the other being in +the possession of the Marquis Trivulzio of Milan), and +who states that it was first published in 1494, or +early in 1495, reprinted it in 1859, with a translation +by the Rev. John Mulligan, giving as an appendix +my translation of Doctor Chanca’s letter, as printed in +the first edition of the present work in 1847. It is +obvious that this work of Scillacio’s, which is a pedantic +compilation, cannot compare for authenticity +with the account of Dr. Chanca; while the latter contains +more incidents, and is more agreeably written +than the narrative of Peter Martyr.</p> + +<p>This letter by Dr. Chanca was copied by Navarrete (as +he himself says at the end of the letter in his work) from +a manuscript in the possession of the Royal Academy +of History at Madrid, written in the middle of the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxl">[cxl]</span>sixteenth century, and was amongst the collection of +papers referring to the West Indies, collected by Father +Antonio de Aspa, a monk of the order of St. +Jerome, of the monastery of the Mejorada, near Olmedo.—This +document was unpublished previous to +Navarrete’s compilation. A copy was taken from the +original by Don Manuel Avella, and deposited in the +collection of Don Juan Bautista Muñoz, and from that +copy, after collation with the original manuscript, the +transfer was made by Navarrete into his valuable +work. This letter is followed by a Memorial respecting +the second voyage, addressed to the sovereigns by +Columbus, through the intervention of Antonio de +Torres, governor of the city of Isabella. At the close +of each chapter or item is affixed their highness’s +reply. The document was taken by Navarrete from +the Archives of Seville.</p> + +<p>The two letters next in order in the present translation, +are from the hand of Columbus himself, and +are descriptive of the events of the third voyage. The +first, addressed to the Sovereigns, was taken by Navarrete, +under careful collation by himself and Muñoz, +from a manuscript in the handwriting of the bishop +Bartolomé de la Casas, found in the archives of +the duke del Infantado. The second, addressed to the +nurse of Prince John, is taken from a collection of +manuscripts, relating to the West Indies, made by +Muñoz, and deposited in the Real Academia de la +Historia at Madrid. The text was collated by Navarrete +with a copy inserted in the Codice Colombo-Americano, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxli">[cxli]</span>said to have been written in the monastery +of Santa Maria de las Cuevas in Seville.</p> + +<p>The letter by Columbus, descriptive of his fourth +voyage, was taken by Navarrete from a manuscript +in the king’s private library at Madrid, written in the +handwriting of the middle of the sixteenth century, +and probably the same copy as that which Pinelo, at +page 61 of his <i>Biblioteca Occidental</i>, 4to., 1629, +describes as having been made by Don Lorenzo +Ramirez de Prado, from an edition in 4to., which +does not appear to be now in existence. It was +translated into Italian by Constanzo Bayuera of +Brescia, and published at Venice in 1505, and, on +account of its extreme scarcity, was republished, with +some learned comments, by Morelli, the librarian of +St. Mark’s at Venice, in 1810.</p> + +<p>That it had been printed in Spanish is asserted +both by Pinelo and by Fernando Columbus.</p> + +<p>It is presumed that the manuscript from which +Navarrete made his copy was that made by Ramirez +de Prado, because it had been removed to the king’s +library, from the Colegio Mayor de Cuenca, in Salamanca, +where the papers of Ramirez had been deposited.</p> + +<p>I must not close this bibliographical notice without +tendering my warmest thanks to my friends, William +Brenchley Rye, Esq., the learned Keeper of the +Printed Books in the British Museum; and Robert +Edmund Graves, Esq., one of the most accomplished +of his Assistant-Librarians;—to the former for most +kindly making out the foregoing list of incunabula of +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxlii">[cxlii]</span>the first letter, and the latter for very valuable help +in my search for collateral texts by which to fortify +my conclusions in the toilsome examination which I +have here brought to a termination.</p> + +<div class="footnotes"> + +<h3>FOOTNOTES:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_24" href="#FNanchor_24" class="label">[24]</a> It should be 29th. The mistake is copied from Navarrete.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_25" href="#FNanchor_25" class="label">[25]</a> In pursuance of his idea that not two, but only one letter, +was despatched to head-quarters, Senhor de Varnhagen has +translated the words of the endorsement “Contenida a otra de +Sus Altezas.”—“Contenida <i>en</i> otra, etc.” and then, reasoning +from the impossibility of Columbus showing such familiarity with +the Sovereigns, argues, that the letter was in fact addressed to +them only. With all respect I submit that the natural rendering +is “Contenida la otra de Sus Altezas”; Angl. “Contained the +other of their Highnesses”; or, as it would be clearer in French, +“Y contenue l’autre de Leurs Altesses;” and Santangel appropriately +appears as bearer of the missive to the Sovereigns.</p></div> + +</div> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxliii">[cxliii]</span></p> + +<h1><span class="smaller">SELECT LETTERS<br> +<span class="smaller"><span class="smaller">OF</span></span></span><br> +CHRISTOPHER COLUMBUS.<br> +<span class="smaller"><span class="smaller">ETC.</span></span></h1> + +</div> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_cxliv">[cxliv]</span></p> + +<div class="transnote hide"> +Transcriber’s Note: In the original, the English text was printed +at the top of each page with the Spanish text below. This is not +practical to reproduce in an e-text, so the English is given first, +followed by the Spanish. +</div> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1">[1]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="FIRST_VOYAGE_OF_COLUMBUS">FIRST VOYAGE +OF COLUMBUS.⁠<a id="FNanchor_26" href="#Footnote_26" class="fnanchor">[26]</a></h2> + +</div> + +<div class="english"> + +<h3 class="hanging"><i>A Letter sent by Columbus to [Luis de Santangel] Chancellor +of the Exchequer [of Aragon], respecting the Islands +found in the Indies, enclosing another for their Highnesses.</i></h3> + +<p><span class="smcap">Sir</span>,—Believing that you will take pleasure in hearing of +the great success which our Lord has granted me in my +voyage, I write you this letter, whereby you will learn how +in thirty-three days’⁠<a id="FNanchor_27" href="#Footnote_27" class="fnanchor">[27]</a> time I reached the Indies with the fleet +which the most illustrious King and Queen, our Sovereigns, +gave to me, where I found very many islands thickly peopled, +of all which I took possession without resistance, for +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_2">[2]</span>their Highnesses by proclamation made and with the royal +standard unfurled. To the first island that I found I gave +the name of <i>San Salvador</i>,⁠<a id="FNanchor_28" href="#Footnote_28" class="fnanchor">[28]</a> in remembrance of His High +Majesty, who hath marvellously brought all these things to +pass; the Indians call it <i>Guanaham</i>. To the second island +I gave the name of <i>Santa-Maria de Concepcion</i>;⁠<a id="FNanchor_29" href="#Footnote_29" class="fnanchor">[29]</a> the third I +called <i>Fernandina</i>;⁠<a id="FNanchor_30" href="#Footnote_30" class="fnanchor">[30]</a> + the fourth, <i>Isabella</i>;⁠<a id="FNanchor_31" href="#Footnote_31" class="fnanchor">[31]</a> + the fifth, <i>Juana</i>;⁠<a id="FNanchor_32" href="#Footnote_32" class="fnanchor">[32]</a> +and so to each one I gave a new name. When I reached +<i>Juana</i>, I followed its coast to the westward, and found it +so large that I thought it must be the mainland,—the province +of <i>Cathay</i>; and, as I found neither towns nor villages +on the sea-coast, but only a few hamlets, with the inhabitants, +of which I could not hold conversation, because they all +immediately fled, I kept on the same route, thinking that I +could not fail to light upon some large cities and towns. At +length, after the proceeding of many leagues, and finding that +nothing new presented itself, and that the coast was leading +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_3">[3]</span>me northwards (which I wished to avoid, because winter +had already set in, and it was my intention to move southwards; +and because moreover the winds were contrary), I +resolved not to wait for a change in the weather, but returned +to a certain harbour which I had remarked, and from +which I sent two men ashore to ascertain whether there was +any king or large cities in that part. They journeyed for +three days and found countless small hamlets with numberless +inhabitants, but with nothing like order; they therefore +returned. In the meantime I had learned from some other +Indians whom I had seized, that this land was certainly an +island; accordingly, I followed the coast eastward for a +distance of one hundred and seven leagues, where it ended +in a cape. From this cape, I saw another island to the eastward +at a distance of eighteen leagues from the former, to +which I gave the name of <i>La Española</i>.⁠<a id="FNanchor_33" href="#Footnote_33" class="fnanchor">[33]</a> Thither I went, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_4">[4]</span>and followed its northern coast to the eastward (just as I +had done with the coast of <i>Juana</i>), one hundred and seventy⁠<a id="FNanchor_34" href="#Footnote_34" class="fnanchor">[34]</a>-eight +full leagues due east. This island, like all the others, +is extraordinarily large, and this one extremely so. In it +are many seaports with which none that I know in Christendom +can bear comparison, so good and capacious that it is +wonder to see. The lands are high, and there are many +very lofty mountains with which the island of <i>Cetefrey</i> cannot +be compared. They are all most beautiful, of a thousand +different shapes, accessible, and covered with trees of a thousand +kinds of such great height that they seemed to reach +the skies. I am told that the trees never lose their foliage, +and I can well understand it, for I observed that they were +as green and luxuriant as in Spain in the month of May. +Some were in bloom, others bearing fruit, and others otherwise +according to their nature. The nightingale was singing +as well as other birds of a thousand different kinds; and +that, in November, the month in which I myself was roaming +amongst them. There are palm-trees of six or eight +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_5">[5]</span>kinds, wonderful in their beautiful variety; but this is the +case with all the other trees and fruits and grasses; trees, +plants, or fruits filled us with admiration. It contains +extraordinary pine groves, and very extensive plains. There +is also honey, a great variety of birds, and many different +kind of fruits. In the interior there are many mines +of metals and a population innumerable. <i>Española</i> is a +wonder. Its mountains and plains, and meadows, and fields, +are so beautiful and rich for planting and sowing, and rearing +cattle of all kinds, and for building towns and villages. +The harbours on the coast, and the number and size and +wholesomeness of the rivers, most of them bearing gold, +surpass anything that would be believed by one who had not +seen them. There is a great difference between the trees, +fruits, and plants of this island and those of <i>Juana</i>. In this +island there are many spices and extensive mines of gold +and other metals. The inhabitants of this and of all the +other islands I have found or gained intelligence of, both +men and women, go as naked as they were born, with the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_6">[6]</span>exception that some of the women cover one part only with +a single leaf of grass or with a piece of cotton, made for +that purpose. They have neither iron, nor steel, nor arms, +nor are they competent to use them, not that they are not +well-formed and of handsome stature, but because they are +timid to a surprising degree. Their only arms are reeds +cut in the seeding time,⁠<a id="FNanchor_35" href="#Footnote_35" class="fnanchor">[35]</a> to which they fasten small +sharpened sticks, and even these they dare not use; for on +several occasions it has happened that I have sent ashore +two or three men to some village to hold a parley, and the +people have come out in countless numbers, but, as soon as +they saw our men approach, would flee with such precipitation +that a father would not even stop to protect his son; +and this not because any harm had been done to any of +them, for, from the first, wherever I went and got speech +with them, I gave them of all that I had, such as cloth and +many other things, without receiving anything in return, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_7">[7]</span>but they are, as I have described, incurably timid. It is +true that when they are reassured and have thrown off this +fear, they are guileless, and so liberal of all they have that +no one would believe it who had not seen it. They never +refuse anything that they possess when it is asked of them; +on the contrary, they offer it themselves, and they exhibit so +much loving kindness that they would even give their hearts; +and, whether it be something of value or of little worth that +is offered to them, they are satisfied. I forbade that worthless +things, such as pieces of broken porringers and broken +glass, and ends of straps, should be given to them; although, +when they succeeded in obtaining them, they thought they +possessed the finest jewel in the world. It was ascertained +that a sailor received for a leather strap a piece of gold +weighing two <i>castellanos</i>⁠<a id="FNanchor_36" href="#Footnote_36" class="fnanchor">[36]</a> and a half, and others received for +other objects of far less value, much more. For new <i>blancas</i>⁠<a id="FNanchor_37" href="#Footnote_37" class="fnanchor">[37]</a> +they would give all that they had, whether it was two or three +<i>castellanos</i> in gold or one or two arrobas⁠<a id="FNanchor_38" href="#Footnote_38" class="fnanchor">[38]</a> of spun cotton. +They took even bits of the broken hoops of the wine barrels, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_8">[8]</span>and gave, like fools, all that they possessed in exchange, +insomuch that I thought it was wrong, and forbade it. I +gave away a thousand good and pretty articles which I had +brought with me in order to win their affection; and that +they might be led to become Christians, and be well inclined +to love and serve their Highnesses and the whole Spanish +nation, and that they might aid us by giving us things of +which we stand in need, but which they possess in abundance. +They are not acquainted with any kind of worship, +and are not idolaters; but believe that all power and, indeed, +all good things are in heaven; and they are firmly +convinced that I, with my vessels and crews, came from +heaven, and with this belief received me at every place at +which I touched, after they had overcome their apprehension. +And this does not spring from ignorance, for they are very +intelligent, and navigate all these seas, and relate everything +to us, so that it is astonishing what a good account they are +able to give of everything; but they have never seen men with +clothes on, nor vessels like ours. On my reaching the Indies, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_9">[9]</span>I took by force, in the first island that I discovered, some of +these natives, that they might learn our language and give me +information in regard to what existed in these parts; and it +so happened that they soon understood us and we them, either +by words or signs, and they have been very serviceable to us. +They are still with me, and, from repeated conversations that +I have had with them, I find that they still believe that I come +from heaven. And they were the first to say this wherever +I went, and the others ran from house to house and to the +neighbouring villages, crying with a loud voice: “Come, +come, and see the people from heaven!” And thus they all, +men as well as women, after their minds were at rest about +us, came, both large and small, and brought us something +to eat and drink, which they gave us with extraordinary +kindness. They have in all these islands very many canoes +like our row-boats: some larger, some smaller, but most of +them larger than a barge of eighteen seats. They are not so +wide, because they are made of one single piece of timber, +but a barge could not keep up with them in rowing, because +they go with incredible speed, and with these canoes they +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_10">[10]</span>navigate among these islands, which are innumerable, and +carry on their traffic. I have seen in some of these canoes +seventy and eighty men, each with his oar. In all these +islands I did not notice much difference in the appearance of +the inhabitants, nor in their manners nor language, except +that they all understand each other, which is very singular, +and leads me to hope that their Highnesses will take means +for their conversion to our holy faith, towards which they +are very well disposed. I have already said how I had gone +one hundred and seven leagues in following the sea-coast of +<i>Juana</i> in a straight line from west to east: and from that +survey I can state that the island is larger than England +and Scotland together, because, beyond these one hundred +and seven leagues, there lie to the west two provinces which +I have not yet visited, one of which is called <i>Avan</i>, where +the people are born with a tail. These two provinces cannot +be less in length than from fifty to sixty leagues, from what +can be learned from the Indians that I have with me, and +who are acquainted with all these islands. The other, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_11">[11]</span><i>Española</i>, has a greater circumference than all Spain, from +Catalonia by the sea-coast to Fuenterabia in Biscay, since +on one of its four sides I made one hundred and eighty-eight +great leagues in a straight line from west to east. This is +something to covet, and when found not to be lost sight of. +Although I have taken possession of all these islands in the +name of their Highnesses, and they are all more abundant +in wealth than I am able to express; and although I hold +them all for their Highnesses, so that they can dispose of +them quite as absolutely as they can of the kingdoms of +Castile, yet there was one large town in <i>Española</i> of which +especially I took possession, situated in a locality well +adapted for the working of the gold mines, and for all kinds +of commerce, either with the main land on this side, or with +that beyond which is the land of the great Khan, with which +there will be vast commerce and great profit. To that city +I gave the name of <i>Villa de Navidad</i>, and fortified it with a +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_12">[12]</span>fortress, which by this time will be quite completed, and I +have left in it a sufficient number of men with arms,⁠<a id="FNanchor_39" href="#Footnote_39" class="fnanchor">[39]</a> artillery, +and provisions for more than a year, a barge, and a sailing +master skilful in the arts necessary for building others. I +have also established the greatest friendship with the king +of that country, so much so that he took pride in calling me +his brother, and treating me as such. Even should these +people change their intentions towards us and become +hostile, they do not know what arms are, but, as I have said, +go naked, and are the most timid people in the world; so +that the men I have left could, alone, destroy the whole +country, and this island has no danger for them, if they only +know how to conduct themselves. In all those islands it +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_13">[13]</span>seems to me that the men are content with one wife, except +their chief or king, to whom they give twenty. The women +seem to me to work more than the men. I have not been +able to learn whether they have any property of their own. +It seemed to me that what one possessed belonged to all, +especially in the matter of eatables. I have not found in +those islands any monsters, as many imagined; but, on the +contrary, the whole race is very well-formed, nor are they +black, as in Guinea, but their hair is flowing, for they do not +dwell in that part where the force of the sun’s rays is too +powerful. It is true that the sun has very great power +there, for the country is distant only twenty-six degrees from +the equinoctial line. In the islands where there are high +mountains, the cold this winter was very great, but they +endure it, not only from being habituated to it, but by eating +meat with a variety of excessively hot spices. As to savages, +I did not even hear of any, except at an island which lies the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_14">[14]</span>second in one’s way in coming to the Indies.⁠<a id="FNanchor_40" href="#Footnote_40" class="fnanchor">[40]</a> It is inhabited +by a race which is regarded throughout these islands as extremely +ferocious, and eaters of human flesh. These possess +many canoes, in which they visit all the Indian islands, and +rob and plunder whatever they can. They are no worse +formed than the rest, except that they are in the habit of +wearing their hair long, like women, and use bows and +arrows made of reeds, with a small stick at the end, for want +of iron, which they do not possess. They are ferocious +amongst these exceedingly timid people; but I think no +more of them than of the rest. These are they which have +intercourse with the women of Matenino,⁠<a id="FNanchor_41" href="#Footnote_41" class="fnanchor">[41]</a> the first island one +comes to on the way from Spain to the Indies, and in which +there are no men. These women employ themselves in no +labour suitable to their sex; but use bows and arrows made +of reeds like those above described, and arm and cover +themselves with plates of copper, of which metal they have a +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_15">[15]</span>great quantity. They assure me that there is another island +larger than <i>Española</i>, in which the inhabitants have no hair. +It is extremely rich in gold; and I bring with me Indians +taken from these different islands, who will testify to all +these things. Finally, and speaking only of what has taken +place in this voyage, which has been so hasty, their Highnesses +may see that I shall give them all the gold they +require, if they will give me but a very little assistance; +spices also, and cotton, as much as their Highnesses shall +command to be shipped; and mastic, hitherto found only in +Greece, in the island of Chios, and which the Signoria⁠<a id="FNanchor_42" href="#Footnote_42" class="fnanchor">[42]</a> sells +at its own price, as much as their Highnesses shall command +to be shipped; lign aloes, as much as their Highnesses shall +command to be shipped; slaves, as many of these idolators +as their Highnesses shall command to be shipped. I think +also I have found rhubarb and cinnamon, and I shall find +a thousand other valuable things by means of the men +that I have left behind me, for I tarried at no point so long +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_16">[16]</span>as the wind allowed me to proceed, except in the town of +<i>Navidad</i>, where I took the necessary precautions for the +security and settlement of the men I left there. Much more +I would have done if my vessels had been in as good a +condition as by rights they ought to have been. This is +much, and praised be the eternal God, our Lord, who gives +to all those who walk in his ways victory over things which +seem impossible; of which this is signally one, for, although +others may have spoken or written concerning these countries, +it was all mere conjecture, as no one could say that he +had seen them—it amounting only to this, that those who +heard listened the more, and regarded the matter rather as +a fable than anything else. But our Redeemer hath granted +this victory to our illustrious King and Queen and their +kingdoms, which have acquired great fame by an event of +such high importance, in which all Christendom ought to +rejoice, and which it ought to celebrate with great festivals +and the offering of solemn thanks to the Holy Trinity with +many solemn prayers, both for the great exaltation which +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_17">[17]</span>may accrue to them in turning so many nations to our holy +faith, and also for the temporal benefits which will bring +great refreshment and gain, not only to Spain, but to all +Christians. This, thus briefly, in accordance with the events.</p> + +<p>Done on board the caravel, off the Canary Islands, on the +fifteenth of February, fourteen hundred and ninety-three.</p> + +<p>At your orders.</p> + +<p class="right"><span class="smcap">The Admiral.</span></p> + +<p>After this letter was written, as I was in the sea of +Castile, there arose a south-west wind, which compelled me +to lighten my vessels and run this day into this port of +Lisbon, an event which I consider the most marvellous thing +in the world, and whence I resolved to write to their Highnesses. +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_18">[18]</span>In all the Indies I have always found the weather +like that in the month of May. I reached them in thirty-three +days, and returned in twenty-eight, with the exception +that these storms detained me fourteen days knocking +about in this sea. All seamen say that they have never +seen such a severe winter nor so many vessels lost.</p> + +<p>Done on the fourteenth day of March.</p> + +</div> + +<div class="spanish"> + +<h3 class="hanging"><i>Esta Carta embió Colon al Escrivano de Racion de las Islas +halladas en las Indias. Contenida la otra de Sus Altezas.</i></h3> + +<p>Señor, por que se que aureis⁠<a id="FNanchor_43" href="#Footnote_43" class="fnanchor">[43]</a> plazer de la grand victoria que +nuestro señor me ha dado en mi vyaie, vos escriuo esta por la qual +sabreys commo en xxxiij dias pase a las jndias⁠<a id="FNanchor_44" href="#Footnote_44" class="fnanchor">[44]</a> con la armada que +los illustrissimos Rey et reyna, nuestros señores, me dieron, donde +yo falle muy muchas Islas pobladas con gente syn numero. Y +dellas todas he tomado posession por sus altezas con pregon y +vandera real estendida, y non me fue contradicho. A la primera que +yo falle puse nombre Sant Saluador, a comemoracion de Su Alta +Magestad, el qual marauillosamente todo esto andado;⁠<a id="FNanchor_45" href="#Footnote_45" class="fnanchor">[45]</a> los jndios +la llaman Guanaham. A la segunda puse nombre la ylsa de santa +Maria de Concepcion. A la tercera Ferrandina. A la quarta la +Ysabella. A la quinta la isla Juana, et asy a cada vna nombre +nueuo. Quando yo llegue a la Juana segui yo la costa della al +poniente y la falle tan grande que pense que seria tierra firma, la +prouincia de Catayo, y como no falle asi⁠<a id="FNanchor_46" href="#Footnote_46" class="fnanchor">[46]</a> villas y lugares en la costa +de la mar, salvo pequeñas poblaciones, conla gente de las quales +non podia hauer fabla, por que luego fuyan todos, andaua yo +adelante por el dicho camino, pensando de no errar grandes +Ciudades o villas, y al cabo de muchas leguas visto que no hauia +innovacion y que la costa me leuaua al setentrion, de adonde mi +voluntad era contraria, por que el yuierno era ya encarnado,⁠<a id="FNanchor_47" href="#Footnote_47" class="fnanchor">[47]</a> yo +tenia proposito de hazer del⁠<a id="FNanchor_48" href="#Footnote_48" class="fnanchor">[48]</a> al austro y tanbien el viento me dio +adelante, determine de no aguardar otro tiempo, y bolui atras +fasta un señalado puerto da donde enbie dos hombres por la tierra +para saber si auia rey o grandes ciudades. Andouieron tres iornadas +y hallaron infinitas poblaciones pequeñas y gente sin numero, mas +no cosa de regimiento, por lo qual se boluieron. Yo entendia +harta de otros jndios que ya tenia tomados commo continuamente +esta tierra era isla, et asi segui la costa della al oriente ciento y siete +leguas faste donde fazia fin: del qual cabo vi⁠<a id="FNanchor_49" href="#Footnote_49" class="fnanchor">[49]</a> otra isla al oriente, +distincta⁠<a id="FNanchor_50" href="#Footnote_50" class="fnanchor">[50]</a> de esta diez o ocho leguas, a la qual luego puse nombre la +Spañola, y fui alli y segui la parte del setentrion asi commo de la +Juana al oriente, clxxviij⁠<a id="FNanchor_51" href="#Footnote_51" class="fnanchor">[51]</a> grandes leguas⁠<a id="FNanchor_52" href="#Footnote_52" class="fnanchor">[52]</a> + por linia recta del +oriente asi commo de la Juana, la qual y todas las otras son fortissimas⁠<a id="FNanchor_53" href="#Footnote_53" class="fnanchor">[53]</a> +en demasiado grado, y esta en estremo; en ella ay muchos +puertos enla costa dela mar, sin comparacion de otros que yo sepa +en christianos, y sartos, y buenos, y grandes, que es marauilla. Las +tierras della son altas y en ella muy muchas sierras y montañas +altissimas sin comparacion de ysla de centre.⁠<a id="FNanchor_54" href="#Footnote_54" class="fnanchor">[54]</a> Son todas fermossimas +de mill. fechuras y todas andabiles y llenas de arboles de mil +maneras y altas y pareçen que llegan al cielo; y tengo por dicho +que jamas pierden la foia, segun lo puede comprehender que los +vi tan verdes y tan hermosos commo son por Mayo en Spaña, y +dellos stavan floridos, dellos con fruto, y dellos en otro termino +segun es su calidad; y cantaua el ruiseñol⁠<a id="FNanchor_55" href="#Footnote_55" class="fnanchor">[55]</a> + y otros paxaricos⁠<a id="FNanchor_56" href="#Footnote_56" class="fnanchor">[56]</a> de +mil maneras en el mes de nouienbre por alli donde yo andaua. Ay +palmas de seys⁠<a id="FNanchor_57" href="#Footnote_57" class="fnanchor">[57]</a> o de ocho maneras, que es admiracion verlas por +la disformidad fermosa dellas; mas asi commo los otros arboles y +frutos et yeruas. En ella ay pinares a marauilla, e ay canpiñas +grandissimas et ay mjel, y de muchas maneras, de aues y frutas muy +diversas. En las tierras ay muchas minas de metales et ay gente +inestimable numero. La spañola es marauilla; las sierras y las +montañas y las uegas y las campiñas y las tierras tan fermosas y +gruesas para plantar et senbrar, para criar ganados de todas suertes +para hedificios de villas y lugares. Los puertos de la mar aqui no +hauria creancia sin vista, et delos rios muchos y grandes y buenas +aguas, los mas delos quales traen oro. En los arboles et frutos et +yeruas ay grandes diferencias de aquellas de la Juana. En esta ay +muchas specierias⁠<a id="FNanchor_58" href="#Footnote_58" class="fnanchor">[58]</a> y grandes minas de oro y d’otros metales. La +gente desta jsla et de todas las otras que he fallado y hauido,⁠<a id="FNanchor_59" href="#Footnote_59" class="fnanchor">[59]</a> in +aya hauido noticia, andan todos desnudos, hombres et mugeres, asi +commo sus madres los paren, avnque algunas mugeres se cobijan +vn solo lugar con vna sola foia de yerua o vna cosa⁠<a id="FNanchor_60" href="#Footnote_60" class="fnanchor">[60]</a> de algodon +que para ellos fazen. Ellos no tienen fierro ni azero ni armas, ni +son para ello; no porque no sea gente bien dispuesta et de fermosa +estatura, saluo que son muy temerosos a marauilla. No tienen +otras armas saluo las armas de las cañas, quando estan con la +simiente, a la qual ponen al cabo vn palillo agudo, et no osan usar +de aquellas, que muchas vezes me ha acaescido enbiar a tierra dos +o tres honbres alguna villa para hauer fabla, y salir a ellos dellos +sin numero, et despues que los veyan llegar, fuyan a no aguardar +padre a hijo, y esto no porque a ninguno se aya fecho mal; antes a +toda cabo a donde yo ay estado et podido auer fabla, les he dado +de todo lo que tenia, asi paño commo otras cosas muchas, sin +recebir por ello cosa alguna; mas son asi temerosos sin remedio. +Verdad es que despues que aseguran y pierden esta miedo, ellos +son tanto sin engaño y tan liberales delo que tienen que no lo +creerian sino el que lo viese. Ellos de cosa que tengan pidiendo +gela, iamas dizen de no; antes conuidan la persona con ello, y +muestran tanto amor que darian los coraçones, et quieren sea cosa +de valor quien sea de poco precio luego por qualquiera cosica de +qualquiera manera que sea que sele de por ello, sean contentos. +Yo defendi que no se les diesen cosas tan siuiles commo pedaços +de escudillas rotas, y pedaços de vidrio roto, y cabos de agugetas: +aunque quando ellos esto podran llegar,⁠<a id="FNanchor_61" href="#Footnote_61" class="fnanchor">[61]</a> los parescia auer +la mejor joya del mundo: que se açerto auer vn marinero por +vna agugeta de oro de peso de dos castellanos y medio, y otros +de otras cosas que muy menos valian, mucho mas. Ya por blancas +nuevas dauan por ellas todo quanto tenian auer que⁠<a id="FNanchor_62" href="#Footnote_62" class="fnanchor">[62]</a> fuesen dos +ni tres castellanos de oro o vna arroua⁠<a id="FNanchor_63" href="#Footnote_63" class="fnanchor">[63]</a> o dos de algodon fylado. +Fasta los pedaços delos arcos rotos de las pipas tomauan y dauan +lo que tenian commo bestias, asy que me parescia mal. Yo lo +defendi y daua yo graciosas mil cosas buenas que yo leuaua, +por que tomen amor y allenda desto se faran⁠<a id="FNanchor_64" href="#Footnote_64" class="fnanchor">[64]</a> cristianos, que se +jnclinan al amor y servicio de sus altezas y de toda la nacion +castellana, y procuran de aiuntar⁠<a id="FNanchor_65" href="#Footnote_65" class="fnanchor">[65]</a> de nos dar de las cosas que tienen +en abundancia que nos son neçessarias. Y no conocian ninguna +seta nin ydolatria, saluo que todos creen que las fuerças y el bien +es en el cielo. Y creyan muy firme que yo con estos nauios y gente +venia del cielo, y en tal catamiento me recibian⁠<a id="FNanchor_66" href="#Footnote_66" class="fnanchor">[66]</a> en todo cabo +despues de auer perdido el miedo. Y esto no precede porque +sean ygnorantes, saluo de muy sotil ingenio y hombres que +nauegan todas aquellas mares, que es marauilla la buena cuenta +quellos dan de todo, salvo porque nunca vieron gente vestida ny +semejantes nauios. Y luego que legue a las jndias en la primera +ysla que halle, tome por fuerça algunos dellos para que deprendiesen +y me diesen notia delo que auia en aquellas partes, et asy +fue que luego entendiron, y nos a ellos, quando por lengua o señas, +y estos han aprouechado mucho. Oy en dia los traygo que siempre +estan de proposito que vengo del cielo por mucha conuersacion +que ayan auido conmigo, y estos eran los primeros a pronunciarlo +adonde yo llegaua; y los otros andauan corriendo de casa en +casa, y alas villas çercenas con bozes altas, venid, venid a ver la +gente del cielo. Asi todos, hombres commo mugeres, despues de +auer el coraçon seguro de nos, venian⁠<a id="FNanchor_67" href="#Footnote_67" class="fnanchor">[67]</a> que no quedauan grande ni +pequeño, y todos trayan algo de comer y de beuer que dauan con +un amor marauilloso. Ellos tienen todas las yslas muy muchas +canoas a manera de fustes⁠<a id="FNanchor_68" href="#Footnote_68" class="fnanchor">[68]</a> de remo, dellas maioras, dellas menores +y algunas y muchas son mayoras que vna fusta de diez et ocho +bancos. No son tan anchas porque son de vn solo madero, mas +vna fusta no terna con ellas al remo porque van que no es cosa +de creer, y con estas nauegan todas aquellas yslas que son +jnnumerables, y traten sus mercaderias. Algunas destas canoas +he visto con. lxx. y lxxx. honbres en ella, y cada vno con su remo. +En todas estas yslas no vide mucha diuersidad de la fechura dela +gente ni en las costumbres ni en la lengua, saluo que todos se +entienden, que es cosa muy singular, para lo que espero que determinaren +sus altezas para la conversacion⁠<a id="FNanchor_69" href="#Footnote_69" class="fnanchor">[69]</a> dellos de nuestra santa +fe a la qual son muy dispuestos. Ya dixe commo yo hauia andada +c. vij. leguas por la costa de la mar por la derecha liña de ocidente +a oriente por la ysla Juana, segun el qual camino puedo desir que +esta isla es mayor que inglaterra y escosia juntas por que allen +de destas c. vij. leguas, me queda de la parte de poniente dos +prouincias que yo no he andado; la vna de las quales llaman +Auan,⁠<a id="FNanchor_70" href="#Footnote_70" class="fnanchor">[70]</a> adonde nascen la gente con cola, las quales prouincias no +pueden tener en longura menos de l. o lx. leguas, segund puede⁠<a id="FNanchor_71" href="#Footnote_71" class="fnanchor">[71]</a> +entender destos jndios que yo tengo, los quales saben todas las +yslas. Esta otra española en cierco tiene mas que la españa toda +desde colunya⁠<a id="FNanchor_72" href="#Footnote_72" class="fnanchor">[72]</a> por costa de mar fasta fuente rauia en vi scaya +pues en vna quadra anduue clxxxviij.⁠<a id="FNanchor_73" href="#Footnote_73" class="fnanchor">[73]</a> grandes leguas por recta +linia de occidente a oriente. Esta es para desear, et vista, es para +nunca dexar; enla qual puesto que de todas tenga tomada possession +por sus altezas, y todas sean mas abastadas delo que yo se y +puedo dezir, y todas las tengo por de sus altezas qual dellas +pueden disponer commo y tan complidamente commo delos +Reynos de castilla. En esta española en el lugar⁠<a id="FNanchor_74" href="#Footnote_74" class="fnanchor">[74]</a> mas conuenible +y meyor comarca para las minas del oro y de todo trato, asi dela +tierra firme de aqua commo de aquella de alla del grand can, +adonde aura⁠<a id="FNanchor_75" href="#Footnote_75" class="fnanchor">[75]</a> grand trato et grand ganança, he tomado possession +de vna villa grande, ala qual puse nombre la villa de Nauidad. Y +en ella he fecho fuerça y fortaleza que ya a estas horas estara del +todo acabada, y he dexada en ella gente que abasta para semejante +fecho, con armas y artellarias et vituallas por mas de un año; y +fusta y maestro de la mar en todas artes para fazer otras, y grande +amistad con el rey de aquella tierra en tanto grado que se preciaua +de me llamar y tener por hermano; y aunque le mudasse⁠<a id="FNanchor_76" href="#Footnote_76" class="fnanchor">[76]</a> +la voluntad a offender esta gente, el ni los suyos no saben que +sean armas y andan desnudos commo ya he dicho: son los mas +temerosos que ay en el mundo, asi que solamente la gente que alla +queda, es para destroir toda aquella tierra, y es ysla syn peligro de +sus personas sabiendo se regir. En todas estas yslas me parece que +todos los honbres sean contentos con vna muger, y a su mayoral +o rey dan fasta veynte. Las mugeres me parece que trabaian +mas que los honbres, ni he podido entender si tenien bienes propios, +que me parecio ver que aquello que vno tenia todos hazian parte, +en especial de las cosas comederas. En estas yslas fasta aqui no he +hallado honbres mostrudos, commo muchos pensauan; mas antes +es toda gente de muy lindo acatamiento, ny son negros commo en +guinea, saluo con sus cabellos corredios,⁠<a id="FNanchor_77" href="#Footnote_77" class="fnanchor">[77]</a> y no se crian adonde ay +jnpeto⁠<a id="FNanchor_78" href="#Footnote_78" class="fnanchor">[78]</a> demasiado delos rayos solares. Es verdad quel sol tiene +alli grande fuerça, puesto que es didistinta⁠<a id="FNanchor_79" href="#Footnote_79" class="fnanchor">[79]</a> dela linia inquinocial +xxvi. grandes. En estas islas adonde ay montañas, ay tenida⁠<a id="FNanchor_80" href="#Footnote_80" class="fnanchor">[80]</a> a +fuerça el frio este yuierno, mas ellos lo sufren por la costumbre +que con la ayuda delas viandas que comen con⁠<a id="FNanchor_81" href="#Footnote_81" class="fnanchor">[81]</a> especias muchas y +muy calientes en demasia. Asy que mostruos no he hallado +jnnoticia,⁠<a id="FNanchor_82" href="#Footnote_82" class="fnanchor">[82]</a> saluo de una ysla⁠<a id="FNanchor_83" href="#Footnote_83" class="fnanchor">[83]</a> + que es aqui en la segunda a la entrada +de las jndias, que es poblada de vna gente que tienen en todas las +yslas por muy ferozes, los quales comen carne humana.⁠<a id="FNanchor_84" href="#Footnote_84" class="fnanchor">[84]</a> Estos +tienen muchas canaos, con las quales corren todas las yslas de +jndia: roban y toman quanto pueden. Ellos no son mas difformes +que los otros, saluo que tienen en costumbre de traer los cabellos +largos commo mugeres, y vsan arcos y flechas de las mismas +armas de cañas con vn palillo al cabo, por defecto de fierro, que +no tienen. Son feroses entre estos otros pueblos que son en demasiado +grado couardes, mas yo no lo tengo a nada mas que a los +otros. Estos son aquellos que tratan con las mugeres de matremonio,⁠<a id="FNanchor_85" href="#Footnote_85" class="fnanchor">[85]</a> +que es la primera ysla partiendo despaña para las jndias +que se falla, enla qual no ay honbre ninguno. Ellas no vsan exercicio +femenil, saluo arcos y flechas commo los sobredichos de +cañas, y se arman y cobijan con lamines de arambre, de que tienen +mucho. Otra ysla me seguran mayor que la española, en que las +personas no tienen ningun cabello. En esta ay oro sin cuenta, y +desta y de las otras traigo comigo jndios para testimonio. Y conclusion +a fablar desto solamente que sea fecho este viage, que fue +si de corrida que pueden ver sus altezas que yo les dare oro quanto +ovieren⁠<a id="FNanchor_86" href="#Footnote_86" class="fnanchor">[86]</a> menester con muy poquita ajuda que sus altezas me daran, +agora specieria y algodon quanto sus altezas mandaran cargar, y +almastica⁠<a id="FNanchor_87" href="#Footnote_87" class="fnanchor">[87]</a> quanta mandaran cargar, et dela qual fasta oy no se ha +fallado, saluo en grecia enla ysla de xio, y el señorio la vende commo +quiere, y liguñaloe quanto mandaran cargar, y esclavos quanto +mandaran cargar et seran delos ydolatres.⁠<a id="FNanchor_88" href="#Footnote_88" class="fnanchor">[88]</a> Y creo auer hallado +ruybaruo y canela y otras mil cosas de sustancia fallare, que +auran fallado la gente que yo alla dexo, por que yo no me he +detenido ningun cabo, en quanto el viento me aya dado lugar de +nauegar, solamente en la villa de Nauidad en quanto dexe asegurado +et bien asentado; y ala verdad mucho mas ficiera si los nauios me +siruieran commo razon demandaua. Esto es harto⁠<a id="FNanchor_89" href="#Footnote_89" class="fnanchor">[89]</a> y eterno dios +nuestro señor el qual da a todos aquellos que andan su camino +victoria de cosas que parecen inposibles: y esta señaladamente +fue la vna; porque avnque destas tierras ayan fallado o escripto,⁠<a id="FNanchor_90" href="#Footnote_90" class="fnanchor">[90]</a> +todo va por conlectura sin allegar devista, saluo comprendiendo +a tanto que los oyentes los mas escuchauan y juzgauan mas por +fabla que por poca⁠<a id="FNanchor_91" href="#Footnote_91" class="fnanchor">[91]</a> cosa dello.</p> + +<p>Asy que pues nuestro redentor dio victoria a nuestros illustrissimos +rey et reyna y a sus reynos famosos de tan alta cosa, +adonde toda la christianidad deve tomar alegria y fazer grandes +fiestas, y dar gracias solennes a la santa trinidad con muchas +oraciones solennes por el tanto enxalçamiento que auran, en +tornandose⁠<a id="FNanchor_92" href="#Footnote_92" class="fnanchor">[92]</a> tantos pueblosa nuestra santa fe, y despues por los +bienes temporales; que no solamente a la españa mas a todos +los cristianos ternan aqui refrigerio y ganancia. Esto segun el +fecho asi en breue⁠<a id="FNanchor_93" href="#Footnote_93" class="fnanchor">[93]</a>. Fecha enla calauera⁠<a id="FNanchor_94" href="#Footnote_94" class="fnanchor">[94]</a> + sobre las yslas de canaria⁠<a id="FNanchor_95" href="#Footnote_95" class="fnanchor">[95]</a> +a xv.⁠<a id="FNanchor_96" href="#Footnote_96" class="fnanchor">[96]</a> de febrero, Mill. y quatrocientos y nouenta y tres años.</p> + +<p>Fara⁠<a id="FNanchor_97" href="#Footnote_97" class="fnanchor">[97]</a> lo que mandereys⁠<a id="FNanchor_98" href="#Footnote_98" class="fnanchor">[98]</a>.</p> + +<p class="right"><span class="smcap">El Almirante.</span></p> + +<p>Nyma⁠<a id="FNanchor_99" href="#Footnote_99" class="fnanchor">[99]</a> que venia dentro en la carta.</p> + +<p>Despues desta escripto:⁠<a id="FNanchor_100" href="#Footnote_100" class="fnanchor">[100]</a> y estando en mar de Castilla salyo +tanto viento conmigo sul y sueste que me ha fecho descargar +los nauios por cori⁠<a id="FNanchor_101" href="#Footnote_101" class="fnanchor">[101]</a> aqui en esto puerto de lysbona oy, que fue la +mayor marauilla del mundo. Adonde acorde escriuir a sus altezas. +En todas las yndias he siempre hallado los tenporales⁠<a id="FNanchor_102" href="#Footnote_102" class="fnanchor">[102]</a> commo en +mayo. Adonde yo fuy en xxxiij.⁠<a id="FNanchor_103" href="#Footnote_103" class="fnanchor">[103]</a> + dias y bolui en xxviij.⁠<a id="FNanchor_104" href="#Footnote_104" class="fnanchor">[104]</a> salvo +questas tormentas me han detenido xiiij.⁠<a id="FNanchor_105" href="#Footnote_105" class="fnanchor">[105]</a> dias corriendo por esta +mar. Dizen aqua todos los honbres dela mar que jamas ouo tan +mal yuierno, no ni tantas perdidas de naues.⁠<a id="FNanchor_106" href="#Footnote_106" class="fnanchor">[106]</a> Fecha a. xiiij dias +de marco.</p> + +<p>Esta carta embio Colon al escrivano Deracion delas Islas +halladas en las Indias. Contenida a otra⁠<a id="FNanchor_107" href="#Footnote_107" class="fnanchor">[107]</a> de sus Altezas.</p> + +</div> + +<div class="footnotes"> + +<h3>FOOTNOTES:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_26" href="#FNanchor_26" class="label">[26]</a> The original spelling of the Ambrosian text, with all its faults, is +here preserved, with the exception of the separation of words fused together, +and the addition of punctuation and capitals for the sake of clearness. +Suggested corrections from the other texts will be placed at the +foot of each page, V. standing for Valencian text; S. for Simancas +text; I. for Italian text; L. for Latin; D. for Dati. Such misspellings +as a Spanish scholar will readily recognize as the blunders of the Spanish +printer I have not thought it necessary to notice.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_27" href="#FNanchor_27" class="label">[27]</a> From the 8th of September when Columbus sailed from the Canaries, +to the 11th of October when he first saw land, was thirty-three +days.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_28" href="#FNanchor_28" class="label">[28]</a> Watling’s Island.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_29" href="#FNanchor_29" class="label">[29]</a> Long Island.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_30" href="#FNanchor_30" class="label">[30]</a> Great Exuma.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_31" href="#FNanchor_31" class="label">[31]</a> Saometo or Crooked Island.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_32" href="#FNanchor_32" class="label">[32]</a> Cuba.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_33" href="#FNanchor_33" class="label">[33]</a> Hispaniola or San Domingo.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_34" href="#FNanchor_34" class="label">[34]</a> It should be 188 leagues. See <a href="#BIBLIOGRAPHY">Bibliographical Notice</a>.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_35" href="#FNanchor_35" class="label">[35]</a> These canes are probably the flowering stems of large grasses, similar +to the bamboo or to the arundinaria used by the natives of Guiana for +blowing arrows.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_36" href="#FNanchor_36" class="label">[36]</a> An old Spanish coin, equal to the fiftieth part of a mark of gold.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_37" href="#FNanchor_37" class="label">[37]</a> Small copper coins, equal to about the quarter of a farthing.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_38" href="#FNanchor_38" class="label">[38]</a> One <i>arroba</i> weighs twenty-five pounds.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_39" href="#FNanchor_39" class="label">[39]</a> There appears to be a doubt as to the exact number of men left by +Columbus at Española, different accounts variously giving it as thirty-seven, +thirty-eight, thirty-nine, and forty. There is, however, a list of +their names included in one of the diplomatic documents printed in +Navarrete’s work, which makes the number amount to forty, independent +of the governor Diego de Arana, and his two lieutenants Pedro Gutierrez +and Rodrigo de Escobedo. All these men were Spaniards, with the exception +of two; one an Irishman named William Ires, a native of Galway, +and one an Englishman, whose name was given as Tallarte de Lajes, but +whose native designation it is difficult to guess at. The document in +question, was a proclamation to the effect that the heirs of those men +should, on presenting at the office of public business at Seville, sufficient +proof of their being the next of kin, receive payment in conformity with +the royal order to that purpose, issued at Burgos, on the twentieth of +December, 1507.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_40" href="#FNanchor_40" class="label">[40]</a> Dominica.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_41" href="#FNanchor_41" class="label">[41]</a> Martinique.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_42" href="#FNanchor_42" class="label">[42]</a> Of Genoa. The island of Chios belonged to the Genoese Republic +from 1346 to 1566.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_43" href="#FNanchor_43" class="label">[43]</a> Habreis.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_44" href="#FNanchor_44" class="label">[44]</a> V. “pasé de las Islas de Canaria a las Indias.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_45" href="#FNanchor_45" class="label">[45]</a> V. and S. “ha dado.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_46" href="#FNanchor_46" class="label">[46]</a> V. “ahi.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_47" href="#FNanchor_47" class="label">[47]</a> So in all the texts. Senhor de Varnhagen suggests “entrado” for +“encarnado.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_48" href="#FNanchor_48" class="label">[48]</a> So in all the texts. Senhor de Varnhagen suggests “hacerme.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_49" href="#FNanchor_49" class="label">[49]</a> V. and S. “habia otra isla;” L. “aliam insulam prospexi.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_50" href="#FNanchor_50" class="label">[50]</a> V. and S. “distante.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_51" href="#FNanchor_51" class="label">[51]</a> V. “ciento e ochenta y ocho.” S. “ciento e setenta y ocho.” I. +“cento otanta otto leghe.” L. “miliaria dlxiiii.” D. “cinquecensessantaquattro +miglia.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_52" href="#FNanchor_52" class="label">[52]</a> V. “leguas la cual y todas.” S. “leguas por via reta del oriente asi +como de la Juana, la cual y todos.” I. “leghe por la dritta linea del +oriente cosi como de la Zouana.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_53" href="#FNanchor_53" class="label">[53]</a> V. “fertilisimas.” S. “fortisimas.” I. “feralissime.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_54" href="#FNanchor_54" class="label">[54]</a> V. “Teneryfe.” S. “Cetrefrey.” I. “Santaffer.” L. omitted.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_55" href="#FNanchor_55" class="label">[55]</a> V. and S. “ruiseñor.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_56" href="#FNanchor_56" class="label">[56]</a> V. and S. “pajaros.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_57" href="#FNanchor_57" class="label">[57]</a> V. and S. “seis.” I. “setto.” L. “septem.” D. “septe.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_58" href="#FNanchor_58" class="label">[58]</a> V. and S. “especies.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_59" href="#FNanchor_59" class="label">[59]</a> V. and S. “y ha havido.” I. “ho travado ho inteso.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_60" href="#FNanchor_60" class="label">[60]</a> V. “cofia.” S. “cosa.” I. “cosa.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_61" href="#FNanchor_61" class="label">[61]</a> V, “llevar.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_62" href="#FNanchor_62" class="label">[62]</a> V. and S. “aunque.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_63" href="#FNanchor_63" class="label">[63]</a> V. and S. omitted.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_64" href="#FNanchor_64" class="label">[64]</a> V. “façan.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_65" href="#FNanchor_65" class="label">[65]</a> V. and S. “ayudar.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_66" href="#FNanchor_66" class="label">[66]</a> V. and S. “reciben.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_67" href="#FNanchor_67" class="label">[67]</a> V. and S. “venieron.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_68" href="#FNanchor_68" class="label">[68]</a> “fustas.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_69" href="#FNanchor_69" class="label">[69]</a> V. and S. “conversion.” L. “conversionem.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_70" href="#FNanchor_70" class="label">[70]</a> V. “Nhan.” S. “Cibau.” L. “Anan.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_71" href="#FNanchor_71" class="label">[71]</a> V. and S. “puedo.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_72" href="#FNanchor_72" class="label">[72]</a> V. “Colibre.” S. “Colunia.” L. “Colonia.” Misread from an +abridged word in the original, which the sense of the passage would +make “Catalonia.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_73" href="#FNanchor_73" class="label">[73]</a> V. and S. “ciento treinta y ocho.” L. “miliaria dxl.” D. +“cinquecensessantoquattro miglia.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_74" href="#FNanchor_74" class="label">[74]</a> V. and S. “en lugar.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_75" href="#FNanchor_75" class="label">[75]</a> V. and S. “habra.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_76" href="#FNanchor_76" class="label">[76]</a> V. and S. “mudasen.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_77" href="#FNanchor_77" class="label">[77]</a> V. and S. “correndios.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_78" href="#FNanchor_78" class="label">[78]</a> V. “effeto.” S. “espeto.” Navarrete says that in old Spanish +“espeto” meant a “spit.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_79" href="#FNanchor_79" class="label">[79]</a> V. and S. “distante.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_80" href="#FNanchor_80" class="label">[80]</a> V. and S. “ahi tenia fuerza.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_81" href="#FNanchor_81" class="label">[81]</a> V. and S. “como son.” L. “quibus vescuntur.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_82" href="#FNanchor_82" class="label">[82]</a> V. and S. “ni noticia.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_83" href="#FNanchor_83" class="label">[83]</a> V. “isla de Quarives.” L. “insula Charis nuncupata.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_84" href="#FNanchor_84" class="label">[84]</a> V. and S. “viva.” L. “humana.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_85" href="#FNanchor_85" class="label">[85]</a> V. “que tomaban las mugeres de Matinino.” S. “que trocaban +las mugeres de matrimonio.” L. “qui coeunt cum quibusdam feminis +quæ insulam Mateunim habitant.” D. “isola decta Matanino.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_86" href="#FNanchor_86" class="label">[86]</a> V. and S. “hobieren.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_87" href="#FNanchor_87" class="label">[87]</a> V. and S. “almasiga.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_88" href="#FNanchor_88" class="label">[88]</a> In the corrupt edition of the Latin translation reprinted by Navarrete +from the <i>España Illustrada</i>, this word is rendered “hydrophilatorum.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_89" href="#FNanchor_89" class="label">[89]</a> V. and S. “cierto.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_90" href="#FNanchor_90" class="label">[90]</a> V. and S. “fablado otros.” L. “scripserunt vel locuti sunt.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_91" href="#FNanchor_91" class="label">[91]</a> V. and S. “otra.” L. “prope videbatur fabula.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_92" href="#FNanchor_92" class="label">[92]</a> V. and S. “ayuntandose.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_93" href="#FNanchor_93" class="label">[93]</a> V. and S. “esto segundo ha fecho ser muy breve.” L. “hæc ut +gesta sunt sic breviter enarrata.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_94" href="#FNanchor_94" class="label">[94]</a> V. and S. “carabela.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_95" href="#FNanchor_95" class="label">[95]</a> V. “la isla de Sa. Maria.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_96" href="#FNanchor_96" class="label">[96]</a> V. “18.” This latter date is the only one which corresponds with +the fourteen days, mentioned in the postscript, during which Columbus +was detained at sea by the weather previously to his reaching Lisbon +on the 4th of March.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_97" href="#FNanchor_97" class="label">[97]</a> V. “Para.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_98" href="#FNanchor_98" class="label">[98]</a> V. “mandaredes.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_99" href="#FNanchor_99" class="label">[99]</a> S. “Anima.” V. The entire nema wanting. The same in L. +and D.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_100" href="#FNanchor_100" class="label">[100]</a> S. “escrita.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_101" href="#FNanchor_101" class="label">[101]</a> S. “correr.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_102" href="#FNanchor_102" class="label">[102]</a> S. “tiempos.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_103" href="#FNanchor_103" class="label">[103]</a> S. “noventa y tres.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_104" href="#FNanchor_104" class="label">[104]</a> S. “setenta y ocho.” Both are wrong. It should be forty-eight, +from January 16 to March 4.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_105" href="#FNanchor_105" class="label">[105]</a> S. “trece.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_106" href="#FNanchor_106" class="label">[106]</a> S. “los quatro.” Columbus really arrived at Lisbon on the 4th of +March. For an explanation of this discrepancy, see <a href="#BIBLIOGRAPHY">Bibliographical Notice</a>.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_107" href="#FNanchor_107" class="label">[107]</a> S. “Indias e otra.”</p></div> + +</div> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="english"> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_19">[19]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="SECOND_VOYAGE_OF_COLUMBUS">SECOND VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS.</h2> + +<h3 class="hanging"><i>A Letter addressed to the Chapter of Seville by Dr. Chanca,⁠<a id="FNanchor_108" href="#Footnote_108" class="fnanchor">[108]</a> +native of that city, and physician to the fleet of Columbus, +in his second voyage to the West Indies, describing the +principal events which occurred during that voyage.</i></h3> + +<p>Most noble sir,—Since the occurrences which I relate in +private letters to other persons, are not of such general interest +as those which are contained in this epistle, I have +resolved to give you a distinct narrative of the events of our +voyage, as well as to treat of the other matters which form +the subject of my petition to you. The news I have to communicate +are as follows: The expedition which their Catholic +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_20">[20]</span>Majesties sent, by Divine permission, from Spain to the +Indies, under the command of Christopher Columbus, admiral +of the ocean, left Cadiz on the twenty-fifth of September, +of the year ⁠<a id="FNanchor_109" href="#Footnote_109" class="fnanchor lacuna">[109]</a>, with wind and weather favourable +for the voyage. This wind lasted two days, during which +time we managed to make nearly fifty leagues. The weather +then changing, we made little or no progress for the +next two days; it pleased God, however, after this, to restore +us fine weather, so that in two days more we reached +the Great Canary. Here we put into harbour, which we +were obliged to do, to repair one of the ships which made a +great deal of water; we remained all that day, and on the +following set sail again, but were several times becalmed, +so that we were four or five days before we reached Gomera. +We had to remain at Gomera one day to lay in our stores of +meat, wood, and as much water as we could stow, preparatory +to the long voyage which we expected to make without seeing +land: thus through the delay at these two ports, and being +calmed the day after leaving Gomera, we were nineteen or +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_21">[21]</span>twenty days before we arrived at the Island of Ferro. After +this we had, by the goodness of God, a return of fine weather, +more continuous than any fleet ever enjoyed during so +long a voyage; so that leaving Ferro on the thirteenth of +October, within twenty days we came in sight of land: and +we should have seen it in fourteen or fifteen days, if the +ship <i>Capitana</i> had been as good a sailer as the other vessels; +for many times the others had to shorten sail, because +they were leaving us much behind. During all this time we +had great good fortune, for throughout the voyage we encountered +no storm, with the exception of one on St. Simon’s +eve, which for four hours put us in considerable jeopardy.</p> + +<p>On the first Sunday after All Saints, namely, the third +of November, about dawn, a pilot of the ship <i>Capitana</i> +cried out “The reward, I see the land!”</p> + +<p>The joy of the people was so great, that it was wonderful +to hear their cries and exclamations of pleasure; and they +had good reason to be delighted, for they had become so +wearied of bad living, and of working the water out of the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_22">[22]</span>ships, that all sighed most anxiously for land. The pilots of +the fleet reckoned on that day, that between leaving Ferro +and first reaching land, we had made eight hundred leagues; +others said seven hundred and eighty (so that the difference +was not great), and three hundred more between Ferro and +Cadiz, making in all eleven hundred leagues; I do not +therefore feel as one who had not seen enough of the water. +On the morning of the aforesaid Sunday, we saw lying before +us an island, and soon on the right hand another appeared: +the first⁠<a id="FNanchor_110" href="#Footnote_110" class="fnanchor">[110]</a> was high and mountainous, on the side nearest to +us; the other⁠<a id="FNanchor_111" href="#Footnote_111" class="fnanchor">[111]</a> flat, and very thickly wooded: as soon as it +became lighter, other islands began to appear on both sides; +so that on that day, there were six islands to be seen lying +in different directions, and most of them of considerable +size. We directed our course towards that which we had +first seen, and reaching the coast, we proceeded more than +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_23">[23]</span>a league in search of a port where we might anchor, but +without finding one: all that part of the island which met our +view, appeared mountainous, very beautiful, and green even +up to the water, which was delightful to see, for at that season +there is scarcely any thing green in our own country. When +we found that there was no harbour there,⁠<a id="FNanchor_112" href="#Footnote_112" class="fnanchor">[112]</a> the admiral decided +that we should go to the other island, which appeared +on the right, and which was at four or five leagues distance: +one vessel however still remained on the first island all that +day seeking for a harbour, in case it should be necessary to +return thither. At length, having found a good one, where +they saw both people and dwellings, they returned that night +to the fleet, which had put into harbour at the other island,⁠<a id="FNanchor_113" href="#Footnote_113" class="fnanchor">[113]</a> +and there the admiral, accompanied by a great number of +men, landed with the royal banner in his hands, and took +formal possession on behalf of their Majesties. This island +was filled with an astonishingly thick growth of wood; the +variety of unknown trees, some bearing fruit and some +flowers, was surprising, and indeed every spot was covered +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_24">[24]</span>with verdure. We found there a tree whose leaf had the +finest smell of cloves that I have ever met with; it was like +a laurel leaf, but not so large: but I think it was a species +of laurel. There were wild fruits of various kinds, some of +which our men, not very prudently, tasted; and upon only +touching them with their tongues, their countenances became +inflamed,⁠<a id="FNanchor_114" href="#Footnote_114" class="fnanchor">[114]</a> and such great heat and pain followed, that +they seemed to be mad, and were obliged to resort to refrigerants +to cure themselves. We found no signs of any people +in this island, and concluded it was uninhabited; we remained +only two hours, for it was very late when we landed, and on the +following morning we left for another very large island,⁠<a id="FNanchor_115" href="#Footnote_115" class="fnanchor">[115]</a> situated +below this at the distance of seven or eight leagues. We +approached it under the side of a great mountain, that seemed +almost to reach the skies, in the middle of which rose a peak +higher than all the rest of the mountain, whence many +streams diverged into different channels, especially towards +the part at which we arrived. At three leagues distance, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_25">[25]</span>we could see an immense fall of water, which looked of +the breadth of an ox, and discharged itself from such a +height that it appeared to fall from the sky; it was seen from +so great a distance that it occasioned many wagers to be laid +on board the ships, some maintaining that it was but a series +of white rocks, and others that it was water. When we came +nearer to it, it showed itself distinctly, and it was the most +beautiful thing in the world to see from how great a height +and from what a small space so large a fall of water was discharged. +As soon as we neared the island the admiral ordered +a light caravel to run along the coast to search for a +harbour; the captain put into land in a boat, and seeing some +houses, leapt on shore and went up to them, the inhabitants +fleeing at sight of our men; he then went into the houses +and there found various household articles that had been left +unremoved, from which he took two parrots, very large and +quite different from any we had before seen; he found a great +quantity of cotton, both spun and prepared for spinning, and +articles of food, of all of which he brought away a portion; +besides these, he also brought away four or five bones of +human arms and legs. On seeing these we suspected that +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_26">[26]</span>we were amongst the Caribbee islands, whose inhabitants +eat human flesh; for the admiral, guided by the information +respecting their situation which he had received from the +Indians of the islands discovered in his former voyage, had +directed his course with a view to their discovery, both because +they were the nearest to Spain, and because this was +the direct track for the island of Española, where he had left +some of his people. Thither, by the goodness of God and the +wise management of the admiral, we came in as straight a +track as if we had sailed by a well known and frequented +route. This island is very large, and on the side where we +arrived it seemed to us to be twenty-five leagues in length. +We sailed more than two leagues along the shore in search of +a harbour. On the part towards which we moved appeared +very high mountains, and on that which we left extensive +plains; on the sea coast there were a few small villages, whose +inhabitants fled as soon as they saw the sails. At length after +proceeding two leagues we found a port late in the evening. +That night the admiral resolved that some of the men should +land at break of day in order to confer with the natives, and +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_27">[27]</span>learn what sort of people they were; although it was suspected, +from the appearance of those who had fled at our +approach, that they were naked, like those whom the admiral +had seen in his former voyage. In the morning several detachments +under their respective captains sallied forth; one +of them returned at the dinner hour, with a boy of about +fourteen years of age, as it afterwards appeared, who said that +he was one of the prisoners taken by these people. The +others divided themselves, and one party took a little boy, +whom a man was leading by the hand, but who left him and +fled; this boy they sent on board immediately with some of +our men; others remained, and took certain women, natives +of the island, together with other women from among the +captives who came of their own accord. One captain of this +last company, not knowing that any intelligence of the people +had been obtained, advanced farther into the island and lost +himself, with the six men who accompanied him: they could +not find their way back until after four days, when they lighted +upon the sea shore, and following the line of coast returned to +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_28">[28]</span>the fleet.⁠<a id="FNanchor_116" href="#Footnote_116" class="fnanchor">[116]</a> We had already looked upon them as killed and +eaten by the people that are called Caribbees; for we could +not account for their long absence in any other way, since +they had among them some pilots who by their knowledge of +the stars could navigate either to or from Spain, so that we +imagined that they could not lose themselves in so small a +space. On this first day of our landing several men and +women came on the beach up to the water’s edge, and gazed +at the ships in astonishment at so novel a sight; and when +a boat pushed on shore in order to speak with them, they +cried out “tayno tayno,” which is as much as to say, “good,” +and waited for the landing of the sailors, standing by the boat +in such a manner that they might escape when they pleased. +The result was, that none of the men could be persuaded to +join us, and only two were taken by force, who were secured +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_29">[29]</span>and led away. More than twenty of the female captives were +taken with their own consent, and other women natives of the +island were surprised and carried off: several of the boys, +who were captives, came to us fleeing from the natives of the +island who had taken them prisoners. We remained eight +days in this port in consequence of the loss of the aforesaid +captain, and went many times on shore, passing amongst the +dwellings and villages which were on the coast; we found a +vast number of human bones and skulls hung up about the +houses, like vessels intended for holding various things. +There were very few men to be seen here, and the women informed +us that this was in consequence of ten canoes having +gone to make an attack upon other islands. These islanders +appeared to us to be more civilised than those that we had +hitherto seen; for although all the Indians have houses of +straw, yet the houses of these people are constructed in a +much superior fashion, are better stocked with provisions, +and exhibit more evidences of industry, both on the part of +the men and the women. They had a considerable quantity +of cotton, both spun and prepared for spinning, and many +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_30">[30]</span>cotton sheets, so well woven as to be no way inferior to those +of our country. We inquired of the women, who were prisoners +in the island, what people these islanders were: they +replied that they were Caribbees. As soon as they learned +that we abhorred such people, on account of their evil practice +of eating human flesh, they were much delighted; and, +after that, if they brought forward any woman or man of the +Caribbees, they informed us (but secretly), that they were +such, still evincing by their dread of their conquerors, that +they belonged to a vanquished nation, though they knew +them all to be in our power.</p> + +<p>We were enabled to distinguish which of the women were +natives, and which were captives, by the Caribbees wearing +on each leg two bands of woven cotton, the one fastened +round the knee, and the other round the ankle; by this means +they make the calves of their legs large, and the above-mentioned +parts very small, which I imagine that they regard as +a matter of prettiness: by this peculiarity we distinguished +them. The habits of these Caribbees are brutal. There are +three islands: the one called Turuqueira; the other, which +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_31">[31]</span>was the first that we saw, is called Ceyre;⁠<a id="FNanchor_117" href="#Footnote_117" class="fnanchor">[117]</a> the third is called +Ayay: there is a resemblance among the natives of all these, +as if they were of one race, and they do no injury to each other; +but each and all of them wage war against the other neighbouring +islands, and for the purpose of attacking them, make voyages +of a hundred and fifty leagues at sea, with their numerous +canoes, which are a small kind of craft made out of a single +trunk of a tree. Their arms are arrows, in the place of iron +weapons, and as they have no iron, some of them point their +arrows with tortoise-shell, and others make their arrow heads +of fish spines, which are naturally barbed like coarse saws: +these prove dangerous weapons to a naked people like the +Indians, and may cause death or severe injury, but to men of +our nation they are not very formidable. In their attacks +upon the neighbouring islands, these people capture as many +of the women as they can, especially those who are young and +beautiful, and keep them as concubines; and so great a +number do they carry off, that in fifty houses no men were +to be seen; and out of the number of the captives, more +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_32">[32]</span>than twenty were young girls. These women also say that +the Caribbees use them with such cruelty as would scarcely +be believed; and that they eat the children which they bear +to them, and only bring up those which they have by their +native wives. Such of their male enemies as they can take +alive, they bring to their houses to make a feast of them, and +those who are killed they devour at once. They say that +man’s flesh is so good, that there is nothing like it in the +world; and this is pretty evident, for of the bones which we +found in their houses, they had gnawed everything that could +be gnawed, so that nothing remained of them but what was +too tough to be eaten: in one of the houses we found the +neck of a man, undergoing the process of cooking in a pot. +When they take any boys prisoners, they dismember them, +and make use of them until they grow up to manhood, and +then when they wish to make a feast they kill and eat them, +for they say that the flesh of boys and women is not good to +eat. Three of these boys came fleeing to us thus mutilated.</p> + +<p>At the end of four days arrived the captain who had lost +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_33">[33]</span>himself with his companions, of whose return we had by this +time given up all hope; for other parties had been twice sent +out to seek him, one of which came back on the same day +that he rejoined us, without having gained any information +respecting the wanderers: we rejoiced at their arrival, regarding +it as a new accession to our numbers. The captain +and the men who accompanied him brought back some women +and boys, ten in number. Neither this party, nor those who +went out to seek them, had seen any of the men of the island, +which must have arisen either from their having fled, or possibly +from their being but very few men in that locality; for, +as the women informed us, ten canoes had gone away to make +an attack upon the neighbouring islands. The wanderers had +returned from the mountains in such an emaciated condition, +that it was distressing to see them. When we asked them how +it was that they lost themselves, they said that the trees were +so thick and close that they could not see the sky. Some +of them who were mariners had climbed the trees to get a +sight of the stars, but could never see them, and if they had +not found their way to the sea coast, it would have been impossible +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_34">[34]</span>to have returned to the fleet. We left this island +eight days after our arrival.⁠<a id="FNanchor_118" href="#Footnote_118" class="fnanchor">[118]</a> The next day at noon we saw +another island,⁠<a id="FNanchor_119" href="#Footnote_119" class="fnanchor">[119]</a> not very large, at about twelve leagues distance +from the one we were leaving. The greater part of the +first day of our departure we were kept close in to the coast +of this island by a calm, but as the Indian women whom we +brought with us said that it was not inhabited, but had been +dispeopled by the Caribbees, we made no stay in it. On that +evening we saw another island:⁠<a id="FNanchor_120" href="#Footnote_120" class="fnanchor">[120]</a> and in the night finding +there were some sand-banks near, we dropped anchor, not +venturing to proceed until the morning. On the morrow +another island⁠<a id="FNanchor_121" href="#Footnote_121" class="fnanchor">[121]</a> appeared, of considerable size, but we touched +at none of these because we were anxious to convey consolation +to our people who had been left in Española; but it +did not please God to grant us our desire, as will hereafter +appear. Another day at the dinner hour we arrived at an +island⁠<a id="FNanchor_122" href="#Footnote_122" class="fnanchor">[122]</a> which seemed worth the finding, for judging by the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_35">[35]</span>extent of cultivation in it, it appeared very populous. We +went thither and put into harbour, when the admiral immediately +sent on shore a well manned barge to hold speech +with the Indians, in order to ascertain what race they were, +and also because it was necessary to gain some information +respecting our course; although it afterwards plainly appeared +that the admiral, who had never made that passage +before, had taken a very correct route. But as matters of +doubt should always be brought to as great a certainty +as possible by inquiry, he wished the natives to be communicated +with, and some of the men who went in the +barge landed and went up to a village, whence the inhabitants +had already withdrawn and hidden themselves. They +took in this island five or six women and some boys, most +of whom were captives, like those in the other island; for, +as we learned from the women whom we had brought with +us, the natives of this place also were Caribbees. As this +barge was about to return to the ships with the capture +which they had made, a canoe came along the coast containing +four men, two women, and a boy; and when they saw +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_36">[36]</span>the fleet they were so stupified with amazement, that for a +good hour they remained motionless at the distance of nearly +two gunshots from the ships. In this position they were +seen by those who were in the barge and also by all the +fleet. Meanwhile those in the barge moved towards the +canoe, but so close in shore, that the Indians, in their perplexity +and astonishment as to what all this could mean, +never saw them, until they were so near that escape was impossible; +for our men pressed on them so rapidly that they +could not get away, although they made considerable effort +to do so.</p> + +<p>When the Caribbees saw that all attempt at flight was +useless, they most courageously took to their bows, both +women and men; I say most courageously, because they +were only four men and two women, and our people were +twenty-five in number. Two of our men were wounded by +the Indians, one with two arrow-shots in his breast, and +another with one in his side, and if it had not happened that +they carried shields and wooden bucklers, and that they soon +got near them with the barge and upset their canoe, most of +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_37">[37]</span>them would have been killed with their arrows. After their +canoe was upset, they remained in the water swimming and +occasionally wading (for there were shallows in that part), +still using their bows as much as they could, so that our men +had enough to do to take them: and after all there was one +of them whom they were unable to secure till he had received +a mortal wound with a lance, and whom thus wounded they +took to the ships. The difference between these Caribbees +and the other Indians, with respect to dress, consists in their +wearing their hair very long, while the others have it clipt +irregularly and paint their heads with crosses and a hundred +thousand different devices, each according to his fancy; +which they do with sharpened reeds. All of them, both the +Caribbees and the others, are beardless, so that it is a rare +thing to find a man with a beard: the Caribbees whom we +took had their eyes and eyebrows stained, which I imagine +they do from ostentation. It gave them a more formidable +appearance. One of these captives said, that in an island +belonging to them called Cayre⁠<a id="FNanchor_123" href="#Footnote_123" class="fnanchor">[123]</a> (which is the first that we +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_38">[38]</span>saw, though we did not go to it), there is a great quantity +of gold; and that if we were to take them nails and tools +with which to make their canoes, we might bring away as +much gold as we liked. On the same day we left that island, +having been there no more than six or seven hours; and, +steering for another point of land⁠<a id="FNanchor_124" href="#Footnote_124" class="fnanchor">[124]</a> which appeared to lie in +our intended course, we reached it by night. On the morning +of the following day we coasted along it, and found it to +be a large extent of country, but not continuous, for it was +divided into more than forty islets.⁠<a id="FNanchor_125" href="#Footnote_125" class="fnanchor">[125]</a> The land was very high +and most of it barren, an appearance which we have never +observed in any of the islands visited by us before or since: +the surface of the ground seemed to suggest the probability +of its containing metals. None of us went on shore here, +but a small latteen caravel went up to one of the islets and +found in it some fishermen’s huts; the Indian women whom +we brought with us said they were not inhabited. We proceeded +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_39">[39]</span>along the coast the greater part of that day, and on +the evening of the next we discovered another island called +Burenquen,⁠<a id="FNanchor_126" href="#Footnote_126" class="fnanchor">[126]</a> which we judged to be thirty leagues in length, +for we were coasting along it the whole of one day. This +island is very beautiful and apparently fertile: hither the +Caribbees come with the view of subduing the inhabitants, +and often carry away many of the people. These islanders +have no boats nor any knowledge of navigation; but, as our +captives inform us, they use bows as well as the Caribbees, +and if by chance when they are attacked they succeed in +taking any of their invaders, they will eat them in like manner +as the Caribbees themselves in the contrary event would +devour them. We remained two days in this island, and a +great number of our men went on shore, but could never +get speech of the natives, who had all fled, from fear of the +Caribbees. All the above-mentioned islands were discovered +in this voyage, the admiral having seen nothing of them in +his former voyage. They are all very beautiful and possess +a most luxuriant soil, but this last island appeared to exceed +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_40">[40]</span>all the others in beauty. Here terminated the islands, which +on the side towards Spain had not been seen before by the +admiral, although we regard it as a matter of certainty that +there is land more than forty leagues beyond the foremost of +these newly discovered islands, on the side nearest to Spain. +We believe this to be the case, because, two days before we +saw land, we observed some birds called rabihorcados (or +pelicans), marine birds of prey which do not sit or sleep upon +the water, making circumvolutions in the air at the close of +evening previous to taking their flight towards land for the +night. These birds could not be going to settle at more +than twelve or fifteen leagues distance, because it was late +in the evening, and this was on our right hand on the side +towards Spain; from which we all judged that there was +land there still undiscovered; but we did not go in search +of it, because it would have taken us round out of our intended +route. I hope that in a few voyages it will be discovered. +It was at dawn that we left the before-mentioned +island of Burenquen,⁠<a id="FNanchor_127" href="#Footnote_127" class="fnanchor">[127]</a> and on that day before nightfall we +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_41">[41]</span>caught sight of land, which though not recognized by any +of those who had come hither in the former voyage, we believed +to be Española, from the information given us by the +Indian women whom we had with us: and in this island we +remain at present.⁠<a id="FNanchor_128" href="#Footnote_128" class="fnanchor">[128]</a> + Between it and Burenquen⁠<a id="FNanchor_129" href="#Footnote_129" class="fnanchor">[129]</a> another +island appeared at a distance, but of no great size. When +we reached Española the land, at the part where we approached +it, was low and very flat,⁠<a id="FNanchor_130" href="#Footnote_130" class="fnanchor">[130]</a> on seeing which, a general +doubt arose as to its identity; for, neither the admiral +nor his companions, on the previous voyage, had seen it on +this side.</p> + +<p>The island being large, is divided into provinces; the +part which we first touched at, is called Hayti; another province +adjoining it, they call Xamaná; and the next province +is named Bohio, where we now are. These provinces are +again subdivided, for they are of great extent. Those who +have seen the length of its coast, state that it is two hundred +leagues long, and I, myself, should judge it not to be +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_42">[42]</span>less than a hundred and fifty leagues: as to its breadth, nothing +is hitherto known; it is now forty days since a caravel +left us with the view of circumnavigating it, and is not yet +returned.⁠<a id="FNanchor_131" href="#Footnote_131" class="fnanchor">[131]</a> The country is very remarkable, and contains a +vast number of large rivers, and extensive chains of mountains, +with broad open valleys, and the mountains are very +high: it does not appear that the grass is ever cut throughout +the year. I do not think that they have any winter in +this part, for at Christmas were found many birds-nests, +some containing the young birds, and others containing +eggs. No four-footed animal has ever been seen in this or +any of the other islands, except some dogs of various colours, +as in our own country, but in shape like large house-dogs; +and also some little animals, in colour, size, and fur, like a +rabbit, with long tails, and feet like those of a rat; these +animals climb up the trees, and many who have tasted them, +say they are very good to eat:⁠<a id="FNanchor_132" href="#Footnote_132" class="fnanchor">[132]</a> there are not any wild +beasts. There are great numbers of small snakes, and some +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_43">[43]</span>lizards, but not many; for the Indians consider them as +great a luxury as we do pheasants: they are of the same +size as ours, but different in shape. In a small adjacent +island⁠<a id="FNanchor_133" href="#Footnote_133" class="fnanchor">[133]</a> (close by a harbour called Monte Christo, where we +stayed several days), our men saw an enormous kind of +lizard, which they said was as large round as a calf,⁠<a id="FNanchor_134" href="#Footnote_134" class="fnanchor">[134]</a> with a +tail as long as a lance, which they often went out to kill: +but bulky as it was, it got into the sea, so that they could +not catch it. There are, both in this and the other islands, +an infinite number of birds like those in our own country, +and many others such as we had never seen. No kind of +domestic fowl has been seen here, with the exception of +some ducks in the houses in Zuruquia; these ducks were +larger than those of Spain, though smaller than geese,—very +pretty, with flat crests, most of them as white as snow, +but some black.</p> + +<p>We ran along the coast of this island nearly a hundred +leagues, concluding, that within this range we should find +the spot where the admiral had left some of his men, and +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_44">[44]</span>which we supposed to be about the middle of the coast. As +we passed by the province called Xamaná, we sent on shore +one of the Indians, who had been taken in the previous voyage, +clothed, and carrying some trifles, which the admiral +had ordered to be given him. On that day died one of our +sailors, a Biscayan, who had been wounded in the affray with +the Caribbees, when they were captured, as I have already +described, through their want of caution. As we were proceeding +along the coast, an opportunity was afforded for a +boat to go on shore to bury him, the boat being accompanied +by two caravels to protect it. When they reached the +shore, a great number of Indians came out to the boat, some +of them wearing necklaces and ear-rings of gold, and expressed +a wish to accompany the Spaniards to the ships; +but our men refused to take them, because they had not received +permission from the admiral. When the Indians +found that they would not take them, two of them got into +a small canoe, and went up to one of the caravels that had +put in to shore; they were received on board with great +kindness, and taken to the admiral’s ship, where, through +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_45">[45]</span>the medium of an interpreter, they related that a certain +king had sent them to ascertain who we were, and to invite +us to land, adding that they had plenty of gold, and also of +provisions, to which we should be welcome. The admiral +desired that shirts, and caps, and other trifles, should be +given to each of them, and said that as he was going to the +place where Guacamari dwelt, he would not stop then, but +that on a future day they would have an opportunity of seeing +him, and with that they departed. We continued our route +till we came to an harbour called Monte Cristi, where we +remained two days, in order to observe the position of the +land; for the admiral had an objection to the spot where his +men had been left with the view of forming a station. We +went on shore therefore to observe the formation of the +land. There was a large river of excellent water close by;⁠<a id="FNanchor_135" href="#Footnote_135" class="fnanchor">[135]</a> +but the ground was inundated, and very ill-calculated for +habitation. As we went on making our observations on the +river and the land, some of our men found two dead bodies +by the river’s side, one with a rope round his neck, and the +other with one round his foot: this was on the first day of +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_46">[46]</span>our landing. On the following day they found two other +corpses farther on, and one of these was observed to have a +great quantity of beard. This was regarded as a very suspicious +circumstance by many of our people, because, as I have +already said, all the Indians are beardless. This harbour is +twelve leagues from the place where the Spaniards had been +left under the protection of Guacamari, the king of that province, +whom I suppose to be one of the chief men of the +island. After two days we set sail for that spot, but as +it was late when we arrived,⁠<a id="FNanchor_136" href="#Footnote_136" class="fnanchor">[136]</a> and there were some shoals, +where the admiral’s ship had been lost, we did not venture +to put in close to the shore, but remained that night at a +little less than a league from the coast, waiting until the +morning, when we might enter securely. On that evening, +a canoe, containing five or six Indians, came out at a considerable +distance from where we were, and approached us +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_47">[47]</span>with great celerity. The admiral believing that he insured +our safety by keeping the sails set, would not wait for them; +they, however, perseveringly rowed up to us within gunshot, +and then stopped to look at us; but when they saw +that we did not wait for them, they put back and went away. +After we had anchored that night at the spot in question,⁠<a id="FNanchor_137" href="#Footnote_137" class="fnanchor">[137]</a> +the admiral ordered two guns to be fired, to see if the Spaniards, +who had remained with Guacamari, would fire in return, +for they also had guns with them; but when we received +no reply, and could not perceive any fires, nor the +slightest symptom of habitations on the spot, the spirits of +our people became much depressed, and they began to entertain +the suspicion which the circumstances were naturally +calculated to excite. While all were in this desponding +mood, and when four or five hours of the night had passed +away, the same canoe which we had seen in the evening, +came up, and the Indians with a loud voice addressed the +captain of the caravel which they first approached, inquiring +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_48">[48]</span>for the admiral; they were conducted to the admiral’s vessel, +but would not go on board till he had spoken to them, and +they had asked for a light, in order to assure themselves +that it was he who conversed with them. One of them was +a cousin of Guacamari, who had been sent by him once before: +it appeared, that after they had turned back the previous +evening, they had been charged by Guacamari with +two masks of gold as a present; one for the admiral, the +other for a captain who had accompanied him on the former +voyage. They remained on board for three hours, talking +with the admiral in the presence of all of us, he showing +much pleasure in their conversation, and inquiring respecting +the welfare of the Spaniards whom he had left behind. +Guacamari’s cousin replied, that those who remained were +all well, but that some of them had died of disease, and others +had been killed in quarrels that had arisen amongst them: +he said also that the province had been invaded, by two +kings named Caonabó and Mayreni, who had burned the +habitations of the people; and that Guacamari was at some +distance, lying ill of a wound in his leg, which was the occasion +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_49">[49]</span>of his not appearing, but that he would come on the +next day. The Indians then departed, saying they would +return on the following day with the said Guacamari, and +left us consoled for that night. Next morning we looked for +Guacamari’s arrival; and, meanwhile, some of our men landed +by command of the admiral, and went to the spot where the +Spaniards had formerly been: they found the building which +they had inhabited, and which they had in some degree fortified +with a palisade, burnt and levelled with the ground; +they found also some rags and stuffs which the Indians had +brought to throw upon the house. They observed too that +the Indians who were seen near the spot, looked very shy, +and dared not approach, but, on the contrary, fled from +them. This we thought did not look well; for the admiral +had told us that in the former voyage, when he arrived at +this place, so many came in canoes to see our people, that +there was no keeping them off; and as we now noticed that +they were suspicious of us, it gave us a very unfavourable +impression. We threw trifles, such as buttons and beads, +towards them, in order to conciliate them, but only four, a +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_50">[50]</span>relation of Guacamari’s and three others, took courage to +enter the boat, and were rowed on board. When they were +asked concerning the Spaniards, they replied that all of +them were dead: we had been told this already by one of +the Indians whom we had brought from Spain, and who had +conversed with the two Indians that on the former occasion +came on board with their canoe, but we had not believed it. +Guacamari’s kinsman was asked who had killed them: he +replied that king Caonabó and king Mayreni had made an +attack upon them, and burnt the buildings on the spot, +that many were wounded in the affray, and among them +Guacamari, who had received a wound in his thigh, and had +retired to some distance: he also stated that he wished to +go and fetch him; upon which some trifles were given to +him, and he took his departure for the place of Guacamari’s +abode. All that day we remained in expectation of them, +and when we saw that they did not come, many suspected +that the Indians who had been on board the night before, +had been drowned; for they had had wine given them two +or three times, and they had come in a small canoe that +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_51">[51]</span>might be easily upset. The next morning the admiral went +on shore, taking some of us with him; we went to the spot +where the settlement had been, and found it utterly destroyed +by fire, and the clothes of the Spaniards lying about +upon the grass, but on that occasion we saw no dead body. +There were many different opinions amongst us; some suspecting +that Guacamari himself was concerned in the betrayal +and death of the Christians; others thought not, because +his own residence was burnt: so that it remained a +very doubtful question. The admiral ordered all the ground +which had been occupied by the fortifications of the Spaniards +to be searched, for he had left orders with them to +bury all the gold that they might get. While this was being +done, the admiral wished to examine a spot at about a +league’s distance, which seemed to be suitable for building +a town, for there was yet time to do so;—and some of us +went thither with him, making our observations of the land +as we went along the coast, until we reached a village of +seven or eight houses, which the Indians forsook when they +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_52">[52]</span>saw us approach, carrying away what they could, and leaving +the things which they could not remove, hidden amongst +the grass, around the houses. These people are so degraded +that they have not even the sense to select a fitting place to +live in; those who dwell on the shore, build for themselves +the most miserable hovels that can be imagined, and all the +houses are so covered with grass and dampness, that I wonder +how they can contrive to exist. In these houses we +found many things belonging to the Spaniards, which it +could not be supposed they would have bartered; such as a +very handsome Moorish mantle, which had not been unfolded +since it was brought from Spain, stockings and pieces +of cloth, also an anchor belonging to the ship which the admiral +had lost here on the previous voyage; with other +articles, which the more confirmed our suspicions. On examining +some things which had been very cautiously sewn +up in a small basket, we found a man’s head wrapped up +with great care; this we judged might be the head of a +father, or mother, or of some person whom they much regarded: +I have since heard that many were found in the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_53">[53]</span>same state, which makes me believe that our first impression +was the true one. After this we returned. We went +on the same day to the site of the settlement; and when we +arrived, we found many Indians, who had regained their +courage, bartering gold with our men: they had bartered +to the extent of a mark: we also learned that they had shown +where the bodies of eleven of the dead Spaniards were laid, +which were already covered with the grass that had grown +over them; and they all with one voice asserted that Caonabó +and Mayreni had killed them; but notwithstanding all +this, we began to hear complaints that one of the Spaniards +had taken three women to himself, and another four, from +whence we drew the inference that jealousy was the cause +of the misfortune that had occurred. On the next morning, +as no spot in that vicinity appeared suitable for our making +a settlement, the admiral ordered a caravel to go in one +direction to look for a convenient locality, while some of us +went with him another way. In the course of our explorations, +we discovered a harbour of great security; the neighbourhood +of which, so far as regarded the formation of the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_54">[54]</span>land, was excellent for habitation; but as it was far from +any mine of gold, the proximity of which was very desirable, +the admiral decided that we should settle in some +spot which would give us greater certainty of attaining that +object, provided the position of the land should prove equally +convenient. On our return, we found the other caravel +arrived, in which Melchior and four or five other trustworthy +men had been exploring with a similar object. They reported +that as they went along the coast, a canoe came out to them +containing two Indians, one of whom was the brother of +Guacamari, and was recognised by a pilot who was in the +caravel. When he questioned them as to their purpose, +they replied that Guacamari sent to beg the Spaniards to +come on shore, as he was residing near, with as many as +fifty families around him. The chief men of the party then +went on shore in the boat, and proceeding to the place +where Guacamari was, found him stretched on his bed, complaining +of a severe wound. They conferred with him, and +inquired respecting the Spaniards; his reply was in accordance +with the account already given by the others, viz.—that +they had been killed by Caonabó and Mayreni, who +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_55">[55]</span>also had wounded him in the thigh. In confirmation of +his assertion, he showed them the limb bound up, on +seeing which, they concluded that his statement was correct. +At their departure he gave to each of them a jewel of gold, +according to his estimate of their respective merits. The +Indians beat the gold into very thin plates, in order to +make masks of it, and set it in a cement which they make +for that purpose. Other ornaments they make of it, to wear +on the head and to hang in the ears and nostrils, and for +these also they require it to be thin. It is not the costliness +of the gold that they value in their ornaments, but its +showy appearance. Guacamari desired them by signs as well +as he was able, to tell the admiral that as he was thus +wounded, he prayed him to have the goodness to come to +see him. The sailors told this to the admiral when he +arrived, and he resolved to go the next morning, for the +spot could be reached in three hours, being scarcely three +leagues distance from the place where we were; but as it +would be the dinner-hour when we arrived, we dined before +we went on shore. After dinner, the admiral gave +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_56">[56]</span>orders that all the captains should come with their barges +to proceed to the shore, for already on that morning, previous +to our departure, the aforesaid brother of Guacamari +had come to speak to the admiral to urge his visit. Then +the admiral went on shore accompanied by all the principal +officers, so richly dressed that they would have made a distinguished +appearance even in any of our chief cities: he +took with him some articles as presents, having already received +from Guacamari a certain quantity of gold, and it +was reasonable that he should make a commensurate response +to his acts and expressions of good-will: Guacamari +had also provided himself with a present. When we arrived, +we found him stretched upon his bed, which was made of +cotton net-work, and, according to their custom, suspended.⁠<a id="FNanchor_138" href="#Footnote_138" class="fnanchor">[138]</a> +He did not arise, but from his bed made the best gesture of +courtesy of which he was capable. He showed much feeling; +with tears in his eyes lamented the death of the Spaniards, and +began by explaining to the best of his power, how some died +of disease, others had gone to Caonabó in search of the mine +of gold, and had there been killed, and that the rest had +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_57">[57]</span>been attacked and slain in their own town. According to +the appearance of the dead bodies, it was not two months +since this had happened. He then presented the admiral +with eight marks and a half of gold, five or six hundred +pieces of jewellery of various colours, and a cap with similar +jewel-work, which I think they must value very highly, +because in it was a jewel which was presented with great +reverence. It appears to me that these people put more +value upon copper than gold. The surgeon of the fleet and +myself being present, the admiral told Guacamari that we +were skilled in the treatment of human disorders, and wished +that he would shew us his wound. He replied that he was +willing; upon which I said it would be necessary that he +should, if possible, go out of the house, because we could +not see well on account of the place being darkened by the +throng of people; to this he consented, I think more from +timidity than inclination, and left the house leaning on the +arm of the admiral. After he was seated, the surgeon approached +him and began to untie his bandage; then he told +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_58">[58]</span>the admiral that the wound was made with a <i>ciba</i>, by which +he meant with a stone. When the wound was uncovered, +we went up to examine it: it is certain that there was no +more wound on that leg than on the other, although he cunningly +pretended that it pained him much. Ignorant as we +were of the facts, it was impossible to come to a definite +conclusion. There were certainly many proofs of an invasion +by a hostile people, so that the admiral was at a loss +what to do. He with many others thought, however, that +for the present, and until they could ascertain the truth, +they ought to conceal their distrust; for, after ascertaining +it, they would be able to claim whatever indemnity they +thought proper. That evening Guacamari accompanied the +admiral to the ships, and when they showed him the horses +and other objects of interest, their novelty struck him with +the greatest amazement: he took supper on board, and returned +that evening to his house. The admiral told him +that he wished to settle there and to build houses; to which +he assented, but said that the place was not wholesome, because +it was very damp: and so it most certainly was.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_59">[59]</span></p> + +<p>All this passed through the interpretation of two of +the Indians who had gone to Spain in the last voyage, +and who were the sole survivors of seven that had embarked +with us; five died on the voyage, and these but narrowly +escaped. The next day we anchored in that port: Guacamari +sent to know when the admiral intended leaving, and +was told that he should do so on the morrow. The same +day Guacamari’s brother, and others with him, came on +board, bringing gold to barter: on the day of our departure +also they bartered a great quantity of gold. There were +ten women on board, of those which had been taken in the +Caribbee islands, principally from Burenquen, and it was +observed that the brother of Guacamari spoke with them; +we think that he told them to make an effort to escape that +night; for certainly during our first sleep they dropped +themselves quietly into the water, and went on shore, so +that by the time they were missed they had reached such a +distance that only four could be taken by the boats which +went in pursuit, and these were secured when just leaving +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_60">[60]</span>the water: they had to swim considerably more than half a +league. The next morning the admiral sent to desire that +Guacamari would cause search to be made for the women +who had escaped in the night, and that he would send them +back to the ships. When the messengers arrived they +found the place forsaken and not a soul there; this made +many openly declare their suspicions, but others said they +might have removed to another village, as was their custom. +That day we remained quiet, because the weather was unfavourable +for our departure. On the next morning the +admiral resolved that as the wind was adverse, it would be +well to go with the boats to inspect a harbour on the coast at +two leagues distance further up,⁠<a id="FNanchor_139" href="#Footnote_139" class="fnanchor">[139]</a> to see if the formation of +the land was favourable for a settlement; and we went +thither with all the ship’s boats, leaving the ships in the +harbour. As we moved along the coast the people manifested +a sense of insecurity, and when we reached the spot +to which we were bound all the natives had fled. While we +were walking about this place we found an Indian stretched +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_61">[61]</span>on the hill-side, close by the houses, with a gaping wound +in his shoulder caused by a dart, so that he had been disabled +from fleeing any further. The natives of this island +fight with sharp darts, which they discharge from cross-bows +in the same manner as boys in Spain shoot their small +arrows, and which they send with considerable skill to a +great distance; and certainly upon an unarmed people these +weapons are calculated to do serious injury. The man told +us that Caonabó and his people had wounded him and burnt +the houses of Guacamari. Thus we are still kept in uncertainty +respecting the death of our people, on account of the +paucity of information on which to form an opinion, and the +conflicting and equivocal character of the evidence we have +obtained. We did not find the position of the land in this +port favourable for healthy habitation, and the admiral +resolved upon returning along the upper coast by which we +had come from Spain, because we had had tidings of gold +in that direction. But the weather was so adverse that it +cost more labour to sail thirty leagues in a backward direction +than the whole voyage from Spain; so that, what with +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_62">[62]</span>the contrary wind and the length of the passage, three +months had elapsed before we set foot on land. It pleased +God, however, that through the check upon our progress +caused by contrary winds, we succeeded in finding the best +and most suitable spot that we could have selected for a +settlement, where there was an excellent harbour⁠<a id="FNanchor_140" href="#Footnote_140" class="fnanchor">[140]</a> and +abundance of fish, an article of which we stood in great +need from the scarcity of meat. The fish caught here are +very singular and more wholesome than those of Spain. +The climate does not allow the fish to be kept from one day +to another, for all animal food speedily becomes unwholesome, +on account of the alternate heat and damp.</p> + +<p>The land is very rich for all purposes. Near the harbour +there are two rivers; one large,⁠<a id="FNanchor_141" href="#Footnote_141" class="fnanchor">[141]</a> and another of moderate +breadth somewhat near it: the water is of a very remarkable +quality. On the bank of it is being built a city called +Marta,⁠<a id="FNanchor_142" href="#Footnote_142" class="fnanchor">[142]</a> one side of which is bounded by the water with a +ravine of cleft rock, so that at that part there is no need of +fortification; the other half is girt with a plantation of trees +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_63">[63]</span>so thick that a rabbit could scarcely pass through it; and so +green that fire will never be able to burn it. A channel has +been commenced for a branch of the river, which the +managers say they will lead through the middle of the +settlement, and will place on it mills of all kinds requiring +to be worked by water. Great quantities of vegetables +have been planted, which certainly attain a more luxuriant +growth here in eight days than they would in Spain in +twenty. We were frequently visited by numbers of Indians, +among whom were some of their caciques or chiefs, and +many women. They all came loaded with <i>ages</i>,⁠<a id="FNanchor_143" href="#Footnote_143" class="fnanchor">[143]</a> a sort of +turnip, very excellent for food, which we dressed in various +ways. This food was so nutritious as to prove a great +support to all of us after the privations we endured when at +sea, which in truth were more severe than ever were suffered +by man; and as we could not tell what weather it would +please God to send us on our voyage, we were obliged to +limit ourselves most rigorously with regard to food, in order +that, at all events, we might at least have the means of +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_64">[64]</span>supporting life: this <i>age</i> the Caribbees call <i>nabi</i>, and the +Indians <i>hage</i>. The Indians barter gold, provisions, and +every thing they bring with them, for tags of laces, beads, +and pins, and pieces of porringers and dishes. They all, as +I have said, go naked as they were born, except the women +of this island, who some of them wear a covering of cotton, +which they bind round their hips, while others use grass +and leaves of trees. When they wish to appear fulldressed, +both men and women paint themselves, some black, others +white and various colours, in so many devices that the effect +is very laughable: they shave some parts of their heads, and +in others wear long tufts of matted hair, which have an +indescribably ridiculous appearance: in short, whatever +would be looked upon in our country as characteristic of a +madman, is here regarded by the highest of the Indians as +a mark of distinction.</p> + +<p>In our present position, we are in the neighbourhood of +many mines of gold, not one of which, we are told, is more +than twenty or twenty-five leagues off: the Indians say that +some of them are in Niti, in the possession of Caonabó, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_65">[65]</span>who killed the Christians; the others are in another place +called Cibao, which, if it please God, we shall see with our +eyes before many days are over; indeed we should go there +at once, but that we have so many things to provide that we +are not equal to it at present. One third of our people have +fallen sick within the last four or five days, which I think +has principally arisen from the toil and privations of the +journey; another cause has been the variableness of the +climate; but I hope in our Lord that all will be restored to +health. My idea of this people is, that if we could converse +with them, they would all become converted, for they +do whatever they see us do, making genuflections to the +altars, and at the Ave Maria and the other parts of the +devotional service, and making the sign of the cross. They +all say that they wish to be Christians, although in truth +they are idolaters, for in their houses they have many kinds +of figures: when asked what such a figure was, they would +reply it is a thing of <i>Turey</i>, by which they meant “of +Heaven.” I made a pretence of throwing them on the fire, +which grieved them so that they began to weep: they +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_66">[66]</span>believe that everything we bring comes from heaven, and +therefore call it <i>Turey</i>, which, as I have already said, means +heaven in their language. The first day that I went on +shore to sleep, was the Lord’s day. The little time that we +have spent on land, has been so much occupied in seeking +for a fitting spot for the settlement, and in providing +necessaries, that we have had little opportunity of becoming +acquainted with the productions of the soil, yet although +the time has been so short, many marvellous things have +been seen. We have met with trees bearing wool, of a +sufficiently fine quality (according to the opinion of those +who are acquainted with the art) to be woven into good +cloth; there are so many of these trees that we might load +the caravels with wool, although it is troublesome to collect, +for the trees are very thorny,⁠<a id="FNanchor_144" href="#Footnote_144" class="fnanchor">[144]</a> but some means may be +easily found of overcoming this difficulty. There are also +cotton trees as large as peach trees, which produce cotton +in the greatest abundance. We found trees producing wax +as good both in colour and smell as bees-wax and equally +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_67">[67]</span>useful for burning, indeed there is no great difference +between them. There are vast numbers of trees which +yield surprisingly fine turpentine, and a great abundance of +tragacanth, also very good. We found other trees which I +think bear nutmegs, because the bark tastes and smells like +that spice, but at present there is no fruit on them;⁠<a id="FNanchor_145" href="#Footnote_145" class="fnanchor">[145]</a> I saw +one root of ginger, which an Indian wore hanging round +his neck. There were also aloes; not like those which we +have hitherto seen in Spain, but no doubt they are of the +same kind as those used by our doctors.⁠<a id="FNanchor_146" href="#Footnote_146" class="fnanchor">[146]</a> A sort of cinnamon +also has been found; but, to speak the truth, it is not so +fine as that with which we are already acquainted in Spain. +I do not know whether this arises from ignorance of the +proper season to gather it, or whether the soil does not produce +better. We have also seen some yellow mirabolans; +at this season they are all lying under the trees, and have a +bitter flavour, arising, I think, from the rottenness occasioned +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_68">[68]</span>by the moisture of the ground; but the taste of such parts +as have remained sound, is that of the genuine mirabolan. +There is also very good mastic. None of the natives of +these islands, as far as we have yet seen, possess any iron; +they have, however, many tools, such as hatchets and axes, +made of stone, which are so handsome and well finished, that +it is wonderful how they contrive to make them without the +use of iron. Their food consists of bread, made of the roots +of a vegetable which is between a tree and a vegetable, and +the <i>age</i>, which I have already described as being like the +turnip, and very good food; they use, to season it, a spice +called <i>agi</i>, which they also eat with fish and such birds as +they can catch of the many kinds which abound in the island. +They have, besides, a kind of grain like hazel-nuts, very +good to eat. They eat all the snakes, and lizards, and spiders, +and worms, that they find upon the ground; so that, to my +fancy, their bestiality is greater than that of any beast upon +the face of the earth. The admiral had at one time determined +to leave the search for the mines until he had first +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_69">[69]</span>dispatched the ships which were to return to Spain⁠<a id="FNanchor_147" href="#Footnote_147" class="fnanchor">[147]</a> on +account of the great sickness which had prevailed among the +men, but afterwards he resolved upon sending two bands +under the command of two captains, the one to Cibao,⁠<a id="FNanchor_148" href="#Footnote_148" class="fnanchor">[148]</a> and +the other to Niti, where, as I have already said, Caonabó +lived. These parties went, one of them returning on the +twentieth, and the other on the twenty-first of January. +The party that went to Cibao saw gold in so many places that +one scarcely dares state the fact, for in truth they found it in +more than fifty streamlets and rivers, as well as upon their +banks; so that, the captain said they had only to seek throughout +that province, and they would find as much as they wished. +He brought specimens from the different parts, that is, from +the sand of the rivers and small springs. It is thought, that +by digging as we know how, it will be found in greater pieces, +for the Indians neither know how to dig nor have the means +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_70">[70]</span>of digging more than a hand’s depth. The other captain +who went to Niti, returned also with news of a great quantity +of gold in three or four places; of which he likewise +brought specimens.</p> + +<p>Thus, surely, their Highnesses the King and Queen may +henceforth regard themselves as the most prosperous and +wealthy Sovereigns in the world; never yet, since the creation, +has such a thing been seen or read of; for on the return +of the ships from their next voyage, they will be able to +carry back such a quantity of gold as will fill with amazement +all who hear of it. Here I think I shall do well to +break off my narrative. I think those who do not know me +who hear these things may consider me prolix, and somewhat +an exaggerator, but God is my witness, that I have not +exceeded, by one tittle, the bounds of truth.</p> + +<p>The preceding is the translation of that part of Doctor +Chanca’s letter, which refers to intelligence respecting the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_71">[71]</span>Indies.⁠<a id="FNanchor_149" href="#Footnote_149" class="fnanchor">[149]</a> The remainder of the letter does not bear upon the +subject, but treats of private matters, in which Doctor Chanca +requests the interference and support of the Chapter of Seville +(of which city he was a native), in behalf of his family and +property, which he had left in the said city. This letter +reached Seville in the month of ⁠<a id="FNanchor_150" href="#Footnote_150" class="fnanchor lacuna">[150]</a> in the year fourteen +hundred and ninety-three.</p> + +</div> + +<div class="spanish"> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="SEGUNDA_VIAGE_DE_COLON">SEGUNDA VIAGE DE COLON.</h2> + +<h3 class="hanging"><i>La Carta del Doctor Chanca, que escribió a la Ciudad de Sevilla.</i></h3> + +<p>Muy magnífico Señor: Porque las cosas que yo particularmente +escribo á otros en otras cartas no son igualmente comunicables +como las que en esta escritura van, acordé de escribir distintamente +las nuevas de acá y las otras que á mi conviene suplicar á vuestra +Señoría, é las nuevas son las siguientes: Que la flota que los Reyes +Católicos, nuestros Señores, enviaron de España para las Indias é +gobernacion del su Almirante del mar Océano Cristóbal Colon por +la divina permision, parte de Caliz á veinte y cinco de Setiembre +del año de <a class="lacuna" href="#Footnote_109">[109]</a> años con tiempo é viento +convenible á nuestro camino, é duró este tiempo dos dias, en +los cuales pudimos andar al pie de cincuenta leguas: y luego nos +cambió el tiempo otros dos, en los cuales anduvimos muy poco ó +no nada; plogó á Dios que pasados los dias nos tornó buen tiempo, +en manera que en otros dos llegamos á la Gran Canaria donde tomamos +puerto, lo cual nos fue necesario por reparar un navío que +hacia mucha agua, y estovímos ende todo aquel dia, é luego otra +dia partimos é fizonos algunas calmerías, de manera que estovímos +en llegar al Gomero cuatro ó cinco dias, y en la Gomera fue necesario +estar algun dia por facer provisiones de carne, leña é agua +la, que mas pudiesen, por la larga jornada que se esperaba hacer sin +ver mas tierra: ansi que en la estada destos puertos y en un dia +despues de partidos de la Gomera, que nos fizo calma, que tardamos +en llegar fasta la isla del Fierro, estovimos diez y nueve ó veinte +dias: desde aqui por la bondad de Dios nos tornó buen tiempo, el +mejor que nunca flota llevó tan largo camino, tal que partidos del +Fierro á trece de Octubre dentro de veinte dias hobimos vista de +tierra: y vieramosla á catorce ó quince si la noa Capitana fuera +tan buena velera comos los otros navíos, porque muchas veces los +otros navíos sacaban velas porque nos dejaban mucho atras. En +todo este tiempo hobimos mucha bonanza, que en él ni en todo el +camino no hobimos fortuna, salvo la víspera de S. Simon que nos +vino una que por cuatro horas nos puso en harto estrecho. El +primero domingo despues de Todos Santos, que fue á tres dias de +Noviembre, cerca del alba, dijó un piloto de la nao Capitana: +albricias, que tenemos tierra. Fue el alegría tan grande en la gente +que era maravilla oir las gritas y placeres que todos hacian, y con +mucha razon, que la gente venian ya tan fatigados de mala vida y +de pasar agua, que con muchos deseos sospiraban todos por tierra. +Contaron aquel dia los pilotos del armada desde la isla de Fierro +hasta la primera tierra que vimos unas ochocientas leguas, otros +setecientas é ochenta, de manera que la diferencia no ere mucha, +é mas trescientas que ponen de la isla de Fierro fasta Caliz, que +eran por todos mil é ciento; ansí que no siento quien no fuese satisfecho +de ver agua. Vimos el Domingo de mañana sobredicho, por +proa de los navíos, una isla y luego á la man derecha parecio otra: +la primera era la tierra alta de sierras por aquella parte que vimos, +la otra era tierra llana, tambien muy llena de árboles muy espesos, +y luego que fue mas de dia comenzó á parecer á una parte é á otra +islas; de manera que aquel dia eran seis islas á diversas partes, y +las mas harto grandes. Fuimos enderezados para ver aquella que +primero habiamos visto, é llegamos por la costa andando mas de +una lagua buscando puerto para sorgir, el cual todo aquel espacio +nunca se pudo hallar. Era en todo aquello que parecia desta isla +todo montaña muy hermosa y muy verde, fasta el agua que era +alegria en mirarla, porque en aquel tiempo no hay en nuestra tierra +apenas cosa verde. Despues que allí no hallamos puerto acordó +el Almirante que nos volviesemos á la otra isla que parescia á la +mano derecha, que estaba desta otra cuatro ó cinco leguas. Quedó +por entonces un navío en esta isla buscando puerto todo aquel dia +para cuando fuese necesario venir á ella, en la cual halló buen puerto +é vido casas é gentes, é luego se tornó aquella noche para donde +estaba la flota que habia tomado puerto en la otra isla, donde decendió +el Almirante é mucha gente con él con la bandera Real en +las manos, adonde tomó posesion por sus Altezas en forma de derecho. +En esta isla habia tanta espesura de arboledas que era +maravilla, é tanta diferencia de árboles no conocidos á nadie que +era para espantar, dellos con fruto, dellos con flor, ansí que todo +era verde. Allí hallamos un arbol, cuya hoja tenia el mas fino olor +de clavos que nunca ví, y era como laurel, salvo que no era ansi +grande; yo ansí pienso que era laurel su especia. Allí habia frutas +salvaginas de diferentes maneras, de las quales algunos no muy +sabios probaban, y del gusto solamente tocándoles con las lenguas +se les hinchaban las caras, y les venia tan grande ardor y dolor que +parecian que rabiaban, los cuales se remediaban con cosas frias. +En esta isla no hallamos gente nin señal della, creimos que era +despoblada, en la cual estovimos bien dos horas, porque cuando +allí llegamos era sobre tarde, é luego otro dia de mañana partimos +para otra isla que parescia en bajo desta que era muy grande, fasta +la cual desta que habria siete ú ocho leguas, llegamos á ella hácia +la parte de una gran montaña que parecia que queria llegar al cielo, +en medio de la cual montaña estaba un pico mas alto que toda la +otra montaña, del cual se vertian á diversas partes muchus aguas, +en especial hácia la parte donde ibamos: de tres leguas paresció un +golpe de agua tan gordo como un buey, que se despeñaba de tan +alto como si cayera del cielo: parescia de tan lejos, que hobo en los +navíos muchas apuestas, que unos decian que eran peñas blancas y +otros que era agua. Desque llegamos mas á cerca vídose lo cierto, +y era la mas hermosa cosa del mundo de ver cuan alto se despeñaba +é de tan poco logar nacia tan gran golpe de agua. Luego que llegamos +cerco mandó el Almirante á una carbela ligera que fuese costeando +á buscar puerto, la cual se adelantó y llegando á la tierra +vido unas casas, é con la barca saltó el Capitan en tierra é llegó á +las casas, en las cuales halló su gente, y luego que los vieron +fueron huyendo, é entró en ellas, donde halló las cosas que ellos +tienen, que no habian llevado nada, donde tomó dos papagayos muy +grandes y muy diferenciados de cuantos se habian visto. Halló +mucho algodon hilado é por hilar, é cosas de sus mantenimientos, +é de todo trajo un poco, en especial trajo cuatro ó cinco huesos de +brazos é piernas de hombres. Luego que aquello vimos sospechamos +que aquellas islas eran las de Caribe, que son habitadas de gente +que comen carne humana, porque el Almirante por las señas que +le habian dado del sitio destas islas, el otro camino, los indios de +las islas que antes habian descubierto, habia enderezado el camino +por descubrirlas, porque estaban mas cerca de España, y tambien +porque por allí se hacia el camino derecho para venir á la isla +Española, donde antes habia dejado la gente, á los cuales, por la +bondad de Dios y por el buen saber del Almirante, venimos tan +derechos como si por camino sabido é seguido vinieramos. Esta +isla es muy grande, y por el lado nos pareció que habia de luengo +de costa veinta é cinco leguas: fuimos costeando por ella buscando +puerto mas de dos leguas; por la parte donde ibamos eran +montañas muy altas, á la parte que dejamos parecian grandes +llanos, á la orilla de la mar habia algunos poblados pequeños, é +luego que veian las velas huian todos. Andadas dos leguas hallamos +puerto y bien tarde. Esa noche acordó el Almirante que á la madrugada +saliesen algunos para tomar lengua é saber que gente era, +no embargante la sospecha é los que ya habian visto ir huyendo, +que era gente desnuda como la otra que ya el Almirante habia visto +el otro viage. Salieron esa madrugada ciertos Capitanes; los unos +vinieron á hora de comer é trageron un mozo de fasta catorce años, +á lo que despues se sopo, é él dijo que era de los que esta gente +tenian cativos. Los otros se dividieron, los unos tomaron un mochacho +pequeño, al cual llevaba un hombre por la mano, é por huir +lo desamparó. Este enviaron luego con algunos dellos, otros quedaron, +é destos unos tomaron ciertas mugeres naturales de la isla, +é otras que se vinieron de grado, que eran de las cativas. Desta +compañía se apartó un Capitan no sabiendo que se habia habido +lengua con seis hombres, el cual se perdió con los que con él iban, +que jamas sopieron tornar, fasta que á cabo de cuatro dias toparon +con la costa de la mar, é siguiendo por ella tornaron á topar con la +flota. Ya los teniamos por perdidos é comidos de aquellas gentes +que se dicen los Caribes, porque no bastaba razon para creer que +eran perdidos de otra manera, porque iban entre ellos pilotos, +marineros que por la estrella saben ir é venir hasta España, creiamos +que en tan pequeño espacio no se podian perder. Este dia +primero que allí decendimos andaban por la playa junto con el agua +muchos hombres é mugeres mirando la flota, é maravillándose de +cosa tan nueva é llegándose alguna barca á tierra á hablar con ellos, +diciéndolos <i>tayno tayno</i>, que quiere decir <i>bueno</i>, esperaban en tanto +que no salian del agua, junto con él moran, de manera que cuando +ellos querian se podian salvar: en conclusion, que de los hombres +ninguno se pudo tomar por fuerza ni por grado, salvo dos que se +seguraron é despues los trajeron por fuerza allí. Se tomaron mas +de veinte mugeres de las cativas, y de su grado se venian otros +naturales de la isla, que fueron salteadas é tomadas por fuerza. +Ciertos mochachos cabtivos se vinieron á nosotros huyendo de los +naturales de la isla que los tenian cabtivos. En este puerto estovimos +ocho dias á causa de la perdida del sobredicho Capitan, +donde muchas veces salimos á tierra andando por sus moradas é +pueblos, que estaban á la costa, donde hallamos infinitos huesos de +hombres, é los cascos de las cabezas colgados por las casas á manera +de vasijas para tener cosas. Aquí no parescieron muchos hombres; +la causa era, segun nos dijeron las mugeres, que eran idas diez canoas +con gentes á saltear á otras islas. Esta gente nos pareció mas pulítica +que la que habita en estas otras islas que habemos visto, aunque +todos tienen las moradas de paja; pero estos las tienen de mucho +mejor hechura, é mas proveidas de mantenimientos, é parece en +ellas mas industria ansi veril como femenil. Tenian mucho algodon +hilado y por hilar, y muchas mantas de algodon tan bien tejidas que +no deben nada á las de nuestra patria. Preguntamos á las mugeres, +que eran cativas en esta isla, que qué gente era esta; respondieron +que eran Caribes. Despues que entendieron que nosotros aborreciamos +tal gente por su mal uso de comer carne de hombres, +holgaban mucho, y sí de nuevo traian alguna muger ó hombre de +los Caribes, secretamente decian que eran Caribes, que allí donde +estaban todos en nuestro poder mostraban temor dellos como gente +sojuzgada, y de allí conocimos cuáles eran Caribes de las mugeres +é cuáles nó, porque las Caribes traian en las piernas en cada una +dos argollas tejidas de algodon, la una junto con rodilla, la otra +junto con los tobillos; de manera que les hacen las pantorrillas +grandes, é de los sobredichos logares muy ceñidas, que esto me +parece que tienen ellos por cosa gentil, ansi que por esta diferencia +conocemos los unos de los otros. La costumbre desta gente +de Caribes es bestial: son tres islas, esta se llama Turuqueira, +la otra que primero vimos se llama Ceyre, la tercera se llama +Ayay; estos todos son conformidad como si fuesen de un linage, +los cuales no se hacen mal: unos é otros hacen guerra á +todas las otras islas comarcanas, los cuales van por mar ciento é +cincuenta leguas á saltear con muchas canoas que tienen, que son +unas fustas pequeñas de un solo madero. Sus armas son frechas en +lugar de hierros; porque no poseen ningun hierro, ponen unas puntas +fechas de huesos de torgugas los unos, otros de otro isla ponen +unas espinas de un pez fechas dentadas, que ansi lo son naturalmente, +á manera de sierras bien recias, que para gente desarmada, +como son todos, es cosa que les puede matar é hacer harto daño; +pero para gente de nuestra nacion no son armas para mucho temer. +Esta gente saltea en las otras islas, que traen las mugeres que pueden +haber, en especial mozas y hermosas, las cuales tienen para su +servicio, é para tener por mancebas, é traen tantas que en cincuenta +casas ellos no parecieron, y de las cativas se vinieron mas de veinte +mozas. Dicen tambien estas mugeres que estos usan de una crueldad +que parece cosa increible; que los hijos que en ellas han se +los comen, que solamente crian los que han en sus mugeres naturales. +Los hombres que pueden haber, los que son vivos llevánselos +á sus casas para hacer carnicería dellos, y los que han muertos +luego se los comen. Dicen que la carne del hombre es tan buena +que no hay tal cosa en el mundo; y bien parece porque los huesos +que en estas casas hallamos todo lo que se puede roer todo lo tenian +roido, que no habia en ellos sino lo que por su mucha dureza no se +podia comer. Allí se halló en una casa cociendo en una olla un +pezcuezo de un hombre. Los mochachos que cativan cortanlos el +miembro, é sirvense de ellos fasta que son hombres, y despues +cuando quieren facer fiesta mátanlos é cómenselos, porque dicen que +que la carne de los mochachos é de las mogeres no es buena para +comer. Destos mochachos se vinieron para nosotros huyendo tres +todos tres cortados sus miembros. E á cabo de cuatro dias vino el +Capitan que se habia perdido, de cuya venida estabamos ya bien +desesparados, porque ya los habian ido á buscar otras cuadrillas +por dos veces, é aquel dia vino la una caudrilla sin saber dellos +ciertamente. Holgamos con su venida como si nuevamente se +hobieran hallado: trajo este Capitan con los que fueron con él diez +cabezas entre mochachos y mugeres. Estos ni los otros que los +fueron á buscar, nunca hallaron hombres porque se habien huido, +ó por ventura que en aquella comarca habia pocos hombres, porque +segun se supo de las mugeres eran idas diez canoas con gentes á +saltear á otras islas. Vino él é los que fueron con él tan destrozados +del monte, que era lástima de los ver: decian, preguntándoles +como se habien perdido, dijeron que era la espesura de los arboles +tanta que el cielo no podian ver, é que algunos de ellos, que eran +marineros, habian subido por los árboles para mirar el estrella é +que nunca la podieron ver, é que si no toparan con el mar fuera +imposible tornar á la flota. Partimos desta isla ocho dias despues +que allí llegamos. Luego otro dia á medio dia vimos otra isla, +no muy grande, que estaria desta otra doce leguas; porque el +primero dia que partimos lo mas del dia nos fizo calma, fuimos +junto con la costa desta isla, é dijeron las Indias que llevabamos que +no era habitada, que los Caribes la habian despoblado, é por esto +no paramos en ella. Luego esa tarde vimos otra: á esa noche, +cerca desta isla, fallamos unos bajos, por cuyo temor sorgimos, +que no osamos andar fasta que fuese de dia. Luego á la mañana +paresció otra isla harto grande: á ninguna destas no llegamos +por consolar los que habian dejado en la Española, é no plogó á +Dios segun que abajo paracerá. Otro dia á hora de comer llegamos +á una isla é pareciónos mucho bien, porque parecia muy poblada, +segun las muchas labranzas que en ella habia. Fuimos allá +é tomamos puerto en la costa: luego mandó el Almirante ir á +tierra una barca guarnecida de gente para si pudiese tomar lengua +para saber que gente era, é tambien porque habiamos menester +informarnos del camino, caso quel Almirante, aunque nunca habia +fecho aquel camino, iba muy bien encaminado segun en cabo +pareció. Pero porque las cosas dubdosas se deben siempre buscar +con la mayor certinidad que haberse pueda, quiso haber allí lengua, +de la cual gente que iba en la barca ciertas personas saltaron en +tierra, llegaron en tierra á un poblado de donde la gente ya se +habia escondido. Tomaron allí cinco ó seis mugeres y ciertos +mochachos, de las cuales las mas eran tambien de las cativas +como en la otra isla, porque tambien estos eran de los Caribes, +segun ya sabiamos por la relacion de las mugeres que traiamos. +Ya que esta barca se queria tornar á los navíos con su presa que +habia fecho por parte debajo; por la costa venia una canoa en +que venian cuatro hombres é dos mugeres é un mochacho, é desque +vieron la flota maravillados se embebecieron tanto que por una +grande hora estovieron que no se movieron de un lugar casi dos +tiros de lombarda de los navíos. En esto fueron vistos de los que +estaban en la barca é aun de toda la flota. Luego los de la barca +fueron para ellos tan junto con la tierra, que con el embebecimiento +que tenian, maravillándose é pensando que cosa seria, nunca +los vieron hasta que estovieron muy cerca dellos, que no les pudieron +mucho huir aunque harto trabajaron por ello; pero los +nuestros aguijaron con tanta priesa que no se les pudieron ir. +Los Caribes desque vieron que el hoir no les aprovechaba, con +mucha osadia pusieron mano á los arcos, tambien las mugeres +como los hombres; é digo con mucha osadia porque ellos no eran +mas de cuatro hombres y dos mugeres, é los nuestros mas de +veinte é cinco, de los cuales firieron dos, al uno dieron dos frechadas +en los pechos é al otro una por el costado, é sino fuera +porque llevaban adargas é tablachutas, é porque los invistieron +presto con la barca é les trastornaron su canoa, asaetearan con +sus frechas los mas dellos. E despues de trastornada su canoa +quedaron en el agua nadando, é á las veces haciendo pie, que allí +habia unos bajos, é tovieron harto que hacer en tomarlos, que todavía +cuanto podian tiraban, é con todo eso el uno no lo pudieron +tomar sino mal herido de una lanzada que murió, el cual trajeron +ansi herido fasta les navíos. La diferencia destos á los otros +indios en el hábito, es que los de Caribe tienen el cabello muy +largo, los otros son tresquilados é fechas cien mil diferencias en +las cabezas de cruces, é de otras pinturas en diversas maneras, +cada uno como se le antoja, lo cual se hacen con cañas agudas. +Todos ansi los de Caribe como los otros es gente sin barbas, que +por maravilla hallarás hombre que las tenga. Estos Caribes que +allí tomaron venian tiznados los ojos é las cejas, lo cual me parece +que hacen por gala, é con aquello parescian mas espantables; el +uno destos dice que en una isla dellos, llamada Cayre, que es la +primera que vimos, á la cual no llegamos, hay mucho oro; que +vayan allá con clavos é contezuelas para hacer sus canoas, é que +traerán cuanto oro quisieren. Luego aquel dia partimos de esta +isla, que no estariamos allí mas de seis ó siete horas, fuemos para +otra tierra que pareció á ojo que estaba en el camino que habiamos +de facer: llegamos noche cerca della. Otro dia de mañana +fuimos por la costa della: era muy gran tierra, aunque no era +muy continua, que eran mas de cuarenta y tantos islones, tierra +muy alta, é la mas della pelada, la cual no era ninguna ni es de +las que antes ni despues habemos visto. Parescia tierra dispuesta +para haber en ella metales: á esta no llegamos para saltar en +tierra, salvo una carabela latina llegó á un islon de estos, en el +cual hallaron ciertas casas de pescadores. Las Indias que traiamos +dijeron que no eran pobladas. Andovimos por esta costa lo +mas deste dia, hasta otro dia en la tarde que llegamos á vista de +otra isla llamada Burenquen, cuya costa corrimos todo un dia: +juzgábase que ternia por aquella banda treinta leguas. Esta isla +es muy hermosa y muy fértil á parecer: á estu vienon los de +Caribe á conquistar, de la cual llevaban mucha gente; estos no +tienen fustas ningunas nin saben andar por mar; pero, segun +dicen estos Caribes que tomamos, usan arcos como ellos, é si por +caso cuando los vienen á saltear los pueden prender tambien se los +comen como los de Caribe á ellos. En un puerto desta isla estovimos +dos dias, donde saltó mucha gente en tierra; pero jamas podimos +haber lengua, que todos se fuyeron como gente temorizadas de +los Caribes. Todas estas islas dichas fueron descubiertas deste +camino, que fasta aquí ninguna dellas habia visto el Almirante el +otro viage, todos son muy hermosas é de muy buena tierra; pero +esta paresció mejor á todos: aquí casi se acabaron las islas que +fácia la parte de España habia dejado de ver el Almirante, aunque +tenemos por cosa cierta que hay tierra mas de cuarenta leguas +antes de estas primeras hasta España, porque dos dias antes que +viesemos tierra vimos unas aves que llaman rabihorcados, que son +aves de rapiña marinas é ni sientan ni duermen sobre el agua, +sobre tarde rodeando sobir en alto, é despues tiran su via á buscar +tierra para dormir, las cuales no podrian ir á caer segun era tarde +de doce ó quince leguas arriba, y esto era á la man derecha donde +veniamos hasta la parte de España; de donde todos juzgaron allí +quedar tierra, lo cual no se buscó porque se nos hacia rodeo para +la via que traiamos. Espero que á pocos viages se hallará. Desta +isla sobredicha partimos una madrugada, é aquel dia, antes que +fuese noche, hobimos vista de tierra, la cual tampoco era conocida +de ninguno de los qua habian venido el otro viage; pero +por las nuevas de las indias que traiamos sospechamos que era la +Española, en la cual agora estamos. Entre esta isla é la otra de +Buriquen parecia de lejos otra, aunque no era grande. Desque +llegamos á esta Española, por el comienzo de alla era tierra baja +y muy llana, del conocimiento de la cual aun estaban todos dubdosos +si fuese la que es, porque aquella parte nin el Almirante ni +los otros que con él vinieron habian visto, é aquesta isla como es +grande es nombrada por provincias, e á esta parte que primero +llegamos llaman Hayti, y luego á la otra provincia junta con esta +llaman Xamaná, é á la otra Bohio; en la cual agora estamos; ansi +hay en ellas muchas provincias porque es gran cosa, porque segun +afirman los que la han visto por la costa de largo, dicen que habrá +doscientas leguas: á mi me parece que á lo menos habrá ciento +é cincuenta; del ancho della hasta agora no se sabe. Alla es ido +cuarenta dias ha á rodearla una carebela, la cual no es venida +hasta hoy. Es tierra muy singular, donde hay infinitos rios grandes +é sierras grandes é valles grandes rasos, grandes montañas: sospecho +que nunca se secan las yerbas en todo el año. Non creo +que hay invierno ninguno en esta nin en las atras, porque por +Navidad se fallan muchos nidos de aves, dellas con pájaros, é dellas +con huevos. En ella ni en las otras nunca se ha visto animal +de cuatro pies, salvo algunos perros de todas colores como en nuestra +patria, la hechura como unos gosques grandes; de animales +salvages no hay. Otrosí, hay un animal de color de conejo é de +su pelo, el grandor de un conejo nuevo, el rabo largo, los pies é +manos como de raton, suben por los árboles, muchos los han comido, +dicen que es muy bueno de comer: hay culebras muchas +no grandes; lagartos aunque no muchos, porque los indios hacen +tanta fiesta dellos como hariamos allá con faisanes, son del tamaño +de los de allá, salvo que en la hechura son diferentes, aunque en +una isleta pequeña, que está junto con un puerto que llaman +Monte Christo, donde estovimos muchos dias, vieron muchos dias +un lagarto muy grande que decian que seria de gordura de un +becerro é atan complido como una lanza, é muchas veces salieron +por lo matar, é con la mucha espesura se les metia en la mar, de +manera que no se pudo haber dél derecho. Hay en esta isla y en +las otras infinitas aves de las de nuestra patria, é otras muchas +que allá nunca se vieron: de las aves domésticas nunca se ha +visto acá ninguna, salvo en la Zuruquia habia en las casas unas +ánades, las mas dellas blancas como la nieve é algunas dellas negras, +muy lindas, con crestas rasas, mayores que las de allá, menores +que ánsares. Por la costa desta isla corrimos al pie de cien +leguas porque hasta donde el Almirante habia dejado la gente, +habria en este compás, que será en comedio ó en medio de la isla. +Andando por la provincia della llamada Xamaná, en derecho +echamos en tierra uno de los indios quel etro viage habian llevado +vestido, é con algunas cosillas quel Almirante le habia mandado +dar. Aquel dia se nos murió un marinero vizcaino que habia seido +herido de los Caribes, que ya dije que se tomaron, por su mala +guarda, ó porque ibamos por costa de tierra, dióse lugar que +saliese una barca á enterrarlo, é fueron en reguarda de la barca +dos carabelas cerca con tierra. Salieron á la barca en llegando +en tierra muchos indios, de los cuales algunos traian oro al cuello, +é á las orejas; querian venir con los cristianos á los navíos, +é no los quisieron traer, porque no llevaban licencia del Almirante; +los cuales desque vieron que no los querian traer se metieron +dos dellos en una canoa pequeña, é se vinieron á una carabela +de las que se habian acercado á tierra, en la cual los recibieron +con su amor, é trajéronlos á la nao del Almirante, é dijeron, mediante +un interprete, que un Rey fulano les enviaba á saber que +gente eramos, é á rogar que quisiesemos llegar á tierra, porque +tenian mucho oro é le darian dello, é de lo que tenian de comer: +el Almirante les mandó dar sendas camisas é bonetes é otras cosillas, +é les dijo que porque iba á donde estaba Guacamarí non se +podria detener, que otro tiempo habria que le pudiese ver, é con +esto se fueron. No cesamos de andar nuestro camino fasta llegar +á un puerto llamado Monte Cristi, donde estuvimos dos dias para +ver la disposicion de la tierra, porque no habia parecido bien al +Almirante el logar donde habia dejado la gente para hacer asiento. +Decendimos en tierra para ver la dispusicion: habia cerca de allí +un gran rio de muy buena agua; pero es toda tierra anegada é +muy indispuesta para habitar. Andando veyendo el rio é tierra +hallaron algunos de los nuestros en una parte dos hombres muertos +junto con el rio, el uno con un lazo al pescuezo y el otro +con otro al pie, esto fue el primero dia. Otro dia siguiente hallaron +otros dos muertos mas adelante de aquellos, el uno destos +estaba en disposicion que se le pudo conocer tener muchas barbas. +Algunos de los nuestros sospecharon mas mal que bien, é +con razon, porque los indios son todos desbarbados, como dicho +he. Este puerto está del lugar donde estaba la gente cristiana +doce leguas: pasados dos dias alzamos velas para el lugar donde +el Almirante habia dejado la sobredicha gente, en compañía de +un Rey destos indios, que se llamaba Guacamarí, que pienso ser +de los principales desta isla. Este dia llegamos en derecho de +aquel lugar; pero era ya tarde, é porque allí habia unos bajos +donde el otro dia se habia perdido la nao en que habia ido el Almirante, +no osamos tomar el puerto cerca de tierra fasta que otro +dia de mañana se desfondase é pudiesen entrar seguramente: +quedamos aquella noche no una legua de tierra. Esa tarde, viniendo +para allí de lejos, salió una canoa en que parescian cinco ó +seis indios, los cuales venian á prisa para nosotros. El Almirante +creyendo que nos seguraba hasta alzarnos, no quiso que los +esperasemos, é porfiando llegaron hasta un tiro de lombarda de +nosotros, é parabanse á mirar, é desde allí desque vieron que no +los esperabamos dieron vuelta é tornaron su via. Despues que +surgimos en aquel lugar sobredicho tarde, el Almirante mandó +tirar dos lombardas á ver si respondian los cristianos que habian +quedado con el dicho Guacamarí, porque tambien tenian lombardas, +los cuales nunca respondieron ni menos parescian huegos ni +señal de casas en aquel lugar, de lo qual se desconsoló mucho la +gente é tomaron la sospecha que de tal caso se debia tomar. +Estando ansi todos muy tristes, pasadas cuatro ó cinco horas de +la noche, vino la misma canoa que esa tarde habiamos visto, é +venia dando voces, preguntando por el Almirante un Capitan de +una carabela donde primero llegaron: trajéronlos á la nao del +Almirante, los cuales nunca quisieron entrar hasta que el Almirante +los hablase; demandaron lumbre para lo conocer, é despues +que lo conocieron entraron. Era uno dellos primo del Guacamarí, +el cual los habia enviado otra vez. Despues que se habian +tornado aquella tarde traian caratulas de oro que Guacamarí enviaba +en presente; la una para el Almirante é la otra para un +Capitan quel otro viage habia ido con él. Estovieron en la nao +hablando con el Almirante en presencia de todos por tres horas +mostrando mucho placer, preguntándoles por los Cristianos que +tales estaban: aquel pariente dijo que estaban todos buenos, +aunque entro ellos habia algunos muertos de dolencia é otros de +diferencia que habia contecido entre ellos, é que Guacamarí estaba +en otro lugar ferido en una pierna é por eso no habia venido, +pero que otro dia vernia; porque otros dos Reyes, llamado el uno +Caonabó y el otro Mayrení, habian venido á pelear con él é que +le habian quemado el logar; é luego esa noche se tornaron diciendo +que otra dia vernian con el dicho Guacamarí, é con esto nos +dejaron por esa noche consolados. Otro dia en la mañana estovimos +esperando que viniese el dicho Guacamarí, é entretanto +saltaron en tierra algunos por mandado del Almirante, é fueron +al lugar donde solian estar, é halláronle quemado un cortijo algo +fuerte con una palizada, donde los Cristianos habitaban, é tenian +lo suyo quemado é derribado, é ciertas bernias é ropas que los +indios habian traido á echar en la casa. Los dichos indios que +por allí parecian andaban muy cahareños, que no se osaban allegar +á nosotros, antes huian; lo cual no nos pareció bien porque +el Almirante nos habia dicho que en llegando á quel lugar salian +tantas canoas dellos á bordo de los navíos á vernos que no nos +podriamos defender dellos, é que en el otro viage ansí lo facian; +é como agora veiamos que estaban sospechosos de nosotros no +nos parecia bien, con todo halagándoles aquel dia é arrojándolos +algunas cosas, ansi como cascabeles é cuentas, hobo de asegurarse +un su pariente del dicho Guacamarí é otros tres, los cuales entraron +en la barca é trajéronlos á la nao. Despues que le preguntaron +por los Cristianos dijeron que todos eran muertos, aunque +ya nos lo habia dicho un indio de los que llevabamos de +Castilla que lo habian hablado los dos indios que antes habian +venido á la nao, que se habian quedado á bordo de la nao con su +canao, pero lo ne habiamos creido. Fue preguntado á este pariente +do Guacamarí quien los habia muerto: dijo que el Rey de +Canoabó y el Rey Mayrení, é que le quemaron las cosas del lugar, +que estaban dellos muchos heridos, é tambien él dicho Guacamarí +estaba pasado un muslo, y él que estaba en otro lugar y que +él queria ir luego allá á lo llamar, al cual dieron algunas cosas, é +luego se partió para donde estaba Guacamarí. Todo aquel dia +los estobimos esperando, é desque vimos que no venian, muchos +tenian sospecha que se habian ahogado los indios que antenoche +habian venido, porque los habian dado á beber dos ó tres veces +de vino, é venian en una canoa pequeña que se los podria trastornar. +Otro dia de mañana salió á tierra el Almirante é algunos +de nosotros, é fuemos donde solia estar la villa, la cual nos vimos +toda quemada é los vestidos de los cristianos se hallaban por +aquella yerba. Por aquella hora no vimos ningun muerto. Habia +entre nosotros muchas razones diferentes, unos sospechando que +el mismo Guacamarí fuese en la traicion ó muerte de los Cristianos, +otros les parecia que no, pues estaba quemada su villa, ansí +que la cosa era mucho para dudar. El Almirante mandó catar +todo el sitio donde los Cristianos estaban fortalecidos porquel los +habia mandado que desque toviesen alguna cantidad de oro que +lo enterrasen. Entretanto que esto se hacia quiso llegar á ver á +cerca de una legua do nos parecia que podria haber asiento para +poder edificar una villa porque ya era tiempo, adonde fuimos +ciertos con él mirando la tierra por la costa, fasta que llegamos á +un poblado donde habia siete ú ocho casas; las quales habian +desamparado los indios luego que nos vieron ir, é llevaron lo que +pudieron é lo otro dejaron escondido entre yerbas junto con las +casas, que es gente tan bestial que no tienen discrecion para +buscar lugar para habitar, que los que viven á la marina es maravilla +cuan bestialmente edifican, que las casas enderedor tienen +tan cubiertas de yerba ó de humidad, que estoy espantado como +viven. En aquellas casas hallamos muchas cosas de los Cristianos, +las cuales no se creian que ellos hobiesen rescatado, ansí +como una almalafa muy gentil, la cual no se habia descogido de +como la llevaron de Castilla, é calzas é pedazos de paños, é una +ancla de la nao quel Almirante habia allí perdido el otro viage, é +otras cosas, de las cuales mas se esforzó nuestra opinion; y de +acá hallamos, buscando las cosas que tenian guardadas en una +esportilla mucho cosida é mucho á recabdo, una cabeza de hombre +mucho guardada. Allí juzgamos por entonces que seria la +cabeza de padre ó madre, ó de persona que mucho querian. Despues +he oido que hayan hallado muchas desta manera, por donde +creo ser verdad lo que allí juzgamos; desde allí nos tornamos. +Aquel dia venimos por donde estaba la villa, y cuando llegamos +hallamos muchos indios que se habian asegurado y estaban rescatando +oro: tenian rescatado fasta un marco: hallamos que +habian mostrado donde estaban muertos once cristianos, cubiertos +ya de la yerba que habia crecido sobre ellos, é todos hablaban +por una boca que Caonabó é Mayreni les habian muerto; pero +con todo eso asomaban queja que los Cristianos uno tenia tres +mugeres, otro cuatro, doude creemos quel mal que les vino fue +de zelos. Otro dia de mañana, porque en todo aquello no habia +logar dispuesto para nosotros poder hacer asiento, acordó el Almirante +fuese una carabela á una parte para mirar lugar conveniente, +é algunos que fuimos con él fuimos á otra parte, á do hallamos +un puerto muy seguro é muy gentil disposicion de tierra +para habitar, pero porque estaba lejos de donde nos deseabamos +que estaba la mina de oro, no acordó el Almirante de poblar sino +en otra parte que fuese mas cierta si se hallase conveniente disposicion. +Cuando venimos deste lugar hallamos venida la otra +carabela que habia ido á la otra parte á buscar el dicho lugar +en la cual habio ido Melchior e otros cuatro ó cinco hombres +de pro. E yendo costeando por tierra salió á ellos una canoa en que +venian dos indios, el uno era hermano de Guacamarí, el cual fue +conocido por un piloto que iba en la dicha carabela, é preguntó +quien iba allí, al cual, dijeron los hombres principales, dijeron que +Guacamarí les rogaba que se llegasen á tierra, donde él tenia su +asiento con fasta cincuenta casas. Los dichos prencipales saltaron +en tierra con la barca é fueron donde él estaba, el cual fallaron +en su cama echado faciendo del doliente ferido. Fablaron +con él preguntándole por los Cristianos: respondió concertando +con la mesma razon de los otros, que era que Caonabó é Mayreni +los habian muerto, é que á él habian ferido en un muslo, el cual +mostró ligado: los que entonces lo vieron ansí les pareció que era +verdad como él lo dijo: al tiempo del despedirse dió á cada uno +dellos una joya de oro, á cada uno como le pareció que lo merescia. +Este oro facian en fojas muy delgadas, porque lo quieren +para facer carátulas é para poderse asentar en betun que ellos +facen, si así no fuese no se asentaria. Otro facen para traer en +la cabeza é para colgar en las orejas é narices, ansí que todavía +es menester que sea delgado, pues que ellos nada desto hacen por +riqueza salvo por buen parecer. Dijo el dicho Guacamarí por +señas e como mejor pudo, que porque él estaba ansí herido que +dijesen al Almirante que quisiese venir á verlo. Luego quel Almirante +llegó los sobredichos le contaron este caso. Otro dia de +mañana acordó partir para allá, al cual lugar llegariamos dentro +de tres horas, porque apenas habria dende donde estábamos allá +tres leguas; ansí que cuando allí llegamos era hora de comer; +comimos ante de salir en tierra. Luego que hobimos comido +mandó el Almirante que todos los Capitanes viniesen con sus +barcas para ir en tierra, porque ya esa mañana antes que partiesemos +de donde estábamos habia venido el sobredicho su hermano +á hablar con el Almirante, é á darle priesa que fuese al +lugar donde estaba el dicho Guacamari. Allí fue el Almirante á +tierra é toda la gente de pro con él, tan ataviados que en una +cibdad prencipal parecieran bien: llevó algunas cosas para le +presentar porque ya habia recibido dél alguna cantidad de oro, é +era razon le respondiese con la obra é voluntad quel habia mostrado. +El dicho Guacamarí ansí mismo tenia aparejado para +hacerle presente. Cuando llegamos hallámosle echado en su cama, +como ellos lo usan, colgado en el aire, fecha una cama de algodon +como de red; no se levantó, salvo dende la cama hizo el semblante +de cortesia como él mejor sopo, mostró mucho sentimiento +con lágrimas en los ojos por la muerte de los Cristianos, é comenzó +á hablar en ello mostrando, como mejor podia, como unos +murieron de dolencia, é como otros se habian ido á Caonabó á +buscar la mina del oro é que allí los habian muerto, é los otros +que se los habian venido á matar allí en su villa. A lo que parecian +los cuerpos de los muertos no habia dos meses que habia +acaecido. Esa hora el presentó al Almirante ocho marcos y medio +de oro, é cinco ó seiscientos labrados de pedreria de diversos +colores, é un bonete de la misma pedrería, lo cual me parece deben +tener ellos en mucho. En el bonete estaba un joyel, lo cual +le dió en mucha veneracion. Paraceme que tienen en mas el +cobre quel oro. Estábamos presentes yo y un zurugiano de armada; +entonces dijo el Almirante al dicho Guacamarí que nosotros +eramos sabios de las enfermedades de los hombres que nos +quisiese mostrar la herida: él respondió que le placia, para lo +cual yo dije que seria necesario, si pudiese, que saliese fuera de +casa, porque con la mucha gente estaba escura é no se podria ver +bien; lo cual él fizo luego, creo mas de empacho que de gana; +arrimándose á el salió fuera. Despues de asentado, llego el +zurugiano á él é comenzó de desligarle: entonces dijo al Almirante +que era ferida fecha con ciba, que quiere decir con piedra. +Despues que fue desatada llegamos á tentarle. Es cierto que no +tenia mas mal en aquella que en la otra, aunque él hacia del +raposo que le dolia mucho. Ciertamente no se podia bien determinar +porque las razones eran ignotas, que ciertamente muchas +cosas habia que mostraban haber venido á él gente contraria. +Ansimesmo el Almirante no sabia que se hacer: parescióle, é á +otros muchos, que por entonces fasta bien saber la verdad que se +debia disimular, porque despues de sabida, cada que quisiesen, se +podia dél recibir enmienda. E aquella tarde se vino con el Almirante +á las naos, é mostráronle caballos é cuanto ahí habia, de +lo cual quedó muy maravillado como de cosa estraña á él; tomó +colacion en la nao, é esa tarde luego se tornó á su casa: el Almirante +dijo que queria ir á habitar allí con él é queria facer +casas, y él respondió que le placia, pero que el lugar era mal sano +porque era muy humido, é tal era él por cierto. Esto todo pasaba +estando por intérpretes dos indios de los que el otro viage habian +ido á Castilla, los cuales habian quedado vivos de siete que metimos +en el puerto, que los cinco se murieron en el camino, los +cuales escaparon á uña de caballo. Otro dia estuvimos surtos en +aquel puerto; é quiso saber cuando se partiria el Almirante: le +mandó decir que otro dia. En aquel dia vinieron á la nao el +sobredicho hermano suyo é otros con él, é trajeron algun oro para +rescatar. Ansí mesmo el dia que allá salimos se rescató buena +cantidad de oro. En la nao habia diez mugeres de las que se +habian tomado en las islas de Cariby; eran las mas dellas de +Boriquen. Aquel hermano de Guacamarí habló con ellas: creemos +que les dijo lo que luego esa noche pusieron por obra y es +que al primer sueño muy mansamente se echaron al agua é se +fueron á tierra, de manera que cuando fueron falladas menos iban +tanto trecho que con las barcas no pudieron tomar mas de las +cuatro, las cuales tomaron al salir del agua; fueron nadando mas +de una gran media legua. Otro dia de mañana envió el Almirante +á decir á Guacamarí que le enviase aquellas mugeres que +la noche antes se habian huido, é que luego las mandase buscar. +Cuando fueren hallaron el lugar despoblado, que no estaba persona +en el: ahí tornaron muchos fuerte á afirmar su sospecha, +otros decian que se habria mudado á otra poblacion quellos ansí +lo suelen hacer. Aquel dia estovimos allí quedos por que el tiempo +era contrario para salir: otro dia de mañana acordó el Almirante, +pues que el tiempo era contrario, que seria bien ir con +las barcas á ver un puerto la costa arriba, fasta el cual habria +dos leguas, para ver si habria dispusicion de tierra para hacer +habitacion; donde fuemos con todas las barcas de los navíos dejando +los navíos en el puerto. Fuimos corriendo toda la costa, +é tambien estos no se seguraban bien de nosotros; llegamos á +un lugar de donde todos eran huidos. Andando por él fallamos +junto con las casas, metido en el monte, un indio ferido de una +vara, de una ferida que resollaba por las espaldas, que no habia +podido huir mas lejos. Los desta isla pelean con unas varas +agudas, las cuales tiran con unas tiranderas como las que tiran +los mochachos las varillas en Castilla, con las cuales tiran muy +lejos asaz certero. Es cierto que para gente desarmada que pueden +hacer harto daño. Este nos dijo que Caonabó é los suyos lo habian +ferido, é habian quemado las casas á Guacamarí. Ansí quel poco +entender que los entendemos é las razones equívocas nos han +traido á todos tan afuscados que fasta agora no se ha podido +saber la verdad de la muerte de nuestra gente, é no hallamos en +aquel puerto dispusicion saludable parer hacer habitacion. Acordó +el Almirante nos tornásemos por la costa arriba por do habiámos +venido de Castilla, porque la nueva del oro era fasta allá. +Fuenos el tiempo contrario, que mayor pena nos fue tornar treinta +leguas atrás que venir desde Castilla, que con el tiempo contrario +é la largueza del camino ya eran tres meses pasados cuando +decendimos en tierra. Plugó á nuestro Señor que por la contrariedad +del tiempo que no nos dejó ir mas adelante, hobimos de +tomar tierra en el mejor sitio y dispusicion que pudieramos escoger, +donde hay mucho buen puerto é grrn pesquería, de la cual +tenemos mucha necesidad por el carecimiento de las carnes. +Hay en esta tierra muy singular pescado mas sano quel de España. +Verdad sea que la tierra no consiente que se guarde de +un dia para otro porque es caliente é humida, é por ende luego +las cosas introfatibles ligeramente se corrompen. La tierra es +muy gruesa para todas cosas; tiene junto un rio prencipal é otro +razonable, asaz cerca de muy singular agua: edificase sobre la +ribera dél una cibdad Marta, junto quel lugar se deslinda con el +agua, de manera que la metad de la cibdad queda cercada de +agua con una barranca de peña tajada, tal que por allí no ha menester +defensa ninguna; la otra metad está cercada de una arboleda +espesa que apenas podrá un conejo andar por ella; es tan +verde que en ningun tiempo del mundo fuego la podrá quemar: +hase comenzado á traer un brazo del rio, el cual dicen los maestros +que trairán por medio del lugar, é asentarán en él moliendas +é sierras de agua, é cuanto se pudiere hacer con agua. Han +sembrado mucha hortaliza, la cual es cierto que crece mas en +ocho dias que en España en veinte. Vienen aquí continuamente +muchos indios é caciques con ellos, que son como capitanes dellos, +é muchas indias: todos vienen cargados de <i>ages</i>, que son +como nabos, muy excelente manjar, de los cuales facemos acá +muchas maneras de manjares en cualquier manera; es tanto +cordial manjar que nos tiene á todos muy consolados, porque de +verdad la vida que se trajo por la mar ha seido la mas estrecha +que nunca hombres pasaron, é fue ansí necesario porque no sabiamos +que tiempo nos haria, ó cuanto permitiría Dios que estoviesemos +en el camino; ansí que fue cordura estrecharnos, porque +cualquier tiempo que viniera pudieramos conservar la vida. Rescatan +el oro é mantenimientos é todo lo que traen por cabos de +agujetas, por cuentas, por alfileres, por pedasos de escudillas é de +plateles. A este <i>age</i> llaman los de Caribi <i>nabi</i>, é los indios <i>hage</i>. +Toda esta gente, como dicho tengo, andan como nacieron, salvo +las mugeres de esta isla traen cubiertas sus verguenzas, dellos con +ropa de algodon que les ciñen las caderas, otras con yerbas é +fojas de árboles. Sus galas dellos é dellas es pintarse, unos de +negro, otros de blanco é colorado, de tantos visajes que en verlos +es bien cosa de reir; las cabezas rapadas en logares, é en logares +con vedijas de tantas maneras que no se podria escrebir. En +conclusion, que todo lo que allá en nuestra España quieren hacer +en la cabeza de un loco; acá el mejor dellos vos lo terná en +mucha merced. Aquí estamos en comarca de muchas minas de +ora, que segun lo que ellos dicen no hay cada una dellas de veinte +ó veinte é cinco leguas: las unas dicen que son en Niti, en +poder de Caonabó, aquel que mató los cristianos; otras hay en +otra parte que se llama Cibao, las cuales, si place á nuestro +Señor, sabremos é veremos con los ojos antes que pasen muchos +dias, porque agora se ficiera sino porque hay tantas cosas de proveer +que no bastamos para todo, porque la gente ha adolecido en +cuatro ó cinco dias el tercio della, creo la mayor causa dello ha +seido el trabajo é mala pasada del camino: allende de la diversidad +de la tierra; pero espero en nuestro Señor que todos se +levantarán con salud. Lo que parece desta gente es que si lengua +toviesemos que todos se convertirian, porque cuanto nos veen +facer tanto facen, en hincar las rodillas á los altares, é al Ave +Maria, é á las otras devociones é santiguarse: todos dicen que +quieren ser cristianos, puesto que verdaderamente son idólatras, +porque en sus casas hay figuras de muchas maneras; yo les he +preguntado que es aquello, dicenme que es cosa de <i>Turey</i>, que +quiere decir del cielo. Yo acometi á querer echarselos en el fuego +é haciaseles de mal que querian llorar: pero ansi piensan que +cuanto nosotros traemos que es cosa del cielo, que á todo llaman +<i>Turey</i>, que quiere decir cielo. El dia que yo salí á dormir en tierra +fue el primero dia del Señor: el poco tiempo que habemos gastado +en tierra ha seido mas en hacer donde nos metamos, é buscar las +cosas necessarias, que en saber las cosas que hay en la tierra, pero +aunque ha sido poco se han visto cosas bien de maravillar, que se +han visto árboles que llevan lana y harto fina, tal que los que +saben del arte dicen que podrán hacer buenos paños dellos. Destos +árboles hay tantos que se podrán cargar las carabelas de la lana, +aunque es trabajosa de coger, porque los árboles son muy espinosos; +pero bien se puede hallar ingenio para la coger. Hay infinito +algodon de árboles perpetuos tan grandes como duraznos. Hay +árboles que llevan cera en color y en sabor, é en arder tan buena +como la de abejas, tal que no hay diferencia mucha de la una á la +otra. Hay infinitos árboles de trementina muy singular é muy +fina. Hay mucho alquitira, tambien muy buena. Hay árboles +que pienso que llevan nueces moscadas, salvo que agora estan sin +fruto, é digo que lo pienso porque el sabor y olor de la corteza es +como de nueces moscadas. Vi una raiz de gengibre que la traía +un indio colgada al cuello. Hay tambien linaloe, aunque no es de +la manera del que fasta agora se ha visto en nuestras partes; +pero no es de dudar que sea una de las especias de linaloes que +los dotores ponemos. Tambien se ha hallado una manera de canela, +verdad es que no es tan fina como la que allá se ha visto, no +sabemos si por veutura lo hace el defeto de saberla coger en sus +tiempos como se ha de coger, ó si por ventura la tierra no la lleva +mejor. Tambien se ha hallado mirabolanos cetrinos, salvo que +agora no estan sino debajo del árbol, como la tierra es muy humida +estan podridos, tienen el sabor mucho amargo, yo creo sea del +podrimiento; pero todo lo otro, salvo el sabor que está corrompido, +es de mirabolanos verdaderos. Hay tambien almástica muy +buena. Todas estas gentes destas islas, que fasta agora se han +visto, no poseen fierro ninguno. Tienen muchas ferramientas, +ansi como hachas é azuelas hechas de piedra tan gentiles é tan +labradas que es maravilla como sin fierro se pueden hacer. El +mantenimiento suyo es pan hecho de raices de una yerba que es +entre árbol é yerba, é el age, de que ya tengo dicho que es como +nabos, que es muy buen mantenimiento: tienen por especia, por +lo adobar, una especia que se llama <i>agi</i>, con la cual comen tambien +el pescado, como aves cuando las pueden haber, que hay infinitas +de muchas maneras. Tienen otrosí unos granos como avellanas, +muy buenos de comer. Comen cuantas culebras é lagartos é +arañas é cuantos gusanos se hallan por el suelo; ansi que me +parece es mayor su bestialidad que de ninguna bestia del mundo. +Despues de una vez haber determinado el Almirante de dejar el +descobrir las minas fasta primero enviar los navíos que se habian +de partir á Castilla, por la mucha enfermedad que habia seido en +la gente, acordó de enviar dos cuadrillas con dos Capitanes, el uno +á Cibao y el otro á Niti, donde está Caonobó, de que ya he dicho, +las cuales fueron é vinieron el uno á veinte dias de Enero, é el otro +á veinte é uno: el que fue á Cibao halló oro en tantas partes que +no lo osa hombre decir, que de verdad en mas de cincuenta arroyos +é rios hallaban oro, é fuera de los rios por tierra; de manera que +en toda aquella provincia dice que do quiera que lo quieran buscar +lo hallarán. Trajo muestra de muchas partes como en la arena +de los rios é en las hontizuelas, que estan sobre tierra, creese que +cabando, como sabemos hacer, se hallará en mayores pedazos, +porque los indios no saben cabar ni tienen con que puedan cabar +de un palmo arriba. El otro que fue á Niti trajo tambien nueva +de mucho oro en tres ó cuatro partes; ansi mesmo trajo la muestra +dello. Ansi que de cierto los Reyes nuestros Señores desde agora +se pueden tener por los mas prósperos é mas ricos Príncipes del +mundo, porque tal cosa hasta agora no se ha visto ni leido de +ninguno en el mundo, porque verdaderamente á otro camino que +los navíos vuelvan pueden llevar tanta cantidad de oro que se +puedan maravillar cualesquiera que lo supieren. Aquí me parece +sera bien cesar el cuento: creo los que no me conocen que oyeren +éstas cosas, me ternán por prolijo é por hombre que ha alargado +algo; pero Dios es testigo que yo no he traspasado una jota los +términos de la verdad.</p> + +<p>Hasta aquí es el treslado de lo que conviene á nuevas de aquellas +partes é Indias. Lo demas que venia en la carta no hace al caso, +porque son cosas particulares que el dicho Dotor Chanca, como +natural de Sevilla, suplicaba y encomendaba á los del Cabildo de +Sevilla que tocaba á su hacienda y á los suyos, que en la dicha +cibdad habia dejado, y llegó esta á Sevilla en el mes de <a class="lacuna" href="#Footnote_150">[150]</a> +año de mil é cuatrocientos énoventa y tres años.</p> + +</div> + +<div class="footnotes"> + +<h3>FOOTNOTES:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_108" href="#FNanchor_108" class="label">[108]</a> Doctor Chanca was appointed physician to Columbus’s fleet by a +dispatch of the 23rd of May, 1493; and on the 24th, the chief accountants +were instructed to pay him salary and rations as scrivener in the +Indies. Señor de Navarrete, who saw the manuscript, “Historia de la +Reyes Católicos,” says that its author, Andres Bernaldez, Cura de los +Palacios, makes mention of Dr. Chanca, and had this same narration +before him, as may be seen in the one hundred and twentieth chapter +of his history.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_109" href="#FNanchor_109" class="label">[109]</a> A similar gap in the original: it should say <i>of the year 1493</i>.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_110" href="#FNanchor_110" class="label">[110]</a> The island of Dominica, so called from having been discovered on +a Sunday.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_111" href="#FNanchor_111" class="label">[111]</a> The island Marigalante, so called from the name of the ship in +which Columbus sailed.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_112" href="#FNanchor_112" class="label">[112]</a> Dominica has no harbours, but there are several good roadsteads on +the western side.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_113" href="#FNanchor_113" class="label">[113]</a> Marigalante.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_114" href="#FNanchor_114" class="label">[114]</a> The fruit of the manchineal, which apparently produces similar +effects.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_115" href="#FNanchor_115" class="label">[115]</a> Guadaloupe.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_116" href="#FNanchor_116" class="label">[116]</a> It was Diego Marquez, the caterer, who with eight other men went +on shore into the interior of the island, without permission from the +admiral, who caused him to be sought for by parties of men with trumpets, +but without success. One of those who were sent out with this +object, was Alonzo de Hojeda, who took with him forty men, and on +their return they reported that they had found many aromatic plants, a +variety of birds, and some considerable rivers. The wanderers were not +able to find their way to the ships until the eighth of November. (M. +F. Navarrete’s note, from Bartholomeo de las Casas’ Manuscript History, +chap. 84.)</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_117" href="#FNanchor_117" class="label">[117]</a> This island, called further on Cayre, is most probably the “Charis” +or “Carib” referred to on page 14, which the log of the first voyage +makes to be next to and westward of Matenin, which latter all evidence +shows to be Martinique. Dominica, therefore, will be Charis or Ceyre. +Turuqueira and Ayay, probably the two islands which form Guadaloupe.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_118" href="#FNanchor_118" class="label">[118]</a> Tuesday the 12th of November.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_119" href="#FNanchor_119" class="label">[119]</a> The island Montserrat. See Herrera, Dec. 1. L. 2, c. vii.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_120" href="#FNanchor_120" class="label">[120]</a> The admiral called it Santa Maria la Redonda. See <i>ibid.</i></p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_121" href="#FNanchor_121" class="label">[121]</a> Santa Maria la Antigua. See <i>ibid.</i></p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_122" href="#FNanchor_122" class="label">[122]</a> The island of St. Martin. See <i>ibid.</i></p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_123" href="#FNanchor_123" class="label">[123]</a> Dominica, see <a href="#Footnote_117">note, p. 31</a>.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_124" href="#FNanchor_124" class="label">[124]</a> The island of <i>Santa Cruz</i>, where they anchored on Thursday the +fourteenth of November. See Herrera, Dec. 1. L. 2, cap. vii.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_125" href="#FNanchor_125" class="label">[125]</a> The admiral named the largest of these islands <i>St. Ursula</i>, and all +the others <i>The eleven thousand Virgins</i>. See <i>ibid.</i></p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_126" href="#FNanchor_126" class="label">[126]</a> The island of <i>Porto Rico</i>, to which the admiral gave the name of +<i>St. John the Baptist</i>. See Herrera, Dec. 1. L. 2, cap. vii.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_127" href="#FNanchor_127" class="label">[127]</a> Porto Rico.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_128" href="#FNanchor_128" class="label">[128]</a> On Friday, the twenty-second of November, the admiral first caught +sight of the island of Española. See Herrera, Dec. 1. L. 2, cap. vii.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_129" href="#FNanchor_129" class="label">[129]</a> Mona Island.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_130" href="#FNanchor_130" class="label">[130]</a> Apparently between Point Macao and Point Engaño, which is flat. +The higher land of the north coast commences at Point Macao.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_131" href="#FNanchor_131" class="label">[131]</a> On the parallel of 18° 25′ the island has an extreme length of 400 +miles, and its extreme breadth may be taken at 150 on the meridian of +71° 20′.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_132" href="#FNanchor_132" class="label">[132]</a> In all probability a species of <i>capromys</i>.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_133" href="#FNanchor_133" class="label">[133]</a> Cabras or Goat Island, close to “el Fraile” in the Bay of Monte +Cristi.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_134" href="#FNanchor_134" class="label">[134]</a> An alligator.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_135" href="#FNanchor_135" class="label">[135]</a> The river Yaque.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_136" href="#FNanchor_136" class="label">[136]</a> The admiral anchored at the entrance of the harbour of Navidad, +on Wednesday, the twenty-seventh of November, towards midnight, +and on the following day put into the harbour. See Herrera, Dec. 1. +L. 2, cap. viii and ix.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_137" href="#FNanchor_137" class="label">[137]</a> The Bay of Caracol, four leagues west of Fort Dauphin.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_138" href="#FNanchor_138" class="label">[138]</a> This is the earliest mention of a hammock.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_139" href="#FNanchor_139" class="label">[139]</a> Port Dauphin.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_140" href="#FNanchor_140" class="label">[140]</a> Port Isabelique, or Isabella, ten leagues to the east of Monte Christi.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_141" href="#FNanchor_141" class="label">[141]</a> The river Isabella.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_142" href="#FNanchor_142" class="label">[142]</a> The infant city of Isabella.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_143" href="#FNanchor_143" class="label">[143]</a> Yams.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_144" href="#FNanchor_144" class="label">[144]</a> A species of the natural order <i>Bombaceæ</i>; perhaps the <i>Eriodendron +anfractuosum</i>.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_145" href="#FNanchor_145" class="label">[145]</a> These were probably trees of the laurel tribe, the bark of which is +generally spicy like cinnamon. The cinnamon mentioned below was +probably also one of these and not true cinnamon.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_146" href="#FNanchor_146" class="label">[146]</a> Barbadoes aloes, still considered as of inferior quality to those of +Socotra.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_147" href="#FNanchor_147" class="label">[147]</a> In fact he sent twelve vessels under the command of Antonio de +Torres, who set sail from the port of Navidad, on the second of February, +1494, charged with an account of all that had occurred. (Navarrete.)</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_148" href="#FNanchor_148" class="label">[148]</a> This was Alonzo de Ojeda, who went out with fifteen men, in the +month of January 1494, to seek the mines of Cibao, and returned a few +days after with good news, having been well received everywhere by the +natives. (Navarrete.)</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_149" href="#FNanchor_149" class="label">[149]</a> It is to be regretted, Navarrete here justly remarks, that Dr. +Chanca should not have described the subsequent occurrences in Hispaniola, +which are very important, and which have been related by cotemporary +historians.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_150" href="#FNanchor_150" class="label">[150]</a> A similar gap in the original. The date of the year is a mistake. +This letter might have been brought by the ships commanded by Torres, +and consequently must have been written at the end of January, 1494, +after the expedition of Ojeda. (Navarrete.)</p></div> + +</div> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="english"> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_72">[72]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="MEMORIAL">MEMORIAL.</h2> + +<h3 class="hanging"><i>Memorial of the results of the Second Voyage of the Admiral, +Christopher Columbus, to the Indies, drawn up by him for +their Highnesses King Ferdinand and Queen Isabella; +and addressed to Antonio de Torres, from the City of +Isabella, the 30th of January, 1494. The reply of their +Highnesses is affixed at the end of each chapter.</i>⁠<a id="FNanchor_151" href="#Footnote_151" class="fnanchor">[151]</a></h3> + +<p>The report which you, Antonio de Torres, captain of the ship +<i>Marigalante</i>, and Governor of the city of Isabella, have to +make, on my behalf, to the King and Queen our sovereigns, +is as follows:</p> + +<p>Imprimis: after having delivered the credentials which +you bear from me to their Highnesses, you will do homage +in my name, and commend me to them as to my natural +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_73">[73]</span>sovereigns, in whose service I desire to continue till death; +and you will furthermore be able to lay before them all that +you have yourself seen and known respecting me.</p> + +<p><i>Their Highnesses accept and acknowledge the service.</i></p> + +<p>Item: Although, by the letters which I have written to +their Highnesses, as well as to Father Buil and to the Treasurer, +a clear and comprehensive idea may be formed of all +that has transpired since our arrival; you will, notwithstanding, +inform their Highnesses, on my behalf, that God has +been pleased to manifest such favour towards their service, +that not only has nothing hitherto occurred to diminish the +importance of what I have formerly written or said to their +Highnesses; but on the contrary I hope, by God’s grace, +shortly to prove it more clearly by facts; because we have +found upon the sea shore, without penetrating into the interior +of the country, some spots showing so many indications of +various spices, as naturally to suggest the hope of the best results +for the future. The same holds good with respect to the +gold mines; for two parties only, who were sent, out in different +directions to discover them, and who, because they had +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_74">[74]</span>few people with them, remained out but a short time, found, +nevertheless, a great number of rivers whose sands contained +this precious metal in such quantity, that each man took up +a sample of it in his hand; so that our two messengers returned +so joyous, and boasted so much of the abundance of +gold, that I feel a hesitation in speaking and writing of +it to their Highnesses. But as Gorbalan, who was one of +the persons who went on the discovery, is returning to +Spain, he will be able to relate all that he has seen and +observed; although there remains here another individual,—named +Hojeda, formerly servant of the Duke of +Medinaceli, and a very discreet and pains-taking youth,—who +without doubt discovered, beyond all comparison, more +than the other, judging by the account which he gave of +the rivers he had seen; for he reported, that each of them +contained things that appeared incredible. It results from +all this, that their Highnesses ought to return thanks to God, +for the favour which He thus accords to all their Highnesses’ +enterprises.</p> + +<p><i>Their Highnesses return thanks to God for all that is recorded, +and regard as a very signal service all that the Admiral has +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_75">[75]</span>already done, and is yet doing; for they are sensible that, +under God, it is he who has procured for them their present +and future possessions in these countries; and as they are +about to write to him on this subject more at length, they refer +to their letter.</i></p> + +<p>Item. You will repeat to their Highnesses what I have +already written to them, that I should have ardently desired +to have been able to send them, by this occasion, a larger +quantity of gold than what they have any hope of our being +able to collect, but that the greater part of the people we +employed fell suddenly ill. Moreover, the departure of this +present expedition could not be delayed any longer, for two +reasons: namely, on account of the heavy expense which +their stay here occasioned; and because the weather was +favourable for their departure, and for the return of those +who should bring back the articles of which we stand in the +most pressing need. If the former were to put off the +time of their starting, and the latter were to delay their departure, +they would not be able to reach here by the month +of May. Besides, if I wished now to undertake a journey to +the rivers with those who are well,—whether with those who +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_76">[76]</span>are at sea, or those who are on land in the huts,—I should +experience great difficulties, and even dangers; because, in +traversing three or four-and-twenty leagues, where there are +bays and rivers to pass, we should be obliged to carry, as +provision for so long a journey, and for the time necessary +for collecting the gold, many articles of food, etc., which +could not be carried on our backs, and there are no beasts +of burden to be found, to afford the necessary assistance. +Moreover, the roads and passes are not in such a condition +as I should wish for travelling over; but they have already +begun to make them passable. It would be also extremely +inconvenient to leave the sick men here in the open air, or in +huts, with such food and defences as they have on shore; +although these Indians appear every day to be more simple +and harmless to those who land for the purpose of making +investigations. In short, although they come every day to +visit us, it would nevertheless be imprudent to risk the loss +of our men and our provisions, which might very easily +happen, if an Indian were only, with a lighted coal, to set +fire to the huts, for they ramble about both night and day; +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_77">[77]</span>for this reason, we keep sentinels constantly on the watch +while the dwellings are exposed and undefended.</p> + +<p><i>He has done well.</i></p> + +<p>Further, as we have remarked that the greatest part of +those who have gone out to make discoveries, have fallen +sick on their return, and that some have even been obliged +to abandon the undertaking in the middle of their journey, +and return, it was equally to be feared that the same would +occur to those who were at the time enjoying good health, +if they were also to go. There were two evils to fear:—one, +the chance of falling ill in undertaking the same work, in a +place where there were no houses nor any kind of protection, +and of being exposed to the attacks of the cacique called +Caonabo, who, by all accounts, is a badly-disposed man, and +extremely daring; who, if he were to find us in a dispirited +condition and sick, might venture upon what he would not +dare to do if we were well. The other evil consisted in the +difficulty of carrying the gold; for, either we should have to +carry it in small quantities, and go and return every day, +and thus daily expose ourselves to the chance of sickness; +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_78">[78]</span>or we should have to send it under the escort of a party of +our people, and equally run the risk of losing them.</p> + +<p><i>He has done well.</i></p> + +<p>These are the reasons, you will tell their Highnesses, why +the departure of the expedition has not been delayed, and +why only a sample of the gold is sent to them; but I trust +in the mercy of God, who in all things and in every place +has guided us hitherto, that all our men will be soon restored +to health, as, indeed, they are already beginning to be; for +they have but to try this country for a little time and they +speedily recover their health. One thing is certain, that if +they could have fresh meat, they would very quickly, by the +help of God, be up and doing; and those who are most +sickly, would speedily recover. I hope that they may be +restored. The small number of those who continue well, +are employed every day in barricading our dwelling, so as +to put it in a state of defence, and in taking necessary +measures for the safety of our ammunition; which will be +finished now in a few days, for all our fortifications will consist +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_79">[79]</span>simply of stone walls.⁠<a id="FNanchor_152" href="#Footnote_152" class="fnanchor">[152]</a> These precautions will be sufficient, +as the Indians are not a people to be much afraid of; +and, unless they should find us asleep, they would not dare +to undertake any hostile movement against us, even if they +should entertain the idea of so doing. The misfortune which +happened to those who remained here, must be attributed +to their want of vigilance; for however few they were in +number, and however favourable the opportunities that the +Indians may have had for doing what they did, they would +never have ventured to do them any injury, if they had only +seen that they took proper precautions against an attack. +As soon as this object is gained, I will undertake to go in +search of these rivers; either proceeding hence by land, and +looking out for the best expedients that may offer, or else +by sea, rounding the island until we come to the place which +is described as being only six or seven leagues from where +these rivers that I speak of are situated; so that we may +collect the gold in safety, and put it in security against all +attacks in some stronghold or tower, which may be quickly +built for that purpose: and thus, when the two caravels shall +return thither, the gold may be taken away and finally sent +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_80">[80]</span>home in safety at the first favourable season for making the +voyage.</p> + +<p><i>This is well and exactly as he should do.</i></p> + +<p>Item. You will inform their Highnesses (as indeed has +been already said), that the cause of the sickness so general +among us, is the change of air and water, for we find that all +of us are affected, though few dangerously; consequently, +the preservation of the health of the people will depend, +under God, on their being provided with the same food +that they are accustomed to in Spain: neither those who +are here now, nor those that shall come, will be in a position +to be of service to their Highnesses, unless they enjoy good +health. We ought to have fresh supplies of provisions +until the time that we may be able to gather a sufficient +crop from what we shall have sown or planted here: I speak +of wheat, barley, and grapes, towards the cultivation of +which not much has been done this year, from our being +unable earlier to choose a convenient settlement. When we +had chosen it, the small number of labourers that were with +us fell sick; and, even when they recovered, we had so few +cattle, and those so lean and weak, that the utmost they +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_81">[81]</span>could do was very little; however, they have sown a few +plots of ground, for the sake of trying the soil, which seems +excellent, in the hope of thereby obtaining some relief in our +necessities. We are very confident, from what we can see, +that wheat and grapes will grow very well in this country. +We must, however, wait for the fruit; and if it grows as +quickly and well as the corn, in proportion to the number of +vines that have been planted, we shall certainly not stand +in need of Andalusia and Sicily here. There are also sugar-canes, +of which the small quantity that we have planted has +taken root. The beauty of the country in these islands,—the +mountains, the valleys, the streams, the fields watered +by broad rivers,—is such that there is no country on which +the sun sheds his beams that can present a more charming +appearance.</p> + +<p><i>Since the land is so fertile, it is desirable to sow of all kinds +as much as possible; and Don Juan de Fonseca is instructed +to send over immediately everything requisite for that purpose.</i></p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_82">[82]</span></p> + +<p>Item. You will say, that as a large portion of the wine +that we brought with us has run away, in consequence, as +most of the men say, of the bad cooperage of the butts made +at Seville, the article that we stand most in need of now, +and shall stand in need of, is wine; and although we have +biscuit and corn for some time longer, it is nevertheless +necessary that a reasonable quantity of these be sent to us, +for the voyage is a long one, and it is impossible to make a +calculation for every day; the same holds good with respect +to pork and salt beef, which should be better than what we +brought out with us on this voyage. Sheep, and still better, +lambs and lambkins, more females than males, young calves +and heifers, also are wanted, and should be sent by every +caravel that may be dispatched hither; and at the same +time some asses, both male and female, and mares for labour +and tillage; for here there are no beasts that a man can turn +to any use. As I fear that their Highnesses may not be at +Seville, and that their officers or ministers will not, without +their express instructions, make any movement towards the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_83">[83]</span>carrying out of the necessary arrangements for the return +voyage; and that, in the interval between the report and the +reply, the favourable moment for the departure of the vessels +which are to return hither (and which should be in all the +month of May) may elapse, you will tell their Highnesses, +as I charged and ordered you, that I have given strict orders +that the gold that you carry with you be placed in the hands +of some merchant in Seville, in order that he may therefrom +disburse the sums necessary for loading the two caravels +with wine, corn, and other articles detailed in this memorial; +and this merchant shall convey or send the said +gold to their Highnesses, that they may see it, receive +it, and from it cause to be defrayed the expenses that +may arise from the fitting-up and loading of the said two +caravels. It is necessary, for the encouragement of the men +who remain here, and for the support of their spirits, that +an effort should be made to let the expedition arrive in the +course of the month of May, so that before summer they +may have the fresh provisions, and other necessaries, especially +against sickness. We particularly stand in need of +raisins, sugar, almonds, honey, and rice, of which we ought +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_84">[84]</span>to have had a great quantity, but brought very little with +us, and what we had is now consumed. The greater part of +the medicines, also, that we brought from Spain are used +up, so many of our number having been sick. For all +these articles, both for those who are in good health and +for the sick, you carry, as I have already said, memorials +signed by my hand; you will execute my orders to the full, +if there be sufficient money wherewith to do so, or you will +at least procure what is more immediately necessary, and +which ought, consequently, to come as speedily as possible +by the two vessels. As to the remainder, you will obtain +their Highnesses’ permission for their being sent by other +vessels without loss of time.</p> + +<p><i>Their Highnesses will give instructions to Don Juan de Fonseca +to make immediate inquiry respecting the imposition in +the matter of the casks, in order that those who supplied them +shall at their own expense make good the loss occasioned by +the waste of the wine, together with the costs. He will have to +see that sugar-canes of good quality be sent, and will immediately +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_85">[85]</span>look to the despatch of the other articles herein required.</i></p> + +<p>Item. You will tell their Highnesses, that as we have no +interpreter through whom we can make these people acquainted +with our holy faith, as their Highnesses and we +ourselves desire, and as we will do so soon as we are able, +we send by these two vessels some of these cannibal men +and women, as well as some children, both male and female, +whom their Highnesses might order to be placed under the +care of the most competent persons to teach them the language. +At the same time they might be employed in useful +occupations, and by degrees through somewhat more care +being bestowed upon them than upon other slaves, they +would learn one from the other. By not seeing or speaking +to each other for a long time, they will learn much sooner +in Spain than they will here, and become much better interpreters. +We will, however, not fail to do what we can; +it is true, that as there is but little communication between +one of these islands and another, there is some difference +in their mode of expressing themselves, which mainly depends +on the distance between them. But as amongst all +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_86">[86]</span>these islands, those inhabited by the cannibals are the +largest and the most populous, it must be evident that +nothing but good can come from sending to Spain men and +women who may thus one day be led to abandon their barbarous +custom of eating their fellow-creatures. By learning +the Spanish language in Spain, they will much earlier receive +baptism and advance the welfare of their souls; moreover, +we shall gain great credit with the Indians who do not +practise the above-mentioned cruel custom, when they see +that we have seized and led captive those who injure them, +and whose very name alone fills them with horror. You +will assure their Highnesses, that our arrival in this country, +and the sight of so fine a fleet, have produced the most imposing +effect for the present, and promise great security +hereafter; for all the inhabitants of this great island, and of +the others, when they see the good treatment that we shall +shew to those who do well, and the punishment that we +shall inflict on those who do wrong, will hasten to submit, +so that we shall be able to lay our commands on them as +vassals of their Highnesses. And as even now they not only +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_87">[87]</span>readily comply with every wish that we express, but also of +their own accord endeavour to do what they think will please +us, I think that their Highnesses may feel assured that, +on the other side also, the arrival of this fleet has, in many +respects, secured for them, both for the present and the +future, a wide renown amongst all Christian Princes; but +they themselves will be able to form a much better judgment +on this subject than it is in my power to give expression +to.</p> + +<p><i>Let him be informed of what has transpired respecting the +cannibals that came over to Spain. He has done well and +let him do as he says; but let him endeavour by all possible +means to convert them to our holy Catholic religion, and +do the same with respect to the inhabitants of all the islands +to which he may go.</i></p> + +<p>Item. You will tell their Highnesses, that the welfare +of the souls of the said cannibals, and of the inhabitants +of this island also, has suggested the thought that the +greater the number that are sent over to Spain the better, +and thus good service may result to their Highnesses +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_88">[88]</span>in the following manner. Considering what great need +we have of cattle and of beasts of burthen, both for food +and to assist the settlers in this and all these islands, +both for peopling the land and cultivating the soil, their +Highnesses might authorize a suitable number of caravels to +come here every year to bring over the said cattle, and provisions, +and other articles; these cattle, etc., might be sold +at moderate prices for account of the bearers, and the latter +might be paid with slaves, taken from among the Caribbees, +who are a wild people, fit for any work, well proportioned +and very intelligent, and who, when they have got rid of the +cruel habits to which they have become accustomed, will be +better than any other kind of slaves. When they are out +of their country, they will forget their cruel customs; and it +will be easy to obtain plenty of these savages by means of +row-boats that we propose to build. It is taken for granted, +that each of the caravels sent by their Highnesses, will have +on board a confidential man, who will take care that the +vessels do not stop anywhere else than here, where they are +to unload and reload their vessels. Their Highnesses might +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_89">[89]</span>fix duties on the slaves that may be taken over, upon their +arrival in Spain. You will ask for a reply upon this point, +and bring it to me, in order that I may be able to take the +necessary measures, should the proposition merit the approbation +of their Highnesses.</p> + +<p><i>The consideration of this subject has been suspended for a +time, until fresh advices arrive from the other side: let the +Admiral write what he thinks upon the subject.</i></p> + +<p>Item. You will also tell their Highnesses, that freighting +the ships by the ton, as the Flemish merchants do, will be +more advantageous and less expensive than any other mode, +and it is for this reason that I have given you instructions +to freight in this manner the caravels that you have now to +send off, and it will be well to adopt this plan with all the +others that their Highnesses may send provided it meets +their approbation; but I do not mean to say that this measure +should be applied to the vessels that shall come over +licensed for the traffic of slaves.</p> + +<p><i>Their Highnesses have given directions to Don Juan de +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_90">[90]</span>Fonseca, to have the caravels freighted in the manner described, +if it can be done.</i></p> + +<p>Item. You will tell their Highnesses, that in order to +save any extra expense, I have purchased the caravels mentioned +in the memorial of which you are the bearer, in order +to keep them here with the two vessels, the <i>Gallega</i> and the +<i>Capitana</i>, of which, by advice of the pilot its commander, I +purchased the three-eighths for the price declared in the said +memorial, signed by my hand. These vessels will not only +give authority and great security to those who will have to +remain on shore and whose duty it will be to make arrangements +with the Indians for collecting the gold; but they +will be also very useful to ward off any attack that may be +made upon them by strangers; moreover, the caravels will +be required for the task of making the discovery of terra +firma, and of the islands which lie scattered about in this +vicinity. You will therefore beg their Highnesses to pay, +at the term of credit arranged with the sellers, the sums +which these vessels shall cost, for without doubt their Highnesses +will be very soon reimbursed for what they may expend; +at least, such is my belief and hope in the mercy of God.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_91">[91]</span></p> + +<p><i>The Admiral has done well. You will tell him that the sum +mentioned has been paid to the seller of the vessels, and that +Don Juan de Fonseca has been ordered to pay the cost of the +caravels purchased by the Admiral.</i></p> + +<p>Item. You will speak to their Highnesses, and beseech +them on my behalf, in the most humble manner possible, to +be pleased to give mature reflection to the observations I +may make, in letters or more detailed statements, with reference +to the peacefulness, harmony, and good feeling of +those who come hither; in order that for their Highnesses +service persons may be selected who will hold in view the +purpose for which these men are sent, rather than their own +interest; and since you yourself have seen and are acquainted +with these matters, you will speak to their Highnesses upon +this subject, and will tell them the truth on every point exactly +as you have understood it; you will also take care that +the orders which their Highnesses shall give on this point +be put into effect, if possible, by the first vessels, in order +that no further injury occur here in the matters that affect +their service.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_92">[92]</span></p> + +<p><i>Their Highnesses are well informed of all that takes place, +and will see to it that everything is done as it should be.</i></p> + +<p>Item. You will describe to their Highnesses the position +of this city, the beauty of the province in which it is situated, +as you have seen it, and as you can honestly speak of it; and +you can inform them, that in virtue of the powers which I +have received from them, I have made you governor of the +said city; and you will tell them also that I humbly beseech +them, out of consideration for your services, to receive your +nomination favourably, which I sincerely hope they may do.</p> + +<p><i>Their Highnesses are pleased to sanction your appointment +as governor.</i></p> + +<p>Item. As Messire Pedro Margarite, an officer of the household +to their Highnesses, has done good service, and will, I +hope, continue to do so for the future in all matters which +may be entrusted to him, I have felt great pleasure in his +continuing his stay in this country; and I have been much +pleased to find that Gaspar and Beltran also remain: and as +they are all three well known to their Highnesses as faithful +servants, I shall place them in posts or employments of trust. +You will beg their Highnesses especially to have regard to +the situation of the said Messire Pedro Margarite, who is +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_93">[93]</span>married and the father of a family, and beseech them to give +him some vacant command in the order of Santiago, of which +he is a knight, in order that his wife and children may thus +have a competence to live upon. You will also make mention +of Juan Aguado, a servant of their Highnesses; you will inform +them of the zeal and activity with which he has served +them in all matters that have been entrusted to him; and +also that I beseech their Highnesses on his behalf, as well as +on behalf of those above mentioned, not to forget my recommendation, +but to give it full consideration.</p> + +<p><i>Their Highnesses grant an annual pension of thirty thousand +maravedis to Messire Pedro Margarite, and pensions of +fifteen thousand maravedis to Gaspard and Beltram, which +will be reckoned from this day, the 15th of August 1494. +They give orders that the said pensions be paid by the Admiral +out of the sums to be paid in the Indies, and by Don +Juan de Fonseca out of the sums to be paid in Spain. With +respect to the matter of Juan Aguado, their Highnesses will +not be forgetful.</i></p> + +<p>Item. You will inform their Highnesses of the continual +labour that Doctor Chanca has undergone, from the prodigious +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_94">[94]</span>number of sick and the scarcity of provisions: and +that, in spite of all this, he exhibits the greatest zeal and +kindness in everything that relates to his profession. As +their highnesses have entrusted me with the charge of fixing +the salary that is to be paid to him while out here (although +it is certain that he neither receives, nor can receive anything +from any one, and does not receive anything from his position, +equal to what he did, and could still do in Spain, +where he lived peaceably and at ease, in a very different style +from what he does here; and, although he declares that he +earned more in Spain, exclusive of the pay which he received +from their Highnesses), I have, nevertheless, not ventured +to place to the credit of his account more than fifty thousand +maravedis per annum, as the sum which he is to receive for +his yearly labour during the time of his stay in this country. +I beg their Highnesses to give their sanction to this salary, +exclusive of his maintenance while here; and I do so, because +he asserts that all the medical men who attend their Highnesses +in the royal yachts, or in any of their expeditions, are +accustomed to receive by right the day’s pay out of the +annual salary of each individual. Let this be as it may, I +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_95">[95]</span>am informed for certain, that on whatever service they are +engaged, it is the custom to give them a certain fixed sum, +settled at the will and by order of their Highnesses, as compensation +for the said day’s pay. You will, therefore, beg +their Highnesses to decide this matter, as well with respect +to the annual pay as to the above-mentioned usage, so that +the said doctor may be reasonably satisfied.</p> + +<p><i>Their Highnesses acknowledge the justice of Doctor Chanca’s +observations, and it is their wish that the Admiral shall pay +him the sum which he has allowed him, exclusive of his fixed +annual salary. With respect to the day’s pay allowed to +medical men, it is not the custom to authorize them to receive +it, except when they are in personal attendance upon our Lord +the King.</i></p> + +<p>Item. You will tell their Highnesses what great devotion +Coronel has shown to the service in many respects, and +what great proofs he has given of it in every important +matter that has been trusted to him, and how much we feel +his loss now that he is sick. You will represent to them +how just it is that he should receive the recompense of such +good and loyal services, not only in the favours which may +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_96">[96]</span>hereafter be shown to him, but also in his present pay, in +order that he, and all those that are with us, may see what +profit will accrue to them from their zeal in the service; for +the importance and difficulty of exploring the mines should +call for great consideration towards those to whom such extensive +interests are entrusted; and, as the talents of the +said Coronel have made me determine upon appointing him +principal constable of this portion of the Indies, and, as his +salary is left open, I beg their Highnesses to make it as +liberal as may be in consideration of his services, and to +confirm his nomination to the service which I have allotted +to him, by giving him an official appointment thereto.</p> + +<p><i>Their Highnesses grant him, besides his salary, an annual +pension of fifteen thousand maravedis; the same to be paid +him at the same time as the said salary.</i></p> + +<p>Item. You will, at the same time, tell their Highnesses +that the bachelor, Gil Garcia, came out here in quality of +principal alcalde, without having any salary fixed or allowed +to him: that he is a good man, well-informed, correct in his +conduct, and very necessary to us; and that I beg their +Highnesses to be pleased to appoint him a salary sufficient +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_97">[97]</span>for his support; and that it be remitted to him together +with his pay from the other side.</p> + +<p><i>Their Highnesses grant him an annual pension of twenty +thousand maravedis during his stay in the Indies, and that over +and above his fixed appointments; and it is their order that +this pension be paid to him at the same time as his salary.</i></p> + +<p>Item. You will tell their Highnesses, as I have already +told them in writing, that I think it will be impossible to go +this year to make discoveries until arrangements have been +made to work the two rivers in which the gold has been found +in the most profitable manner for their Highnesses’ interest; +and this may be done more effectively hereafter, because it is +not a thing that every one can do to my satisfaction, or with +advantage to their Highnesses’ service, unless I be present; +for whatever is to be done always turns out best under the +eye of the party interested.</p> + +<p><i>It is the most necessary thing possible that he should strive +to find the way to this gold.</i></p> + +<p>Item. You will tell their Highnesses, that the horse-soldiers +that came from Grenada to the review which took place +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_98">[98]</span>at Seville, offered good horses, but that at the time of their +being sent on board, they took advantage of my absence (for +I was somewhat indisposed), and changed them for others, +the best of which does not seem worth two thousand maravedis, +for they sold the first and bought these; and this deception +on the part of the horse-soldiers, is very like what I +have known to occur to many gentlemen in Seville of my +acquaintance. It seems that Juan de Soria, after the price +was paid, for some private interest of his own, put other +horses in the place of those that I expected to find, and when +I came to see them, there were horses there that had never +been offered to me for sale. In all this the greatest dishonesty +has been shown, so that I do not know whether I ought to +complain of him alone, since these horse-soldiers have been +paid their expenses up to the present day, besides their salary +and the hire of their horses, and when they are ill, they will +not allow their horses to be used, because they are not present. +It is not their Highnesses’ wish that these horses +should be purchased for anything but their Highnesses’ service, +but these men think they are only to be employed on +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_99">[99]</span>work which requires them to ride on horse-back, which is +not the case at present. All these considerations lead me +to think, that it would be more convenient to buy their +horses, which are worth but little, and thus avoid being exposed +daily to new disputes; finally, their Highnesses will +decide on what plan is best for their own interests.</p> + +<p><i>Their Highnesses order Don Juan de Fonseca to make inquiries +respecting the matter of the horses, and if it be true +that such a deception has been practised, to send up the culprits +to be punished as they deserve; also to gain information respecting +the other people that the admiral speaks of, and to send +the result of the information to their Highnesses. With respect +to the horse soldiers, it is their Highnesses’ wish and command +that they continue where they are, and remain in service, because +they belong to the guards and to the class of their Highnesses’ +servants. Their Highnesses also command the said horse +soldiers to give up their horses into the charge of the Admiral +on all occasions when they shall be required, and if the use of +the horses should occasion any loss, their Highnesses direct that +compensation shall be made for the amount of the injury, through +the medium of the Admiral.</i></p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_100">[100]</span></p> + +<p>Item. You will mention to their Highnesses, that more +than two hundred persons have come here without fixed salaries, +and that some of them are very useful to the service; +and in order to preserve system and uniformity, the others +have been ordered to imitate them. For the first three years, +it is desirable that we should have here a thousand men, in +order to keep a safeguard upon the island and upon the rivers +that supply the gold: and even if we were able to mount +a hundred men on horse-back, so far from being an evil, it +will be a very necessary thing for us; but their Highnesses +might pass by the question of the horse-men until gold shall +be sent. In short, their Highnesses should give instructions +as to whether the two hundred people who have come over +without pay, should receive pay like the others, if they do +their work well; for we certainly have great need of them to +commence our labours, as I have already shown.</p> + +<p><i>It is their Highnesses’ wish and command, that the two +hundred persons without pay shall replace such of those who are +paid as have failed, or as shall hereafter fail, in their duty, +provided they are fit for the service and please the Admiral; +and their Highnesses order the Accomptant to enter their names +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_101">[101]</span>in the place of those who shall fail in their duty, as the Admiral +shall determine.</i></p> + +<p>Item. As there are means of diminishing the expenses +that these people occasion, by employing them, as other +Princes do, in industrial occupations, I think it would be +well that all ships that come here should be ordered to bring, +besides the ordinary stores and medicines, shoes, and leather +for making shoes, shirts, both of common and superior +quality, doublets, laces, some peasants’ clothing, breeches, +and cloth for making clothes, all at moderate prices; they +might also bring other articles, such as conserves, which do +not enter into the daily ration, yet are good for preserving +health. The Spaniards that are here would always be +happy to receive such articles as these in lieu of part of +their pay; and if they were purchased by men who were +selected for their known loyalty, and who take an interest +in the service of their Highnesses, considerable economy +would result from this arrangement. Ascertain their +Highnesses’ pleasure on this head, and if the plan be +deemed expedient for the service, it should be put in practice +at once.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_102">[102]</span></p> + +<p><i>This matter may rest for the present until the Admiral shall +write more fully on the subject; meanwhile, Don Juan de +Fonseca shall be ordered to instruct Don Ximenes de Bribiesca +to make the necessary arrangements for the execution of the proposed +plans.</i></p> + +<p>Item. You will tell their Highnesses that, in a review that +was holden yesterday, it was remarked that a great number +of the people were without arms, which I think must be attributed +partly to the exchange made at Seville, or in the harbour, +when those who presented themselves armed were left +for a while, and for a trifle exchanged their arms for others +of an inferior quality. I think it would be desirable that two +hundred cuirasses, a hundred arquebuses, a hundred arblasts, +and many other articles of defensive armour, should be sent +over to us; for we have great need of them to arm those +who are at present without them.</p> + +<p><i>Don Juan de Fonseca has already been written to, to provide +them.</i></p> + +<p>Item. Inasmuch as many married persons have come +over here, and are engaged in regular duties, such as masons +and other tradesmen, who have left their wives in Spain, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_103">[103]</span>and wish that the pay that falls due to them may be paid to +their wives, or whomsoever they may appoint, in order that +they may purchase for them such articles as they may need, +I therefore beseech their Highnesses to take such measures +as they may deem expedient on this subject; for it is of +importance to their interests that these people be well provided +for.</p> + +<p><i>Their Highnesses have already ordered Don Juan de Fonseca +to attend to this matter.</i></p> + +<p>Item. Besides the other articles which I have begged from +their Highnesses in the memorial which you bear, signed by +my hand, and which articles consist of provisions and other +stores, both for those who are well and for those who are sick, +it would be very serviceable that fifty pipes of molasses should +be sent hither from the island of Madeira; for it is the most +nutritious food in the world, and the most wholesome. A +pipe of it does not ordinarily cost more than two ducats, +exclusive of the casks; and if their Highnesses would order +one of the caravels to call at the said island on the return +voyage, the purchase might be made, and they might, at the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_104">[104]</span>same time, buy ten casks of sugar, of which we stand greatly +in need. It is the most favourable season of the year to obtain +it at a cheap rate, that is to say, between this and the +month of April. The necessary orders might be given, if +their Highnesses think proper, and yet the place of destination +be carefully concealed.</p> + +<p><i>Don Juan de Fonseca will see to it.</i></p> + +<p>Item. You will tell their Highnesses that, although the +rivers contain in their beds the quantity of gold described +by those who have seen it, there is no doubt that the +gold is produced not in the rivers but the earth; and that +the water happening to come in contact with the mines, +washes it away mingled with the sand. And as among the +great number of rivers that have been already discovered +there are some of considerable magnitude, there are also some +so small that they might rather be called brooks than rivers, +only two fingers’ breadth deep, and very short in their course; +there will, therefore, be some men wanted to wash the gold +from the sand, and others to dig it out of the earth. This +latter operation will be the principal and the most productive; +it will be expedient, therefore, that their Highnesses send +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_105">[105]</span>men both for the washing and for the mining, from among +those who are employed in Spain in the mines at Almaden⁠<a id="FNanchor_153" href="#Footnote_153" class="fnanchor">[153]</a>, +so that the work may be done in both manners. We shall +not, however, wait for the arrival of these workmen, but +hope, with the aid of God and with the washers that we +have here with us, when they shall be restored to health, to +send a good quantity of gold by the first caravels that shall +leave for Spain.</p> + +<p><i>This shall be completely provided for in the next voyage out; +meanwhile, Don Juan de Fonseca has their Highnesses’ orders +to send as many miners as he can find. Their Highnesses +write also to Almaden, with instructions to select the greatest +number that can be procured, and to send them up.</i></p> + +<p>Item. You will beseech their Highnesses very humbly in +my name, to be pleased to pay regard to my strong recommendation +of Villacorta, who, as their Highnesses are aware, +has been extremely useful, and has shown the greatest possible +zeal in this affair. As I know him to be a zealous +man and well disposed to their Highnesses’ service, I shall +take it as a favour if they will deign to grant him some +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_106">[106]</span>post of trust adapted to his qualifications, and in which +he might give proof of his industry and warm desire to serve +their Highnesses: and you will manage that Villacorta shall +have practical evidence that the work which he has done for +me, and in which I found him needful to me, has been of +some profit to him.</p> + +<p><i>This shall be done as he wishes.</i></p> + +<p>Item. That the said Messire Pedro, Gaspar, Beltran, and +others remaining here, came out in command of caravels +which have now gone back, and are in receipt of no salary +whatever; but as these are people who should be employed +in the most important and confidential positions, their pay +has not been fixed, because it ought to be different from that +of the rest; you will beg their Highnesses, therefore, on +my behalf, to settle what ought to be given them either yearly +or monthly, for the advantage of their Highnesses’ service.</p> + +<p>Given in the City of Isabella, the thirtieth of January, in +the year fourteen hundred and ninety-four.</p> + +<p><i>This point has been already replied to above; but as in +the said clause he says that they should receive their pay, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_107">[107]</span>it is now their Highnesses’ command that their salary shall +be paid to them from the time that they gave up their command.</i></p> + +</div> + +<div class="spanish"> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="MEMORIAL-es">MEMORIAL</h2> + +<h3 class="hanging"><i>Que para los Reyes Católicos dió el Almirante D. Cristobal Colon, +en la ciudad Isabela, á 30 de Enero de 1494 á Antonio de +Torres, sobre el suceso de su segundo viage á las Indias; y al +final de cada capítulo la respuesta de sus Altezas.</i></h3> + +<p>Lo que vos Antonio de Torres, capitan de la nao <i>Marigalante</i>, é +Alcaide de la ciudad Isabela, habeis de decir é suplicar de mi parte +al Rey é la Reina nuestros Señores es lo siguiente:</p> + +<p>Primeramente, dadas las cartas de creencia que llevais de mí +para sus Altezas, besareis por mi sus reales pies é manos, é me encomendareis +en sus Altezas como á Rey é Reina mis Señores naturales, +en cuyo servicio yo deseo fenecer mis dias, como esto mas +largamente vos podreis decir á sus Altezas, segun lo que en mi vistes +é supistes.</p> + +<p><i>Sus Altezas se lo tienen en servicio.</i></p> + +<p>Item: Como quiera que por las cartas que á sus altezas escribo +y aun el Padre Fray Buil y el Tesorero, podrán comprender todo +lo que acá despues de nuestra llegada se fizo, y esto harto por menudo +y extensamente; con todo direis á sus Altezas de mi parte, +que á Dios ha placido darme tal gracia para en su servicio, que +hasta aquí no hallo yo menos ni se ha hallado en cosa alguna de +lo que yo escribí y dije, y afirmé á sus Altezas en los dias pasados, +antes por gracia de Dios espero que aun muy mas claramente y +muy presto por la obra parecerá, porque las cosas de especeria en +solas las orillas de la mar, sin haber entrado dentro en la tierra, se +halla tal rastro é principios della, que es razon que se esperen muy +mejores fines, y esto mismo en las minas del oro, porque con solos +dos que fueron á descubrir cada uno por su parte, sin detenerse +allá porque era poca gente, se han descubierto tantos rios tan poblados +de oro, que cualquier de los que lo vieron é cogieron, solamente +con las manos por muestra, vinieron tan alegres, y dicen +tantas cosas de la abundancia dello, que yo tengo empacho de las +decir y escribir á sus altezas; pero porque allá vá Gorbalan, que +fue uno de los descubridores, el dirá lo que vió, aunque acá queda +otro que llaman Hojeda, criado del Duque de Medinaceli, muy +discreto mozo y de muy gran recabdo, que sin duda y aun sin +comparacion, descubrió mucho mas, segun el memorial de los rios +que él trajo, diciendo que en cada uno de ellos hay cosa de no +creella; por lo cual sus Altezas pueden dar gracias á Dios, pues +tan favorablemente se ha en todas sus cosas.</p> + +<p><i>Sus Altezas dan muchas gracias a Dios por esto, y tienen en muy +senalado servicio al Almirante todo lo que en esto ha fecho y hace, +porque conocen que despues de Dios á él son en cargo de todo lo que +en esto han habido y hobieren; y porque cerca desto le escriben mas +largo, á su carta se remiten.</i></p> + +<p>Item: Dieris á sus Altezas, como quier que ya se les escribe, que +yo deseaba mucho en esta armada poderles enviar mayor cuantidad +de oro del que acá se espera poder coger, si la gente que acá +está nuestra, la mayor parte subitamente no cayera doliente; pero +porque ya esta armada non so podia detener acá mas, siquiera por +la costa grande que hace, siquiera porque el tiempo es este propio +para ir y poder volver los que han de traer acá las cosas que aquí +hacen mucha mengua, porque si tardasen de irse de aquí non +podrian volverse para Mayo los que han de volver, y allende desto +si con los sanos que acá se hallan, así en mar como en tierra en la +poblacion, yo quisiera emprender de ir á las minas ó rios agora, +habia muchas dificultades é aun peligros, porque de aquí á veinte +y tres ó veinte y cuatro leguas, en donde hay puertos é rios para +pasar y para tan largo camino, y para estar allá al tiempo que seria +menester para coger el oro, habia menester llevar muchos mantenimientos, +los cuales non podrian llevar á cuestas, ni hay bestias +acá que á esto pudiesen suplir, ni los caminos é pasos non estan +tan aparejados, como quier que se han comenzado á adobar para +que se podiesen pasar; y tambien era grande inconveniente dejar +acá los dolientes en lugar abierto y chozas, y las provisiones y +mantenimientos que estan en tierra, que como quier que estos +indios se hayan mostrado á los descubridores, y se muestran cada +dia muy simples y sin malicia; con todo, porque cada dia vienen +acá entre nosotros non pareció que fuera buen consejo meter á +riesgo y á ventura de perderse esta gente y los mantenimientos, +lo que un indio con un tizon podria hacer poniendo huego á las +chozas, porque de noche y de dia siempre van y vienen; á causa +dellos tenemos guardas en el campo mientras la poblacion está +abierta y sin defension.</p> + +<p><i>Que lo hizo bien.</i></p> + +<p>Otrosí: Como habemos visto en los que fueron por tierra á +descobrir que los mas cayeron dolientes despues de vueltos, y aun +algunos se hobieron de volver del camino, era tambien razon de +temer que otro tal conteciese a los que agora irian destos sanos +que se hallan, y seguirse hian dos peligros de allí, el uno de adolecer +allá en la misma obra dó no hay casa ni reparo alguno de +aquel Cacique que llaman Caonabó que es hombre, segun relacion +de todos, muy malo y muy mas atrevido, el cual viéndonos allá así +desbaratados y dolientes, podria emprender lo que non osaria si +fuesemos sanos: y con esto mismo se allega otra dificultad de +traer acá lo que llegasemos de oro, porque ó habiamos de traer +poco y ir y venir cada dia, y meterse en el riesgo de las dolencias, +ó se habia de enviar con alguna parte de la gente con el mismo +peligro de perderlo.</p> + +<p><i>Lo hizo bien.</i></p> + +<p>Así que, direis á sus Altezas, que estas son las cabsas porque de +presente non se ha detenido el armada, ni se les envia oro mas de +las muestras; pero confiando en la misericordia de Dios, que en +todo y por todo nos ha guiado hasta aquí, esta gente convalescerá +presto, como ya lo hace, porque solamente les prueba la tierra de +algunas ceciones, y luego se levantan; y es cierto que si toviesen +algunas carnes frescas para convalescer muy presto serian todos +en pie con ayuda de Dios, é aun los mas estarian ya convalescidos +en este tiempo, espero que ellos convalescerán: con estos pocos +sanos que acá quedan, cada dia se entiende en cerrar la poblacion +y meterla en alguna defensa, y los mantenimientos en seguro, que +será fecho en breves dias, porque non ha de ser sino albarradas +que non son gente los indios, que si dormiendo non nos fallasen +para emprender cosa ninguna, aunque la toviesen pensada, que así +hicieron á los otros que acá quedaron por su mal recabdo, los +cuales por pocos que fuesen, y por mayores ocasiones que dieran +á los indios de haber é de hacer lo que hicieron, nunca ellos osaran +emprender de dañarles si los vieran á buen recabdo: y esto fecho +luego se entenderá en ir á los dichos rios, ó desde acquí tomando +el camino, y buscando los mejores expedientes que se puedan, ó +por la mar rodeando la isla fasta aquella parte de donde se dice +que no debe haber mas de seis ó siete leguas hasta los dichos rios; +por forma que con seguridad se pueda cojer el oro y ponerlo en +recabdo de alguna fortaleza ó torre que allí se haga luego, para +tenerlo cogido al tiempo que las dos carabelas volverán acá, é para +que luego con el primer tiempo que sea para navegar este camino +se envie á buen recabdo.</p> + +<p><i>Que está bien, y así lo debe hacer.</i></p> + +<p>Item: Direis á sus Altezas, como dicho es, que las causas de las +dolencias tan general de todos es de mudamiento de aguas y aires, +porque vemos que á todos arreo se extiende y peligran pocos; por +consiguiente la conservacion de la sanidad, despues de Dios, está +que esta gente sea proveida de los mantenimientos que en España +acostumbraba, porque dellos, ni de otros que viniesen de nuevo +sus Altezas se podrán servir si no estan sanos; y esta provision +ha de durar hasta que acá se haya fecho cimiento de lo que acá +se sembrare é plantare, digo de trigos y cebadas, é viñas, de lo +cual para este año se ho fecho poco, porque no se pudo de antes +tomar asiento, y luego que se tomó adolescieron aquellos poquitos +labradores que acá estaban, los cuales aunque estovieran sanos +tenian tan pocas bestias y tau magras y flacas, que poco es lo que +pudieran hacer: con todo, alguna cosa han sembrado, mas para +probar la tierra, que parece muy maravillosa, para que de alli se +puede esperar remedio alguno en nuestras necesidades. Somos +bien ciertos, como la obra lo muestra, que en esta tierra asi el trigo +como el vino nacerá muy bien; pero hase de esperar el fruto, el +cual si tal será como muestra la presteza del nacer del trigo, y de +algunos poquitos de sarmientos que se pusieron, es cierto que +non fará mengua el Andalucía ni Secilia aquí, ni en las cañas de +azucar, segun unas poquitas que se pusieron han prendido; porque +es cierto que la hermosura de la tierra de estas islas, así de montes +é sierras y aguas, como de vegas donde hay rios cabdales, es tal +la vista que ninguna otra tierra que sol escaliente puede ser mejor +al parecer ni tan fermosa.</p> + +<p><i>Pues la tierra es tal, que debe procurar que se siembre lo mas que +ser pudiere de todas cosas, y á D. Juan de Fonseca se escribe que envie +de contino todo lo que fuere menester para esto.</i></p> + +<p>Item: Direis que á cabsa de haberse derramado mucho vino en +este camino del que la flota traia, y esto, segun dicen los mas, á +culpa de la mala obra que los toneleros ficieron en Sevilla, la mayor +mengua que agora tenemos, aquí, ó esperamos por esto tener, es de +vinos, y como quier que tengamos para mas tiempo así vizcocho +como trigo, con todo es necesario que tambien se envie alguna +cuantidad razonable, porque el camino es largo y cada dia no se +puede proveer, é asimismo algunas canales, digo tocinos, y otra +cecina que sea mejor que la que habemos traido este camino. De +carneros vivos y aun antes corderos y cordericas, mas fembras que +machos, y algunos becerros y becerras pequeños son menester, que +cada vez vengan en cualquier carabela que acá se enviare, y algunas +asnas y asnos, y yeguas para trabajo y simiente, que acá ninguna de +estas animalias hay de que hombre se pueda ayudar ni valer. Y +porque recelo que sus Altezas no se fallarán en Sevilla, ni los +Oficiales ó Ministros suyos sin expreso mandamiento non proveerían +en lo porque agora con este primero camino es necesario +que venga, porque en la consulta y en la respuesta se pasaria la +sazon del partir los navíos que acá por todo Mayo es necesario que +sean; direis á sus Altezas, como yo vos dí cargo y mandé, que del +oro que allá llevais empeñándolo, ó poniêndolo en poder de algun +mercader en Sevilla, el cual distraya y ponga los maravedis que +serán menester para cargar dos carabelas de víno y de trigo, y de +las otras cosas que llevais por memorial, el cual mercader lleve ó +envie el dicho oro para sus Altezas, que le vean, resciban y hagan +pagar lo que hobiere distraido é puesto para el despacho y cargazon +de las dichas dos carabelas, las cuales por consolar y esforzar +esta gente que acá queda, cumple que fagan mas de poder de ser +acá vueltas por todo el mes de Mayo, porque la gente antes de +entrar en el verano vea é tengan algun refrescamiento destas +cosas, en especial para las dolencias; de las cuales cosas acá ya +tenemos gran mengua, como son pasas, azucar, almendras, miel é +arroz, que debiera venir en gran cuantidad y vino muy poca, é +aquello que vino es ya consumido é gastado, y aun la mayor +parte de las medecinas que de allá trojieron, por la muchedumbre +de los muchos dolientes; de las cuales cosas, como dicho es, vos +llevais memoriales así para sanos, como para dolientes, firmados +de mi mano, los cuales cumplidamente si el dinero bastare, ó +á lo menos lo que mas necesario sea para agora despachar, es +para que lo puedan luego traer los dichos dos navíos, y lo que +quedare procurareis con sus Altezas que con otros navíos venga +lo mas presto que ser pudiere.</p> + +<p><i>Sus Altezas enviaron á mandar á D. Juan de Fonseca que luego +haya informacion de los que hicieron ese engaño en los toneles, y de +sus bienes haga que se cobre todo el daño que vino en el vino, con las +costas; y en lo de las cañas vea como las que se enviaren sean buenas, +y en las otras cosas que aquí dice que las provea luego.</i></p> + +<p>Item: Direis á sus Altezas que á cabsa que acá no hay lengua +por medio de la cual á esta gente se pueda dar á entender nuestra +santa Fé, como sus Altezas desean, y aun los que acá estamos, como +quier que se trabajará cuanto pudieren, se envian de presente +con estos navíos así de los canibales, hombres y mugeres y niños y +niñas, los cuales sus Altezas pueden mandar poner en poder de personas +con quien puedan mejor aprender la lengua, ejercitándolos +en cosas de servicio, y poco á poco mandando poner en ellos algun +mas cuidado que en otros esclavos para que deprendan unos de +otros, que no se hablen ni se vean sino muy tarde, que mas +presto deprenderán allá que no acá, y serán mejores intérpretes, +como quier que acá non se dejará de hacer lo que se pueda; es +verdad que como esta gente platican poco los de la una isla con +los de la otra, en las lenguas hay alguna diferencia entre ellos, +segun como estan mas cerca ó mas lejos: y porque entre las otras +islas las de los canibales son mucho grandes, y mucho bien +pobladas, parecerá acá que tomar dellos y dellas y enviarlos allá +á Castilla non seria sino bien, porque quitarse hian una vez de +aquella inhumana costumbre que tienen de comer hombres, y +allá en Castilla entendiendo la lengua muy mas presto rescibirian +el Bautismo, y farian el provecho de sus animas: aun entre estos +pueblos que non son de esas costumbres, se ganaria gran crédito +por nosotros viendo que aquellos prendiesemos y cativasemos, de +quien ellos suelen rescibir daños, y tienen tamaño miedo que del +nombre solo se espantan; certificando á sus Altezas que la venida +é vista de esta flota acá en esta tierra así junta y hermosa, ha +dado muy grande autoridad á esto y muy grande seguridad para +las cosas venideras, por que toda esta gente de esta grande isla +y de las otras, viendo el buen tratamiento que á los buenos se +fará, y el castigo que á los malos se dará, verná á obediencia +prestament para poderlos mandar como vasallos de sus Altezas. +Y como quier que ellos agora donde quier que hombre se halle +non solo hacen de grado lo que hombre quiere que fagan, mas +ellos de su voluntad se ponen á todo lo que entienden que nos +puede placer, y tambien pueden ser ciertos sus Altezas que non +menos allá, entre los cristianos Principes haber dado gran reputacion +la venida desta armada por muchos respetos, así presentes +como venideros, los cuales sus Altezas podrán mejor pensar y +entender que non sabria decir.</p> + +<p><i>Decirle heis lo que acá ha habido en lo de dos canibales que acá +vinieron.</i></p> + +<p><i>Que está muy bien, y así lo debe hacer; pero que procure allá, +como si ser pudiere, se reduzgan á nuestra santa Fé católica, y asimismo +lo procure con los de las islas donde está.</i></p> + +<p>Item: Direis á sus Altezas, que el provecho de las almas de los +dichos canibales, y aun destos de acá, ha traido el pensamiento que +cuantos mas allá se llevasen seria mejor, y en ello podrian sus +Altezas ser servidos desta manera: que visto cuanto son acá +menester los ganados y bestias de trabajo para el sostenimiento +de la gente que acá ha de estar, y bien de todas estas islas, sus +Altezas podrán dar licencia é permiso á un número de carabelas +suficiente que vengan acá cada año, y trayan de los dichos ganados +y otros mantenimientos y cosas para poblar el campo y aprovechar +la tierra, y esto en precios razonables á sus costas de los que las +trugieren, las cuales cosas se les podrian pagar en esclavos de +estos canibales, gente tan fiera y dispuesta, y bien proporcionada +y de muy buen entendimiento, los cuales quitados de aquella inhumanidad +creemos que serán mejores que otros ningunos +esclavos, la cual luego perderán que sean fuera de su tierra, y de +estos podrán haber muchos con las fustas de remos que acá se +entienden de hacer, fecho empero presupuesto que cada una de +las carabelas que viniesen de sus Altezas pusiesen una persona +fiable, la cual defendiese las dichas carabelas que non descendiesen +á ninguna otra parte ni isla salvo aquí, donde ha de estar la carga +y descarga de toda la mercaduría; y aun destos esclavos que se +llevaren, sus Altezas podrian haber sus derechos allá; y desto +traereís ó enviareis respuesta, porque acá se hagan los aparejos +que son menester con mas confianza, si á sus Altezas pareciere +bien.</p> + +<p><i>En esto se ha suspendido por agora hasta que venga otro camino +de allá, y escriba el Almirante lo que en esto le paresciere.</i></p> + +<p>Item: Tambien direis á sus Altezas que mas provechoso es, y +menos costa, fletar los navíos como los fletan los mercaderes para +Flandes por toneladas que non de otra manera; por ende que yo +vos dí cargo de fletar á este respecto las dos carabelas que habeis +luego de enviar: y así se podrá hacer de todas las otras que sus +Altezas enviaren, si de aquella forma se ternán por servidos; pero +non entiendo decir esto de las que han de venir con su licencia +por la mercaduria de los esclavos.</p> + +<p><i>Sus Altezas mandan á D. Juan de Fonseca que en el fletar de las +carabelas tenga esta forma si ser pudiere.</i></p> + +<p>Item: Direis á sus Altezas que á causa de escusar alguna mas +costa, yo merqué estas carabelas que llevais por memorial para +retenerlas acá con estos dos naos, conviene á saber, la Gallega y +esa otra Capitana, de la cual merqué por semejante del Maestre +della los tres ochavos por el precio que en el dicho memorial destas +copias llevais firmado de mi mano, los cuales navíos non solo darán +autoridad y gran seguridad á la gente que ha de estar dentro y +conversar con los indios para cojer el oro, mas aun para otra +cualquier cosa de peligro que de gente estraña pudiese acontescer, +allende que las carabelas son necesarias para el descubrir de la +tierra firme y otras islas que entre aquí é allá estan; y suplicareis +á sus Altezas que los maravedis que estos navíos cuestan manden +pagar en los tiempos que se les ha prometido, porque sin dubda +ellos ganarán bien su costa, segun yo creo y espero en la misericordia +de Dios.</p> + +<p><i>El Almirante lo hizo bien, y decirle heis como acá se pago al que +vendió la nao, y mandaron á D. Juan de Fonseca que pague lo de las +carabelas que el Almirante compró.</i></p> + +<p>Item: Direis á sus Altezas y suplicareis de mi parte cuanto +mas humilmente pueda, que les plega mucho mirar en lo que por +las cartas y otras escripturas verán mas largamente tocante á la +paz é sosiego e concordia de los que acá estan, y que para las cosas +del servicio de sus Altezas escojan tales personas que non se tenga +recelo dellas y que miren mas á lo por que se envian que non á +sus propios intereses; y en esto, pues que todas las cosas vistes é +supistes, hablareis é direis á sus Altezas la verdad de todas las +cosas como las comprendistes, y que la provision de sus Altezas +que sobre ello mandaren facer venga con los primeros navíos si +posible fuere, á fin que acá non se hagan escándalos en cosa que +tanto va en el servicio de sus Altezas.</p> + +<p><i>Sus Altezas estan bien informados desto, y en todo se proveerá +como conviene.</i></p> + +<p>Item: Direis á sus Altezas el asiento de esta ciudad, é la fermosura +de la provincia alderedor como lo vistes y compreendistes, y +como yo vos hice Alcayde della por los poderes que de sus Altezas +tengo para ello, á las cuales humilmente suplico que en alguna +parte de satisfaccion de vuestros servicios tengan por bien la +dicha provision, como de sus Altezas yo espero.</p> + +<p><i>A sus Altezas plaze que vos seais Alcayde.</i></p> + +<p>Item: Porque Mosen Pedro Margarité, criado de sus Altezas, +há bien servido, y espero que así lo hara adelante en las cosas que +le fueren encomendadas, he habido placer de su quedada aqui, y +tambien de Gaspar y de Beltran por ser conocidos criados de sus +Altezas para los poner en cosas de confianza: suplicareis á sus +Altezas que especial al dicho Mosen Pedro, que es casado y tiene +hijos le provean de alguna encomienda en la Orden de Santiago, +de la cual él tiene el hábito, porque su muger é hijos tengan en +que vivir. Asimismo hareis relacion de Juan Aguado, criado de +sus Altezas, cuan bien é diligentemente ha servido en todo lo que +le ha seido mandado; que suplico á sus Altezas á él é á los sobredichos +los hayan por encomendados é por presentes.</p> + +<p><i>Sus Altezas mandan asentar á Mosen Pedro 30000 maravedis cada +ano, y á Gaspar y Beltran á cada uno 15000 maravedis cada año +desde hoy 15 de Agosto de 94 en adelante, y así les haga pagar el +Almirante en lo que allá se hobiere de pagar, y D. Juan de Fonseca +en lo que acá se hobiere de pagar: y en lo de Juan Aguado sus +Altezas habrān memoria de él.</i></p> + +<p>Item: Direis á sus Altezas el trabajo que el Doctor Chanca tiene +con el afruenta de tantos dolientes, y aun la estrechura de los mantenimientos, +é aun con todo ello se dispone con gran diligencia y +caridad en todo lo que cumple á su oficio, y porque sus Altezas remitieron +á mí el salario que acá se le habia de dar, porque estando +acá es cierto quel non toma ni puede haber nada de ninguno, ni +ganar de su oficio como en Castilla ganaba, ó podria ganar estando +á su reposo é viviendo de otra manera que acá no vive; y así que +como quiera que él jura que es mas lo que allá ganaba allende el +salario que sus Altezas le dan, y non me quise estender mas de +cincuenta mil maravedis por el trabajo que acá pasa cada un año +mientras acá estoviere; los cuales suplico á sus Altezas le manden +librar con el sueldo de acá y eso mismo, porque él dice y afirma +que todos los fisicos de vuestras Altezas, que andan en reales ó +semejantes cosas que estas, suelen haber de derecho un dia de +sueldo en todo el año de toda la gente: con todo he seido informado, +y dicenme, que como quier que esto sea, la costumbre es +de darles cierta suma tasada á voluntad y mandamiento de sus +Altezas en compensa de aquel dia de sueldo. Suplicareis á sus +Altezas que en ello manden proveer, así en lo del salario como de +esta costumbre, por forma que el dicho Doctor tenga razon de +ser contento.</p> + +<p><i>A sus Altezas place desto del Doctor Chanca, y que se le pague esto +desde quel Almirante gelo asentó, y que gelos pague con lo del sueldo.</i></p> + +<p><i>En esto del dia del sueldo de los fisicos, non lo acostumbran haber +sino donde el Rey nuestro Senor esté en persona.</i></p> + +<p>Item: Direis á sus Altezas de Coronel cuanto es hombre para +servir á sus Altezas en muchas cosas, y cuanto ha servido hasta +aquí en todo lo mas necesario, y la mengua que dél sentimos +agora que está doliente, y que sirviendo de tal manera es razon +quel sienta el fruto de su servicio, non solo en las mercedes para +despues mas en lo de su salario en lo presente, en manera quél é +los que acá estan sientan que les aprovecha el servicio, porque +segun el ejercicio que acá se ha de tener en cojer este oro, no son +de tener en poco las personas en quien tanta diligencia hay: +y porque por su habilidad se proveyó acá por mí del oficio de +Alguacil mayor destas Indias, y en la provision va el salario en +blanco, que suplico á sus Altezas gelo manden henchir como mas +sea su servicio, mirando sus servicios, confirmándole la provision +que acá se le dió, e proveyéndole de él de juro.</p> + +<p><i>Sus Altezas mandan que le asienten quince mil maravedis cada año +mas de su sueldo, é que se le paguen cuando le pagaren su sueldo.</i></p> + +<p>Asimismo direis á sus Altezas como aquí vino el Bachiller Gil +García por Alcade mayor é non se le ha consignado ni nombrado +salario, y es persona de bien y de buenas letras, é diligente, é es +acá bien necesario; que suplico á sus Altezas le manden nombrar +é consignar su salario, por manera que él se pueda sostener, é le +sea librado con el dinero del sueldo de acá.</p> + +<p><i>Sus Altezas le mandan asentar cada año viente mal maravedis en +tanto que allá estoviere y mas su sueldo, y que gelo paguen cuando +pagaren el sueldo.</i></p> + +<p>Item: Direis á sus Altezas como quier que ya se lo escribo por +las cartas, que para este año non entiendo que sea posible ir á descobrir +hasta que esto destos rios que se hallaron de oro sea puesto +en el asiento debido á servicio do sus Altezas, que despues mucho +mejor se podrá facer, porque no es cosa que nadie la podiese facer +sin mi presencia á mi grado, ni á servicio de sus Altezas, por muy +bien que lo ficiese, como es en dubda segun lo que hombre vee +por su presencia.</p> + +<p><i>Trabaje como lo mas preciso que ser pueda se sepa lo adito de ese oro.</i></p> + +<p>Item: Direis á sus Altezas como los escuderos de caballo que +vinieron de Granada, en el alarde que ficieron en Sevilla mostraron +buenos caballos, é despues al embarcar, yo no lo ví porque estaba un +poco doliente, y metiéronlos tales quel mejor dellos non parece que +vale dos mil maravedis, porque vendieron los otros y compraron +estos, y esto fue de la suerte que se hizo lo de mucha gente que allá +en los alardes de Sevilla yo vi muy buena; parece que Juan de +Soria, despues dea dado el dinero del sueldo, por algun interese suyo +puso otros en lugar de aquellos que yo acá pensaba fallar, y fallo +gente que yo nunca habia visto: en esto ha habido gran maldad, de +tal manera que yo no sé si me queje dél solo: por esto, visto que +á estos escuderos se ha fecho la costa hasta aquí, allende de sus +sueldos y tambien á sus caballos, y se hace de presente y son +personas que cuando ellos estan dolientes, ó non se les antoja, non +quieren que sus caballos sirvan sin ellos mismos; sus Altezas no +quieren que se les compren estos caballos sino que sirvan á sus +Altezas, y esto mismo no les paresce que deban servir ni cosa +ninguna sino á caballo; lo cual agora de presente non face mucho +al caso, é por esto parece que seria mejor comprarles los caballos, +pues que tan poco valen, y non estar cada dia con ellos en estas +pendencias; por ende que sus Altezas determinen esto como fuere +su servicio.</p> + +<p><i>Sus Altezas mandan á D. Juan de Fonseca, que se informe de esto +de estos caballos, y si se hallare que es verdad que hicieron ese engaño, +lo envien á sus Altezas porque lo mandarán castigar; y tambien se informe +desto que dice de la otra gente, y envie la pesquisa á sus Altezas: +y en lo destos escuderos sus Altezas mandan que esten allá y sirvan, +pues son de las guardas y criados de sus Altezas; y á los escuderos +mandan sus Altezas que den los caballos cada vez que fueren menester +y el Almirante lo mandare, y si algun daño recibieren los caballos +yendo otros en ellos, por medio del Almirante mandan sus Altezas que +gelo paguen.</i></p> + +<p>Item: Direis á sus Altezas como aquí han venido mas de doscientas +personas sin sueldo, y hay algunos dellos que sirven bien, y +aun los otros por semejante se mandan que lo hagan así y porque +para estos primeros tres años será gran bien que aqui esten mil +hombres para asentar y poner en muy gran seguridad esta Isla y +rios de oro, y aunque hobiese ciento de caballo non se perderia +nada, antes parece necesario, aunque en estos de caballo fasta que +oro se envie sus Altezas podrán sobreceer: con todo á estas +doscientas personas, que vienen sin sueldo, sus Altezas deben +enviar á decir si se les pagará sueldo como á los otros sirviendo +bien, porque cierto son necesarios como dicho tengo para este +comienzo.</p> + +<p><i>De estas doscientas personas que aquî dice que fueron sin sueldo, +mandan sus Altezas que entren en lugar de los que han faltado y faltaren +de los que iban á sueldo, seyendo habiles y á contentamiento del +Almirante, y sus Altezas mandan al Contador que los asiente en lugar +de los que faltaren como el Almirante lo dijere.</i></p> + +<p>Item: Porque en algo la costa de esta gente se puede aliviar +con industria y formas que otros Principes suelen tener en otras, +lo gastado mejor que acá se podria escusar, paresce que seria +bien mandar traer en los navíos que vinieren allende de las otras +cosas que son para los mantenimientos comunes, y de la botica, +zapatos y cueras para los mandar facer; camisas comunes y de +otras, jubones, lienzo, sayos, calzas, paños para vestir en razonables +precios; y otras cosas, como son conservas, que son fuera +de racion, y para conservacion de la salud, las cuales cosas todas +la gente de acá rescibiria de grado en descuento de su sueldo, y si +allá esto se mercase por Ministros leales y que mirasen el servicio +de sus Altezas, se ahorraria algo: por ende sabreis la voluntad +de sus Altezas cerca desto, y si les pareciere ser su servicio luego +se debe poner en obra.</p> + +<p><i>Por este camino se solia ser fasta que mas escriba el Almirante, +y ya enviarán á mandar á D. Juan de Fonseca con Jimeno de +Bribiesca que provea en esto.</i></p> + +<p>Item: Tambien direis á sus Altezas, que por cuanto ayer en el +alarde que se tomó se falló la gente muy desarmada lo cual pienso +que en parte contesció por aquel trocar que allá se fizo en +Sevilla ó en el puerto cuando se dejaron los que se mostraron +armados, y tomaron otros que daban algo á quien los trocaba, +paresce que seria bien que se mandasen traer doscientas corazas, +y cien espingardas y cien ballestas, y mucho almacen, que es la +cosa que mas menester habemos, y de todas estas armas se podrán +dar á los desarmados.</p> + +<p><i>Ya se escribe á D. Juan de Fonseca que provea en esto.</i></p> + +<p>Item: Por cuanto algunos oficiales que acá vinieron como son +albañies y de otros oficios, que son casados y tienen sus mugeres +allá, y querrian que allá lo que se les debe de su sueldo se diese á +sus mugeres ó á las personas á quien ellos enviaren sus recabdos, +para que les compren las cosas que acá han menester; que á sus +Altezas suplico les mande librar, porque su servicio es que estos +esten proveidos acá.</p> + +<p><i>Ya enviaron á mandar sus Altezas á D. Juan de Fonseca que +provea en esto.</i></p> + +<p>Item: Porque allende las otras cosas que allá se envian á pedir +por los memoriales que llevais de mi mano firmados, así para mantenimiento +de los sanos como para los dolientes, seria muy bien +que se hobiesen de la isla de la Madera cincuenta pipas de miel +de azúcar, porque es el mejor mantenimiento del mundo y mas +sano, y non suele costar cada pipa sino á dos ducados sin el casco, +y si sus Altezas mandan que á la vuelta pase por allí alguna +carabela las podrá mercar, y tambien diez cajas de azúcar que es +mucho menester, que esta es la mejor sazon del año, digo entre +aquí é el mes de Abril para fallarlo, é haber dello buena razon y +podriase dar orden mandándolo sus Altezas, é que non supiesen +allá para donde lo quieren.</p> + +<p><i>D. Juan de Fonseca que provea en esto.</i></p> + +<p>Item: Direis á sus Altezas, por cuanto aunque los rios tengan +en la cuantidad que se dice por los que lo han visto, pero que lo +cierto dello es quel oro non se engendra en los rios mas en la tierra, +quel agua topando con las minas lo trae envuelto en las arenas, y +porque en estos tantos rios se han descubierto, como quiera que +hay algunos grandecitos hay otros tan pequeños que son mas +fuentes que no rios, que non llevan de dos dedos de agua, y se +falla luego el cabo doede nasce; para lo cual non solo serán provechosos +los lavadores para cogerlo en el arena, mas los otros +para cavarlo en la tierra, que será lo mas especial é de mayor +cuantidad; é por esto será bien que sus Altezas envien lavadores, +é de los que andan en las minas allá en Almaden, porque en la +una manera y en la otra se faga el ejercicio, como quier que acá +non esperaremos á ellos, que con los lavadores que aquí tenemos, +esperamos con la ayuda de Dios, si una vez la gente está sana, +allegar un buen golpe de oro para las primeras carabelas que +fueren.</p> + +<p><i>A otro camino se proveerá en esto cumplidamente; en tanto mandan +sus Altezas á D. Juan de Fonseca que envie luego los mas minadores +que pudiere haber, y escriben al Almaden, que de allí tomen los que +mas pudieren y los envien.</i></p> + +<p>Item: Suplicareis á sus Altezas de mi parte muy humildemente, +que quieran tener por muy encomendado á Villacorta, el cual, como +sus Altezas saben, ha mucho servido en esta negociacion, y con +muy buena voluntad, y segun le conozco persona diligente y afecionada +á su servicio; rescebiré merced que se le dé algun cargo de +confianza, para lo cual él ser sufficiente, y pueda mostrar su deseo +de servir y diligencia, y esto procurareis por forma que el Villacorta +conozca por la obra que lo que ha trabajado por mi en lo +que yo le hobe menester le aprovecha en esto.</p> + +<p><i>Así se hará.</i></p> + +<p>Item: Que los dichos Mosen Pedro y Gaspar y Beltran, y otros +que han quedado acá, trajieron capítanias de carabelas, que son +agora vueltas, y non gozan del sueldo; pero porque son tales personas, +que se han de poner en cosas principales y de confianza, non +se les ha determinado el sueldo que sea diferenciado de los otros: +suplicareis de mi parte á sus Altezas determinen lo que se les ha de +dar en cada un año, ó por meses, como mas fueren servidos. Fecho +en la ciudad Isabela á treinta dias de Enero de mil cuatrocientos +y noventa y cuatro años.</p> + +<p><i>Ya está respondido arriba, pero porque en el dicho capítulo que en +esto habia dice que gozan del salario, desde agora mandan sus Altezas +que se les cuenten á todos sus salarios desde que dejaron las capitanías.</i></p> + +</div> + +<div class="footnotes"> + +<h3>FOOTNOTES:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_151" href="#FNanchor_151" class="label">[151]</a> In the original, the replies are affixed in the margin of each chapter. +(Navarrete).</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_152" href="#FNanchor_152" class="label">[152]</a> <i>Albarrada</i>—an Arabic word implying a stone wall without mortar.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_153" href="#FNanchor_153" class="label">[153]</a> In La Mancha, New Castile, famous for mines of quicksilver.</p></div> + +</div> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="english"> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_108">[108]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="THIRD_VOYAGE_OF_COLUMBUS">THIRD VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS.</h2> + +<h3 class="hanging"><i>Narrative of the Voyage which Don Christopher Columbus +made the third time that he came to the Indies, when he +discovered terra firma, as he sent it to their Majesties from +the Island of Hispaniola.</i></h3> + +<p>Most serene and most exalted and powerful Princes, the +King and Queen, our Sovereigns: The Blessed Trinity +moved your Highnesses to this enterprise of the Indies; and +of His Infinite goodness has chosen me to proclaim it to +you; wherefore as His ambassador I approached your royal +presence, moved by the consideration that I was appealing +to the most exalted monarchs in Christendom, who exercised +so great an influence over the Christian faith, and its advancement +in the world. Those who heard of it looked upon +it as impossible, for they fixed all their hopes on the favours +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_109">[109]</span>of fortune, and pinned their faith solely upon chance. I +gave to the subject six or seven years of great anxiety, +explaining, to the best of my ability, how great service +might be done to our Lord, by this undertaking, in promulgating +His sacred name and our holy faith among so +many nations;—an enterprise so exalted in itself, and so +calculated to enhance the glory and immortalise the renown +of great sovereigns. It was also requisite to refer +to the temporal prosperity which was foretold in the writings +of so many trustworthy and wise historians, who related +that great riches were to be found in these parts. At +the same time I thought it desirable to bring to bear upon +the subject the sayings and opinions of those who have +written upon the geography of the world, and finally, your +Highnesses came to the determination that the undertaking +should be entered upon. In this your Highnesses exhibited +the noble spirit which has been always manifested by you on +every great subject; for all others who had thought of the +matter or heard it spoken of, unanimously treated it with +contempt, with the exception of two friars,⁠<a id="FNanchor_154" href="#Footnote_154" class="fnanchor">[154]</a> who always remained +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_110">[110]</span>constant in their belief of its practicability. I, myself, +in spite of fatiguing opposition, felt sure that the enterprise +would nevertheless prosper, and continue equally confident +of it to this day, because it is a truth, that though +everything will pass away, the Word of God will not, and +everything that he has said will be fulfilled; who so clearly +spoke of these lands, by the mouth of the prophet Isaiah, +in so many places in Scripture, that from Spain the holy +name of God was to be spread abroad. Thus I departed in +the name of the Holy Trinity, and returned very soon, +bringing with me an account of the practical fulfilment of +everything I had said. Your Highnesses again sent me +out, and in a short space of time, by God’s mercy, not by +⁠<a id="FNanchor_155" href="#Footnote_155" class="fnanchor lacuna">[155]</a> I discovered three hundred and thirty-three +leagues of terra firma on the eastern side, and seven hundred +islands,⁠<a id="FNanchor_156" href="#Footnote_156" class="fnanchor">[156]</a> besides those which I discovered on the first voyage; +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_111">[111]</span>I also succeeded in circumnavigating the island of Española, +which is larger in circumference than all Spain, the inhabitants +of which are countless, and all of whom may be +laid under tribute. It was then that complaints arose, disparaging +the enterprise that I had undertaken, because, forsooth, +I had not immediately sent the ships home laden with +gold,—no allowance being made for the shortness of the +time, and all the other impediments of which I have already +spoken. On this account (either as a punishment for my +sins, or, as I trust, for my salvation), I was held in detestation, +and had obstacles placed in the way of every thing I +said, or for which I petitioned. I therefore resolved to apply +to your Highnesses, to inform you of all the wonderful events +that I had experienced, and to explain the reason of every +proposition that I made, making reference to the nations +that I had seen, among whom, and by whose instrumentality, +many souls may be saved. I related how the natives of +Española had been laid under tribute to your Highnesses, +and regarded you as their sovereigns. And I laid before +your Highnesses abundant samples of gold and copper,—proving +the existence of extensive mines of those metals. I +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_112">[112]</span>also laid before your Highnesses many sorts of spices, too +numerous to detail; and I spoke of the great quantity of +brazil-wood, and numberless other articles found in those +lands. All this was of no avail with some persons, who +began, with determined hatred, to speak ill of the enterprise, +not taking into account the service done to our Lord in the +salvation of so many souls, nor the enhancement of your +Highnesses’ greatness to a higher pitch than any earthly +prince has yet enjoyed; nor considering, that from the exercise +of your Highnesses’ goodness, and the expense incurred, +both spiritual and temporal advantage was to be expected, +and that Spain must in the process of time derive +from thence, beyond all doubt, an unspeakable increase of +wealth. This might be manifestly seen by the proofs given +in the written descriptions of the voyages already made, +showing that the fulfilment of every other hope may be reasonably +expected. Nor were they affected by the consideration +of what great princes throughout the world have done +to increase their fame: as, for example, Solomon, who sent +from Jerusalem, to the uttermost parts of the east, to see +Mount Sopora [Σωφίρ, Ophir], in which expedition his ships +were detained three years; and which mountain your Highnesses +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_113">[113]</span>now possess in the island of Española. Nor, as +in the case of Alexander, who sent to observe the mode of +government in the island of Taprobana,⁠<a id="FNanchor_157" href="#Footnote_157" class="fnanchor">[157]</a> in India; and Cæsar +Nero, to explore the sources of the Nile,⁠<a id="FNanchor_158" href="#Footnote_158" class="fnanchor">[158]</a> and to learn the +causes of its increase in the summer, when water is needed; +and many other mighty deeds that princes have done, and +which it is allotted to princes to achieve. Nor was it of any +avail that no prince of Spain, as far as I have read, has ever +hitherto gained possession of land out of Spain; and that +the world of which I speak is different from that of which +the Romans, and Alexander, and the Greeks made mighty +efforts with great armies to gain possession. Nor have they +been affected by the recent noble example of the kings of +Portugal, who have had the courage to explore as far as +Guinea, and to make the discovery of it, expending so much +gold and so many lives in the undertaking, that a calculation +of the population of the kingdom would show that one half +of them have died in Guinea: and though it is now a long +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_114">[114]</span>time since they commenced these great exertions, the return +for their labour and expense has hitherto been but trifling; +this people has also dared to make conquests in Africa, and +to carry on their exploits to Ceuta, Tangier, Argilla, and +Alcazar, repeatedly giving battle to the Moors; and all this +at great expense; simply because it was an exploit worthy +of a prince, undertaken for the service of God, and to advance +the enlargement of His kingdom. The more I said on the +subject, the more two-fold was reproach cast upon it, even +to the expression of abhorrence, no consideration being given +to the honour and fame that accrued to your Highnesses +throughout all Christendom from your Highnesses having +undertaken this enterprise; so that there was neither great +nor small who did not desire to hear tidings of it. Your +Highnesses replied to me encouragingly, and desired that I +should pay no regard to those who spoke ill of the undertaking, +inasmuch as they had received no authority or +countenance whatever from your Highnesses.</p> + +<p>I started from San Lucar, in the name of the most Holy +Trinity, on Wednesday the 30th of May,⁠<a id="FNanchor_159" href="#Footnote_159" class="fnanchor">[159]</a> much fatigued with +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_115">[115]</span>my voyage, for I had hoped, when I left the Indies, to find +repose in Spain; whereas, on the contrary, I experienced +nothing but opposition and vexation. I sailed to the island +of Madeira by a circuitous route, in order to avoid any encounter +with an armed fleet from France,⁠<a id="FNanchor_160" href="#Footnote_160" class="fnanchor">[160]</a> which was on the +look out for me off Cape St. Vincent. Thence I went to +the Canaries,⁠<a id="FNanchor_161" href="#Footnote_161" class="fnanchor">[161]</a> from which islands I sailed with but one ship +and two caravels, having dispatched the other ships to Española +by the direct road to the Indies;⁠<a id="FNanchor_162" href="#Footnote_162" class="fnanchor">[162]</a> while I myself moved +southward, with the view of reaching the equinoctial line, +and of then proceeding westward, so as to leave the island of +Española to the north. But having reached the Cape Verde +islands⁠<a id="FNanchor_163" href="#Footnote_163" class="fnanchor">[163]</a> (an incorrect name⁠<a id="FNanchor_164" href="#Footnote_164" class="fnanchor">[164]</a>, + for they are so barren that nothing +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_116">[116]</span>green was to be seen there, and the people so sickly that I +did not venture to remain among them), I sailed away four +hundred and eighty miles, which is equivalent to a hundred +and twenty leagues, towards the south-west, where, when it +grew dark, I found the north star to be in the fifth degree. +The wind then failed me, and I entered a climate where the +intensity of the heat was such, that I thought both ships and +men would have been burnt up, and everything suddenly got +into such a state of confusion, that no man dared go below +deck to attend to the securing of the water-cask and the provisions. +This heat lasted eight days; on the first day the +weather was fine, but on the seven other days it rained and +was cloudy, yet we found no alleviation of our distress; so +that I certainly believe, that if the sun had shone as on the +first day, we should not have been able to escape in any way.</p> + +<p>I recollect, that in sailing towards the Indies, as soon as I +passed a hundred leagues to the westward of the Azores, I +found the temperature change: and this is so all along from +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_117">[117]</span>north to south. I determined, therefore, if it should please +the Lord to give me a favourable wind and good weather, so +that I might leave the part where I then was, that I would +give up pursuing the southward course, yet not turn backwards, +but sail towards the west, moving in that direction in +the hope of finding the same temperature that I had experienced +when I sailed in the parallel of the Canaries,—and +then, if it proved so, I should still be able to proceed more +to the south. At the end of these eight days it pleased our +Lord to give me a favourable east wind, and I steered to the +west, but did not venture to move lower down towards the +south, because I discovered a very great change in the sky +and the stars, although I found no alteration in the temperature. +I resolved, therefore, to keep on the direct westward +course, in a line from Sierra Leone, and not to change +it until I reached the point where I had thought I should +find land, where I would repair the vessels, and renew, if +possible, our stock of provisions, and take in what water +we wanted. At the end of seventeen days, during which +our Lord gave me a propitious wind, we saw land at noon of +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_118">[118]</span>Tuesday the 31st of July.⁠<a id="FNanchor_165" href="#Footnote_165" class="fnanchor">[165]</a> This I had expected on the +Monday before, and held that route up to this point; but +as the sun’s strength increased, and our supply of water was +failing, I resolved to make for the Caribee Islands, and set +sail in that direction; when, by the mercy of God, which He +has always extended to me, one of the sailors went up to +the main-top and saw to the westward a range of three +mountains. Upon this we repeated the “Salve Regina,” +and other prayers, and all of us gave many thanks to our +Lord. I then gave up our northward course, and put in for +the land: at the hour of complines we reached a cape, which +I called Cape Galea,⁠<a id="FNanchor_166" href="#Footnote_166" class="fnanchor">[166]</a> having already given to the island the +name of Trinidad, and here we found a harbour, which would +have been excellent but there was no good anchorage. We +saw houses and people on the spot, and the country around +was very beautiful, and as fresh and green as the gardens +of Valencia in the month of March. I was disappointed at +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_119">[119]</span>not being able to put into the harbour, and ran along the +coast to the westward. After sailing five leagues I found +very good bottom and anchored. The next day I set sail +in the same direction, in search of a harbour where I might +repair the vessels and take in water, as well as improve the +stock of provisions which I had brought out with me. When +we had taken in a pipe of water, we proceeded onwards till +we reached the cape, and there finding good anchorage and +protection from the east wind, I ordered the anchors to be +dropped, the water-cask to be repaired, a supply of water +and wood to be taken in, and the people to rest themselves +from the fatigues which they had endured for so long a time. +I gave to this point the name of Sandy Point (Punta del +Arenal). All the ground in the neighbourhood was filled +with foot-marks of animals, like the impression of the foot +of a goat;⁠<a id="FNanchor_167" href="#Footnote_167" class="fnanchor">[167]</a> but although it would have appeared from this +circumstance that they were very numerous, only one was +seen, and that was dead. On the following day a large +canoe came from the eastward, containing twenty-four men, +all in the prime of life, and well provided with arms, such +as bows, arrows, and wooden shields; they were all, as I +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_120">[120]</span>have said, young, well-proportioned, and not dark black, +but whiter than any other Indians that I had seen,—of +very graceful gesture and handsome forms, wearing their +hair long and straight, and cut in the Spanish style. Their +heads were bound round with cotton scarfs elaborately worked +in colours, which resembled the Moorish head-dresses. +Some of these scarfs were worn round the body and used +as a covering in lieu of trousers. The natives spoke to us +from the canoe while it was yet at a considerable distance, +but none of us could understand them; I made signs to, +them, however, to come nearer to us, and more than two +hours were spent in this manner,—but if by any chance they +moved a little nearer, they soon pushed off again. I caused +basins and other shining objects to be shown to them to +tempt them to come near; and after a long time, they came +somewhat nearer than they had hitherto done,—upon which, +as I was very anxious to speak with them and had nothing +else to show them to induce them to approach, I ordered +a drum to be played upon the quarter-deck, and some of +our young men to dance, believing the Indians would come +to see the amusement. No sooner, however, did they perceive +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_121">[121]</span>the beating of the drum and the dancing, than they +all left their oars, and strung their bows, and each man laying +hold of his shield, they commenced discharging their +arrows at us; upon this, the music and dancing soon ceased; +and I ordered a charge to be made from some of our cross-bows; +they then left us, and went rapidly to the other caravel, +and placed themselves under its poop. The pilot of +that vessel received them courteously, and gave to the man +who appeared to be their chief, a coat and hat; and it was +then arranged between them, that he should go to speak with +him on shore. Upon this the Indians immediately went +thither and waited for him; but as he would not go without +my permission, he came to my ship in a boat, whereupon +the Indians got into their canoe again and went away, and +I never saw any more of them or of any of the other inhabitants +of the island. When I reached the point of Arenal, +I found that the island of Trinidad formed with the land of +Gracia⁠<a id="FNanchor_168" href="#Footnote_168" class="fnanchor">[168]</a> a strait of two leagues’ width from west to east, and +as we had to pass through it to go to the north, we found +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_122">[122]</span>some strong currents which crossed the strait, and which +made a great roaring, so that I concluded there must be a +reef of sand or rocks, which would preclude our entrance; +and behind this current was another and another, all making +a roaring noise like the sound of breakers against the rocks. +I anchored there, under the said point of Arenal, outside of the +strait, and found the water rush from east to west with as +much impetuosity as that of the Guadalquivir at its conflux +with the sea; and this continued constantly day and night, +so that it appeared to be impossible to move backwards for +the current or forwards for the shoals. In the dead of night, +while I was on deck, I heard an awful roaring that came +from the south towards the ship; I stopped to observe what +it might be, and I saw the sea rolling from west to east like +a mountain as high as the ship, and approaching by little and +little; on the top of this rolling sea came a mighty wave +roaring with a frightful noise and the same terrific uproar +as the other currents, producing, as I have already said, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_123">[123]</span>a sound as of breakers upon the rocks.⁠<a id="FNanchor_169" href="#Footnote_169" class="fnanchor">[169]</a> To this day I +have a vivid recollection of the dread I then felt, lest the +ship might founder under the force of that tremendous sea; +but it passed by, and reached the mouth of the before-mentioned +passage, where the uproar lasted for a considerable +time. On the following day I sent out boats to take soundings, +and found that in the strait, at the deepest part of the +embouchure, there were six or seven fathoms of water, and +that there were constant contrary currents, one running inwards, +and the other outwards. It pleased the Lord, however, +to give us a favourable wind, and I passed inwards through +that strait, and soon came to still water. In fact some water +which was drawn up from the sea, proved to be fresh. I +then sailed northwards till I came to a very high mountain, +at about twenty-six leagues from the Punta del Arenal; here +two lofty headlands appeared, one towards the east, and +forming part of the island of Trinidad,⁠<a id="FNanchor_170" href="#Footnote_170" class="fnanchor">[170]</a> and the other, on +the west, being part of the land which I have already called +Gracia;⁠<a id="FNanchor_171" href="#Footnote_171" class="fnanchor">[171]</a> we found here a channel still narrower than that of +Arenal,⁠<a id="FNanchor_172" href="#Footnote_172" class="fnanchor">[172]</a> with similar currents, and a tremendous roaring of +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_124">[124]</span>water; the water here also was fresh. Hitherto I had held +no communication with any of the people of this country, +although I very earnestly desired it; I therefore sailed along +the coast westwards, and the further I advanced, the fresher +and more wholesome I found the water; and when I had +proceeded a considerable distance, I reached a spot where the +land appeared to be cultivated. There I anchored, and sent +the boats ashore, and the men who went in them found the +natives had recently left the place; they also observed +that the mountain was covered with monkeys. They came +back, and as the coast at that part presented nothing +but a chain of mountains, I concluded that further west we +should find the land flatter, and consequently in all probability +inhabited. Actuated by this thought I weighed anchor, +and ran along the coast until we came to the end of the cordillera; +I then anchored at the mouth of a river, and we were +soon visited by a great number of the inhabitants, who informed +us, that the country was called Paria, and that further +westward it was more fully peopled. I took four of these +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_125">[125]</span>natives, and proceeded on my westward voyage; and when I +had gone eight leagues further, I found on the other side +of a point which I called Punta de la Aguja (Needle Point)⁠<a id="FNanchor_173" href="#Footnote_173" class="fnanchor">[173]</a> +one of the most lovely countries in the world, and very +thickly peopled: it was three o’clock in the morning when +I reached it, and seeing its verdure and beauty, I resolved +to anchor there and communicate with the inhabitants. Some +of the natives soon came out to the ship, in canoes, to beg +me, in the name of their king, to go on shore; and when +they saw that I paid no attention to them, they came to the +ship in their canoes in countless numbers, many of them +wearing pieces of gold on their breasts, and some with bracelets +of pearls on their arms; on seeing which I was much +delighted, and made many inquiries with the view of learning +where they found them. They informed me, that they +were to be procured in their own neighbourhood, and also +northward of that country. I would have remained here, +but the provisions of corn, and wine, and meats, which I +had brought out with so much care for the people whom I +had left behind, were nearly wasted, so that all my anxiety +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_126">[126]</span>was to get them into a place of safety, and not to stop for +any thing. I wished, however, to get some of the pearls +that I had seen, and with that view sent the boats on shore. +The natives are very numerous, and all handsome in person, +and of the same colour as the Indians we had already seen; +they are, moreover, very affable, and received our men who +went on shore most courteously, seeming very well disposed +towards us. These men relate, that when the boats reached +the shore, two of the chiefs, whom they took to be father and +son, came forward in advance of the mass of the people, and +conducted them to a very large house with façades, and not +round and tent-shaped as the other houses were; in this +house were many seats, on which they made our men sit +down, they themselves sitting with them. They then caused +bread to be brought, with many kinds of fruits, and various +sorts of wine, both white and red, not made of grapes, but +apparently produced from different fruits. The most reasonable +inference is, that they use maize, which is a plant +that bears an ear like that of wheat, some of which I took +with me to Spain, where it now grows abundantly; the best +of this they seemed to regard as most excellent, and set a +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_127">[127]</span>great value upon it. The men remained together at one +end of the house, and the women at the other. Great vexation +was felt by both parties that they could not understand +each other, for they were mutually anxious to make inquiries +respecting each other’s country. After our men had been +entertained at the house of the elder Indian, the younger +took them to his house, and gave them an equally cordial +reception; after which they returned to their boats and +came on board. I weighed anchor forthwith, for I was +hastened by my anxiety to save the provisions which were +becoming spoiled, and which I had procured and preserved +with so much care and trouble, as well as to attend to my +own health, which had been affected by long watching; +and although on my former voyage, when I went out to +discover terra firma, I passed thirty-three days without natural +rest, and was all that time without seeing it, yet +never were my eyes so much affected with bleeding or so +painful as at this period. These people, as I have already +said, are very graceful in form,—tall, and lithe in their +movements, and wear their hair very long and smooth. They +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_128">[128]</span>also bind their heads with handsome worked handkerchiefs, +which from a distance look like silk or gauze; others use +the same material in a longer form, wound round them so as +to cover them like trousers, and this is done by both the +men and the women. These people are of a whiter skin +than any I have seen in the Indies. It is the fashion +among all classes to wear something at the breast, and on +the arms, and many wear pieces of gold hanging low on +the bosom. Their canoes are larger, lighter, and of better +build than those of the islands which I have hitherto seen, +and in the middle of each they have a cabin or room, which +I found was occupied by the chiefs and their wives. I +called this place “Jardines,” that is “the Gardens,” for it +corresponded to that appellation. I made many inquiries as +to where they found the gold, in reply to which, all of them +directed me to an elevated tract of land at no great distance, +on the confines of their country, lying to the westward; but +they all advised me not to go there, for fear of being eaten, +and at the time, I imagined that by their description they +wished to imply, that they were cannibals who dwelt there, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_129">[129]</span>but I have since thought it possible, that they meant merely +to express, that the country was filled with beasts of prey. +I also inquired of them where they obtained the pearls, and +in reply to this question likewise, they directed me to the +westward, and also to the north, behind the country they occupied. +I did not put this information to the test, on account +of the provisions, and the weakness of my eyes, and because +the large ship that I had with me was not calculated for such +an undertaking. The short time that I spent with them was +all passed in putting questions; and at the hour of vespers +[six <span class="allsmcap">P.M.</span>], as I have already said, we returned to the ships, +upon which I weighed anchor and sailed to the westward. I +proceeded onwards on the following day, until I found that we +were only in three fathoms water; at this time I was still under +the idea that it was but an island, and that I should be able to +make my exit by the north. With this view I sent a light +caravel in advance of us, to see whether there was any exit, +or whether the passage was closed. The caravel proceeded a +great distance, until it reached a very large gulf, in which +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_130">[130]</span>there appeared to be four smaller gulfs, from one of which debouched +a large river. They invariably found ground at five +fathoms, and a great quantity of very fresh water, indeed, I +never tasted any equal to it. I was very disappointed when I +found that I could make no exit, either by the north, south, or +west, but that I was enclosed on all three sides by land. I +therefore weighed anchor, and sailed in a backward direction, +with the hope of finding a passage to the north by the strait, +which I have already described; but I could not return along +the inhabited part where I had already been, on account of +the currents, which drove me entirely out of my course. But +constantly, at every headland, I found the water sweet and +clear, and we were carried eastwards very powerfully towards +the two straits already mentioned. I then conjectured, that +the currents and the overwhelming mountains of water which +rushed into these straits with such an awful roaring, arose +from the contest between the fresh water and the sea. The +fresh water struggled with the salt to oppose its entrance, and +the salt contended against the fresh in its efforts to gain a passage +outwards. I also formed the conjecture, that at one +time there was a continuous neck of land from the island of +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_131">[131]</span>Trinidad to the land of Gracia, where the two straits +now are, as your Highnesses will see, by the drawing which +accompanies this letter. I passed out by this northern strait, +and found the fresh water come even there; and when, by the +force of the wind, I was enabled to effect a passage, I remarked, +while on one of the watery billows which I have +described, that the water on the inner side of the current +was fresh, and on the outside salt.</p> + +<p>When I sailed from Spain to the Indies, I found, that as +soon as I had passed a hundred leagues westward of the +Azores, there was a very great change in the sky and the +stars, in the temperature of the air, and in the water of the +sea; and I have been very diligent in observing these things. +I remarked, that from north to south, in traversing these +hundred leagues from the said islands, the needle of the +compass, which hitherto had turned towards the north-east, +turned a full quarter of the wind to the north-west, and this +took place from the time when we reached that line. At the +same time an appearance was presented, as if the sea shore +had been transplanted thither, for we found the sea covered +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_132">[132]</span>all over with a sort of weed, resembling pine branches, and +with fruits like that of the mastic tree, so thick, that on my +first voyage I thought it was a reef, and that the ships could +not avoid running aground; whereas until I reached this line, +I did not meet with a single bough. I also observed, that at +this point the sea was very smooth, and that though the wind +was rough, the ships never rolled. I likewise found, that +within the same line, towards the west, the temperature was +always mild, and that it did not vary summer or winter. +While there, I observed that the north star described a +circle five degrees in diameter; that when its satellites⁠<a id="FNanchor_174" href="#Footnote_174" class="fnanchor">[174]</a> are +on the right side, then the star was at its lowest point, and +from this point it continues rising until it reaches the left +side, where it is also at five degrees, and then again it sinks +until it at length returns to the right side. In this voyage I +proceeded immediately from Spain to the island of Madeira, +thence to the Canaries, and then to the Cape Verde islands, +and from the Cape Verde islands I sailed southwards, even +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_133">[133]</span>below the equinoctial line, as I have already described. +When I reached the parallel of Sierra Leone, in Guinea, I +found the heat so intense, and the rays of the sun so fierce, +that I thought that we should have been burnt; and although +it rained and the sky was heavy with clouds, I still suffered +the same oppression, until our Lord was pleased to grant me +a favourable wind, giving me an opportunity of sailing to the +west, so that I reached a latitude where I experienced, as I +have already said, a change in the temperature. Immediately +upon my reaching this line, the temperature became very +mild, and the more I advanced, the more this mildness increased; +but I did not find the positions of the stars correspond +with these effects. I remarked at this place, that when +night came on, the polar star was five degrees high, and then +the satellites were over head; afterwards, at midnight, I +found that star elevated ten degrees, and when morning approached, +the satellites were fifteen degrees below. I found +the smoothness of the sea continue, but not so the weeds; as +to the polar star, I watched it with great wonder, and devoted +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_134">[134]</span>many nights to a careful examination of it with the quadrant, +and I always found that the lead and line fell to the same +point. I look upon this as something new, and it will probably +be admitted, that it is a short distance for so great a +change to take place in the temperature. I have always read, +that the world comprising the land and the water was spherical, +and the recorded experiences of Ptolemy and all others, +have proved this by the eclipses of the moon, and other observations +made from east to west, as well as by the elevation of +the pole from north to south. But as I have already described, +I have now seen so much irregularity, that I have come to +another conclusion respecting the earth, namely, that it is not +round as they describe, but of the form of a pear, which is +very round except where the stalk grows, at which part it is +most prominent; or like a round ball, upon one part of which +is a prominence like a woman’s nipple, this protrusion being +the highest and nearest the sky, situated under the equinoctial +line, and at the eastern extremity of this sea,—I call that the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_135">[135]</span>eastern extremity, where the land and the islands end. In +confirmation of my opinion, I revert to the arguments which +I have above detailed respecting the line, which passes from +north to south, a hundred leagues westward of the Azores; +for in sailing thence westward, the ships went on rising +smoothly towards the sky, and then the weather was felt to +be milder, on account of which mildness, the needle shifted +one point of the compass; the further we went, the more the +needle moved to the north-west, this elevation producing the +variation of the circle, which the north star describes with its +satellites; and the nearer I approached the equinoctial line, +the more they rose, and the greater was the difference +in these stars and in their circles. Ptolemy and the other +philosophers, who have written upon the globe, thought that +it was spherical, believing that this hemisphere was round as +well as that in which they themselves dwelt, the centre of +which was in the island of Arin,⁠<a id="FNanchor_175" href="#Footnote_175" class="fnanchor">[175]</a> which is under the equinoctial +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_136">[136]</span>line between the Arabian Gulf and the Gulf of Persia; +and the circle passes over Cape St. Vincent, in Portugal, +westward, and eastward, by Cangara and the Seras,⁠<a id="FNanchor_176" href="#Footnote_176" class="fnanchor">[176]</a> in which +hemisphere I make no difficulty as to its being a perfect +sphere as they describe; but this western half of the world, +I maintain, is like the half of a very round pear, having a +raised projection for the stalk, as I have already described, or +like a woman’s nipple on a round ball. Ptolemy and the +others who have written upon the globe, had no information +respecting this part of the world, which was then unexplored; +they only established their arguments with respect to their +own hemisphere, which, as I have already said, is half of a +perfect sphere. And now that your Highnesses have commissioned +me to make this voyage of discovery, the truths +which I have stated are evidently proved, because in this +voyage, when I was off the island of Hargin,⁠<a id="FNanchor_177" href="#Footnote_177" class="fnanchor">[177]</a> and its vicinity, +which is twenty degrees to the north of the equinoctial line, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_137">[137]</span>I found the people are black, and the land very much burnt; +and when after that I went to the Cape Verde islands, I +found the people there much darker still, and the more +southward we went, the more they approach the extreme of +blackness; so that when I reached the parallel of Sierra +Leone, where, as night came on, the north star rose five +degrees, the people there were excessively black; and as I +sailed westward, the heat became extreme. But after I had +passed the meridian, or line which I have already described, +I found the climate become gradually more temperate; so +that when I reached the island of Trinidad, where the north +star rose five degrees as night came on, there, and in the +land of Gracia, I found the temperature exceedingly mild; +the fields and the foliage likewise were remarkably fresh and +green, and as beautiful as the gardens of Valencia in April. +The people there are very graceful in form, less dark than +those whom I had before seen in the Indies, and wear their +hair long and smooth; they are also more shrewd, intelligent, +and courageous. The sun was then in the sign of Virgo, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_138">[138]</span>over our heads and theirs; therefore, all this must proceed +from the extreme blandness of the temperature, which arises, +as I have said, from this country being the most elevated in +the world, and the nearest to the sky. On these grounds, +therefore, I affirm, that the globe is not spherical, but that +there is the difference in its form which I have described; +the which is to be found in this hemisphere, at the point +where the Indies meet the ocean, the extremity of the +hemisphere being below the equinoctial line. And a great +confirmation of this is, that when our Lord made the sun, +the first light appeared in the first point of the east, where +the most elevated point of the globe is; and although it was +the opinion of Aristotle, that the antarctic pole, or the land +under it, was the highest part of the world, and the nearest +to the heavens, other philosophers oppose him, and say, that +the highest part was below the arctic pole, by which reasoning +it appears, that they understood, that one part of the +world must be loftier, and nearer the sky, than the other; +but it never struck them that it might be under the equinoctial, +in the way that I have said, which is not to be wondered +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_139">[139]</span>at, because they had no certain knowledge respecting +this hemisphere, but merely vague suppositions, for no one +has ever gone or been sent to investigate the matter, until +now that your Highnesses have sent me to explore both the +sea and the land. I found that between the two straits, +which, as I have said, face each other in a line from north to +south, is a distance of twenty-six leagues; and there can be +no mistake in this calculation, because it was made with the +quadrant. I also find, that from these two straits on the +west up to the above-mentioned gulf, to which I gave the +name of the Gulf of Pearls,⁠<a id="FNanchor_178" href="#Footnote_178" class="fnanchor">[178]</a> there are sixty-eight leagues of +four miles to the league, which is the reckoning we are +accustomed to make at sea; from this gulf the water runs +constantly with great impetuosity towards the east, and this +is the cause why, in these two straits, there is so fierce a turmoil +from the fresh water encountering the water of the sea. +In the southern strait, which I named the Serpent’s Mouth, +I found that towards evening the polar star was nearly at +five degrees elevation; and in the northern, which I called +the Dragon’s Mouth, it was at an elevation of nearly seven +degrees. The before-mentioned Gulf of Pearls is to the west +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_140">[140]</span>of the ⁠<a id="FNanchor_179" href="#Footnote_179" class="fnanchor lacuna">[179]</a> of Ptolemy, nearly three thousand nine +hundred miles, which make nearly seventy equinoctial degrees, +reckoning fifty-six miles and two-thirds to a degree. +The Holy Scriptures record, that our Lord made the earthly +paradise, and planted in it the tree of life, and thence springs +a fountain from which the four principal rivers in the world +take their source; namely, the Ganges in India, the Tigris, +and Euphrates in ⁠<a id="FNanchor_180" href="#Footnote_180" class="fnanchor lacuna">[180]</a> which rivers divide a chain of +mountains, and forming Mesopotamia, flow thence into Persia,—and +the Nile, which rises in Ethiopia, and falls into the +sea at Alexandria.</p> + +<p>I do not find, nor have ever found, any account by the +Romans or Greeks, which fixes in a positive manner the +site of the terrestrial paradise, neither have I seen it given +in any mappe-monde, laid down from authentic sources. +Some placed it in Ethiopia, at the sources of the Nile, but +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_141">[141]</span>others, traversing all these countries, found neither the temperature +nor the altitude of the sun correspond with their +ideas respecting it; nor did it appear that the overwhelming +waters of the deluge had been there. Some pagans +pretended to adduce arguments to establish that it was in +the Fortunate Islands, now called the Canaries, etc.</p> + +<p>St. Isidore, Bede, Strabo,⁠<a id="FNanchor_181" href="#Footnote_181" class="fnanchor">[181]</a> and the Master of scholastic +history,⁠<a id="FNanchor_182" href="#Footnote_182" class="fnanchor">[182]</a> with St. Ambrose, and Scotus, and all the learned +theologians, agree that the earthly paradise is in the east, etc.</p> + +<p>I have already described my ideas concerning this hemisphere +and its form, and I have no doubt, that if I could +pass below the equinoctial line, after reaching the highest +point of which I have spoken, I should find a much milder +temperature, and a variation in the stars and in the water; +not that I suppose that elevated point to be navigable, nor +even that there is water there; indeed, I believe it is impossible +to ascend thither, because I am convinced that it is +the spot of the earthly paradise, whither no one can go but +by God’s permission; but this land which your Highnesses +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_142">[142]</span>have now sent me to explore, is very extensive, and I think +there are many other countries in the south, of which the +world has never had any knowledge.</p> + +<p>I do not suppose that the earthly paradise is in the form +of a rugged mountain, as the descriptions of it have made it +appear, but that it is on the summit of the spot, which I +have described as being in the form of the stalk of a pear; +the approach to it from a distance must be by a constant and +gradual ascent; but I believe that, as I have already said, +no one could ever reach the top; I think also, that the water +I have described may proceed from it, though it be far off, +and that stopping at the place which I have just left, it forms +this lake. There are great indications of this being the terrestrial +paradise, for its site coincides with the opinion of +the holy and wise theologians whom I have mentioned; and +moreover, the other evidences agree with the supposition, for +I have never either read or heard of fresh water coming in +so large a quantity, in close conjunction with the water of +the sea; the idea is also corroborated by the blandness of +the temperature; and if the water of which I speak, does +not proceed from the earthly paradise, it seems to be a still +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_143">[143]</span>greater wonder, for I do not believe that there is any river +in the world so large or so deep.</p> + +<p>When I left the Dragon’s Mouth, which is the northernmost +of the two straits which I have described, and which I +so named on the day of our Lady of August,⁠<a id="FNanchor_183" href="#Footnote_183" class="fnanchor">[183]</a> I found that +the sea ran so strongly to the westward, that between the +hour of mass,⁠<a id="FNanchor_184" href="#Footnote_184" class="fnanchor">[184]</a> + when I weighed anchor, and the hour of complines,⁠<a id="FNanchor_185" href="#Footnote_185" class="fnanchor">[185]</a> +I made sixty-five leagues of four miles each; and not +only was the wind not violent, but on the contrary very +gentle, which confirmed me in the conclusion, that in sailing +southward, there is a continuous ascent, while there is a corresponding +descent towards the north.</p> + +<p>I hold it for certain, that the waters of the sea move from +east to west with the sky, and that in passing this track, they +hold a more rapid course, and have thus eaten away large +tracts of land, and hence has resulted this great number of +islands; indeed, these islands themselves afford an additional +proof of it, for on the one hand all those which lie west and +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_144">[144]</span>east, or a little more obliquely north-west and south-east, are +broad; while those which lie north and south, or north-east +and south-west, that is, in a directly contrary direction to +the said winds, are narrow; furthermore, that these islands +should possess the most costly productions, is to be accounted +for by the mild temperature, which comes to them from +heaven, since these are the most elevated parts of the world. +It is true, that in some parts, the waters do not appear to +take this course, but this only occurs in certain spots, where +they are obstructed by land, and hence they appear to take +different directions.</p> + +<p>Pliny writes that the sea and land together form a sphere, +but that the ocean forms the greatest mass, and lies uppermost, +while the earth is below and supports the ocean, and +that the two afford a mutual support to each other, as the +kernel of a nut is confined by its shell. The Master of +scholastic history, in commenting upon Genesis, says, that +the waters are not very extensive; and that although when +they were first created they covered the earth, they were yet +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_145">[145]</span>vaporous like a cloud, and that afterwards they became condensed, +and occupied but small space, and in this notion +Nicolas de Lira agrees. Aristotle says that the world is +small, and the water very limited in extent, and that it is +easy to pass from Spain to the Indies; and this is confirmed +by Avenruyz,⁠<a id="FNanchor_186" href="#Footnote_186" class="fnanchor">[186]</a> and by the Cardinal Pedro de Aliaco, who, in +supporting this opinion, shows that it agrees with that of +Seneca, and says that Aristotle had been enabled to gain +information respecting the world by means of Alexander the +Great, and Seneca by means of the Emperor Nero, and Pliny +through the Romans; all of them having expended large +sums of money, and employed a vast number of people, in +diligent inquiry concerning the secrets of the world, and in +spreading abroad the knowledge thus obtained. The said +cardinal allows to these writers greater authority than to +Ptolemy, and other Greeks and Arabs; and in confirmation +of their opinion concerning the small quantity of water on +the surface of the globe, and the limited amount of land +covered by that water, in comparison of what had been related +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_146">[146]</span>on the authority of Ptolemy and his disciples, he finds +a passage in the third book of Esdras, where that sacred +writer says, that of seven parts of the world six are discovered, +and the other is covered with water. The authority +of the third and fourth books of Esdras is also confirmed by +holy persons, such as St. Augustin, and St. Ambrose in his +<i>Exameron</i>, where he says,—“Here my son Jesus shall first +come, and here my son Christ shall die!” These holy men +say that Esdras was a prophet as well as Zacharias, the +father of St. John, and <i>El Braso</i>⁠<a id="FNanchor_187" href="#Footnote_187" class="fnanchor">[187]</a> Simon; authorities which +are also quoted by Francis de Mairones.⁠<a id="FNanchor_188" href="#Footnote_188" class="fnanchor">[188]</a> With respect to +the dryness of the land, experience has shown that it is +greater than is commonly believed; and this is no wonder, +for the further one goes the more one learns.</p> + +<p>I now return to my subject of the land of Gracia, and of +the river and lake found there, which latter might more properly +be called a sea; for a lake is but a small expanse of +water, which, when it becomes great, deserves the name of a +sea, just as we speak of the Sea of Galilee and the Dead +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_147">[147]</span>Sea; and I think that if the river mentioned does not proceed +from the terrestrial paradise, it comes from an immense +tract of land situated in the south, of which no knowledge +has been hitherto obtained. But the more I reason +on the subject, the more satisfied I become that the terrestrial +paradise is situated in the spot I have described; and +I ground my opinion upon the arguments and authorities +already quoted. May it please the Lord to grant your Highnesses +a long life, and health and peace to follow out so noble +an investigation; in which I think our Lord will receive +great service, Spain considerable increase of its greatness, +and all Christians much consolation and pleasure, because by +this means the name of our Lord will be published abroad.</p> + +<p>In all the countries visited by your Highnesses’ ships, I +have caused a high cross to be fixed upon every headland, +and have proclaimed, to every nation that I have discovered, +the lofty estate of your Highnesses, and of your court in +Spain. I also tell them all I can respecting our holy faith +and of the belief in the holy mother Church, which has its +members in all the world; and I speak to them also of the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_148">[148]</span>courtesy and nobleness of all Christians, and of the faith +they have in the Holy Trinity. May it please the Lord to +forgive those who have calumniated and still calumniate this +excellent enterprise, and oppose and have opposed its advancement, +without considering how much glory and greatness +will accrue from it to your Highnesses throughout all +the world. They cannot state anything in disparagement +of it, except its expense, and that I have not immediately +sent back the ships loaded with gold. They speak this +without considering the shortness of the time, and how +many difficulties there are to contend with; and that every +year there are individuals who singly earn by their deserts +out of your Majesties’ own household, more revenue than +would cover the whole of this expense. Nor do they take +into consideration that the princes of Spain have never gained +possession of any land out of their own country, until now that +your Highnesses have become the masters of another world, +where our holy faith may become so much increased, and +whence such stores of wealth may be derived; for although +we have not sent home ships laden with gold, we have, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_149">[149]</span>nevertheless, sent satisfactory samples, both of gold and of +other valuable commodities, by which it may be judged that +in a short time large profit may be derived. Neither do they +take into consideration the noble spirit of the princes of +Portugal, who so long ago carried into execution the exploration +of Guinea, and still follow it up along the coast of +Africa, in which one-half of the population of the country has +been employed, and yet the King is more determined on the +enterprise than ever. The Lord grant all that I have said, +and lead them to think deeply upon what I have written; +which is not the thousandth part of what might be written +of the deeds of princes who have set their minds upon +gaining knowledge, and upon obtaining territory and +keeping it.</p> + +<p>I say all this, not because I doubt the inclination of your +Highnesses to pursue the enterprise while you live,—for I +rely confidently on the answers your Highnesses once gave +me by word of mouth,—nor because I have seen any change +in your Highnesses, but from the fear of what I have heard +from those of whom I have been speaking; for I know that +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_150">[150]</span>water dropping on a stone will at length make a hole. Your +Highnesses responded to me with that nobleness of feeling +which all the world knows you to possess, and told me to pay +no attention to these calumniations; for that your intention +was to follow up and support the undertaking, even if nothing +were gained by it but stones and sand. Your Highnesses +also desired me to be in no way anxious about the expense, +for that much greater cost had been incurred on much more +trifling matters, and that you considered all the past and +future expense as well laid out; for that your Highnesses +believed that our holy faith would be increased, and your +royal dignity enhanced, and that they were no friends of the +royal estate who spoke ill of the enterprise.</p> + +<p>And now, during the despatch of the information respecting +these lands which I have recently discovered, and where +I believe in my soul that the earthly paradise is situated, +the “Adelantado” will proceed with three ships, well stocked +with provisions, on a further investigation, and will make all +the discoveries he can about these parts. Meanwhile, I shall +send your Highnesses this letter, accompanied by a map of +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_151">[151]</span>the country, and your Majesties will determine on what is to +be done, and give your orders as to how it is your pleasure +that I should proceed: the which, by the aid of the Holy +Trinity, shall be carried into execution with all possible diligence, +in the faithful service and to the entire satisfaction of +your Majesties. Thanks be to God.</p> + +</div> + +<div class="spanish"> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="TERCER_VIAGE_DE_COLON">TERCER VIAGE DE COLON.</h2> + +<h3 class="hanging"><i>La historia del viage quel Almirante D. Cristobal Colon hizo la tercera +vez que vino á las Indias cuando descubrió la tierra firme, +como lo envió á los Reyes desde la Isla Española.</i></h3> + +<p>Serenísimos é muy altos é muy poderosos Príncipes Rey é Reina +nuestros Señores: La Santa Trinidad movió á vuestras Altezas á +esta empresa de las Indias, y por su infinita bondad hizo á mí +mensagero dello, al cual vine con el embajada á su Real conspetu, +movido como á los mas altos Príncipes de cristianos y que tanto +se ejercisaban en la fé y acrecentamiento della; las personas que +entendieron en ello lo tuvieron por imposible, y el caudal hacian +sobre bienes de fortuna, y allí echaron el clavo. Puse en esto seis +ó siete años de grave pena, amostrando lo mejor que yo sabia +cuanto servicio se podia hacer á nuestro Señor en esto en divulgar +su santo nombre y Fé á tantos pueblos; lo cual todo era cosa de +tanta excelencia y buena fama y gran memoria para grandes +Príncipes: fue tambien necesario de hablar del temporal adonde se +les amostró el escrebir de tantos sabios dignos de fé, los cuales +escribieron historias. Los cuales contaban que en estas partes +habia muchas riquezas, y asimismo fue necesario traer á esto el +decir é epinion de aquellos que escribieron é situaron el mundo: +en fin vuestras Altezas determinaron questo se pusiese en obra. +Aquí mostraron el grande corazon que siempre ficieron en toda +cosa grande, porque todos los que habian entendido en ello y oido +esta platica todos á una mano lo tenian á burla, salvo dos frailes +que siempre fueron constantes. Yo, bien que llevase fatiga, estaba +bien seguro que esto no vernia á menos, y estoy de contino, porque +es verdad que todo pasará, y no la palabra de Dios, y se complirá +todo lo que dijó; el cual tan claro habló de estas tierras por la +boca de Isaías en tantos lugares de su Escriptura, afirmando que +de España les seria divulgado su santo nombre. E partí en nombre +de la Santa Trinidad, y volví muy presto con la experiencia de +todo cuanto yo habia dicho en la mano: tornáronme á enviar +vuestras Altezas, y en poco espacio digo, no de <a class="lacuna" href="#Footnote_155">[155]</a> le descubri +por virtud divinal trescientas y treinta y tres leguas de la tierra +firme, fin de Oriente, y setcentas [<i>sic</i>] islas de nombre, allende de +lo descubierto en el primero víage, y le allané la Isla Española que +boja mas que España, en que la gente della es sin cuento, y que +todos le pagasen tributo. Nació allí mal decir y menosprecio de +la empresa comenzada en ello, porque no habia yo enviado luego +los navíos cargados de oro, sin considerar le brevedad del tiempo, +y lo otro que yo dije de tantos inconvenientes; y en esto por mis +pecados ó por mi salvacion creo que será, fue puesto en aborrecimiento +y dado impedimento á cuanto yo decia y demandaba; por +lo cual acordé de venir á vuestras Altezas, y maravillarme de todo, +y mostrarles la razon que en todo habia, y les dige de los pneblos +que yo habia visto, en qué ó de qué se podrian salvar muchas +animas, y les truje las obligaciones de la gente de la Isla Española, +de como se obligaban á pagar tributo é les tenian por sos Reyes +y Señores, y les truje abastante muestra de oro, y que hay mineros +y granos muy grandes, y asimismo de cobre; y les truje de muchas +maneras de especerias, de que seria largo de escrebir, y les dije +de la gran cantidad de brasil, y otras infinitas cosas. Todo no +aprovechó para con algunas personas que tenian gana y dado +comienzo á mal decir del negocio, ni entrar con fabla del servicio +de nuestro Señor con se salvar tantas animas, ni á decir questo +era grandeza de vuestras Altezas, de la mejor calidad que hasta +hoy haya usado Príncipe, por quel ejercicio é gasto era para el +espiritual y temporal, y que no podia ser que andando el tiempo +no hobiese la España de aquí grandes provechos, pues que se +veian las señales que escribieron de lo de estas partidas tan manifiestas; +que tambien se llegaria á ver todo el otro complimiento, +ni á decir cosas que usaron grandes Principes en el mundo para +crecer su fama, así como de Salomon que envió desde Hierusalem +en fin de Oriente á ver el monte Sopora, en que se detovieron los +navíos tres años, el cual tienen vuestras Altezas agora en la Isla +Española; ni de Alejandre, que envió á ver el regimiento de la +Isla de Trapobana en India, y Nero Cesar á ver las fuentes del +Nilo, y la razon porque crecian en el verano, cuando las aguas son +pocas, y otras muchas grandezas que hicieron Príncipes, y que á +Príncipes son estas cosas dadas de hacer; ni valia decir que yo +nunca habia leido que Príncipes de Castilla jamas hobiesen ganado +tierra fuera della, y que esta de acáes otro mundo en que se +trabajaron Romanos y Alejandre y Griegos, para la haber con +grandes ejercicios, ni decir del presente de los Reyes de Portugal, +que tovieron corazon para sostener á Guinea, y del descobrir della, +y que gastaron oro y gente á tanta, que quien contase toda la del +Reino se hallaria que otra tanta como la mitad son muertos en +Guinea, y todavia la continuaron hasta que les salió dello lo que +parece, lo cual todo comenzaron de largo tiempo, y hay muy poco +que les da renta; los cuales tambien osaron conquistar en Africa, +y sostener la empresa á Cepta, Tanjar y Arcilla, é Alcazar, y +de contino dar guerra á los moros, y todo esto con grande gasto, +solo por hacer cosa de Príncipe servir á Dios y acrecentar su +Señorío.</p> + +<p>Cuanto yo mas decia tanto mas se doblaba á poner esto á vituperio, +amostrando en ello aborrecimiento, sin considerar cuánto +bien parecio en todo el mundo, y cuánto bien se dijo en todos los +cristianos de vuestras Altezas por haber tomado esta empresa, +que no hobo grande ni pequeño que no quisiese dello carta. +Respondiéronme vuestras Altezas riéndose y diciendo que yo no +curase de nada porque no daban autoridad ni creencia á quien +les mal decia de esta empresa.</p> + +<p>Partí en nombre de la Santísima Trinidad, Miercoles 30 de +Mayo de la villa de S. Lúcar, bien fatigado de mi viage, que +adonde esperaba descanso, cuando yo partí de estas Indias, se me +dobló la pena, y navegué á la Isla de la Madera por camino no +acostumbrado, por evitar escándalo que pudiera tener con un +armada de Francia, que me aguardaba al Cabo de S. Vicente, y +de allí á las Islas de Canaria, de adonde me partí con una nao y +dos carabelas, y envié los otros navíos á derecho camino á las +Indias á la Isla Española, y yo navegué al Austro con propósito +de llegar á la línea equinocial, y de allí seguir al Poniente hasta +que la Isla Española me quedase al Septentrion, y llegado á las +Islas de Cabo Verde, falso nombre, porque son atan secas que no +ví cosa verde en ellas, y toda la gente enferma, que no osé detenerme +en ellas, y navegué al Sudueste cuatrocientas y ochenta +millas, que son ciento y veinte leguas, adonde en anocheciendo +tenia la estrella del norte en cinco grados; allí me desamparó el +viento y entré en tanto ardor y tan grande que creí que se me +quemasen los navíos y gente, que todo de un golpe vino á tan +desordenado, que no habia persona que osase descender debajo +de cubierta á remediar la vasija y mantenimientos; duró este +ardor ocho dias; al primer dia fue claro, y los siete dias siguientes +llovió é hizo ñumblado, y con todo no fallamos remedio, que cierto +si así fuera de sol como el primero, yo creo que no pudiera escapar +en ninguna manera.</p> + +<p>Acórdome que navegando á las Indias siempre que yo paso al +Poniente de las Islas de los Azores cien leguas, allí fallo mudar la +temperanza, y esto es todo de Septentrion en Austro, y determiné +que si á nuestro Señor le pluguiese de me dar viento y buen +tiempo que pudiese salir de adonde estaba, de dejar de ir mas al +Austro, ni volver tampoco atrás, salvo de navegar al Poniente, á +tanto que ya llegase á estar con esta raya con esperanza que yo +fallaria allí así temperamiento, como habia fallado cuando yo +navegaba en el paralelo de Canaria. E que si así fuese que entonces +yo podria ir mas al Austro, y plugó á nuestro Señor que al +cabo de estos ocho dias de me dar buen viento Levante, y yo +seguí al Poniente, mas no osé declinar abajo al Austro porque +fallé grandísimo mudamiento en el cielo y en las estrellas, mas +non fallé mudamiento en la temperancia; así acordé de proseguir +delante siempre justo al Poniente, en aquel derecho de la Sierra +Lioa, con propósito de non mudar derrota fasta adonde yo habia +pensado que fallaria tierra, y allí adobar los navíos, y remediar si +pudiese los mantenimientos y tomar agua que no tenia; y al cabo +de diez y siete dias, los cuales nuestro Señor me dió de próspero +viento, Martes 31 de Julio á medio dia nos amostró tierra é yo la +esperaba el Lunes antes, y tuve aquel camino fasta entonces, que +en saliendo el sol, por defecto del agua que no tenia, determiné +de andar á las Islas de los Caribales, y tomé esa vuelta; y como +su alta Magestad haya siempre usado de misericordia conmigo, +por acertamiento subió un marinero á la gavia, y vido al Poniente +tres moñtanas juntas: dijimos la Salve Regina y otras prosas, y +dimos todos muchas gracias á nuestro Señor, y despues dejé el +camino de Septentrion, y volví hácia la tierra, adonde yo llegué á +hora de completas á un Cabo á que dije de la Galea despues de +haber nombrado á la Isla de la Trinidad, y allí hobiera muy buen +puerto si fuera fondo, y habia casas y gente, y muy lindas tierras, +atan fermosas y verdes come las huertas de Valencia en Marzo. +Pesóme cuando no pude entrar en el puerto, y corri la costa de +esta tierra del luengo fasta el poniente, y andadas cinco leguas +fallé muy buen fondo y surgí, y en el otro dia dí la vela á este +camino buscando puerto para adobar los navíos y tomar agua, y +remediar el trigo y los bastimentos que llevaba solamente. Allí +tomé una pipa de agua, y con ella anduve ansi hasta llegar al +cabo, y allí fallé abrigo de Levante y buen fondo, y así mandé +surgir y adobar la vasija y tomar agua y leña, y descendir la +gente á descansar de tanto tiempo que andaban penando.</p> + +<p>A esta punta llamé del Arenal, y allí se falló toda la tierra follada +de unas animalías que tenian la pata como de cabra, y bien +que segun parece ser allí haya muchas, no se vido sino una +muerta. El dia siguiente vino de hácia oriente una grande canoa +con veinte y cuatro hombres, todos mancebos é muy ataviados +de armas, arcos y flechas y tablachinas, y ellos, como dije, todos, +mancebos, de buena disposicion y no negros, salvo mas blancos +que otros que haya visto en las Indias, y de muy lindo gesto, y +fermosos cuerpos, y los cabellos largos y llanos, cortados á la +guisa Castilla, y traian la cabeza atada con un pañuelo de algodon +tejido á labores y colores, el cual creia yo que era almaizar. Otro +de estos pañuelos traían ceñido é se cobijaban con él en lugar de +pañetes. Cuando llegó esta canoa habló de muy lejos, é yo ni +otro ninguno no los entendiamos, salvo que yo les mandaba hacer +señas que se allegasen, y en esto se pasó mas de dos horas, y si +se llegaban un poco luego se desviaban. Yo les hacia mostrar +bacines y otras cosas que lucian por enamorarlos porque viniesen, +y á cabo de buen rato se allegaron mas que hasta entonces no +habian, y yo deseaba mucho haber lengua, y no tenia ya cosa que +me pareciese que era de mostrarles para que viniesen; salvo que +hice sobir un tamborin en el castillo de popa que tañesen, é unos +mancebos que danzasen, creyendo que se allegarian á ver la +fiesta; y luego que vieron tañer y danzar todos dejaron los remos +y echaron mano á los arcos y los encordaron, y embrazo cada uno +su tablachina, y comenzaron á tirarnos flechas: cesó luego el +tañer y danzar, y mandé luego sacar unas ballestas, y ellos dejáronme +y fueren á mas andar á otra carabela y de golpe se +fueron debajo la popa della, y el piloto entró con ellos, y dió un +sayo é un bonete á un hombre principal que le pareció dellos, y +quedó concertado que le iria hablar allí en la playa, adonde ellos +luego fueron con la canoa esperándole, y él como no quiso ir sin mi +licencia, como ellos le vieron venir á la nao con la barca, tornaron +á entrar en la canoa é se fueron, é nunca mas los vide ni á otros +de esta isla.</p> + +<p>Cuando yo llegué á esta punta del Arenal, allí se hace una boca +grande de dos leguas de Poniente á Levante, la Isla de la Trinidad +con la tierra de Gracia y que para haber de entrar dentro para +pasar al Septentrion habia unos hileros de corrientes que atravesaban +aquella boca y traían un rugir muy grande, y creí yo que +sería un arrecife de bajos é peñas, por el cual no se ponria entrar +dentro en ella, y detras de este hilero habia otro y otro que todos +traian un rugir grande como ola de la mar que va á romper y dar +en peñas. Surgí allí á la dicha punta del Arenal, fuera de la dicha +boca, y fallé que venia el agua del Oriente fasta el Poniente con +tanta furia como hace Guadalquivir en tiempo de avenida, y esto +de contino noche y dia, que creí quo no podria volver atrás por la +corriente, ni ir adelante por los bajos; y en la noche ya muy tarde, +estando al bordo de la nao, oí un rugir muy terrible que venia de +la parte del Austro hácia la nao, y me paré á mirar, y ví levantando +la mar de Poniente á Levante, en manera de una loma tan +alta como la nao, y todavia venia hácia mi poco á poco, y encima +della venia un filero de corriente que venia rugiendo con muy +grande estrépito con aquella furia de aquel rugir que de los otros +hileros que yo dije que me parecian ondas de mar que daban en +peñas, que hoy en dia tengo el miedo en el cuerpo que no me +trabucasen la nao cuando llegasen debajo della, y passó y llegó +fasta la boca adonde allí se detuvo grande espacio. Y el otro dia +siguiente envié las barcas á sondar y fallé en el mas bajo de la +boca, que habia seis ó siete brazas de fondo, y de contino andaban +aquellos hileros unos por entrar y otros por salir, y plugo á +nuestro Señor de me dar buen viento, y atravesé por esa boca +adentro, y luego hallé tranquilidad, y por acertamiento se sacó del +agua de la mar y la hallé dulce. Navegué al Septentrion fasta +una sierra muy alta, adonde serian veinte y seis leguas de esta +punta del Arenal, y allí habia dos cabos de tierra muy alta, el uno +de la parte del Oriente, y era de la misma Isla de la Trinidad, y +el otro del Occidente de la tierra que dije de Gracia, y allí hacia +una boca muy angosta mas que aquella de la punta del Arenal, y +allí habia los mismos hileros y aquel rugir fuerte del agua como +era en la punta del Arenal, y asimismo allí la mar era agua dulce; +y fasta entonces yo no habia habido lengua con ninguna gente de +estas tierras, y lo deseaba en gran manera, y por esto navegué al +luengo de la costa de esta tierra hácia el Poniente, y cuanto mas +andaba hallaba el agua de la mar mas dulce y mas sabrosa, y +andando una gran parte llegué á un lugar donde me parecian las +tierras labradas y surgí y envié las barcas á tierra, y fallaron que +de fresco se habia ido de allí gente, y fallaron todo el monte +cubierto de gatos paules: volviéronse, y como esta fuese sierra +me pareció que mas allá al Poniente las tierras eran mas llanas, y +que allí seria poblado, y por esto seria poblado, y mandé levantar +las anclas y corrí esta costa fasta el cabo de esta sierra, y allí á +un rio surgi, y luego vino mucha gente, y me dijeron como +llamaron á esta tierra Paria y que de allí mas al Poniente era mas +poblada; tomé dellos cuatro, y despues navegué al Poniente, y +andadas ocho leguas mas al Poniente allende una punta á que yo +llamé del Aguja: hallé unas tierras las mas hermosas del mundo, +y muy pobladas: llegué allí una mañana á hora de tercia, y por +ver esta verdura y esta hermosura acordé surgir y ver esta gente, +de los cuales luego vinieron en canoas á la nao á rogarme, de +partes de su Rey, que descendiese en tierra; é cuando vieron que +no curé dellos vinieron á la nao infinitísimos en canoas, y muchos +traían piezas de oro al pescuezo, y algunos atados á los brazos +algunas perlas: holgué mucho cuando las ví é procuré mucho de +saber donde las hallaban, y me dijeron que allí, y de la parte del +Norte de aquella tierra.</p> + +<p>Quisiera detenerme, mas estos bastimentos, que yo traía, trigo +y vino é carne para esta gente que acá esta se me acababan de +perder, los cuales hobe allá con tanta fatiga, y por esto yo no +buscaba sino á mas andar á venir á poner en ellos cobro, y no me +detener para cosa alguna: procuré de haber de aquellas perlas, y +envié las barcas á tierra: esta gente es muy mucha, y toda de +muy buen parecer, de la misma color que los otros de antes, y muy +tratables: la gente nuestra que fue á tierra los hallaron tan convenibles, +y los recibieron muy honradamente: dicen que luego +que llegaron las barcas á tierra que vinieron dos personas principales +cón todo el pueblo, creen que el uno el padre y el otro era +su hijo, y los llevaron á una casa muy grande hecha á dos aguas, +y no redonda, como tienda de campo, como son estas otras, y allí +tenian muchas sillas á donde los ficieron asentar, y otras donde +ellos se asentaron; y hicieron traer pan, y de muchas maneras +frutas é vino de muchas maneras blanco é tinto, mas no de uvas: +debe él de ser de diversas maneras uno de una fruta y otro de +otra; y asimismo debe de ser dello de maiz, que es una simiente +que hace una espiga como una mazorca de que llevé yo allá, y hay +ya mucho en Castilla, y parece que aquel que lo tenia mejor lo +traía por mayor excelencia, y lo daba en gran precio: los hombres +todos estaban juntos á un cabo de la casa, y las mugeres en otro. +Recibieron ambas las partes gran pena porque no se entendian, +ellos para preguntar á los otros de nuestra patria, y los nuestros +por saber de la suya. E despues que hobieron rescebido colacion +allí en casa del mas viejo, los llevó el mozo á la suya, e fizo otro +tanto, é despues se pusieron en las barcas é se vinieron á la nao, +é yo luego levanté las anclas porque andaba mucho de priesa por +remediar los mantenimientos que se me perdian que yo habia +habido con tanta fatiga, y tambien por remediarme á mí que +habia adolescido por el desvelar de los ojos, que bien quel viage +que yo fuí á descubrir la tierra firme estuviese teinta y tres dias +sin concebir sueño, y estoviese tanto tiempo sin vista, non se me +deñaron los ojos, ni se me rompieron de sangre y con tantos +dolores como agora.</p> + +<p>Esta gente, como ya dije, son todos de muy linda estatura, altos +de cuerpos, é de muy lindos gestos, los cabellos muy largos é +llanos, y traen las cabezas atadas con unos pañuelos labrados, +como ya dije, hermosos, que parecen de lejos de seda y almaizares: +otro traen ceñido mas largo que se cobijan con él en lugar de +pañetes, ansi hombres como mugeres. La color de esta gente es +mas blanca que otra que haya visto en las Indias; todos traían al +pescuezo y á los brazos algo á la guisa de estas tierras, y muchos +traían piezas de oro bajo colgado al pescuezo. Las canoas de +ellos son muy grandes y de mejor hechura que no son estas otras, +y mas livianas, y en el medio de cada una tienen un apartamiento +como cámara en que ví que andaban los principales con sus +mugeres. Llamé allí á este lugar Jardines, porque así conforman +por el nombre. Procuré mucho de saber donde cogian aquel oro, +y todos me aseñalaban una tierra frontera dellos al Poniente, que +era muy alta, mas no lejos; mas todos me decian que no fuese +allá porque allí comian los hombres, y entendí entonces que decian +que eran hombres caribales, é que serian como los otros, y despues +he pensado que podria ser que lo decian porque allí habria animalias. +Tambien les pregunté adonde cogian las perlas, y me +señalaron tambien que al Poniente, y al Norte detrás de esta +tierra donde estaban. Dejélo de probar por esto de los mantenimientos, +y del mal de mis ojos, y por una nao grande que traigo +que no es para semejante hecho.</p> + +<p>Y como el tiempo fue breve se pasó todo en preguntas, y se +volvieron á los navíos, que seria hora de visperas, como ya dije, y +luego levanté las anclas y navegué al Poniente; y asimesmo el dia +siguiente fasta que me fallé que no habia si non tres brazas de +fondo, con creencia que todavía esta seria isla, y que yo podria +salir al Norte; y así visto envié una carabela sotil adelante á ver +si habia salida ó si estaba cerrado, y ansi anduvo mucho camino +fasta un golfo muy grande en el cual parecia que habia otros +cuatro medianos, y del uno salia un rio grandísimo: fallaron +siempre cinco brazas de fondo y el agua muy dulce, en tanta +cantidad que yo jamas bebíla pareja della. Fuí yo muy descontento +della cuando ví que no podia salir al Norte ni podia andar +ya al Austro ni al Poniente porque yo estaba cercado por todas +partes de la tierra, y así levanté las anclas, y torne atrás para salir +al Norte por la boca que yo arriba dije, y no pude volver por la +poblacion adonde yo habia estado, por causa de las corrientes que +me habian desviado della, y siempre en todo cabo hallaba el agua +dulce y clara, y que me llevaba al Oriente muy recio fácia las dos +bocas que arriba dije, y entonces conjeturé que los hilos de la +corriente, y aquellas lomas que salian y entraban en estas bocas +con aquel rugir tan fuerte que era pelea del agua dulce con la +salada. La dulce empujaba á la otra porque no entrase, y la +salada porque la otra no saliese; y conjeturé que allí donde son +estas dos bocas que algun tiempo seria tierra continua á la Isla de +la Trinidad con la tierra de Gracia, como podrán ver vuestras +Altezas por la pintura de lo que con esta les envio. Salí yo por +esta boca del Norte y hallé quel agua dulce siempre vencia, y +cuando pasé, que fue con fuerza de viento, estando en una de +aquellas lomas, hallé en aquellos hilos de la parte de dentro el +agua dulce, y de fuera salada.</p> + +<p>Cuando yo navegué de España á las Indias fallo luego en +pasando cien leguas á Poniente de los Azores grandísimo mudamiento +en el cielo é en las estrellas, y en la temperancia del aire, +y en las aguas de la mar, y en esto he tenido mucha diligencia en +la experiencia.</p> + +<p>Fallo que de Septentrion en Austro, pasando las dichas cien leguas +de las dichas islas, que luego en las agujas de marear, que +fasta entonces nordesteaban, noruestean una cuarta de viento todo +entero, y esto es en allegando allí á aquella línea, como quien +traspone una cuesta, asimesmo fallo la mar toda llena de yerba de +una calidad que parece ramitos de pino y muy cargada de fruta +como de lantisco, y es tan espesa que al primer viage pensé que +era bajo, y que daria en seco con los navíos, y hasta llegar con esta +raya no se falla un solo ramito: fallo tambien en llegando allí la +mar muy suave y llana, y bien que vente recio nunca se levanta. +Asimismo hallo dentro de la dicha raya hácia Poniente la temperancia +del cielo muy suave, y no discrepa de la cantidad quier +sea invierno, quier sea en verano. Cuando allí estoy hallo que la +estrella del Norte escribe un círculo el cualo tiene en el diámetro +cinco grados, y estando las guardas en el brazo derecho estonces +está la estrella en el mas bajo, y se vá alzando fasta que llega al +brazo izquierdo, y estonces está cinco grados, y de allí se vá +abajando fasta llegar á volver otra vez al brazo derecho.</p> + +<p>Yo allegué agora de España á la Isla de la Madera, y de allí á +Canaria, y dende á las Islas de Cabo Verde, de adonde cometí el +viage para navegar al Austro fasta debajo la linea equinocial, como +ya dije: allegado á estar en derecho con el paralelo que pasa por +la Sierra Leoa en Guinea, fallo tan grande ardor, y los rayos del +sol tan calientes que pensaba de quemar, y bien que lloviese y el +cielo fuese muy turbado siempre yo estaba en esta fatiga, fasta +que nuestro Señor proveyó de buen viento y á mi puso en voluntad +que yo navegase al Occidente con este esfuerzo, que en llegando á +la raya de que yo dije que allí fallaria mudamiento en la temperancia. +Despues que yo emparejé á estar en derecho de esta raya luego +fallé la temperancia del cielo muy suave, y cuanto mas andaba +adelante mas multiplicaba; mas no hallé conforme á esto las +estrellas.</p> + +<p>Fallé allí que en anocheciendo tenia yo la estrella del Norte alta +cinco grados, y estonces las guardas estaban encima de la cabeza, +y despues á la media noche fallaba la estrella alta diez grados, y +en amaneciendo que las guardas estaban en los pies quince.</p> + +<p>La suavelidad de la mar fallé conforme, mas no en la yerba: en +esto de la estrella del Norte tomé grande admiracion, y por esto +muchas noches con mucha diligencia tornaba yo á repricar la vista +della con el cuadrante, y siempre fallé que caía el plomo y hilo á +un punto.</p> + +<p>Por cosa nueva tengo yo esto, y podrá ser que será tenida que +en poco espacio haga tanta diferencia el cielo.</p> + +<p>Yo siempre lei que el mundo, tierra é agua era esférico é las +autoridades y esperiencias que Tolomeo y todos los otros escribieron +de este sitio, daban é amostraban para ello así por eclipses +de la luna y otras demostraciones que hacen de Oriente fasta +Occidente, como de la elevacion del polo de Septentrion en Austro. +Agora ví tanta disformidad, como ya dije, y por esto me puse á +tener esto del mundo, y fallé que no era redondo en la forma que +escriben; salvo que es de la forma de una pera que sea toda muy +redonda, salvo allí donde tiene el pezon que allí tiene mas alto, ó +como quien tiene una pelota muy redonda, y en un lugar della +fuese como una teta de muger allí puesta, y que esta parte deste +pezon sea la mas alta é mas propincua al cielo, y sea debajo la línea +equinocial, y en esta mar Océana en fin del Oriente: llamo yo fin +de Oriente, adonde acaba toda la tierra é islas, é para esto allego +todas las razones sobre-escriptas de la raya que pasa al Occidente +delas islas de los Azores cien leguas de Septentrion en Austro, +que en pasando de allí al Poniente ya van los navíos alzándose +hácia el cielo suavemente, y entonces se goza de mas suave temperancia +y se muda el aguja del marear por causa de la suavidad +desa cuarta de viento, y cuanto mas va adelante é alzándose mas +noruestea, y esta altura causa el desvariar del circulo que escribe +la estrella del Norte con las guardas, y cuanto mas pasare junto +con la línea equinocial, mas se subirán en alto, y mas diferencia +habrá en las dichas estrellas, y en los circulos dellas. Y Tolomeo +y los otros sabios que escribieron de este mundo, creyeron que era +esférico, creyendo queste hemisferio que fuese redondo como aquel +de allá donde ellos estaban, el cual tiene el centro en la Isla de +Arin, qués debajo la linea equinocial entre el sino Arabico y aquel +de Persia, y el círculo pasa sobre el Cabo de S. Vicente en Portugal +por el Poniente, y pasa en Oriente por Cangara y por las +Seras, en el cual hemisferio no hago yo que hay ninguna dificultad, +salvo que sea esférico redondo como ellos dicen: mas este otro +digo que es como sería la mitad de la pera bien redonda, la cual +toviese el pezon alto como y dije, ó como una teta de muger en +una pelota redonda, así que desta media parte non hobo noticia +Tolomeo ni los otros que escribieron del mundo por ser muy +ignoto; solamente hicieron raiz sobre el hemisferio, adonde ellos +estaban ques redondo esférico, como arriba dije. Y agora que +vuestras Altezas lo han mandado navegar y buscar y descobrir, se +amuestra evidentísimo, porque estando yo en este viage al Septentrion +veinte grados de la línea equinocial, allí era en derecho de +Hargin, é de aquellas tierras: é allí es la gente negra é la tierra +muy quemada, y despues que fuí á las Islas de Cabo Verde, allí en +aquellas tierras es la gente mucho mas negra, y cuanto mas bajo +se van al Austro tanto mas llegan al extremo, en manera que allí +en derecho donde yo estaba, qués la Sierra Leoa, adonde se me +alzaba la estrella del Norte en anocheciendo cinco grados, allí es +la gente negra en extrema cantidad, y despues que de allí navegué +al Occidente tan extremos calores; y pasada la raya de que yo +dije fallé multiplicar la temperancia, andando en tanta cantidad +que cuando yo llegué á la isla de la Trinidad, adonde la estrella +del Norte en anocheciendo tambien se me alzaba cinco grados, allí +y en la tierra de Gracia hallé temperancia suavísima, y las tierras +y árboles muy verdes, y tan hermosos como en Abril en las huertas +de Valencia; y la gente de allí de muy linda estatura, y blancos +mas que otros que haya visto en las Indias, é los cabellos muy largos +é llanos, é gente mas astuta é de mayor ingenio, é no cobardes. +Entonces era el sol en Virgen encima de nuestras cabezas é suyas, +ansí que todo esto procede por la suavísima temperancia que allí +es, la cual procede por estar mas alto en el mundo mas cerca del +aire que cuento; y así me afirmo quel mundo no es esférico, salvo +que tiene esta diferencia que ya dije: la cual es en este hemisferio +adonde caen las Indias é la mar Oceana, y el extremo dello es debajo +la línea equinocial, y ayuda mucho á esto que sea ansí, porque +el sol cuando nuestro Señor lo hizo fue en el primer punto de +Oriente, ó la primera luz fue aquí en Oriente, allí donde es el extremo +de la altura deste mundo; y bien quel parecer de Aristotel +fuese que el Polo antártico ó la tierra ques debajo dél sea la mas +alta parte en el mundo, y mas propincua al cielo, otros sabios le +impugnan diciendo que es esta ques debajo del ártico, por las +cuales razones parece que entendian que una parte deste mundo +debia de ser mas propincua y noble al cielo que otra, y no cayeron +en esto que sea debajo del equinocial por la forma que yo dije, y +no es maravilla porque deste hemisferio non se hobiese noticia +cierta, salvo muy liviana y por argumento, porque nadie nunca lo +ha andado ni enviado á buscar, hasta agora que vuestras Altezas +le mandaron explorar é descubrir la mar y la tierra.</p> + +<p>Fallo que de allí de estas dos bocas, las cuales como yo dije estan +frontero por línea de Septentrion en Austro, que haya de la +una á la otra veinte y seis leguas, y no pudo haber en ello yerro +porque se midieron con cuadrante, y destas dos bocas de accidente +fasta el golfo que yo dije, al cual llamé de las Perlas, que son +sesenta é ocho leguas de cuatro millas dada una como acostumbramos +en la mar, y que de allá de este golfo corre de contino el +agua muy fuerte hácia el oriente; y que por esto tienen aquel +combate estas dos bocas con la salada. En esta boca de Austro +á que yo llamé de la Sierpe, fallé en anocheciendo que yo tenia la +estrella del Norte alta cuasi cinco grados, y en aquella del otra Septentrion, +á que yo llamé del Drago, eran cuasi siete, y fallo queldicho +Golfo de las Perlas está occidentalal Occidente de el <a class="lacuna" href="#Footnote_179">[179]</a> de +Tolomeo cuasi tres mil é novecientas millas, que son cuasi setenta +grados equinociales, contando por cada uno cincuenta y seis millas +é dos tercios.</p> + +<p>La Sacra Escriptura testifica que nuestro Señor hizo al Paraiso +terrenal, y en él puso el Arbol de la vida, y del sale una fuente de +donde resultan en este mundo cuatro rios principales: Ganges en +India, Tigris y Eufrates en <a class="lacuna" href="#Footnote_180">[180]</a> los cuales apartan la sierra y +hacen la Mesopotamia y van à tener en Persia, y el Nilo que nace +en Etiopia y va en la mar en Alejandría.</p> + +<p>Yo no hallo ni jamas he hallado escriptura de Latinos ni de +Griegos que certificadamente diga el sitio en este mundo del +Paraiso terrenal, ni visto en ningun mapamundo, salvo, situado +con autoridad de argumento. Algunos le ponian allí donde son +las fuentes del Nilo en Etiopia; mas otros anduvieron todas estas +tierras y no hallaron conformidad dello en la temperancia del +cielo, en la altura hácia el cielo, porque se pudiese comprehender +que el era allí, ni que las aguas del diluvio hobiesen llegado allí, +las cuales subieron encima, &c. Algunos gentiles quisieron decir +por argumentos, que el era en las islas Fortunatas que son las +Canarias, &c.</p> + +<p>S. Isidro y Beda y Strabo, y el Maestro de la historia escolástica, +y San Ambrosio, y Scoto, y todos los sanos teólogos conciertan +quel Paraiso terrenal es en el Oriente, &c.</p> + +<p>Ya dije lo que yo hallaba deste hemisferio y de la hechura, y +creo que si yo pasara por debajo de la línea equinocial que en +llegando allí en esto mas alto que fallara muy mayor temperancia, +y diversidad en las estrellas y en las aguas; no porque yo crea que +allí donde es el altura del extremo sea navegable ni agua, ni que +se pueda subir allá, porque creo que allí es el Paraiso terrenal +adonde no puede llegar nadie, salvo por voluntad Divina; y creo +que esta tierra que agora mandaron descubrir vuestras Altezas +sea grandísima y haya otras muchas en el Austro de que jamas se +hobo noticia.</p> + +<p>Yo no tomo quel Paraise terrenal sea en forma de montaña aspera +como el escrebir dello nos amuestra, salvo quel sea en el +colmo allí donde dije la figura del pezon de la pera, y que poco á +poco andando hácía allí desde muy lejos se va subiendo á él; y +creo que nadie no podria llegar al colmo como yo dije, y creo que +pueda salir de allí esa agua, bien que sea lejos y venga á parar +allí donde yo vengo, y faga este lago. Grandes indicios son estos +del Paraiso terrenal, porquel sitio es conforme á la opinion de +estos santos é sanos teólogos, y asimismo las señales son muy +conformes, que yo jamas leí ni oí que tanta cantidad de agua dulce +fuese así adentro é vecina con la salada; y en ello ayuda asimismo +la suavísima temperancia, y si de allí del Paraiso no sale, parece aun +mayor maravilla, porque no creo que se sepa en el mundo de rio +tan grande y tan fondo.</p> + +<p>Despues que yo salí de la boca del Dragon, ques la una de las +dos aquella del Septentrion, á la cual así puse nombre, el dia +siguiente, que fue dia de Nuestra Señora de Agosto, fallé que +corria tanto la mar al Poniente, que despues de hora de misa que +entré en camino, anduve fasta hora de completas sesenta y cinco +leguas de cuatro millas cada una, y el viento no era demasiado, salvo +muy suave; y esto ayuda el cognoscimiento que de allí yendo al +Austro se va mas alto, y andando hácia el Septentrion, como entonces, +se va descendiendo.</p> + +<p>Muy conoscido tengo que las aguas de la mar llevan su curso +de Oriente á Occidente con los cielos, y que allí en esta comarca +cuando pasan llevan mas veloce camino, y por esto han comido +tanta parte de la tierra, porque por eso son acá tantas islas, y +ellas mismas hacen desto testimonio, porque todas á una mano +son largas de Poniente á Levante, y Norueste é Sueste ques un +poco mas alto é bajo, y angostas de Norte á Sur, y Nordeste +Sudueste, que son en contrario de los otros dichos vientos, y aquí +en ellas todas nascen cosas preciosas por la suave temperancia +que les procede del cielo por estar hácia el mas alto del mundo. +Verdad es que parece en algunos lugares que las aguas no hagan +este curso; mas esto no es, salvo particularmente en algunos +lugares donde alguna tierra le está al encuentro, y hace parecer +que andan diversos caminos.</p> + +<p>Plinio escribe que la mar é la tierra hace todo una esfera, y +pone questa mar Oceana sea la mayor cantidad del agua, y está +hácia el cielo, y que la tierra sea debajo y que le sostenga, y +mezclado es uno con otro como el amago de la nuez con una tela +gorda que va abrazado en ello. El Maestro de la Historia escolástica +sobre el Genesis dice que las aguas son muy pocas, que +bien que cuando fueron criadas que cobijasen toda la tierra que +entonces eran vaporables en manera de niebla, y que despues que +fueron sólidas é juntadas que ocuparon muy poco lugar, y en +esto concierta Nicolao de Lira. El Aristotel dice que este mundo +es pequeño y es el agua muy poca, y que facilmente se puede +pasar de España á las Indias, y esto confirma el Avenruyz y le +alega el Cardenal Pedro de Aliaco, autorizando este decir y aquel +de Séneca, el cual conforma con estos diciendo que Aristoteles +pudo saber muchos secretos del mundo á causa de Alejandro +Magno, y Séneca á causa de Cesar Nero y Plinio por respecto de +los Romanos, los cuales todos gastaron dineros é gente, y pusieron +mucha diligencia en saber los secretos del mundo y darlos á entender +á los pueblos; el cual Cardenal da á estos grande autoridad +mas que á Tolomeo ni á otros Griegos ni Arabes, y á confirmacion +de decir quel agua sea poca y quel cubierto del mundo +della sea poco, al respecto de lo que se decia por autoridad de +Tolomeo y de sus secuaces: á esto trae una autoridad de Esdras +del 3ᵒ. libro suyo, adonde dice que de siete partes del mundo las +seis son descubiertas y la una es cubierta de agua, la cual autoridad +es aprobada por Santos, los cuales dan autoridad al 3ᵒ. é 4ᵒ. +libro de Esdras, ansí como es S. Agustin é S. Ambrosio en su +<i>exameron</i>, adonde alega allí vendrá mi hijo Jesus é morira mi hijo +Cristo, y dicen que Esdrás fue Profeta, y asimismo Zacarías, padre +de S. Juan, y el braso Simon; las cuales autoridades tambien alega +Francisco de Mairones: en cuanto en esto del enjuto de la tierra +mucho se ha experimentado ques mucho mas de lo quel vulgo +crea; y no es maravilla, porque andando mas mas se sabe.</p> + +<p>Torno á mi propósito de la tierra de Gracia y rio y lago que +allí fallé, atan grande que mas se le puede llamar mar que lago, +porque <i>lago</i> es lugar de agua, y en seyendo grande se dice <i>mar</i>, +como se dijo á la mar de Galilea y al mar Muerto, y digo que sino +procede del Paraiso terrenal que viene este rio y procede de tierra +infinita, pues al Austro, de la cual fasta agora no se ha habido +noticia, mas yo muy asentado tengo en el anima que allí adonde +dije es el Paraiso terrenal, y descanso sobre las razones y autoridades +sobre-escriptas.</p> + +<p>Plega á nuestro Señor de dar mucha vida y salud y descanso á +vuestras Altezas para que puedan proseguir esta tan noble empresa, +en la cual me parece que rescibe nuestro Señor mucho servicio, +y la España crece de mucha grandeza, y todos los Cristianos +mucha consolacion y placer, porque aquí se divulgará el nombre +de nuestro Señor; y en todas las tierras adonde los navíos de +vuestras Altezas van, y en todo cabo mando plantar una alta cruz, +y á toda la gente que hallo notifico el estado de vuestras Altezas +y como su asiento es en España, y les digo de nuestra santa fe +todo lo que yo puedo, y de la creencia de la Santa Madre Iglesia, +la cual tiene sus miembros en todo el mundo, y les digo la policía +y nobleza de todos los Cristianos, y la fe que en la Santa Trinidad +tienen; y plega á nuestro Señor de tirar de memoria á las personas +que han impugnado y impugnan tan excelente empresa, y impiden +y impidieron porque no vaya adelante, sin considerar cuanta honra +y grandeza es del Real Estado da vuestras Altezas en todo el +mundo; no saben que entreponer á maldecir de esto, salvo que se +hace gasto en ello, y porque luego no enviaron los navíos cargados +de oro sin considerar la brevedad del tiempo y tantos inconvenientes +como acá se han habido, y no considerar que en Castilla en +casa de vuestras Altezas salen cada año personas que por su +merecimiento ganaron en ella mas de renta cada uno dellos mas +de lo ques necesario que se gaste en esto; ansimesmo sin considerar +que ningunos Príncipes de España jamas ganaron tierra +alguna fuera della, salvo agora que vuestras Altezas tienen acá +otro mundo, de adonde puede ser tan acrescentada nuestra santa +fe, y de donde se podrán sacar tantos provechos, que bien que no +se hayan enviado los navíos cargados de oro, se han enviado suficientes +muestras dello y de otras cosas de valor, por donde se +puede juzgar que en breve tiempo se podrá haber mucho provecho, +y sin mirar el gran corazon de los Príncipes de Portugal que há +tanto tiempo que prosiguen la impresa de Guinea, y prosiguen +aquella de Africa, adonde han gastado la mitad de la gente de su +Reino, y agora está el Rey mas determinado á ello que nunca. +Nuestro Señor provea en esto como yo dije, y les ponga en +memoria de considerar de todo esto que va escripto, que no es de +mil partes la una de lo que yo podria escrebir de cosas de Príncipes +que se ocuparon á saber y conquistar y sostener.</p> + +<p>Todo esto dije, y no porque crea que la voluntad de vuestras +Altezas sea salvo proseguir en ello en cuanto vivan, y tengo por +muy firme lo que me respondió vuestras Altezas una vez que por +palabra le decir desto, no porque yo hobiese visto mudamiento +ninguno en vuestras Altezas salvo por temor de lo que yo oia +destos que yo digo, y tanto da una gotera de agua en una piedra +que le hace un agujero; y vuestras Altezas me respondió con aquel +corazon que se sabe en todo el mundo que tienen, y me dijo que +no curase de nada de eso, porque su voluntad era de proseguir esta +empresa y sostenerla, aunque no fuese sino piedras y peñas, y quel +gasto que en ello se hacia que lo tenia en nada, que en otras cosas +no tan grandes gastaban mucho mas, y que lo tenian todo por muy +bien gastado lo del pasado y lo que se gastase en adelante, porque +creian que nuestra santa fe sería acrecentada y su Real Señorío +ensanchado, y que no eran amigos de su Real Estado aquellos que +les maldecian de esta empresa: y agora entre tanto que vengan á +noticia desto destas tierras que agora nuevamente he descubierto, +en que tengo asentado en el ánima que allí es el Paraiso terrenal, +irá el Adelantado con tres navíos bien ataviados para ello á ver mas +adelante, y descubrirán todo lo que pudieren hacia aquellas partes. +Entretanto yo enviaré á vuestras Altezas esta escriptura y la pintura +de la tierra, y acordarán lo que en ello se deba facer, y me +enviarán á mandar, y se cumplirá con ayuda de la Santa Trinidad +con toda diligencia en manera que vuestras Altezas sean servidos +y hayan placer. Deo gracias.</p> + +</div> + +<div class="footnotes"> + +<h3>FOOTNOTES:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_154" href="#FNanchor_154" class="label">[154]</a> These were Fray Juan Perez de Marchena, a Franciscan, keeper of +the Convent de la Rabida, and Fray Diejo de Deza, a Dominican, afterwards +Archbishop of Seville.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_155" href="#FNanchor_155" class="label">[155]</a> A similar gap in the original.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_156" href="#FNanchor_156" class="label">[156]</a> He did not discover terra firma in the second voyage as he here says, +but imagined the island of Cuba to be terra firma, because he was unable +to explore it fully; nor was it ascertained to be an island till two years +after his death, when, by order of the king, the Comendador Mayor +Nicolas Ovando gave Sebastian de Ocampo a commission to circumnavigate +the island, and he explored the whole coast in the year 1508. +(See Herrera, Dec. i, lib. 7, cap. i.) Amongst the number of these +islands, Columbus doubtless included many of those to the south of +Cuba, lying in the part which he called the <i>Queen’s Gardens</i>.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_157" href="#FNanchor_157" class="label">[157]</a> Ceylon.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_158" href="#FNanchor_158" class="label">[158]</a> These examples quoted by the admiral from ancient history, are commented +upon very learnedly, and at considerable length, by his historian, +Las Casas, in chapters 128 and 129 of his unpublished history. (Navarrete.)</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_159" href="#FNanchor_159" class="label">[159]</a> Of the year 1498.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_160" href="#FNanchor_160" class="label">[160]</a> Herrera says (Dec. i, lib. 3, cap. 9) that it was a Portuguese squadron; +but Las Casas (cap. 30) distinctly states it to have been French.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_161" href="#FNanchor_161" class="label">[161]</a> Herrera and Don Ferdinand Columbus say that he reached the +island of Puerto Santo on the seventh of June, from which island he +sailed directly for Madeira, and thence to Gomera, which he reached on +the nineteenth, and put to sea again on the twenty-first.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_162" href="#FNanchor_162" class="label">[162]</a> The commanders of the three ships which the admiral despatched to +Española, were Pedro de Arana, native of Cordova, brother to the +mother of Ferdinand Columbus; Alonzo Sanchez de Carabajal, magistrate +of Baeza; and Juan Antonio Columbus, a relative of the admiral; +all of whom were known to and are spoken of by F. Bartolomé de Las +Casas, in chapter 130 of his unpublished history. (Navarrete.)</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_163" href="#FNanchor_163" class="label">[163]</a> This was on the twenty-seventh of June. He anchored in the +island of Sal, and on the thirtieth proceeded to the island of Santiago, +from whence he put to sea again on the fourth of July.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_164" href="#FNanchor_164" class="label">[164]</a> The islands took the name from the Cape itself, not from the verdure +which had caused that name to be given to the Cape. The Cape +Verde was discovered by Diniz Dias about 1445: the Cape Verde +Islands were discovered in 1460 by Diogo Gomez, as shown for the first +time in my <i>Prince Henry the Navigator</i>, pp. 297-298, and not by Antonio +de Nolle in 1457, as incorrectly stated by Cadamosto.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_165" href="#FNanchor_165" class="label">[165]</a> It was first seen by a mariner of Huelva, a servant of the admiral, +named Alonzo Perez. (Navarrete.)</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_166" href="#FNanchor_166" class="label">[166]</a> It is now called Cape Galeota, and is the most south-eastern point +of the island of Trinidad.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_167" href="#FNanchor_167" class="label">[167]</a> In all probability deer.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_168" href="#FNanchor_168" class="label">[168]</a> Coast of Paria.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_169" href="#FNanchor_169" class="label">[169]</a> Produced by the confluence of the Oronoco with the sea. See +Rapin, <i>Hist. Phil.</i>, vol. iv, p. 272.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_170" href="#FNanchor_170" class="label">[170]</a> Point Peña Blanca.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_171" href="#FNanchor_171" class="label">[171]</a> Point Peña.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_172" href="#FNanchor_172" class="label">[172]</a> Serpent’s Mouth.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_173" href="#FNanchor_173" class="label">[173]</a> It is now called Point Alcatraz, or Point Pelican.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_174" href="#FNanchor_174" class="label">[174]</a> The stars composing the constellation of Ursa Minor.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_175" href="#FNanchor_175" class="label">[175]</a> A misspelling, not infrequent in those days, for the sacred city +(not island) of Odjein or Ougein in Malwa, whence the Indians reckoned +their first meridian. The change of the name to Arin in Arabic +is thus explained by M. Reinaud in his <i>Mémoire sur l’Inde</i>, p. 373. +The dj of the Indians was sometimes rendered z by the Arabs, and thus +the Arab translators wrote the word Ozein; but as in manuscripts the +vowels were often omitted, the mass of readers to whom the name of +Odjein was indifferent, would pronounce it Azin, and as the copyist +would sometimes forget to insert the point which distinguished a z from +an r, Azin would be read Arin.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_176" href="#FNanchor_176" class="label">[176]</a> Japan and China.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_177" href="#FNanchor_177" class="label">[177]</a> Arguin, off the west coast of Africa.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_178" href="#FNanchor_178" class="label">[178]</a> The innermost gulf within the Gulf of Paria.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_179" href="#FNanchor_179" class="label">[179]</a> A similar gap in the original. In all probability “first meridian” +or some such words, are omitted.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_180" href="#FNanchor_180" class="label">[180]</a> A similar gap in the original, which would seem to want the words +“Asiatic Turkey.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_181" href="#FNanchor_181" class="label">[181]</a> Walafried Strabus, Abbé of Reichenau in Baden.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_182" href="#FNanchor_182" class="label">[182]</a> Petrus Comestor, who wrote the “Historica Scholastica.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_183" href="#FNanchor_183" class="label">[183]</a> The feast of the Assumption.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_184" href="#FNanchor_184" class="label">[184]</a> Probably six <span class="allsmcap">A.M.</span></p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_185" href="#FNanchor_185" class="label">[185]</a> Nine <span class="allsmcap">P.M.</span></p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_186" href="#FNanchor_186" class="label">[186]</a> Averrhóes, an Arabian philosopher of the twelfth century.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_187" href="#FNanchor_187" class="label">[187]</a> This expression is described by the ancient copyist of the letter as +being “badly written”; probably miscopied for “El beato”, “The +blessed.”</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_188" href="#FNanchor_188" class="label">[188]</a> A Scotist of the fourteenth century, surnamed “Doctor illuminatus +et acutus.”</p></div> + +</div> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="english"> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_152">[152]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="LETTER">LETTER</h2> + +<h3 class="hanging"><i>Of the Admiral to the (quondam) nurse⁠<a id="FNanchor_189" href="#Footnote_189" class="fnanchor">[189]</a> of the Prince John, +written near the end of the year 1500.</i></h3> + +<p>Most virtuous lady: Although it is a novelty for me to complain +of the ill-usage of the world, it is, nevertheless, no +novelty for the world to practise ill-usage. Innumerable are +the contests which I have had with it, and I have resisted all +its attacks until now, when I find, that neither strength nor +prudence is of any avail to me: it has cruelly reduced me to +the lowest ebb. Hope in Him who created us all is my +support: His assistance I have always found near at hand. +On one occasion, not long since, when I was extremely +depressed, He raised me with His Divine arm, saying: +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_153">[153]</span>“O man of little faith, arise, it is I, be not afraid.”⁠<a id="FNanchor_190" href="#Footnote_190" class="fnanchor">[190]</a> I offered +myself with such earnest devotion to the service of these +princes, and I have served them with a fidelity hitherto unequalled +and unheard of. God made me the messenger of +the new heaven and the new earth, of which He spoke in +the Apocalypse by St. John, after having spoken of it by the +mouth of Isaiah; and He showed me the spot where to find +it. All proved incredulous; except the Queen my mistress, +to whom the Lord gave the spirit of intelligence and great +courage, and made her the heiress of all, as a dear and well +beloved daughter. I went to take possession of it in her +royal name. All sought to cover the ignorance in which +they were sunk, by dwelling on the inconveniences and +expense of the proposed enterprise. Her Highness held +the contrary opinion, and supported it with all her power. +Seven years passed away in deliberations, and nine have +been spent in accomplishing things truly memorable, and +worthy of being preserved in the history of man. Never had +such a thing been conceived.</p> + +<p>I have now reached that point, that there is no man so vile +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_154">[154]</span>but thinks it his right to insult me. The day will come +when the world will reckon it a virtue to him who has not +given his consent to their abuse. If I had plundered the +Indies, even to the country where is the fabled altar of St. +Peter’s, and had given them all to the Moors, they could +not have shown towards me more bitter enmity than they +have done in Spain. Who would believe such things of a +country where there has always been so much nobility? I +should much like to clear myself of this affair, if only it were +consistent with etiquette to do so, face to face with my +queen. The support which I have found in our Lord, and in +her Highness, made me persevere, and, in order to relieve +somewhat the griefs which death had occasioned her,⁠<a id="FNanchor_191" href="#Footnote_191" class="fnanchor">[191]</a> I +undertook another voyage to the new heavens and new +earth, which had been hitherto concealed; and if these are +not appreciated in Spain, like the other parts of the Indies, +it is not at all wonderful, since it is to my labours that they +are indebted for them. The Holy Spirit encompassed St. +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_155">[155]</span>Peter, and the rest of the twelve, who all had conflicts here +below; they wrought many works, they suffered great +fatigues, but at last they obtained the victory. I believed +that this voyage to Paria would produce a certain amount +of contentment, because of the pearls and the discovery of +gold in the island of Española. I left orders for the people +to fish for pearls, and collect them together, and made an +agreement with them that I should return for them; and I +was given to understand that the supply would be abundant.</p> + +<p>If I have not written respecting this to their Highnesses, +it is because I wished first to render an equally favourable +account of the gold; but it has happened with this as with +many other things; I should not have lost them, and with +them my honour, if I had been only occupied about my own +private interests, and had suffered Española to be lost, or +even if they had respected my privileges and the treaties. I +say the same with regard to the gold which I had then collected, +and which I have brought in safety, by Divine grace, +after so much loss of life and such excessive fatigues.</p> + +<p>In the voyage which I made by way of Paria, I found +nearly half the colonists of Española in a state of revolt, and +they have made war upon me until now as if I had been a +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_156">[156]</span>Moor;⁠<a id="FNanchor_192" href="#Footnote_192" class="fnanchor">[192]</a> while on the other side, I had to contend with the no +less cruel Indians. Then arrived Hojeda,⁠<a id="FNanchor_193" href="#Footnote_193" class="fnanchor">[193]</a> and he attempted +to put the seal to all these disorders; he said that their +Highnesses had sent him, with promises of presents, of immunities, +and treaties; he collected a numerous band, for in +the whole island of Española, there were few men who were +not vagabonds, and there were none who had either wife or +children. This Hojeda troubled me much, but he was +obliged to retreat, and at his departure he said, that he would +return with more ships and men, and reported also, that he +had left the queen at the point of death.⁠<a id="FNanchor_194" href="#Footnote_194" class="fnanchor">[194]</a> In the meanwhile, +Vincent Yañez came with four caravels; and there were +some tumults and suspicions, but no further evil. The +Indians reported many other caravels to the cannibals, and +in Paria; and afterwards spread the news of the arrival of +six other caravels, commanded by a brother of the alcalde; +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_157">[157]</span>but this was from pure malice, and at a time when at +length there remained but little hope that their Highnesses +would send any more ships to the Indies, and +we no longer expected them, and when it was said openly +that her Highness (the queen) was dead. At this time, +one Adrian attempted a new revolt, as he had done before;⁠<a id="FNanchor_195" href="#Footnote_195" class="fnanchor">[195]</a> +but our Lord did not permit his evil designs to succeed. I +had determined not to inflict punishment on any person, +but his ingratitude obliged me, however regretfully, to abandon +this resolution, I should not have acted otherwise +with my own brother, if he had sought to assassinate me, +and to rob me of the lordship which my sovereigns had +given to my keeping. This Adrian, as is now evident, had +sent Don Ferdinand to Xaragua, to assemble some of his +partisans, and had some discussions with the alcalde, which +ended in violence, but all without any good. The alcalde +seized him and a part of his band; and in fact, executed +justice without my having ordered it. While they were in +prison, they were expecting a caravel, in which they hoped +to embark; but the news which I told them of what had +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_158">[158]</span>happened to Hojeda, deprived them of the hope that he +would arrive in this ship. It is now six months that I have +been ready to leave, to bring to their Highnesses the good +news of the gold, and to give up the government of these +dissolute people, who fear neither God nor their king nor +queen, but are full of imbecility and malice. I should have +been able to pay every one with six hundred thousand +maravedis, and for this purpose there were four millions +and more of the tithes, without reckoning the third part of +the gold.</p> + +<p>Before my departure (from Spain) I have often entreated +their Highnesses to send to these parts, at my expense, some +one charged to administer justice; and since, when I found +the alcalde in a state of revolt, I have besought them afresh +to send at least one of their servants with letters, because I +myself have had so strange a character given to me, that if +I were to build churches or hospitals, they would call them +caves for robbers. Their Highnesses provided for this at +last, but in a manner quite unequal to the urgency of the +circumstances; however, let that point rest, since such is +their good pleasure. I remained two years in Spain without +being able to obtain anything for myself, or those who came +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_159">[159]</span>with me,⁠<a id="FNanchor_196" href="#Footnote_196" class="fnanchor">[196]</a> but this man has gained for himself a full purse: +God knows if all will be employed for his service. Already, +to begin with, there is a revenue for twenty years, which is, +according to man’s calculation, an age; and they gather gold +in such abundance, that there are people who, in four hours, +have found the equivalent of five marks; but I will speak on +this subject more fully hereafter. If their Highnesses would +condescend to silence the popular rumours, which have gained +credence among those who know what fatigues I have sustained, +it would be a real charity; for calumny has done me +more injury than the services which I have rendered to their +Highnesses, and the care with which I have preserved their +property and their government, have done me good. By +their so doing, I should be re-established in reputation, and +spoken of throughout the universe: for the matter is of a +kind which must every day be more talked of and appreciated.</p> + +<p>In the meanwhile, the commander Bobadilla arrived at St. +Domingo,⁠<a id="FNanchor_197" href="#Footnote_197" class="fnanchor">[197]</a> at which time I was at La Vega, and the Adelantado +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_160">[160]</span>at Xaragua, where this Adrian had made his attempt; +but by that time everything was quiet, the land was +thriving, and the people at peace. The day after his arrival +he declared himself governor, created magistrates, ordered +executions, published immunities from the collection of gold +and from the paying of tithes; and, in fine, announced a +general franchise for twenty years, which is, as I have said, +the calculation of an age. He also gave out that he was +going to pay everyone, although they had not even done the +service which was due up to that day; and he further proclaimed +that he had to send me back loaded with chains, and +my brother also (this he has done);⁠<a id="FNanchor_198" href="#Footnote_198" class="fnanchor">[198]</a> and that neither I, nor +any of my family, should ever return to these lands: and, in +addition, he made innumerable unjust and disgraceful +charges against me. All this took place, as I have said, on +the very day after his arrival, at which time I was absent at +a distance, thinking neither of him nor of his coming. Some +letters of their Highnesses, of which he brought a considerable +number signed in blank, he filled up with exaggerated +language, and sent round to the alcalde and his myrmidons, +accompanying them with compliments and flattery. To me +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_161">[161]</span>he never sent either a letter or a messenger, nor has he done +so to this day. Reflect upon this, madam! what could any +man in my situation think? Could it be that honour and +favour were to be conferred on him who had lent himself to +plundering their Highnesses of their sovereignty, and who +had done so much injury and mischief?—Could it be that he +who had defended and preserved their cause through so +many dangers, was to be dragged through the mire? When +I heard this, I thought he must be like Hojeda, or one of the +other rebels; but I held my peace, when I learned for certain, +from the friars, that he had been sent by their Highnesses. +I wrote to him, to salute him on his arrival, to let +him know that I was ready to set out to go to court, and +that I had put up to sale all that I possessed. I entreated +him not to be in haste on the subject of the grants; and I +assured him that I would shortly yield this, and everything +else connected with the government, implicitly into his +charge. I wrote the same thing to the ecclesiastics, but I +received no answer either from the one or the other. On +the contrary, he took a hostile position, and obliged those +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_162">[162]</span>who went to his residence to acknowledge him for governor, +as I have been told, for twenty years. As soon as I knew +what he had done with regard to the immunities, I proposed +to repair this great mistake, and I thought he would himself +be glad of it; for, without any reason or necessity, he had +bestowed upon vagabonds privileges of such importance, that +they would have been excessive even for men with wives and +children. I published verbally, and in writing, that he +could not make use of his credentials, because mine were of +higher authority, and I showed the grants brought by Juan +Aguado. All this I did for the purpose of gaining time, +that their Highnesses might be informed as to the state of +the country, and that they might have opportunity to give +fresh orders upon everything touching their interests. It is +useless to publish such grants in the Indies,—all is in favour +of the settlers who have taken up their abode there, because +the best lands are given up to them; and, at a low estimate, +they are worth two hundred thousand maravedis a head for +the four years, at which they are taken, without a single +stroke of the mattock. I should not say so much if these +people were married men; but there are not six among them +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_163">[163]</span>all, whose purpose is not to amass all they can, and then +decamp with it. It would be well that people should come +from Spain, but that only such should be sent as are well +known, so that the country may be peopled with honest +men. I had agreed with these settlers that they should +pay the third of the gold and of the tithes; and this +they not only assented to, but were very grateful to their +Highnesses. I reproached them when I heard they had +afterwards refused it; they expected, however, to deal +with me on the same terms as with the commander, but +I would not consent to it. He meanwhile irritated them +against me, saying, that I wished to deprive them of that +which their Highnesses had given them; and strove to +make me appear their enemy, in which he succeeded to +the full. He induced them to write to their Highnesses, +that they should send me no more commissioned as governor +(truly I do not desire it any more for myself, or for any who +belong to me, while the people remain unchanged); and to +conciliate them, he ordered inquiries to be made respecting +me with reference to imputed misdeeds, such as were never +invented in hell. But God is above, who with so much +wisdom and power rescued Daniel and the three children, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_164">[164]</span>and who, if he please, can rescue me with a similar manifestation +of his power, and to the advancement of his own cause. +I should have known well enough how to find a remedy for +the evils which I now describe and have been describing as +having happened to me since I came to the Indies, if I had +had the wish or had thought it decent, to busy myself about +my personal interest; but now I find myself undone, because +I have hitherto maintained the justice and augmented +the territorial dominions of their Highnesses. Now that so +much gold is found, these people stop to consider whether +they can obtain the greatest quantity of it by theft, or by +going to the mines. For one woman they give a hundred +castellanos,⁠<a id="FNanchor_199" href="#Footnote_199" class="fnanchor">[199]</a> as for a farm; and this sort of trading is very +common, and there are already a great number of merchants +who go in search of girls; there are at this moment from +nine or ten on sale; they fetch a good price, let their age be +what it will. I assert that when I said that the commander +could not confer immunities, I did what he desired, although +I told him that it was to gain time until their Highnesses +had received information respecting the country, and had +given their orders as to the regulations best calculated to +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_165">[165]</span>advance their interest. I assert that the calumnies of injurious +men have done me more harm, than my services have +done me good: which is a bad example for the present as +well as for the future. I declare solemnly that a great +number of men have been to the Indies, who did not deserve +baptism in the eyes of God or men, and who are now returning +thither. The governor has made every one hostile to +me; and it appears, from the manner of his acting, and the +plans that he has adopted, that he was already my enemy, +and very virulent against me when he arrived; and it is said, +that he has been at great expense to obtain this office: but +I know nothing about the matter except what I have heard. +I never before heard of any one who was commissioned to +make an inquiry, assembling the rebels, and taking, as +evidence against their governor, wretches without faith, and +who are unworthy of unbelief. If their Highnesses would +cause a general inquiry to be made throughout the land, I +assure you they would be astonished, that the island has not +been swallowed up. I believe that you will recollect, that +when I was driven by a tempest into the port of Lisbon (having +lost my sails), I was falsely accused of having put in thither +with the intention of giving the Indies to the sovereign of +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_166">[166]</span>that country. Since then, their Highnesses have learned +the contrary, and that it was all malice. Although I am an +ignorant man, I do not imagine that any one supposed me +so stupid as not to be aware, that even if the Indies had belonged +to me, I could not support myself without the assistance +of some prince. In such case where should I find better +support, or more security against expulsion, than in the king +and queen our sovereigns? who, from nothing, have raised +me to so great an elevation, and who are the greatest princes +of the world, on the land and on the sea. These princes +know how I have served them, and they uphold my privileges +and rewards; and if any one violates them, their +Highnesses augment them by ordering great favour to be +shown me, and ordain me many honours, as was shown in +the affair of Juan Aguado. Yes, as I have said, their Highnesses +have received some services from me, and have taken +my sons into their household, which would not have happened +with another prince, because where there is no attachment, +all other considerations prove of little weight. If I have now +spoken severely of a malicious slander, it is against my will, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_167">[167]</span>for it is a subject I would not willingly recall even in my +dreams. The governor Bobadilla has maliciously exhibited +in open day his character and conduct in this affair; but I +will prove without difficulty, that his ignorance, his cowardice, +and his inordinate cupidity, have frustrated all his undertakings. +I have already said that I wrote to him, as well as +to the monks, and I set out almost alone, all our people being +with the Adelantado and elsewhere, to remove suspicion; +when he heard this he seized Don Diego, and sent him on +board a caravel, loaded with irons; on my arrival he did the +same to me; and afterwards to the Adelantado when he +came. I have never spoken with him, and to this day he +has not permitted any one to hold converse with me, and I +solemnly declare that I cannot think for what reason I was +made prisoner. His first care was to take the gold that I +had, and that without measuring or weighing it, although I +was absent; he said he would pay those to whom it was +owing, and if I am to believe what has been reported to me, +he reserved to himself the greater part, and sent for +strangers to make the bargains. I had put aside some +samples of this gold, some as large as a goose’s or a hen’s +egg, and of various sizes, which a few persons had collected +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_168">[168]</span>in a short space of time, that their Highnesses might be +gratified and impressed with the importance of the affair, +when they saw a quantity of large stones full of gold. This +gold was the first that, after he had feathered his own nest +(which he was in great haste to do), his malice suggested to +give away, in order that their Highnesses might have a low +opinion of the whole affair: the gold which required melting, +diminished at the fire, and a chain weighing nearly twenty +marks disappeared altogether. I have been yet more concerned +respecting this matter of the gold than even about +the affair of the pearls, that I have not been able to bring +them to their Highnesses. In every thing that he thought +could add to my annoyance, the governor has always shown +himself ready to bestir himself. Thus, as I have said, with +six hundred thousand maravedis, I should have paid every +one, without injustice to any; and I had more than four +millions of tithes and constabulary dues, without touching +the gold. He made the most absurd gifts, although I believe +he began with himself first; their Highnesses will be +able to ascertain the truth on this subject when they demand +the account to be rendered them, especially if I may assist +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_169">[169]</span>at the examination. He is continually saying, that there is +a considerable sum owing, while it is only what I have already +reported, and even less. I have been wounded extremely +by the thought, that a man should have been sent +out to make inquiry into my conduct, who knew, that if he +sent home a very aggravated account of the result of his investigation, +he would remain at the head of the government. +Would to God, their Highnesses had sent either him or some +other person two years ago, for then I know that I should +have had no cause to fear either scandal or disgrace; they +could not then have taken away my honour, and I could not +have been in the position to have lost it. God is just, and +He will in due time make known by whom and how it has +been done. Let them judge me, as a governor who had +been sent to Sicily or some province or city under regular +government, and where the laws could be executed without +fear of danger to the public weal or subjection to any enormous +wrong. I ought to be judged as a captain sent from +Spain to the Indies, to conquer a nation numerous and warlike, +with customs and religion altogether different to ours; +a people who dwell in the mountains, without regular habitations +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_170">[170]</span>for themselves or for us; and where, by the Divine +will, I have subdued another world to the dominion of the +King and Queen, our sovereigns; in consequence of which, +Spain, that used to be called poor, is now the most wealthy +of kingdoms. I ought to be judged as a captain, who for +so many years has borne arms, never quitting them for an +instant. I ought to be judged by cavaliers who have themselves +won the meed of victory;⁠<a id="FNanchor_200" href="#Footnote_200" class="fnanchor">[200]</a> by knights of the sword +and not of title deeds; as least, so it would have been among +the Greeks and Romans, or any modern nation in which +exists so much nobility as in Spain; for under any other +judgment I receive great injury, because in the Indies there +is neither civil right nor judgment seat.</p> + +<p>Already the road is opened to the gold and pearls, and it +may surely be hoped that precious stones, spices, and a thousand +other things, will also be found. Would to God that +it were as certain that I should suffer no greater wrongs than +I have already experienced, as it is that I would, in the name +of our Lord, again undertake my first voyage; and that I +would undertake to go to Arabia Felix as far as Mecca, as I +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_171">[171]</span>have said in the letter that I sent to their Highnesses by +Antonio de Torres, in answer to the division of the sea and +land between Spain and the Portuguese; and I would go +afterwards to the North Pole, as I have said and given in +writing to the monastery of the Mejorada.</p> + +<p>The tidings of the gold which I said I would give, are, +that on Christmas-day, being greatly afflicted and tormented +by the wicked Spaniards and the Indians, when I was at +the point of leaving all to save my life if possible, our Lord +comforted me miraculously, saying to me, “<i>Take courage, +be not dismayed nor fear, I will provide for all; the seven +years, the term of the gold, are not yet passed; and in this, +as in the rest, I will redress thee.</i>” I learned that same day, +that there were twenty-four leagues of land where they found +mines at every step, which appear now to form but one. +Some of the people collected a hundred and twenty castellanos’ +worth in one day, others ninety; and there have been +those who have gathered the equivalent of nearly two hundred +and fifty castellanos. They consider it a good day’s +work when they collect from fifty to seventy, or even from +twenty to fifty, and many continue searching; the mean day’s +work is from six to twelve, and those who get less are very +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_172">[172]</span>dissatisfied. It appears that these mines, like all others, do +not yield equally every day; the mines are new, and those +who collect their produce inexperienced. According to the +judgment of everybody here, it seems that, if all Spain were +to come over, every individual, however inexpert he might +be, would gain the equivalent of at least one or two castellanos +in a day; and so it is up to the present time. It is +certain that any man who has an Indian to work for him, +collects as much, but the management depends upon the +Spaniard. See, now, what discernment was shown by +Bobadilla when he gave up everything for nothing, and +four millions of tithes without any reason, and even without +being asked to do so, and without first giving notice to their +Highnesses of his intention; and this is not the only evil +which he has caused. I know, assuredly, that the errors +which I may have fallen into, have been committed without +any intention of doing wrong, and I think that their Highnesses +will believe me when I say so; but I know and see +that they show mercy towards those who intentionally do +injury to their service. I, however, feel very certain that +the day will come when they will treat me much better; +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_173">[173]</span>since, if I have been in error, it has been innocently and +under the force of circumstances, as they will shortly understand +beyond all doubt: I, who am their creature, and whose +services and usefulness they will every day be more willing +to acknowledge. They will weigh all in the balance, even +as, according to the Holy Scripture, it will be with the evil +and the good at the day of judgment. If, nevertheless, their +Highnesses ordain me another judge, which I do not expect, +and if my examination is to be holden in the Indies, I humbly +beseech them to send over two conscientious and respectable +persons at my expense, and they would readily acknowledge +that, at this time, five marks of gold may be found in +four hours: be it however as it may, it is highly necessary +that their Highnesses should have this matter inquired into. +The governor, on his arrival at St. Domingo, took up his +abode in my house, and appropriated to himself all that was +therein. Well and good; perhaps he was in want of it: but +even a pirate does not behave in this manner towards the +merchants that he plunders. That which grieves me most +is the seizure of my papers, of which I have never been able +to recover one; and those that would have been most useful +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_174">[174]</span>to me in proving my innocence, are precisely those which +he has kept most carefully concealed. Behold the just and +honest inquisitor! But whatever he may have done, they +tell me that he has now bidden good bye to justice and is +simply a despot. Our Lord God retains His power and wisdom +as of old; and, above all things, He punishes injustice +and ingratitude.</p> + +</div> + +<div class="spanish"> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CARTA">CARTA</h2> + +<h3 class="hanging"><i>Del Almirante al ama (que habia sido) del Principe D. Juan, escrita +hacia fines del año 1500.</i></h3> + +<p>Muy virtuosa Señora: Si mi queja del mundo es nueva, su uso de +maltratar es de muy antiguo. Mil combates me ha dado y á todos +resistí fasta agora que no me aprovechó armas ni avisos. Con +crueldad me tiene echado al fondo. La esperanza de aquel que crio +á todos me sostiene: su socorro fue siempre muy presto. Otra vez, +y no de lejos estando yo mas bajo, me levantó con su brazo divino, +diciendo: <i>ó hombre de poca fe, levantate que yo soy, no hayas miedo</i>. +Yo vine con amor tan entrañable á servir á estos Principes, y hé +servido de servicio de que jamas se oyó ni vido. Del nuevo cielo +y tierra que decia muestro Señor por S. Juan en el Apocalipse, +despues de dicho por boca de Isaías, me hizo dello mensagero, y +amostró en cual parte. En todos hobo incredulidad, y á la Reina +mi Señor dió dello el espíritu de inteligencia y esfuerzo grande, y +lo hizo de todo heredera como á cara y muy amada hija. La posesion +de todo esto fuí yo á tomar en su Real nombre. La ignorancia +en que habian estado todos quisieron enmendallo traspasando +el poco saber á fablar en inconvenientes y gastos. Su Alteza lo +aprobaba al contrario, y lo sostuvo fasta que pudo. Siete años se +pasaron en la platica y nueve ejecutando cosas muy señaladas y +dignas de memoria se pasaron en este tiempo: de todo no se fizo +concepto. Llegué yo y estoy que non ha nadie tan vil que no piense +de ultrajarme. Por virtud se contará en el mundo á quien +puede no consentillo. Si yo robara las Indias ó tierra que san +face⁠<a id="FNanchor_201" href="#Footnote_201" class="fnanchor">[201]</a> en ello de que agora es la fabla del altar de S. Pedro, y las +diera á los moros, no pudieran en España amostrarme mayor +enemiga. Quién creyera tal adonde hobo siempre tanta nobleza? +Yo mucho quisiera despedir del negocio si fuera honesto para con +mi Reina: el esfuerzo de nuestro Señor y de su Alteza fizo que yo +continuase, y por aliviarle algo de los enojos en que á causa de la +muerte estaba, cometí viaje nuevo al nuevo cielo é mundo, que +fasta entonces estaba en oculto, y sino es tenido allí en estima, +así como los otros de las Indias, no es maravilla porque salió á +parecer de mi industria. A S. Pedro abrasó el Espíritu Santo y +con él otros doce, y todos combatieron acá, y los trabajos y fatigas +fueron muchas; en fin de todo llevaron la victoria. Este viaje de +Paria creí que apaciguara algo por las perlas y la fallada del oro +en la Española. Las perlas mandé yo ayuntar y pescar á la gente +con quien quedó el concierto de mi vuelta por ellas, y á mi comprender +á medida de fanega: si yo non lo escribí a SS. AA. fue +porque así quisiera haber fecho del oro antes. Esto me salió como +otras cosas muchas; no las perdiera ni mi honra si buscara yo mi +bien propio y dejara perder la Española, ó se guardaran mis previlegios +é asientos. Y otro tanto digo del oro que yo tenia agora +junto, que con tantas muertés y trabajos, por virtud divinal, he +llegado á perfecto. Cuando yo fuí á Paria fallé cuasi la mitad de +la gente en la Española alzados, y me han guerreado fasta agora +como á moro, y los indios por otro cabo gravemente. En esto +vino Hojeda y probó á echar el sello, y dijo que sus Altezas lo +enviaban con promesas de dádivas y franquezas y paga: allegó +gran cuadrilla, que en toda la Española muy pocos hay, salvo +vagabundos y ninguno con muger y fijos. Este Hojeda me +trabajó harto y fuele necesario de se ir, y dejó dicho que luego +seria de vuelta con mas navíos y gente, y que dejaba la Real +persona de la Reina á la muerte. En esto llegó Viceinte Yañez +con cuatro carabelas: hobo alboroto y sospechas, mas no daño. +Los indios dijeron de otras muchas á los canibales y en Paria, y +despues una nueva de seis otras carabelas que traía un hermano +del Alcalde, mas fue con malicia, y esto fue ya á la postre cuando +ya estaba muy rota la esperanza que sus Altezas hobiesen jamas +de enviar navios á las Indias, ni nos esperarlos, y que vulgarmente +decian que su Alteza era muerta. Un Adrian en este tiempo +probó alzarse otra vez como de antes, mas nuestro Señor no quiso +que llegase á efecto su mal propósito. Yo tenia propuesto en mi +de no tocar el cabello á nadie, y á este por su ingratitud con +lágrimas no se pudo guardar, así como yo lo tenia pensado. A mi +hermano no hiciera menos si me quisiera matar y robar el señorío +que mi Rey é Reina me tenian dado en guarda. Este Adrian, +segun se muestra, tenia enviado á D. Fernando á Jaragua á allegar +á algunos sus secuaces, y allá hobo debate con el Alcalde, +adonde nació discordia de muerte; mas no llegó á efecto. El +Alcalde le prendió y á parte de su cuadrilla: y el caso era que él +los justiciaba sin que yo lo proveyere: estovieren presos esperando +carabela en que se fuesen: las nuevas de Hojeda que yo dije +ficieron perder la esperanza que ya no venia. Seis meses habia +que yo estaba despachado para venir á sus Altezas con las buenas +nuevas del oro y fuir de gobernar gente disoluta que no teme á +Dios ni á su Rey ni Reina, llena de achaques y de malicias. A la +gente acabara yo de pagar con seiscientos mil maravedises: y +para ello habia cuatro cuentos de diezmos é alguno sin el tercio +del oro. Antes de mi partida supliqué tantas veces á sus Altezas +que enviasen allá á mi costa á quien tuviese cargo de la justicia, +y despues que fallé alzado al Alcalde se lo supliqué de nuevo ó +por alguna gente, ó al menos algun criado con cartas, porque mi +fama es tal que aunque yo faga iglesias y hospitales siempre serán +dichas espeluncas para latrones. Proveyeron ya al fin, y fue muy +al contrario de lo que la negociacion demandaba: vaya en buena, +hora, pues que es á su grado. Yo estuve allá dos años sin poder +ganar una provision de favor para mí ni por los que allá fuesen, +y este llevó una arca llena: si pararán todas á su servicio Dios lo +sabe. Ya por comienzos hay franquezas por veinte años, que es +la edad de un hombre, y se coge el oro, que hobo persona de cinco +marcos en cuatro horas, de que diré despues mas largo. Si +pluguiese á sus Altezas de desfacer un vulgo de los que saben mis +fatigas, que mayor daño me ha hecho el mal decir de las gentes +que no me ha aprovechado el mucho servir y guardar su facienda +y senorío, seria limosna, é yo restituido en mi honra, é se fablaria +dello en todo el mundo, porquel negocio es de calidad que cada +dia ha de ser mas sonada y en alta estima. En esto vino el +Comendador Bobadilla á Santo Domingo, yo estaba en la Vega y +el Adelantado en Jaragua, donde este Adrian habia hecho cabeza, +mas ya todo era llano y la tierra rica, y en paz toda. El segundo +dia que llegó se crió Gobernador y fizo oficiales y ejecuciones, y +apregonó franquezas del oro y diezmos, y generalmente de toda +otra cosa por veinte años, que como digo es la edad de un hombre, +y que venia para pagar á todos, bien que no habian servido llenamente +hasta ese dia, y publicó que á mi me habia de enviar en +fierros, y á mis hermanos, así como lo ha fecho, y que nunca yo +volveria mas allí ni otro de mi linage, diciendo de mi mil deshonestidades +y descorteses cosas. Esto todo fue el segundo dia +quel llegó, como dije, y estando yo lejos absente sin saber dello ni +de su venida. Unas cartas de sus Altezas firmadas en blanco, de +que el llevaba una cantidad, hinchó y envió al Alcalde y á su +compañía con favores y encomiendas. A mi nunca me envió carta +ni mensagero, ni me ha dado fasta hoy. Piense vuestra merced +qué pensaria quien tuviera mi cargo? honrar y favorecer á quien +probó á robar á sus Altezas el señorío, y ha fecho tanto mal y daño! +y arrastrar á quien con tantos peligros se lo sostuvo? Cuando +supe esto, creí que esto seria como lo de Hojeda, ó uno de los +otros: templóme que supe de los frailes de cierto que sus Altezas +lo enviaban. Escrebile yo que su venida fuese en buena hora, y +que yo estaba despachado para ir á la corte, y fecho almoneda de +cuanto yo tenia, y que en esto de las franquezas que no se +acelerase, que esto y el gobierno yo se lo daria luego tan llano +como la palma, y así lo escribí a los religiosos. Ni él ni ellos me +dieron respuesta, antes se puso él en son de guerra, y apremiaba á +cuantos allí iban que le jurasen por Gobernador, dijeronme que +por veinte años. Luego que yo supe de estas franquezas pensé +de adobar un yerro tan grande, y que él seria contento, las cuales +dió sin necesidad y causa de cosa tan gruesa y á gente vagabunda, +que fuera demasiado para quien trujera muger y hijos. Publiqué +por palabra y por cartas que él no podia usar de sus provisiones, +porque las mias eran las mas fuertes, y les mostré las franquezas +que llevó Juan Aguado. Todo esto que yo fice era por dilatar, +porque sus Altezas fuesen sabidores del estado de la tierra, y +hobiesen lugar de tornar á mandar en ello lo que fuese su servicio. +Tales franquezas escusado es de las apregonar en las Indias. Los +vecinos que han tomado vecindad es logro, porque se les dan las +mejores tierras y á poco valer valerán docientos mil maravedis al +cabo de los cuatro años que la vecindad se acaba, sin que den una +azadonada en ellas. No diria yo así si los vecinos fuesen casados, +mas no hay seis entre todos que no esten sobre el aviso de ayuntar +lo que pudieren y se ir en buena hora. De Castilla seria bien que +fuesen, y aun saber quién y cómo, y se poblase de gente honrada. +Yo tenia asentado con estos vecinos que pagarian el tercio del oro +y los diezmos, y esto á su ruego, y lo recibieron en grande merced +de sus Altezas. Reprendiles cuando yo oí que se dejaban dello, +y esperaban quél conmigo faria otro tanto, mas fue el contrario. +Indignólos contra mí diciendo, que yo les queria quitar lo que sus +Altezas les daban, y trabajo de me los echar acuestas, y lo hizo, y +que escribiesen á sus Altezas que no me enviasen mas al cargo, y +así se lo suplico yo por mí y por toda cosa mia, en cuanto no haya +otro pueblo, y me ordenó él con ellos pesquisas de maldades que +al infierno nunca se supo de las semejantes. Allí está nuestro +Señor que escapó á Daniel y á los tres muchachos con tanto saber +y fuerza como tenia, y con tanto aparejo si le pluguiere como con +su gana. Supiera yo remediar todo esto y lo otro que está dicho +y ha pasado despues que estoy en las Indias, si me consintiera la +voluntad á procurar por mi bien propio y me fuera honesto. Mas +el sostener de la justicia y acrecentar el señorío de sus Altezas +fasta agora, me tiene al fondo. Hoy en dia que se falla tanto oro +hay division en que haya mas ganancia, ir robando ó ir á las minas. +Por una muger tambien se fallan cien castellanos como por una +labranza, y es mucho en uso, y ha ya fartos mercaderes que andan +buscando muchachas: de nueve á diez son agora en precio: de todas +edades ha de tener un bueno. Digo que en decir yo que el +Comendador no podia dar franquezas que hice yo lo que él +deseaba; bien que yo á él dijese que era para dilatar fasta que sus +Altezas toviesen el aviso de la tierra y tornasen á ver y mandar +lo que fuese su servicio. Digo que la fuerza del maldecir de +desconcertados me ha hecho mas daño que mis servicios fecho +provecho: mal ejemplo es por lo presente y por lo futuro. Fago +juramento que cantidad de hombres han ido á las Indias que no +merescian el agua para con Dios y con el mundo, y agora vuelven +allá. Enemistólos á ellos todos conmigo, y él parece, segun se +hobo y segun sus formas, que ya lo venia y bien encendido, ó es +que se dice que ha gastado mucho por venir á este negocio; no se +dello mas de lo que oyo. Yo nunca oí que el pesquisidor allegase +los rebeldes y los tomase por testigos contra aquel que gobierna á +ellos y á otros sin fe, ni dignos della. Si sus Altezas mandasen +hacer una pesquisa general allí vos digo yo que verian por gran +maravilla como la isla no sé funde. Yo creo que se acordará +vuestra merced cuando lo tormenta sin velas me echó en Lisbona, +que fuí acusado falsamente que habia ido ya allá al Rey para darle +las Indias. Despues supieron sus Altezas al contrario, y que todo +fue con malicia. Bien que yo sepa poco: no sé quien me tenga +por tan torpe que yo no conozca que aunque las Indias fuesen +mias, que yo no me pudiera sostener sin ayuda de Príncipe. Si +esto es así, adónde pudiera yo tener mejor arrimo y seguridad de +no ser echado dellas del todo que en el Rey é Reina nuestros +Señores, que de nada me han puesto en tanta honra y son los mas +altos Príncipes por la mar y por la tierra del mundo? los cuales +tienen que yo les haya servido, é me guardan mis privilegios y +mercedes, y si alguien me los quebranta sus Altezas me los +acrescientan con aventaja, como se vido en lo de Juan Aguado, y +me mandar hacer mucha honra, y como dije ya sus Altezas rescibieron +de mí servicios y tienen mis hijos sus criados, lo que en +ninguna manera pudiera esto llegar con otro Príncipe, porque +adonde no hay amor todo lo otro cesa. Dije yo agora ansi contra +un maldecir con malicia y contra mi voluntad, porque es cosa que +ni en sueños debiera allegar á memoria, porque las formas y fechos +del Comendador Bobadilla, con malicia las quiere alumbrar en +esto: mas yo le faré ver con el brazo izquierdo que su poco saber +y gran cobardiá con desordenada cudicia le ha fecho caer en ello. +Ya dije como yo le escrebí y á los frailes, y luego partí así como +le dije muy solo, porque toda la gente estaba con el Adelantado, y +tambien por le quitar de sospecha: él cuando lo supo echó á D. +Diego preso en una carabela cargado de fierros, y á mi en llegando +fizo otro tanto, y despues al Adelantado, cuando vino. Ni le fablé +mas á él ni consintió que hasta hoy nadie me haya fablado, y fago +juramento que no puedo pensar por qué sea yo preso. La primera +diligencia que fizo fue á tomar el oro, el cual hobo sin medida ni +peso, é yo absente dijo que queria él pagar dello á la gente, y +segun oí para sí fizo la primera parte, y enviar por resgate resgatadores +nuevos. Desto oro tenia yo apartado ciertas muestras, +granos muy gruesos como huevos como de ánsar, de gallina y de +pollas, y de otras muchas fechuras, que algunas personas tenian +cogido en breve espacio, con que se alegrasen sus Altezas, y por +ello comprendiesen el negocio con una cantidad de piedras grandes +llenas de oro. Este fue el primero á se dar con malicia, porque +sus Altezas no tuviesen este negocio en algo fasta quel tenga fecho +el nido de que se dá buena priesa. El oro que está por fundir +mengua al fuego: una cadena que pesaria fasta veinte marcos +nunca se ha visto. Yo he sido muy agraviado en esto del oro mas +aun que de las perlas, porque no las he traido á sus Altezas. El +Comendador en todo lo que le pareció que me dañaria luego fue +puesto en obra. Ya dije, con seiscientos mil maravedises pagara +á todos sin robar á nadie y habia mas de cuatro cuentos de diezmos +y alguacilazgo sin tocar en el oro. Hizo unas larguezas que +son de risa, bien que creo que encomenzó en sí la primera parte: +allá lo sabran sus Altezas cuando le mandaren tomar cuenta, en +especial si yo estuviese á ella. El no face sino decir que se debe +gran suma, y es la que yo dije y no tanto. Yo he sido muy mucho +agraviado en que se haya enviado pesquisidor sobre mí, que sepa +que si la pesquisa que él enviare fuere muy grave que él quedará +en el gobierno.—Pluguiera á nuestro Señor que sus Altezas le +enviaran á él ó á otro dos años ha, porque sé que yo fuera ya libre +de escándalo y de infamia, y no se me quitara mi honra ni la perdiera: +Dios es justo, y ha de hacer que se sepa por que y cómo. +Allí me juzgan como Gobernador que fue á Cecilia ó ciudad ó villa +puesta en regimiento y adonde las leyes se pueden guardar por +entero sin temor de que se pierda todo, y rescibo grande agravio. +Yo debo ser juzgado como Capitan que fue de España á conquistar +fasta las Indias á gente belicosa y mucha, y de costumbres +y seta á nos muy contraria: los cuales viven por sierras y montes, +sin pueblo asentado ni nosotros; y adonde por voluntad Divina +he puesto só el señorio del Rey é de la Reina nuestros Señores otro +mundo; y por donde la España, que era dicha pobre, es la mas +rica. Yo dobo ser juzgado como Capitan que de tanto tiempo +fasta hoy trae las armas á cuestas sin las dejar una hora, y de +Caballeros de conquistas y del uso, y no de letras, salvo si fuesen +de Griegos ó de Romanos, ó de otros modernos de que hay tantos +y tan nobles en España, ca de otra guisa rescibo grande agravio +porque en las Indias no hay pueblo ni asiento. Del oro y perlas +ya está abierta la puerta y cantidad de todo, piedras preciosas y +especería, y de otras mil cosas se pueden esperar firmemente; y +nunca mas mal me viniese como con el nombre de Nuestro Señor +le daria el primer viage, así como diera la negociacion del Arabia +feliz fasta la Meca, como yo escribí á sus Altezas con Antonio de +Torres en la respuesta de la reparticion del mar é tierra con los +Portogueses: y despues viniera á lo de polo artico, así coma lo +dije y dí por escripto en el monesterio de la Mejorada. Las nuevas +del oro que yo dije que daria son que dia de Navidad, estando yo +muy afligido guerreado de los malos Cristianos y de Indios, en +términos de dejar todo y escapar si pudiese la vida; me consoló +nuestro Señor milagrosamente y dijo: “<i>Esfuerza, no desmayes +mi temas: yo proveeré en todo; los siete años del término del oro +no son pasados, y en ello y en lo otro te daré remedio.</i>” Ese dia +supe que habia ochenta leguas de tierra, y en todo cabo dellas minas; +el parecer agora es que sea toda una. Algunos han cogido +ciento y veinte castellanos en un dia, otros noventa, y se ha llegado +fasta docientos y cincuenta. De cincuenta fasta setenta, y otros +muchos de veínte fasta cincuenta, es tenido por buen jornal y muchos +lo continuaban: el comun es seis fasta doce, y quien de aquí +abaja no es contento. Parece tambien que estas minas son como +las otras que responden en los dias no igualmente: las minas son +nuevas y los cogedores. El parecer de todos es que aunque vaya +allá toda Castilla, que por torpe que sea la persona, que no abajará +de un castellano ó dos cada dia, y agora es esto así en fresco. Es +verdad que el que tiene algun indio coge esto, mas el negocio consiste +en el Cristiano. Ved que discrecion fue de Bobadilla dar +todo por ninguno y cuatro cuentos de diezmos sin causa ni ser +requerido, sin primero lo notificar á sus Altezas; y el daño no es +este solo. Yo sé que mis yerros no han sido con fin de facer mal, +y creo que sus Altezas lo creen así como yo lo digo; y sé y veo +que usan de misericordia con quien maliciosamente los desirve. +Yo creo y tengo por muy cierto que muy mejor y mas piedad +harán conmigo que caí en ello con inocencia y forzosamente, como +sabran despues por entero, y el cual soy su fechura, y mirirán á +mis servicíos, y cognoscerán de cada dia que son muy aventajados. +Todo pornan en una balanza, así como nos cuenta la Santa Escriptura +que será el bien con el mal en el dia del juicio. Si todavía +mandan que otro me juzgue, lo cual no espero, y que sea por +pesquisa de las Indias, humilmente les suplico que envien allá +dos personas de consciencia y honrados á mi costa, los cuales fallaran +de ligero agora que se halla el oro cinco marcos en cuatro +horas, con esto é sin ello es muy necesario que lo provean. El +Comendador, en llegando á Santo Domingo se aposentó en mi casa; +así como la falló así dió todo por suyo: vaya en buena hora, quizá +lo habia menester: cosario nunca tal usó con mercader. De mis +escripturas tengo yo mayor queja que así me las haya tomado, que +jamas se le pudo sacar una, y aquellas que mas me habian de +aprovechar en mi disculpa esas tenia mas ocultas. Ved que justo +y honesto pesquisidor. Cosa de cuantas él haya hecho me dicen +que haya seido con término de justicia, salvo absolutamente. +Dios nuestro Señor está con sus fuerzas y saber, como solia, y +castiga en todo cabo, en especial la ingratitud de injurias.</p> + +</div> + +<div class="footnotes"> + +<h3>FOOTNOTES:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_189" href="#FNanchor_189" class="label">[189]</a> Although Zuñiga says that Doña Maria de Guzman was appointed +nurse by Queen Isabella at the birth of Prince John, it is nevertheless +certain that this letter was addressed by Columbus to Doña Juana de la +Torres, a great favourite of the queen, sister of Antonio de Torres, who +was with the admiral in the second voyage, and who bore the memorial +to their Highnesses.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_190" href="#FNanchor_190" class="label">[190]</a> This is related by his son Don Ferdinand, in cap. 84 of his history, +and is more amply described in the letter addressed by Columbus to the +sovereigns, describing his fourth voyage. It took place the day after +Christmas day, 1499.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_191" href="#FNanchor_191" class="label">[191]</a> He refers to the death of Prince John, which occurred in Salamanca, +on the fourth of October 1497.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_192" href="#FNanchor_192" class="label">[192]</a> After the admiral had discovered the island of Trinidad, he sailed +along the coast of Paria, discovered the island of Margarita, and entered +the harbour of San Domingo the thirtieth of August 1498, where he +found the colony in rebellion, and the Spaniards embroiled in quarrels, +both with each other and with the Indians.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_193" href="#FNanchor_193" class="label">[193]</a> Alonzo de Hojeda reached Española on the fifth of September 1498.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_194" href="#FNanchor_194" class="label">[194]</a> Roldan was by this time reconciled to the Admiral, and the rebellion +was allayed, when Hojeda arrived, making great boast of his favour +with bishop Fonseca, Columbus’ enemy, and endeavoured to excite fresh +animosity against him; but he had to leave Española completely.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_195" href="#FNanchor_195" class="label">[195]</a> Adrian Mogica, who had been one of the rebels with Roldan.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_196" href="#FNanchor_196" class="label">[196]</a> Columbus returned to Cadiz from his second voyage, on the 11th of +June, 1496. He was well received by the sovereigns, and they gave +orders for preparing the requisites for a third voyage; but the fulfilment +of these orders was delayed by Bishop Fonseca until the 30th of +May, 1498.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_197" href="#FNanchor_197" class="label">[197]</a> Francesco de Bobadilla, commander of the order of Calatrava, +reached San Domingo on the 23rd of August, 1500.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_198" href="#FNanchor_198" class="label">[198]</a> This expression of the Admiral’s, makes it appear that he wrote +this letter when he was near reaching Cadiz, on the 25th of November, +1500.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_199" href="#FNanchor_199" class="label">[199]</a> An ancient gold coin, varying in value under different kings.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_200" href="#FNanchor_200" class="label">[200]</a> The old Spaniards used to give the name of “<i>caballero de conquista</i>,” +to each of the conquerors, among whom the conquered lands +were divided.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_201" href="#FNanchor_201" class="label">[201]</a> There is no sense in this expression, nor as it is given in the “Codice +Colombo Americano”, where it stands thus: “que jaz hase ellas de +que”, etc. Perhaps “hase” is miscopied for “hacia” “towards.”</p></div> + +</div> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="english"> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_175">[175]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="FOURTH_VOYAGE_OF_COLUMBUS">FOURTH VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS.</h2> + +<h3 class="hanging"><i>A Letter written by Don Christopher Columbus, Viceroy and +Admiral of the Indies, to the most Christian and mighty +Sovereigns, the King and Queen of Spain, in which are +described the events of his voyage, and the countries, provinces, +cities, rivers, and other marvellous matters therein +discovered, as well as the places where gold and other substances +of great richness and value are to be found.</i></h3> + +<p>Most Serene, and very high and mighty Princes, the King +and Queen our Sovereigns:—My passage from Cadiz to the +Canary occupied four days, and thence to the Indies, from +which I wrote, sixteen days. My intention was to expedite +my voyage as much as possible while I had good vessels, +good crews and stores, and because Jamaica was the place to +which I was bound. I wrote this in Dominica.</p> + +<p>Up to the period of my reaching these shores I experienced +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_176">[176]</span>most excellent weather, but the night of my arrival +came in with a dreadful tempest, and the same bad weather +has continued ever since. On reaching the island of Española +I despatched a packet of letters, by which I begged +as a favour that a ship should be supplied me at my own cost +in lieu of one of those that I had brought with me, and which +had become unseaworthy, and could no longer carry sail. +The letters were taken, and your Highnesses will know if a +reply has been given to them. For my part I was forbidden +to go on shore; the hearts of my people failed them lest I +should take them further, and they said that if any danger +were to befall them, they should receive no succour, but, on +the contrary, in all probability have some great affront offered +them. Moreover every man had it in his power to tell me +that the new Governor would have the superintendence of +the countries that I might acquire.</p> + +<p>The tempest was terrible throughout the night, all the +ships were separated, and each one driven to the last extremity, +without hope of anything but death; each of them +also looked upon the loss of the rest as a matter of certainty. +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_177">[177]</span>What man was ever born, not even excepting Job, who +would not have been ready to die of despair at finding himself +as I then was, in anxious fear for my own safety, and +that of my son, my brother, and my friends, and yet refused +permission either to land or to put into harbour on the +shores which by God’s mercy I had gained for Spain with so +much toil and danger?</p> + +<p>But to return to the ships: although the tempest had so +completely separated them from me as to leave me single, +yet the Lord restored them to me in his own good time. +The ship which we had the greatest fear for, had put out to +sea for safety, and reached the island of Gallega, having lost +her boat and a great part of her provisions, which latter +loss indeed all the ships suffered. The vessel in which I +was, though dreadfully buffeted, was saved by our Lord’s +mercy from any injury whatever; my brother went in the +ship that was unsound, and he under God was the cause of +its being saved. With this tempest I struggled on till I +reached Jamaica, and there the sea became calm, but there +was a strong current which carried me as far as the Queen’s +Garden without seeing land. Hence as opportunity afforded +I pushed on for terra firma, in spite of the wind and a fearful +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_178">[178]</span>contrary current, against which I contended for sixty +days, and after all only made seventy leagues. All this +time I was unable to get into harbour, nor was there any +cessation of the tempest, which was one continuation of +rain, thunder, and lightning; indeed it seemed as if it were +the end of the world. I at length reached the Cape of Gracias +a Dios, and after that the Lord granted me fair wind +and tide; this was on the twelfth of September. Eighty-eight +days did this fearful tempest continue, during which +I was at sea, and saw neither sun nor stars; my ships lay +exposed, with sails torn, and anchors, rigging, cables, boats, +and a great quantity of provisions lost; my people were very +weak and humbled in spirit, many of them promising to +lead a religious life, and all making vows and promising to +perform pilgrimages, while some of them would frequently +go to their messmates to make confession. Other tempests +have been experienced, but never of so long a duration or +so fearful as this: many whom we looked upon as brave +men, on several occasions showed considerable trepidation; +but the distress of my son who was with me grieved me to +the soul, and the more when I considered his tender age, for +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_179">[179]</span>he was but thirteen years old, and he enduring so much toil +for so long a time. Our Lord, however, gave him strength +even to enable him to encourage the rest, and he worked as if +he had been eighty years at sea, and all this was a consolation +to me. I myself had fallen sick, and was many times at the +point of death, but from a little cabin that I had caused to +be constructed on deck, I directed our course. My brother +was in the ship that was in the worst condition and the most +exposed to danger; and my grief on this account was the +greater that I brought him with me against his will.</p> + +<p>Such is my fate, that the twenty years of service through +which I have passed with so much toil and danger, have profited +me nothing, and at this very day I do not possess a +roof in Spain that I can call my own; if I wish to eat or +sleep, I have nowhere to go but to the inn or tavern, and +most times lack wherewith to pay the bill. Another anxiety +wrung my very heartstrings, which was the thought of my +son Diego, whom I had left an orphan in Spain, and stripped +of the honour and property which were due to him on my +account, although I had looked upon it as a certainty, that +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_180">[180]</span>your Majesties, as just and grateful Princes, would restore +it to him in all respects with increase. I reached the land of +Cariay, where I stopped to repair my vessels and take in provisions, +as well as to afford relaxation to the men, who had +become very weak. I myself (who, as I said before, had +been several times at the point of death) gained information +respecting the gold mines of which I was in search, in the +province of Ciamba; and two Indians conducted me to Carambaru, +where the people (who go naked) wear golden +mirrors round their necks, which they will neither sell, give, +nor part with for any consideration. They named to me +many places on the sea-coast where there were both gold +and mines. The last that they mentioned was Veragua, +which was about five-and-twenty leagues distant from the +place where we then were. I started with the intention of +visiting all of them, but when I had reached the middle of +my journey I learned that there were other mines at so short +a distance that they might be reached in two days. I determined +on sending to see them. It was on the eve of St. +Simon and St. Jude, which was the day fixed for our departure; +but that night there arose so violent a storm, that we +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_181">[181]</span>were forced to go wherever it drove us, and the Indian who +was to conduct us to the mines was with us all the time. As +I had found every thing true that had been told me in the +different places which I had visited, I felt satisfied it would +be the same with respect to Ciguare, which according to their +account, is nine days’ journey across the country westward: +they tell me there is a great quantity of gold there, and that +the inhabitants wear coral ornaments on their heads, and +very large coral bracelets and anklets, with which article +also they adorn and inlay their seats, boxes, and tables. +They also said that the women there wore necklaces hanging +down to their shoulders. All the people agree in the +report I now repeat, and their account is so favourable that +I should be content with the tithe of the advantages that +their description holds out. They are all likewise acquainted +with the pepper-plant. According to the account of these +people, the inhabitants of Ciguare are accustomed to hold +fairs and markets for carrying on their commerce, and they +showed me also the mode and form in which they transact +their various exchanges. Others assert that their ships carry +guns, and that the men go clothed and use bows and arrows, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_182">[182]</span>swords, and cuirasses, and that on shore they have horses +which they use in battle, and that they wear rich clothes and +have most excellent houses.⁠<a id="FNanchor_202" href="#Footnote_202" class="fnanchor">[202]</a> They also say that the sea surrounds +Ciguare, and that at ten days’ journey from thence is +the river Ganges. These lands appear to have the same bearings +with respect to Veragua, as Tortosa has to Fontarabia, +or Pisa to Venice. When I left Carambaru and reached the +places in its neighbourhood, which I have above-mentioned +as being spoken of by the Indians, I found the customs of +the people correspond with the accounts that had been given +of them, except as regarded the golden mirrors: any man +who had one of them would willingly part with it for three +hawks’-bells, although they were equivalent in weight to +ten or fifteen ducats. These people resemble the natives of +Española in all their habits. They have various modes of +collecting the gold, none of which will bear comparison with +the plans adopted by the Christians.</p> + +<p>All that I have here stated is from hearsay. This, however, +I know, that in the year ninety-four I sailed twenty-four +degrees to the westward in nine hours, and there can +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_183">[183]</span>be no mistake upon the subject, because there was an eclipse; +the sun was in Libra and the moon in Aries. What I had +learned by the mouth of these people I already knew in detail +from books. Ptolemy thought that he had satisfactorily +corrected Marinus, and yet this latter appears to have come +very near to the truth. Ptolemy places Catigara at a distance +of twelve lines to the west of his meridian,⁠<a id="FNanchor_203" href="#Footnote_203" class="fnanchor">[203]</a> which he fixes +at two degrees and a third above Cape St. Vincent, in Portugal. +Marinus comprises the earth and its limits in fifteen +lines, and the same author describes the Indus in Ethiopia +as being more than four-and-twenty degrees from the equinoctial +line, and now that the Portuguese have sailed there +they find it correct. Ptolemy says also that the most southern +land is the first boundary, and that it does not go lower down +than fifteen degrees and a third. The world is but small; +out of seven divisions of it the dry part occupies six, and the +seventh only is covered by water.⁠<a id="FNanchor_204" href="#Footnote_204" class="fnanchor">[204]</a> Experience has shown +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_184">[184]</span>it, and I have written it with quotations from the Holy +Scripture, in other letters, where I have treated of the +situation of the terrestrial paradise, as approved by Holy +Church; and I say that the world is not so large as vulgar +opinion makes it, and that one degree from the equinoctial +line measures fifty-six miles and two-thirds; and this may +be proved to a nicety. But I leave this subject, which it is +not my intention now to treat upon, but simply to give a +narrative of my laborious and painful voyage, although of all +my voyages it is the most honourable and advantageous. I +have said that on the eve of St. Simon and St. Jude I ran +before the wind wherever it took me, without power to resist +it; at length I found shelter for ten days from the roughness +of the sea and the tempest overhead, and resolved not +to attempt to go back to the mines, which I regarded as +already in our possession. When I started in pursuance of +my voyage it was under a heavy rain, and reaching the +harbour of Bastimentos I put in, though much against my +will. The storm and a rapid current kept me in for fourteen +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_185">[185]</span>days, when I again set sail, but not with favourable weather. +After I had made fifteen leagues with great exertions, the +wind and the current drove me back again with great fury, +but in again making for the port which I had quitted, I +found on the way another port, which I named Retrete, +where I put in for shelter with as much risk as regret, the +ships being in sad condition, and my crews and myself exceedingly +fatigued. I remained there fifteen days, kept in +by stress of weather, and when I fancied my troubles were +at an end, I found them only begun. It was then that I +changed my resolution with respect to proceeding to the +mines, and proposed doing something in the interim, until +the weather should prove more favourable for my voyage. +I had already made four leagues when the storm recommenced, +and wearied me to such a degree that I absolutely +knew not what to do; my wound reopened, and for nine +days my life was despaired of. Never was the sea seen so +high, so terrific, and so covered with foam; not only did the +wind oppose our proceeding onward, but it also rendered it +highly dangerous to run in for any headland, and kept me +in that sea which seemed to me as a sea of blood, seething +like a cauldron on a mighty fire. Never did the sky look +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_186">[186]</span>more fearful; during one day and one night it burned like a +furnace, and emitted flashes in such fashion that each time I +looked to see if my masts and my sails were not destroyed; +these flashes came with such alarming fury that we all thought +the ship must have been consumed. All this time the waters +from heaven never ceased, not to say that it rained, for it +was like a repetition of the deluge. The men were at this +time so crushed in spirit, that they longed for death as a +deliverance from so many martyrdoms. Twice already had +the ships suffered loss in boats, anchors, and rigging, and +were now lying bare without sails.</p> + +<p>When it pleased our Lord, I returned to Puerto Gordo, +where I recruited my condition as well as I could. I then +once more attempted the voyage towards Veragua, although +I was by no means in a fit state to undertake it. The wind +and currents were still contrary. I arrived at nearly the +same spot as before, and there again the wind and currents +still opposed my progress; once more I was compelled to +put into harbour, not daring to encounter the opposition of +Saturn⁠<a id="FNanchor_205" href="#Footnote_205" class="fnanchor">[205]</a> with such a boisterous sea, and on so formidable a +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_187">[187]</span>coast; for it almost always brings on a tempest or severe +weather. This was on Christmas-day, about the hour of +mass. Thus, after all these fatigues, I had once more to return +to the spot from whence I started; and when the new +year had set in, I returned again to my task: but although +I had fine weather for my voyage, the ships were no longer +in a sailing condition, and my people were either dying +or very sick. On the day of the Epiphany, I reached +Veragua in a state of exhaustion; there, by our Lord’s goodness, +I found a river and a safe harbour, although at the +entrance there were only ten spans of water. I succeeded +in making an entry, but with great difficulty; and on the +following day the storm recommenced, and had I been still +on the outside at that time, I should have been unable to +enter on account of the bar. It rained without ceasing until +the fourteenth of February, so that I could find no opportunity +of penetrating into the interior, nor of recruiting my +condition in any respect whatever; and on the twenty-fourth +of January, when I considered myself in perfect safety, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_188">[188]</span>the river suddenly rose with great violence to a considerable +height, breaking my cables and the supports⁠<a id="FNanchor_206" href="#Footnote_206" class="fnanchor">[206]</a> to which they +were fastened, and nearly carrying away my ships altogether, +which certainly appeared to me to be in greater danger than +ever. Our Lord, however, brought a remedy as He has +always done. I do not know if any one else ever suffered +greater trials.</p> + +<p>On the sixth of February, while it was still raining, I sent +seventy men on shore to go into the interior, and, at five +leagues’ distance they found several mines. The Indians who +went with them, conducted them to a very lofty mountain, +and thence showing them the country all round, as far as the +eye could reach, told them there was gold in every part, and +that, towards the west, the mines extended twenty days’ +journey; they also recounted the names of the towns and +villages where there was more or less of it. I afterwards +learned that the cacique Quibian, who had lent these Indians, +had ordered them to show the distant mines, and which belonged +to an enemy of his; but that in his own territory, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_189">[189]</span>one man might, if he would, collect in ten days as much as +a child could carry. I bring with me some Indians, his servants, +who can bear witness to this fact. The boats went +up to the spot where the dwellings of these people are +situated; and, after four hours, my brother returned with +the guides, all of them bringing back gold which they had +collected at that place. The gold must therefore be abundant, +and of good quality, for none of these men had ever seen +mines before; very many of them had never seen pure gold, +and most of them were seamen and lads. Having building +materials in abundance, I established a settlement, and made +many presents to Quibian, which is the name they gave to +the lord of the country. I plainly saw that harmony would +not last long, for the natives are of a very rough disposition, +and the Spaniards very encroaching; and, moreover, I had +taken possession of land belonging to Quibian. When he +saw what we did, and found the traffic increasing, he resolved +upon burning the houses, and putting us all to death; but +his project did not succeed, for we took him prisoner, together +with his wives, his children, and his servants. His +captivity, it is true, lasted but a short time, for he eluded the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_190">[190]</span>custody of a trustworthy man, into whose charge he had +been given, with a guard of men; and his sons escaped from +a ship, in which they had been placed under the special +charge of the master.</p> + +<p>In the month of January the mouth of the river was entirely +closed up, and in April the vessels were so eaten with +the teredo, that they could scarcely be kept above water. +At this time the river forced a channel for itself, by which I +managed, with great difficulty, to extricate three of them +after I had unloaded them. The boats were then sent back +into the river for water and salt, but the sea became so high +and furious, that it afforded them no chance of exit; upon +which the Indians collected themselves together in great +numbers, and made an attack upon the boats, and at length +massacred the men. My brother, and all the rest of our +people, were in a ship which remained inside; I was alone, +outside, upon that dangerous coast, suffering from a severe +fever and worn with fatigue. All hope of escape was gone. +I toiled up to the highest part of the ship, and, with a +quivering voice and fast-falling tears, I called upon your +Highnesses’ war-captains from each point of the compass to +come to my succour, but there was no reply. At length, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_191">[191]</span>groaning with exhaustion, I fell asleep, and heard a compassionate +voice address me thus:—“<i>O fool, and slow to +believe and to serve thy God, the God of all! what did He +do more for Moses, or for David his servant, than He has +done for thee? From thine infancy He has kept thee under +His constant and watchful care. When He saw thee arrived +at an age which suited His designs respecting thee, He +brought wonderful renown to thy name throughout all the +land. He gave thee for thine own the Indies, which form so +rich a portion of the world, and thou hast divided them as +it pleased thee, for He gave thee power to do so. He gave +thee also the keys of those barriers of the ocean sea which +were closed with such mighty chains; and thou wast obeyed +through many lands, and gained an honourable fame throughout +Christendom. What did the Most High do for the +people of Israel, when He brought them out of Egypt? or +for David, whom from a shepherd He made to be king in +Judæa? Turn to Him, and acknowledge thine error—His +mercy is infinite. Thine old age shall not prevent thee from +accomplishing any great undertaking. He holds under His +sway the greatest possessions. Abraham had exceeded a +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_192">[192]</span>hundred years of age when he begat Isaac; nor was Sarah +young. Thou criest out for uncertain help: answer, who +has afflicted thee so much and so often, God or the world? +The privileges promised by God, He never fails in bestowing; +nor does He ever declare, after a service has been rendered +Him, that such was not agreeable with His intention, or that +He had regarded the matter in another light; nor does He +inflict suffering, in order to make a show of His power. His +acts answer to His words; and He performs all His promises +with interest. Is this the usual course? Thus I have told +you what the Creator has done for thee, and what He does +for all men. Even now He partially shows thee the reward +of so many toils and dangers incurred by thee in the service +of others.</i>”</p> + +<p>I heard all this, as it were, in a trance; but I had no +answer to give in definite words, and could but weep for my +errors. He who spoke to me, whoever he was, concluded by +saying,—“<i>Fear not, but trust; all these tribulations are recorded +on marble, and not without cause.</i>” I arose as soon +as I could; and at the end of nine days there came fine +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_193">[193]</span>weather, but not sufficiently so to allow of drawing the +vessels out of the river. I collected the men who were on +land, and, in fact, all of them that I could, because there +were not enough to admit of one party remaining on shore +while another stayed on board to work the vessels. I myself +should have remained with my men to defend the buildings +I had constructed, had your Highnesses been cognizant of +all the facts; but the doubt whether any ships would ever +reach the spot where we were, as well as the thought, that +while I was asking for succour I might bring succour to myself, +made me decide upon leaving. I departed, in the name +of the Holy Trinity, on Easter night, with the ships rotten, +worm-eaten, and full of holes. One of them I left at Belem, +with a supply of necessaries; I did the same at Belpuerto. +I then had only two left, and they in the same state as the +others. I was without boats or provisions, and in this condition +I had to cross seven thousand miles of sea; or, as an +alternative, to die on the passage with my son, my brother, +and so many of my people. Let those who are in the habit +of finding fault and censuring, ask, while they sit in security +at home, “Why did you not do so and so under such circumstances?” +I wish they now had this voyage to make. +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_194">[194]</span>I verily believe that another journey of another kind awaits +them, if there is any reliance to be placed upon our holy +faith.</p> + +<p>On the thirteenth of May I reached the province of Mago,⁠<a id="FNanchor_207" href="#Footnote_207" class="fnanchor">[207]</a> +which is contiguous to that of Cathay, and thence I started +for the island of Española. I sailed two days with a good +wind, after which it became contrary. The route that I followed +called forth all my care to avoid the numerous islands, +that I might not be stranded on the shoals that lie in their +neighbourhood. The sea was very tempestuous, and I was +driven backward under bare poles. I anchored at an island, +where I lost, at one stroke, three anchors; and, at midnight, +when the weather was such that the world appeared to be +coming to an end, the cables of the other ship broke, and +it came down upon my vessel with such force that it was a +wonder we were not dashed to pieces; the single anchor +that remained to me, was, next to the Lord, our only preservation. +After six days, when the weather became calm, +I resumed my journey having already lost all my tackle; my +ships were pierced with worm-holes, like a bee-hive, and the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_195">[195]</span>crew entirely paralysed with fear and in despair. I reached +the island a little beyond the point at which I first arrived +at it, and there I stayed to recover myself from the effects +of the storm; but I afterwards put into a much safer port +in the same island. After eight days I put to sea again, and +reached Jamaica by the end of June; but always beating +against contrary winds, and with the ships in the worst possible +condition. With three pumps, and the use of pots and +kettles, we could scarcely with all hands clear the water that +came into the ship, there being no remedy but this for the +mischief done by the ship-worm. I steered in such a manner +as to come as near as possible to Española, from which we +were twenty-eight leagues distant, but I afterwards wished +I had not done so, for the other ship which was half under +water was obliged to run in for a port. I determined on +keeping the sea in spite of the weather, and my vessel was +on the very point of sinking when our Lord miraculously +brought us upon land. Who will believe what I now write? +I assert that in this letter I have not related one hundredth +part of the wonderful events that occurred in this voyage; +those who were with the Admiral⁠<a id="FNanchor_208" href="#Footnote_208" class="fnanchor">[208]</a> can bear witness to it. +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_196">[196]</span>If your Highnesses would be graciously pleased to send to +my help a ship of above sixty-four tons, with two hundred +quintals of biscuits and other provisions, there would then +be sufficient to carry me and my crew from Española to +Spain. I have already said that there are not twenty-eight +leagues between Jamaica and Española; and I should not +have gone there, even if the ships had been in a fit condition +for so doing, because your Highnesses ordered me not to +land there. God knows if this command has proved of any +service. I send this letter by means of and by the hands of +Indians; it will be a miracle if it reaches its destination.</p> + +<p>This is the account I have to give of my voyage. The men +who accompanied me were a hundred and fifty in number, +among whom were many calculated for pilots and good +sailors, but none of them can explain whither I went nor +whence I came. The reason is very simple. I started from +a point above the port of Brazil, and while I was in Española, +the storm prevented me from following my intended route, +for I was obliged to go wherever the wind drove me; at the +same time I fell very sick, and there was no one who had +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_197">[197]</span>navigated in these parts before. However, after some days, +the wind and sea became tranquil, and the storm was succeeded +by a calm, but accompanied with rapid currents. I +put into harbour at an island called Isla de las Bocas, and +then steered for terra firma; but it is impossible to give a +correct account of all our movements, because I was carried +away by the current so many days without seeing land. I +ascertained, however, by the compass and by observation, +that I moved parallel with the coast of terra firma. No one +could tell under what part of the heavens we were, nor at +what period I bent my course for the island of Española. +The pilots thought we had come to the island of St. John, +whereas it was the land of Mango, four hundred leagues to +the westward of where they said. Let them answer and say +if they know where Veragua is situated. I assert that they +can give no other account than that they went to lands, +where there was an abundance of gold, and this they can +certify surely enough; but they do not know the way to return +thither for such a purpose; they would be obliged to +go on a voyage of discovery as much as if they had never +been there before. There is a mode of reckoning derived +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_198">[198]</span>from astronomy which is sure and safe, and a sufficient guide +to anyone who understands it. This resembles a prophetic +vision. The Indian vessels do not sail except with the wind +abaft, but this is not because they are badly built or clumsy, +but because the strong currents in those parts, together with +the wind, render it impossible to sail with the bowline,⁠<a id="FNanchor_209" href="#Footnote_209" class="fnanchor">[209]</a> for +in one day they would lose as much way as they might have +made in seven; for the same reason I could make no use of +caravels, even though they were Portuguese latteens. This +is the cause that they do not sail unless with a regular +breeze, and they will sometimes stay in harbour waiting for +this seven or eight months at a time; nor is this anything +wonderful, for the same very often occurs in Spain. The +nation of which Pope Pius writes⁠<a id="FNanchor_210" href="#Footnote_210" class="fnanchor">[210]</a> has now been found, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_199">[199]</span>judging at least by the situation and other evidences, excepting +the horses with the saddles and poitrels and bridles +of gold; but this is not to be wondered at, for the lands on +the sea-coast are only inhabited by fishermen, and moreover +I made no stay there, because I was in haste to proceed on +my voyage. In Cariay and the neighbouring country there +are great enchanters of a very fearful character. They +would have given the world to prevent my remaining there +an hour. When I arrived they sent me immediately two +girls very showily dressed; the eldest could not be more +than eleven years of age and the other seven, and both exhibited +so much immodesty, that more could not be expected +from public women; they carried concealed about them a +magic powder; when they came I gave them some articles +to dress themselves out with, and directly sent them back +to the shore. I saw here, built on a mountain, a sepulchre +as large as a house, and elaborately sculptured, the body lay +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_200">[200]</span>uncovered and with the face downwards; they also spoke to +me of other very excellent works of art. There are many +species of animals both small and large, and very different +from those of our country. I had at the time two +boars, that an Irish dog would not dare to face. An +archer had wounded an animal like an ape, except that it +was larger, and had a face like a man’s; the arrow had +pierced it from the neck to the tail, which made it so fierce +that they were obliged to disable it by cutting off one of its +arms and a leg; one of the boars grew wild on seeing this +and fled; upon which I ordered the <i>begare</i> (as the inhabitants +called him) to be thrown to the boar, and though the +animal was nearly dead, and the arrow had passed quite +through his body, yet he threw his tail round the snout of +the boar, and then holding him firmly, seized him by the +nape of the neck with his remaining hand, as if he were +engaged with an enemy. This action was so novel and so +extraordinary, that I have thought it worth while to describe +it here. There is a great variety of animals here, but they +all die of the barra.⁠<a id="FNanchor_211" href="#Footnote_211" class="fnanchor">[211]</a> I saw some very large fowls (the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_201">[201]</span>feathers of which resemble wool), lions, stags, fallow-deer, +and birds.</p> + +<p>When we were so harassed with our troubles at sea, some +of our men imagined that we were under the influence of +sorcery, and even to this day entertain the same notion. +Some of the people whom I discovered were cannibals, as was +evidenced by the brutality of their countenances. They say +that there are great mines of copper in the country, of which +they make hatchets and other elaborate articles, both cast +and soldered; they also make of it forges, with all the apparatus +of the goldsmith, and crucibles. The inhabitants go +clothed; and in that province I saw some large sheets of +cotton very elaborately and cleverly worked, and others very +delicately pencilled in colours. They told me that more inland +towards Cathay they have them interwoven with gold. For +want of an interpreter we were able to learn but very little respecting +these countries, or what they contain. Although the +country is very thickly peopled, yet each nation has a very +different language; indeed so much so, that they can no +more understand each other than we understand the Arabs. +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_202">[202]</span>I think, however, that this applies to the barbarians on the +sea-coast, and not to the people who live more inland. When +I discovered the Indies, I said that they composed the richest +lordship in the world; I spoke of gold and pearls and precious +stones, of spices, and the traffic that might be carried on in +them; and because all these things were not forthcoming at +once I was abused. This punishment causes me to refrain +from relating anything but what the natives tell me. One +thing I can venture upon stating, because there are so many +witnesses of it, viz., that in this land of Veragua I saw more +signs of gold in the two first days than I saw in Española +during four years, and that there is not a more fertile or +better cultivated country in all the world, nor one whose inhabitants +are more timid; added to which there is a good harbour, +a beautiful river, and the whole place is capable of +being easily put into a state of defence. All this tends to +the security of the Christians, and the permanency of their +sovereignty, while it affords the hope of great increase and +honour to the Christian religion; moreover the road hither +will be as short as that to Española, because there is a certainty +of a fair wind for the passage. Your Highnesses are +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_203">[203]</span>as much lords of this country as of Xeres or Toledo, and your +ships that may come here will do so with the same freedom +as if they were going to your own royal palace. From +hence they will obtain gold, and whereas if they should wish +to become masters of the products of other lands, they will +have to take them by force, or retire empty-handed, in this +country they will simply have to trust their persons in the +hands of a savage.</p> + +<p>I have already explained my reason for refraining to treat +of other subjects respecting which I might speak. I do not +state as certain, nor do I confirm even the sixth part of all +that I have said or written, nor do I pretend to be at the +fountain-head of the information. The Genoese, Venetians, +and all other nations that possess pearls, precious stones, and +other articles of value, take them to the ends of the world to +exchange them for gold. Gold is the most precious of all +commodities; gold constitutes treasure, and he who possesses +it has all he needs in this world, as also the means of rescuing +souls from purgatory, and restoring them to the enjoyment +of paradise. They say that when one of the lords of the +country of Veragua dies, they bury all the gold he possessed +with his body. There were brought to Solomon at one journey +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_204">[204]</span>six hundred and sixty-six quintals of gold, besides what +the merchants and sailors brought, and that which was paid +in Arabia. Of this gold he made two hundred lances and three +hundred shields, and the entablature which was above them +was also of gold, and ornamented with precious stones: many +other things he made likewise of gold, and a great number of +vessels of great size, which he enriched with precious stones. +This is related by Josephus in his Chronicle “de Antiquitatibus”; +mention is also made of it in the Chronicles and in +the Book of Kings. Josephus thinks that this gold was found +in the Aurea; if it were so, I contend that these mines of +the Aurea are identical with those of Veragua, which, as I +have said before, extends westward twenty days’ journey, at +an equal distance from the Pole and the Line. Solomon +bought all of it,—gold, precious stones, and silver,—but your +Majesties need only send to seek them to have them at your +pleasure. David, in his will, left three thousand quintals of +Indian gold to Solomon, to assist in building the Temple; +and, according to Josephus, it came from these lands. Jerusalem +and Mount Sion are to be rebuilt by the hands of +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_205">[205]</span>Christians, as God has declared by the mouth of His prophet +in the fourteenth Psalm. The Abbé Joaquim said that he +who should do this was to come from Spain; Saint Jerome +showed the holy woman the way to accomplish it; and the +emperor of Cathay has, some time since, sent for wise men to +instruct him in the faith of Christ. Who will offer himself +for this work? Should any one do so, I pledge myself, in +the name of God, to convey him safely thither, provided the +Lord permits me to return to Spain. The people who have +sailed with me have passed through incredible toil and danger, +and I beseech your Highnesses, since they are poor, to pay +them promptly, and to be gracious to each of them according +to their respective merits; for I can safely assert, that to my +belief they are the bearers of the best news that ever were +carried to Spain. With respect to the gold which belongs to +Quibian, the cacique of Veragua, and other chiefs in the +neighbouring country, although it appears by the accounts +we have received of it to be very abundant, I do not think it +would be well or desirable, on the part of your Highnesses, +to take possession of it in the way of plunder; by fair dealing, +scandal and disrepute will be avoided, and all the gold will +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_206">[206]</span>thus reach your Highnesses’ treasury without the loss of a +grain. With one month of fair weather I shall complete my +voyage. As I was deficient in ships, I did not persist in delaying +my course; but in everything that concerns your +Highnesses’ service, I trust in Him who made me, and I hope +also that my health will be re-established. I think your +Highnesses will remember that I had intended to build some +ships in a new manner, but the shortness of the time did not +permit it. I had certainly foreseen how things would be. I +think more of this opening for commerce, and of the lordship +over such extensive mines, than of all that has been done in +the Indies. This is not a child to be left to the care of a +step-mother.</p> + +<p>I never think of Española, and Paria, and the other countries, +without shedding tears. I thought that what had occurred +there would have been an example for others; on +the contrary, these settlements are now in a languid state, +although not dead, and the malady is incurable, or at least +very extensive: let him who brought the evil come now and +cure it, if he knows the remedy, or how to apply it; but +when a disturbance is on foot, every one is ready to take +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_207">[207]</span>the lead. It used to be the custom to give thanks and promotion +to him who placed his person in jeopardy; but there +is no justice in allowing the man who opposed this undertaking, +to enjoy the fruits of it with his children. Those +who left the Indies, avoiding the toils consequent upon the +enterprise, and speaking evil of it and me, have since returned +with official appointments,—such is the case now in +Veragua: it is an evil example, and profitless both as regards +the business in which we are embarked, and as respects +the general maintenance of justice. The fear of this, +with other sufficient considerations, which I clearly foresaw, +caused me to beg your Highnesses, previously to my coming +to discover these islands and terra firma, to grant me permission +to govern in your royal name. Your Highnesses +granted my request; and it was a privilege and treaty +granted under the royal seal and oath, by which I was nominated +viceroy, and admiral, and governor-general of all: +and your Highnesses limited the extent of my government +to a hundred leagues beyond the Azores and Cape Verde +islands, by a line passing from one pole to the other, and +gave me ample power over all that I might discover beyond +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_208">[208]</span>this line; all which is more fully described in the official +document.</p> + +<p>But the most important affair of all, and that which cries +most loudly for redress, remains inexplicable to this moment. +For seven years was I at your royal court, where +every one to whom the enterprise was mentioned, treated it +as ridiculous; but now there is not a man, down to the +very tailors, who does not beg to be allowed to become a +discoverer. There is reason to believe, that they make the +voyage only for plunder, and that they are permitted to do +so, to the great disparagement of my honour, and the detriment +of the undertaking itself. It is right to give God His +due,—and to receive that which belongs to one’s self. This +is a just sentiment, and proceeds from just feelings. The +lands in this part of the world, which are now under your +Highnesses’ sway, are richer and more extensive than those +of any other Christian power, and yet, after that I had, by +the Divine will, placed them under your high and royal +sovereignty, and was on the point of bringing your majesties +into the receipt of a very great and unexpected revenue; +and while I was waiting for ships, to convey me in safety, +and with a heart full of joy, to your royal presence, victoriously +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_209">[209]</span>to announce the news of the gold that I had discovered, +I was arrested and thrown, with my two brothers, +loaded with irons, into a ship, stripped, and very ill-treated, +without being allowed any appeal to justice. Who could +believe, that a poor foreigner would have risen against your +Highnesses, in such a place, without any motive or argument +on his side; without even the assistance of any other +prince upon which to rely; but on the contrary, amongst +your own vassals and natural subjects, and with my sons +staying at your royal court? I was twenty-eight years old⁠<a id="FNanchor_212" href="#Footnote_212" class="fnanchor">[212]</a> +when I came into your Highnesses’ service, and now I have +not a hair upon me that is not grey; my body is infirm, +and all that was left to me, as well as to my brothers, has +been taken away and sold, even to the frock that I wore, to +my great dishonour. I cannot but believe that this was +done without your royal permission. The restitution of my +honour, the reparation of my losses, and the punishment of +those who have inflicted them, will redound to the honour +of your royal character; a similar punishment also is due to +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_210">[210]</span>those who plundered me of my pearls, and who have brought +a disparagement upon the privileges of my admiralty. Great +and unexampled will be the glory and fame of your Highnesses, +if you do this, and the memory of your Highnesses, +as just and grateful sovereigns, will survive as a bright example +to Spain in future ages. The honest devotedness I +have always shown to your majesties’ service, and the so unmerited +outrage with which it has been repaid, will not allow +my soul to keep silence, however much I may wish it: I +implore your Highnesses to forgive my complaints. I am +indeed in as ruined a condition as I have related; hitherto +I have wept over others;—may Heaven now have mercy +upon me, and may the earth weep for me. With regard to +temporal things, I have not even a blanca for an offering; +and in spiritual things, I have ceased here in the Indies +from observing the prescribed forms of religion. Solitary +in my trouble, sick, and in daily expectation of death, surrounded +by millions of hostile savages full of cruelty, and +thus separated from the blessed sacraments of our holy +Church, how will my soul be forgotten if it be separated +from the body in this foreign land? Weep for me, whoever +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_211">[211]</span>has charity, truth, and justice! I did not come out on this +voyage to gain to myself honour or wealth; this is a certain +fact, for at that time all hope of such a thing was dead. I +do not lie when I say that I went to your Highnesses with +honest purpose of heart, and sincere zeal in your cause. I +humbly beseech your Highnesses, that if it please God to +rescue me from this place, you will graciously sanction my +pilgrimage to Rome and other holy places. May the Holy +Trinity protect your Highnesses’ lives, and add to the prosperity +of your exalted position.</p> + +<p>Done in the Indies, in the island of Jamaica, on the +seventh of July, in the year one thousand five hundred and +three.</p> + +</div> + +<div class="spanish"> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CUARTO_VIAGE_DE_COLON">CUARTO VIAGE DE COLON.</h2> + +<h3 class="hanging"><i>Carta que escribió D. Cristóbal Colon, Virey y Almirante de las Indias, +á los Cristianísimos y muy poderosos Rey y Reina de España, +nuestros Señores, en que les notifica cuanto le ha acontecido en +su viage; y las tierras, provincias, ciudades, rios y otras cosas +maravillosas, y donde hay minas de oro en mucha cantidad, y +otras cosas de gran riqueza y valor.</i></h3> + +<p>Serenísimos y muy altos y poderosos Príncipes Rey é Reina, +nuestros Señores: De Caliz pasé á Canaria en cuatro dias, y dende +á las Indias en diez y seis dias, donde escribia. Mi intencion era +dar prisa á mi viage en cuanto yo tenia los navíos buenos, la +gente y los bastimentos, y que mi derrota era en el Isla Jamaica; +y en la Isla Dominica escribí esto: fasta allí truje el tiempo á +pedir por la boca. Esa noche que alli entré fué con tormenta y +grande, y me persiguió despues siempre. Cuando llegué sobre la +Española invié el envoltorio de cartas, y á pedir por merced un +navío por mis dineros, porque otro que yo llevaba era inavegable +y no sufria velas. Las cartas tomaron, y sabrán si se las dieron +la respuesta. Para mí fué mandarme de parte de ahí, que yo no +pasase ni llegase á la tierra: cayó el corazon á la gente que iba +conmigo, por temor de los llevar yo lejos, diciendo que si algun +caso de peligro les viniese que no serian remediados allí, antes les +sería fecha alguna grande afrenta. Tambien á quien plugo dijo +que el Comendador habia de proveer las tierras que yo ganase. +La tormenta era terrible, y en aquella noche me desmembró los +navíos: á cada uno llevó por su cabo sin esperanzas, salvo de +muerte: cada uno de ellos tenia por cierto que los otros eran perdidos. +¿Quién nasció, sin quitar á Job, que no muriera desesperado? +que por mi salvacion y de mi fijo, hermano y amigos me +fuese en tal tiempo defendida la tierra y los puertos que yo, por la +voluntad de Dios, gané á España sudando sangre? E torno á los +navíos que así me habia llevado la tormenta y dejado á mí solo. +Deparómelos nuestro Señor cuando le plugo. El navío Sospechoso +habia echado á la mar, por escapar, fasta la isola la Gallega; perdió +la barca, y todos gran parte de los bastimentos: en el que yo +iba, abalumado á maravilla, nuestro Señor le salvó que no hubo +daño de una paja. En el Sospechoso iba mi hermano; y él, +despues de Dios, fue su remedio. E con esta tormenta, así a +gatas, me llegué á Jamaica: allí se mudó de mar alta on calmería +y grande corriente, y me llevó fasta el Jardin de la Reina sin ver +tierra. De allí, cuando pude, navegué á la tierra firme; adonde +me salió el viento y corriente terrible al opósito: combati con ellos +sesenta dias, y en fin no le pude ganar mas de setenta leguas. En +todo este tiempo no entré puerto, ni pude, ni me dejó tormenta del +cielo, agua y trombones y relámpagos de continuo, que parecia el +fin del mundo. Llegué al cabo de Gracias á Dios, y de allí me dió +nuestro Señor próspero el viento y corriente. Esto fue á doce de +Setiembre. Ochenta y ocho dias habia que no me habia dejado +espantable tormenta, á tanto que no vide el sol ni estrellas por +mar; que á los navíos tenia yo abiertos, á las velas rotas, y perdidas +anclas y jarcia, cables, con las barcas y muchos bastimentos, +la gento muy enferma, y todos contritos, y muchos con promesa +de religion, y no ninguno sin otros votos y romerías. Muchas +veces habian llegado á se confesar los unos á los otros. Otras +tormentas se han visto, mas no durar tanto ni con tanto espanto. +Muchos esmorecieron, harto y hartas veces, que teniamos por +esforzados. El dolor del fijo que yo tenia allí me arrancaba el +ánima, y mas por verle de tan nueva edad de trece años en tanta +fatiga, y durar en ello tanto: nuestro Señor le dió tal esfuerzo que +él avivaba á los otros, y en las obras hacia el como si hubiera +navegado ochenta años, y él me consolaba. Yo habia adolescido +y llegado fartas veces á la muerte. De una camarilla, que yo +mandé facer sobre cubierta, mandaba la via. Mi hermano estaba +en el peor navío y mas peligroso. Gran dolor era mio, y mayor +porque lo truje contra su grado; porque por mi dicha, poco me +han aprovechado veinte años de servicio que yo he servido con +tantos trabajos y peligros, que hoy dia no tengo en Castilla una +teja; si quiero comer ó dormir no tengo, salvo al meson ó taberna, +y las mas de las veces falta parar pagar el escote. Otra lastima +me arrancaba el corazon por las espaldas, y era D. Diego mi hijo, +que yo dejé en España tan huérfano y desposesionado de mi honra +é hacienda; bien que tenia por cierto que allá como justos y +agradecidos Principes le restituirian con acrescentamiento en +todo. Llegué á tierra de Cariay, adonde me detuve á remediar +los navíos y bastimentos, y dar aliento á la gente, que venia muy +enferma. Yo que, como dije, habia llegado muchas veces á la +muerte, allí supe de las minas del oro de la provincia de Ciamba, +que yo buscaba. Dos indios me llevaron á Carambaru, adonde la +gente anda desnuda y al cuello un espejo de oro, mas no le querian +vender ni dar á trueque. Nombraronme muchos lugares en la +costa de la mar, adonde decian que habia oro y minas; el +postrero era Veragua, y lejos de allí obra de veinte y cinco +leguas: partí con intencion de los tentar á todos, y llegado ya el +medio supe que habia minas á dos jornadas de andadura: acorde +de inviarlas á ver vispera de San Simon y Judas, que habia de +ser la partida: en esa noche se levantó tanta mar y viento, que +fue necesario de correr hácia adonde él quiso; é el indio adalid +de las minas siempre conmigo. En todos estos lugares, adonde +yo habia estado, fallé verdad todo lo que yo habia oido: esto me +certifico que es así de la provincia de Ciguare, que segun ellos, es +descrita nueve jornadas de andadura por tierra al Poniente: allí +dicen que hay infinito oro, y que traen corales en las cabezas, manillas +á los pies y á los brazos dello, y bien gordas; y dél, sillas, +arcas, y mesas las guarnecen y enforran. Tambien dijeron que +las mugeres de allí traian collares colgados de la cabeza á las +espaldas. En esto que yo dijo, la gente toda de estos lugares +conciertan en ello, y dicen tanto que yo seria contento con el +diezmo. Tambien todos conocieron la pimienta. En Ciguare +usan tratar en ferias y mercaderías: esta gente así lo cuentan, y +me amostraban el modo y forma que tienen en la barata. Otrosi +dicen que las naos traen bombardas, arcos y fiechas, espadas y +corazas, y andan vestidos, y en la tierra hay caballos, y usan la +guerra, y traen ricas vestiduras, y tienen buenas cosas. Tambien +dicen que la mar boxa á Ciguare, y de allí á diez jornadas es el +rio de Gangnes. Parece que estas tierras estan con Veragua, +como Tortosa con Fuenterabía, ó Pisa con Venecia. Cuando yo +partí de Carambaru y llegué á esos lugares que dije, fallé la gente +en aquel mismo uso, salvo que los espejos del oro: quien los tenia +los daba por tres cascabeles de gabilan por el uno, bien que +pesasan diez ó quince ducados de peso. En todos sus usos son +como los de la Española. El oro cogen con otras artes, bien que +todos son nada con los de los Cristianos. Esto que yo he dicho +es lo que oyo. Lo que yo sé es que el año de noventa y cuatro +navegué en veinte y cuatro grados al Poniente en término de +nueve horas, y no pudo haber yerro porque hubo eclipses: el sol +estaba en Libra y la luna en Ariete. Tambien esto que yo supe +por palabra habialo yo sabido largo por escrito. Tolomeo creyó +de haber bien remedado á Marino, y ahora se falla su escritura +bien propincua al cierto. Tolomeo asienta Catigara á doce lineas +lejos de su Occidente, que él asentó sobre el cabo de San Vicente +en Portugal dos grados y un tercio. Marino en quince líneas +constituyó la tierra é términos. Marino en Etiopia escribe al +Indo la línea equinocial mas de veinte y cuatro grados, y ahora +que los Portugueses le navegan le fallan cierto. Tolomeo diz que +la tierra mas austral es el plazo primero, y que no abaja mas de +quince grados y un tercio. E el mundo es poco: el enjuto de ello +es seis partes, la séptima solamente cubierta de agua: la experiencia +ya está vista, y la escribí por otras letras y con adornamiento +de la Sacra Escriptura con el sitio del Paraiso terrenal, que la +santa Iglesia aprueba: digo que el mundo no es tan grande como +dice el vulgo, y que un grado de la equinoccial está cincuenta y +seis millas y dos tercios: pero esto se tocará con el dedo. Dejo +esto, por cuanto no es mi propósito de fablar en aquella materia, +salvo de dar cuenta de mi duro y trabajoso viage, bien que él sea +el mas noble y provechoso. Digo que víspera de San Simon y +Judas corrí donde el viento me llevaba, sin poder resistirle. En +un puerto excusé diez dias de gran fortuna de la mar y del cielo: +allí acordé de no volver atras á las minas, y dejelas ya por +ganadas. Partí, por seguir mi viage, lloviendo: llegué á puerto +de Bastimentos, adonde entré y no de grado: la tormenta y gran +corriente me entró allí catorce dias; y despues partí, y no con +buen tiempo. Cuando yo hube andado quince leguas forzosamente, +me reposó atras el viento y corriente con furia: volviendo +yo al puerto de donde habia salido fallé en el camino al Retrete, +adonde me retruje con harto peligro y enojo y bien fatigado yo y +los navíos y la gente: detúveme allí quince dias, que así lo quiso +el cruel tiempo; y cuando creí de haber acabado me fallé de +comienzo: allí mudé de sentencia de volver á las minas, y hacer +algo fasta que me viniese tiempo para mi viage y marear; y +llegado con cuatro leguas revino la tormenta, y me fatigó tanto á +tanto que ya no sabia de mi parte. Allí se me refrescó del mal la +llaga: nueve dias anduve perdido sin esperanza de vida: ojos +nunca vieron la mar tan alta, fea y hecha espuma. El viento no +era para ir adelante, ni daba lugar para correr hácia algun cabo. +Allí me detenia en aquella mar fecha sangre, herbiendo como +caldera por gran fuego. El cielo jamas fue visto tan espantoso: +un dia con la noche ardió como forno: y así echaba la llama con +los rayos, que cada vez miraba yo si me habia llevado los masteles +y velas; venian con tanta furia espantables que todos creiamos +que me habian de fundir los navíos. En todo este tiempo jamas +cesó agua del cielo, y no para decir que llovia, salvo que resegundaba +otro diluvio. La gente estaba ya tan molida que deseaban +la muerte para salir de tantos martirios. Los navíos ya habian +perdido dos veces las barcas, anclas, cuerdas, y estaban abiertos, +sin velas.</p> + +<p>Cuando plugo á nuestro Señor volví á Puerto Gordo, adonde +reparé lo mejor que pude. Volví otra vez hácia Veragua para mi +viage, aunque yo no estuviera para ello. Todavía era el viento y +corrientes contrarios. Llegué casi adonde antes, y allí me salió +otra vez el viento y corrientes al encuentro, y volví otra vez al +puerto, que no osé esparar la oposicion de Saturno con mares tan +desbaratados en costa brava, porque las mas de las veces trae +tempestad ó fuerte tiempo. Esto fue dia de Navidad en horas +de misa. Volví otra vez adonde yo habia salido con harta fatiga; +y pasado año nuevo torné á la porfia, que aunque me hiciera buen +tiempo para mi viage, ya tenia los navíos innavegables, y la gente +muerta y enferma. Dia de la Epifania llegué á Veragua, ya sin +aliento: allí me deparó nuestro Señor un rio y seguro puerto, bien +que á la entrada no tenia salvo diez palmos de fondo: metíme en +él con pena, y el dia siguiente recordó la fortuna: si me falla +fuera, no pudiera entrar á causa del banco. Llovió sin cesar +fasta catorce de Febrero, que nunca hubo lugar de entrar en la +tierra, ni de me remediar en nada: y estando ya seguro á veinte +y cuatro de Enero, de improviso vino el rio muy alto y fuerte; +quebróme las amarras y proeses, y hubo de llevar los navíos, y +cierto los ví en mayor peligro que nunca. Remedió nuestro +Señor, como siempre hizo. No sé si hubo otro con mas martirios.</p> + +<p>A seis de Febrero, lloviendo, invié setenta hombres la tierra +adentro; y á las cinco leguas fallaron muchas minas: los Indios +que iban con ellos los llevaron á un cerro muy alto, y de allí les +mostraron hácia toda parte cuanto los ojos alcanzaban, diciendo +que en toda parte habia oro, y que hácia el Poniente llegaban las +minas veinte jornadas, y nombraban las villas y lugares, y adonde +habia de ello mas ó menos. Despues supe yo que el Quibian que +habia dado estos Indios, les habia mandado que fuesen á mostrar +las minas lejos y de otro su contrario; y que adentro de su pueblo +cogian, cuando el queria, un hombre en diez dias una mozada de +oro: los indios sus criados y testigos de esto traigo conmigo. +Adonde él tiene el pueblo llegan las barcas. Volvió mi hermano +con esa gente, y todos con oro que habian cogido en cuatro horas +qué fué allá á la estada. La calidad es grande, porque ninguno de +estos jamas habia visto minas, y los mas oro. Los mas eran gente +de la mar, y casí todos grumetes. Yo tenia mucho aparejo para +edificar y muchos bastimentos. Asenté pueblo, y dí muchas +dádivas al Quibian, que así llaman al Señor de la tierra; y bien +sabia que no habia de durar la concordia: ellos muy rústicos y +nuestra gente muy importunos, y me aposesionaba en su término: +despues que él vido las cosas fechas y el tráfago tan vivo acordó +de las quemar y matarnos á todos: muy al reves salió su +propósito: quedó preso él, mugeres y fijos y criados; bien que +su prision duró poco: el Quibian se fuyo á un hombre honrado, á +quien se habia entregado con guarda de hombres; é los hijos +se fueron á un Maestre de navío, a quien se dieron en él á buen +recaudo.</p> + +<p>En Enero se habia cerrado la boca del rio. En Abril los navíos +estaban todos comidos de broma, y no los podia sostener sobre +agua. En este tiempo hizo el rio una canal, por donde saqué tres +dellos vacios con gran pena. Las barcas volvieron adentro por la +sal y agua. La mar se puso alta y fea, y no les dejó salir fuera: +los Indios fueron muchos y juntos y las combatieron, y en fin los +mataron. Mi hermano y la otra gente toda estaban en un navío +que quedo adentro: yo muy solo de fuera en tan brava costa, con +fuerte fiebre, en tanta fatiga: la esperanza de escapar era muerta: +subi así trabajando lo mas alto, llamando á voz temerosa, llorando +y muy aprisa, los maestros de la guerra de vuestras Altezas, á todos +cuatro los vientos, por socorro; mas nunca me respondieron. +Cansado, me dormecí gimiendo: una voz muy piadosa oí, diciendo: +“<i>¡O estulto y tardo á creer y servir á tu Dios, Dios de todos! ¿Que +hizo él mas por Moysés ó por David su siervo? Desque nasciste, +siempre él tuvo de tí muy grande cargo. Cuando te vido en edad +de que él fue contento, maravillosamente hizo sonar tu nombre en la +tierra. Las Indias, que son parte del mundo tam ricas, te las dió +por tuyas: tu las repartiste adonde te plugo, y te dió poder para +ello. De los atamientos de la mar océana, que estaban cerrados con +cadenas tan fuertes, te dió las llaves; y fuiste obedescido en tantas +tierras, y de los cristianos cobraste tan honrada fama. ¿Qué hizo el +mas Alto [por el] pueblo de Israel cuando le sacó de Egipto? ¿Ni por +David, que de pastor hizo Rey en Judea? Tórnate á el, y conoce ya +tu yerro: su misericordia es infinita: tu vejez no impedirá á toda +cosa grande: muchas heredades tiene él grandísimas. Abrahan +pasaba de cien años cuando engendró á Isaac, ¿ni Sara era moza? +Tú llamas por socorro incierto: responde, ¿quién te ha afligido tanto +y tantas veces, Dios ó el mundo? Los privilegios y promesas que dá +Dios, no las quebranta, ni dice despues de haber recibido el servicio, +que su intencion no era este, y que se entiende de otra manera, ni dá +martirios por dar color á la fuerza: él vá al pie de la letra: todo lo +que él promete cumple con acrescentamiento: ¿esto es uso? Dicho +tengo lo que tu Criador ha fecho por tí y hace con todos. Ahora +medio muestra el galardon áe estos afanes y peligros que has pasado +sirviendo á otros.</i>”</p> + +<p>Yo así amortecido oí todo; mas no tuve yo respuesta á palabras +tan ciertas, salvo llorar por mis yerros. Acabó él de fablar, quien +quiera que fuese, diciendo: “<i>No temas, confia: todas estas tribulaciones +estan escritas en piedra mármol, y no sin causa.</i>”</p> + +<p>Levantéme cuando pude: y al cabo de nueve dias hizo bonanza, +mas no para sacar navíos del rio. Recogí la gente que estaba en +tierra, y todo el resto que puede, porque no bastaban para quedar +y para navegar los navíos. Quedara yo á sostener el pueblo contodos, +si vuestras Altezas supieran de ello. El temor que nunca +aportarian allí navíos me determinó á esto, y la cuenta que cuando +se haya de proveer de socorro se proveera de todo. Partí en nombre +de la Santísima Trinidad, la noche de Pascua, con los navíos +podridos, abrumados, todos fechos agujeros. Allí en Belen dejé +uno, y hartas cosas. En Belpuerto hice otro tanto. No me quedaron +salvo dos en el estado de los otros, y sin barcas y bastimentos, +por haber de pasar siete mil millas de mar y de agua, ó morir en +la via con fijo y hermano y tanta gente. Respondan ahora los que +suelen tachar y reprender, diciendo allá de en salvo: ¿por qué no +haciades esto allí? Los quisiera yo en esta jornada. Yo bien +creo que otra de otro saber los aguarda: á nuestra fe es ninguna. +Llegué á trece de Mayo en la provincia de Mago, que parte con +aquella del Catayo, y de allí partí para la Española: navegué dos +dias con buen tiempo, y despues fue contrario. El camino que yo +llevaba era para desechar tanto número de islas, por no me embarazar +en los bajos de ellas. La mar brava me hizo fuerza, y hube +volver atras sin velas: surgí á una isla adonde de golpe perdí tres +anclas, y á la media noche, que parecia que el mundo se ensolvia, +se rompieron las amarras al otro navío, y vino sobre mí, que fue +maravilla como no nos acabamos de se hacer rajas: el ancla, de +forma que me quedó, fue ella despues de nuestro Señor, quien me +sostuvo. Al cabo de seis dias que ya era bonanza, volví á mi camino: +asi ya perdido del todo de aparejos y con los navíos horadados +de gusanos mas que un panal de abejas, y la gente tan acobardada +y perdida, pasé algo adelante de donde yo habia llegado denantes: +allí me torné á reposar atras la fortuna: paré en la misma +isla en mas seguro puerto: al cabo de ocho dias torné á la via y +llegué á Jamaica en fin de Junio siempre con vientos punteros, y +los navíos en peor estado: con tres bombas, tinas y calderas no +podian con toda la gente vencer el agua que entraba en el navío, +ni para este mal de broma hay otra cura. Cometí el camino +para me acercar á lo mas cercar de la Española, que son veinte +y ocho leguas, y no quisiera haber comenzado. El otro navío +corrió á buscar puerto casi anegado. Yo porfié la vuelta de +la mar con tormenta. El navio se me anegó, que milagrosamente +me trujo nuestro Señor á tierra. ¿Quién creyera lo que yo aquí +escribo? Digo que de cien partes no he dicho la una en esta letra. +Los que fueron con el Almirante lo atestigüen. Si place á vuestras +Altezas de me hacer merced de socorro un navío que pase de +sesenta y cuatro, con ducientos quintales de bizcocho y algun otro +bastimento, abastará para me llevar á mí y á esta gente á España +de la Española. En Jamaica ya dije que no hay veinte y ocho leguas +á la Española. No fuera yo, bien que los navíos estuvieran +para ello. Ya dije que me fue mandado de parte de vuestras Altezas +que no llegase á alla. Si este mandar ha aprovechado, Dios +lo sabe. Esta carta invio por via y mano de Indios: grande maravilla +será si allá llega. De mi viage digo: que fueron ciento y +cincuenta personas conmigo, en que hay hartos suficientes para +pilotos y grandes marineros: ninguno puede dar razon cierta por +donde fuí yo ni vine: la razon es muy presta. Yo partí de sobre +el puerto del Brasil: en la Española no me dejó la tormenta ir al +camino que yo queria: fue por fuerza correr adonde el viento +quiso. En ese dia caí yo muy enfermo: ninguno habia navegado +hácia aquella parte: cesó el viento y mar dende á ciertos dias, y se +mudó la tormenta en calmería y grandes corrientes. Fuí á aportar +á una isla que se dijo de las Bocas, y de allí a Tierra firme. Ninguno +puede dar cuenta verdadera de esto, porque no hay razon +que abaste; porque fue ir con corriente sin ver tierra tanto número +de dias. Seguí la costa de la Tierra firme: esta se asentó con compás +y arte. Ninguno hay que diga debajo cuál parte del cielo ó +cuándo yo partí de ella para venir á la Española. Los pilotos creian +venir á parar á la isla de Sanct-Joan; y fue en tierra de Mango, +cuatrocientas leguas mas al Poniente de adonde decian. Respondan, +si saben, adónde es el sitio de Veragua. Digo que no +pueden dar otra razon ni cuenta, salvo que fueron á unas tierras +adonde hay mucho oro, y certificarle; mas para volver á ella el +camino tienen ignoto: seria necesario para ir á ella descubrirla +como de primero. Una cuenta hay y razon de astrología y cierta: +quien la entiende esto le abasta. A vision profética se asemeja +esto. Las naos de las Indias, si no navegan salvo á popa, no es +por la mala fechura, ni por ser fuertes; las grandes corrientes que +allí vienen; juntamente con el viento hacen que nadie porfie con +bolina, porque en un dia perderian lo que hubiesen ganado en +siete; ni saco carabela aunque sea latina portuguesa. Esta razon +hace que no naveguen, salvo con colla, y por esperarle se detienen +á las veces seis y ocho meses en puerto; ni es maravilla, pues que +en España muchas veces acaece otro tanto. La gente de que +escribe Papa Pio, segun el sitio y señas, se ha hallado, mas no los +caballos, pretales y frenos de oro, ni es maravilla, porque allí las +tierras de la costa de la mar no reuieren, salvo pescadores, ni yo +me detuve porque andaba á prisa. En Cariay y en essas tierras de +su comarca, son grandes fechiceros y muy medrosos. Dieran el +mundo porque no me detuviera allí una hora. Cuando llegué allí +luego me inviaron dos muchachas muy ataviadas: la mas vieja no +seria de once años y la otra de siete; ambas con tanta desenvoltura +que no serian mas unas putas: traian polvos de hechizos escondidos: +en llegando las mandé adornar de nuestras cosas y las invié +luego á tierra: allí vide una sepultura en el monte, grande como +una casa y labrada, y el cuerpo descubierto y mirando en ella. De +otras artes me dijeron y mas excelentes. Animalias menudas y +grandes hay hartas y muy diversas de las nuestras. Dos puercos +hube yo en presente, y un perro de Irlanda no osaba esperarlos. +Un ballestero habia herido una animalia, que se parece á gato paul, +salvo que es mucho mas grande, y el rostro de hombre: teniale +atravesado con una saeta desde los pechos á la cola, y porque era +feroz le hubo de cortar un brazo y una pierna: el puerco en viéndole +se le encrespó y se fue huyendo: yo cuando esto ví mandé +echarle <i>begare</i>, que así se llama adonde estaba: en llegando á él, +así estando á la muerte y la saeta siempre en el cuerpo, le echó la +cola por el hocico y se la amarró muy fuerte, y con la mano que le +quedaba le arrebató por el copete como á enemigo. El auto tan +nuevo y hermosa montería me hizo escribir esto. De muchas maneras +de animalias se hubo, mas todas mueren de barra. Gallinas +muy grandes y la pluma como lana vide hartas. Leones, ciervos, +corzos otro tanto, y así aves.</p> + +<p>Cuando yo andaba por aquella mar en fatiga en algunos se puso +heregía que estabamos enfechizados, que hoy dia estan en ello. +Otra gente fallé que comian hombres: la desformidad de su gesto +lo dice. Allí dicen qué hay grandes mineros de cobre: hachas +de ello, otras cosas labradas, fundidas, soladas hube, y fraguas con +todo su aparejo de platero y los crisoles. Allí van vestidos; y en +aquella provincia vide sábanas grandes de algodon, labradas de +muy sotiles labores; otras píntadas muy sútilmente á colores con +pinceles. Dicen que en la tierra adentro hácia el Catayo las hay +tejidas de oro. De todas estas tierras y de lo que hay en ellas, +falta de lengua, no se saben tan presto. Los pueblos, bien que +sean espesos, cada uno tiene diferenciada lengua, y es en tanto +que no se entienden los unos con los otros, mas que nos con los +de Arabia. Yo creo que esto sea en esta gente salvage de la costa +de la mar, mas no en la tierra dentro. Cuando yo descubrí las +Indias dije que eran el mayor señorío rico que hay en el mundo. +Yo dije del oro, perlas, piedras preciosas, especerías, con los tratos +y ferias, y porque no pareció todo tan presto fuí escandalizado. +Este castigo me hace agora que no diga salvo lo que yo oigo de +los naturales de la tierra. De una oso decir, porque hay tantos +testigos, y es que yo vide en esta tierra de Veragua mayor señal +de oro en dos dias primeros que en la Española en cuatro años, +y que las tierras de la comarca no pueden ser mas fermosas, ni +mas labradas, ni la gente mas cobarde, y buen puerto, y fermoso +rio, y defensible al mundo. Todo esto es seguridad de los cristianos +y certeza de señorío, con grande esperanza de la honra y +acrescentamiento de la religion cristiana; y el camino, allí será +tan breve como á la Española, porque ha de ser con viento. Tan +señores son vuestras Altezas de esto como de Jerez ó Toledo: sus +navíos que fueren allí van á su casa. De allí sacarán oro: en otras +tierras, para haber de lo que hay en ellas, conviene que se lo +lleven, ó se volverán vacíos; y en la tierra es necesario que fien +sus personas de un salvage. Del otro que yo dejo de decir, ya +dije por qué me encerré: no digo así, ni que yo me afirme en el +tres doble en todo lo que yo haya jamas dicho ni escrito, y que yo +estó a la fuente. Genoveses, Venecianos y toda gente que tenga +perlas, piedras preciosas y otras cosas de valor, todos las llevan +hasta el cabo del mundo para las trocar, convertir en oro: el oro +es excelentísimo: del oro se hace tesoro, y con él, quien lo tiene, +hace cuanto quiere en el mundo, y llega á que echa las animas al +paraiso. Los señores de aquellas tierras de la comarca Veragua +cuando mueren entierran el oro que tienen con el cuerpo, así lo +dicen: á Salomon llevaron de un camino seiscientos y sesenta y +seis quintales de oro, allende lo que llevaron los mercaderes y +marineros, y allende lo que se pagó en Arabia. De este oro fizo +doscientas lanzas y trescientos escudos, y fizo el tablado que habia +de estar arriba dellas de oro y adornado de piedras preciosas, y fizo +otras muchas cosas de oro, y vasos muchos y muy grandes y ricos +de piedras preciosas. Josefo en su corónica de Antiquitatibus lo +escribe. En el Paralipomenon y en el libro de los Reyes se cuenta +de esto. Josefo quiere que este oro se hobiese en la Aurea: si +así fuese digo que aquellas minas de la Aurea son unas y se convienen +con estas de Veragua, que como yo dije arriba se alarga al +Poniente veinte jornadas, y son en una distancia lejos del polo y +de la línea. Salomon compró todo aquello, oro, piedras y plata, é +allí le pueden mandar á coger si les aplace. David en su testamento +dejó tres mil quintales de oro de las Indías á Salomon para +ayuda de edificar el templo, y segun Josefo era el destas mismas +tierras. Hierusalem y el monte Sion ha de ser reedificado por +mano de cristianos: quien ha de ser, Dios por boca del Profeta en +el décimo cuarto salmo lo dice. El Abad Joaquin dijo que este +habia de salir de España. San Gerónimo á la santa muger le +mostró el camino para ello. El Emperador del Catayo ha dias que +mandó sabios que le enseñen en la fé de Cristo. ¿Quién será que +se ofrezca á esto? Si nuestro Señor me lleva á España, yo me +obligo de llevarle, con el nombre de Dios, en salvo. Esta gente +que vino conmigo han pasado increibles peligros y trabajos. Suplico +á V. A., porque son pobres, que les mande pagar luego, y +les haga mercedes á cada uno segun la calidad de la persona, que +les certifico que á mi creer les traen las mejores nuevas que nunca +fueron á España. El oro que tiene el Quibian de Veragua y los +otros de la comarca, bien que segun informacion él sea mucho, no +me paresció bien ni servicio de vuestras Altezas de se le tomar +por via de robo: lo buena orden evitará escándalo y mala fama, +y hará que todo ello venga al tesoro, que no quede un grano. Con +un mes de buen tiempo yo acabára todo mi viage: por falta de +los navíos no porfié á esperarle para tornar á ello, y para toda cosa +de su servicio espero en aquel que me hizo, y estaré bueno. Yo +creo que V. A. se acordará que yo queria mandar hacer los navíos +de nueva manera: la brevedad del tiempo no dió lugar á ello, y +cierto yo habio caido en lo que cumplia. Yo tengo en mas esta +negociacion y minas con esta escala y señorio, que todo lo otro +que está hecho en las Indias. No es este hijo para dar á criar á +madrastra. De la Española, de Paria y de las otras tierras no me +acuerdo de ellas, que yo no llore: creia yo que el ejemplo dellas +hobiese de ser por estotras al contrario: ellas estan boca á yuso, +bien que no mueren: la enfermedad es incurable, ó muy larga: +quien las llegó á esto venga agora con el remedio si puede ó sabe: +al descomponer cada uno es maestro. Las gracias y acrescentamiento +siempre fue uso de las dar á quien puso su cuerpo á peligro. +No es razon que quien ha sido tan contrario á esta negociacion le +goce ni sus fijos. Los que se fueron de las Indias fuyendo los +trabajos y diciendo mal dellas y de mí, volvieron con cargos: así +se ordenaba agora en Veragua: malo ejemplo, y sin provecho del +negocio y para la justicia del mundo: este temor con otros casos +hartos que yo veia claro, me hizo suplicar á V. A. antes que yo +viniese á descubrir esas islas y tierra firme, que me las dejasen +gobernar en su Real nombre: plúgoles: fue por privilegio y +asiento, y con sello y juramento, y me intitularon de Viso-Rey y +Almirante y Gobernador general de todo; y aseñalaron el término +sobre las islas de los Azores cien leguas, y aquellas del Cabo Verde +por línea que pasa de polo á polo, y desto y de todo que mas se +descubriese, y me dieron poder largo: la escritura á mas largamente +lo dice. El otro negocio famosísimo está con los brazos +abiertos llamando: extrangero ha sido fasta ahora. Siete años +estuve yo en su Real corte, que á cuantos se fabló de esta empresa +todos á una dijeron que era burla: agora fasta los sastres suplican +por descubrir. Es de creer que van á saltear, y se les otorga, que +cobran con mucho perjuicio de mi honra y tanto daño del negocio. +Bueno es de dar á Dios lo suyo y acetar lo que le pertenece. Esta +es justa sentencia, y de justo. Las tierras que acá obedecen á V. +A. son mas que todas las otras de cristianos y ricas. Despues +que yo, por voluntad divina, las hube puestas debajo de su Real +y alto señorío, y en filo para haber grandísima rénta, de improviso, +esperando navíos para venir á su alto conspecto con victoria y +grandes nuevas del oro, muy seguro y alegre, fuí preso y echado +con dos hermanos en un navío, cargados de fierros, desnudo en +cuerpo, con muy mal tratamiento, sin ser llamado ni vencido por +justicia: ¿quién creerá que un pobre extrangero se hobiese de +alzar en tal lugar contra V. A. sin causa, ni sin brazo de otro +Príncipe, y estando solo entre sus vasallos y naturales, y teniendo +todos mis fijos en su Real corte? Yo vine á servir de veinte y +ocho años, y agora no tengo cabello en mi persona que no sea cano +y el cuerpo enfermo, y gastado cuanto me quedó de aquellos, y me +fue tomado y vendido, y á mis hermanos fasta el sayo, sin ser oido +ni visto, con gran deshonor mio. Es de creer que esto no se hizo +por su Real mandado. La restitucion de mi honra y daños, y el +castigo en quien lo fizo, fará sonar su Real nobleza; y otro tanto +en quien me robó las perlas, y de quien ha fecho daño en ese +almirantado. Grandísima virtud, fama con ejemplo será si hacen +esto, y quedará á la España gloriosa memoria con la de vuestras +Altezas de agradecidos y justos Príncipes. La intencion tan sana +que yo siempre tuve al servicio de vuestras Altezas, y la afrenta +tan desigual, no da lugar al anima que calle, bíen que yo quiera: +suplico á vuestras Altezas me perdonen. Yo estoy tan perdido +como dije: yo he llorado fasta aquí á otros: haya misericordia +agora el Cielo, y llore por mi la tierra. En el temporal no tengo +solamente una blanca para el oferta: en el espiritual he parado +aquí en las Indias de la forma que está dicho: aislado en esta +pena, enfermo, aguardando cada dia por la muerte, y cercado de +un cuento de salvages y llenos de crueldad y enemigos nuestros, y +tan apartado de los Santos Sacramentos de la Santa Iglesia, que +se olvidará desta anima si se aparta acá del cuerpo. Llore por +mí quien tiene caridad, verdad y justicia. Yo no vine este viage +á navegar por ganar honra ni hacienda: esto es cierto, porque +estaba ya la esperanza de todo en ella muerta. Yo vine á V. A. +con sana intencion y buen zelo, y no miento. Suplico humildemente +á V. A. que si á Dios place de me sacar de aquí, que haya +por bien mi ida á Roma y otras romerías. Cuya vida y alto +estado la Santa Trinidad guarde y acresciente. Fecha en las +Indias en la Isla de Jamaica á siete de Julio de mil quinientos y +tres años.</p> + +</div> + +<div class="footnotes"> + +<h3>FOOTNOTES:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_202" href="#FNanchor_202" class="label">[202]</a> The word “cosas” has been replaced on conjecture by “casas,” +such being the idea entertained in the Italian translation, republished +by Morelli.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_203" href="#FNanchor_203" class="label">[203]</a> The “line” of Columbus implies fifteen degrees, or one hour of +longitude; and the twelve lines which describe the distance of Catigara +from the meridian of Ptolemy, equal one hundred and eighty degrees. +Marinus of Tyre, reckoned two hundred and twenty-five degrees to the +same space, which is equivalent to the fifteen lines stated by Columbus.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_204" href="#FNanchor_204" class="label">[204]</a> Every one will immediately see the incorrectness of this notion, +arising from the belief of Columbus that the country he had discovered +was the east coast of Asia. Instead of the land bearing a proportion of +six-sevenths to the water, the water bears a proportion of about two-thirds +to the land.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_205" href="#FNanchor_205" class="label">[205]</a> Morelli has given this passage thus: “la opposizion de Saturno con +Marte.” The adjective “desbarados,” however, sufficiently proves this +reading to be incorrect. It would seem that Columbus meant the opposition +of Saturn with the Sun.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_206" href="#FNanchor_206" class="label">[206]</a> The word <i>proeses</i> or <i>proizes</i>, answers to our English word bollards—or +the posts to which cables are fastened.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_207" href="#FNanchor_207" class="label">[207]</a> Columbus, who now fancies himself in China, by this word “Mago,” +means Mangi, the name given by Marco Polo, whose travels he had +read, to Southern China, while Northern China was Cathay.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_208" href="#FNanchor_208" class="label">[208]</a> Of course he here speaks of himself.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_209" href="#FNanchor_209" class="label">[209]</a> Bow-lines are ropes employed to keep the windward edges of the +principal sails steady, and are only used when the wind is so unfavourable +that the sails must be all braced sideways, or close hauled to the +wind.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_210" href="#FNanchor_210" class="label">[210]</a> In this remarkable notion, Columbus refers to a work of the learned +Æneas Sylvius Piccolomini, entitled <i>Cosmographia Pape Pii</i>, printed +in Venice in 1503. It is not paginated, but if the reader will count to +the nineteenth and twentieth pages he will find the following passages: +“Post Sacas ad septentrionem Messagetæ reperiuntur: ... Fæda gens +et brutis simillima apud quam genus mortis optimum judicabatur ut +senio confecti in frusta cœderentur et cum carnibus ovilis promiscue +ederentur: eos qui morbo decederent ut impios abjicientes tamque dignos +qui a feris devorarentur. Equites ac pedites inter eos optimi fuere +arcu; gladio; thorace; ac securi æneâ utentes; aureas zonas; aurea +equorum frena ac pectoralia habentes. Ferri parum apud eos fuit: +argento carebant; ære et auro abundabant: insularum cultores herbarum +radices edebant, et agrestes fructus: ex quibus pocula exprimebant. +Vestis erat arborum cortex: qui paludes inhabitabant piscibus vescebantur: +focarum coria e mari prodeuntium induebant,” etc. From +Herodotus we gather an accurate idea of the situation of the Massagetæ, +viz., in the immense plain to the east of the Caspian and on the east +bank of the Jaxaretes. Strabo corroborates the account of Herodotus +as to the repulsive habits of these old Mongolians.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_211" href="#FNanchor_211" class="label">[211]</a> This is a malady undefined in any dictionary.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_212" href="#FNanchor_212" class="label">[212]</a> This is most certainly a mistake; probably thirty-eight was originally +written, which, supposing Columbus to have been born in 1446-7, +would bring the date referred to to 1484, when Columbus really did escape +from Portugal into Spain.</p></div> + +</div> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="english"> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_212">[212]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="A_NARRATIVE">A NARRATIVE</h2> + +<h3 class="hanging"><i>Given by Diego Mendez [in his will] of some events that +occurred in the last voyage of the Admiral Don +Christopher Columbus.</i></h3> + +<p>Diego Mendez, citizen of St. Domingo, in the island of +Española, being in the city of Valladolid, where the Court +of their Majesties was at the time staying, made his will on +the sixth day of June, of the year one thousand five hundred +and thirty-six, before Fernando Perez, their Majesties’ +scrivener, and notary public in that their Court, and in all +their Kingdoms and Lordships, the witnesses to the same +being Diego de Arana, Juan Diez Miranda de la Cuadra, +Martin de Orduña, Lucas Fernandez, Alonzo de Angulo, +Francisco de Hinojosa and Diego de Aguilar, all servants of +my Lady the Vicequeen of the Indies.⁠<a id="FNanchor_213" href="#Footnote_213" class="fnanchor">[213]</a> And among other +chapters of the said will there is one which runs literally as +follows:—</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_213">[213]</span></p> + +<p>Clause of the will, Item: The very illustrious gentlemen, +the admiral Don Christopher Columbus, of glorious memory, +and his son the admiral Don Diego Columbus, and his grandson +the admiral Don Louis, (whom may God long preserve), +and through them my Lady the Vicequeen, as tutress and +guardian of the latter, are in debt to me, for many and great +services that I have rendered them, in as much as I have +spent and worn out the best part of my life even to its close +in their service; especially did I serve the admiral Don +Christopher, going with his Lordship to the discovery of the +islands and terra firma, and often putting myself in danger +of death in order to save his life and the lives of those who +were with him, more particularly when we were shut in at +the mouth of the river Belen or Yebra, through the violence +of the sea and the winds which drove up the sand, and raised +such a mountain of it as to close up the entrance of the port. +His Lordship being there greatly afflicted, a multitude of +Indians collected together on shore to burn the ships, and +kill us all, pretending that they were going to make war +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_214">[214]</span>against other Indians of the province of Cabrava Aurira, +with whom they were at enmity. Though many of them +passed by that part where our ships were lying, none of the +fleet took notice of the matter except myself, who went to +the admiral and said to him, “Sir, these people who have +passed by in order of battle, say that they go to unite themselves +with the people of Veragua, to attack the people +of Cobrava Aurira: I do not believe it, but, on the contrary, +I think that they are collected together to burn our +ships and kill all of us,”—as in fact was the case. The +admiral then asked me what were the best means of preventing +this, and I proposed to his Lordship that I should +go with a boat along the coast towards Veragua, to see where +the royal court sat. I had not proceeded on my errand half +a league when I found nearly a thousand men of war with +great stores of provisions of all kinds, and I went on shore +alone amongst them, leaving my boat afloat; I then spoke +with them, making them understand me as well as I could, +and offered to go with them to the battle with that armed +boat; but this they strongly refused, saying there was no +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_215">[215]</span>need of such a thing. After that I returned to the boat, and +remained there in sight of them all that night, so that they +could not go to the ships to burn or destroy them, according +to their previous arrangements, without my seeing them, +upon which they changed their plan, and on that same night +they all returned to Veragua. I then went back to the +ships, and related all this to his Lordship, who thought no +little of what I had done, and upon his consulting me as to +the best manner of proceeding so as clearly to ascertain what +was the intention of the people, I offered to go to them with +one single companion; and this task I undertook, though +more certain of death than of life in the result.</p> + +<p>After journeying along the beach up to the river of Veragua, +I found two canoes of strange Indians, who related +to me more in detail, that these people were indeed collected +together to burn our ships and kill us all, and that +they had forsaken their purpose in consequence of the +boat coming up to the spot, but that they intended to +return after two days to make the attempt once more. +I then asked them to carry me in their canoes to the upper +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_216">[216]</span>part of the river, offering to remunerate them if they would +do so; but they excused themselves, and advised me by no +means to go, for that both myself and my companion +would certainly be killed. At length, in spite of their advice, +I prevailed upon them to take me in their canoes to +the upper part of the river, until I reached the villages of +the Indians, whom I found in order of battle. They, however, +would not, at first, allow me to go to the principal residence +of the cacique, till I pretended that I was come as a surgeon +to cure him of a wound that he had in his leg; then, after +I had made them some presents, they suffered me to proceed +to the seat of royalty, which was situated on the top of a hillock, +surmounted by a plain, with a large square surrounded +by three hundred heads of the enemies he had slain in +battle. When I had passed through the square, and reached +the royal house, there was a great clamour of women and +children at the gate, who ran into the palace screaming. +Upon this, one of the chief’s sons came out in a high +passion, uttering angry words in his own language; and, +laying hands upon me, with one push he thrust me far +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_217">[217]</span>away from him. In order to appease him, I told him that +I was come to cure the wound in his father’s leg, and +showed him an ointment that I had brought for that purpose; +but he replied, that on no account whatever should I +go in to the place where his father was. When I saw that +I had no chance of appeasing him in that way, I took out a +comb, a pair of scissors, and a mirror, and caused Escobar, +my companion, to comb my hair and then cut it off. When +the Indian, and those who were with him, saw this, they +stood in astonishment; upon which I prevailed on him to +suffer his own hair to be combed and cut by Escobar; I +then made him a present of the scissors, with the comb and +the mirror, and thus he became appeased. After this, I +begged him to allow some food to be brought, which was +soon done, and we ate and drank in love and good fellowship, +like very good friends. I then left him and returned +to the ships, and related all this to my lord the Admiral, +who was not a little pleased when he heard all these circumstances, +and the things that had happened to me. He +ordered a large stock of provisions to be put into the ships, +and into certain straw houses that we had built there, with +a view that I should remain, with some of the men, to examine +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_218">[218]</span>and ascertain the secrets of the country. The next +morning his lordship called me to take counsel with me as +to what was to be done. My opinion was that we ought to +seize that chief and all his captains; because, when they +were taken, the common people would submit. His lordship +was of the same opinion. I then submitted the stratagem +and plan by which this might be accomplished; +and his lordship ordered that the Adelantado, his brother, +and I, accompanied by eighty men, should go to put it into +execution. We went, and our Lord gave us such good +fortune, that we took the cacique and most of his captains, +his wives, sons, and grandsons, with all the princes of his +race; but in sending them to the ships, thus captured, the +cacique extricated himself from the too slight grasp of the +man who held him, a circumstance which afterwards caused +us much injury. At this moment it pleased God to cause +it to rain very heavily, occasioning a great flood, by which +the mouth of the harbour was opened and the Admiral enabled +to draw out the ships to sea, in order to proceed to +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_219">[219]</span>Spain; I, meanwhile, remaining on land as Accountant of +his Highness, with seventy men, and the greater part of +the provisions of biscuit, wine, oil, and vinegar being left +with me.</p> + +<p>The Admiral had scarcely got to sea (while I stayed on +shore with about twenty men, for the others had gone to +assist the Admiral), when suddenly more than four hundred +natives, armed with cross-bows and arrows, came +down upon me, extending themselves along the face of the +mountain; they then gave a shriek, then another, and +another, and these repeated cries, by the goodness of God, +gave me opportunity to prepare for the engagement. While +I was on the shore among the huts which we had built, and +they were collected on the mountain at about the distance +of an arrow’s flight, they began to shoot their arrows and +hurl their darts, as if they had been attacking a bull. The +arrows and cross-bow shots came down thick as hail, and +some of the Indians then separated themselves from the +rest, for the purpose of attacking us with clubs; none of +them, however, returned, for with our swords we cut off +their arms and legs, and killed them on the spot; upon +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_220">[220]</span>which the rest took such fright, that they fled, after having +killed in the contest seven out of twenty of our men; while, +on their side, they lost nine or ten of those who advanced +the most boldly towards us. This contest lasted three long +hours, and our Lord gave us the victory in a marvellous +manner, we being so few and they so numerous. After +this fight was over, the captain, Diego Tristan, came with +the boats from the ships to ascend the river, in order to +take in water for the voyage; and, notwithstanding I advised +and warned him not to go, he would not trust me, +but, against my wish, went up the river with two boats and +twelve men; upon which the natives attacked him, and +killed him and all the men that he took with him, except +one who escaped by swimming, and from whom we heard +the news. The Indians then took the boats and broke +them to pieces, which caused us great vexation; for the +Admiral was at sea with his ships without boats, while we +were on shore deprived of the means of going to him. +Besides this, the Indians came continually to assail us; +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_221">[221]</span>every instant playing trumpets and kettle-drums, and uttering +loud cries in the belief that they had conquered us. The +only means of defending ourselves against these people, +were two very good brass falconets and plenty of powder and +ball, with which we frightened them so much that they did not +dare approach us. This lasted for the space of four days, +during which time I caused several bags to be made out of +the sails of one of the vessels which we had remaining on +shore, and into them I put all our biscuit. I then took two +canoes, and secured them together with sticks across the +tops, and, after loading them with the biscuit, the pipes of +wine, and the oil and vinegar, I fastened them together +with a rope, and had them towed along the sea while it was +calm, so that in the seven trips we contrived to get all of it +to the ships, and the people were also carried over by few +at a time. Meanwhile I remained with five men to the +last, and at night I put to sea with the last boatful. The +Admiral thought very highly of this conduct of mine, and +did not content himself with embracing me and kissing me +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_222">[222]</span>on the cheeks for having performed so great a service, but +asked me to take the captaincy of the ship <i>Capitana</i>, with +the government of all the crew, and, in fact, of the entire +voyage; which I accepted in order to oblige him, as it was +a service of great responsibility.</p> + +<p>On the last day of April, in the year fifteen hundred and +three, we left Veragua, with three ships, intending to make +our passage homeward to Spain, but as the ships were all +pierced and eaten by the teredo, we could not keep them +above water; we abandoned one of them after we had proceeded +thirty leagues; the two which remained were even +in a worse condition than that,⁠<a id="FNanchor_214" href="#Footnote_214" class="fnanchor">[214]</a> so that all the hands were +not sufficient with the use of pumps and kettles and pans to +draw off the water that came through the holes made by the +worms. In this state, with the utmost toil and danger, we +sailed for thirty-five days, thinking to reach Spain, and at +the end of this time we arrived at the lowest point of the +island of Cuba, at the province of Homo, where the city of +Trinidad now stands, so that we were three hundred leagues +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_223">[223]</span>further from Spain than when we left Veragua for the purpose +of proceeding thither; and this, as I have said, with +the vessels in very bad condition, unfit to encounter the +sea, and our provisions nearly gone. It pleased God that +we were enabled to reach the island of Jamaica, where we +drove the two ships on shore, and made of them two cabins +thatched with straw, in which we took up our dwelling, not +however without considerable danger from the natives, who +were not yet subdued, and who might easily set fire to our +habitation in the night, in spite of the greatest watchfulness. +It was there that I gave out the last ration of biscuit +and wine; I then took a sword in my hand, three men only +accompanying me, and advanced into the island; for no +one else dared go to seek food for the Admiral and those +who were with him. It pleased God that I found some +people who were very gentle and did us no harm, but received +us cheerfully, and gave us food with hearty good +will. I then made a stipulation with the Indians, who +lived in a village called Aguacadiba, and with their cacique, +that they should make cassava bread, and that they should +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_224">[224]</span>hunt and fish to supply the Admiral every day with a +sufficient quantity of provisions, which they were to bring +to the ships, where I promised there should be a person +ready to pay them in blue beads, combs and knives, hawks’-bells +and fish-hooks, and other such articles which we had +with us for that purpose. With this understanding, I +despatched one of the Spaniards whom I had brought with +me to the admiral, in order that he might send a person to +pay for the provisions, and secure their being sent. From +thence I went to another village, at three leagues distance +from the former, and made a similar agreement with the +natives and their cacique, and then despatched another +Spaniard to the admiral, begging him to send another person +with a similar object to this village. After this I went +further on, and came to a great cacique named Huareo, +living in a place which is now called Melilla, thirteen +leagues from where the ships lay. I was very well received +by him; he gave me plenty to eat, and ordered all his subjects +to bring together in the course of three days a great +quantity of provisions, which they did, and laid them +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_225">[225]</span>before him, whereupon I paid him for them to his full +satisfaction. I stipulated with him that they should furnish +a constant supply, and engaged that there should be a person +appointed to pay them; having made this arrangement, +I sent the other Spaniard to the admiral with the provisions +they had given me, and then begged the cacique to allow +me two Indians to go with me to the extremity of the +island, one to carry the hammock in which I slept, and the +other carrying the food.</p> + +<p>In this manner I journeyed eastward to the end of the +island, and came to a cacique who was named Ameyro, +with whom I entered into close friendship. I gave him my +name and took his, which amongst these people is regarded +as a pledge of brotherly attachment. I bought of him +a very good canoe, and gave him in exchange an excellent +brass helmet that I carried in a bag, a frock, and one of +the two shirts that I had with me; I then put out to sea in +this canoe, in search of the place that I had left, the cacique +having given me six Indians to assist in guiding the canoe. +When I reached the spot to which I had dispatched the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_226">[226]</span>provisions, I found there the Spaniards whom the admiral +had sent, and I loaded them with the victuals that I had +brought with me, and went myself to the admiral, who +gave me a very cordial reception. He was not satisfied +with seeing and embracing me, but asked me respecting +everything that had occurred in the voyage, and offered up +thanks to God for having delivered me in safety from so +barbarous a people. The men rejoiced greatly at my arrival, +for there was not a loaf left in the ships when I returned to +them with the means of allaying their hunger; this, and +every day after that, the Indians came to the ships loaded +with provisions from the places where I had made the +agreements; so that there was enough for the two hundred +and thirty people who were with the admiral. Ten days +after this, the admiral called me aside, and spoke to me of +the great peril he was in, addressing me as follows:—“Diego +Mendez, my son, not one of those whom I have +here with me has any idea of the great danger in which we +stand except myself and you; for we are but few in number, +and these wild Indians are numerous and very fickle and +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_227">[227]</span>capricious: and whenever they may take it into their heads +to come and burn us in our two ships, which we have made +into straw-thatched cabins, they may easily do so by setting +fire to them on the land side, and so destroy us all. The +arrangement that you have made with them for the supply +of food, to which they agreed with such good-will, may +soon prove disagreeable to them; and it would not be surprising +if, on the morrow, they were not to bring us anything +at all: in such case we are not in a position to take +it by main force, but shall be compelled to accede to their +terms. I have thought of a remedy, if you consider it advisable; +which is, that some one should go out in the +canoe that you have purchased, and make his way in it to +Española, to purchase a vessel with which we may escape +from the extremely dangerous position in which we now +are. Tell me your opinion.” To which I answered:—“My +lord, I distinctly see the danger in which we stand, which +is much greater than would be readily imagined. With +respect to the passage from this island to Española in so +small a vessel as a canoe, I look upon it not merely as +difficult, but impossible; for I know not who would venture +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_228">[228]</span>to encounter so terrific a danger as to cross a gulf of forty +leagues of sea, and amongst islands where the sea is most +impetuous, and scarcely ever at rest.” His lordship did +not agree with the opinion that I expressed, but adduced +strong arguments to show that I was the person to undertake +the enterprise. To which I replied:—“My lord, I +have many times put my life in danger to save yours, and +the lives of all those who are with you, and God has marvellously +preserved me: in consequence of this, there have +not been wanting murmurers who have said that your lordship +entrusts every honourable undertaking to me, while +there are others amongst them who would perform them as +well as I. My opinion is, therefore, that your lordship +would do well to summon all the men, and lay this business +before them, to see if, amongst them all, there is one who +will volunteer to undertake it, which I certainly doubt; and +if all refuse, I will risk my life in your service, as I have +done many times already.”</p> + +<p>On the following day his lordship caused all the men to +appear together before him, and then opened the matter to +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_229">[229]</span>them in the same manner as he had done to me. When +they heard it they were all silent, until some said that it +was out of the question to speak of such a thing; for it was +impossible, in so small a craft, to cross a boisterous and +perilous gulf of forty leagues’ breadth, and to pass between +those two islands, where very strong vessels had been lost +in going to make discoveries, not being able to encounter +the force and fury of the currents. I then arose, and said:—“My +lord, I have but one life, and I am willing to hazard it +in the service of your lordship, and for the welfare of all +those who are here with us; for I trust in God, that in consideration +of the motive which actuates me, he will give me +deliverance, as he has already done on many other occasions.” +When the admiral heard my determination, he arose and +embraced me, and, kissing me on the cheek, said,—“Well +did I know that there was no one here but yourself who +would dare to undertake this enterprise: I trust in God, +our Lord, that you will come out of it victoriously, as you +have done in the others which you have undertaken.” On +the following day I drew my canoe on to the shore; fixed a +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_230">[230]</span>false keel on it, and pitched and greased it; I then nailed +some boards upon the poop and prow, to prevent the sea +from coming in, as it was liable to do from the lowness of +the gunwales; I also fixed a mast in it, set up a sail, and +laid in the necessary provisions for myself, one Spaniard, +and six Indians, making eight in all, which was as many as +the canoe would hold. I then bade farewell to his lordship, +and all the others, and proceeded along the coast of Jamaica, +up to the extremity of the island,⁠<a id="FNanchor_215" href="#Footnote_215" class="fnanchor">[215]</a> which was thirty-five +leagues from the point whence we started. Even this distance +was not traversed without considerable toil and danger; +for on the passage I was taken prisoner by some Indian +pirates, from whom God delivered me in a marvellous +manner. When we had reached the end of the island, and +were remaining there in the hope of the sea becoming +sufficiently calm to allow us to continue our voyage across +it, many of the natives collected together with the determination +of killing me, and seizing the canoe with its contents, +and they cast lots for my life, to see which of them should +carry their design into execution.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_231">[231]</span></p> + +<p>As soon as I became aware of their project, I betook myself +secretly to my canoe, which I had left at three leagues +distance from where I then was, and set sail for the spot +where the admiral was staying, and reached it after an interval +of fifteen days from my departure. I related to him all +that had happened, and how God had miraculously rescued +me from the hands of those savages. His lordship was very +joyful at my arrival, and asked me if I would recommence +my voyage; I replied that I would, if I might be allowed to +take some men, to be with me at the extremity of the +island until I should find a fair opportunity of putting to +sea to prosecute my voyage. The admiral gave me seventy +men, and with them his brother the Adelantado, to stay +with me until I put to sea, and to remain there for three +days after my departure; with this arrangement I returned +to the extremity of the island and waited there four days. +Finding the sea become calm I parted from the rest of the +men with much mutual sorrow; I then commended myself +to God and our Lady of Antigua, and was at sea five days +and four nights without laying down the oar from my hand, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_232">[232]</span>but continued steering the canoe while my companions +rowed. It pleased God that at the end of five days I reached +the Island of Española at Cape San Miguel,⁠<a id="FNanchor_216" href="#Footnote_216" class="fnanchor">[216]</a> having been +two days without eating or drinking, for our provisions were +exhausted. I brought my canoe up to a very beautiful part +of the coast, to which many of the natives soon came, and +brought with them many articles of food, so that I remained +there two days to take rest. I took six Indians from this +place, and leaving those that I had brought with me, I put +off to sea again, moving along the coast of Española, for it +was a hundred and thirty leagues from the spot where I +landed to the city of St. Domingo, where the Governor dwelt, +who was the Commander de Lares. When I had proceeded +eighty leagues along the coast of the island (not without +great toil and danger, for that part of the island was not yet +brought into subjugation), I reached the province of Azoa, +which is twenty-four leagues from San Domingo, and there +I learned from the commander Gallego, that the governor +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_233">[233]</span>was gone out to subdue the province of Xuragoa, which was +at fifty leagues distance. When I heard this I left my canoe +and took the road for Xuragoa,⁠<a id="FNanchor_217" href="#Footnote_217" class="fnanchor">[217]</a> where I found the governor, +who kept me with him seven months, until he had burned +and hanged eighty-four caciques, lords of vassals, and with +them Nacaona, the sovereign mistress of the island, to whom +all rendered service and obedience. When that expedition +was finished I went on foot to San Domingo, a distance of +seventy leagues, and waited in expectation of the arrival of +ships from Spain, it being now more than a year since any +had come. In this interval it pleased God that three ships +arrived, one of which I bought, and loaded it with provisions, +bread, wine, meat, hogs, sheep, and fruit, and despatched +it to the place where the admiral was staying, in +order that he might come over in it with all his people to +San Domingo, and from thence sail for Spain. I myself +went on in advance with the two other ships, in order to +give an account to the king and queen of all that had occurred +in this voyage.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_234">[234]</span></p> + +<p>I think I should now do well to say somewhat of the events +which occurred to the admiral and to his family during the +year that they were left on the island. A few days after my +departure the Indians became refractory, and refused to +bring food as they had hitherto done; the admiral therefore +caused all the caciques to be summoned, and expressed to +them his surprise that they should not send food as they +were wont to do, knowing as they did, and as he had already +told them, that he had come there by the command of God. +He said that he perceived that God was angry with them, +and that He would that very night give tokens of His displeasure +by signs that He would cause to appear in the +heavens; and as on that night there was to be an almost +total eclipse of the moon, he told them that God caused that +appearance to signify His anger against them for not bringing +the food. The Indians, believing him, were very +frightened, and promised that they would always bring him +food in future; and so in fact they did until the arrival of +the ship which I had sent loaded with provisions. The Admiral, +and those who were with him, felt no small joy at the +arrival of this ship; and his lordship afterwards informed me +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_235">[235]</span>in Spain, that in no part of his life did he ever experience +so joyful a day, for he had never hoped to have left that place +alive: and in that same ship he set sail,⁠<a id="FNanchor_218" href="#Footnote_218" class="fnanchor">[218]</a> and went to San +Domingo, and thence to Spain.</p> + +<p>I have wished thus to give a succinct account of my +troubles, and of my great and important services; which are +such as no man in the world ever rendered to a master, or +ever will again; and I do so in order that my sons may know +these facts, and be encouraged to serve faithfully, and that, +at the same time, his lordship may see that he is bound to +make them a handsome return for such services. When his +lordship came to the court, and while he was at Salamanca, +confined to his bed with the gout, and I was left in sole +charge of his affairs, endeavouring to obtain the restitution +of his estate and government for his son Diego, I addressed +him thus: “My lord, your lordship knows how much I have +done in your service, and what trouble I am still taking, +night and day, in the management of your affairs; I beseech +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_236">[236]</span>your lordship to grant me some recompense for what I have +done.” He cheerfully replied that he would do for me whatever +I asked, adding that there was very great reason for +his so doing. I then specified my wish, and begged his +lordship to do me the favour to grant me the office of principal +Alguazil of the island of Española for life; to which his +lordship assented most cordially, saying, that it was but a +trifling remuneration for the great services I had rendered. +He also desired me to communicate his wish to his son +Diego, who was very glad to hear of the favour his father +had shown me in appointing me to the said office; and said, +that if his father gave it me with one hand, he, for his part, +gave it with both hands. This promise holds good as much +now as it did then; but when, after I had succeeded, with +considerable difficulty, in securing the restitution of the +government of the Indies to my lord the Admiral Don Diego, +(his father being then dead), I asked him for the provision +of the said office, his lordship replied that he had given it to +his uncle, the Adelantado, saying, however, that he would +give me another post equivalent to it. I told him that he +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_237">[237]</span>ought to make such a proposition to his uncle, and that he +ought to give me that which his father, and he himself, had +promised to me. But he did not do so; and thus I remained +without any recompense for all my services: while my lord, +the Adelantado, without having rendered any service at all, +continued in the enjoyment of the dignity which belonged +to me, and reaped the reward of all my exertions.</p> + +<p>When his lordship arrived at the city of San Domingo, he +assumed the reins as governor, and gave the post which he +had promised to me, to Francisco de Garay, a servant of the +Adelantado, to hold it for him. This took place on the tenth +day of July of the year fifteen hundred and ten, and the +office was then worth at least a million per annum. My +lady, the Vicequeen, as tutress and guardian of my lord the +viceroy, and my lord the viceroy himself, are really chargeable +to me for this loss, and are debtors to me for it in justice +and on the score of conscience. The post had been given to +me by way of recompense, and nothing has been done in my +favour towards the accomplishment of the Admiral’s promise, +since the day in which it was given, to this, the close of my +life; if it had been given to me, I should have been the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_238">[238]</span>richest and most honoured man in the island; whereas, I +am now the poorest, and have not even a house of my own +to live in, but am obliged to pay rent for the roof over my +head. As it would be very difficult to refund the revenues +which this office has produced, I will suggest an alternative, +which is this: that his lordship grant the rank of principal +Alguazil of the city of San Domingo, to one of my sons, +for his life, and bestow upon the other the rank of Vice-Admiral +in the same city: by the grant of these two offices +to my sons in the manner I have said, and by appointing +some one to hold them on their behalf until they come of age, +his lordship will discharge the conscience of the Admiral his +father, and I shall hold myself satisfied, as duly paid for my +services. I shall say nothing further upon the subject, but +leave it to the consciences of their lordships, and let them +do whatever they think proper.</p> + +<p>Item. I leave as executors and administrators of my will +here at the court, the bachelor Estrada and Diego de Arana, +together with my lady the Vicequeen; and I beg his lordship +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_239">[239]</span>to undertake this charge, and to direct the others to +undertake it likewise.</p> + +<p><i>Another clause.</i> Item. I order that my executors purchase +a large stone, the best that they can find, and place it +upon my grave, and that they write round the edge of it +these words: “Here lies the honourable Chevalier Diego +Mendez, who rendered great services to the royal crown of +Spain, in the discovery and conquest of the Indies, in company +with the discoverer of them, the Admiral Don Christopher +Columbus, of glorious memory, and afterwards rendered +other great services by himself, with his own ships, and at +his own cost. He died, etc. He asks of your charity a +Paternoster and an Ave Maria.”</p> + +<p>Item. In the middle of the said stone let there be the representation +of a canoe, which is a hollowed tree, such as the +Indians use for navigation; for in such a vessel did I cross +three hundred leagues of sea; and let them engrave above it +this word: “Canoa.”</p> + +<p>My dear and beloved sons, children of my very dear and +beloved wife Doña Francisca de Ribera,—may the blessing +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_240">[240]</span>of God Almighty, Father, Son, and Holy Ghost, descend +upon you, together with my blessing, and protect you, and +make you Catholic Christians, and give you grace always to +love and fear Him. My sons, I earnestly recommend you to +cultivate peace and harmony amongst yourselves, and that +you be obliging, and not haughty, but very humble and +courteous towards those with whom you have to do, so that +all may love you. Serve loyally my lord the Admiral, and +may his lordship grant you large recompense, considering +who he is himself, and by what great services I have deserved +his favours. Above all I charge you, my sons, to be +very pious, and to hear very devoutly the divine offices, and +in so doing, may the Lord grant you long life. May it +please Him of His infinite goodness, to make you as good +as I wish you to be, and guide you always with His hand. +Amen.</p> + +<p>The books which I send to you are as follows:</p> + +<p><i>The Art of Well-dying</i>, by Erasmus; a <i>Sermon</i>, of Erasmus, +in Spanish; <i>Josephus de Bello Judaico</i>; the <i>Moral Philosophy</i>, +of Aristotle; the books called <i>Lingua Erasmi</i>; the book of +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_241">[241]</span><i>The Holy Land</i>;⁠<a id="FNanchor_219" href="#Footnote_219" class="fnanchor">[219]</a> +<i>The conversations of Erasmus</i>; <i>A treatise +on the Complaints of Peace</i>; <i>A book of Contemplation of the +Passion of our Redeemer</i>; <i>A treatise on the Revenging of the +Death of Agamemnon</i>; and other small tracts.</p> + +<p>I have already told you, my sons, that I leave you these +books as heir-looms under the conditions described above in +my will, and I wish them to be put together with my other +documents, which will be found in the cedar box, at Seville, +as I have already said; I wish also the marble mortar should +be placed in it, which is now in the possession of Don Ferdinand, +or of his major-domo.</p> + +<p>I, Diego Mendez, affirm that this document, contained in +thirteen sheets, is my last will and testament, for I have +dictated it and caused it to be written, and have signed it +with my name; and by it I revoke and annul any other will +or wills whatever made by me at any other time or place, and +I desire that this only be considered valid. Made in the +city of Valladolid, the nineteenth day of June, in the year of +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_242">[242]</span>our Redeemer one thousand five hundred and thirty-six.—<span class="smcap">Diego +Mendez.</span> And I, the said Garcia de Vera, scrivener +and notary public, was present at all which has been herein +said; and it has all been set down by me by order of the +said lord-lieutenant, and by request of the said Bachelor +Estrada, forming the testament in these twenty-six leaves of +folio paper, as is here seen. I caused it to be written as it +was presented and laid before me, and have kept the original +in my possession. And to this effect I have here placed this +my seal (<i>here was placed the seal</i>), in testimony of the truth.—(<i>Signed</i>) +<span class="smcap">Garcia de Vera</span>.</p> + +<p><i>This agrees literally with the clauses copied from a will +sealed and signed by the said scrivener, Garcia de Vera, the +original of which is in the archives of the most excellent the +Admiral Duke of Veraguas, from which I copied it in Madrid +on the twenty-eighth day of March, in the year eighteen hundred +and twenty-five.—Thomas Gonzalez.</i></p> + +<p class="note"><i>Note.—The other clauses of this will of Diego Mendez, refer +to his funeral arrangements, and the declaration of debts, due +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_243">[243]</span>both to him and by him, in Spain and in the island of Hispaniola, +as well as other matters purely personal, and relating +to his family; but they bear no reference or allusion to the +Admiral Columbus, or to his voyages and discoveries, and +therefore have not been copied.</i></p> + +</div> + +<div class="spanish"> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="RELACION">RELACION</h2> + +<h3 class="hanging"><i>Hecha por Diego Mendez, de algunos acontecimientos del último viage +del Almirante Don Cristóbal Colon.</i></h3> + +<p>Diego Mendez, vecino de la ciudad de Santo Domingo de la Isla +Española, hallándose en la villa de Valladolid, donde á la sazon +estaba la Corte de SS. MM., otorgó testamento en seis dias del +mes de Junio del año de mil quinientos treinta y seis, por testimonio +de Fernan Perez, escribano de SS. MM., y su notario público +en la su Corte y en todos los sus Reinos y Señoríos; siendo +testigos al otorgamiento Diego de Arana, Juan Diez Miranda de +la Cuadra, Martin de Orduña, Lucas Fernandez, Alonso de +Angulo, Francísco de Hinojosa y Diego de Aguilar, todos criados +de la Señora Vireina de las Indias. Y entre otros capítulos del +mencionado testamento hay uno que á la letra dice así.</p> + +<p>Cláusula del testamento. Item: Los muy ilustres Señores, el +Almirante D. Cristobal Colon, de gloriosa memoria, y su hijo el +Almirante D. Diego Colon, y su nieto el Almirante D. Luis, á +quien Dios dé largos dias de vida, y por ellos la Vireina mi +Señora, como su tutriz y curadora, me son en cargo de muchos y +grandes servicios que yo les hice, en que consumí y gasté todo lo +mejor de mi vida hasta acaballa en su servicio; especialmente +serví al gran Almirante D. Cristóbal andando con su Señoria +descubriendo Islas y Tierra firme, en que puse muchas veces mi +persona á péligro de muerte por salvar su vida y de los que con +él iban y estaban; mayormente cuando se nos cerró el puerto del +rio de Belen ó Yebra donde estábamos con la fuerza de las tempestades +de la mar y de los vientos que acarrearon y amontonaron +la arena en cantidad con que cegaron la entrada del puerto. Y +estando su Señoria allí muy congojado, juntóse gran multitud de +Indios de la tierra para venir á quemarnos los navios y matarnos +á todos, con color que decian que iban á hacer guerra a otros +Indios de las provincias de Cobrava Aurira con quien tenian +guerra: y como pasaron muchos dellos por aquel puerto en que +teniamos nosotros las naos, ninguno de la armada caia en el +negocio sino yo, que fuí al Almirante y le dije: “Señor, estas +gentes que por aquí han pasado en orden de guerra dicen que se +han de juntar con los de Veragoa para ir contra los de Cobrava +Aurira: yo no lo creo sino el contrario, y es que se juntan para +quemarnos los navíos y matarnos á todos,” como de hecho lo era. +Y diciéndome el Almirante cómo se remediaria, yo dije á su +Señoría que saldria con una barca é iría por la costa hácia Veragoa, +para ver donde asentaban el real. Y no hube andado media +legua cuando halle al pie de mil hombres de guerra con muchas +vituallas y brevages, y salté en tierra solo entre ellos, dejando mi +barca puesta en flota: y hablé con ellos segun pude entender, y +ofrecíme que queria ir con ellos á la guerra con aquella barca armada, +y ellos se escusaron reciamente diciendo que no le habian +menester: y como yo me volviese á la barca y estuviese allí á +vista dellos toda la noche, vieron que no podian ir á las naos para +quemallas y destruillas, segun tenian acordado, sin que yo lo viese, +y mudaron propósito: y aquella noche se volvieron todos á +Veragoa, y yo me volví á las naos y hice relacion de todo á su +Señoría, é no lo tuvo en poco. Y platicando conmigo sobrello +sobre que manera se ternia para saber claramente el intento de +aquella gente, yo me ofrecí de ir allá con un solo compañero, y +lo puse por obra, yendo mas cierto de la muerte que dela vida: y +habiendo caminado por la playa hasta el rio de Veragoa hallé dos +canoas de Indios extrangeros que me contaron muy á la clara +como aquellas gentes iban para quemar las naos y matarnos á +todos, y que lo dejaron de hacer por la barca que allí sobrevino, y +questaban todavia de propósito de volver á hacello dende á dos +dias, é yo les rogué que me llevasen en sus canoas el rio arriba, y +que gelo pagaria; y ellos se escusaban aconsejándome que en +ninguna manera fuese, porque fuese cierto que en llegando me +matarian á mí y al compañero que llevaba. E sin embargo de +sus consejos hice que me llevasen en sus canaos el rio arriba +hasta llegar á los pueblos de los Indios, los cuales hallé todos +puestos en orden de guerra, que no me querian dejar ir al asiento +principal del Cacique; y yo fingiendo que le iba á curar como +cirujano de una llaga que tenia en una pierna, y con dádivas que +les dí me dejaron ir hasta el asiento Real, que estaba encima de +un cerro llano con una plaza grande, rodeada de trescientas +cabezas de muertos que habian ellos muerto en una batalla: y +como yo hubiese pasado toda la plaza y llegado á la Casa Real +hubo grande alboroto de mugeres y muchachos que estaban á la +puerta, que entraron gritando dentro en el palacio. Y salió de él +un hijo del Señor muy enojado diciendo palabras recias en su +lenguage, é puso las manos en mí y de un empellon me desvió +muy lejos de sí: diciéndole yo por amansarle como iba á curar á +su padre de la pierna, y mostrándole cierto unguento que para +ello llevaba, dijo que en ninguna manera habia de entrar donde +estaba su padre. Y visto por mí que por aquella via no podia +amansarle, saqué un peine y unas tijeras y un espejo, y hice que +Escobar mi compañero me peinase y cortase el cabello. Lo cual +visto por él y por los que allí estaban quedaban espantados; y yo +entonces hice que Escobar le peinase á él y le cortase el cabello +con las tijeras, y díselas y el peine y el espejo, y con esto se +amansó; y yo pedí que trajesen algo de comer, y luego lo trajeron, +y comimos y bebimos en amor y compaña, y quedamos amigos; y +despedime dél y vine á las naos, y hice relacion de todo esto al +Almirante mi Señor, el cual no poco holgó en saber todas estas +circumstancias y cosas acaecidas por mi; y mandó poner gran +recabdo en las naos y en ciertas casas de paja, que teniamos hechas +allí en la playa con intencion que habia yo de quedar allí con +cierta gente para calar y saber los secretos de la tierra.</p> + +<p>Otro dia de mañana su Señoría me llamó para tomar parecer +conmigo de lo que sobre ello se debia hacer, y fue mi parecer que +debiamos prender aquel Señor y todos sus Capitanes, porque +presos aquellos se sojuzgaria la gente menuda; y su Señoria fue +del mismo parecer: é yo di el ardid y la manera con que se debia +hacer, y su Señoría mandó que el Señor Adelantado, su hermano, +y yo con él fuesemos á poner en efecto lo sobredicho con ochenta +hombres. Y fuimos, y diónos Nuestro Señor tan buena dicha +que prendimos el Cacique y los mas de sus Capitanes y mugeres +y hijos y nietos con todos los principales de su generacion; y +enviándolos á las naos ansí presos, soltóse el Cacique al que le +llevaba por su mal recabdo, el cual despues nos hizo mucho daño. +En este instante plugó á Dios que lovíó mucho, y con la gran +avenida abriósenos el puerto, y el Almirante sacó los navíos á la +mar para venirse á Castilla, quedando yo en tierra para haber de +quedar en ella por Contador de su Alteza con setenta hombres, y +quedábame allí la mayor parte de los mantenimientos de bizcocho +y vino y aceite y vinagre.</p> + +<p>Acabado de salir el Almirante á la mar, y quedando yo en +tierra con obra de veinte hombres porque los otros se habian +salido con el Almirante á despedir, subitamente sobrevino sobre +mi mucha gente de la tierra, que serian mas de cuatrocientos +hombres armados con sus varas y flechas y tiraderos, y tendierónse +por el monte en haz y dieron una grita y otra y luego otra, +con las cuales plugo á Dios me apercibieron á la pelea y defensa +de ellos: y estando yo en la playa entre los bohios que tenia +hechos, y ellos en el monte á trecho de tíro de dardo, comenzaron +á flechar y á garrochar como quien agarrocha toro, y eran las +flechas y tiraderas tantas y tan continuas como granizo; y algunos +dellos se desmandaban para venirnos á dar con las machadasnas; +pero ninguno dellos volvian porque quedaban allí cortados +brazos y piernas y muertos á espada: de lo cual cobraron +tanto miedo que se retiraron atras, habiéndonos muerto siete +hombres en la pelea de veinte que eramos, y de ellos murieron +diez ó nueve de los que se venian á nosotros mas arriscados. +Duró esta pelea tres horas grandes, y Nuestro Soñor nos dio la +vitoria milagrosamente, siendo nosotros tan poquitos y ellos +tanta muchedumbre.</p> + +<p>Acabada esta pelea vino de las naos el Capitan Diego Tristan +con las barcas para subir el rio arriba á tomar agua para su viage; +y no embargante que yo le aconsejé y amonesté que no subiese el +rio arriba no me quiso creer, y contra mi grado subió con las dos +barcas y doce hombres el rio arriba, donde le toparon aquella gente +y pelearon con él, y le mataron á él y todos los que llavaba, que +no escapó sino uno á nado que trujo la nueva; y tomaron las +barcas y hiciéronlas pedazos, de que quedamos en gran fatiga, ansí +el Almrante en la mar con sus naos sin barcas como nosotros en +tierra sin tener con que poder ir á él. Y á todo esto no cesaban +los Indios de venirnos á cometer cada rato tañiendo bocinas y +atabales, y dando alaridos pensando que nos tenian vencidos. El +remedio contra esta gente que teniamos eran dos tiros falconetes +de fruslera, muy buenos, y mucha pólvora y pelotas con que los +ojeábamos que no osaban llegar á nosotros. Y esto duró por +espacio de cuatro dias, en los cuales yo hice cosar muchos costales +de las velas de una nao que nos quedaba, y en aquellos puse todo +el bizcocho que teniamos, y tomé dos canoas y até la una con la +otra parejas, con unos palos atravesados por encima, y en estos +cargué el bizcocho todo en viages, y las pipas de vino y azeite y vinagre +atadas en una guindaleja y á jorno [<i>sic</i>, jorro] por la mar, +tirando por ellas las canoas, abonanzando la mar, en siete caminos +que hicieron lo llevaron todo á las naos, y la gente que conmigo estaba +poco á poco la llevaron, é yo quedé con cinco hombres á la postre +siendo de noche, y en la postrera barcada me embarqué: lo cual +el Almirante tuvo á mucho, y no se hartaba de me abrazar y besar +en los carrillos por tan gran servicio como allí le hice, y me rogó +tomase la capitanía de la nao Capitana y el regimiento de toda la +gente y del viage, lo cual yo acepté por le hacer servicio en ello +por ser, como era, cosa de gran trabajo.</p> + +<p>Postrero de Abril de mil quinientos y tres partimos de Veragoa +con tres navíos, pensando venir la vuelta de Castilla: y comō los +navíos estaban todos abujerados y comidos de gusanos no los podiamos +tener sobre agua; y andadas treinta leguas dejamos el +uno, quedándonos otros dos peor acondicionados que aquel, que +toda la gente no bastaba con las bombas y calderas y vasijas á +sacar el agua que se nos entraba por los abujeros de la broma: y +de esta manera, no sin grandísimo trabajo y peligro, pensando +venir á Castilla navegamos treinta y cinco dias, y en cabo dellos +llegamos á la isla de Cuba á lo mas bajo della, á la provincia de +Homo, allá donde agora está el pueblo de la Trinidad; de manera +que estábamos mas lejos de Castilla trescientas leguas que cuando +partimos de Veragoa para ir á ella; y como digo los navíos mal +acondicionados, innavegables, y las vituallas que se nos acababan. +Plugo á Dios Nuestro Señor que pudimos llegar á la isla de +Jamaica, donde zabordamos los dos navíos en tierra, y hicimos de +ellos dos casas pajizas, en que estabamos no sin gran peligro de +la gente de aquella isla, que no estaba domada ni conquistada, nos +pusiesen fuego de noche, que fácilmente lo podian hacer por mas +que nosotros velabamos.</p> + +<p>Aquí acabé de dar la postrera racion de bizcocho y vino, y tomé +una espada en la mano y tres hombres conmigo, y fuíme por esa +isla adelante, porque ninguno osaba ir á buscar de comer para el +Almirante y los que con él estaban: y plugo á Dios que hallaba +la gente tan mansa que no me hacian mal, antes se holgaban +conmigo y me daban de comer de buena voluntad. Y en un +pueblo que se llama Aguacadiba, concerté con los Indios y Cacique +que harian pan cazabe, y que cazarian y pescarian, y que +darian de todas las vituallas al Almirante cierta cuantía cada dia, +y lo llevarian á las naos, con que estuviese allí persona que ge lo +pagase en cuentas azules y peines y cuchillos y cascabeles, y anzuelos +y otros rescates que para ello llevabamos: y con esto concierto +despaché uno de los dos cristianos que conmigo traía al +Almirante, para que enviase persona que tuviese cargo de pagar +aquellas vituallas y enviarlas.</p> + +<p>Y de allí fuí á otro pueblo que estaba tres leguas de este y hice +el mismo concierto con el Cacique y Indios, de él, y envié otro +cristiano al Almirante para que enviase allí otra persona al mismo +cargo.</p> + +<p>Y de allí pasé adelante y llegué á un gran Cacique que se llamaba +Huareo, donde agora dicen Melilla, que es trece leguas de +las naos, del cual fuí muy bien recebido, que me dió muy bien de +comer, y mandó que todos sus vasallos trajiesen dende á tres dias +muchas vituallas, que le presentaron, é yo ge las pagué de manera +que fueron contentos: y concerté que ordinariamente las +traerian, habiendo allí persona que ge las pagase, y con este concierto +envié el otro cristiano con los mantenimientos que allá me +dieron al Almirante, y pedí al Cacique que me diese dos Indios +que fuesen conmigo fasta el cabo de la isla, que el uno me llevaba +la hamaca en que dormia é el otro la comida. Y desta manera +caminé hasta el cabo de la isla, á la parte del Oriente, y llegué á +un Cacique que se llamaba Ameyro, é hice con él amistades de +hermandad, y díle mi nombre y tomé el suyo, que entre ellos se +tiene por grande hermandad. Y compréle una canoa muy buena +que él tenia, y díle por ella una bacineta de laton muy buena que +llevaba en la manga y el sayo y una camisa de dos que llevaba, y +embarquéme en aquella canoa, y vine por la mar requiriendo las +estancias que habia dejado con seis Indios que el Cacique me dió +para que me la ayudasen á navegar, y venido á los lugares donde +yo habia proveido, hallé en ellos los cristianos que el Almirante +habia enviado, y cargué de todas las vituallas que les hallé, y +fuime al Almirante, del cual fuí muy bien recebido, que no se +hartaba de verme y abrazarme, y preguntar lo que me habia sucedido +en el viage, dando gracias á Dios que me habia llevado y +traido á salvamiento libre de tanta gente salvage. Y como el +tiempo que yo llegué á las naos no habia en ellas un pan que comer, +fueron todos muy alegres con mi venida, porque les maté la +hambre en tiempo de tanta necesidad, y de allí adelante cada +dia venian los Indios cargados de vituallas á las naos de aquellos +lugares que yo habia concertado, que bastaban para doscientas y +treinta personas que estaban con el Almirante. Dende á diez +dias el Almirante me llamó á parte y me dijo el gran peligro en +que estaba, diciéndome ansi: “Diego Mendez, hijo: ninguno de +cuantos aquí yo tengo siente el gran peligro en que estamos sino +yo y vos, porque somos muy poquitos, y estos indios salvages son +muchos y muy mudables y antojadizos, y en la hora que se les +antojare de venir y quemarnos aquí donde estamos en estos dos +navioa hechos casas pajizas fácilmente pueden echar fuego dende +tierra y abrasarnos aquí á todos: y el concierto que vos habeis +hecho con ellos del traer los mantenimientos que traen de tan +buena gana, mañana se les antojará otra cosa y no nos traerán +nada, y nosotros no somos parte para tomargelo per fuerza si no +estar á lo que ellos quisieren. Yo he pensado un remedio si á vos +os parece: que en esta canoa que comprastes se aventurase alguno +á pasar á la Isla Española á comprar una nao en que pudiesen +salir de tan gran peligro como este en que estamos. Decidme +vuestro parecer.” Yo le respondí: “Señor: el peligro en que +estamos bien lo veo, que es muy mayor de lo que se puede pensar. +El pasar desta Isla á la Isla Española en tan poca vasija como es +la canoa, no solamente lo tengo por dificultoso, sino por imposible: +porque haber de atravesar un golfo de cuarenta leguas de mar y +entre islas donde la mar es mas impetuosa y de menos reposo, +no sé quien se ose aventurar á peligro tan notorio”. Su Señoría no +me replicó, persuadiendome reciamente que yo era el que lo habia +de hacer, á lo cual yo respondí: “Señor: muchas veces he puesto +mi vida á peligro de muerte por salvar la vuestra y de todos estos +que aqui estan, y nuestro Señor milagrosamente me ha guardado +y la vida; y con todo no han faltado murmuradores que dicen +que vuestra Señoria me acomete á mí todas las cosas de honra, +habiendo en la compañía otros que las harian tan bien como yo: +y por tanto paréceme á mí que vuestra Señoría los haga llamar á +todos y los proponga este negocio, para ver si entre todos ellos +habrá alguno que lo quiera emprender, lo cual yo dudo; y cuando +todos se echen de fuera, yo pondré mi vida á muerte por vuestro +servicio, como muchas veces lo he hecho”.</p> + +<p>Luego el dia siguiente su Señoría los hizo juntar á todos delante +sí, y les propuso el negocio de la manera que á mí: é oido, todos +enmudecieron, y algunos dijeron que era por demas platicarse en +semejante cosa, porque era imposible en tan pequeña vasija pasar +tan impetuoso y peligroso golfo de cuarenta leguas como este, +entre estas dos islas donde muy recias naos se habian perdido +andando á descubrir, sin poder romper ni forzar el ímpetu y furia +de las corrientes. Entonces yo me levanté y dije: “Señor: una +vida tengo no mas, yo la quiero aventurar por servicio de vuestra +Señoría y por el bien de todos los que aquí estan, porque tengo +esperanza en Dios nuestro Señor que vista la intencion con que yo +lo hago me librará, como otras muchas veces lo ha hecho.” Oida +por el Almirante mi determinacion levantóse y abrazóme y besóme +en el carrillo, diciendo: “Bien sabia yo que no habia aquí ninguno +que osase tomar esta empresa sino vos: esperanza tengo en Dios +nuestro Señor saldreis della con vitoria como de las otras que +habeis emprendido.”</p> + +<p>El dia siguiente yo puse mi canoa á monte, y le eché una quilla +postiza, y le dí su brea y sebo, y en la popa y proa clavéle algunas +tablas para defensa de la mar que no se me entrase como hiciera +siendo rasa; y púsele un mástil y su vela, y metí los mantenimientos +que pude para mí y para un cristiano y para seis indios, que +éramos ocho personas, y no cabian mas en la canoa: y despedíme +de su Señoría y de todos, y fuime la costa arriba de la Isla de +Jamaica, donde estábamos, que hay dende las naos hasta el cabo +della treinta y cinco leguas, las cuales yo navegué con gran peligro +y trabajo, porque fuí preso en el camino de Indios salteadores en +la mar, de que Dios me libró milagrosamente. Y llegado al cabo +de la isla, estando esperando que la mar se amansase para acometer +mi viage, juntáronse muchos Indios y determinaron de matarme +y tomar la canoa y lo que en ella llevaba; y así juntos jugaron +mi vida á la pelota para ver á cual dellos cabria la ejecucion del +negocio. Lo cual sentido por mí víneme ascondidamente á mi +canoa, que tenia tres leguas de allí, y hícime á la vela y víneme +donde estaba el Almirante, habiendo qnince dias que de allí habia +partido: y contele todo lo sucedido, cómo Dios milagrosamente +me habia librado de las manos de aquellos salvages. Su Señoría +fue muy alegre de mi venida, y preguntóme si volveria al viage. +Yo dije que sí, llevando gente que estuviese conmigo en el cabo de +la isla hasta que yo entrase en la mar á proseguir mi viage. Su +Señoría me dió setenta hombres y con ellos á su hermano le Adelantado, +que fuesen y estuviesen conmigo hasta embarcarme, y +tres dias despues. Y desta manera volví al cabo de la isla donde +estuve cuatro dias. Viendo que la mar se amansaba me despedí +dellos y ellos de mí, con hartas lágrimas; y encomendéme á Dios +y á nuestra Señora del Antigua, y navegué cinco dias y cuatro +noches que jamas perdí el remo de la mano gobernando la canoa +y los compañeros remando. Plugo á Dios nuestro Señor que en +cabo de cinco dias yo arribé á la Isla Española, al Cabo de S. +Miguel, habiendo dos dias que no comiamos ni bebiamos por no +tenello; y entré con mi canoa en una ribera muy hermosa, donde +luego vino mucha gente de la tierra y trajeron muchas cosas de +comer, y estuve allá dos dias descansando. Yo tomé seis Indios +de allí, dejados los que llevaba, y comencé á navegar por la costa +de la Isla Española, que hay dende allí hasta la Cibdad de Santo +Domingo ciento y treinta leguas que yo habia de andar, porque +estaba allí el Gobernador, que era el Comendador de Lares; y +habiendo andado por la costa de la isla ochenta leguas, no sin +grandes peligros y trabajos, porque la isla no estaba conquistada +ni allanada, llegué á la Provincia de Azoa, que es veinte y cuatro +leguas antes de Santo Domingo, y allí supe del Comendador +Gallego como el Gobernador era partido á la Provincia de Xuragoa +á allanarla; la cual estaba cincuenta leguas de allí. Y esto sabido +dejé mi canoa y tomé el camino por tierra de Xuragoa, donde +hallé el Gobernador, el cual me detuvo allí siete meses hasta que +hizo quemar y ahorcar ochenta y cuatro Caciques, señores de +vasallos, y con ellos á Nacaona la mayor señora de la isla, á +quien todos ellos obedecian y servian. Y esto acabado vine de +pie á tierra de Santo Domingo, que era setenta leguas de allí, y +estuve esperando viniesen naos de Castilla, que habia mas de un +año que no habian venido. Y en este comedio plugo á Dios que +vinieron tres naos, de las cuales yo compré la una y la cargué de +vituallas, de pan y vino y carne y puercos y carneros y frutas, y +la envié adonde estaba el Almirante para en que viniesen él y toda +la gente como vinieron allí á Santo Domingo y de allí á Castilla. +E yo me vine delante en las otras dos naos á hacer relacion al Rey +y á la Reina de todo lo sucedido en aquel viage.</p> + +<p>Paraceme que será bien que se diga algo de lo acaecido al Almirante +y á su familiar en un año que estuvieron perdidos en aquesta +isla: y es que dende á pocos dias que yo me partí los Indios se +amotinaron y no le querian traer de comer como antes; y él los +hizo llamar á todos los Caciques y les digo que se maravillaba +dellos en no traerle la comida como solian, sabiendo como él les +habia dicho, que habia venido allí por mandado de Dios, y que +Dios estaba enojado dellos, y que él ge lo mostraria aquella noche +por señales que haria en el cielo; y como aquella noche era el +eclipse de la luna que casi toda se escureció, díjoles que Dios hacia +aquello por enojo que tenia dellos porque no le traian de comer, y +ellos lo creyeron y fueron muy espantados, y prometieron que le +traerian siempre de comer, como de hecho lo hicieron, hasta que +llegó la nao con los mantenimentos que yo envié, de que no pequeño +gozo fue en el Almirante y en todos los que con él estaban: que +despues en Castilla me dijo su Señoría que en toda su vida [nunca?] +habia visto tan alegre dia, y que nunca pensó salir de allí vivo: +y en esta nao se embarcó y vino á Santo Domingo y de allí á +Castilla.</p> + +<p>He querido poner aquí esta breve suma de mis trabajos y +grandes señalados servicios, cuales nunca hizo hombre á Señor, +ni los hará de aquí adelante del mundo; y esto á fin que mis hijos +lo sepan y se animen á servir, é su Señoria sepa que es obligado +á hacerles muchas mercedes.</p> + +<p>Venido su Señoría á la Corte, y estando en Salamanca en la cama +enfermo de gota, andando yo solo entendiendo en sus negocios y +en la restitucion de su estado y de la gobernacion para su hijo D. +Diego, yo le dije ansi: “Señor: ya vuestra Señoría sabe lo mucho +que os he servido y lo mas que trabajo de noche y de dia en +vuestros negocios: suplico á vuestra Señoria me señale algun +galardon para en pago dello:” y él me respondió alegremente que +yo lo señalase y él lo cumpliria, porque era mucha razon. Y +entonces yo le señalé y supliqué á su Señoría me hiciese merced +del oficio del Alguacilazgo mayor de la Isla Española para en toda +mi vida: y su Señoría dijo que de muy buena voluntad, y que era +poco para lo mucho que yo habia servido; y mandóme que lo +dijese ansi al Sr. D. Diego, su hijo, el cual fue muy alegre de la +merced á mí hecha de dicho oficio, y dijo que si su padre me lo +daba con una mano, él con dos. Y esto es ansi la verdad para el +siglo que á ellos tiene y á mi espera.</p> + +<p>Habiendo yo acabado, no sin grandes trabajos mios, de negociar +la restitucion de la gobernacion de las Indias al Almirante D. +Diego, mi Señor, siendo su padre fallecido, le pedí la provision del +dicho oficio. Su Señoria me respondió que lo tenia dado al Adelantado +su tio; pero que él me daria otra cosa equivalente á aquella. +Yo dije que aquella diese él á su tio, y á mi me diese lo que su +padre y él me habian prometido, lo cual no se hizo; y yo quedé +cargado de servicios sin ningun galardon, y el Sr. Adelantado, sin +haberlo servido, quedó con mi oficio y con el galardon de todos +mis afanes.</p> + +<p>Llegado su Señoría á la Cibdad de Santo Domingo por Gobernador +tomó las varas dió este oficio á Francisco de Garay, criado +del Sr. Adelantado, que lo sirviese por él. Esto fue en diez dias +del mes de Julio de mil quinientas diez años. Valia entonces el +oficio á lo menos un cuento de renta, del cual la Vireina, mi Señora, +como tutriz y curadora del Virey, mi Señor, y él me son en +cargo realmente y me lo deben de justicia y <i>de foro conscientiæ</i>, +porque me fue hecha la merced de él, y no se cumplió conmigo +dende el dia que se dió al Adelantado hasta el postrero de mis dias, +porque si se me diera yo fuera el mas rico hombre de la isla y mas +honrado; y por no se me dar soy el mas pobre della, tanto que no +tengo una casa en que more sin alquiler.</p> + +<p>Y porque haberseme de pagar lo que el oficio ha rentado seria +muy dificultoso, yo quiero dar un medio y será este: que su Señoría +haga merced del Alguacilazgo mayor de la Cibdad de Santo +Domingo á uno de mis hijos para en toda su vida, y al otro le haga +merced de su Teniente de Almirante en la dicha Cibdad: y con +hacer merced destos dos oficios á mis hijos de la manera que he +aquí dicho, y poniéndolos en cabeza de quien los serva por ellos +hasta que sean de edad, su Señoría descargará la conciencia del +Almirante su padre, y yo me satisfaré de la paga que se me debe +de mis servicios: y en esto no diré mes de dejallo en sus conciencias +de sus Señorías, y hagan en ello lo que mejor les pareciere.</p> + +<p>Item: Dejo por mis albaceas y ejecutores deste mi testamento, +aquí en la corte, al Bachiller Estrada y á Diego de Arana, juntamente +con la Vireina, mi Señora, y suplico yo á su Señoría lo +acepte y les mande á ellos lo mismo.</p> + +<p><i>Otra cláusula.</i> Item: Mando que mis albaceas compren una +piedra grande, la mejor que hallaren, y se ponga sobre mi sepultura, +y se escriba en derredor della estas letras: “Aquí yace el +honrado caballero Diego Mendez que sirvió mucho á la Corona +Real de España en el descubrimiento y conquista de las Indias con +el Almirante D. Cristobal Colon, de gloriosa memoria, que las +descubrió, y despues por sí con naos suyas á su costa: falleció, +etc. Pido de limosna un Pater noster y una Ave María.”</p> + +<p>Item: En medio de la dicha piedra se haga una canoa, que es +un madero cavado en que los Indios navegan, porque en otra tal +navegó trescientas leguas, y encima pongan unas letras que digan: +“Canoa.”</p> + +<p>Caros y amados hijos mios, y de mi muy cara y amada muger +Doña Francisca de Ribera, la bendicion de Dios Todopoderoso, +Padre y Hijo y Espíritu Santo y la mia descienda sobre vos y vos +cubra y os haga catolicos cristianos, y os dé gracia que siempre le +ameis y temais. Hijos: encomiendoos mucho la paz y concordia, +y que seais muy conformes y no soberbios, sino muy humildes y +muy amigables á todos los que contratáredes, porque todos os +tengan amor: servid lealmente al Almirante mi Señor, y su Señoría +os hará muchas mercedes por quien él es, y porque mis grandes +servicios lo merecen; y sobre todo os mando, hijos mios, seais +muy devotos y oyais muy devotamente los Oficios Divinos, y +haciéndolo ansi Dios nuestro Señor os dará largos dias de vida. A +él plega por su infinita bondad haceros tan buenos como yo deseo +que seais, y os tenga siempre de su mano. Amen.</p> + +<p>Los libros que de acá os envio son los siguientes:</p> + +<p>Arte de bien morir de Erasmo. Un sermon de Erasmo en romance. +Josefo de Bello Judaico. La Filosofía moral de Aristóteles. +Los libros que se dicen Lingua Erasmi. El libro de la +Tierra santa. Los coloquios de Erasmo. Un tratado de las +querellas de la Paz. Un libro de Contemplaciones de la Pasion +de nuestro Redentor. Un tratado de le venganza de la muerte +de Agamenon, y otros tratadillos.</p> + +<p>Ya dije, hijos mios, que estos libros os dejo por mayorazgo, con +las condiciones que estan dichas de suso en el testamento, y quiero +que vayan todos con algunas Escrituras mias, que se hallarán en +el arca que está en Sevilla, que es de cedro, como ya está dicho: +pongan tambien en esta el mortero de mármol que está en poder +del Sr. D. Hernando, ó de su mayordomo.</p> + +<p>Digo yo Diego Mendez que esta Escritura contenida en trece +hojas es mi testamento y postrimera voluntad, porque yo lo ordené +é hice escribir, y lo firmé de mi nombre, y por él revoco y doy +por ningunos otros cualesquier testamentos hechos en cualesquier +otros tiempos ó lugar; y solo este quiero que valga, que es hecho +en la villa de Valladolid en diez y nueve dias del mes de Junio, +año de nuestro Redentor de mil quinientos treinta y seis años. +Diego Mendez. E yo el dicho García de Vera, Escribano Notario +público, presente fui á todo lo que dicho es, que de mi se hace +mencion, é por mandado del dicho Sr. Teniente é pedimento del +dicho Bachiller Estrada, este testamento en estas veinte é seis hojas +de papel, pliego entero, como aquí parece, fice escrebir como ante +mí se presentó é abrió, é ansi queda originalmente en mi poder. +E por ende fice aquí este mi signo tal en (<i>está signado</i>) testimonio +de verdad. García de Vera. (<i>Está firmado.</i>)</p> + +<p><i>Concuerda literalmente con las cláusulas copiadas de un testimonio +signado y firmado por el expresado Escribano García de Vera, que +obra originalmente en el Archivo del Excmo. Sr. Almirante Duque +de Veraguas, de donde lo copié en Madrid á veinte y cinco dias del +mes de Marzo de mil ochocientos veinte y cinco años.—Tomas +Gonzalez.</i></p> + +</div> + +<div class="footnotes"> + +<h3>FOOTNOTES:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_213" href="#FNanchor_213" class="label">[213]</a> Donna Maria de Toledo, widow of Diego Columbus.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_214" href="#FNanchor_214" class="label">[214]</a> Possibly the ship they abandoned was inferior in size, or in some +other respect.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_215" href="#FNanchor_215" class="label">[215]</a> Ferdinand Columbus says that the Indians called this eastern point +of the island Aramaquique, and that it was thirty-four leagues from +Maima, where the admiral was.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_216" href="#FNanchor_216" class="label">[216]</a> This cape is since called Cape Tiburon. Mendez does not speak of +his arrival at the little island of Naraza, and other places spoken of by +Ferdinand Columbus and Herrera.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_217" href="#FNanchor_217" class="label">[217]</a> This should be Xaragua.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_218" href="#FNanchor_218" class="label">[218]</a> On the twenty-eighth of June 1504; he entered the harbour of St. +Domingo on the thirteenth of August, started for Spain on the twelfth +of September, and arrived at San Lucar on Thursday, the seventh of +November.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a id="Footnote_219" href="#FNanchor_219" class="label">[219]</a> By B. von Breydenbach.(?)</p></div> + +</div> + +<p class="titlepage">FINIS.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_244">[244]</span></p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_245">[245]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="INDEX">INDEX.</h2> + +</div> + +<ul> + +<li class="ifrst">Adda (Marquis d’), his reproduction of the printed text of the first letter, <a href="#Page_cxxv">cxxv</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Adelantado, <i>see</i> <a href="#Bartholomew_Columbus">Bartholomew Columbus</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Adelphus (John), his connection with St. Dié, <a href="#Page_lxxxvi">lxxxvi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Ages, a kind of turnip used by the Indians, <a href="#Page_63">63</a>, <a href="#Page_68">68</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Aguacadiba, village in Jamaica, <a href="#Page_223">223</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Aguado (Juan), recommended to the notice of the King and Queen, <a href="#Page_93">93</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Aguja (Punta de la), Needle Point, <a href="#Page_125">125</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Ailly (Cardinal Pierre d’), his Imago Mundi studied by Columbus, <a href="#Page_xlv">xlv</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Alcatraz (Point), <a href="#Page_125">125</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Alfragan, the Arab astronomer, his influence on Columbus, <a href="#Page_xlvii">xlvii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Aloes, found in Española, <a href="#Page_67">67</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Ameyro (The Cacique), his friendship for Diego Mendez, <a href="#Page_225">225</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Animals in Española, <a href="#Page_42">42</a></li> + +<li class="indx">—— of Cariay, <a href="#Page_200">200</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Antillia, supposed island of, <a href="#Page_xxvi">xxvi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Appianus, his Mappe-monde bearing the name of America, <a href="#Page_lxxxvii">lxxxvii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Arabian expedition to America, <a href="#Page_xix">xix</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Arana (Diego de), Governor of Española, <a href="#Page_12">12</a></li> + +<li class="indx">—— (Pedro de), commander of one of the ships sent on by Columbus to Española in the third voyage, <a href="#Page_115">115</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Arenal (Point of), <a href="#Page_119">119</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Arguin, called by Columbus Hargin, <a href="#Page_136">136</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Arin, Island of, <a href="#Page_135">135</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Arrows used by the Caribbees, <a href="#Page_31">31</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Astrolabe rendered useful for seamen, <a href="#Page_li">li</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Atlantis, spoken of by Plato, <a href="#Page_v">v</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Australia discovered by the Portuguese within one hundred years of the rounding of Cape Bojador by Prince Henry’s navigators, <a href="#Page_i">i</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Avan, a province of Juana, <a href="#Page_10">10</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Ayala (Pedro de), on the supposed islands in the Atlantic, <a href="#Page_xxvi">xxvi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Ayay, one of the Caribbee Islands, <a href="#Page_31">31</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Axes made of stone used by the Indians, <a href="#Page_68">68</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Azoa, Province of Española, <a href="#Page_232">232</a></li> + +<li class="ifrst">Bacon (Roger), his <i>Opus Majus</i> supplied the portion of the <i>Imago Mundi</i> which is supposed to have inspired Columbus with the idea of discovering America, <a href="#Page_xlvii">xlvii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Bardson (Heriulf), establishes himself at Heriulfsnes in Greenland, <a href="#Page_x">x</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Barrow (Sir John), his account of Cortereal’s expedition, <a href="#Page_xxvii">xxvii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Bastimentos, harbour of, <a href="#Page_184">184</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Becher (Captain), agrees with Muñoz on the landfall of Columbus, <a href="#Page_lx">lx</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Behaim (Martin), on the supposed islands in the Atlantic, <a href="#Page_xxvi">xxvi</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">said to have discovered the Azores, <a href="#Page_xxx">xxx</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">the evidence of his globe, <a href="#Page_xxxi">xxxi</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">in conjunction with Roderigo and Josef, renders the astrolabe useful for seamen, <a href="#Page_li">li</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Belem and Belpuerto, disabled ships left there, <a href="#Page_193">193</a></li> + +<li class="indx">—— or Yebra, river, <a href="#Page_213">213</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Beltran, recommended to the notice of the King and Queen, <a href="#Page_92">92</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Bianco (Andrea), his map, on which is the word “Antillia,” <a href="#Page_xxvi">xxvi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Bibliography, <a href="#Page_cviii">cviii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Birds’ nests in Española at Christmas, <a href="#Page_42">42</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Bobadilla (D. Francisco de), his infamous treatment of Columbus, <a href="#Page_lxxi">lxxi</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his death, <a href="#Page_lxxvi">lxxvi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">—— ——, Columbus’s account of his arrival in Española, <a href="#Page_159">159</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his conduct, <a href="#Page_160">160</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">arrests Columbus, <a href="#Page_167">167</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">seizes his house and papers, <a href="#Page_173">173</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Bohio discovered, <a href="#Page_lxiii">lxiii</a></li> + +<li class="indx"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_246">[246]</span>Bohio, a province of Española, <a href="#Page_41">41</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Bojador (Cape), rounded by Prince Henry’s navigators in 1434, <a href="#Page_i">i</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Bonacca, <i>see</i> <a href="#Guanaga">Guanaga</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Brazil, supposed island of, <a href="#Page_xxvi">xxvi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Bremen (Adam of), makes the earliest allusion (<i>printed</i>) to the colonization of America by the Scandinavians, <a href="#Page_viii">viii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Brerewood (Edward), derives the Americans from the Tartars, <a href="#Page_vi">vi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Burenquen (Porto Rico), discovered, <a href="#Page_39">39</a></li> + +<li class="ifrst">Cabot (John), his zeal for the discovery of the supposed islands in the Atlantic, <a href="#Page_xxvi">xxvi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">—— (Sebastian), his discovery demonstrated, <a href="#Page_xxviii">xxviii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Cabras, Goat Island, <a href="#Page_43">43</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Canaanites supposed to have peopled America, <a href="#Page_vi">vi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Cannibals, Caribbee, <a href="#Page_26">26</a>, <a href="#Page_29">29</a></li> + +<li class="indx">—— in Cariay, <a href="#Page_201">201</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Canoes, <a href="#Page_9">9</a>, <a href="#Page_10">10</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Caonabó, a chief in Española accused of having burned the Spanish settlement, <a href="#Page_48">48</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">gold mines in Niti belonging to him, <a href="#Page_64">64</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his bad disposition towards the Christians, <a href="#Page_77">77</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Cape Gracias a Dios, <a href="#Page_178">178</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Cape Honduras, <a href="#Page_lxxvii">lxxvii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Cape Verde Islands discovered by Diego Gomez (see <i>Life of Prince Henry the Navigator</i>), <a href="#Page_115">115</a>, <a href="#Page_116">116</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Capitana ship, the captaincy given to Diego Mendez, <a href="#Page_222">222</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Carabajal, Alonzo Sanchez de, commanded one of the ships sent on by Columbus to Española in the third voyage, <a href="#Page_115">115</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Caracol, Bay of, in Española, <a href="#Page_47">47</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Caradoc of Llancarvan’s account of the Welsh expedition, <a href="#Page_xxi">xxi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Carambaru, golden mirrors worn by the Indians, <a href="#Page_180">180</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Cariay, Columbus arrives there in his fourth voyage, <a href="#Page_180">180</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">enchanters, <a href="#Page_199">199</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">sepulchre, <a href="#Page_199">199</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">animals, <a href="#Page_200">200</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">cannibals, <a href="#Page_201">201</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">copper mines, <a href="#Page_201">201</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">cotton beautifully worked, <a href="#Page_201">201</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Caribbee Islands discovered, <a href="#Page_25">25</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Caseneuve (Guillaume de), his name confounded with that of Columbus, <a href="#Page_xxxviii">xxxviii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Cathay, Northern China, <a href="#Page_194">194</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Cazadilla, bishop of Ceuta, condemns the proposed enterprise of Columbus, <a href="#Page_lii">lii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Celts supposed to have peopled America, <a href="#Page_ix">ix</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Ceyre, Cayre or Charis (Dominica), <a href="#Page_31">31</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">said to abound in gold, <a href="#Page_37">37</a>, <a href="#Page_38">38</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Chanca’s (Dr.) letter, <a href="#Page_iii">iii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">history of, <a href="#Page_cxxxviii">cxxxviii</a>, <a href="#Page_cxl">cxl</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">physician to the fleet of Columbus, in his second voyage, his letter, <a href="#Page_19">19</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">mentioned in the memorial of Columbus, <a href="#Page_93">93</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Chinese supposed to have reached America by the north, <a href="#Page_vii">vii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Ciamba, province of, gold mines, <a href="#Page_180">180</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Cibao, gold mines of, <a href="#Page_69">69</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Ciguare, dress and customs of the people, <a href="#Page_181">181</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Cladera (Don Cristóbal) refutes the statements respecting Behaim, <a href="#Page_xxx">xxx</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Cobrava Aurira, province, <a href="#Page_214">214</a></li> + +<li class="indx" id="Bartholomew_Columbus">Columbus (Bartholomew) sent by his brother to Henry VII, <a href="#Page_lvi">lvi</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">arrested by Bobadilla, <a href="#Page_167">167</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Columbus (Christopher) derives the idea of explorations to the West from Prince Henry’s researches into the Atlantic, <a href="#Page_i">i</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">the importance of his original letters, <a href="#Page_ii">ii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">the pathos and dignity of his complaints, <a href="#Page_iii">iii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">the evidence of European adventurers having visited America before his time, does not detract from his merit, <a href="#Page_xxxi">xxxi</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">every previous discovery having been accidental, <a href="#Page_xxxii">xxxii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his parentage and date of birth, <a href="#Page_xxxii">xxxii</a>, <a href="#Page_xxxiv">xxxiv</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">birthplace, <a href="#Page_xxxv">xxxv</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">education, <a href="#Page_xxxv">xxxv</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his connection with Guillaume de Caseneuve discussed, <a href="#Page_xxxvii">xxxvii</a>, <a href="#Page_xlii">xlii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his sojourn in Portugal, where he first receives the inspiration of his great discovery, his marriage with the daughter of Perestrello and consequent inheritance of his papers, etc., <a href="#Page_xlii">xlii</a>, <a href="#Page_xliii">xliii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">the facts and signs which convinced him there was land to the West, <a href="#Page_xliii">xliii</a>, <a href="#Page_xliv">xliv</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his studies, <a href="#Page_xlv">xlv</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">influenced by al Fergani or Alfragan, <a href="#Page_xlvii">xlvii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">Marco Polo and Sir John Mandeville, <a href="#Page_xlviii">xlviii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his letter to Toscanelli and the answer, <a href="#Page_xlix">xlix</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his patience in biding his time for application to the King of Portugal, <a href="#Page_l">l</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his letters of 1477 quoted by his son, <a href="#Page_l">l</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his audience with the king, <a href="#Page_li">li</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his enterprise condemned by the Council, <a href="#Page_lii">lii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his unworthy treatment, <a href="#Page_lii">lii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">and departure, <a href="#Page_liii">liii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_247">[247]</span>conjectures respecting his subsequent history, <a href="#Page_liii">liii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his visit to the Convent of Rabida, <a href="#Page_liv">liv</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his various fortune at the Court of Spain, <a href="#Page_liv">liv</a>, <a href="#Page_lvii">lvii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">sets out on his first great voyage, <a href="#Page_lvii">lvii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">discovers the Island of San Salvador, etc., the true landfall discussed, <a href="#Page_lviii">lviii-lxiii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">establishes a colony in Hispaniola, <a href="#Page_lxiii">lxiii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his stormy passage home, <a href="#Page_lxiv">lxiv</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">reception at the Azores, <a href="#Page_lxiv">lxiv</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">arrives at Lisbon, <a href="#Page_lxv">lxv</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">and reaches Spain in safety, <a href="#Page_lxvi">lxvi</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his triumph at Barcelona, <a href="#Page_lxvi">lxvi</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">the Papal bull obtained, <a href="#Page_lxvii">lxvii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his second voyage, <a href="#Page_lxviii">lxviii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">and return, <a href="#Page_lxix">lxix</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">third voyage, <a href="#Page_lxix">lxix</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his cruel treatment, <a href="#Page_lxxi">lxxi</a>, <a href="#Page_lxxii">lxxii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">arrives in Spain and is honourably received by the sovereigns, <a href="#Page_lxxiii">lxxiii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his fourth voyage, <a href="#Page_lxxiv">lxxiv</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">and return, <a href="#Page_lxxix">lxxix</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his sufferings till death, <a href="#Page_lxxx">lxxx</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his first letter addressed to Raphael Sanchez, <a href="#Page_1">1</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">discovers San Salvador, Santa Maria de Conception, Fernandina, Isabella and Juana, <a href="#Page_2">2</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">sees another island and names it Española, <a href="#Page_3">3</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">takes possession of Española and builds the fortress of Villa de Navidad, <a href="#Page_11">11</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">describes the benefits to be derived from his discoveries, <a href="#Page_15">15</a>, <a href="#Page_16">16</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">leaves Cadiz for his second voyage, arrives at the Great Canary, Gomera, <a href="#Page_20">20</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">Ferro, <a href="#Page_21">21</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">discovers Dominica and Marigalante, <a href="#Page_22">22</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">discovers Guadaloupe, <a href="#Page_24">24</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">discovers Montserrat, Santa Maria la Redonda, Santa Maria la Antigua, and St. Martin, <a href="#Page_34">34</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">discovers Santa Cruz and St. Ursula, <a href="#Page_38">38</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">discovers Porto Rico, which he names St. John the Baptist, <a href="#Page_39">39</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">arrives at Española, <a href="#Page_41">41</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">receives a deputation from Guacamari, <a href="#Page_44">44</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">finds the settlement destroyed by fire, <a href="#Page_51">51</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">goes to visit Guacamari, <a href="#Page_54">54</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">selects Port Isabella for the new settlement, builds the City of Marta, <a href="#Page_62">62</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">sends two parties in search of gold mines, <a href="#Page_69">69</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his memorial to the King and Queen of the results of the second voyage, <a href="#Page_72">72</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">refers to Gorbalan and Hojeda for an account of the gold to be found, <a href="#Page_74">74</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">describes the difficulties and dangers to be encountered, <a href="#Page_75">75</a>, <a href="#Page_81">81</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">describes the fertility of the country, <a href="#Page_81">81</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">asks for supplies, <a href="#Page_82">82</a>, <a href="#Page_84">84</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">asks for the confirmation of Antonio de Torres as governor of the City of Isabella, <a href="#Page_92">92</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">recommends to the notice of the King and Queen Messire Pedro Margarite, Gaspar, Beltran, and Juan Aguado, <a href="#Page_92">92</a>, <a href="#Page_93">93</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">also Dr. Chanca, <a href="#Page_93">93</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">Coronel, <a href="#Page_95">95</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">also Gil Garcia, <a href="#Page_96">96</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">complains of the conduct of Juan de Soria, <a href="#Page_98">98</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">asks for further assistance and stores, <a href="#Page_100">100</a>, <a href="#Page_104">104</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">recommends Villacorta, <a href="#Page_105">105</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his narrative of his third voyage, <a href="#Page_108">108</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his address to the King and Queen, <a href="#Page_108">108</a>, <a href="#Page_114">114</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">sails from San Lucar, <a href="#Page_114">114</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">discovers Trinidad, <a href="#Page_118">118</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">describes Indians in a canoe near the point of Arenal, <a href="#Page_119">119</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">violent currents near the Point, <a href="#Page_122">122</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">beauty of the country at the Punta de la Aguja, <a href="#Page_125">125</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">conjectures respecting the violent currents, <a href="#Page_130">130</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">the north star, <a href="#Page_133">133</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">form of the earth, <a href="#Page_134">134</a>, <a href="#Page_135">135</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">describe the Gulf of Pearls, <a href="#Page_139">139</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his conjectures as to the situation of Paradise, <a href="#Page_141">141</a>, <a href="#Page_146">146</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">letter to the nurse of Prince John, <a href="#Page_152">152</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">describes his troubles on arriving at Española, <a href="#Page_155">155</a>, <a href="#Page_156">156</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">conduct of Hojeda and Vincent Yañez, <a href="#Page_156">156</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">of Adrian Mogica and Don Ferdinand, <a href="#Page_157">157</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">describes Bobadilla’s arrival, <a href="#Page_160">160</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his arrest by Bobadilla, <a href="#Page_167">167</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his house and papers seized, <a href="#Page_173">173</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">letter to the King and Queen on his fourth voyage, <a href="#Page_175">175</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his reception in Española, <a href="#Page_176">176</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">dreadful storm, <a href="#Page_176">176</a>, <a href="#Page_178">178</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his distress on account of his son and brother, <a href="#Page_178">178</a>, <a href="#Page_179">179</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">arrives at Cariay, hears of gold mines in Ciamba, goes to Carambaru, <a href="#Page_180">180</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">describes the people of Ciguare, <a href="#Page_181">181</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his conjectures with regard to the earth, <a href="#Page_183">183</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">reaches the harbour of Bastimentos, <a href="#Page_184">184</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his suffering during an awful tempest, <a href="#Page_185">185</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">returns to Puerto Gordo, <a href="#Page_186">186</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">reaches Veragua, <a href="#Page_187">187</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">finds gold mines, <a href="#Page_188">188</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">deceit of the Cacique Quibian, <a href="#Page_188">188</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">establishes a settlement, <a href="#Page_189">189</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">takes the Cacique prisoner, <a href="#Page_189">189</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">describes pathetically his misfortunes on this coast, <a href="#Page_190">190</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his dream, <a href="#Page_191">191</a>, <a href="#Page_192">192</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_248">[248]</span>supposes himself in China, <a href="#Page_194">194</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">reaches Jamaica, <a href="#Page_195">195</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">repeats the course of his voyage, <a href="#Page_196">196</a>, <a href="#Page_197">197</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">describes the enchanters of Cariay, <a href="#Page_199">199</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">sculptured sepulchre, <a href="#Page_199">199</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">animals, <a href="#Page_200">200</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">products, <a href="#Page_201">201</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">abundance of gold in Veragua, <a href="#Page_202">202</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">conjectures concerning the gold of Solomon, <a href="#Page_204">204</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his distress for the condition of Española and Paria, <a href="#Page_206">206</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his touching complaint of cruel treatment, <a href="#Page_209">209</a>, <a href="#Page_211">211</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his conference with Diego Mendez related by the latter, <a href="#Page_226">226</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Columbus (Diego), information given by him to Las Casas respecting his father, <a href="#Page_xliii">xliii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">leaves Lisbon with his father, <a href="#Page_liii">liii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his father’s anxiety about him, <a href="#Page_179">179</a></li> + +<li class="indx">—— (Juan Antonio), commanded one of the ships sent on by Columbus to Española in the third voyage, <a href="#Page_115">115</a></li> + +<li class="indx">—— (Ferdinand), on the subject of his father’s parentage and date of birth, <a href="#Page_xxxii">xxxii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">on the subject of Caseneuve, <a href="#Page_xxxviii">xxxviii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">on the subject of his father’s first thoughts of his great discovery, <a href="#Page_xlii">xlii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">relates the facts and signs which led him on to the West, <a href="#Page_xliii">xliii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">collects his father’s books and bequeaths them to the Cathedral of Seville, <a href="#Page_xlv">xlv</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">speaks of the influence of Alfragan, <a href="#Page_xlvii">xlvii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">quotes a letter of his father’s, <a href="#Page_l">l</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his statement that his father went to Spain in 1484, <a href="#Page_liii">liii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Copper mines in Cariay, <a href="#Page_201">201</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Coral ornaments worn by the Indians of Ciguare, <a href="#Page_181">181</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Cordeiro quoted by Sir John Barrow, <a href="#Page_xxvii">xxvii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Coronel recommended to the notice of the King and Queen, <a href="#Page_95">95</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Correa (Pedro), brother-in-law of Columbus, confirms his idea of land to the West, <a href="#Page_xliii">xliii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Cortereals, the Portuguese explorers, <a href="#Page_xxvii">xxvii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Cosa (Juan de la), his map, <a href="#Page_lxi">lxi</a>, <a href="#Page_lxii">lxii</a>, <a href="#Page_lxxxix">lxxxix</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Cosmographiæ Introductio, of Waldseemüller, <a href="#Page_lxxxiv">lxxxiv</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Cotton worn by the Indian women, <a href="#Page_6">6</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">great quantities in the islands, <a href="#Page_15">15</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">found in Guadaloupe, both spun and prepared for spinning, <a href="#Page_25">25</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">spun and woven into sheets by the Caribbees, <a href="#Page_29">29</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">worn in bands round the knee and ankle by the Caribbee women, <a href="#Page_30">30</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">hammock of, <a href="#Page_56">56</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">worn by the Indian women, <a href="#Page_64">64</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">trees of in Española, <a href="#Page_66">66</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">worked in colours and worn by Indians near Point Arenal, <a href="#Page_120">120</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">beautifully worked in Cariay, <a href="#Page_201">201</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Crantor confirms the story told by Plato, <a href="#Page_v">v</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Cuba, <i>see</i> <a href="#Juana">Juana</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Cubagua discovered, <a href="#Page_lxx">lxx</a></li> + +<li class="ifrst">Dati (Giuliano), his poem, <a href="#Page_xc">xc</a>, <a href="#Page_cvii">cvii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Dauphin (Port) in Española, <a href="#Page_60">60</a></li> + +<li class="indx">De Murr, his evidence on the subject of Behaim, <a href="#Page_xxxi">xxxi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">De Guignes, states that the Chinese reached America by the north, <a href="#Page_vii">vii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his opinion on the Arabian expedition, <a href="#Page_xix">xix</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Deza (Diego de), the faithful friend of Columbus, <a href="#Page_lv">lv</a>, <a href="#Page_lxxx">lxxx</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Documents—Columbus’ letter on the first voyage, <a href="#Page_1">1</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">Dr. Chanca’s on the second voyage, <a href="#Page_19">19</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">Memorial of Columbus on the second voyage, <a href="#Page_72">72</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">letter of Columbus on the third voyage, <a href="#Page_108">108</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his letter to the nurse of Prince John, <a href="#Page_152">152</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his letter on the fourth voyage, <a href="#Page_175">175</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">narrative of Diego Mendez, <a href="#Page_212">212</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Dogs in Española, <a href="#Page_42">42</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Dominica, Island of, discovered, <a href="#Page_22">22</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">described in second voyage, <a href="#Page_31">31</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">report of gold there, <a href="#Page_37">37</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Dragon’s mouth, <a href="#Page_139">139</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Ducks found in Zuruquia, <a href="#Page_13">13</a></li> + +<li class="ifrst">Editio Princeps of first letter of Columbus, the rival claims discussed, <a href="#Page_cxxii">cxxii</a>, <a href="#Page_cxxxviii">cxxxviii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Edrisi on the Arabian expedition, <a href="#Page_xx">xx</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Egyptians supposed to have colonised America, etc., <a href="#Page_vi">vi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">El Retrete, <a href="#Page_lxxviii">lxxviii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Engaño, Point, Española, <a href="#Page_41">41</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Eric the Red colonises Greenland, <a href="#Page_x">x</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Eric, Greenland Bishop, visits Vineland in 1121, <a href="#Page_xvii">xvii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Escobar, companion of Diego Mendez, <a href="#Page_217">217</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Escobedo, Rodrigo de, lieutenant to the governor of Española, <a href="#Page_12">12</a></li> + +<li class="indx" id="Espanola">Española (St. Domingo), seen from Juana, <a href="#Page_3">3</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">scenery, harbours, vegetation, spices, gold and other metals, <a href="#Page_4">4-5</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_249">[249]</span>inhabitants, <a href="#Page_5">5-9</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">great size, <a href="#Page_11">11</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">town of Villa de Navidad, <a href="#Page_11">11</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">manners and customs, <a href="#Page_12">12-14</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">products, <a href="#Page_15">15</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">arrival of Columbus on his second voyage, <a href="#Page_41">41</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">its division into provinces, <a href="#Page_41">41</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">country described, birds and animals, <a href="#Page_42">42-43</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">harbour of Monte Cristi, <a href="#Page_45">45</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">river Yaque, <a href="#Page_45">45</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">Bay of Caracol, <a href="#Page_47">47</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">Port Dauphin, <a href="#Page_60">60</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">Port Isabella, <a href="#Page_62">62</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">city of Marta, <a href="#Page_62">62</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">vegetation, <a href="#Page_63">63</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">the people, <a href="#Page_64">64</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">gold mines, <a href="#Page_64">64</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">products, <a href="#Page_66">66-68</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">abundance of gold, <a href="#Page_69">69-70</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">Columbus finds the colony in a state of revolt when he arrives there in his third voyage, <a href="#Page_155">155</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">Bobadilla’s arrival, <a href="#Page_160">160</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">reception of Columbus on his fourth voyage, <a href="#Page_176">176</a></li> + +<li class="indx" id="Evangelista">Evangelista discovered, <a href="#Page_lxviii">lxviii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Exuma discovered, <a href="#Page_lxiii">lxiii</a></li> + +<li class="ifrst">Fernandina (Great Exuma) discovered, <a href="#Page_2">2</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Fonseca (Juan Rodriguez), Bishop of Badajos, his enmity to Columbus, <a href="#Page_lxviii">lxviii</a> and <a href="#Page_156">156</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Fortress built at Villa de Navidad, <a href="#Page_11">11-12</a></li> + +<li class="ifrst">Galea, Cape, now Cape Galeota, the south-east point of Trinidad, <a href="#Page_118">118</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Gallardo (Don Bartolomé), the <i>Imago Mundi</i> not mentioned in his list of books in the Columbian library, <a href="#Page_xlvi">xlvi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Gallega Island, <a href="#Page_177">177</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Garcia, land of, <a href="#Page_121">121</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">violent currents between it and the I. of Trinidad, <a href="#Page_123">123</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Garcia (Gil), recommended to the notice of the King and Queen, <a href="#Page_96">96</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Gardar, a Dane, discovers Iceland in 863, <a href="#Page_x">x</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Gaspar recommended to the notice of the King and Queen, <a href="#Page_92">92</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Genoa, birthplace of Columbus according to his own assertion, <a href="#Page_xxxv">xxxv</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Ghillany’s (Dr. F. W.) copy of Martin Behaim’s globe, <a href="#Page_xxxi">xxxi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Gibbs (Mr.) confirms Navarrete on the landfall of Columbus, <a href="#Page_lviii">lviii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Giocondi (Fra Giovanni) translated Vespucci’s letter into Latin, <a href="#Page_lxxxiv">lxxxiv</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Globus Mundi, <a href="#Page_lxxxv">lxxxv</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Gold and other metals in Española, <a href="#Page_5">5</a>, <a href="#Page_15">15</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">report of large quantities at Cayre, <a href="#Page_37">37</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">ear-rings and necklaces worn by the Indians, <a href="#Page_44">44</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">masks sent as presents by Guacamari, <a href="#Page_48">48</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">beaten into thin plates by the Indians, <a href="#Page_55">55</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">mines at Cibao and Niti, <a href="#Page_69">69</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">great quantities found by Gorbalan and Hojeda, <a href="#Page_74">74</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">ornaments of, worn by the Indians of Paria, <a href="#Page_125">125</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">Indians direct Columbus where to find it, <a href="#Page_128">128</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">seizure of, by Bobadilla, <a href="#Page_167">167</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">gold mines of Ciamba, <a href="#Page_180">180</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">mirrors of, worn by the Indians of Carambaru, <a href="#Page_180">180</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">ornaments of worn by the Indians of Ciguare, <a href="#Page_181">181</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">mines of Veragua, <a href="#Page_188">188</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">abundance of, in Veragua, <a href="#Page_202">202</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">of Solomon, <a href="#Page_204">204</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Gomara on the subject of the Polish pilot, <a href="#Page_xxix">xxix</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Gorbalan, his discovery of gold, <a href="#Page_74">74</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Greenland discovered and colonised, <a href="#Page_x">x</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Grotius (Hugo) describes America as peopled from Norway, <a href="#Page_ix">ix</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Grüninger (Johann) of Strasburg, his edition of the <i>Cosmographiæ Introductio</i>, <a href="#Page_lxxxv">lxxxv</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Guacamari sends a deputation to Columbus, <a href="#Page_44">44</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">sends his cousin with an account of the destruction of the Spanish settlement, <a href="#Page_48">48</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">receives Melchior and his party, <a href="#Page_54">54</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his interview with Columbus, <a href="#Page_56">56</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his hammock of cotton net-work, <a href="#Page_56">56</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his pretended wound, <a href="#Page_58">58</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his disappearance, <a href="#Page_60">60</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Guadaloupe, Island of, discovered, <a href="#Page_24">24</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">immense waterfall, <a href="#Page_25">25</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">deserted houses, <a href="#Page_25">25</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">the inhabitants, <a href="#Page_27">27</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">their arts, <a href="#Page_29">29</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">manners and customs, <a href="#Page_30">30-32</a></li> + +<li class="indx" id="Guanaga">Guanaga Island discovered, <a href="#Page_lxxvii">lxxvii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Guanahani (San Salvador, now Watling’s Island) discovered, <a href="#Page_2">2</a>, <a href="#Page_lxi">lxi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Gunnbiorn discovers Greenland in 877, <a href="#Page_x">x</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Gutierrez (Pedro), lieutenant to the governor of Española, <a href="#Page_12">12</a></li> + +<li class="ifrst">Hair, various ways of wearing among the Indians, <a href="#Page_37">37</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Hammocks used in Española, <a href="#Page_56">56</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Hatchets and axes made of stone, <a href="#Page_68">68</a></li> + +<li class="indx">—— etc., made of copper in Cariay, <a href="#Page_201">201</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Hayti, a province of Española, <a href="#Page_41">41</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Helgason (Adalbrand and Thorwald), Icelandic clergymen and explorers in 1285, <a href="#Page_xviii">xviii</a></li> + +<li class="indx"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_250">[250]</span>Henry VII. willing to accept the services of Columbus, <a href="#Page_lvi">lvi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Herrera on the signs which led Columbus to the West, <a href="#Page_xliv">xliv</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his map, its evidence on the landfall of Columbus, <a href="#Page_lx">lx</a>, <a href="#Page_lxii">lxii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Hispaniola, <i>see</i> <a href="#Espanola">Española</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Hojeda (Alonzo de) sent by Columbus to examine gold mines, <a href="#Page_74">74</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">causes great trouble to Columbus in Española, <a href="#Page_156">156</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Homo, province of Cuba, <a href="#Page_222">222</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Honey found in Española, <a href="#Page_5">5</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Hornius, his treatise “<i>De originibus Americanis</i>,” <a href="#Page_vi">vi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Huareo, Cacique, <a href="#Page_224">224</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Humboldt’s answer to the theory of De Guignes, <a href="#Page_viii">viii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his assertion respecting Ortelius, <a href="#Page_viii">viii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his opinion on the Arabian expedition, <a href="#Page_xx">xx</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">on the subject of the Polish pilot, <a href="#Page_xxix">xxix-xxx</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">on the date of the <i>Imago Mundi</i>, <a href="#Page_xlvi">xlvi</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">on Roger Bacon, <a href="#Page_xlvii">xlvii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">on the landfall of Columbus, <a href="#Page_lviii">lviii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his testimony to the glory of Columbus, <a href="#Page_lxxxviii">lxxxviii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Hylacomylus, <i>see</i> <a href="#Waldseemuller">Waldseemüller</a></li> + +<li class="ifrst">Iceland discovered and colonised, <a href="#Page_x">x</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Idolatry not practised by the Indians, <a href="#Page_8">8</a></li> + +<li class="indx"><i>Imago Mundi</i>, studied by Columbus, <a href="#Page_xlv">xlv</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">dates assigned to the first edition, <a href="#Page_xlvi">xlvi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Indians, their weapons, <a href="#Page_6">6</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">their want of courage, <a href="#Page_7">7</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">simple, honest and liberal, <a href="#Page_7">7</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">not idolaters, <a href="#Page_8">8</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">very intelligent, <a href="#Page_9">9</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">their canoes, <a href="#Page_10">10</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">manners and customs, <a href="#Page_13">13-14</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">deserted houses in Guadeloupe found to contain cotton and human bones, <a href="#Page_25">25</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">Caribbee, their characteristics, <a href="#Page_29">29-30</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">their customs, <a href="#Page_31">31-32</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">dress, <a href="#Page_37">37</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">miserable hovels in Española, <a href="#Page_52">52</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">their manner of working gold, <a href="#Page_55">55</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">join readily with the Christians in their acts of worship, <a href="#Page_65">65</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">tools made of stone, <a href="#Page_68">68</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">their food, <a href="#Page_68">68</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">of Paria, description of, <a href="#Page_119">119</a>, <a href="#Page_124">124</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">their houses, food, etc., <a href="#Page_126">126</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">dress, <a href="#Page_128">128</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">tell Columbus where to find gold, <a href="#Page_128">128</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">of Trinidad described, <a href="#Page_137">137</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">of Carambaru wear golden mirrors round their necks, <a href="#Page_180">180</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">of Ciguare, dress and customs, <a href="#Page_181">181</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">of Cariay, enchanters, <a href="#Page_199">199</a>, <a href="#Page_201">201</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">of Veragua, <a href="#Page_215">215</a>, <a href="#Page_217">217</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">conflict with, <a href="#Page_219">219</a>, <a href="#Page_221">221</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">refuse to supply Columbus, but are frightened into obedience by the prediction of an eclipse, <a href="#Page_234">234</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Ingolf, a Norwegian, colonises Iceland, <a href="#Page_x">x</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Ires (William), native of Galway, one of the men left by Columbus in Española, <a href="#Page_12">12</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Iron not known by the Indians, <a href="#Page_6">6</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Isabella, her sympathy with Columbus, <a href="#Page_lxxiii">lxxiii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">her death, <a href="#Page_lxxx">lxxx</a></li> + +<li class="indx">—— (Saometo or Crooked Island) discovered, <a href="#Page_2">2</a></li> + +<li class="indx">—— city, river, and port of Española, <a href="#Page_62">62</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Isle of Pines, <i>see</i> <a href="#Evangelista">Evangelista</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Isla de las Bocas, <a href="#Page_197">197</a></li> + +<li class="ifrst">Jamaica, letter on the fourth voyage dated from, <a href="#Page_211">211</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">Diego Mendez treats with the natives, <a href="#Page_223">223</a></li> + +<li class="indx">John, King of Portugal, grants an audience to Columbus, <a href="#Page_li">li</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">calls a council to consider his proposition, <a href="#Page_li">li</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">yields to the unworthy advice of his enemies, <a href="#Page_lii">lii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Josef and Roderigo, with the assistance of Behaim, render the astrolabe useful for seamen, <a href="#Page_li">li</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">condemn the proposed enterprise of Columbus, <a href="#Page_lii">lii</a></li> + +<li class="indx" id="Juana">Juana (Cuba) discovered, <a href="#Page_2">2</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">its size, <a href="#Page_10">10</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">contained two provinces, <a href="#Page_10">10</a></li> + +<li class="ifrst">Karlsefne (Thorfinn), distinguished early discoverer, <a href="#Page_xiii">xiii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">King’s Garden (The) discovered, <a href="#Page_lxiii">lxiii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Kircher (Athanasius), his conjectures concerning the colonisation of America, etc., <a href="#Page_vi">vi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Klaproth, his answer to the theory of De Guignes, <a href="#Page_vii">vii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Kohl, on the Venetian expedition, <a href="#Page_xxv">xxv</a></li> + +<li class="ifrst">Lajes (Tallarte de), an Englishman, one of the men left by Columbus in Española, <a href="#Page_12">12</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Lambinet on the date of the <i>Imago Mundi</i>, <a href="#Page_xlvi">xlvi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Landfall of Columbus discussed, <a href="#Page_lviii">lviii</a>, <a href="#Page_lxiii">lxiii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Las Casas, his evidence respecting Columbus and Perestrello, <a href="#Page_xliii">xliii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Launoy (Jean de), on the date of the <i>Imago Mundi</i>, <a href="#Page_xlvi">xlvi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Leibnitz acknowledges that he had erroneously inserted the name of “Christophorus” into the letters supposed to refer to Columbus, <a href="#Page_xxxvii">xxxvii-xxxviii</a></li> + +<li class="indx"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_251">[251]</span>Lescarbot (Marc) derives the Americans from the Canaanites, <a href="#Page_vi">vi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Lief, son of Eric the Red, discovers Newfoundland and Nova Scotia in the year 1000, <a href="#Page_xi">xi</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">also New England, <a href="#Page_xii">xii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Li-Yen, Chinese historian quoted by De Guignes, <a href="#Page_vii">vii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Lizards, an Indian luxury, <a href="#Page_43">43</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Lud (Walter), canon of St. Dié, his college and printing press, <a href="#Page_lxxxiv">lxxxiv</a></li> + +<li class="ifrst">Macao (Point), Española, <a href="#Page_41">41</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Mackenzie (Commander Alexander Slidell) on the route of Columbus, <a href="#Page_lxii">lxii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Malte Brun on the Arabian expedition, <a href="#Page_xx">xx</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Manchineal, fruit of, <a href="#Page_24">24</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Mandeville (Sir John), influence on Columbus, <a href="#Page_xlviii">xlviii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Mangi, name given to Southern China by Marco Polo, <a href="#Page_194">194</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Maps: by Nicolò Zeno, <a href="#Page_xxv">xxv</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">anonymous, <a href="#Page_xxvi">xxvi</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">by Andrea Bianco, <a href="#Page_xxvi">xxvi</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">the earliest MS. bearing the name of America, <a href="#Page_lxxxvii">lxxxvii</a></li> + +<li class="indx"><i>Mappa Mundi</i>, by Pierre d’Ailly, treats of Alfragan, <a href="#Page_xlvii">xlvii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Mappe-monde, by Appianus, bearing the name of America, <a href="#Page_lxxxvii">lxxxvii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Marchena (Fray Juan Perez de), his interest in Columbus, <a href="#Page_liv">liv</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Marco Polo, influence of his work on Columbus, <a href="#Page_xlviii">xlviii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Marcolini (Francesco), his account of the Venetian expedition, <a href="#Page_xxii">xxii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Margarita, Island, discovered, <a href="#Page_156">156</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Margarite, Messire Pedro, recommended to the notice of the King and Queen, <a href="#Page_92">92</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Margry (M.), his pretension founded on the fondness of Columbus for the works of Pierre d’Ailly, <a href="#Page_xlv">xlv</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">disproved, <a href="#Page_xlv">xlv</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Marigalante (Island of) discovered, <a href="#Page_22">22</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Marquez (Diego) and his party lost for four days, <a href="#Page_27">27</a>, <a href="#Page_28">28</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Marta (City of), Española, <a href="#Page_62">62</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Martin (Andreas), his respectful treatment of Columbus in his trouble, <a href="#Page_lxxii">lxxii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Martin (Fernam), his correspondence with Toscanelli, <a href="#Page_xlix">xlix</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Masks of gold made by the Indians, <a href="#Page_55">55</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Mastic found, <a href="#Page_15">15</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Matenino (Martinique), <a href="#Page_14">14</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Mayaguana, supposed by Varnhagen to be the landfall of Columbus, <a href="#Page_lx">lx</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Mayreni, a chief in Española, accused of burning the Spanish settlement, <a href="#Page_48">48</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Medici (Lorenzo di Pier Francesco de’), letter to him from Vespucci, <a href="#Page_lxxxiii">lxxxiii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Melchior and his party received by Guacamari, <a href="#Page_54">54</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Melilla, <a href="#Page_224">224</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Memorial of Columbus on the second voyage, <a href="#Page_72">72</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Mendez (Diego), extract from his will, <a href="#Page_iii">iii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his devotion to Columbus, <a href="#Page_lxxviii">lxxviii</a>, <a href="#Page_lxxix">lxxix</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his narrative, <a href="#Page_212">212</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">renders assistance to Columbus at Veragua, <a href="#Page_213">213</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his reception by the Indians, <a href="#Page_216">216</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">conflict with, <a href="#Page_219">219</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">made captain of the ship <i>Capitana</i>, <a href="#Page_222">222</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">goes to treat with the natives of Jamaica for food, <a href="#Page_223">223</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">goes to Española and purchases a ship for Columbus, <a href="#Page_233">233</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his interview with Columbus and promised reward, <a href="#Page_235">235</a>, <a href="#Page_236">236</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his disappointment, <a href="#Page_237">237</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">directions respecting his grave, <a href="#Page_239">239</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Mendoza, archbishop of Toledo, adopts the cause of Columbus, <a href="#Page_lv">lv</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Mogica (Adrian), one of the rebels in Española, <a href="#Page_157">157</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Mona, <a href="#Page_41">41</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Monte Cristi, harbour in Española, <a href="#Page_45">45</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Montserrat (Island of), discovered, <a href="#Page_34">34</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Mundus Novus of Johann Ottmar, <a href="#Page_lxxxii">lxxxii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Muñoz, his opinion that Columbus went to Genoa from Lisbon, <a href="#Page_liii">liii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his opinion on the landfall of Columbus, <a href="#Page_lviii">lviii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Mylius (Abraham) supposes America to have been peopled by the Celts, <a href="#Page_ix">ix</a></li> + +<li class="ifrst">Narrative by Diego Mendez, <a href="#Page_212">212</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Navarrete on the landfall of Columbus, <a href="#Page_lviii">lviii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Navidad, villa de, town and fortress in Española, <a href="#Page_12">12</a></li> + +<li class="indx">New England discovered, <a href="#Page_xii">xii</a></li> + +<li class="indx"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_252">[252]</span>Newfoundland discovered <span class="allsmcap">A.D.</span> 1000, <a href="#Page_xi">xi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Nightingales and other birds singing in November in Española, <a href="#Page_4">4</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Niti, gold mines of, <a href="#Page_69">69</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Norwegians supposed to have peopled America, <a href="#Page_ix">ix</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Nova Scotia discovered in the year 1000, <a href="#Page_xi">xi</a></li> + +<li class="ifrst">Odjein or Ougein, <a href="#Page_135">135</a></li> + +<li class="indx"><i>Opus Majus</i> of Roger Bacon supplied the portion of the <i>Imago Mundi</i> which is supposed to have given Columbus the idea of discovering America, <a href="#Page_xlvii">xlvii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Oronoco, confluence of the, with the sea, <a href="#Page_123">123</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Ortelius, <i>not</i> the first to recognize the discovery of America by the Northmen, <a href="#Page_viii">viii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Ottmar (Johann), his <i>Mundus Novus</i>, <a href="#Page_lxxxii">lxxxii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Otto (Mr.) of New York, his assertion respecting Martin Behaim and the Azores, <a href="#Page_xxx">xxx</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Ovando (Nicolas de), the governor of St. Domingo after Bobadilla, <a href="#Page_lxxiii">lxxiii</a></li> + +<li class="ifrst">Palm-trees, very fine in Española, <a href="#Page_4">4</a>, <a href="#Page_5">5</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Paracelsus, his statement of the peopling of the New World, <a href="#Page_vi">vi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Paradise, supposed situation of, <a href="#Page_141">141</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Paria, coast of, <a href="#Page_121">121</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Parrots found in deserted houses in Guadaloupe, <a href="#Page_25">25</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Pearls, Gulf of, <a href="#Page_139">139</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Pearls, bracelets of, worn by the Indians of Paria, <a href="#Page_125">125</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">Columbus leaves orders with the people in Española to fish for them, <a href="#Page_155">155</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Pelicans show that land was near, <a href="#Page_40">40</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Pelican (Point), <a href="#Page_125">125</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Peña Blanca (Point), <a href="#Page_123">123</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Pepper plant, known to the people of Ciguare, <a href="#Page_181">181</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Perestrello (Felipe Moñiz de), wife of Columbus, and daughter of Bartollomeu Perestrello, <a href="#Page_xlii">xlii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">—— (Bartollomeu), received the commandership of Porto Santo from Prince Henry, his widow gives up his papers, etc., to Columbus, <a href="#Page_xlii">xlii</a>, <a href="#Page_xliii">xliii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Perez (Alonzo), the first to see land in the third voyage, <a href="#Page_118">118</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Philesius, pseudonym of Ringmann, <a href="#Page_lxxxiv">lxxxiv</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Pilot of the ship <i>Capitana</i> first to see land on the second voyage, <a href="#Page_21">21</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Pinzon, his jealousy of Columbus, <a href="#Page_lxvi">lxvi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Plato speaks of an island called Atlantis, <a href="#Page_v">v</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Polar star, observations of Columbus on, <a href="#Page_133">133</a></li> + +<li class="indx"><i>Pomponius Mela</i>, edited by Vadianus, <a href="#Page_lxxxvi">lxxxvi</a>, <a href="#Page_lxxxvii">lxxxvii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Porto Rico, named by Columbus St. John the Baptist, discovered, <a href="#Page_39">39</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Portuguese expedition to America, <a href="#Page_xxvii">xxvii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Prince Henry originates the researches into the Atlantic which led to the discoveries of Columbus, <a href="#Page_i">i</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Puerto Bello discovered, <a href="#Page_lxxviii">lxxviii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Puerto Gordo, <a href="#Page_186">186</a></li> + +<li class="ifrst">Queen’s Gardens discovered, <a href="#Page_lxviii">lxviii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Quibian, the Cacique, attempts to deceive Columbus, <a href="#Page_188">188</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">taken prisoner, <a href="#Page_189">189</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">advice of Columbus respecting him, <a href="#Page_205">205</a></li> + +<li class="ifrst">Rabida (Convent of Santa Maria de), Columbus’s visit there, <a href="#Page_liv">liv</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Rafn (Professor), his work <i>Antiquitates Americanæ</i>, <a href="#Page_ix">ix</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">his collection of MSS. on the discoveries of the Northmen, and his inferences, <a href="#Page_ix">ix</a>, <a href="#Page_xviii">xviii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Reeds used as Indian weapons, <a href="#Page_6">6</a></li> + +<li class="indx">René II, Duke of Lorraine, patron of Walter Lud, <a href="#Page_lxxxiv">lxxxiv</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Reptiles eaten by the Indians, <a href="#Page_68">68</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Rhubarb and other drugs in Española, <a href="#Page_15">15</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Ringmann (Mathias), his admiration of Vespucci, <a href="#Page_lxxxiv">lxxxiv</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">suggests the name of America, <a href="#Page_lxxxv">lxxxv</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Roderigo and Josef, with the assistance of Behaim, render the astrolabe useful for seaman, <a href="#Page_li">li</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">condemn the proposed enterprise of Columbus, <a href="#Page_lii">lii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Roldan, the enemy of Columbus, perishes in a storm, <a href="#Page_lxxvi">lxxvi</a></li> + +<li class="ifrst">Sais, priests of, their story of the Island of Atlantis, <a href="#Page_v">v</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Sandy Point (Punta del Arenal), <a href="#Page_119">119</a></li> + +<li class="indx">S. Brandan, supposed island of, <a href="#Page_xxvi">xxvi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">St. Catherine discovered, <a href="#Page_lxiii">lxiii</a></li> + +<li class="indx"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_253">[253]</span>St. Domingo, <i>see</i> <a href="#Espanola">Española</a></li> + +<li class="indx">St. Martin (Island of) discovered, <a href="#Page_34">34</a></li> + +<li class="indx">St. Ursula and the eleven thousand virgins (Islands of) discovered, <a href="#Page_38">38</a></li> + +<li class="indx">San Miguel (Cape), <a href="#Page_232">232</a></li> + +<li class="indx">—— Salvador (Watling’s Island), name given by Columbus to Guanahani, <a href="#Page_2">2</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Santa Cruz (Island of) discovered, <a href="#Page_38">38</a></li> + +<li class="indx">—— Maria la Antigua (Island of) discovered, <a href="#Page_34">34</a></li> + +<li class="indx">—— Maria de Concepcion (Long Island) discovered, <a href="#Page_2">2</a></li> + +<li class="indx">—— Maria la Redonda (Island of) discovered, <a href="#Page_34">34</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Santander (Serna) on the earliest date of the first edition of the <i>Imago Mundi</i>, <a href="#Page_xlvi">xlvi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Scandinavians supposed to have peopled America, <a href="#Page_viii">viii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Sepulchre in Cariay, <a href="#Page_199">199</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Serpent’s mouth, <a href="#Page_123">123</a>, <a href="#Page_139">139</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Snakes in Española, <a href="#Page_42">42</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Soderini (Pietro), Vespucci’s schoolfellow, the letter intended for him, <a href="#Page_lxxxiv">lxxxiv</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Solon, remarkable story related to, <a href="#Page_v">v</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Soria (Juan de), the complaint of Columbus respecting his conduct, <a href="#Page_98">98</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Sousa, Faria y, silent respecting the Cortereals, <a href="#Page_xxviii">xxviii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">supposed discovery of Newfoundland, <a href="#Page_xxviii">xxviii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Spice in Española, <a href="#Page_5">5</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">trees, <a href="#Page_67">67</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Spinning and weaving among the Caribbees, <a href="#Page_29">29</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Sugar canes, <a href="#Page_81">81</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Sumner (Mr. George), his search in the archives of Aragon and Barcelona for records of Columbus, <a href="#Page_lxvi">lxvi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Szkolny (John), Polish pilot said to have discovered America in 1476, <a href="#Page_xxix">xxix</a></li> + +<li class="ifrst">Talavera, his opposition to the projects of Columbus, <a href="#Page_liv">liv</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Tartars supposed to have peopled America, <a href="#Page_vi">vi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Terra firma, note on the supposed discovery in the second voyage, <a href="#Page_110">110</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">discovered in the third voyage, <a href="#Page_121">121</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Theopompus, his story relating to the “New World”, <a href="#Page_iv">iv</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Thorwald, Lief’s brother explores the coast of America, <a href="#Page_xii">xii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Toinard (Nicolas), his correction of Leibnitz, <a href="#Page_xxxviii">xxxviii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Torfæus (Thormodus), Norwegian historian, relates the discovery of America by the Northmen, <a href="#Page_ix">ix</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Torres (Antonio de), Columbus begs the King and Queen to confirm his appointment as governor of the city of Isabella, <a href="#Page_92">92</a></li> + +<li class="indx">—— (Doña Juana de la), letter of Columbus to, <a href="#Page_lxxii">lxxii</a>, <a href="#Page_152">152</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Toscanelli (Paolo), his correspondence with Martins and afterwards with Columbus, <a href="#Page_xlv">xlv</a>, <a href="#Page_xlviii">xlviii</a>, <a href="#Page_xlix">xlix</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Trinidad, Island of, <a href="#Page_121">121</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">violent currents between it and Garcia, <a href="#Page_123">123</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">city of, <a href="#Page_222">222</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Tristan (Diego) killed by Indians, <a href="#Page_220">220</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Turk’s Island, supposed landfall of Columbus, <a href="#Page_lviii">lviii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Turner’s (Sharon) curious surmise respecting Columbus, <a href="#Page_liii">liii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Turuqueira and Ayay, probably the two islands which form Guadaloupe, <a href="#Page_31">31</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Tychsen’s opinion on the Arabian expedition, <a href="#Page_xx">xx</a></li> + +<li class="ifrst" id="Vadianus">Vadianus (Joachim) uses the name of America in 1512, <a href="#Page_lxxxvi">lxxxvi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Varnhagen (Señor de), his opinion on the landfall of Columbus, <a href="#Page_lx">lx</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">proved to be mistaken, <a href="#Page_lxii">lxii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">referred to on the subject of the earliest edition of the first letter, <a href="#Page_cxxv">cxxv</a>, <a href="#Page_cxxvii">cxxvii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Venetian expedition to America, <a href="#Page_xxii">xxii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Veragua, Columbus arrives there in his fourth voyage, <a href="#Page_187">187</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">gold mines, <a href="#Page_188">188</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">custom with regard to burial of the chiefs, <a href="#Page_203">203</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Vespucci (Amerigo), his letter addressed to Lorenzo di Pier Francesco de’ Medici, <a href="#Page_lxxxii">lxxxii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">the question of his voyage discussed, <a href="#Page_lxxxiii">lxxxiii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">the way in which his name was given to America, <a href="#Page_lxxxv">lxxxv</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Vicente (Martin), Portuguese pilot, confirms Columbus in his idea of land to the West, <a href="#Page_xliii">xliii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Villacorta recommended to the notice of the King and Queen, <a href="#Page_105">105</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Vineland, New England, <a href="#Page_xii">xii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Vitalis (Ordericus) speaks of the country visited by the Scandinavians, <a href="#Page_ix">ix</a></li> + +<li class="ifrst" id="Waldseemuller"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_254">[254]</span>Waldseemüller (Martin), his <i>Cosmographiæ Introductio</i>, <a href="#Page_lxxxiv">lxxxiv</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Washington Irving on the landfall of Columbus, <a href="#Page_lviii">lviii</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">disproved, <a href="#Page_lxii">lxii</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Watling’s Island proved to be the landfall of Columbus, <a href="#Page_lxi">lxi</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Watt (Joachim), <i>see</i> <a href="#Vadianus">Vadianus</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Welsh expedition to America, <a href="#Page_xx">xx</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Williams (Dr.) advocates the truth of the Welsh expedition, <a href="#Page_xxii">xxii</a></li> + +<li class="ifrst">Xamaná, a province of Española, <a href="#Page_41">41</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Xuragoa (Xaragua), <a href="#Page_232">232</a></li> + +<li class="ifrst">Yams in Española, <a href="#Page_63">63</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Yañez (Vincent), helps the disaffected in Española, <a href="#Page_156">156</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Yaque (River) in Española, <a href="#Page_45">45</a></li> + +<li class="ifrst">Zeno (Nicolò and Antonio), Venetian nobles, their expedition, <a href="#Page_xxii">xxii</a>, <a href="#Page_xxiv">xxiv</a>;</li> + <li class="isub1">map published by their descendant, <a href="#Page_xxv">xxv</a></li> + +<li class="indx">Zuruquia, ducks found there, <a href="#Page_43">43</a></li> + +</ul> + +<p class="titlepage">T. RICHARDS, 37, QUEEN STREET, W.C.</p> + +<figure class="figcenter illowp81" style="max-width: 18.75em;"> + <img class="w100" src="images/victoria.jpg" alt=""> +</figure> + +<div style='text-align:center'>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 77820 ***</div> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/77820-h/images/cover.jpg b/77820-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c8cdf7e --- /dev/null +++ b/77820-h/images/cover.jpg diff --git a/77820-h/images/frontispiece.jpg b/77820-h/images/frontispiece.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e08a171 --- /dev/null +++ b/77820-h/images/frontispiece.jpg diff --git a/77820-h/images/map1.jpg b/77820-h/images/map1.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..7172719 --- /dev/null +++ b/77820-h/images/map1.jpg diff --git a/77820-h/images/map2.jpg b/77820-h/images/map2.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a5c9e87 --- /dev/null +++ b/77820-h/images/map2.jpg diff --git a/77820-h/images/map3.jpg b/77820-h/images/map3.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..ce683da --- /dev/null +++ b/77820-h/images/map3.jpg diff --git a/77820-h/images/victoria.jpg b/77820-h/images/victoria.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f68495b --- /dev/null +++ b/77820-h/images/victoria.jpg diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6c72794 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This book, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c49eec8 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for eBook #77820 +(https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/77820) |
